THE 17204

F"
Tii£ Ui o'.ju.LsriY O F QUEENSLAND
Acc;^;:i;-J for the award of

ov..M..^':'^.%M?I
The Spiritual Teachings of Prabhat Raiijan Sarkar:
Descriptive philosophy and critical comparisons

by

Dr Chris KANG
PhD, BOccThy (Hons),
AccOT, MOTA

A dissertation presented

to

The Department of Studies in ReUgion

School of History, Philosophy, ReUgion, and Classics
in fulfilment of the requirements for the degree of
Doctor of Philosophy
in thefieldof Studies in Religion (Tantric Studies)

at

The University of Queensland

Brisbane
July 2003
 Declaration

I declare that the work presented in this thesis is, to

the best of my knowledge and belief, original, except
as acknowledged in the text, and that the material has
not previously been submitted, either in whole or in
part, for a degree at this or any other university

Chris KANG
July 2003
 Abstract

This study is a phenomenological-dialogical examination of the spiritual teachings of Sri

Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar, founder-preceptor of Ananda Marga (AM), as contained in English-language
publications of Sarkar's spiritual and philosophical discourses. The study also undertakes, in a
preliminary attempt to identify possible connections and innovations, a comparison of Sarkar's
spiritual theory and praxis with selected ancient, classical, and medieval expressions of Indian
spirituality.

The collection of Sarkar's discourses falls into three main categories: (1) philosophical treatise
{darsana sastra), (2) spiritual treatise {dharma sdstra), and (3) social treatise {samdja sdstra). The
focus of this study is on the philosophical and spiritual treatises, and its aim is to elucidate items of
doctrine and praxis embedded in these texts with a view to correlating possible conceptual similarities
or identities. A dialogical hermeneutic forms the background to this study and informs the tasks of
phenomenological analysis and critical comparisons.

After presenting in Chapter 1, the overall picture of the structure and rationale of the study,
and a brief biographical description of Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar, the thesis goes on to discuss the
methodological issues of a study such as this. After setting the context and method of this study, the
thesis examines, in succeeding chapters, the following major doctrinal topics: Sarkar's ontology and
cosmology, his theory of mind and biopsychology, practice frameworks, and soteriology in terms of
spiritual disciplines and change dynamics. Chapters 7 and 8 critically compare, in a sequential
manner, Sarkar's spiritual ideology with several major Indian spiritual traditions: the Vedic and
Upanisadic legacy, the classical Hindu darsanas of Sainkhya, Yoga, and Vedanta, Pali Buddhism,
medieval Hindu Tantra (namely Saktism, Saivism, and Vaisnavism), and Bengali religion.

This phenomenological and comparative study of Sarkar's texts reveals Sarkar's AM ideology
as a deep and comprehensive system of philosophy-praxis containing elements from a wide variety of
sources rooted in the Indian tradition. The study also reveals major areas of agreement as well as
disagreement between Sarkar's AM and traditional discourses of Indian spirituality. More
importantly, it supports the assertion that Sarkar, while overtly non-aligned with any specific or
recognised disciplic lineage (sampradaya) of Hindu or Buddhist origin, is nevertheless an authentic
interpreter, teacher, and guru of Indian Tantra for the contemporary audience.

HI
 Acknowledgements

I would like to express my deep appreciation for the few people who have contributed to my doctoral
effort over the last four years. Firstly, I deeply thank Associate Professor Rod Bucknell for his
supervision and invaluable comments, which helped shape the thesis into its final form; and for the
wonderful opportunity to tutor and lecture in an undergraduate course on Eastern Meditation at the
School of History, Philosophy, Religion, and Classics, The University of Queensland. I am
immensely grateful to my wife, Elaine, for her unstinting support, encouragement and confidence in
me, especially at times when the journey was rough and my spirits low. I can never thank her enough.
To my caring spiritual instructor, Dada Kamaleshvarananda Avadhiita, I am profoundly grateful. His
sterling example as a Tantric practitioner, and his practical support in more ways than one, has
contributed tremendously to my research effort. My vipassand teacher and kalydnamitta, Godwin
Samararatne, taught me much about choiceless awareness and surrendering to what is, and I thank him
with heartfelt love and respect. I must acknowledge the late Ajahn Chah and the late Mahasi Sayadaw
- their pure and direct vipassand teachings helped clear away many weeds on the path to liberation. I
am indebted to Zen master Thich Nhat Hanh for the spirit of mindfulness and 'interbeing' embedded
in his teachings, a spirit that gently reminds me to dwell in the present moment, at once precious and
miraculous. I thank His Holiness the 14* Dalai Lama, for his great warmth, humour, scholarship, and
deep wisdom, whose inspiring presence gave a much-needed boost to my fiagging enthusiasm after
three arduous years of doctoral studies. I must also record my gratitude to Geshe Tashi Tsering,
whose compassionate teachings on and exemplification of the bodhisattva way, inspire me to
constantly generate a mind of altruistic intent. I am gratefiil for the inspiration and wisdom of Lama
Yeshe and Lama Zopa Rinpoche: their clear and kind guidance on the path is invaluable. I thank
Chogyal Namkhai Norbu, whose teachings on and transmissions of Dzogchen continually prompt me
into mirror-like presence, a quality much needed in a tedious doctoral career. To Tulku Urgyen
Rinpoche, whose instructions and blessings helped me recognise the unconfined empty cognisance of
rigpa, I humbly thank with my body, speech and mind. To Sohail Inayatullah and Shaman Hatley, I
offer my thanks for their useful comments and foundational work in Sarkarian studies. I am grateful
to The University of Queensland for the grant of a Postgraduate Research Scholarship, which kept me
alive as I plodded through dusty texts and laboured on my PC in the pursuit of academic excellence.
Penultimately, I thank my parents for being so patient with a son hopelessly immersed in the pursuit of
intellectual and spiritual wisdom. Finally, I am indebted beyond words to the vision, energy,
sweetness, and presence of §n Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar, my Baba, without whom this thesis would
never have materialised.

Chris KANG
January 2003
 Abbreviations

AM Ananda Mdrga
AMEP Ananda Mdrga Elementary Philosophy
AMI Ananda Mdrga Ideology arui Way of Life in a Nutshell
AMP Ananda Mdrga Philosophy in a Nutshell
AMSSP Ananda Mdrga Social and Spiritual Practices
AS Ananda SUtram
AU Aitareya Upanisad
AV Ananda Vacandmrtam
BG Baba's Grace
BU Brhaddranyaka Upanisad
CC Carydcarya
CU Chdndogya Upanisad
DKG Discourses on Krsna and the Gitd
DN Digha Nikdya
DOT Discourses on Tantra
GHC A Guide to Human Conduct
lU Isd Upanisad
KaU Katha Upanisad
KeU Kena Upanisad
KsU Kausitaki Upanisad
lAI Idea and Ideology
LC Light Comes
MaU Mdndukya Upanisad
MN Majjhima Nikdya
MuU Mundaka Upanisad
MvN Microvita in a Nutshell
NKS Namdmi Krma Sundaram
NRM New Religious Movement
NSS Namah §ivdya ^dntdya
SK Sdmkhya Karika
SPSSA The Spiritual Philosophy of §ri &r'i Anandamurti: A Commentary on Ananda Sutram
SS Subhdsita Samgraha
SU ^vetdsvatara Upanisad
TM Transcendental Meditation
TPRS The Thoughts of P. R. Sarkar

vi
TU Taittifiya Upanisad

TV Tattva Vaisdradi

VsM Visuddhi Magga

YP Yoga Psychology

YS Yoga Sutras ofPatanjali

vu
 Table of Contents

Declaration 11

Abstract iii
Acknowledgements V

Abbreviations vi
Table of Contents ix
Introduction Xiii

Chapter 1. Investigating Sarkar

1.1 Structure and Rationale of Thesis 3
1.2 Literature Review 6
L3 Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar: His Life and Times 8
1.4 Sarkar as a Spiritual Master 11

Chapter 2. Methodology 19
2.1 Introduction 19
2.2 Textual Sources and Scope 20
2.3 Historical Considerations 24
2.4 Gadamer's Dialogical Hermeneutics 26
2.5 Husseri's Phenomenology and Textual Exegesis 33

Chapter 3. Sarkar's Universe and Beyond 36

3.1 Introduction 36
3.2 Ontology and Theology 36
3.2.1 §iva and §akti 37
3.2.2 Tri-aspect Brahma 43
3.2.3 Krsna and Purusottama 47
Ti.lA Atman and Paramdtman: Nature of the Self 51
3.3 Cosmogony 54
3.3.1 Before the Beginning 55
3.3.2 Sancara: The Extroversial Process 57
3.3.3 Pratisancara: The Introversial Process 63
3.3.4 The Microvita Connection 66

IX
 3.4 Cosmology n
3.4.1 Theory of Acoustic Roots 72

3.4.2 Sarkar's Worids 75

3.4.3 Life, Death, and Rebuth 78

3.4.4 Theory of Samskdra 80

3.5 Summarising Conclusion 83

Chapter 4. Mind and Biospychology 87

4.1 Introduction 87

4.2 Yoga Psychology 88

4.2.1 Theory of Mind 89
4.2.2 Microcosm, Macrocosm and Consciousness 100
4.2.3 Theory of Knowledge 103
4.2.4 Theory of Vrtti 108
4.3 Yoga Biopsychology 111
4.3.1 Nddis and Cakras 112
4.3.2 Theory of Sukra and Glands 121
4.3.3 Prdndh, Prdnendriya and Kundalini 125
4.4 Summarising Conclusion 129

Chapter 5. Ananda Marga: Sarkar's Frameworks for Practice 131

5.1 Introduction 131
5.2 Soteriological Goals 132
5.3 The Fundamentals 145
5.4 Context of Praxis: Five Systems of Tantra 154
5.5 Sarkar's Appropriation of Patanjali's Asfariga Yoga 164
5.6 The Sixteen Points 178
5.7 Overview of Ananda Marga Practice Frameworks 189

Chapter 6. Ananda Marga: Practice and Transformation 193

6.1 Spiritual Disciplines 193
6.1.1 Jndna Yoga 196
6.1.2 Karma Yoga 205
6.1.3 Bhakti Yoga 207
6.1.4 Kirtana 212
6.1.5 Sahaja Yoga: Six Lessons of Meditation 215
6.1.6 Kdpdlika and Visesa Yoga: Advanced Practices 232
 6.2 Neo-Humanism as Praxis 236
6.3 Dynamics and Mechanisms of Spiritual Evolution 239
6.3.1 Dialectics of Change 239
6.3.2 Biopsychological Changes 243
6.3.3 Mind Transformation: Process and Stages 245
6.3.4 Microvita and Krpa 268
6.4 Overview of Ananda Marga Praxis 271

Chapter 7. The Indian Philosophical Legacy 277

7.1 The Indian Spiritual Panorama 277
7.2 Vedic Sources: The Samhitas and the Upanisads 279
7.3 Classical Hindu Philosophies 296
7.3.1 Sanrikhya and Sarkarian Metaphysics 297
7.3.2 Yoga and Sarkarian Soteriology 304
7.3.3 Vedanta and Sarkarian Ontology 316
7.4 Buddhist Comparisons 327

Chapter 8 The Tantric Legacy 343

8.1 Medieval Hindu Systems 343
8.1.1 Saktism and Sarkarian Tantra 344
8.1.2 Saivism and Sarkarian Tantra 349
8.1.3 Vaisnavism and Sarkarian Bhakti 365
8.2 The Bengali Connection 372
8.2.1 Bengali Vaisnavism 373
8.2.2 Bengali Tantrism 377

Chapter 9 P. R. Sarkar: A Tantric Guru 383

Appendix 1.
List of standard versus Ananda Marga transcriptions of classical Sanskrit 389

Appendix 2.
Meaning of acoustic roots in Ananda Marga 39O

Appendix 3.
Photograph of §rT Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar 394

XI
Appendix 4.
Diagram of Ananda Marga Prafika 395

Bibliography 39^

Xll
 Introduction

The twentieth century saw a number of spiritual teachers from India rise to prominence and
capture the imagination and allegiance of many followers from both the East and the West. One such
figure was Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar, also known as §n Sn Anandamurti, who founded the worldwide
socio-spiritual movement of Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha (Ananda Marga, AM) in 1955. Before
long, Sarkar had attracted a large following of disciples throughout India and later around the world,
and by the time of his death in 1990, AM had spread to more than 160 countries. Currently adherents
are estimated to number several million, though actual committed membership is likely to be much
smaller.'
There is a paucity of academic research into AM, which means that many questions of
academic and common interest remain unanswered, such as questions about the style and character of
Sarkar as a spiritual leader and the nature of AM as a New Religious Movement (NRM). In
particular, there is at present no intellectually rigorous study on Sarkar's spiritual teachings and their
implications for spiritual practice. This thesis is intended to be such a study. In it, I aim, through an
examination of AM primary sources and relevant secondary and tertiary material, to identify (1) the
nature and content of Sarkar's spiritual philosophy; (2) the spiritual practices that he taught; and (3)
the way he has re-invented the Indian spiritual tradition of Tantra to suit the contemporary mind.^
From this examination, I aim to argue the thesis that Sarkar was indeed an authentic, contemporary
Tantric guru in spite of his non-allegiance, as far as can be ascertained by AM sources, to any
specific disciplic lineage (sarnpraddya) of Tantra.
I investigate Sarkar's texts through the lens of phenomenological exegesis and critical
comparison, informed by and contextualised within the dialogical hermeneutic of Hans-Georg
Gadamer (see Chapter 2).^ This I do by identifying essential and distinct concepts, categorising and
cross-comparing them, and attempting to correlate distinct items of doctrine and practice on the basis
of their apparent similarities. I also compare Sarkar's concepts with those of earlier Indian traditions
in an attempt to trace possible links and subsequent innovations.
The findings from this investigative process are presented in nine main chapters. Following a
brief review of the life, times, and personality of Sarkar as portrayed by his followers and critics
(Chapter 1), I provide a detailed discussion on my methodology, focussing in particular on the nature
and process of textual understanding (Chapter 2). Then follows the main body of the thesis, with
sequential treatment of Sarkar's theories of cosmology (Chapter 3), psychology and biopsychology
(Chapter 4), soteriology (Chapter 5) and spiritual praxis (Chapter 6). A broad comparison of

' Angela An, "Ananda Marga Yoga Society', See 257, New Religious Movements, University of Virginia, Spring
Term 2000. http://religiousmovements.lib.virginia.edu/ (26 Jan. 2002).
^ Sarkar makes the claim that AM is a harmonious synthesis of Saiva, Sakta, and Vaigijava Tantra in DOT Vol.
2, ed. by Vijayananda and Acyutananda (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1994), pp. 5 and 19.
^ Hans-Georg Gadamer, Truth and Method (London: Sheed and Ward, 1979).
xiii
Sarkar's ideas and practices with early Indian thought and classical-medieval Indian systems -
Samkhya, Yoga, Vedanta, Buddhism, Saivism, Saktism, Vaisnavism, and Bengali religion - is then
attempted in order to trace possible links and identify cases of conceptual synthesis or innovation on
Sarkar's part (Chapters 7 and 8). A synthesis of essential findings (Chapter 9) concludes the thesis.
This preliminary in-depth exploration of Sarkar's AM and critical comparison with traditional
Indian systems will reveal that Sarkar's AM is essentially constructive, synthetic and innovative,
drawing upon elements that aheady existed in the common Indian spiritual heritage. Nevertheless, it
is found that Sarkar's originality and creative vision is stamped onto the old concepts and practices,
imbuing them with fresh vitality and a degree of rationality that is arguably more palatable to the
contemporary mind. Sarkar's synthetic appropriation of existing ideas, such as purusa, purusottama,
moksa (in his teleological cosmology of brahmacakra), and his philosophical abstraction of
anthropomorphic concepts, such as Krsna and Siva, stand out as salient examples of his
innovativeness and vision. An innovative and synthetic thinker, Sarkar can be justifiably regarded as
a contemporary exponent and guru of Indian Tantra.
I suggest that such conceptual and practical reconstruction of traditional discourse, narratives,
and practices, as demonstrated by Sarkar, may offer contemporary minds fresh understandings of
human life and its ultimate purpose, in a way that is simultaneously rational, mythic, holistic,
experiential, socially engaged and emancipatory. Such a new discourse may ultimately prove more
satisfying to present-day consciousness than dogmatic alternatives of the past.

xiv
 Chapter 1
Investigating Sarkar

In 1955, an obscure socio-spiritual organisation dedicated to the twin aims of individual

spiritual realisation and social service, Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha (Ananda Marga, AM),
literally translated as 'Community for the Propagation of the Path of Bliss', was formed in the state of
Bihar, India. AM stands alongside other Hindu-based New Religious Movements (NRMs)' which
have captured the imagination and allegiance of substantial numbers of followers both in Asia and in
the West. NRMs such as the various institutions established by Maharishi Mahesh Yogi to
disseminate Transcendental Meditation (TM) and Sn Prabhupada's International Society for Krsna
Consciousness (ISKCON) are examples of organisations in the same genre. The founder of AM was a
charismatic spiritualist and visionary, Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar. Sarkar died in 1990, but AM continues
to thrive, with a current estimated membership of several million worldwide.^ Ward and Humphreys
report that in the 1991 census, there were about 435 people in Australia who called themselves
followers of Ananda Marga,^ though it is uncertain how this figure has changed in the 2001 census."

Through the 1960's and on into the 1980's, AM faced severe opposition from numerous
Hindu groups, the Communist Party of India, and the Government of India. The controversial saga
surrounding the Hilton bombing incident during the Commonwealth Heads of Government Meeting in
Sydney in 1978 placed AM in the centre of Australian media attention. While many of the charges
against AM have since been overturned by the Supreme Court of India, and even though AM members

' For a review discussion on NRMs, see David G. Bromley, 'New Religious Movements', in William H. Swatos
(ed.). Encyclopaedia of Religion and Society (California: Alta Mira Press, 1998), pp. 328-332. Bromley writes:
'Although some NRMs indeed are of recent origin, many others constitute contemporary rediscoveries or
recombinations of cultural themes explored by predecessor groups. ... The admixture of contemporary forms of
technological innovation, therapy and medicine, economic enterprise, and global organization has given some
NRMs a decidedly anomalous profile. ... Finally, a great number of NRMs are cultural transplants, most often of
Asian origin, new in the sense only that they are new to the West' (p. 328).
^ An, 2000. The actual number of committed members may be several thousand, though a far larger number (up
to several million) may have been initiated into AM and remain sympathetic to it. Bromley describes various
ways of classifying NRMs offered by scholars, for example: (1) monistic versus dualistic; (2) integrative versus
transformative; (3) devotee versus discipleship versus apprenticeship; or (4) world-affirming versus world-
rejecting. AM can be provisionally classified as a monistic, transformative (but with an integrative element),
devotee-discipleship, and a world-affirming (albeit with revolutionary designs) type of NRM (see Bromley,
p. 329).
See R. Ward and R. Humphreys, Religious Bodies in Australia: A Comparative Guide. 3"" edition (Melbourne:
New Melbourne Press, 1995), p. 397. The authors report that at the time of writing, there were '300 active
members and an estimated several thousand Australians who have received meditation instructions through
Ananda Marga' (p. 397).
* Online search of the Australian Bureau of Statistics data on religious affiliation in Australia based on the 2001
census reveals that there were 95,473 persons classified under the umbrella of 'Hinduism' Data breakdown for
separate Hindu-based groups such as Ananda Marga, Hare Krishnas etc. was not available. See Australian
Bureau of Statistics, 'Religious Affiliation by Sex - Persons (CC37)', 2007 Census of Population and Housing.
http://www.abs.gov.aii/austats/cen.susl.nsf/lop?opena^ent&Aust Religious+Affiliation.zip&0&200I+Ce (3 Oct.
2002).
1
supposedly responsible for the Sydney Hilton bombing have since been found innocent,^ AM remains
controversial in the public's eye.
Many questions of academic interest remain unanswered. What was the philosophy that
inspired so many people in India and elsewhere to join AM in the organisation's earlier days? What
were the spiritual practices that Sarkar taught - practices he considered central to the growth of the
self and society? What sort of personality, ideals, and vision did Sarkar possess which endeared him
to the many that came to him? What was the nature of his relationship to his disciples and to the
organisation as a whole? What sort of leader was he? What was his intention in promulgating a
socio-political philosophy (PROUT), which he deemed integral to his overall spiritual project? What
was his theory of history and his forecast for the future of human civilisation? These and many more
questions could be asked, and preliminary efforts to answer some of them have already begun. The
present thesis aims to contribute to the hitherto meagre pool of knowledge regarding AM and its
controversial founder, Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar.
Through an examination of primary sources and relevant secondary material,^ I seek to answer
three major questions:
1. What is the nature and content of the spiritual philosophy that Sarkar propounded?
2. What are the spiritual practices Sarkar initiated his followers into, and how do the theory and
practice of AM spirituality relate to each other?
3. How has Sarkar re-invented the Indian spiritual tradition of Tantra, a claim that he obliquely
makes?
To address these questions, I will analyse and systematically elucidate Sarkar's life, spiritual
teachings, vision and goals, and the symbols, myths, and meditative techniques he created or
innovated. I will then identify, through critical comparison with selected primary, secondary and
tertiary sources of the Hindu and Buddhist traditions, various concepts, themes and ideas that can be
found in both AM and traditional Indian sources. I will examine how Sarkar may have drawn on
several important strands of Hindu and Buddhist spirituality (especially that of Tantra), in the
doctrinal, ethical, ritual, and experiential dimensions, to formulate his unique spiritual worldview and
praxis.

^ See Manavendrananda, Ananda Mdrga: A Brief Summary of History, Philosophy and Activities (Sydney:
Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sanigha, 1992), pp. 20-21. An informative autobiographical account of events
surrounding the Sydney Hilton bombing by one of the accused AM members can be found in Paul Narada
Alister, Bombs, Bliss and Baba: The Spiritual Autobiography Behind the Hilton Bombing Frame-up (Maleny
Better World Books, 1997).
' For some preliminary studies into the social, political and macrohistorical dimensions of Sarkar's thought, see
Sohail Inayatullah, Understanding P.R. Sarkar (Unpublished PhD Dissertation, University of Hawaii, 1990);
Sohail Inayatullah, Situating Sarkar: Tantra, Macrohistory and Alternative Futures (Queensland: Gurukula '
Press, 1999), pp. 1-26; and Marcus Bussey, 'Tanti-a as Episteme: A Pedagogy of the Future', Futures, vol 30 no
7 (1998), pp. 705-716.
^ AM's transliteration of Sanskrit, as found in all its texts, is different from the standard transliteration. See
Appendix A for a table of correspondences between the two versions. In this thesis, all Sanskrit terms and
names quoted from AM sources are converted into the standard system except in the bibliography.
2
1.1 structure and Rationale of Thesis
This report on my study is divided into nine chapters. The present Chapter 1 introduces the rationale,
research questions, and literature review, together with a discussion on the personality, activities, and
teaching methods of Sarkar. It also provides a concise overview of all the chapters, followed by a few
words on the rationale for their sequential arrangement.
Regarding the rationale for conducting this study, as previously mentioned, the phenomenon
of Sarkar and his AM movement has received very littie academic attention. As a way of life, spiritual
practice and platform for social activism, AM currently has a large following of several million people
around the globe in more than 160 countries. It also operates over 2000 schools, orphanages, disaster
relief, and medical and community development projects around the world. AM's disaster relief and
community development wing, the Ananda Marga Universal Relief Team (AMURT), has also been
awarded observer status in the United Nations and is recognised as an affiliated non-governmental
organisation (NGO).^ With its global reach and relatively large following, AM deserves to be more
closely studied and understood, as does its founder and preceptor. While preliminary studies on
Sarkar's social vision, theories, and movements have recentiy emerged, there is as yet no known study
on Sarkar's spiritual teachings from an academically rigorous perspective. Through this thesis, I aim
to fill this gap in academic knowledge and seek to understand Sarkar more deeply by means of a
methodology that combines phenomenological intimacy and critical distance. Finally, I hope to
highlight, through this thesis, the intellectual and spiritual legacy left by Sarkar and to suggest its
potential for personal meaning and creative global renewal in this present era of insecurity, unease,
and spiritual emptiness.
It is crucial to note here my definition of the umbrella term 'Tantra'. In this thesis, the term
'Tantra' is used to refer to the Pan-Indian spiritual and religious movement that rose to prominence
towards the middle of the first millennium of the Common Era. Specifically, and in a more limited
sense, it refers to the §aiva and §akta traditions that have been influential on the Indian sub-continent
for centuries. Note that the term 'Tantra' as used here excludes its Buddhist variants such as the
Kalacakrayana ('Wheel of Time Vehicle') and Vajrayana ('Diamond Vehicle').
Chapter 2 is a discussion of the methodology I employ in this thesis. I begin with a brief
outline of the corpus of texts that delineates the scope of my investigation. I also explain the influence
of Gadamer's dialogical hermeneutic, coupled with the use of Connolly's phenomenological exegesis,
in the investigation of Sarkar's texts and the texts of various Indian philosophical schools. The
dialogical hermeneutic provides the underlying context for interpreting Sarkar's discourses based on
the essential concept of 'fusion of horizons' of reader and texts. Exactly what this 'fusion' entails is
discussed more fully in Chapter 2. While the dialogical hermeneutic permeates the entire process of
textual reading, phenomenological reduction supplies the specific tools for analysing and expounding
the texts themselves. How Hiisserl's phenomenology is adapted and employed in the service of

* Manavendrananda, p. 5.
phenomenological exegesis within the interpretive space of Gadamerian dialogue is also discussed in
Chapter 2.
Chapters 3 to 6 comprise the main body of the thesis, elucidating and critically examining the
spiritual philosophy and praxis of Sarkar, which he calls Ananda Marga or the 'Path of Bliss'. In these
chapters, a progression of topics, from cosmology and ontology, through psychology and contexts for
spiritual practice, and finally to spiritual practice and transformation, are systematically discussed.
These topics are identified through applying a phenomenological 'typing' process on the diverse
articulations and concepts of Sarkar as presented in his texts. The types so identified are used as
categorical headings for the separate chapters, under which all statements of a relevant 'type' are
collected and expounded. In this typing process, the horizons of both the reader and the texts
themselves contribute to the production of meanings and categorical types.
In Chapter 3, 'Sarkar's Universe and Beyond', I elucidate Sarkar's teachings on: (1) the
nature of the universe, the divine, and existence (ontology and theology); (2) the creation process and
final goal of the universe (cosmogony and teleology); and (3) the structure and workings of the
universe (cosmology). This chapter offers us a glimpse into Sarkar's worldview, one that is
essentially identical to the traditional Tantric and Yogic conceptions of the universe, differing only in
the usage and meanings of common terminology and some technical details relating to cosmogony and
teleology.
Chapter 4 is focussed around the theme of 'Psychology and Biopsychology' and brings
together the essence of Sarkar's ideas on: (1) the mind and its structure; (2) the types of knowledge
possible to the mind; (3) the workings of mental and emotional tendencies; and (4) the intimate
relationship between mind, cakras ('psychic centres'), glands, prdndh ('vital energy'), and kundalini
('dormant psychospiritual force') - a theory that Sarkar terms 'biopsychology'. Again, Sarkar's
teachings on the topic of mind and biopsychology echo many traditional Tantric and Yogic concepts,
but with modification of traditional terms and their meanings, and introduction of new terminology
drawn from modem science. There appears to be an attempt on Sarkar's part to blend traditional and
modem concepts in his articulation of biopsychology. It can be suggested that such an attempt
represents part of a larger project to re-invent Tantra in a manner that is appealing to contemporary
consciousness.
Chapter 5 moves into a deeper discussion on Sarkar's praxis under the topical heading of
'Ananda Marga: Sarkar's Frameworks for Practice'. The theories and principles underlying the
overall context for spiritual practice are elucidated in this chapter. I discuss the ultimate goals,
fundamental requirements, and guiding frameworks for spiritual practice as advocated by Sarkar. An
analysis of Sarkar's context for praxis reveals a reliance on traditional concepts of Indian soteriology,
and in particular concepts of Yogic and Tantric praxis. Re-interpretations of some of these practices
in line with Sarkar's overall woridview render them simpler and less ritualistic than their traditional
forms. A degree of irmovation can be seen in Sarkar's encapsulation of the essentials of spiritual
practice within the framework of his 'Sixteen Points'.
Chapter 6 continues with the investigation into Sarkar's praxis commenced in Chapter 5. The
topical heading 'Ananda Marga: Spiritual Practice and Transformation' gathers within this chapter all
essential details regarding the nature and processes of Sarkar's spiritual practice. Themes covered are:
(1) spiritual disciplines (of various forms); (2) neo-humanism as praxis (neo-humanism is a term
coined by Sarkar to refer to a philosophy of universal benevolence for and indivisibihty with all living
and non-living things); and (3) mechanisms of spiritual change. In this chapter, we see that while
some aspects of Sarkar's praxis are terminologically and substantially not very different from classical
Yogic, Tantric, and Vaisnava devotional practices, others are new and innovative, perhaps unique to
Sarkar alone. For example, Sarkar's systematisation of the six meditative lessons of sahaja yoga and
his concept of microvita redefine the boundaries of yogic spiritual practice.
Chapters 7 and 8 move away from discussion on Sarkar's texts to comparison of his ideas with
the traditional spiritualities and philosophies of India, in particular the Hindu and Buddhist traditions.
More specifically, possible connections and disconnections are sought with concepts, ideas, and
practices of: (1) the Vedas and Upanisads; (2) classical Samkhya, Yoga, and Vedanta; (3) early
Buddhism; (4) medieval Saktism, Saivism, and Vaisnavism; and (5) Bengali religion. From the
critical comparisons made in these chapters, it can be surmised that what is unique and different about
Sarkar lies not in the actual content of his teachings but in the way he has packaged and integrated the
spiritual and the social into a fresh cosmology aimed at eliciting a profound civilisational
transformation. It can be argued that Sarkar's understanding of spiritual theory and praxis is merely a
reworking and synthesis of older and more established ideas - some well known and others less so. In
the case of biopsychology, Sarkar may have deliberately blended some of these ideas with basic
scientific concepts in an attempt to modernise traditional Tantra.
Thus, a preliminary in-depth exploration of Sarkar's Ananda Marga coupled with critical
comparisons with traditional Indian thought reveals that: (1) the nature and content of Sarkar's
spiritual philosophy is essentially a blend of Saiva and Sarnkhya elements, covered with an overlay of
Vedanta and Buddhism; (2) the spiritual practices taught by Sarkar to his disciples are essentially a
synthesis of Yogic, Sakta, and Bengali Vaisnava elements; (3) Sarkar's spiritual philosophy and praxis
are both informed by an innovative and idiosyncratic theory of microvita, a concept with no precedent
in Indian philosophy; and (4) Sarkar's Ananda Marga is a modem re-invention of the existing tradition
of Tantra through a process of sanitisation of Tantra (incorporating both Sakta and Saiva elements)
and blending with elements of Samkhya, Yoga, Vedanta, Buddhism, and Bengali Vaisnavism. This is
essentially the conclusion I arrive at in Chapter 9.
A few words on the sequence of the thesis chapters are warranted. Following the introductory
and methodology chapters (Chapters 1 and 2), Chapter 3 discusses on a macro-scale, the cosmological
and ontological context of Sarkar's ideology. This is an appropriate and logical starting point for an
examination of the entire structure of Sarkar's thought, reflecting roughly the layout followed in two
of his three major philosophical texts: Ananda Sutram (ASf and Idea arui Ideology (lAI). These
texts begin by discussing cosmology and ontology before attending to other topics. Chapter 4 follows
on with a discussion, on a micro-scale, of the psychological and personal aspects of Sarkar's thought.
The importance of this micro-view of the human mind and body is supported by the structure of
Sarkar's next major philosophical text: Ananda Mdrga Elementary Philosophy (AMEP). This text
begins by analysing the structure of the mind so as to infer from the analysis the nature of cosmic
consciousness. It also devotes a chapter to an analysis of the nature of the self and its relationship to
cosmic consciousness. From the preceding discussion, it can be surmised that a progression from
macro-scale discussion on the universe to a micro-scale discussion on the mind is a logical sequence
of investigation, one that follows closely Sarkar's own order of presentation of his major ideas.

Chapters 5 and 6 explore the praxis aspect of Sarkar's ideology and its relationship to the
philosophical aspect articulated mainly in Chapters 3 and 4. However, Chapter 6 also contains some
new philosophical material such as neo-humanism, on the grounds that this is a practical philosophy
that fits far better under praxis than pure philosophy. Chapter 5 explores the general framework for
spiritual practice while Chapter 6 probes deeper into the details of practice.
Chapters 7 and 8 critically compare Sarkar's philosophy and praxis as discussed in preceding
chapters with comparable notions found in various Indian spiritual-philosophical traditions. This
discussion is placed near the end of the thesis so that Sarkar's philosophy and praxis will be allowed to
adequately speak for themselves prior to being subjected to the comparative process. Since the
comparison attempted here is preliminary, broad, and general in nature, the relevant comparable
traditions are dealt with in just two chapters. Chapter 9 wraps up the thesis argument with some
suggestions for future research.

1.2 Literature Review

An exhaustive literature survey has revealed a paucity of research into AM in general, and no existing
study on the spiritual philosophy and practice of its founder. Published research has hitherto been in
the areas of (a) empirically observed effects of AM meditation;'^ (b) personality traits in AM
members;'^ (c) the experience of becoming members of AM;'* (d) Sarkar's social, political, and

' Anandamurti, Ananda SUtram (Second Edition),ti-ans.by Manohar Gupta and ed. by Vijayananda, Ananda
Rucira, Acyutananda, and Jayanta Kumar (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1996).
'" Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar, Idea and Ideology (Seventh Edition), ed. by Vijayananda, Acyutananda, and Jayanta
Kumar (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1993).
" Anandamurti, Ananda Mdrga Elementary Philosophy (Second Edition), trans, by Vijayananda (Calcutta:
Ananda Marga Publications, 1992).
'^ For two interesting psychophysiological studies on AM meditators, see Barry D. Elson, Peter Hauri, and
David Cunis,'Physiological Changes in Yoga Meditation', Psychophysiology, vol. 14 , no. 1 (1977), pp. 52-57;
and James C. Corby, Walton T. Roth, et al.,'Psychophysiological Correlates of the Practice of Tantric Yoga
Meditation', Archives of General Psychiatry, vol. 35, May (1978), pp. 571-577.
'^ Trula O'Haire and James E. Marcia,'Some Personality Characteristics Associated with Ananda Marga
Meditators: A Pilot Study', Perceptual and Motor Skills, vol. 51 (1980), pp. 447-452; and Wolfgang Kuner,
'New Religious Movements and Mental Health', in Of Gods and Men: New Religious Movements in the West,
6
historical theories and his nascent social movements;'^ (e) the application of Sarkar's Tantric episteme
in the fields of macrohistory,'^ future studies,'^ and disability studies;'^ and (f) the history and
characteristics of AM as a socio-spiritual organisation.'^
Inayatullah (1990, 1999),^° Sil (1988),^' Bussey (1998),^^ and Courtis (1991)^^ are the only
studies that touch on the spiritual philosophy of Sarkar, and they do so only briefly and comparatively.
Inayatullah seeks to contextualise Sarkar in traditional and medieval Indian, and contemporary cross-
cultural academic discourse, with a predominant focus on his social philosophy, theory of history, and
social movements. The poststructural stance taken by Inayatullah is fresh and sweeping, but does not
attempt to elucidate comprehensively and systematically the content of Sarkar's spiritual teaching.
Sil, in a less ambitious manner, attempts to critically compare AM's ideals and practices with
those of the 16*-century Christian Anabaptists, with a view to situating AM within the broader
framework of similar movements elsewhere. He describes the tenets of AM with some degree of
historical insight albeit incompletely and superficially. The nature, size, and scope of his paper allows
neither comprehensive nor in-depth exploration of Sarkar's spiritual philosophy and practice.
Bussey provides a brief and general treatment of Sarkar's spiritual philosophy in his article on
the potential application of Sarkar's Tantric episteme in the creation of a new-paradigm university.
However, like Inayatullah, he does not seek to understand Sarkar's thought from a textual-exegetical
perspective.

Proceedings of the 1981 Annual Conference of the British Sociological Association, Sociology of Religion
Study Group, ed. by Eileen Barker (USA: Mercer University Press, 1982), pp. 255-263.
''' For an anthropological perspective on AM members and some analysis of AM texts, see Mary M. Courtis, Self
Transformation and Gendered Experience Among Rajneesh Sannyasins and Ananda Margis (University of
Oregon: Unpublished PhD dissertation, 1991).
'^ For an excellent and comprehensive survey of Sarkar's narratives and social initiatives, see Inayatullah,
Situating Sarkar, passim; and Inayatullah, Understanding P.R. Sarkar, passim. See also Timothy Jay Hamill,
The Social Philosophy of^fi ^ri AnandamUrti (California Institute of Integral Studies: Unpublished MA
dissertation, 1974).
" On Sarkar and macrohistory, see Sohail Inayatullah, 'Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar: Agency, Structure, and
Transcendence', in Macrohistory and Macrohistorians: Perspectives on Individual, Social, and Civilisational
Change, ed. by Johan Galtung and Sohail Inayatullah (New York: Praeger Publishers, 1997), pp. 132-140,159-
202,258.
" For Sarkar and future studies, see Ramana Williams, 'Beyond the Dominant Paradigm: Embracing the
Indigenous and the Transcendental', Futures, vol. 30, no. 2/3 (1998), pp. 223-233; also Sohail Inayatullah,
'Sarkar's Spiritual Dialectics: An Unconventional View of the Future', Futures, vol. 20, no. 2 (1988), pp. 54-65;
and Sohail Inayatullah, 'Future Generations Thinking', Futures, vol. 29, no. 8 (1997), pp. 701-706.
'* On Sarkar and disability studies, see Jennifer Fitzgerald, 'Reclaiming the Whole: Self, Spirit, and Society',
Disability and Rehabilitation, vol. 19, no. 10 (1997), pp. 407-413.
" For a critical essay on the general history, beliefs, and practices of AM and comparison with Christian
Anabaptists, see Narasingha P. Sil, 'Anatomy of the Ananda Marga: Hindu Anabaptists', Asian Culture
Quarterly, vol. 16 issue 2 (1988), pp.1-18. A brief analysis of AM from a sociological perspective is found in
Reinhart Hummel, 'Weltverbesserung und Idealgesellschaft: Zum Verstandnis indischer
Meditationsbewegungen im Westen', Zeitschrift fiir Religions- und Geistesgeschichte, vol. 30, issue 2 (1978),
pp. 129-152.
^^ See Inayatullah, Situating Sarkar, pp. 9-11, 29-32, 91-93, 180, 217-218, 259-260; and Inayatullah,
Understanding P. R. Sarkar, pp. 1-98.
^'Sil, pp. 3-11.
^^ See Bussey, pp. 709-711.
^^ See Courtis, pp. 61-90.
7
 Courtis discusses and evaluates the nature of AM philosophy and practice in comparison with
the tradition of Tantra. She locates it in the context of 'white Tantra', one of two Tantric schools that
emphasises personal restraint and self-discipline - in contrast to 'red Tantra' which emphasises
freedom from all constraints and a non-exclusive approach to life and spirituality. Again, the account
is brief and superficial, and does not attempt to investigate Sarkar's ideas in detail.
In this thesis I do not attempt to understand AM as an NRM, nor am I interested in Sarkar as a
religious leader. I am also taking a different approach from all the aforementioned studies, focussing
primarily on Sarkar's spiritual teachings, as identified by his English-speaking followers, and their
links with older traditions. The present study appears to be the first of its kind and covers new
academic territory as far as AM and Sarkarian research is concerned. Comparable studies have been
done on comparable teachers and systems, such as Sri Aurobindo Ghose and his Integral Yoga, and
Maharishi Mahesh Yogi and his Transcendental Meditation. Phillips (1982)^ critically examines the
central concepts and claims of Aurobindo and argues that Aurobindo's philosophy relies on broad
ideas of earlier Indian thought. He raises the suggestion that Aurobindo may be more a Hindu
apologist seeking to defend the ideas of Indian mysticism than an epistemologically neutral researcher
of generic mysticism. Egenes (1985)^' examines the place of Vedic ideas in the thought of Mahesh
Yogi, arguing that the experiential and philosophic elements of Transcendental Meditation have been
derived from Vedic sources. Gaum (1988)^^ investigates how the concept of moksa (salvation) is
understood and expressed in the writings of Mahesh Yogi, especially in relation of Advaita Vedanta
thought. In the present thesis, I do much the same for Sarkar. However, I aim to be more thorough in
producing a systematic description of Sarkar's ideas, an academic desideratum in view of the paucity
of knowledge that currently exists.

1.3 Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar: His Life and Times^^

Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar was bom on the full moon day of the lunar month of Vaisdkha (possibly 22
April)^* in 1921 in Jamalpur, Bihar, India, to Laksnfi Narayan Sarkar (father) and Abhararii Sarkar
(mother). He was originally named Arun, but in 1925 was renamed Prabhat Rafijan by his parents so
that he would have the same middle name as all the male Sarkars of his generation. Prabhat Rafijan
Sarkar grew up in a family steeped in ancient spiritual traditions and regional leadership, spending

^* Stephen Hall Phillips, Aurobindo's Philosophy of Brahman (Harvard University: Unpublished PhD
dissertation, 1982).
^' Thomas Arthur Egenes, The Place of the Veda in the Thought of Maharishi Mahesh Yogi: A Historical and
Textual Analysis (Transcendental Meditation) (University of Virginia: Unpublished PhD dissertation, 1985).
^ Albert Eion Gaum, Moksha and the Transcendental Meditation of Maharishi Mahesh Yogi: A Science of
Religion Research (University of South Africa: Unpublished DTh dissertation, 1988).
^^ Biographical information on Sarkar was obtained mainly from Sugatananda, Sambhavami (Ydrefors:
Prashiksana Matha, 1992) and Vijayananda, The Life and Teachings ofSrl ^r'l Anandamurti, Volume I (Calcutta:
Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1994) and complemented by information pertaining to Sarkar's life scattered
throughout other AM publications.
much of his school vacations in his family's ancestral home in Burdwan, West Bengal.^^ His early
years were reportedly surrounded in miraculous events including mystical experiences,
parapsychological events such as precognition, and near escapes from death. When he was about five
years old, he was apparently the target of an assassination attempt by a religious sect that believed he
was destined to destroy their religion.
Sarkar underwent his higher education in Vidyasagar College in Calcutta. He had frequent
contacts with prominent social activist, Subhash Chandra Bose, who was a cousin of his matemal
uncle, as well as with sociologist, M. N. Roy. By the 1950's, Sarkar had become a well-known
spiritual teacher in India. In 1955, following the founding of AM in Jamalpur, he became known to
his followers as §ri §r1 Anandamurti or Baba. 'Anandamurti' literally means 'embodiment of bliss'
and 'Sri' is an honorific title given to a well-respected person. AM has rendered his spiritual name as
'he who attracts others as an embodiment of bliss'.^^ Sarkar is also affectionately known to his
disciples as 'Baba', a term of endearment and respect normally given to a male senior person such as
one's father or uncle. In the context of AM, 'Baba' has come to mean 'Beloved'. The historical
context in which AM developed was, as rightly suggested by Sil, one of a newly independent India
caught in an atmosphere of uncertainty, post-industrialisation dislocation, and breakdown of
traditional customs.^'
AM and PROUT grew rapidly in the 1960's and drew fierce opposition from many Hindu
groups and the communists in India.^^ This was due, in part, to Sarkar's public rejection of the Hindu
caste system and other social practices (e.g. the dowry system), his outward disregard for the plethora
of Hindu rituals, and his criticism of orthodox schools of Hindu philosophy, and in part, to his
iconoclastic stance toward both capitalism and communism. By the late 1960's, Ananda Margis were
holding key positions in the Indian civil service. The Indian government came to regard AM as a
politically subversive organisation, possibly because of AM members' uncompromising anti-
corraption stance, and civil servants were thenceforth banned from joining the movement.^^
Sil reports that the first large-scale public outrage against AM occurred in 1967, when the
organisation antagonised wealthy and powerful kurmi mdhdtos in the Bengali countryside over its
reclamation of waste lands for productive agriculture. As AM had failed to secure protection from the
govemment, it 'fell an easy victim to the wrath of the kurrrds in an unfortunate fracas in 1967 which,
to add insult to injury, brought widespread notoriety for the sect.'^*

^* The actual calendar date of Sarkar's birth is not given in any of the published biographies of Sarkar. The date
given was based on the lunar calendar used conunonly in India and other parts of Asia. Kjpananda, With My
Master (Manila: Proutist Universal, 1990), p. 121, gives the date as 22 April 1921.
^' See Inayatullah, Situating Sarkar, p.l; and Dharmavedananda, Who's Afraid of the Tantric Guru? (Taiwan:
Ananda Marga Publications, 1995), p. 425.
^° 7-p/?5, p. 1, and LC, p. 1.
' ' Narasingha P. Sil, 'Anatomy of the Ananda Marga: Hindu Anabaptists', Asian Culture Quarterly, vol.16 issue
2 (1988), p. 8.
^^ Inayatullah, Situating Sarkar, p. 1.
^^ Inayatullah, Situating Sarkar, p. 1.
^* Sil, 'Anatomy', p. 12.
9
 The 1970's saw even greater trials for Sarkar and his followers. He was charged with the
murder of some of his followers in 1971 and jailed without trial. AM was publicly labelled by the
govemment as a terrorist organisation. When the Indian State of Emergency was declared in 1975, all
of Sarkar's organisations were banned. Sarkar himself had to face a trial conducted in an atmosphere
of fear and coercion and was finally convicted in spite of protests by the Intemational Commission of
Jurists and other associations against the unfair judicial conditions.^^ The Indian police and
intelligence agencies continued their pursuit of AM, with numerous claims of police torture of
Sarkar's followers and an alleged poison attempt on Sarkar by the prison authorities.^^ Sarkar, in
protest against his unjust trial, the attempt on his life, and the human rights abuses committed against
his followers, undertook a liquid-fast for five and a half years while in prison. It was not until the
removal of Indira Gandhi's govemment in 1977 that Sarkar's case could be appealed and the verdict
reversed. The illegal ban on AM activities was removed and Sarkar was released from prison on
August 2, 1978, shortly after the Patna High Court had overtumed all the charges against him and four
co-accused. AM, having been reportedly persecuted from the late sixties to the early eighties,
experienced the culmination of its persecution in the bmtal public murder of eighteen of its members
on April 30, 1982, by communists in Calcutta.^* According to Sil, it is 'an irony that the Marxist
regime of West Bengal, purportedly a govemment of the common people - peasants and urban
workers - has chosen to smother another mass movement.'^'
From his release until his death on October 21, 1990, Sarkar continued his spiritual and social
activities in Calcutta, composing 5018 devotional songs called Prabhat Samgita or 'Songs of the New
Dawn', giving spiritual talks, and teaching meditation to many disciples, especially to his senior
monks (avadhutas) and nuns (avadhutikas).'^ He gave lectures on linguistics, wrote children's
literature, and managed his various organisations, which had grown to include Renaissance Universal
(a global network of intellectuals interested in spirituality and social change). Renaissance Artists and
Writers Association, Ananda Marga Universal Relief Team, and Prevention of Cruelty to Animals and
Plants, to name a few."' Sarkar's most recent project was Ananda Nagar or 'City of Bliss', an
altemative community based on PROUT principles situated in Calcutta. Many primary schools, as
well as a university based on Tantric philosophy - Gurukul University, were established in Ananda
Nagar. Many other similar projects, including service and humanitarian projects in undeveloped and
developing countries, have been started in Australia and around the worid. They are all based on the
principles of ecological and spiritual awareness, social progress, and integration with the local culture.

^^ Manavendrananda, Ananda Mdrga: A Brief Summary, pp. 18-19.

^* Inayatullah, Situating Sarkar, p. 2.
^' Manavendrananda, p. 19; Krpananda, With My Master (Manila: Proutist Universal, 1990), p. 125
^*Sil, 'Anatomy', p. 1.
^' Sil, 'Anatomy', p. 13.
'"' Inayatullah, Situating Sarkar, p.2.
"' See Dharmavedananda, p. 446.
10
 Since Sarkar's death in 1990, AM has been led by one of his most senior disciples, Acarya
Sraddhananda Avadhuta, who has been its elected President until the present day."*^ The Central
Executive Committee comprising the President and several other key posts is made up of purodhas,
elite spiritual teachers within AM who have been taught the most advanced practices of visesa yoga.
Inside information from various sources suggests that there may currently be a leadership crisis within
AM, involving possible cormption and ethical breaches within the highest echelons of power. The
organisation has its head office in Tiljala, Calcutta, and is supposedly managed according to the
structure and guidelines laid down by Sarkar himself in the social treatise Carydcarya (Parts 1-3). A
splinter group known as the Ananda Seva Mission (ASM) was set up in 1992 by several of Sarkar's
senior disciples, who broke away from the parent organisation (AM) as a result of intemal clashes.
One of the leaders of ASM claims to receive 'intuitional guidance' (channelled instmctions and
teachings) from the 'consciousness' of Sarkar himself, and the splinter group has apparently managed
to attract a number of ex-AM followers into its fold. The dispute between AM and ASM continues to
be played out at the time of writing this thesis.'"

1.3 Sarkar as a Spiritual Master

Little is known of Sarkar's life and his activities as a spiritual master (guru) apart from the stories and
biographies written by his followers.*^ While there is much information in these accounts that may be
considered hagiographical, the accounts themselves do show relative consistency and coherence,
sufficient for us to put together a condensed sketch of Sarkar's role as a spiritual leader. It is not my
intention here to ascertain the truth or falsity of the historical and biographical claims made for Sarkar;
nor do I aim to account for the supemormal and mystical elements in those claims. Rather, I aim to
reveal the picture of Sarkar that is portrayed by the AM organisation itself, so that we may be better
able to contextualise him when discussing his spiritual teachings in the chapters that follow. The
following account of Sarkar as a guru is necessarily brief and omits numerous details of his life and
activity as documented by AM. It is nevertheless adequate for its modest stated purpose.
In the biographical stories written by his followers, the young Sarkar is portrayed as an
extraordinary child possessing knowledge and abilities considered precocious for his age.*^ He is said
to have grasped and put a cotton wick dipped in milk into his mouth while he was still a newbom
infant. Throughout his childhood and teenage years, he is said to have demonstrated a number of
extraordinary abilities such as writing his own name in five different scripts when he was only five

*^ See Dharmavedananda, p. 414.

*^ This and related information was gathered from an exclusive AM internet discussion list, senior AM dcdryas,
and margis.
** This and related information was gathered from an exclusive AM internet discussion list, senior AM dcdryas,
and margis. For information on ASM, see their website http://www.anandaseva.org/.
*^ The two main biographies of Sarkar are Sugatananda (1992) and Vijayananda (1994). Descriptions of Sarkar's
life and character can also be found in accounts written by his disciples, e.g. Vijayananda, AnandamHrtiji As I
Knew Him (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Saingha, 1994); Dharmavedananda, Who's Afraid; and Hamrahi,
Namdmi Kalydna Sundaram (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sanjgha, 2001).
11
years old; accurately predicting future events and reading the future lives of his friends and relatives;
and showing the fate of departed beings to their living relatives through a magic mirror. He is also
described as a highly conscientious and helpful student, who spent much of his time assisting and
tutoring those who were weaker in their studies. As the eldest male member of his family, after the
death of his father Sarkar, then twenty, took up a job as a railway clerk, following completion of his
college education at Vidyadara College in Calcutta. Two years earlier, at the age of eighteen, Sarkar
had given his first Tantric initiation to a notorious local bandit, thereby creating a role for himself as a
spiritual master (guru) and transforming the bandit into a spiritual practitioner (sadhaka). Since then,
he had been secretly initiating different people, many of whom were later to form the nucleus of his
global organisation, AM.
In late 1954 Sarkar called a meeting of all his initiates and on January 1, 1955 the AM
organisation was formally established.''^ As a spiritual master, Sarkar was very strict on the ethical
foundations of spiritual life, uncompromisingly insisting that all his disciples follow the ten yogic
principles of yama ('conduct') and niyama ('restraint').''^ Yama consists of non-harm (ahimsd), non-
stealing (asteya), truthfulness (satya), non-possessiveness (aparigraha), and living a divine life
(brahmacdrya). Niyama consists of contentment (santosa), cleanliness (sauca), penance (tapah),
scriptural study (svadhyaya), and taking refuge in the Lord (isvara pranidhdna). Sarkar is said to have
regularly and consistentiy monitored his disciples' adherence to these moral principles, sometimes
meting out punishment for moral infringement during guru-disciple meetings. These meetings became
increasingly frequent after the AM organisation was formed, when his disciples, both lay (family
mdrgis, also termed part-timers) and ordained (celibate monks and nuns, also termed whole-timers),
would gather at his residence for 'reporting sessions'. During these sessions, Sarkar evaluated the
progress of different service projects of the organisation, while his disciples reported on the
performance of their allotted duties. Published reports suggest that on numerous occasions, disciples
felt spiritually uplifted and benefited from Sarkar's presence, words, or gestures, even if Sarkar had
harshly rebuked or physically punished them for laziness, incompetence, or immorality.'*'
Sarkar was a consummate dramatist who involved his disciples in many an emotionally-
charged scenario, interpreted by them as his 'cosmic play' or Kid enacted for the spiritual benefit of all
concemed.^" On many occasions, Sarkar skilfully and deliberately placed his disciples in extremely
difficult social or emotional situations. This is said to have been done in order to convey certain
spiritual truths or to spiritually awaken the disciples from conditioned habits and ego-identification.
Another way in which Sarkar seemingly catapulted his disciples out of egocentric concems was to set

46
See e.g. Sugatananda, pp. 11-18; and Vijayananda, pp. 7-13.
'^ Vijayananda, Anandamurtifi, p. 77.
^^ Vijayananda, AnandamHrtifi, pp. 61-63.
"' For personal accounts of disciples' experiences with Sarkar during reporting sessions, see for example,
Shantatmananda, Moving with Cosmic Will: A Story of Spiritual Struggle and Experiences (Davao City: Ananda
Marga, 1996), pp. 159-163; and Hamrahi, Namdmi, pp. 67-68.
'" See e.g. Vijayananda, Anandamdrtifi, pp. 91-97.
12
them impossible social service goals, such as building ten schools in a week for poverty-stricken
village children in some remote part of India. In all these 'dramas', Sarkar's disciples experienced
great tension or humiliation, but are said to have been rewarded with mental lightness, bliss, and
spiritual elevation once they could surrender themselves fully to their guru and to the reality of the
situation. Sarkar's idiosyncratic and sometimes harsh methods of instmction were regarded by his
disciples as authentically 'Tantric' acts, designed to develop in them qualities of devotion, self-
surrender, and mental liberation. Sarkar claimed that when he punished a disciple, it was never out of
hatred or blame but out of love, just as a parent might discipline a wayward child. He made it a
principle that the measure of punishment must always be less than the measure of love given to the
person being punished, an attitude corroborated by his disciples.^' Paradoxically, accounts abound of
Sarkar's disciples feeling totally charmed by and lovingly attracted to their master by virtue of his
sweetness, compassion, and power.^^
In 1966, Sarkar resigned from his job as railway clerk in order to devote himself fully to the
running and expansion of his AM organisation. As a spiritual and organisational leader, he is said to
exhibit a paradoxical blend of qualities, including meticulous attention to detail and efficiency,
philosophical acumen, a fiery and vigorous temperament, loving sweetness and charm, a sense of
humour, child-like simplicity and straightforwardness, and a powerful presence. Sarkar's earliest
disciples, prior to the founding of AM, were lay people with careers and family responsibilities, many
of whom went on to become his first cohort of grhi acarya or 'family spiritual instmctors'. He gave
his early disciples much personal attention and imparted to several of them the most advanced Tantric
meditation techniques, known as visesa yoga. As the numbers were small and manageable, Sarkar
used to initiate his early disciples personally. As his popularity increased following the formation of
AM, he gave his dcdryas the authority to initiate new disciples on his behalf, making Tantric
meditation and spirituality more accessible to the general public. Sarkar was very firm on the policy
of not accepting any money for spiritual teachings and meditation instmction, and only accepted
sincere spiritual seekers willing to commit themselves to the required disciplines. He showed no
interest in those who sought initiation or favours through bribery - be it in the form of cash or promise
of continual financial support for the organisation - or those who behaved arrogantly on the basis of
their wealth or social status. His clearly identified mission was to create spiritual-social leaders of the
highest calibre for the twin purposes of personal enlightenment and universal service for the
upliftment of humanity.^^
Sarkar was relentless in the pursuit of his vision, as evidenced in his strict training regime for
his disciples and the rapid expansion and diversification of his organisation structurally, functionally,
and geographically. He saw himself in the twin roles of dharma guru (spiritual master) and samdja

^' Vijayananda, AnandamHrtiji, p. 81.

^^ For a sample of these, see Prasidananda, Bdbd's Love for South America: Mystical Experiences with a
Spiritual Master Volume 1 (Sao Paulo: Ananda Marga Publications, 1996).

13
guru (social preceptor), and expressed himself deeply concemed with elevating the socio-economic
conditions of all oppressed peoples in India and the world. To him, spiritual development was not
possible in an environment of poverty, deprivation, hunger, and insecurity, since outer and inner
development were inextricably linked and essentially inseparable. For him, spirituality was not a
privilege reserved only for the elite and the wealthy, but a basic right of every human being. He thus
made AM an organisation that taught spiritual philosophy and practices while simultaneously
promoting a new socio-political theory and vision through various initiatives. One such initiative was
Proutist Universal - a wing of AM focussed on studying, propagating, and implementing the ideas and
strategies of Progressive Utilisation Theory (PROUT). While Sarkar saw structural change in global
society as a long-term solution to collective suffering, he ensured that short-term disaster relief and
community development work were provided to the most needy through the Ananda Marga Universal
Relief Team (AMURT and AMURTEL). AMURTEL was the ladies' and children's wing of the
team. He personally oversaw the creation and growth of an ecological sanctuary to house and nurture
the diverse species of plants in the world at the headquarters of AM in Calcutta. There are stories
describing Sarkar speaking to and caring for his trees, shmbs, and flowers even on very busy days.^^
As a spiritual master, Sarkar is said to have demonstrated profound care and concem for the
physical, mental, and spiritual wellbeing of all his disciples. He often personally intervened in their
lives to ensure that they had sufficient food, adequate shelter, a means of livelihood, a stable and
happy family environment, and access to medical and health care.^^ All his disciples were entitled to
personal contact (PC) with him, during which Sarkar would teach, enlighten, scmtinise, chastise,
inspire, or bless them in one way or another. Individual PC was given only to male disciples while
small group PC was organised for the female disciples. This was a mle that Sarkar instituted to
circumvent any potential allegation of sexual impropriety on his part toward his women disciples.
Some time in 1981 or 1982, Sarkar conducted dharma samiksd - a massive program of analysing, with
his 'yogic perception', the conduct and health of each of his many disciples who came from all over
the world to see him. Following the analyses and occasional chastisement of the disciples for breaches
of morality, he gave them instmctions necessary for their total well-being and further spiritual
growth.^*
On a daily basis, Sarkar would give short, informal teachings known as darsans ('holy
glimpses of the guru') to small groups of disciples, during which various spiritual topics would be
discussed. Twice a year, he would give long, formal teachings to large gatherings of disciples known
as dharma mahdcakra or DMC held at various locations. These gatherings were popular amongst
disciples for their philosophical depth, deep inspiration, and 'spiritually vibrating' qualities, with many

^^ See e.g. Hamrahi, Namdmi, pp. 75-76 and 107-110; and Narada Muni, Bhagavdn Anandamurti: Ananda Katha
(Katoomba: AMPS Suva Sectorial Publication, 1990), p. 75.
'" See Vijayananda, Anandamdrtifi, pp. 72-77.
^^ See e.g. Vijayananda, Anandamdrtifi, pp. 33-41 and 64-70, and Sugatananda, Sambhdvami (Ydrefors:
Prakshiksana Matha, 1992), pp. 59-66.
^' Vijayananda, Anandamdrtifi, p. 95, dates this event to July 1982. Dharmavedananda, p. 430, dates it to 1981
14
reporting extraordinary realisations and mystical experiences. At the conclusion of each DMC, Sarkar
would bless the congregation by assuming the vardbhaya mudrd ('gesture of auspiciousness and
fearlessness') with his hands in front of his disciples, eliciting spiritual awakenings and heightened
spiritual energy in large sections of the audience.^^ For Sarkar, the vardbhaya mudrd display was a
means through which he emanated and spread a shower of "positive microvita' (a concept to be
discussed in Chapters 3, 4 and 6) to facilitate the spiritual progress of his disciples. During both
DMCs and general darsans, he gave demonstrations of various forms of samddhi, effects of tanmatras
('waves of sound, form, touch, taste, and smell'), knowledge of past lives, distant occurrences, and
various spiritual realisations to his disciples by direct display or by using several selected disciples as
his subjects.'^ Sarkar never openly displayed his occult powers in public, eschewing all forms of self-
propaganda or media publicity; he is said to have reserved the use of such powers only for the skilful
and necessary assistance or inspiration of his disciples.

Sarkar's personal lifestyle is reported to have been simple and spartan, avoiding the extremes
of glamorous indulgence on one hand and ascetic deprivation on the other.^' He insisted on being kept
away from the media and the public limelight, reserving his time and attention unstintingly for sincere
spiritual seekers and those who needed his help. He married at the age of 38, in 1959, and later had a
son. This aspect of Sarkar's personal life was seen by AM as an exemplary demonstration that family
life was not an impediment to spiritual enlightenment. Little mention is made of Sarkar's wife and son
in all the stories and biographies written by his followers. Some sources indicate that Sarkar's wife
and son eventually left him following a power stmggle initiated by his wife, Uma Sarkar, in collusion
with several top-ranking dcdryas including Sarkar's personal assistant of that time, ViSokananda.^
The silence surrounding this event and the lives of his wife and son may indicate a reticence, perhaps
embarrassment, on the part of AM in relation to Sarkar's apparent abandonment by his wife and AM's
factional infighting.
Be that as it may, Sarkar was known as a very diligent, conscientious, and controversial guru.
He worked tirelessly for about twenty hours every day - giving teachings, initiating and overseeing
projects, disciplining his dcdryas and mdrgis, caring for his plants, composing songs, receiving news
and progress reports from AM workers around India and the world, and giving personal help and
instmction to those who needed them. As part of his daily routine, he went on field walks in the
momings and evenings, during which he dictated numerous stories, spiritual teachings, and factual
information on topics as diverse as history, farming, botany, culture, and music to disciples, who
carefully recorded them. On the public front, he was highly critical of the Hindu caste system, brides'
dowry, costly Hindu sacrifices and rituals, capitalist exploitation, govemment cormption, and religious

" See e.g. Alister, pp. 232-233.

^* See e.g. Anandamurti, Ananda Vacandmrtam Part 23 (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1999), pp.
91-108.
^' Vijayananda, Anandamurtifi, pp. 9-22.
^ N. K. Singh, 'Anand Marg', Seminar Vol. 151 (1972), p. 25. This information has been corroborated through
conversations with several senior dcdryas of AM.
15
hypocrisy and dogma. In rural communities where AM had a presence, members of different castes
including those stigmatised as untouchables, would often sit, eat, and meditate together, sharing food
from a common plate. Sarkar tolerated no caste barriers amongst his disciples, and for this and other
disagreements with the status quo, he was much hated, opposed, and persecuted by both secular and
religious authorities.^' Even in jail, Sarkar is said to have exuded a fearless and commanding
presence, which caused some surprise and perhaps awe amongst the jail authorities.
Sarkar was a complex figure with many facets to his personality, and a man of many interests.
He was reputed to know more than 200 languages, and was known to have demonstrated such
knowledge to his followers on several occasions. He designed and created a spiritually and
ecologically-oriented approach to education that he called neohumanistic education. He wanted to
inspire a new generation of children and young people through a holistic educational program based
on profound personal experience of universal love and interconnectedness. To achieve such a global
transformation, he set up more than 700 neohumanistic schools around the world through his
dedicated disciples and volunteers. Apart from his role as an educator, he was also an inspired
musician and artist, composing more than 5000 song lyrics in several languages including English,
Hindi, Bengali, and Urdu. He set these lyrics, expressing a range of spiritual sentiments, to melodies
and tunes derived from a variety of cultures. These songs, known as Prabhat Saingit, were meant to
inspire, enrich, and sweeten the spiritual lives of all who were and are walking the path of AM.
Sarkar also demonstrated a keen interest in the arts and sciences by establishing the Renaissance
Artists and Writers Association (RAWA) and Renaissance Universal (RU), two clubs aimed at
revitalising the arts and sciences respectively from a spiritual and ethical perspective.
The narratives of AM portray Sarkar as a guru who not only sought spiritual transformation of
the individual and society, but also made cultural and social renewal an essential part of his project.
He was regarded as an all-round Renaissance man, someone who sought to create a new civilisational
discourse through a multifaceted approach that was rooted in spirituality.
However, some extemal non-AM sources cast Sarkar in a completely different light.*^ They
are generally less optimistic about Sarkar's intentions and actions, some being openly critical of both
the man and his organisation. In particular, Singh (1972) describes Sarkar as a 'pseudo-sannyasin'
who had 'no regard for democracy'.^ He is portrayed as a tyrannical figure who organised AM like a
parallel govemment with botii executive and judiciary powers ultimately resting in his person.
Punishment of dissidents and offenders of AM's code of conduct is said to range from caning to the
death sentence. Disloyal members of AM were supposedly ordered by Sarkar to be shot on sight.
Singh speculates that at least fifty former AM members may have been shot on sight and since become
'traceless'. He describes how Sarkar punished his wayward disciples:

^' Manavendrananda, pp. 16-17.

*^ Vijayananda, Anandamdrtifi, pp. 22-28
63
Such external sources are hard to come by. For a few examples, see Singh, 'Anand Marg', and Sil, 'Anatomy
of the Ananda Marga: Hindu Anabaptists'.

16
 Anand Murti (Sarkar), the 'chief judge', used to penalise avadhuts with a heavy hand
for every little act of omission and commission. Partly to keep them in terror and
partly in the belief that only in this way could he fulfil his dreams, he imparted the
most bmtal and primitive punishment. The ex-avadhuts narrate in unbelievable terms
how they used to take up to five hundred canings at a time and pass urine and stools in
their clothes. There are instances of solitary confinement and regular beatings for days
together. ^^

According to Singh, Sarkar established a para-military wing of AM, the Volunteer Social
Service, whose overt purpose was organisational and self defence but which may have covertly served
as AM's execution squad for dissidents. In addition, Singh accuses Sarkar of being 'an incorrigible
practitioner of homosexual intercourse with his own disciples after having convinced them of their
girlhood in previous lives.'^*
Sil (1988) comments that while 'almost all accounts of the organisation written by its leader
and other members (not easily available in the market) are too specious and sanctimonious to be
credible', he nevertheless disputes Singh's caricature of Sarkar as a lewd homosexual guru who
sexually exploited his disciples:

... Ananda Murti appears to lead a perfectly moral life as contrasted with the leaders of
several global spiritual organizations. It is absolutely unfounded that the leader of the
Ananda Marga is a homosexual who is in the habit of persuading his male recmits
whom he desires that "they had been girls in previous lives."*^

According to Sil, Sarkar has never directed worship towards himself as a divine figure, though
paradoxically he may have allowed a personality cult to form around him for reasons we can only
guess:

... it must be noted that no Margi actually worships his baba, whereas devotees of
other spiritual personalities, especially the followers of ... Sai Baba, have little qualms
in publicly worshipping him as a god.*^...

Interestingly enough, Sarkar himself has disavowed any divine connection and
confessed: "I do not belong to heaven. What I am, I am to express this tmth in a single
sentence - I am yours." Yet he has painstakingly elaborated a raison d'etre of a
69
guru. ...
Admittedly, the man never claimed divinity himself whereas many other spiritualists in
India and abroad have announced themselves as self-styled gods. Yet, quietly and
quite consciously, the Ananda Murti has allowed himself to be described as a super-

" Singh, p. 22.

" Singh, p. 25.
*^ Ibid.
" Sil, 'Anatomy', p. 6.
*' Sil, 'Anatomy', p. 6.
*' Sil, 'Anatomy', p. 8.
17
 human personality and thus his organisation, like most other spiritual associations, has
developed a personality cult around its leader.™

While Sil seems to have based his conclusions on AM writings and other independent sources,
it is not clear where Singh derives his information from or whether there is any factual basis for his
accusations. No source references are provided in Singh's short article on AM. It is equally unclear
whether AM's attempts at self-portrayal and portrayal of Sarkar are entirely factual and grounded on
solid evidence. Common sense suggests that both supporters and critics of AM would each have a
vested interest in portraying the case in a way that supports their separate and opposing agendas. It is
not the aim of this thesis to sort out these competing claims but merely to highlight some of the
controversies surrounding the personality of Sarkar and his AM organisation. With these historical
discussions on Sarkar and AM as background, we are now ready to examine Sarkar's spiritual
ideology and praxis more closely in the following chapters.

™ Sil, 'Anatomy', p. 9.
18
 Chapter 2
Methodology

2.1 Introduction
My purpose is to examine the primary and secondary texts of AM published in English, in an effort to
systematically and rigorously elucidate the spiritual philosophy and praxis of Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar
(1921-1990). In doing so, the writings of AM scholars and practitioners are investigated and cross-
referenced. As this study aims to give a comparative perspective, relevant comparisons with ancient
and classical systems of Indian philosophy-cum-praxis are made.' In this comparative task, the
English versions of primary and secondary texts are consulted, as are academic studies on these texts.
The methodological issues that arise out of this proposed study include: (1) deciding on the
most suitable and fmitful approach for understanding and explication of Sarkar's texts; (2)
establishing the boundaries of the study in terms of textual corpus; (3) probing into the possible
translation and redaction biases inherent in the texts themselves (as many of Sarkar's works were
originally in languages other than English, and have been translated and edited by the publications
committee of AM). The first of these three concems will be tackled by the discussion in the next
section. The second concem is resolved by selecting all of Sarkar's discourses currently available in
English as the primary corpus for my research. Discourses transcribed or tape-recorded in Bengali
and Hindi will not be investigated due to my current limitations in these languages. To attempt to
read these untranslated manuscripts or understand these untranslated tape-recordings would require an
investment of time and effort beyond the permitted timeframe of this thesis. Similarly, the source
texts of other Indian systems of thought and praxis are consulted using their known English versions,
as are the academic papers on these relevant topics. The third concem involves consideration of
possible translation bias, or deliberate or unintentional errors of omission and/or commission in the
translation, editing, and publication of the texts. Such consideration would necessitate a proficiency
in Bengali and Hindi far beyond my current ability. This preliminary study aims to present Sarkar's
philosophy and praxis as understood and propagated by AM through its English-language
publications. The justification for this is that AM currently propagates its message and activities
almost exclusively through its English-language publications. Indeed, this is the face of AM
encountered by all except Indians, who had been exposed to the hve discourses of Sarkar himself or
his published writings in either Bengali or Hindi. In fact, the Chinese translations of AM materials
are made from their English counterparts, underscoring the importance and centrality of the English-
language publications of AM.

Related to the issue of possible translation and redaction bias is the manner in which both
Sarkar and AM translators have rendered key Sanskrit terms. An example is the term 'cittd", which

' Relevant comparisons are made with Vedanta, Samkhya, Yoga, the Saiva, Sakta, and Bengali forms of Tantra,
Vaisijavism, the Vedas and Upanisads, and Buddhism.
19
 Sarkar translated as 'objectivated I'^ while AM translators have rendered it 'done I'.^ Neither of these
is the usual translation nor the conunonly understood sense of the word, citta, which most frequenUy
means mind or mental state. Such idiosyncratic rendering of Sanskrit terms'* may relate to Sarkar's
attempt at reconceptualising and reconstructing key ideas and doctrines from the common Indian stock
as an essential part of his overall transformational project. Discussion of Sarkar's worldview and
spiritual disciplines will reveal frequent use of familiar Hindu terms such as purusa, prakrti, kundalini,
and cakra. In the chapters that follow, I will simply translate these Sanskrit terms according to the
rendering by Sarkar and AM translators. I will also reveal any special new variants of meaning Sarkar
gives to these concepts, including any unique understandings of the relationships amongst them.
However, I will not attempt to do that in any detail until Chapters 7 and 8, where I will critically
compare Sarkar's translations and interpretations with existing conceptual understandings.

Throughout this thesis (in both text and footnotes), I am replacing the AM transcription
system for Sanskrit with the standard system, for the sake of clarity and ease of understanding. The
only exception is in the bibliography, where the book tities and authors' names are in their original
form. Sanskrit word divisions in the original version (as used in Sarkar's texts) will be retained for the
sake of clarity (e.g. 'Parama Purusa' is rendered 'parama purusa'). In Sarkar's texts, certain key
Sanskrit terms denote both proper names of deities and essential philosophical concepts. In the case of
proper names, I write these terms with initial capitals and no italics (e.g. Krsna and Siva) to indicate
that they are being used in an anthropomorphic sense. In the case of concepts, I will write them in
lower-case italics (e.g. krsna, siva, brahma) to denote that they are being used in an abstract
philosophical sense.

2.2 Textual Sources and Scope

Sarkar, whose mother tongue was Bengali, delivered his discourses in Hindi, Bengali and English. He
divides the texts of AM into three collections, namely the darsana sdstra or philosophical treatises, the
dharma sdstra or spiritual treatises, and the samdja sdstra or social treatises. The key texts of the
darsana sdstra are the Ananda Sutram (AS: 'Aphorisms on Bliss'), and Idea and Ideology (lAF).
Sarkar himself designated these two texts as the official philosophical texts of AM. The AS consists of
a collection of terse and pithy sayings composed in the style and form of traditional Indian sutras or
aphorisms. Sarkar delivered AS, in a series of night sessions in 1961 in the solitude of the Tiger's
Grave in Jamalpur, to a devotee who duly recorded the teachings under the faint glow of candlelight.^
Sarkar provides an auto-commentary to AS by means of a brief purport to each of its terse verses. For
the purpose of this thesis, I consulted both the AS verses and their corresponding explanations given

^ M/, p. 24.
^ See e.g. SPSSA, p. 22.
" The issue of accuracy and validity of existing translations of Sanskrit terms is pertinent but outside the scope of
the present discussion.
' Anandamurti, AS (Second Edition), trans. Manohar Gupta and ed. Vijayananda, Ananda Rucira, Acyutananda
and Jayanta Kumar (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1996), p. xi.
20
by Sarkar in order to clarify ambiguous points. lAI is a series of discourses given to a group of
advanced trainees during the early days of the movement in 1959, collected and transcribed into a
small volume. Together, AS and lAI provide the kemel of and overall framework for Sarkar's vast
edifice of spiritual concepts and practices.
Both AS and lAI follow a semi-systematic stmcture, detailing the concepts of cosmology,
psychology, soteriology, and social philosophy in a roughly sequential manner. However, a certain
amount of conceptual wandering can be observed in both these texts, more so in AS than in lAI. For
example, AS (which comprises five chapters) begins with a terse discussion on ontology and
cosmogony followed by the same on soteriology. Chapter 2 of AS continues with the discussion on
soteriology but then tums its focus to ontology, psychology, and finally to cosmogony again. Chapter
3 begins by retuming to the discussion on psychology and ends with another five short expositions on
soteriology. Chapter 4 of AS retums to the topic of cosmogony while the final chapter is solely
devoted to a skeletal but essential exposition of Sarkar's social philosophy of PROUT. As such, in
reviewing Sarkar's ideas I will not go through AS verse by verse. Rather I will quote the relevant
verses as and when necessary while discussing the various aspects of his philosophy in the chapters
that follow. Apart from the fact that any one of Sarkar's texts may wander over different topics, it is
also pertinent to note that Sarkar's presentation of his ideas is scattered over many sources and is not
to be found fully in any one text. Thus, it is necessary to quote from many varied sources in order to
gain a complete and fair understanding of Sarkar's entire ideology. In fact, the process of collecting,
sorting out, and discussing various aspects of Sarkar's teachings in one piece of work is a large part of
my task.
An important preliminary text that serves as an informative and hermeneutical key to the
entire AM ideology of Sarkar is Ananda Mdrga Elementary Philosophy (AMEP) (1992). In AMEP,
Sarkar explains what he means by consciousness (purusa or caitanya) and mind (manas) by appealing
to experience, and argues for the existence of cosmic consciousness (bhumacaitanya) using formal
logic. As such, although AMEP was not formally designated by Sarkar as part of AM's darsana
sdstra, it remains an indispensable source-text for an accurate understanding of his complex
terminology and worldview.
The dharma sdstra of AM consists of the multi-volume collections of discourses delivered by
Sarkar to his disciples over the many years of his career as AM's spiritual preceptor. The first of these
collections is the Subhdsita Sarngraha (SS) or 'Collection of Well-Spoken Sayings'. There is, to date,
a total of 24 volumes published in English, each volume containing a set of chronologically ordered
discourses. Work is continuing on the collation, transcription and publication of further volumes. The
SS series is meant to contain all Dharma Mahacakra (DMC) discourses given by Sarkar in cities and
towns throughout the world, but mostly in India.^ DMCs were large public spiritual gatherings
addressed by Sarkar and were an important feature of AM throughout most of his life. Since the first

21
DMC, held on 1 January 1955, the discourses have been transcribed, translated, and published in a
roughly chronological fashion by the AM publications committee. This chronological sequence was,
however, broken by the onset of the State of Emergency in India in 1975, during which discourses
were published in the order that they happened to be recovered by AM archivists. The State of
Emergency ended in 1977.
Another collection of texts known as Ananda Vacandmrtam (AV) or 'Immortal Words of
Bliss' groups together all the known General Darsana (GD) discourses given by Sarkar throughout his
career.' GD speeches were teachings given to AM members, often as part of the daily routine, in
whatever locality Sarkar happened to be staying in at the time. These speeches were lighter in tone
and briefer than DMC discourses, and often intimately delivered to relatively small groups of AM
members. The AV series started in 1978 with the GD discourses given by Sarkar at that time; it kept
pace with the subsequent GD discourses spoken by Sarkar over the next six years. Beginning with
Part 23, the AV series has included GD discourses delivered prior to 1978. These discourses have
been recovered either from the typed notes of devotees or from established magazines of AM in the
form of summarised approximations of original discourses. Some were transcribed from tape
recordings of the original discourses and translated by the publications committee in cases where
English was not the medium of instmction. Sarkar himself designated both the SS and AV series of
discourses as the dharma sdstra of AM.
Two single-volume collections of Sarkar's spiritual teachings appeared as Namah ^ivdya
^dntdya (NSS), or 'Salutations to Peaceful Siva', in 1982 and Namdmi Krstia Sundaram (NKS), or 'I
Salute to Beautiful Krsna', in 1981. Each was an ensemble of either lectures or dictations given by
Sarkar in Bengali and translated into English by the AM publications committee on several occasions.
Other important texts which form part of Sarkar's philosophical teachings include Microvitum in a
Nutshell (MvN) (1991), A Guide to Human Conduct (GHQ (1991), Discourses on Mahdbhdrata
(1991), Tattva Kaumudi, and Tattvika Pravesika^ Compilations containing material from the
aforementioned sources, and in some cases containing original material, were Yoga Psychology (YP)
(1994), Discourses on Tantra (DOT) Volume 1(1993) and Volume 2 (1994), Ananda Mdrga
Philosophy in a Nutshell (AMP) Parts 1-8 (1988), Ananda Mdrga Ideology and Way of Life (AMP)
Parts 1-11 (1988), Karma Samnydsa, Karma Yoga, and most recently, Discourses on Krsna arui the
Gitd (DKG) (2000).
Sarkar was a prolific writer and teacher, who not only concemed himself with spirituality, but
also gave extensive teachings on social philosophy. He created a new political-economic theory and
social movement called the Progressive Utilisation Theory (abbreviated as PROUT), which was meant
to represent an altemative "third force" to the dominant ideologies of capitalism and communism.

^ See publishers' notes in Anandamurti, 55 Part 24, ed. and trans. Vijayananda, Acyutananda, and Ananda
Rucira (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1997), p. xi.
^ See publishers' notes in Anandamurti, A V Part 31, ed. and trans. Vijayananda and Acyutananda (Calcutta:
Ananda Marga Publications, 1997), p. xi.
22
Sarkar's discourses on PROUT have been assembled into a series known as Prout in a Nutshell (Parts
1-21) (1987-1991). Other original publications in the field of social philosophy include Proutist
Economics (1992), A Few Problems Solved (Parts 1-9) (1987-1988), Human Society (Parts 1 and 2)
(1987), Prama, Problems of the Day, and To the Patriots. Finally, AM's samdja sdstra or social
treatises consists of the three volumes of Carydcarya, which basically provide guidance on personal
conduct, social relationships and gatherings, organisational matters, and to a lesser extent, spiritual
practices. These texts do not concem the present thesis and will not be investigated.
There is just one secondary text of AM. It is a commentary on the AS by a senior AM nun,
Anandamitra, and attempts to elaborate on the AS with teachings found scattered in the vast collection
of original discourses. This commentary, known as 'The Spiritual Teachings of Sri ^ri AnandamUrti'
(STSSA), has proven to be of great assistance in the current study. All tertiary AM sources consist of
writings by scholars and followers of AM that have a bearing on the history or spiritual philosophy of
the movement. Often they shed light on certain obscure doctrinal points and help clarify the accepted
interpretation of Sarkar's ideas by the AM tradition.
All the above-mentioned texts and a small number of articles that have not been hitherto
published in book form are available on a recently released electronic edition of Sarkar's works. This
CD-ROM collection contains all of the books by Sarkar originally in English or translated into English
as of May 1, 2001. It includes over 1200 articles (from 125 books) and several texts that have been
recently out of print, such as Tattva Kaumudi, Tattvika Pravesika, Karma Sarnnydsa, and Karma
Yoga? I have reviewed and consulted this CD-ROM mainly for purposes of cross-referencing and
cross-comparison of key terms and concepts.
In addition to AM sources, this study also investigates the essential texts and non-primary
sources of several Indian philosophical and soteriological systems for comparative purposes. Here
again, limitations in my command of Sanskrit necessitate the study of only English translations of
primary texts and English academic papers relevant to the selected systems. The major systems of
thought and praxis that will be compared with AM are:'"
1. The Vedas and Upanisads
2. Sarnkhya
3. Yoga

* At this stage, the dates of some AM publications (currently out of print) are unknown to me.
' Prabhat Ranjan Sarkar, The Electronic Edition of the Works of P. R. Sarkar Version 6.0, compiled by Giri
Dhara and Acyutananda (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 2001).
'" One of the best-known comparative approaches to the study of religion is the 'dimensional model' of Ninian
Smart, whose seven dimensions of religion - doctrinal, ritual, mythic, experiential, ethical, social, and material -
characterise religions as they exist in the world. See Ninian Smart, The World's Religions: Old Traditions and
Modern Transformations (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989); and Ninian Smart, Dimensions of the
Sacred: An Anatomy of the World's Beliefs (London: Fontana Press, 1997). In this study, I am not attempting a
comparison using Smart's typology; rather I am making thematic cross-comparisons mostly firom within the
doctrinal, ritual, and experiential dimensions of AM and these separate Indian traditions. See also Frank
Whaling, 'Comparative Approaches', in Frank Whaling (ed.). Contemporary Approaches to the Study of
Religion Volume 1: Humanities (Berlin: Mouton Publishers, 1983), pp. 165-295.

23
4. Vedanta, in its Advaita, Viiistadvaita, and Dvaita variations
5. Buddhism
6. Hindu Tantra, in particular its Saiva and Sakta variations
7. Vaisnavism
8. Bengali Vaisnavism and Tantrism
These systems have been selectively highlighted by Sarkar for comparison throughout his extensive
collection of teachings, and bear either loose or close similarities to his own ideology. In Chapters 7
and 8, the similarities and differences between Sarkar's thought and these traditions are critically
elucidated, and a theoretical exposition is offered on how Sarkar may have articulated his spiritual
ideology through creative synthesis and reconstmction of ancient and classical Indian discourse.
The comparisons made are not meant to be exhaustive or detailed. (Such a project would
entail several separate works, each focussing on one particular tradition in comparison with AM; only
then could one do justice to both the subjects of comparative discourse.) The present work is a
preliminary study of Sarkar's spiritual and soteriological discourse and is not meant to have the final
word on its relation to other comparable systems of thought.

2.3 Historical Considerations

It is important to note that this study does not aim to present the life and times of Sarkar from a
historical-critical point of view. Its primary objective is to explore and delineate the various
ontological, cosmological, epistemological, ethical, psychological and soteriological concepts and
practices of AM, as well as their links to ancient and classical sources of Indian spirituality. As far as
is practicable, reliable sources have been consulted for the relevant historical information, but the
rigour and technicality of historical research is left to historians and scholars trained and competent in
that field. While modem historical criticism of texts generally seeks to uncover objective meaning
within the texts themselves, paying close attention to historical 'facts' that surround the composition
of the texts, postmodem exegesis seeks meaning in the play of language between the reader and the
texts." From a postmodem viewpoint, the entire 'multiverse' of discourse in which exist both the
texts and the reader needs to be taken into account in any textual interpretation. This field of discourse
is not limited to textual sources but includes cultural practices, customs, social norms and is essentially
indeterminable. In other words, for the historical critic, the notion of the 'text' becomes 'macrotext'

" See Fred W. Burnett, 'Postmodern Biblical Exegesis: The Eve of Historical Criticism', Semeia 51 (1990): 51-
80. Burnett argues that it is possible for historical criticism to accommodate postmodern styles of textual
reading by a metamorphosis of both the critic and the method. Postmodern reading styles include post-
structuralism, reader-response criticism, semiotics, psychoanalytic criticism, Gadamerian hermeneutics, and
deconstructionism. Cf F Gerald Downing, 'Historical-Critical Method', in/\ Dicfjonaryo/Bife/ica/
Interpretation, ed. by R. J. Coggins and J. L. Houlden (London: SCM Press, 1990), pp. 284-285. Of the
historical-critical method. Downing writes: 'The procedures and their logic remain very much akin ... to what
goes on in and before a trial at law. Documents are scrutinised to check whether they are what they purport to
be, emanating from the authors claimed for them, un-tampered with; if they seem to be copies, the quality of the
copying must be ascertained. Witnesses are examined for the coherence of their account, and for its match with
others' testimony' (p. 285).
24
or 'genotext', 'all of the discursive space of (both verbal and non-verbal) for both the text and the
subject.''^ Also, from a postmodem perspective, every text is always grounded in another text, and
thus can be described as an 'intertext','^ wherein the ultimate origins and sources of the texts are
impossible to trace. In this study, I seek to trace Sarkar's texts not in a quest for their ultimate origins
but in an exploration of their discursive multiverse, or at least one cmcial element in that multiverse -
certain major written texts of the Indian religious civilisation and subsequent Westem academic
interpretations of these texts. Thus, precise historical dating and a search for objective evidence of
intertextual connections are not significant concems of this study.'*
In analysing the texts of Sarkar, I have discovered that while AM editors have dated many of
his discourses, there are others that remain undated due to either inability to retrieve the actual date of
the discourse from original handwritten manuscripts, or perhaps lack of concem for chronological
dating. Whichever may be the case, I have found, in examining Sarkar's dated texts, that a historical
stratification of these texts is possible based on prima facie evidence of the historical development of
Sarkar's key ideas. It is possible that throughout his teaching career, Sarkar may have developed and
remoulded his earlier ideas or added new dimensions of meaning to earlier conceptualisations for
reasons unclear to us. For example, early in his career he expounded a cosmology revolving around
the theory of brahmacakra (first articulated between the years 1955 and 1961), but later on, between
the years 1986 and 1989, he expounded a new cosmology based on microvita theory, which cast the
earlier cosmology in a new light. The issues surrounding this historical change will be discussed fully
in Chapter 3. For now, I merely state my policy with regard to such historical stratification found in
the texts: I will not be tracing such changes in Sarkar's texts as a whole due to the difficulty of such a
task. At best, any historical tracing performed would be partial, possibly biased, and inadequate since
many of the discourses are undated. Besides, from a postmodem perspective, such tracing would
ultimately prove futile due to the inherent indeterminacy of the texts (or intertexts) themselves. In the
main, therefore, I will be presenting Sarkar's ideas as if they were a fixed system (which is probably
how the AM publications committee sees it), highlighting only certain conceptual changes that are
obvious and noteworthy, such as the above-mentioned development from brahmacakra to microvita
cosmology.

'^ Burnett, 'Postmodern Biblical Exegesis', p. 61.

'^ Burnett, 'Postmodern Biblical Exegesis', p. 61.
''' This study is informed by Gadamerian hermeneutics rather than by post-structural criticism based on the
thought of La Capra, Derrida and Foucault. According to Phillips, post-structural criticism is "agonistic,
contestatory, and multi-voiced', problematising the power structures and political control underlying knowledge
production and consumption (p. 9). See Gary A. Phillips, 'Exegesis as Critical Praxis: Reclaiming History and
Text from a Postmodern Perspective', Semeia 51 (1990): 9-49.
25
2.4 Gadamer's Dialogical Hermeneutics'^
Approaches to textual reading and interpretation are many, some of which include form criticism,
holistic interpretation,'^ literary criticism,'^ narrative criticism,'^ redaction criticism, and source
criticism.^' In this study, the process of exegetical analysis and understanding of Sarkar's and other
texts is informed by the philosophical hermeneutics of Hans-Georg Gadamer, otherwise termed
dialogical hermeneutics. Dialogical hermeneutics, while taking into account the historicity and reader-
response bias of the reader when reading texts, does not offer concrete practical guidelines on the
exegetical act itself Its aims are directed to a philosophical discussion of the dynamics and
problematic of the act of textual reading and in fact of all acts of interpretation. The practical
guidelines for reading the texts are derived from Connolly's^^ appropriation of Hiisserl's
'phenomenological reduction' in the service of textual exegesis. Hiisserl's phenomenology and its
application in textual exegesis will be discussed in the next section.
Hans-Georg Gadamer^^ and Stanley Fish^^ are instmctive in their argument that all exegeses
necessarily involve presuppositions on the part of the reader. The accumulated life-experience of the
exegete will inevitably influence, and in fact determine, the way texts are read. Gadamer's notions of
'effective-historical consciousness' (wirkungsgeschichtliches Bewusstsein), the dialogical nature of the
'fusion of horizons' (Horizontverschmelzung), the critical interplay between the reader's 'prejudice'
(Vorurteile) and the text's 'topic of conversation' (die Sache selbst), as well as his emphasis on
application (Anwendung) as an 'essential moment of all understanding',^^ are highly relevant in
approaching the present study.

'^ For a general introduction to the nature of hermeneutics and hermeneutical process, see Werner G. Jeanrond,
'Hermeneutics', in A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation, ed. by R. J. Coggins and J. L. Houlden (London:
SCM Press, 1990), pp. 282-284; and J. I. H. McDonald, 'Hermeneutical Circle', in A Dictionary of Biblical
Interpretation, ed. by R. J. Coggins and J. L. Houlden (London: SCM Press, 1990), pp. 281-282.
'* See John Muddiman, 'Form Criticism', in A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation, pp. 240-243.
" See David J. A. Clines, 'Holistic Interpretation', in A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation, pp. 292-295.
'* See Margaret Davies, 'Literary Criticism', in A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation, pp. 402-405.
" See Robert C. Tannehill, 'Narrative Criticism', in A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation, p. 488-489.
^ See C. M. Tuckett, 'Redaction Criticism', in A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation, pp. 580-582.
^' See C. M. Tuckett, 'Source Criticism (New Testament)', in A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation, pp. 646-
648.
^^ For a philosophical discussion, see Hans-Georg Gadamer, Philosophical Hermeneutics, trans, and ed. by
David E. Linge (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1976). As mentioned in footnote 11, Gadamerian
hermeneutics is considered a postmodern reading style.
^^ On the application of the phenomenological approach to textual exegesis, see Peter Connolly,
'Phenomenological Exegesis and Patanjali's Yoga Sutras', in Aspects of Religion: Essays in Honour of Ninian
Smart (Toronto Studies in Religion 8), ed. by Peter Masefield and Donald Wiebe (New York: Peter Lang
Publishing, 1994), pp. 207-232.
^^ Edmund Husserl, 'Phenomenology', in The Continental Philosophy Reader, ed. by Richard Kearney and Mara
Rainwater (London: Routiedge, 1996), p. 18.
^^ Gadamer, Philosophical Hermeneutics.
^' Stanley Fish, Is There a Text in This Class? The Authority of Interpretive Communities (Cambridge, Mass.:
Harvard University Press, 1980).
^^ Charles R. Ringma, Gadamer's Dialogical Hermeneutic: The Hermeneutics ofBultmann, of the New
Testament Sociologists and of the Social Theologians in Dialogue with Gadamer's Hermeneutic (The University
of Queensland: PhD Dissertation, 1991), pp. 25-65.
26
 Gadamer's central thesis is that all understanding takes place in the context of dialogue,
between text and reader, person and person, object and observer. He sees his hermeneutic not as a
particular methodology for textual interpretation or a specific methodology of the human sciences.
Rather, Gadamer's hermeneutics is aimed at understanding all that can be understood, and inquiring
into the nature of such human understanding. It is based on the notion that all human understanding is
fundamentally historical and linguistic, and that understanding is arrived at dialectically. Gadamer
posits that in all acts of understanding, effective-historical consciousness is inevitably operative; that
is, the historical phenomenon that the reader seeks to understand is, together with its effects, already
incorporated as part of the interpreter's consciousness or horizon. In this sense, the reader is never a
blank slate approaching an extemal phenomenon that exists in its pristine primordial and objective
state. The reader brings into the hermeneutical situation a culturally and historically conditioned
consciousness that has imbibed the effects of the phenomenon in question. This leads to the corollary
notion of fusion of horizons (Horizontverschmelzung), wherein the reader and the text are each located
within a particular situation or horizon (Horizont) of its own, which is never static. In Gadamer's
words, 'the horizon of the past, out of which all human life lives and which exists in the form of
tradition, is always in motion'.^* The meeting of the reader and the text entails a to-and-fro movement
of conversation, dialogue, question-and-answer between the two horizons. Ringma describes this
fusion of horizons as the production of textual meaning through the reader's ideas and
preunderstandings, while at the same time allowing the reader's present horizon to be risked 'in
listening to the claims of the text.'^'
In emphasizing the crucial importance of the reader's horizon in any act of understanding,
Gadamer critiques the Enlightenment's total rejection of tradition and authority while guarding against
the uncritical acceptance of tradition. He stresses the fundamental role of the tradition in which we are
embedded, and consequently our prejudice (Vorurteile) in the act of textual understanding. The very
questions and issues we bring to the text constitute our Vorurteile, our being-in-the-world, that enables
us to engage the text and produce meanings relevant to our time. Thus, an objectively-neutral, value-
free, and ahistorical reader simply does not exist, according to Gadamer. This does not, however,
imply that the reader's prejudices remain unchallenged by the topic of the text, die Sache selbst.
Rather, these prejudices may need to be discarded or changed as the text is allowed to speak for itself.
One last characteristic of Gadamer's hermeneutic is the cmcial role of application
(Anwendung) in the defining moment of understanding.^" Application in Gadamer's sense does not
mean that the reader first understands and then applies that knowledge in reality, but rather that the
very act of understanding itself, as mediated through our historicity, questions and issues, that is, our
Vorurteile, implies an application of knowledge. In other words, as we engage the text in dialogue

^' Hans-Georg Gadamer, Truth and Method (London: Sheed and Ward, 1979), p. 271. This is Gadamer's classic
work on hermeneutics, which gives an overview and details of his approach to human understanding.
^'Ringma (1991), p.57.

27
through our Vorurteile, we actually apply who we are and what we know in the very act of
understanding and interpretation. The other side of Anweruiung is that of the claims that the text
makes on us as readers, that is, the application of the subject matter of the text on the horizon of the
reader. As Ringma suggests, this second dimension of Anwendung is as important as the fu-st in
Gadamer's hermeneutic, and it is this possibility of the text making its claims on the reader that
enables subjectivity to be overcome. Ringma concludes:

Gadamer's notion of Anwendung is an essential outworking of his hermeneutic concept

that the Vorurteile of the interpreter's horizon need to be brought into dialogue with the
claims of the text in such a way that neither the one nor the other dominates but leads
to a mediation... This dialectical dimension in the fusion of horizons, rather than
simply the application of the text to the present, constitutes for Gadamer an argument
for overcoming subjectivity. The interpreter does not simply read the text, the text also
reads the interpreter.^'

Fish (1980), the pioneer of reader-response theory, emphasises the contextual nature of all
interpretations, in that they necessarily occur within interpretive communities.^^ Such interpretive
communities see and understand the same text in ways different from one another as a result of the
different presuppositions each brings to the situation. Each community shares common interpretive
strategies which predispose its members to seeing and understanding any text in the way peculiar to
that community. A given text may even appear to be clearly different to members of the same
community over time.
It is pertinent to acknowledge my own reader-response bias, especially in light of the foregoing
discussion. This study of Sarkar's AM is approached with a specific viewpoint conditioned by
eighteen years of experience and study as a practising Buddhist, in the traditions of Sri Lankan and
Thai vipassand, Vietnamese Zen, and Tibetan Lam-rim and Dzog-chen. In the past seven years, I
have also been a committed practitioner of AM meditation and lifestyle as taught by Sarkar. This
implies that the presuppositions and questions I bring to the texts are a product of my spatio-temporal
location within the dynamic synthesis of two interpretive communities - that of practising AM
devotees and that of contemporary Asian Buddhist meditators. In addition, my four years of Westem
academic and professional training in a secular university has a notable contribution to make to my
"reader's horizon'.^^ In reading the texts of AM and other Indian traditions, I am necessarily
influenced by this life experience in the way I respond to the writings. This response is not the result

^° I am indebted in Ringma (1991, pp. 59-65) for his clear and critical exposition of Gadamer's concept of
Anwendung.
^'Ringma (1991), p. 65.
32
Fish, pp.275-277. See also Margaret Davies, 'Reader-Response Criticism', in A Dictionary of Biblical
Interpretation, ed. by R. J. Coggins and J. L. Houlden (London: SCM Press, 1990), pp. 578-580.
^^ From the point of view of intertextuality, the multiverse of discourse in which I, as reader, am embedded is
indeterminable. I can only highlight certain significant facets of this discursive field. It may be that, as
Inayatullah suggested, this discursive field can transcend itself through spiritual practices into a space of meta-
discursive silence, engendering subsequent fresh readings of the texts. But that is another story.
28
of a deliberate, conscious process of thought and argument, but is rather a given background to the
entire hermeneutical enterprise. This totality of life experience, and issues and questions arising
therefrom, constitute my Vorurteile - the horizon of the reader that engages in a game-like dialogue
with the horizon of the texts under study. Such an approach may engender enriched readings of
Sarkar's texts and create new epistemological spaces for a fresh understanding of Sarkar and his
visionary teachings.
Dialogical hermeneutics, as an attempt to understand what constitutes textual reading and
interpretation, is open to several criticisms. Davey (1985)^'* describes two substantial charges coming
from Jiirgen Habermas, the major proponent of German critical theory, namely (1) that the allegedly
universally-valid pre-understandings, which are essential to the entire hermeneutical effort, could
logically be the product of distorted communication and false consensus and thus open to doubt; and
(2) that hermeneutics is unable to reflexively critique itself or the reader's pre-understandings for any
ideological distortion or prejudice. Ringma (1999)^^ makes a clear and broad survey of other
significant critics including Betti (1962; 1980), Hirsch (1965; 1967; 1975; 1976), Ricoeur (1976;
1981; 1986), and Caputo (1987). In summary, these criticisms are subsumed under the charge of
relativism on one hand, and the charge of 'perpetuating an uncritical assimilation of tradition'^^ on the
other. Betti and Hirsch have both extensively criticised Gadamer's hermeneutics; here, it suffices to
say that they see Gadamer's hermeneutics as suffering from 'loss of objectivity', 'subjective
arbitrariness', and 'a root form of critical scepticism'.^^ Ricoeur also charges Gadamer with having
too weak an idea of objectivity, and 'seeks to strengthen the notion of objectivity by developing a
theory of language and the utilisation of structuralism in the interpretive process'.^* On a more
radical note, Caputo, following Derrida's deconstmctionism but without going as far, charges
Gadamer with holding on to a unified conception of tradition suggestive of metaphysical presence, and
for failing to accept the 'rupture, discontinuity, and dismption' of all traditions, that is, 'the flux in
which we are caught up'.^'
Without going too deeply into counter-arguments in Gadamer's favour, the charge of
relativism can be safely countered by noting that Gadamerian hermeneutics by no means privileges the
interpreter's subjective understandings over the text. In actuality, the text is deliberately allowed to
make its claims on the interpreter; and though 'the text's meaning is evoked by the questions of the
interpreter ... those questions are also modified by listening to the text.'"*" As for the charge of
conservatism with respect to tradition, and the failure to see texts as characterised by mptures rather

^* Nicholas Davey, 'Habermas's Contribution to Hermeneutic Theory', Journal of the British Society for
Phenomenology, vol. 16, no. 2 (May 1985), p. 109.
^^ Charles R. Ringma, Gadamer's Dialogical Hermeneutic: The Hermeneutics ofBultmann, of the New
Testament Sociologists and of the Social Theologians in Dialogue with Gadamer's Hermeneutic (Heidelberg:
Universitatsverlag C. Winter, 1999), pp. 68-103.
^* Ringma (1999), p. 103.
"Ringma (1999), pp. 74-77.
^'Ringma(1999), pp. 88-89.
^'Ringma (1999), pp. 99-100.

29
than continuity in understanding, it can be said that Gadamer's fusion of horizons contains within
itself the necessary potential for 'the present to hear afresh the horizon of the past to the point where
both the present and the past can be critically appropriated anew.'"' This kind of reappropriation
constitutes for Gadamerian hermeneutics its in-built critical reflexivity. In addition, the very
awareness of and insight into one's Vorurteile constitutes, in however limited a way, a kind of
reflexivity with respect to the dialogical hermeneutic and, as such, acts as a mechanism against
uncritical assimilation of tradition.
Ringma also includes some other critics who are basically sympathetic to Gadamer's central
position but critical of some aspects of his hermeneutic, namely Bemstein (1983; 1985; 1986), Wamke
(1987), Weinsheimer (1985), and Tracy (1981; 1984). hi summary, these charges relate to (1)
Gadamer's ambiguity with respect to what is tmth and how it can be discerned; (2) his 'non-critical
synthesis' of tradition; "^ (3) his inadequate treatment of method; and (4) his 'too sanguine notion of
tradition and his polemic against all method.''*^ With respect to the first charge, it can be argued that,
for Gadamer, tmth emerges when the reader's horizon, 'in the dialectic of question and answer, is
brought into dialogue with the horizon of the text'.'" Both the claims of the text and the reader's
Vorurteile have to be risked in the ensuing conversation, and are by no means absolute givens. As for
the second charge, Ringma asserts that:

Not only does Gadamer explicitly deny the charge of conservatism ..., but his entire
thesis is that through Anwendung we appropriate tradition in new ways as we approach
the past with our particular Vorurteile. Thus while the text may press our Vorurteile to
possible re-evaluation, our Vorurteile also press the text of the past with new concems
and issues. Thus there is always a new and critical appropriation of fradition."^

This counterargument can be similarly applied to the charges of Habermas described previously. It is
possible that in the applicative moment of understanding, the reader's Vorurteile, informed by the
Habermasian stance of ideological critique, are able to press the text with issues of power, knowledge,
and communication, and thus appropriate the textual tradition in critically new ways. Thus
Gadamerian dialogue between reader and text still holds because Habermasian critique can be applied
as an integral component of the reader's Vorurteile. The third charge can be sustained, as Gadamer
does not aim, by his hermeneutics, to prescribe a specific technique for studying texts; rather he seeks
to question the very foundations of what understanding is and how one is to approach the
understanding of the human sciences, arts, and culture. It remains possible to supplement Gadamer's
hermeneutic with methods of textual exegesis that are applied within the context of Gadamerian

''°Ringma(1999), pp. 80-81.

"' Ringma (1999), p. 102.
"^Ringma (1999), p. 71.
"^ Ringma (1999), p. 74.
"" Ringma (1999), p. 70.
'•'Ringma (1999), p. 71.
30
dialogue, as will be discussed later. Finally, it remains to be said that Gadamer is not against all
methods per se, but against sole application of 'objectivistic methodologies'. Gadamer's
hermeneutic is based on the argument that:

... all knowledge, including scientific knowledge, is subject to effective-historical

consciousness and the radical nature of our "thrownness in the world"... No method
can eliminate this reality and as such all knowledge requires hermeneutical reflection.

Inayatullah (1999) discusses seven epistemological approaches to the study of Sarkar's texts,
in particular his texts on PROUT. ** These will now be reviewed in tum. What Inayatullah calls the
applied approach consists in 'taking the categories of PROUT as a given and applying them to various
historical events.'"' As this approach, according to Inayatullah, fails to question the very categories
themselves, there can occur a self-selection bias in the use of those categories to interpret socio-
historical events. This approach may be suitable, though not particularly objective, for the study of
PROUT, but is in any case unsuitable for the present study.
The empirical approach is based on the operationalisation, measurement, and analysis of so-
called data or indicators in order to prove or disprove a hypothesis. Philosophical objections to this
approach include the assumed but not necessarily valid distinction between language and extra-
linguistic reality, instrumental and rationalistic reductionism, and denial of theory as deeper myth,
action, or vision.'" This approach may be suited to a social-scientific study of religion but not to the
expository nature of the present study.
Thirdly, the comparative approach is mentioned by Inayatullah as a way of comparing
PROUT with other social movements in terms of various categories, which themselves are embedded
within a specific discourse. While this approach allows for a taxonomy of PROUT to be created, it
does pose problems of ahistoricity and non-reflexivity with regard to the categories of comparison."
However, in relation to the present study, the comparative approach undertaken in the context of
dialogical hermeneutics may shed new light on the spiritual categories of Sarkar and others, and even
facilitate deeper appreciation of links and divergences, historical or otherwise.
The translation approach, the fourth of Inayatullah's seven methods, attempts to take the
language and categories of PROUT and translate them into another tradition. The problem with this is
that
... any attempt to translate involves not just a problem of syntax, but a problem of
discursive practices, that is, a problem of the deeper values and stmctures embedded in

"* Ringma (1999), p. 74.

"^Ringma (1999), p. 73.
*^ Sohail Inayatullah, Situating Sarkar: Tantra, Macrohistory & Alternative Futures (Maleny: Gurukula Press,
1999), pp. 137-146.
"' Inayatullah, Situating, p. 137.
'" Inayatullah, Situating, p. 138.
" Inayatullah, Situating, p. 139.
31
 various ways of thinking, or 'languaging', such that a translation may miss not only the
entire stmcture of a perspective but critical categories as well.

The framing approach closely resembles the translation approach, but applies the categories in
question within the framework of various disciplines (such as systems theory, future studies) rather
than that of historical and cultural traditions. The problems of this approach are similar to those of the
preceding one.
The phenomenological approach is upheld by Inayatullah as a way of examining how Sarkar
sees himself and how his theory creates its stmcture in its own terms. While Inayatullah argues that
the phenomenological process 'reduces the distances between author, text, and audience', and creates
a 'multi-layered dialog','" it fails to critique the subject matter itself and to uphold a historical
perspective. However, from the previous discussion on Gadamer's dialogical hermeneutics, it is clear
that typological phenomenology in the context of Gadamerian dialogue has the potential for self-
critique and for partaking in effective-historical consciousness.
Lastiy, the postmodem/poststructuralist approach is postulated by Inayatullah as an
examination of Sarkar's 'linguistic discourse, the way that it is constmcted, the monuments of
language and power in front of us.'^^ While this approach reveals how power, knowledge, and reaUty
inter-exist, and creates a richer understanding of the texts in question, it is more suited to a global and
higher-order analysis of Sarkar's discourses than to a preliminary and intimate understanding of the
overall structure and content of his spiritual concems. Accordingly, this approach will not be adopted
in the present study.
Sarkar himself has something to say about the use of language in communicating and
understanding the spiritual:

That which comes within the orbit of the mind is but a relative tmth, not an etemal
tmth, and so it will come and go. Scriptures and mythologies are like stacks of bricks:
they are only arranged in layers, bearing no significance or intrinsic value. How can
they describe or explain that ultimate entity which is beyond the scope of the mind? ...
the best metaphor to describe this profound mystery is the soundless communication
between a deaf and dumb person for this intuitional science is so extremely subtle that
the mind or the senses cannot adequately express it.'^

By implication, even as I engage in dialogue with Sarkar's texts, conditioned by my Vorurteile and
applying the method of phenomenological exegesis to them, it can be argued from Sarkar's
perspective that the final and direct understanding of the spiritual can only take place through that

'^ Inayatullah, Situating, p. 140.

'^ Inayatullah, Situating, p. 142.
''Ibid.
" Ibid.
'* Anandamurti, SS Part 3 (Third Edition), trans. Vijayananda (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1992) pp
97-98.
32
which is beyond mind and language. Inayatullah describes Sarkar's hermeneutical effort as ultimately
'to transcend mind through activities such as meditation, or through koans ... [whereby] the
practitioner is forced out of mind; the self then no longer is constituted in ego, but in itself, in
unmediated, inexpressible consciousness.''' Thus, 'through action commitments, spiritual practices,
more of the real can be accessible to the spiritual aspirant.'" Short of such complete and transcendent
knowledge, a historically-sensitive phenomenological exegesis embedded within the space of
dialogical hermeneutic vsdll suffice for the present.

2.4 Husseri's Phenomenology and Textual Exegesis

While Gadamer's dialogical hermeneutic articulates the underlying dynamics of textual exegesis, it is
silent on specific methods that can facilitate the actual work of examining the texts. For such a
method, I tum to the tool of phenomenological exegesis proposed by Connolly." Before discussing
Connolly's method of exegesis, it is necessary to mention the origins and principles of
phenomenology espoused in the philosophy of Husserl.
Husseri's phenomenology advocates that human consciousness is necessarily intentional and
that all 'appearances' to the mind are inevitably related to the "objects of appearance' '^ In other
words, the intentional nature of consciousness determines that consciousness is always consciousness
of something, never consciousness qua consciousness per se. To gain access to phenomenological
data experienced within one's consciousness, Husserl argues for the use of 'phenomenological
reduction' as method. According to him, phenomenological reduction has two aspects: noetic and
noematic. The noetic aspect is the practice of a methodical and rigorously consistent bracketing, or
epoche, of the objects of consciousness from the prejudices, assumptions, and interpretations of the
observer. The noematic aspect of phenomenological reduction, according to Husserl, consists of '...
methodically practiced seizing and describing of the multiple 'appearances' as appearances of their
objective units and these units as units of component meanings accming to them each time in their
appearances'*' This aspect is also termed eidetic reduction, or in the terminology of Smart,
typological phenomenology. Typological phenomenology, as applied to the study of religion,
involves '... a systematic typology of forms of religious belief and practice. '^^
The noetic aspect of epoche, where all subjective biases are ideally bracketed from the object
of investigation, implies a presuppositionless exegesis yihen appUed to the reading of texts. This is,
however, impossible from the stanc^oint of Gadamer's dialogical hermeneutic, since the reader and
the text are inextricably enmeshed in a fusion of their respective horizons. Thus, reflexivity of
consciousness can never successfully bracket subjective bias from objective phenomenological data.

'^ Inayatullah, Situating Sarkar, p. 144.

'^ Inayatullah, Situating, p. 145
'^ Connolly (1994).
*> Husserl, p. 15.
*' Husserl, p. 18.

33
 consciousness can never successfully bracket subjective bias from objective phenomenological data.
At best, reflexivity can indicate the presence and characteristics of the reader's horizon and allow for
the interplay of text and reader without steering into the Scylla of uncritical textual authority or the
Charybdis of subjective fantasy.
The present thesis accepts Gadamer's dialogical hermeneutic as its primary dynamic but
utilises the second noematic aspect of Hiisserl's phenomenological method - eidetic reduction - for
the purpose of enabling a typology and comparison of dialogically produced textual meanings.
Connolly suggests that, while the principle of eidetic reduction cannot be directly applied to textual
exegesis, it nevertheless offers valuable guidelines. The principle of typological phenomenology
seeks to remove the exegete outside the worldview of the author without falling into reductionism. In
constructing a typology, the phenomenologist derives, from specific phenomena uncovered through
the initial investigation, more general and abstract categories called 'types'. In the context of textual
exegesis, this involves, in addition to the 'content-filled, large-scale identification of "types'", the
discemment of 'formal pattems and stmctures' within the text. Connolly expresses it thus:

Thus, when interpreting a text the phenomenologically-guided exegete will seek to

'step into the shoes of the author(s)/compiler(s) and consider their aims in creating it
(empathy), and to supplement this with an analysis of the more formal aspects of the
work such as recurring constructions and pattems in the organisation of information
(typology).'"

In the process of type identification and pattem discemment, a dialogical movement between text and
reader naturally occurs. The horizon of the reader affects how this happens and what types and
pattems are extracted, while the horizon of the text simultaneously and dialectically presses the reader
to enter into its field of meanings.
In the case of the present study of AM, the aim is, through the use of the techniques of
typological phenomenology or eidetic reduction within the context of dialogical hermeneutics, to
discover and delineate the essential concepts in the spiritual narratives of Sarkar.*" I attempt to explain
and elaborate on the themes and concepts using corroborative evidence from within the texts
themselves, and through cross-references to identical or related concepts in secondary and tertiary
material. In other words, various 'types' of concepts are first identified and classified into an overall
framework, which is in tum used to further extract similar and/or related concepts that are then placed
within that very framework. These concepts are systematically analysed and elucidated with the aim

*^ Connolly, p. 208.
*" Criticisms levelled against phenomenological study of religion include its extremely subjective approach, the
questionable nature of its supposed value-free examination of religious phenomena, and its interpretive bias
when selectively focussing on certain items out of the vast multiplicity of religious phenomena. These problems
are largely sublated by the inherentiy dialogical nature of textual reading, as discussed in this chapter. For a
detailed though slightiy dated overview of phenomenological and historical methods, see Ursula King,
'Historical and Phenomenological Approaches to the Study of Religion', in Frank Whaling (ed.). Contemporary
Approaches to the Study of Religion. Volume 1: Humanities (Berlin: Mouton Publishers, 1983), pp. 29-164
34
of gaining a clearer and more decisive understanding of Sarkar's world. In short, a systematic and
coherent picture of Sarkar's philosophy-praxis as presented by AM emerges from this oscillating
process of form/content identification and discemment of pattems and relationships, practised in the
dialogical space between texts and reader.

35
 Chapter 3
Sarkar's Universe and Beyond

3.1 Introduction
This chapter begins the joumey into Sarkar's conception of the ultimate and his vision of the origin
and destination of the universe. Sarkar's conception of the ultimate is clearly theistic but combined
with a strong monism, so that it may be best described as 'cosmotheistic'. In other words, in this
chapter, we are exploring simultaneously Sarkar's theology, ontology, and cosmology. The seamless
whole of the Indian worldview tends to be divided into several separate domains when conceptual
categories derived from Westem philosophy (which assumes clear demarcations between various
fields of study) are applied to it. Nevertheless, such categorisation does provide a useful means of
analysing and perhaps better understanding some salient aspects of Sarkar's ideas, provided the total
picture is not lost sight of In the application of such categories, and in the attempt to understand
Sarkar's thought, the dialogical fusion of horizons becomes obvious. The categories, being a part of
the 'horizon' that I, as a reader/researcher, bring to the texts, dialectically engage with the texts' 'topic
of conversation' to produce meanings that form the textual understanding we seek.
In the sections that follow, Sarkar's understanding of the process of cosmic and biological
evolution is delineated, with special attention to the terminology, both traditional and new, that he
applies in his discourse. Old meanings, new re-interpretations, and conceptual innovations are
explored. As Sarkar's interpretation of many philosophical concepts is common to the general Indian
heritage (e.g. his interpretation of om), the statements that I present as his interpretation do not
necessarily imply that he alone holds this view. In this and the next three chapters, I merely present
Sarkar's thought as it is, leaving the task of sorting out what is old and what is new in his thought to
Chapters 7 and 8.
Sarkar's reconciling of creation and evolution in his cosmology, and his concept of God as the
tri-aspect cosmic consciousness - nirguna brahma, saguna brahma, and tdraka brahma - are
explored in detail, as is his philosophical interpretation of krsna and siva. Sarkar's ontology of pure
consciousness as the co-emergent ground of all animate and inanimate entities, together with his
understanding of the nature of the 'self (atman) are discussed. Finally, his ideas of cosmic and
spiritual evolution are linked to his theory of acoustics, samskdra, death and rebirth. A concluding
summary of Sarkar's spiritual cosmology then follows.

3.2 Ontology and Theology

The Indian mind has for millennia preoccupied itself with ideas of the ultimate and the divine, the
development of which has reached heights of sophistication unique in the religious history of
humankind. Sarkar, bom and bred on Indian soil, participated in this Indian quest. What is
exceptional about his contribution is the way in which he has redefined many of the terms used in
36
traditional Indian systems of thought, expanded their meanings, and in some cases broken away
totally from ancient and classical modes of Indian thinking. Sarkar's range of interests is not limited
to spiritual and social philosophy, but includes a critique, both intellectual and practical, of Indian
forms of spiritual praxis and both Indian and global socio-political realities. The entire edifice of his
thought rests, directiy or indkecUy, on his view of what constitutes the ultimately real - the very
ground of our existence and the universe.

3.2.1 l^iva and iSakti^

Sarkar begins the first verse (sloka) of his AS with the pronouncement, 'sivasaktydtmakam brahma',
translated as 'The Cosmic Entity is the composite of Consciousness and Operative Principle' ^ For
Sarkar, the ultimate is brahma or 'cosmic entity',^ and it has two aspects, siva or 'consciousness' and
sakti or 'operative principle', much as a single piece of paper has two sides. He emphasises that siva
and sakti, while distinct in function, are nevertheless indivisible and singular in essence, comparable to
fire and its ability to bum, or milk and its whiteness. In his auto-commentary on this verse, Sarkar
equates siva with purusa and sakti with prakrti, while stating that the term dtmd or atman ('soul' or
'Self) - a more common designation - can be used in the same sense as siva or purusa. Sarkar sees
siva/purusa and sakti/prakrti as two inextricably-linked aspects of one indivisible whole:

The two factors, Purusa and Prakrti, though dual in theory, are singular in spirit. Their
collective body is just like that of fire. One cannot think of fire without its special
thermal value; in the same way, one cannot think of Purusa without Prakrti in the
collective body of Brahma.*

He defines siva as the 'witnessing consciousness',' purusa as 'the witness-ship that lies quiescent in
every entity' (pure sete yah sah purusah)^ and atman as 'that which is omni-telepathic'.' Elsewhere,
he defines siva as 'welfare' and as 'cognition in its zenith status ... the Supreme Non-Atfributional
Process, the Supreme Non-Attributional Entity beyond the faculties of all existential bondages.'^ In
essence, these three concepts of siva, purusa and atman share the same meaning. Sarkar explains
atman as the subtlest and ultimate 'mirror' upon which all sensory perceptions and mental events

' Main sources for this section are Anandamurti, AS (Second Edition), trans, by Manohar Gupta and ed.
Vijayananda, Ananda Rucira, Acyutananda, and Jayanta Kumar (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1996),
pp. 1-4,20-21, and 24; Anandamitra, SPSSA: A Commentary on AS (Second Edition) (Calcutta: Ananda Marga
Publications, 1998), pp. 1-17, 26, 31-32, and 112. Supplementary sources comprise discourses scattered
throughout A V, AM/, AMP, NSS and SS.
^A5I.l,p. 1.
^ Brahma here is akin to the more familiar and gender-neutral concept of brahman.
' Prabhat Ranjan Sarkar, lAI (Seventh Edition), ed. Vijayananda, Acyutananda, and Jayanta Kumar (Calcutta:
Ananda Marga Publications, 1993), p. 1.
'A5I.l,p. 1.
%id.
''ibid.
* Anandamurti, A^55 (Third Edition), trans. Vijayananda, Ananda Rucira, and Acuytananda (Calcutta: Ananda
Marga Publications, 1995), pp. 4-6.
37
(such as cognition, emotion, and intuition) are 'reflected'. This mirror-like dtman is essentially pure
consciousness of infinite wavelength upon which all physical and mental waves are 'telepathized' or
'received from a distance'.^ He sees purusa as the ultimate witness substantiating the existence of all
activities and prakrti as the act of witnessing and that which is witnessed.'° ^iva (or dtman/purusa) is
said to function as (1) a 'non-doing witnessing entity' (akartd phalasaksibhUta) of actions and
reactions, and as (2) controller of the activity of the gunas (gunayantrakd), while simultaneously
existing as 'nucleus of the created universe' (bhdvakendrasthita). As the cosmic nucleus, siva/purusa
is known as paramasiva or purusottama}^ This concept of consciousness as the cosmic nucleus is
closely linked to the personal concept of krsna, (to be discussed in section 3.2.3).
Purusa (or siva), or in its nucleic form as purusottama (or paramasiva), manifests and radiates
itself throughout the universe by its power of cognisance (citisakti). This citisakti reflects on,
connects, and associates with its mental objects in the universe, much as rays of the sun shine equally
on all planets in the solar system and on all planetary life-forms.'^ Sarkar describes citisakti
(synonymous vfiih purusa) as possessing five qualities: (1) 'absolute purity' (suddhd) - untainted by
the three guiias of prakrti; (2) 'infinitude' (anantd) - the final witness that can never come within the
periphery of the mind; (3) 'immutability' (aparindnii) - not subjected to change in its original,
unqualified state; (4) 'non-extroversive' (apratisamkrama) - not differentiated into intemal or extemal
as it is self-contained; (5) 'witness of the reflected object' (darsitavisayitva) - knows all physical
objects, events, and aspects of the mind as the mind's subjective counterpart.'" Hence, purusa or siva
can be said to be both the ultimate 'mirror' that reflects all activities and objects, and the ultimate
'light' that enables everything to exist and be known. As the controller of the gunas (the three forces
of prakrti to be discussed later), purusa (or siva) indirectly controls the creation and evolution of the
universe, including the spiritual progress of human beings.
Elsewhere, Sarkar uses many other terms to refer to this consciousness aspect of the ultimate:
'supreme cognition', 'transcendental entity', 'transcendental cognition', "noumenal father',
"noumenal progenitor', 'supreme causal factor', "supreme progenitor', 'cosmic cognition', 'supreme
singular entity' ", Narayana ('shelter of the operative principle'),'^ and most frequently, parama
purusa ('supreme cognitive principle').'^ In contrast, he uses only a few synonymous terms to refer to

SPSSA, p. 4, defines telepathy as 'to act over a distance' and states that dtman is 'telepathic' because it
"receives mental waves over a distance'.
AS 1.7, p. 7: drkpurusah darsanam ^akti^ca.
" A 5 1.4, p. 4 and 11.15, p. 24.
'^M/, pp. 40 and 47.
Sarkar sees all created entities of the universe as thought-projections of purusa, a topic to be discussed in
section 3.3.
'"AM/Part 9, pp. 664-667.
These terms are applied throughout Sarkar's discourses in the SS and A Vcollections. For example, see
Anandamurti, SS Part 12, trans. Vijayananda and Ananda Mitra (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sanjgha,
1992), pp. 17, 40, and 70; and Anandamurti, A V Part 23, ed. Vijayananda and Acyutananda (Calcutta: Ananda
Marga Publications, 1994), pp. 8 and 113-119.
'^ Sarkar gives this interpretation of NSrSyana in SS Part 18, p. 92.
^'' Ibid
38
the operative aspect (^akti) of the ultimate, namely 'cosmic creative principle' and 'causal matrix'.
This seems to suggest a privileging of the consciousness aspect of brahma over its operative or energy
aspect. Incidentally, Sarkar consistently refers to the consciousness principle in masculine terms and
the operative principle in feminine, a practice commonly found in Hindu philosophical/religious
traditions.
Regarding the subUe relationship between siva and sakti, Sarkar consistentiy maintains the pre-
eminence of siva over sakti in several ways. First, he regards siva as the "shelter' of sakti, and as such
as containing and controlling it. Sarkar makes it clear that sakti cannot function without the expressed
permission of siva, and that no matter how vast or seemingly powerful sakti is, it still falls within the
spatio-temporal and effective jurisdiction of siva. Second, in terms of cosmic causation, siva (purusa)
is the 'material cause' as well as the 'primary efficient cause' of the universe, while sakti (prakrti) is
the 'subordinate or secondary efficient cause' as well as the 'conjunctive agency' (the linking factor
between the material and efficient causes). Sarkar says:

The distortions or expressions which are taking place in the material cause through the
efficient cause and which we call worldly manifestations, are effected by the three
gunas (attributes or binding principles: sattva, rajah and tamah) of Prakrti. This
accounts for Prakrti being the linking force between the efficient cause and the
material cause. So the firmness or feebleness of the object-body fully depends upon
the degree of the influence of Prakrti.^^

Third, siva retains the authority to bestow on or withdraw from sakti the power to act in the creation
and evolution of this universe. In other words, it is siva that decides when and whether its 'body' is to
be acted upon by sakti, and when and whether it is to be freed from sakti's influence. Sarkar
comments:

In the process of evolution, Purusa gives Prakrti the authority to work, and She goes
on working. The subtle Purusa goes on attaining cmdity gradually due to the bondage
of the three gunas of Prakrti. In the ultimate state of His cmdity, Purusa slowly and
gradually keeps shrivelling up the opportunity and liberty of Prakrti previously given
to Her, and thus the cmdified Purusa, gradually regaining His subtlety, retums to His
own ultimate characteristic state...It is now abundantly clear that even though Prakrti
is free to make honest use of Her acquired power, the attainment or non-attainment of
this power depends on Purusa, or Citisakti (Cognitive Principle), and so we have to
say, Prakrti is but the characteristic of Purusa Himself - sakti sd sivasya saktih.^

Whether this pre-eminence of siva is indicative of patriarchal subordination of the female, a

not implausible proposition considering India's traditional male-dominated culture, is a question
beyond the scope of this thesis. At this stage, it is sufficient to notice Sarkar's apparent preoccupation

'* For example, see AVPart 33, p. 41.

"AyPart33, p. 3.
^*'AyPart33, pp. 3-4.
39
with the consciousness aspect of the ultimate at the expense of the operative aspect, a fact that will
later prove to be significant in Sarkar's overall soteriological praxis. The causal relationships between
siva, sakti and the universe can be diagrammed as follows:

^iva = material Siva = primary ^ /

cause a efficient cause w/
/ The
Sakti = conjunctive Universe
Sakti = secondary factor
efficient cause

Sakti is also termed prakrti, which Sarkar defines as the 'force creating objects' (prakaroti iti
prakrti)}^ Prakrti is a composite of three gunas, namely sattvaguna or 'sentient force', rajoguna or
'mutative force', and tamoguna or "static force', in order of decreasing subtlety. Sarkar defines guna
as 'the cosmic force whereby the universal consciousness is bound to various shapes or ideas'. ^ This
definition implies that pure consciousness can be transformed into both physical objects ('shapes') and
mental objects or thoughts ('ideas'). This observation will later prove to be instmctive when
interpreting Sarkar's model of teleological cosmogony, brahmacakra.
Sattvaguna, the sentient force, is the most subtle of the three, and its function is to bind or
qualify infinite, pure consciousness to form the macrocosmic mahat, the feeling of 'I exist' on a
macrocosmic scale.^^ This macrocosmic mahat is theoretically but not practically different from the
original state of unqualified consciousness. This is a stage in evolution when consciousness has a
subtie feeling of 'I exist', in other words, self-awareness. In the individual mind, the sentient force
creates the feeling of 'I exist' or self-awareness on a microcosmic scale, imparts a sense of happiness
and relief, and awakens the desire for spu-itual liberation. Rajoguna, the mutative force, further binds
or qualifies the macrocosmic mahat to form the macrocosmic aham, or the sense of 'doer-F on a
macrocosmic scale. This stage of consciousness is characterised by the feeling of 'I do' or the
reflexive sense of agency within the field of consciousness. It is a stage cmder than the preceding one.
In the individual mind, the mutative force creates the microcosmic aham, and imparts a sense of
activity, restiessness and personal agency. Finally tamoguna, the static force, binds consciousness to
form the macrocosmic citta, 'done-I', also known as the macrocosmic 'mental plate' or "mind-stuff.
This mental plate is the objective portion of the cosmic mind or brahmamaruis^ (which is the
composite of mahat, aham, and citta). Further action of the static force on the macrocosmic citta

21
55Part l,p. 7.
^^ These translations and definitions of guna are taken from SS Part 1, p. 8.
Translations of mahat, aham, and citta are taken from Anandamurti, AMEP (Calcutta: Ananda Marga
Pracaraka Sanjgha, 1998), p. 6.
^" Anandamurti, AMP Part 3, trans. Vijayananda and ViSvarupananda (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka
Sarngha, 1988), p. 198.
40
results in the formation of the five fundamental factors - ethereal, aerial, luminous, liquid, and solid
factors - that ultimately combine to form the inanimate universe. In the individual, the static force
causes a portion of the mind to assume the objective forms that it perceives or thinks. This objective
portion of the mind is the citta. The static force also imparts a sense of inertia, dullness, and
heaviness, and is responsible for the accumulation of reactions to individual actions. The preceding
description is a highly condensed version of sancara, the first half of the brahmacakra, 'cosmic cycle
of creation'. (A fuller discussion of brahmacakra is given in section 3.3.)
Apart from its composition as the three gunas, sakti has another role to play. In the creative
phase of the cosmogonic process and throughout biological and human evolution, sakti is also known
as mdyd, usually rendered 'illusion'.^' In the Sarkarian sense, however, mdyd denotes a real force that
influences pure consciousness and its derivatives rather than an illusory quality of the created world.
Mdyd exists in several forms: (1) visnumdyd is the aspect of mdyd that creates the universe out of the
raw material of pure consciousness (by definition, this may be equated to the three gunas during the
cosmogonic phase); (2) yogamdyd is the force which attracts the individual mind toward brahma and
motivates it to act (most probably identical to samvit and hlddim sakti, to be discussed later); (3)
visvamdyd is the force responsible for the mind's inability to perceive created objects as fundamentally
consciousness (may be akin to the 'concealing' effect of dvarani sakti - see discussion below); (4)
anumdyd is the force that produces an incessant whirl of thoughts, weaving an imaginary world in
persons' minds and distancing them from the realities of life (may be akin to the distorting effects of
mental propensities due to viksepi sakti - see discussion below). The totality of these four forms of
mdyd is termed mahdmdyd or 'great illusion'
Mdyd can be classed into two key categories in terms of its effects on the individual mind.
These two categories of mdyd act on the mind in two directions - centripetal and cenfrifugal. The
centripetal force is known as vidyd mdyd ('force of knowledge'); its action is to lead the aspirant
progressively inwards into final merger with brahma. Vidyd mdyd has two aspects: samvit sakti
('force of spiritual awakening') - the force that awakens in the aspirant the urge to move beyond
mundane existence and to seek a more meaningful life; and hlddini sakti ('force bestowing happiness
and bliss'; also known as rddhikd sakti) - the force that inspires the aspirant to undertake a concrete
path of practice towards the highest spiritual goal.^^ Such spiritual practice then confers upon the
aspirant increasing happiness and the bliss of brahma. The centrifugal force is known as avidyd mdyd
('force of ignorance'); its action is diametrically opposed to that of vidyd mdyd and functions to lead
the aspirant away from brahma into the multiplicity and cmdity of the world. Avidyd mdyd also
consists of two component forces: dvarani sakti ('force of concealment') - the force that conceals the
individual mind from pure consciousness, making it falsely believe that brahma neither exists nor

^' Discussion on mdyd based on SS Part 19, p. 35.

^' 55 Part 24, pp. 6-7. Also SPSSA, p. 13.
41
witnesses its activities; and viksepi sakti ('force of repulsion') - expressed in the degenerating
propensities and ideas that drift the individual away from brahma}^
Based upon my hermeneutic and phenomenological analysis of Sarkar's multiple descriptions
of sakti, correlations between the variant terminologies can be made in order to further clarify Sarkar's
thoughts on sakti. Macrocosmically, in the process of cosmogony, the three forces of prakrti can be
equated with visnumdyd as follows:

Curias (Prakrit) Maya

Sattvaguna
Rajoguna Visnumdyd
Tamoguna

Rough correlations between various elaborations of sakti/prakrti in relation to the individual mind
(microcosm) may be diagrammed as follows:

Gunas (Prakrti) Sakti Mahdmdyd

Sattvaguna Samvit sakti Vidyd Yogamdyd
Hlddini sakti
Rajoguna Viksepi sakti Avidyd Anumdyd
Tamoguna Avarani sakti Visvamdyd

The forces of vidyd and avidyd mdyd exist in and act on all living entities in the universe and
engage in a stmggle for supremacy within the minds of these entities. This constant dialectical
stmggle between vidyd and avidyd is termed the divine or cosmic sport (lild) of the infinite brahma.
On the one hand, a human being who has a measure of free will can choose to accelerate his/her
spiritual evolution by aligning with and strengthening vidyd mdyd in his/her mind. On the other,
he/she can allow avidyd mdyd to gain predominance and thus stagnate spiritually. Thus, there is both
cosmic and personal agency in the movement of life and the universe. When a spiritual aspirant
sincerely and humbly undertakes spiritual practice, and surrenders his/her ego before the divine,
he/she experiences more fully the krpd or 'grace' of brahma that shines equally on all entities. This
divine krpd is expressed in the action of hlddini sakti, which guides the aspirant in the proper direction
and imparts joy and bliss as he/she progresses along the path of practice towards mukti, 'liberation'.
Another expression of krpd is the vibrational force generated by the spuitual master, otherwise known
as the guru ^akti. The guru is the human embodiment of tdraka brahma and has the capacity to lead
the aspirant to final moksa, 'salvation'.

27
55 Part 24, p. 5. Also SPSSA, pp. 13-14.
42
 In summary, the concepts of siva and sakti can be tabulated as follows in order to highlight the
variant terminology, components and functions of each:

!§iva
• Variant names = purusa, dtman
• Cognitive faculty.
• 'Masculine' and pre-eminent.
• Material and primary efficient cause of
creation.
• Mirror-like witnessing and controlling
entity in macrocosm and microcosm.
• Nature of pure, unbom, and liberated
consciousness.
• Manifests and associates with created
entities/mental objects as citisakti
('power of cognisance').
Sakti
• Variant names: prakrti, mdyd
• Operative principle.
• 'Feminine' and subordinate.
• Secondary efficient cause and conjunctive
agency of creation.
• Comprises three gunas - sattvaguna.
rajoguna and tamoguna - that
progressively bind siva to form created
universe.
• Has vidyd (centripetal) and avidyd
(centrifugal) aspects.
• Manifests as grace (krpd) via hlddini and
guru sakti.

.28
3.2.2 Tri-aspect Brahma
Sarkar conceives of the ultimate not only functionally, in terms of the consciousness and operative
principles, but also ontologically, as existing in three characteristic states, namely nirguna, saguna,
and tdraka brahma. Nirguna brahma is the 'metempirical state',^' or the "non-qualified supreme
entity', defined as 'the state of Brahma where purusa is not influenced or qualified by prakrti'?^ In
other words, this is the wholly transcendent and unmanifest aspect of the ultimate, wherein no
attributes or qualities exist, completely beyond the mind and the universe. Sarkar also calls nirguna
brahma the 'non-attributional state' of brahma that is 'beyond the cycle of subjectivity and objectivity
(sarnkalpa-vikalpa)' and thus sdnya or vajra-sUnya (absolute void).^' Saguna brahma is the "empirical
state'^^ of brahma, or the "qualified supreme entity', defined as 'that stage of Brahma •where purusa is
influenced and qualified hy prakrti'^^. This is a less subtle state of the ultimate wherein attributes and
qualities have begun to emerge as a result of the activated influence of the operative principle. The
final stage in the metamorphosis of saguna brahma results in the formation of the created universe.
Linking the above two states of the supreme entity is Sarkar's tdraka brahma, which he defines as 'the
common point bridging the empirical state of saguna and the metempirical state of nirguna'.^* He

^* Main sources are AS 1.21-25 (pp. 14-17), II.1-5 (pp. 18-19) and 12-14 (p. 23); lAI, pp. 24-26,41-46, and 58;
AMEP, pp. 1-64. Supplementary sources comprise texts and discourses scattered throughout AM/, NSS, SPSSA,
SS as well as one tertiary AM publication. The Wisdom of Yoga.
^^AS 1.25, p. 17.
^''AMEP, p. 22.
^'AM/Parts 5-8, p. 384.
^^AS 1.25, p. n.
^^ AMEP, p. 22.
^*AS 1.25, p. 17.
43
goes on to say that 'tdraka brahma appears in sagurui (embodied) form as mahdsambhdti'. Sarkar
translates the word mahdsambhuti as [an entity] "well-created .. .to fulfil a very great purpose' and as
the 'special manifestation' of the 'Supreme Entity'.^^ The relationships among nirguna, saguna, and
tdraka brahma can be represented as foUows:^^

Tdraka brahma

Nirguna
brahma

From the above descriptions, it appears that tdraka brahma is that aspect of the cosmic entity
that functions as the intermediary between its transcendent, non-attributional state (nirguna) and its
immanent, attributional existence (saguna). In addition, this intermediary supreme existence is able to
assume an embodied form in the created universe to perform its necessary role, which, as will be
discussed later, is primarily soteriological and revolutionary in nature. Sarkar describes tdraka
brahma as the personal liberator of the universe:

The liberator is that lofty ability which helps to keep open every small or large vista of
sentient existence - that vigorous capability which fuses the hard reality of existence
with the ultimate reach of the visionary world.^^

Elsewhere he characterises tdraka brahma as a personal entity that 'guides, loves and favours His
affectionate sons and daughters', and as a 'concept of Tantra' that is "not a figure of philosophy' but 'a
creation of devotional sentiment'."" This ambiguous statement describing tdraka brahma as a
devotional creation seemingly implies that 'He' is not so much an ontological fact as a psychological
reality for those who believe and have faith in 'Him'. In other words, tdraka brahma may be a
pedagogical device that is used for the therapeutic and soteriological benefit of devotees, one that is
paradoxically efficacious if and only if taken to be an ontological reality. Such an interpretation may,

^^AS 1.25, p. n.
^^ SPSSA, p. 71.
^^ Anandamurti, AMI Part 10, trans. Vijayananda and Vishvarupananda (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka
Sarngha, 1990), p. 723.
^* Adapted from Vedaprajnananda, The Wisdom of Yoga: An Introduction to Ananda Mdrga Philosophy (Manila:
Ananda Marga Publications, 1990), p. 39.
^' TPRS, p. 148.

44
however, be criticised for its reductionist overtones - an attempt to reduce an existentially real object
of devotion to a mere concept of psychological tmth for believers. An altemative reading could be
that tdraka brahma as a concept is not a mere intellectual product derived from pure logical deduction
and argumentation, but is rather an idea resulting from an emotive-intuitional experience of ultimate
reality. Seen in this light, the statement that tdraka brahma is a creation of devotional sentiment in no
way suggests that 'He' does not exist ontologically. Instead, 'His' ontological existence, as reaUzed
through devotion, can then be expressed linguistically as the concept of tdraka brahma. Sarkar seems
to suggest that tdraka brahma may indeed grant salvation to those who seek the ultimate with
devotion:

... those who aim at moksa, where sddhand is the complete surrender of self into That
(Nirguna Brahma, the objectiess consciousness), get out of this Brahmacakra by a
tangential touch. At this point of tangential touch is the abode of Tdraka Brahma (who
resides within the scope of both Nirguna and Saguna Brahma).

Tdraka brahma manifests in the created order as the sadguru, the 'perfect spkitual master',
who has the capacity to lead all beings to salvation and to renew human civilization through his/her
revolutionary ideas and projects. The sadguru is described as mahdsambhdti, 'an entity well created
to fulfil a very great purpose', who has undergone the entire evolutionary joumey to become an
extraordinary human being with a soteriological task to perform. Sarkar differentiates his concept of
mahdsambhdti from the more familiar Indian notion of avatdra:

Incamation is an illogical hypothesis. The whole universe being created out of Him
and by Him is His incamation. The term avatdra means a "derivation", and the
application of this term to individual units who are far advanced in the process of
pratisancara is a misleading misnomer. It is illogical to consider that the Macrocosm
metamorphosed Himself directly into some unit stmcture, in most cases, a human
being. Human beings are the most evolved individual units as a class in His creation,
and every stage of the ... Mahdpurusa [elevated psychic beings] is the result of
sancara and then pratisancara. It is a gradual elevation and not an abmpt descent or
occurrence... The incamation theory, or avatdravdda, however, hypothesises that the
incarnated being is the direct descent of the Almighty, the rest of His creation
remaining unexplained as to its source of origin... In Tantra the whole creation is
known as sambhuti. When Tdraka Brahma by His own will takes the help of the five
fundamental factors (the pancabhutas). His physical entity comes within the scope of
Saguna Brahma, otherwise He is Nirguna Brahma. When Tdraka Brahma takes the
assistance of the five fundamental factors, according to Tantra, it is called His
mahdsambhdti.

Sarkar has elsewhere identified, as the two historical manifestations of tdraka brahma, Sadasiva, a
great yogi who supposedly existed seven thousand years ago, and Krsna, the great charioteer of the

""/A/,p. 46.
"' lAI, p. 45.
"^ lAI, pp. 43-46.
45
hidian classic Bhagavad Gitd who is said to have lived three and a half thousand years ago. AM
followers claim that Sarkar is the most recent human expression of tdraka brahma, though Sarkar
himself did not categorically affrnn or deny this claim.
In summary, the composition and functions of saguna, nirguna, and tdraka brahma can be
tabulated as follows:

Form of Brahma Composition Function

Nirguna Infinite, pristine consciousness Ultimate source of universe &

(purusa) with dormant prakrti. ground of existence.

Saguna (1) Consciousness qualified into: Creates, controls & witnesses the
• Mahat ] entire universe collectively and
• Aham \ Cosmic Mind each entity individually.
• Citta J
> created universe

(2) Purusottama (nucleus cosmic

consciousness) witnessing (1).

Tdraka Consciousness that is simultaneously Attracts, loves & guides all entities
qualified & unqualified by prakrti. individually and collectively
towards liberation (mukti) &
salvation (moksa).

Apart from the most commonly used schema of saguna, nirguna, and tdraka brahma, Sarkar
also categorises the cosmic entity or consciousness in several other ways. First, he describes brahma
as having the 'joint bearing' of ksara ('perishability'), aksara ('imperishability'), and niraksara
('perfect placidity or objectlessness')."" Ksara brahma is the stance in which brahma is
metamorphosed into the multitude of created objects, lifeforms, and ideas (equivalent to the cosmic
mind of saguna brahma). Aksara brahma is the stance in which brahma remains as the 'witness of all
psychic metamorphoses' (equivalent to purusottama or witnessing consciousness embedded as
nucleus of the cosmos within saguna brahma). (The concept of purusottama will be discussed in
subsection 3.2.3.) Niraksara brahma is the stance in which brahma remains unmanifested and where
'there is no question of subjectivity or objectivity' (equivalent to nirguna brahma).
Secondly, Sarkar divides brahma into vyakta ('manifest') and avyakta ('unmanifest'),"^
phenomenologically equivalent to saguna and nirguna brahma respectively. Thirdly, three
philosophical bearings are said to exist within saguna brahma: (1) bhoktrbhdva ('microcosmic
bearing' or "enjoyer'), (2) bhogyabhdva ('object of enjoyment' or 'enjoyable'), and (3) prerayitrbhdva

"^ See NSS (Third Edition); and Anandamurti, NKS.

•AM/, pp. 401-403.
45 AMI, p. 402.

46
('controlling authority')."* Phenomenologically, bhoktrbhdva appears to be the combination of mahat
and aham (qualitative phases or aspects of the self to be discussed in subsection 3.3.3), while
bhogyabhdva may be synonymous with the totality of physical and mental objects (i.e. thoughts,
ideas) of enjoyment. Prerayitrbhdva is purusottama, the 'supreme controlling entity' and witnessing
consciousness of each individual mind and every created object. It is brahma in prerayitrbhdva that is
said to inspire microcosmic minds to attain the ultimate stance of non-attributional consciousness
(nirgutia brahma). Fourthly, Sarkar divides brahma (or parama purusa) into liiiga ('qualified' or
'attributional') and alitiga ('unqualified' or 'non-attributional') types. He equates liiiga purusa with
saguna brahma and alihga purusa with nirguna brahma.
Correspondences between the various categorisations of brahma can be summed up in the
following table:

Schema 1 Schema 2 Schema 3 Schema 4 Schema 5

Saguna brahma Ksara Vyakta bhoktrbhdva Liriga
bhogyabhdva

Aksara prerayitrbhava
Nirguna brahma Niraksara Avyakta - Alitiga
Tdraka brahma - - - -

_47
3.2.3 Krsna and Purusottama
Sarkar's conception of Krsna has two levels: on one level, Krsna is the historical personality who is
said to have been involved in the great Mahabharata war in north India about three and a half thousand
years ago. On another level, krsita is a philosophical and religious concept that refers to the supreme
consciousness existing as the nucleus of the entire universe. In the second sense, krsna is synonymous
with purusottama ('highest consciousness') - the macrocosmic witnessing entity at the centre of the
universe."^ Sarkar defines purusottama thus: 'Supreme consciousness at the nucleus of the universe is
known as Paramasiva or Purusottama.'*^ The intimately personal characteristic of Krsna is also
ascribed to purusottama in many of Sarkar's discourses.
According to Ananda Marga, krsna literally means 'He who atfracts'.^° Sarkar defines the
term krsna as 'an Entity who leads others towards fulfilment, towards the perfect attainment - One
who cannot tolerate destmctive ideas or destructive elements.'^' He describes Kisna/krsna as having
the two aspects: Vraja Krsna and Parthasarathi Krsna. These two aspects represent two facets of the
personality of the historical Krsna. Vraja Krsna is the sweet and affectionate aspect of Krsna blended

"^ AM/, pp. 405-406.

"^ Main sources are AS 1.1-4,11.10 and 15; NKS, pp. 1-12 and 48-76; and SPSSA, pp. 12-17, 29-30, and 103-105.
"* NKS, p. 52 and pp. 67-76.
*^ AS 1.4, p. 4: paramasivah purusottamah visvasya kendram.
^ SPSSA, p. 30.
" NKS, p. 2.
47
with spirituality, Krsna in the role of loving friend and admired hero amongst his circle of devotees.
Parthasarathi Krsna is the firm and tough leader who, imbued with spkituality and dynamism, protects
and guides the human collective towards nobility and perfection. From the viewpoint of the spiritual
aspirant, Vraja Krsna is the focus of loving devotion and sweet surrender, one who teaches the path of
devotion and imparts aparoksa anubhUti, 'direct experience'. Similarly, Parthasarathi Krsna is the
focus of veneration and worship, one who teaches the paths of knowledge and selfless action that give
paroksa anubhuti, 'indirect experience'. The practices of Parthasarathi Krsna that give paroksa
anubhdti are seen as steps leading to the ultimate experience of aparoksa anubhdti a state of direct
and intimate experience of divine sweetness and bliss. In Sarkar's soteriology, the essential practice
leading to aparoksa anubhuti is the cultivation of devotion (bhakti yoga), while practices leading to
paroksa anubhuti include leading a moral life (through principles of yama and niyama), acquiring
spiritual knowledge (jndna yoga), and performing selfless service to society (karma yoga).
On a more philosophical level, vraja krsna is that aspect of the cosmic nucleus which attracts
all animate and inanimate entities in the universe towards itself. It is the source of the attractive force
of vidyd mdyd ('knowledge force') that exerts an introversive pull on all minds, individually and
collectively, causing them to move towards the centre of their being, which in essence is the centre of
the cosmos. The metaphor of Krsna's enchanting flute that captivates the cowherd girls of
Vrindavan^^ is used to describe this attractive power of pure consciousness as the cosmic nucleus.
This attractive power of krsna is otherwise known as love, the creative force, the sustenance, and the
culmination of the entire cosmogonic and evolutionary process. Through this love, krsna guides and
finally leads all entities back into itself In this sense, krsna is synonymous with tdraka brahma, an
intensely personal entity who inspires, guides, and blesses all spiritual aspirants with the ultimate
realisation of brahma.
Similarly, in the philosophical vein, pdrthasdrathi krsna is the guiding aspect of the cosmic
nucleus that directs all entities on to the right path and who gives order to the universe and society. It
is the intellectual and leadership faculty of the supreme consciousness which expresses itself in the
world, and which acts by inspiring and creating an ethically-based social order. Sarkar says:

He is Parthasarathi because He envelopes up the intellectual level of microcosms. That

is, human intellect gets its supply of intellect from His intellect^^.. From the
microcosmic point of view, Parthasarathi is a tremendous personality, a fiery
personality, a vigorously active personality, who brings about radical changes in the
lifestyles of human beings and gives them proper, healthy guidance.^"

52
Vrindavan is the mythological land of Krsna's childhood, where he is constantly sporting with his devoted
gopis with his playful, divine actions and melodious flute.
^^ NKS, p. 59.
54
NKS, p. 60.
48
Pdrthasdrathi krsna, in other words, is that power of the cosmic nucleus that energetically promotes
the welfare of all humans, animals and plants - through the establishment of virtue and righteousness
in the world. The nature and functions of Krsna/^rjna can be tabulated as follows:

Aspects of Krsna Function

Vraja Krsna • Gives aparoksa anubhdti (direct realisation).
• Sweet, charming facet of the historical personality who enchants
and loves all his followers impartially (personal interpretation).
• Nucleus of both macrocosm and microcosm that attracts all
entities/thought projections to itself through love (philosophical
interpretation).

Parthasarathi Kr§na • Gives paroksa anubhuti (indirect realisation).

• Tough, dynamic facet of the historical personality who protects
and guides human society towards moral and spiritual perfection
(personal interpretation).
• Nucleus of both macrocosm and microcosm that guides and
orders society/mind through firmness and discipline
(philosophical interpretation).

Both the Vraja and Parthasarathi aspects of Krsna are meant to be understood on both
historical and philosophical levels. Philosophically, they refer to the cardinal qualities and powers of
brahma as the nucleus of the cosmos. Historically, these qualities and powers are manifested in the
personality of Kr§na, the cowherd of Vrindavan and later King of Mathura. As mentioned previously,
the historical Krsna is regarded by Sarkar as the second advent of tdraka brahma (the first being
SadaSiva), who has come into the world as a perfect guru. In other words, tdraka brahma, who is also
the philosophico-rehgious krsria, manifests as the historical Krsna to attract devotees to himself and to
create a new social order based on morality.
Purusottama, a term that Sarkar often uses synonymously with krsria and tdraka brahma, is
the pure consciousness that impartially and omnisciently witnesses all phenomena in the universe,
from the spinning of the electron to the pulsation of quasars; and all activities of the mind, from
fleeting emotions to the incessant bubbling of thoughts. According to Sarkar, purusottama is the
ultimate witness of all physical, chemical, biological, as well as social and psychological phenomena,
and can see and know every thought and feeling of every living organism in the universe.
Purusottama is said to have an associative relationship with all the entities in this universe, both
individually and collectively. The associative relationship of purusottama with the universe as a
collective is termed prota yoga, while the same relationship with each and every individual entity is
termed ota yoga?^ Similarly, although Sarkar does not state this explicitly, it can be postulated that
purusottama's association with the totality of mental processes and events is prota yoga, while the
same relationship with each and every thought or feeling is ota yoga. In other words, purusottama (or

" lAI, p. 40.

49
tdraka brahma or krsna ) is not a passive, inert, and alienated witness of the drama of life, but is able
to relate to and affect every living and non-living entity (or mental object on the microcosmic level)
both individually and collectively. The relationship between purusottama and the universe can be
diagrammatically represented as follows:

Witnesses
All objects &
Individual ^ beings
object or ^— ^ collectively
Purusottama
being (prota yoga)
^ / = Paramasiva
(ota yoga)
= Krsna / h
m-~ - \ / w

In keeping with the style of many classical and contemporary Indian gurus, Sarkar quotes, in
Sanskrit, verses from the Bhagavad Gitd when attempting to explain and justify his philosophy of
tdraka brahma. Two of the most commonly quoted passages are verses 7 and 8 from Book 4 of the
Bhagavad Gitd, translated by the AM publications committee as follows:

O Bharata, at a time when dharma is distorted and adharma is ascendent, I create

myself out of my own fundamental factors 56

I incamate Myself in this world from age to age for the protection of the virtuous, the
destmction of the wicked, and the restoration of dharma.

He borrows the traditional concept of recurrent divine incamation during periods of profound human
crises to account for the advent of tdraka brahma on earth. In this way, it c£m be argued that Sarkar
does not reject outright the traditional notion of avatdra, but adapts it within the context of his
brahmacakra theory (see section 3.3), in the form of a personal liberator standing as a bridge between
manifest (saguna) and unmanifest (nirguna) consciousness. It is possible to read such adaptive
borrowing on Sarkar's part as an attempt to legitimise and contextualise his personal ideology of AM
within the overall project of the Indian religious quest.

^' DKG, p.44. Sanskrit: yadd yadd hi dharmasya gldnir bhavati bharata
abhyutthdnam adharmasya tadd 'tmdnam srjdmyaham
DKG, p. 46. Sanskrit: paritrdndya sddhundm vindidya ca duskrtdm
dharmasamsthdpandrthdya sambhavami yuge yuge
50
3.2.4 Atman and Paramdtman: Nature of the Self^*
Sarkar's concept of dtman has been discussed briefly in section 3.2.1, but is such an important concept
in his overall ideology that it warrants a separate discussion here. Sarkar explains dtman as 'that which
is omni-telepathic'^' and as the 'nucleus consciousness'.*" It exists in two functional forms:
paramdtman and jivdtman. In AM literature, paramdtman is often written as 'Atman' (with upper
case 'A') for short, which implies that the term Atman can be used in a more general sense to denote
the omni-telepathic entity, or in a more specific sense to refer to the paramdtman. In this thesis,
however, I will write the word 'Atman' in lower case italics (i.e. dtman) so as to be consistent with my
transcription policy stated in Chapter 2. I use the short-form 'dtman' to refer to both paramdtman and
fivdtman when discussing the concept in a general sense.
Paramdtman is the supreme consciousness in the role of witness of his own macrocosmic
creation, the ultimate 'mirror' that receives and reflects all the physical and psychic vibrations of his
entire universe. Stmcturally, paramdtman consists of: '(1) purusottama, the macrocosmic nucleus; (2)
purusottama's association with all creation in his extroversial movement (prota yoga); and (3)
purusottama's association with each unit creation individually (ota yoga) and (4) with all collectively
(prota yoga) in his introversial movement.'*' The extroversial and introversial movements of
purusottama are the two halves of the cosmic cycle of creation (brahmacakra or srsticakra), which
purports to explain the whole process of cosmogony, evolution, the emergence of mind and
consciousness in living organisms, and the final joumey of conscious life towards the omega point of
supreme consciousness. (A more detailed discussion of the brahmacakra will be offered in section
3.3.) The nature of paramdtman is more clearly elucidated in the tabulation below:

Paramdtman (as supreme witnessing entity) comprises:

Pratisancara (Introversial cycle) Sancara (Extroversial cycle)
1. Purusottama witnessing & associating 1. Purusottama witnessing & associating
with each object or being singly with all objects or beings collectively
(ota yoga). (prota yoga).
2. Purusottama witnessing & associating
with all objects or beings collectively
(prota yoga).

Jivdtman is the microcosmic replica of the paramdtman in the sense that it is the witness of each
individual mind, in whose light are reflected all the physical and psychic events in that individual
being. As opposed to paramdtman, the jivdtman is often written in AM literature as 'dtman' (with
lower case 'a') for short, to refer to the unit witnessing entity. Stmcturally, the jivdtman is the

^* Main sources are AS I.l (pp. 1-2), II.8-9 (pp. 20-21); AMEP, pp. 65-67; lAI, pp. 11-16, 39-45, and 63.
'^AS I.l, p . l .
60
/A/, p. 41.
" lAI, p. 84.
51
reflection of purusottama on each individual mental plate (synonymous to the unit mind) and, as such,
is not essentially separate from the paramdtman. It can be seen as stmcturally continuous with the
macrocosmic witnessing entity even though its field of action is circumscribed by the boundaries of
the unit mind. As thefivdtmanis contiguous with the unit mind through its witnessing and associative
action, it can affect, and in tum be affected by, the dynamics and activities of the unit mind. Sarkar
uses the analogy of the stainless, pure mirror that can be coloured according to the colour of the flower
that is reflected on it, to illustrate how the fivdtman can be 'coloured' by the different impressions,
emotions, thoughts, and propensities of the mind.*^ However, the essential nature of the 'mirror' of
fivdtman remains intrinsically pristine and pure. On a deeper level, it can be seen that the essence of
fivdtman is ultimately no different from the essence of unit mind, since they are both derived from the
same 'material' of pure consciousness. This is another example of the non-dualistic perspective of
Sarkar's Tantra. Jivdtman and paramdtman can be diagrammatically represented as follows:

A cmcial issue that relates to the discussion on dtman and paramdtman is that of the nature of
the self in Sarkar's thought. He devotes the whole of chapter 4 in AMEP to discussing this issue,
while providing hints on his understanding of the dtman in various discourses dispersed throughout the
AM literature. (We have already mentioned his definition of dtman in the AS in subsection 3.2.1.) A
superficial look at Sarkar's terminology and conceptual framework suggests tiiat he understands the
'self in much the same way as older Hindu traditions, namely the upanisadic notion that a permanent,
substantial 'Self stands at the core of every individual being - a personal essence that is
simultaneously the essence or 'Self of the entire cosmos. However, a deeper examination reveals
some ambivalence, suggesting that while Sarkar may have appropriated terms from the upanisadic
legacy, he has given them new shades of meaning that serve to highlight his own unique insights. In
the case of dtman, Sarkar emphasises that it is a mirror-like and pristine cognisance that exists auto-
reflexively within the very nature of the mind. He describes the dtman as 'Self-radiant' or

62
Anandamurti, AM/Parts 5-8 (First Edition), trans. Vijayananda and VigvarQpananda (Calcutta: Ananda Marea
Pracaraka Sanjgha, 1988), p. 325.
52
'Autophanous', meaning that 'His effulgence is not derived from any other source.'*^ He illustrates
his understanding of the dtman with this example:

Suppose you are thinking of Monghyr intemally. Now a part of your consciousness is
changed into mind-stuff, and this mind-stuff takes the form of Monghyr. The
remaining part of your mind-stuff remains as the witness of your mentally created
Monghyr. Now the part of your consciousness which plays neither the role of a
witness nor of being witnessed [italics mine] and yet remains as the knower of your
observation, that subtle part or bearing, if taken in the Brahmic or theistic context, will
be regarded as Purusottama!'*

According to him, the dtman (which is indivisible from paramdtmanipurusottama) is the

faculty that makes it possible for the experiential sense of self to arise in the mind, for without the
luminosity and knowing that is dtman, the mind will have no experience of itself as a 'self. He says:

In human beings consciousness is fully and clearly reflected in a physical body ... This
clear reflection of consciousness is unit consciousness (dtman) ... The pure feeling of
"I" is only an abstract idea. A little introspection would show that this feeling of "I
exist" is an idea. It comes about as a result of thinking. This feeling of "I" can come
only when there is consciousness; and it is with consciousness or jndna that one can
take an idea and think or perform some action. The feeling of 'T' is, therefore, a
mental projection of consciousness; or to be explicit, it can be said that without
consciousness, ox jndna, the knowledge of existence and thereby the idea of the feeling
of "I" cannot be formed ... It is by this idea of existence that the feeling of "I" is
formed, and hence the individual's identity as "I" is this idea only ... This feeling of
"I" is, therefore, not dtman or unit consciousness. The human beings' individuality or
their feeling of "I" is not unit consciousness.*^

In other words, the sense of 'self or 'I feeling' is a projection of the mind, an idea resulting from the
thinking process (which is itself said to be a metamorphosis of dtman and essentially non-dual with it).
This 'I feeling' within the mind is experienced by and in the light or cognisance of the dtman. Thus,
for Sarkar, the dtman is not a personal and empirical 'self or 'I' that owns or possesses the mind but
the clarity of cognisance that makes experience of self or any experience at all possible. Another hint
of Sarkar's process view of the nature of consciousness lies in his definition of brahma (to which
dtrruin is ultimately identical) as akhanda cidaikarasa ('an unbroken flow of Consciousness').**
Elsewhere, he defines dtman as 'a continuous flow (pravaha) of jndna or knowledge.'*' Seen from
this perspective, Sarkar's notion of the dtman may have less substantialist overtones than its traditional
upanisadic counterpart, perhaps approaching closer to the Buddhist and constmctivist conceptions of
the 'self.

*^55 Part 2, p. 27.

'"55 Part 2, p. 34.
* M M £ P , pp. 65-66.
** AM/, p. 502.
*'AMP Part 3, p. 182.
53
 Sarkar's somewhat non-substantialist definition of the notion of dtman (variously termed
purusa and siva) needs to be home in mind when reading the remaining chapters of tiiis thesis. The
key concept of 'consciousness', ambivalentiy expressed by Sarkar in both subtantiaHst and non-
substantialist terms, is the quintessential building block and foundation of his entire ideology. It is to
be carefully interpreted by taking into account all sides to the concept, when seeking to understand
Sarkar's cosmology and praxis.

3.3 Cosmogony**
Sarkar's cosmogony and cosmology are encapsulated in his theory of the brahmacakra or srsticakra,
the 'cosmic cycle of creation'. The brahmacakra purports to explain the ultimate origin, the ongoing
evolution, and the final destination of the entire universe, with all its animate and inanimate entities.
The origin and destination of the universe are not located at two separate specific points in linear
space-time. Rather, the cosmos is an ongoing cycle of transformation and change, with new matter
being constantiy generated and advanced life-forms ever merging their unit existences back into their
source. Hence the brahmacakra is said to be occurring at each and every moment in a continuous,
dynamic, and self-organising fashion. As previously mentioned, this source and destination is the
infinite pure consciousness termed brahma, the cosmic entity. Sarkar sees the multiplicity of the
universe as produced by a gradual and ongoing metamorphosis of subtlest consciousness first into the
cosmic mind (having the three levels of citta, aham, and mahat), and then into five fundamental
factors that finally combine to form the myriad inanimate stmctures. From Sarkar's viewpoint, this
material universe is but one of the many possible worlds in the multi-layered cosmos, worlds that are
in essence the various layers of the cosmic citta.
This process of cosmic metamorphosis, resulting in the formation of multiple inorganic
substances, forms the first half of the cycle, termed sancara, translated as 'proper movement'. The
emergence of life from these inorganic substances marks the second half of the cycle, termed
pratisancara, or 'reverse proper movement'.*^ When, due to clash and stmggle in the process of
evolution, life-forms reach a certain level of stmctural complexity, the various levels of mind
progressively emerge. The human structure and mind represent the current apex of evolution and have
the potential to develop further in expansiveness and subtiety. The expansion of the human mind into
unit consciousness and finally into the vast expanse of cosmic consciousness represents the final phase
of the cosmic joumey.
Central to Sarkar's cosmology is the role of spiritual knowledge and practices (which Sarkar
terms intuitional science and praxis) and the perfect spiritual master or sadguru in the further
evolution of the mind and consciousness. In particular, Sarkar's theory of microvita - 'mysterious

** Main sources are A51.3-20 (pp. 4-14), 11.21-24 (pp. 26-28), and IV.1-8 (pp. 36-40); AMEP, pp. 16-64; lAI, pp.
9-24, 32-43, and 58-62; MvA^, pp. 1-28, 50-75, 78-81, and 138-158; supplemented by relevant sections in SPSSA
corresponding to above AS slokas and sections scattered throughout AMI and SS.
*' Translations for sancara and pratisancara given in SPSSA, pp. 18 and 27.
54
emanations of the Cosmic Factor' - plays a central role in this higher evolution of humanity.
Microvita are regarded as 'cosmic seeds of life' and have been implicated in the genesis of life-forms
and mutative changes in evolution.
Sarkar bases his cosmogony on the Upanisadic notion of a singular source, matrix, and
destination of the universe,™ a source he calls brahma - a plenitude of infinite happiness or dnanda
(bliss).'' For him, it is the inherent desire or pulsative movement of bliss of brahma that creates,
operates, sustains, and finally withdraws the universe and its beings. He contrasts his cosmogonic
vision with that of the Buddha and appropriates the stmcture of the Buddha's four noble tmths for his
ideology, stating that: (1) the universe is not full of suffering but full of joy; (2) the source of this
joyful universe is dnandam or supreme bliss; (3) the universe culminates in dnandam; and (4) the way
to dnandam is through sddhand (spiritual practice), especially the practice of pure devotion.'^ (A
comparison between Sarkar's and the Buddha's views on the world will be undertaken in Chapter 7.
We now explore in detail Sarkar's cosmogonic speculations.)

3.3.1 Before the Beginning

Sarkar's Tantric theory of creation is most clearly explained in the first and fourth chapters of the A5,'^
a review of which follows. There are four initial phases in cosmic genesis: (1) the primordial phase,
which is a transcendent state of supreme peace; (2) the first phase, which is a theoretical, pre-
evolutionary stage when the forces of creation are in balance; (3) the second phase, which is an actual
and most initial expression of the universe in the form of cosmic sound; and finally (4) the vibrational
phase, which is the formation of the three layers of the cosmic mind - mahat, aham, and citta, in that
sequence.'" The formation of the material universe starts only after the vibratory waves of cosmic
citta have metamorphosed themselves into the five fundamental factors of ethereal, aerial, luminous,
liquid, and solid factors.
In the primordial phase, the three forces (gunas) of prakrti (the operative principle) are
sheltered in the 'body' of purusa (the cognitive principle), where they flow linearly, haphazardly, and
in multiple directions with limitless momentum. Countless numbers of hexagonal, octagonal, and
other many-sided figures are formed as a result of the contact of these flowing forces, but a resultant
force is yet to be generated.'^ In this phase, prakrti remains unexpressed or dormant (anucchdnya)
while purusa is objectless since there is as yet no differentiation of itself into subject and object.
Objectless purusa is said to be unqualified by prakrti and thus beyond all attributes or 'nirguiia'. This
transcendent state prior to all qualification and metamorphosis of purusa is knovra as a state of
supreme peace (pardsdnti). There is as yet no desire for cosmic creation in the supreme

™ See TU 3.6,ti-ans.in Pati-ick Olivelle, Upanisads (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1996), p. 191.
" AS 2.3-4, pp. 18-19: sukham anantam dnandam dnandam brahma ityahuh
'^55Partll,pp. 89-98.
" A 5 , pp. 1-17 and 36-40.
''* See 5P55A, pp. 238-252.
''' See lAI, p. 58.
55
consciousness. Correspondingly, the three forces of prakrti flow in a chaotic way with no clear sense
of demarcation among them, and thus they do not yet fully exist as sentient, mutative, and static
forces. This stage can be represented as follows:

Anucchunya prakrti:
all its forces flow haphazardly in all directions

Nirgutia Purusa:
unqualified objectless
consciousness

In the next phase, termed the first phase or pre-evolutionary stage, the polygonal pattems of
force form themselves into the more stable geometric forms of triangles. These triangular pattems of
forces exist in many dimensions and planes in the 'ocean' of purusa. They collectively form the
causal matrix or the 'mother of creation', the cosmic 'womb' from which the entire created universe
will eventually flow.'* In this phase, a localised portion of purusa has been encircled and qualified by
triangles of forces of prakrti, thus rendenng purusa no longer beyond the gunas (gutidfita) but instead
the controller of the gunas (gunddhisa). Qualification of these localised portions occurs due to the
lesser density of consciousness at those portions than at other points in the infinite 'body' of purusa.
According to Sarkar, purusa is not uniformly condensed throughout and possesses areas where
consciousness is 'weaker'". Upon encircling portions of purusa, the forces of prakrti are now clearly
identified as sentient, mutative, and static, whereby each force constantly transforms into another in a
process termed 'homomorphic evolution' (svardpa-pariridma)?^ Purusa now exists as a witnessing
entity (purusottama or paramasiva) in the nucleus of the causal matrix, much like a 'thread wherewith
the midpoints of these triangles are interwoven'.'^ The pre-evolutionary stage can be
diagrammatically represented as follows:

m^ ^
Causal matrix:
equilateral
triangle of
forces threaded rfT • V J^f^^ ~
& controlled by
cosmic nucleus \y<J ! Svardpa-parindma ',
(purusottama)

'* See 5/'55A, p. 239.

"AM£P, pp. 24-25.
'*A5, p. 36.
" A 5 , p. 37.
56
Sarkar describes this pre-evolutionary stage as a purely theoretical stage, since the creative forces exist
in a state of dynamic equilibrium and no creation has yet occurred.*" He further states that 'there is a
theoretical difference between the Purusabhdva ['stance of consciousness'] in the first stage when
Prakrti was anucchunya, and the Purusabhdva in the second stage when Prakrti has shaped Herself
into a triangle offerees.'*' Sarkar gives different names to both purusa and prakrti at various phases in
the cosmic creative process, and in the case of the first phase, the witnessing purusa is known as siva,
while prakrti as the causal matrix is known as sivdni or kausiki (see table below).

Purusa Prakrti
Initial Stage:
la. Pre-evolutionary phase Siva Sivdrii or Kausiki
b. Basic phase (bindu) Sambhulinga

Practical Evolution:
2. Primordial phase (ndda) Bhairava Bhairavi
3. Vibrational phase (kald) Bhava Bhavdni

The second phase of practical evolution, following the initial pre-evolutionary stage, marks
the beginning of the extroversial process of brahmacakra, the cosmic cycle of creation. This
extroversial process, known as sancara or samkrama, will be discussed in the next section.

3.3.2 Sancara: The Extroversial Process

In the second phase of creation, the stability of the triangle of forces is shaken as the three forces,
being belligerent by nature, compete with one another for dominance. A resultant force bursts out
from one of the vertices of the triangle. The point out of which the force emanates, termed the 'seed of
desire' (kdmabija or icchdbija), marks the precise starting point of the extroversial process of sancara
or samkrama. Sancara or sarnkrama is a process of analysis whereby the singular consciousness
transforms itself into the multiplicity of the universe.*^ According to Sarkar, the starting point of
sancara '... is static and is dominated by avidydmdyd and rests within its scope of activity. This is the
point wherein lies the cosmic desire.'*^ Purusa at this point of kdmabija or icchdbija is known as
sambhulinga, where sambhu is translated as 'self-created controller' and liiiga as 'mark, sign, or
symbol'.*" In other words, kdmabija marks the location of purusa in the bearing of a self-created
controller, whose positive resolve for creation sprouts forth from that very point. As the positive
source of the entire flow of sancara, purusa at this point is also termed the 'root-point of fundamental

*°A5, p. 37.
*' lAI, p. 59.
*^ See/A/, p. 9.
*^ lAI, 60.
*"5P55A, p. 251.
57
positivity'.*^ According to Sarkar, sambhulinga exists not only on a macrocosmic scale as the starting
point of creation, but also on a microcosmic scale as the ultimate controlling point of the individual
mind. Such macrocosmic-microcosmic homologisms occur frequently throughout Sarkar's spuitual
philosophy. (How Sarkar's cosmology is linked to his theory of mind and bio-psychology is discussed
in Chapter 4.)
The first force to emanate from kdmabija is the sentient force (sattvaguna) - the most
powerful of the three forces. At this point, the mutative force (rajoguna) is also active but remains
subordinate to the sentient force. The first expression of creation is a sentient-dominated wave termed
jndnasakti ndda that flows forward in a straight line. As in the first phase, purusa and prakrti have
distinctive names in this particular phase: the witnessing purusa is called bhairava and the creative
prakrti is called bhairavi sakti (see table on p. 54). This phase is the expressed state of purusa and
prakrti, where purusa, having been acted upon by prakrti, is sagurui or qualified. Here, the difference
between purusa and prakrti is no longer purely theoretical (as in the first phase) but is tending towards
the practical.
Associated with these straight-line waves (ndda) is the acoustic expression of the primordial
sound, the ornkdra or the syllable om. Sarkar sees the script depicting ornkdra as consisting of three-
and-a-half sound units - 'a', 'u', 'ma', and the 'bindu' or dot - which respectively represent the
creation, maintenance, and dissolution of the universe within sagurui brahma (qualified
consciousness), and the objectless, transcendent nirguna brahma. In other words, the sonic expression
of the ornkdrafirstresounds throughout the universe at the time of the straight-line phase of cosmic
creation. The ornkdra subsequentiy forms the basis for the myriad vibrations (including sounds,
sights, feelings, and thoughts) of the universe, which are primarily different harmonic modifications of
this most subtie, primordial sound. Sarkar explains:

... I emphasise that ornkdra does not denote the whole Brahma in the first three
syllables; it also has a fourth letter. This very fourth letter or half-letter represents
Purusottama with His witness-ship. From this it follows that "a", "u", "ma" and the
half-letter respectively represent creation, preservation, destmction, and this witness-
ship ... Ornkdra is not a sound for utterance but for hearing. The human voice cannot
give proper form to that (mystic) sound, and so it is futile to attempt to pronounce it.**
... Whatever you see, whatever you think or you feel, whatever is beyond your vision,
thought and perception - all are saguna Brahma or ornkdra .. .*'

Following the second phase, the third phase of creation signifies the period when brahma
undergoes a series of metamorphoses and a process of gradual cmdification to become the multitude
of inanimate and animate entities in the universe. It can be described as the One becoming the many.

*^ AS, p. 39. See also lAI, p. 62.

**55Part2,p. 108.
*'55 Part 2, p. 110.
58
In this phase, purusa is given the name bhava while prakrti is called bhavdni (see table on p. 54). The
QQ

early phases of the creation process can be detailed diagrammatically as follows:

Narnes: Sambhaliriga Purusa & Prakrti

Siva
\
Sivdrii/Kausiki \
J'"
m ^ ^ at icchdbija
Distinction:
theoretical

Bhairava Bhairavi ^ basic principle (bindu}" ~ becoming practical

primordial principle (ndda)

Bhava Bhavdni ^^ vibrational principle (kald) practical

Sarkar gives specific terms to signify the three phases of the extroversial process of creation.
He calls the first phase, when the linear wave is about to emerge from the vertex of the triangle of
forces, the phase of the 'basic principle' or bindu. He calls the second phase, when the linear wave
has already emerged, the phase of the 'primordial principle' or ndda. When the linear wave becomes
transmuted into multiple curvatures, the creation process enters its third phase, which he terms the
phase of the 'vibrational principle' or 'kald' ^^
We have seen that as a result of the clash of the three gunas, the sentient force (sattvaguna)
emerges as the first predominant force out of one vertex of the triangle of forces. This force results in
the qualification of purusa, during the linear or primordial phase of evolution, to give a straight-line
wave called ndda. With continued dominance of the sentient force, a localised portion of purusa is
transformed into the cosmic mahattattva, which is the sense of existence or 'I am' in the previously
objectless pure consciousness. This cosmic mahattattva is made up of infinite straight-line waves and
manifests as the primordial sound of orn. As the process continues, the sentient force gradually wanes
in power and the mutative force starts becoming dominant. The impact of the mutative force on the
cosmic mahat (a transformed state of a part of purusa) results in the emergence of a sense of doer-
ship or agency called the cosmic aharntattva. The cosmic aharntattva can be said to comprise the first
expressions of vibrational or curved waves, called kald. The mutative force (rajoguna) then wanes in
strength and the static force (tamoguna) becomes dominant in its place. The static force acts on the
cosmic aharntattva to form the cosmic citta, which is the 'cmdest objective counterpart of the
subjective Cosmos'.^ With the formation of the cosmic citta, the cosmic aham and mahat are able to
perceive the citta as their mental object. The cosmic citta is hence comprised of multiple vibrational
waves of varied wavelengths. These three portions, mahat, aham, and citta, comprise the cosmic mind.

** AdaptedfromSPSSA, p. 251.
*'AVPart30,pp. 16-17.
90
'A5,p.6.
59
otherwise known as bhumamdnas ('macrocosmic mind')" or brahmamanas ('mind of brahma').
These three portions of the mind can be depicted diagrammatically as follows:

All these stages of transformation of the subtiest pure consciousness into the different layers of the
cosmic mind begin with the onset of deske within that very consciousness. This original cosmic
desire, and the tendency of the three forces to emerge from a state of equilibrium and assume their
separate identities, are termed 'pravrttimukhi '. Sarkar describes the nature of cosmic desire thus:

The devotee ... defends God thus: "My Lord was utterly alone before the creation. A
man becomes mad if he is alone for a long time in a big vacant house. God was
restiess before creation. He could neither love nor feel angry with anyone. So creation
was a compulsion. He has created all these forms by multiplying Himself. When God
was alone. He had the power to see, but there were no objects to be seen. Now that He
has started creation. He sees whatever He thinks. If we who are His own forms feel a
littie restlessness in His creation, we are blessed, for we are saving our Lord from the
restlessness of utter loneliness."^^

The static force continues to act upon the cosmic citta and sequentially fransforms the "mind-stuff of
citta into the five fundamental factors (pancamahdbhiita). Sarkar uses the term 'bhdta' to refer to all
created entities in general and to the five fundamental factors in particular. As a result of the extemal
pressure of static prakrti, the various bhutas are formed from gradual decrease in intermolecular and
interatomic spaces and gradual increase in chemical affinity between the bhiita particles. All bhdtas
are perceivable by the senses and combine in varying proportions to form a variety of physical matter,
both inanimate and animate.
The first and most subtle bhiita to form is the ethereal factor (dkdsatattva or vyomatattva),
which, out of the five factors, has the largest interatomic and intermolecular spaces between its basic

" A M / , p. 401.
'^ AMP Part 3, p. 198.
^ Anandamurti, BG, ed. Ananda Mitra (Manila: Ananda Marga Publications, 1989), p. 14.
60
particles, and is said to pervade the entu-e universe. While the term 'particles' is used to describe the
components of the ethereal factor, it is important to note that Sarkar often switches between a
particulate and a wave-like description of these factors. It may be the case that a 'wave-particle'
duality is implied here.^" The ethereal factor transmits the subtiest inferential waves (tanmatras) of
sound, which are said to be subtier than audible sounds. The conceived subtlety of auditory waves and
the ethereal factor will later be seen to be of significance in the soteriological praxis of Ananda Marga,
to be discussed in Chapter 5.
Tanmdtra is, in Sarkar's definition, a microscopic fraction of a bhuta and essentially
comprises 'waves produced by the objects concemed as a result of reflection of the subtier bhiita on
the cmder ones.'^' Hence, the sound tanmdtra is nothing other than a microscopic fraction of the
ethereal factor, the first and most subtie bhiita. Sound tanmdtras or waves are produced as a result of
the ethereal factor colliding with and reflecting off other bhdtas that are less subtle, such as the solid
factor.
The second bhdta to form, out of the sustained impact of the static force on the ethereal factor,
is the aerial factor (vdyutattva or maruttattva). The increasing static force causes the particles of ether
to come closer to one another, which in tum increases inter-particle attraction and intemal friction.
Out of these processes emerges the aerial factor, which is denser than the ethereal factor and carries
both auditory and tactile tanmdtras. Just as auditory tanmdtras are microscopic reflections of the
ethereal factor, tactile tanmdtras are similarly microscopic, wavelike reflections of the aerial factor.
The third bhuta to emerge is the luminous factor (tejastattva), which is denser than the aerial
factor and transmits visual or light waves (tanmdtras), in addition to sound and tactile waves. With
continuing bondage of the static force, the luminous factor condenses to form the fourth bhiita of the
liquid factor (dpatattva), which transmits the tanmdtras of sound, touch, sight, and also taste. Finally,
the crudest bhuta the solid factor (ksititattva) - is formed from the sustained action of the static force
on the liquid factor. The solid factor is able to carry all the tanmdtras of sound, touch, sight, taste, and
also smell.
All the matter in the universe is composed of these five fundamental factors in varying
proportions. The total quantity of bhdtas in each material body is constant but the relative percentage
of each bhdta in that body can vary freely. Hence, an almost infinite variety of physical matter of
every shape, size, and quality is possible. These bhdtas, as well as the layers of the cosmic mind
existing before them, are ultimately vibrational waves of progressively shorter wavelengths (and thus
'denser' particles), caused by the incessant flow (dhdrd) of the three gunas or forces. Sarkar sees
these vibrations as transitory, ever-changing expressions of pure consciousness.
In this progressive change of wavelength, the shift from one curvature (kald) to another occurs
gradually and contiguously. Sarkar calls this process of change sadrsa parindma, meaning

'" Sarkar often speaks of matter in terms of inferential waves, which he terms tanmdtra.
'^ lAI, p. 20.
61
'homogenesis, or similitude' .96 This results in the second-generation wave being very, but not exactly,
similar to the frrst, the third-generation wave being similar but not identical to the second and so on.
Hence, the sixth generation wave or curvature may be very different from the first but not very
different from the fifth. This principle applies to both saiicara and pratisaiicara phases of the creation
process. In this way, Sarkar explains why the similarity seen between members of the same species is
greater than that seen between members of the same genus or kingdom. Using the same logic, Sarkar
explains the similarity of humans between two generations as contrasted to the huge difference
97
between modem Homo sapiens and our pre-human ancestors of millions of years ago. He says:

This sequential evolution of kaliis is called sadria pan1J.ama [homogenesis, or

similitude]. In these homogenetic waves are evolved the mental and physical worlds.
It is due to this (homoform) curvilinear evolution that we find that the child of a human
is a human and tree begets tree. The kaliis are similar but not identical, and so
although the difference between two successive kaliis is not clearly perceivable, the
differences of kaliis having distant mutual relations are clearly understandable. 98

The static force continues to exert its pressure on the five fundamental factors even after they have
been formed, a pressure known as bala. This bala results in the fonnation of two opposing forces -
the exterial and the interial forces. 99 The exterial force acts to disperse the object composed of the five
factors into fragments, while the interial force acts to maintain the structural solidarity of the object.
Each of these two forces is named prii1J.a or "energy', and prii1J.a, in both iriterial and exterial forms,
exists in every object. In the event that the interial forces triumph over the exterial forces, resultant
interial forces will lead to the formation of a nucleus within the solid factor, and subsequently the
creation of a stable objective structure. Even in such a case, there may be parts of the structure where
the exterial forces predominate, resulting in partial and localised dissociation of matter from the parent
body. Sarkar equates this to wear and tear of the unit physical structure, and in the case of a living
entity, such wear and tear can be offset by the prii1J.ii obtained from food, water, light, and air. loo In
the event that the exterial forces completely predominate over the interial forces, no physical nucleus
and hence no objective structure can be fonned.
Sarkar further explains that in a physical structure where life subsequently emerges, all five
fundamental factors must be present. When these five factors are in correct balance, and when the
environmental conditions are suitable, the resultant interial force formed from "mutual cohesion
amongst these factors', 101 prii1J.a (purely physical energy) undergoes a shift to become prii1J.iil), vital or
living energy. Here, Sarkar uses the plural prii1J.iil) to signify the combination of ten distinct vital

96 AS, p. 38.
97 Ibid.
98 Ibid.

99 These two forces are to be distinguished from the extroversial force of avidyli sakli and the introversial force
of vidyli sakli, which are primarily concerned with the individual's spiritual development.
100
IAl, p. 5.
101
IAl, p. 5.
62
forces (vdyus) that animate the body and the vital ingredient that makes an inorganic substance organic
(these vdyus will be discussed in subsection 4.3.3). This collection of prdtia is conttolled by an overall
nucleus that also controls the respective nuclei of the five fundamental factors. However, in the
absence of congenial environmental conditions, a reverse process of negative sancara can take place.
In such a case, the ever-continuing pressure of the static force on the solid bodies drastically reduces
the inter-atomic space, causes an imbalance amongst the five fundamental factors, and results in an
explosion of matter (jadasphotd). The excessive intemal friction between matter particles as a result
of jadasphota causes the solid factor to become powdered down into the subtler liquid, luminous,
aerial, and ethereal factors, either totally or partially. They are, however, prevented from reverting
into the cosmic citta and beyond by the will of the cosmic mind. Reversal of the factors into the
matrix of consciousness would mean a withdrawal of the entire creative thought-wave of purusa, and
the universe as we know it would then disappear. Thus, Sarkar sees the five factors formed from
jadasphota undergoing the process of sancara once again in its movement toward greater complexity
and life.
In summary, the process of sancara is characterised by fu-st, a process of extroversion away
from the cosmic nucleus; second, a movement from singularity to multiplicity; third, an increase in the
bondage of the gunas or forces over consciousness; fourth, a flow of increasing desire; and fifth, an
inanimate phase of creation. The emergence of life marks the beginning of the second half of the
cosmic cycle of creation -pratisancara.

3.3.3 Pratisancara: The Introversial Process

The process of pratisancara begins when life first emerges out of physical stmctures composed of the
five factors in the required proportions. Sarkar uses the word 'quinquelemental' as a descriptive term
to qualify the nature of all physical objects in this universe, meaning that all objects are comprised of
these five factors. Sarkar describes pratisancara as '... the gradual introversial movement under the
waning influence of the gunas.'^^^ He sees purusa gradually reducing the power of prakrti to bind
itself into the manifold entities of the universe, and attracting prakrti back into its witnessing nucleus,
purusottama. This cosmic merging of prakrti into purusa by stages is manifested in the evolution of
vital energy, life, and subsequently mind, in the process of pratisancara.
We have seen how the vital ingredient of prdndh arises out of inorganic stmctures and
fransforms them into organic entities. In addition, excessive clash between interial and exterial forces
causes certain parts within the unit stmcture to become pulverised, resulting in cittdnu ('ectoplasmic
particles' or 'mind-stuff) being evolved. The combination of all ectoplasmic particles in a single
stmcture constitutes the sense of the objective mind (citta) within that stmcture. The citta is the
portion of the unit mind that assimilates and takes the form of the extemal stimuli that it comes into
contact with. Sarkar calls citta the 'done-I' or 'objective-F, and considers that the major part of the

'°^AS 1.6, p. 6.
63
minds of undeveloped plants and animals consists of citta only. In the case of such creatures, the
cmde and primary citta is not able to control or guide the prdndh within their bodies, as its function is
mainly to take in information from the extemal world. As such, the movement of undeveloped living
entities through pratisancara is fully controlled and guided by the cosmic mind.
With the continuing weakening of the forces of prakrti, and under the influence of the
introversial force (vidyd sakti) of purusa, the static force gives way to the mutative force. The portion
of the mind and body where the mutative force is active becomes ttansformed into the 'doer-I' or
'owner-I' (aharntattva). With the continued influence of vidyd sakti, the sentient force starts becoming
predominant over the mutative force, resulting in the emergence of the 'pure-F feeling or mahattattva
within the mind. Sarkar defines the three portions of the unit mind geometrically as progressively
larger concenttic circles, where the citta is the circle of smallest circumference, the mahat is the circle
of largest circumference, and the aham is the circle whose circumference lies between the first two.
The surplus area of the mind, beyond the periphery of the citta but within that of the aham, is thought
to give rise to the intellect (buddhi). The area beyond the periphery of the aham but within that of the
mahat is thought to give rise to intuition (bodhi) (see diagram below).

hi undeveloped plants and animals, where aham is developed but not mahat, there is some possibility
for living entities to speed up their movement through pratisancara, since the sense of ego or 'doer-I'
is present. However, developed plants and animals, whose mahat is developed, as well as aham and
citta, pick up the greatest speed, since they possess the sfrongest sense of ego and will. In the case of
animate entities other than humans, there can be cooperation between the momentum of the unit minds
and the momentum of the cosmic mind in the forward movement of pratisancara. However, the will
of the animate entities remains subordinate to the cosmic will. In the case of humans, the cooperation
between unit minds and the cosmic mind can be both subordinated and coordinated in nature.

64
 According to Sarkar, the mechanism behind the evolution of mind in unit entities is the
progressive reflection of the 'supreme nucleus consciousness' (purusottama) on the unit mental plate.
This reflection is associative in nature and results in increasing dilation of the scope of the unit mind, a
process that Sarkar calls 'psychic dilation'.'"^ This psychic dilation is achieved through the stmggle
and clash of the unit entities with the physical environment and other unit entities, the stmggle
between different ideas, and the atfractive force generated by 'longing for the Great'.'"" This
evolutionary mechanism of the mind occurs in parallel with the decreasing influence of the guiias and
the increasing pull of vidyd sakti exerted by purusa on unit entities. As the mind evolves and gains in
volume and mass, it 'acquires more and more potentiality for multilateral activities','"^ and with the
increasing complexity of the mind, the physical stmcture correspondingly becomes more complex.
Sarkar sees the complexity of the human body expressed in the large numbers of glands and sub-
glands that have specific physiological and psycho-neuro-immunological functions. Underlying this
complexification of the physical stmcture is Sarkar's concept of life as an ongoing adjustment and
parallelism of psychic and physical waves. According to him, the more subtle the mental waves
become, the more complex the physical waves (and thus physical stmctures) have to be in order that
the subtier mind can express its various propensities.

The ability of complex unit entities, such as human beings (mdnusa, which Sarkar translates as
'possessor of ego'), to accelerate their progress in the direction of further evolution is counterbalanced
by their equal capacity for reverse evolution. In other words, human beings have the ability to regress
along the evolutionary ladder if they so choose, by directing their will and energy toward purely
materialistic pursuits. Sarkar calls this regression a movement towards jada or cmdity, otherwise
termed negative pratisancara. However, if a human being decides to utilise all of his/her potentialities
to move toward the culminating point of evolution - which Sarkar sees as parama purusa, supreme
consciousness - the evolutionary joumey becomes greatly accelerated. He says:

In this march towards the supramundane, the unit mind gradually feels a closer touch
of Purusottama, and as the proximity of the two increases, the psychic gap between the
reflected consciousness and the reflecting plate goes on diminishing and finally these
two merge together. This supreme union of Purusottama and the unit mind is known
as yoga: saniyoga yogo ityukto fivdtmd Paramdtmanah ...

... the unit mind goes on dilating because of the ever-increasing reflected density of the
Macrocosmic Nucleus. Here the microcosm acts as a mirror and the reflected
consciousness is just like the reflection of the rays of the sun, in that, while being
reflected, He also associates Himself with the plate ... and the finality in association
will result in the merger of the microcosm into Macrocosm. This is what is known as
mukti.""'

'"^ lAI, p. 12.

'"^Ibid.
'''Ibid
'"^/AApp. 15-16.
""/A/, p. 16.
65
Sarkar sees pratisancara as culminating in the merger of the unit entity into the cosmic entity, which
takes place in two forms: (1) savikalpa samddhi ('trance of determinate absorption') or sagunasthiti
('state of transcendentality'), wherein the unit mind merges into the 'all-pervasiveness' of cosmic
mind; '°* and (2) nirvikalpa samddhi ('trance of indeterminate absorption') or nirgunasthiti ('state of
objectiessness'), wherein the unit mind merges totally into the 'vacuity' and bliss (dnanda) of cosmic
consciousness.'"" These two states, when permanently attained, constitute the merger of the unit
entity into saguna brahma and nirgutia brahma respectively. The precise nature of such attainments
will be discussed in Chapters 5 and 6, where the praxis of Sarkar's Tantra will be examined in greater
detail. For better visualisation and clarity of understanding, the entire brahmacakra can be depicted
diagrammatically as follows:

Pratisancara Sancara
(Introversial cycle) (Extroversial cycle)

* Human beings Five fundamental factors

* Complex life-forms Unicellular
life-forms

3.3.4 The Microvita Connection

In the cosmic panorama of Sarkar's universe - its genesis, evolution, and culmination, the role of
minute entities known as 'microvita' (singular: 'microvitum') is cmcial. Sarkar sees microvitum as
the 'mysterious emanation of Cosmic Factor', or as a highly subtie and microscopic entity emitted into
the universe by the infinite field of pure consciousness.'" These microvita exist in botii the physical
and psychic dimensions. In the realm of physicality, microvita are smaller and subtler than electrons,
protons, neutrons, and positrons, while in the psychic realm, they are subtier tiian ectoplasm or "mind-

108

109
AS 1.21, pp. 14-15.
no
AS 1.22-24, pp. 15-16
111
Adapted from The Wisdom of Yoga, p. 37. Dotted lines represent witnessing activity of purusottama.
Prabhat Raiijan Sarkar, MvN (Third Edition), trans, and ed. Vijayananda and Jayanta Kumar (Calcutta:
Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sanigha, 1991), pp. 1-5. This book contains all of Sarkar's discourses on microvita
theory that have been published in English.
66
stuff (the constituent of citta, the cmdest layer of the mind). Sarkar divides microvita into three broad
categories in terms of thek density and subtiety, and into three main types in terms of their functions
and effects on human welfare. In terms of increasing subtiety, microvita can be (a) directiy perceived
by powerful microscopes, (b) indirectly inferred from their actions on physical objects, or (c) directly
intuited by a special form of perception developed through spiritual training. In terms of their effects,
positive microvita are those that are conducive to human welfare; negative microvita are detrimental to
human welfare and cause disease; and neutral microvita have neither good nor bad effects.
Sarkar takes the cmdest form of microvita to be equivalent to the commonly understood
organism, the vims. Such an equivalence, however, directly contradicts the notion that microvita (in
the physical realm) are subtler than sub-atomic particles such as protons, elecfrons, positrons, and
neutrons. The vims, as understood in modem science, consists of 'a length of genetic material, either
DNA or RNA, forming a core surrounded by a coat of protein' and in some cases an additional
lipoprotein envelope."^ As such, it is stmcturally far more complex than a sub-atomic particle, being
more in the order of a highly complex molecule. Sarkar does not attempt to resolve this anomaly and
apart from highlighting it, I simply leave aside this question of conceptual incompatibility between
Sarkar's notion of microvita and the biological concept of the vims in order to remain focussed on the
aims of this thesis.
As subtle entities, microvita are said to travel throughout the entire universe, '... crossing the
boundaries of nebulae, piercing through milky ways, galaxies, stars, satellites, planets and meteors.'"^
As living entities, they are bom, reproduce and multiply, and die, though they are able to move
through any object and under any atmospheric conditions without hindrance. For their movement,
however, microvita require various media such as sound, form, touch, smell, and ideas. Sarkar
conceives of a subtle form of microvita being transmitted through ideas, making it possible for strong,
highly developed minds to spread certain ideas throughout a planet or even throughout the universe by
the use of such microvita.
In relation to cosmology, Sarkar sees microvita as '... the carriers of life in different stars,
planets, and satellites - not carbon atoms or carbon molecules.'"" Microvita are capable of
generating, as well as desfroying, living minds and bodies in any part of the universe. Billions of
microvita are said to coalesce to form a single carbon atom. We have seen earlier (subsection 3.3.3)
that when the five fundamental factors within a unit stmcture are in the required proportions, a
controlling nucleus has been formed, and the environmental conditions are suitable, the resultant
interial force within that stmcture becomes prdridh or vital-energy (comprising ten vdyus), causing the
emergence of primitive life. Although Sarkar does not explicitly say so, it can be inferred that in his
cosmogony the guiding intelligence behind the fransformation of a purely physical interial force

"^ R. Soper (ed.). Biological Science: Organisms, Energy and Environment (Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press, 1986), p. 17.
"^MvA^,p. 3.
"''MvA^,p. 4.
67
(prdna) into vital life-energy (prdridh) is microvita. As microvita are emanations of cosmic
consciousness, they would naturally possess a degree of intelligence intrinsic to consciousness itself,
and thus be able to direct the process of biogenesis via information transfer.
Sarkar's microvita theory has been elaborated by several AM scholars highly regarded within
the movement to suggest probable mechanisms by which microvita and prdria (interial force)
contribute to the genesis of life."^ In one such proposed elaboration, two parallel processes occur
simultaneously in the evolution of living stmctures."* The first is the increasing coordination of the
physical stmcture by prdria, resulting in increasing frictional clashes between the stmctural particles.
At the same time, the coordination of the interial and exterial prdtia by the cosmic mind results in the
emergence of vital energy or prdridh. The second is the increasing amassing of, and cooperation
between, multitudes of microvita. The overall effect of these two processes is to 'increase the quantity
and quality of mind.'"' In the first case, the frictional clashes between stmctural particles cause the
pulverisation of matter to form ectoplasmic particles (cittdtiu). A collection of cittdnu results in the
first level of mind called citta, which demarcates an animate entity from an inanimate one. In the case
of microvita, the synergistic coagulation of increasingly greater numbers of microvita results in more
complex and subtie stmctures. Sarkar states that each microvitum possesses a primitive kind of unit
mind termed 'micro-psychic conation'."* The coagulation of large numbers of microvita then results
in a 'phase transition where many microvita suddenly coordinate their activities so as to produce a unit
mind sufficiently advanced that we call it a living organism in the ordinary sense.'"" The question of
the link between the processes of prdna (interial and exterial forces) and microvita remains
unresolved. Bhaktavlra proposes that microvita emitted by the cosmic mind may have the capacity to
directiy manipulate prdria, causing the emergence of prdndh (vital energy), and thereby guide the
evolution of living stmctures.
Sarkar continues to give microvita a cenfral position in the further evolution of life-forms,
once living entities have emerged in the universe. In terms of physical evolution, microvita are
posited to be responsible for micro- and macro-mutations, as they are able to enter atoms comprising
DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) and change the stmcture of genes. This in tum influences the gene pool
and causes genetic drift. In terms of psychic or mental evolution, microvita are able to enter nerve
cells and hormone-producing endocrine glands to effect greater development of these stmctures. This
action of microvita results in the gradual evolution of more complex biological stmctures in higher
animals. Beyond mental evolution, Sarkar sees microvita as instrumental in facilitating and

"^ BhaktiVira and Jitendra Singh are two such scholars who have attempted to elaborate on Sarkar's microvita
theory. Their views are mentioned here as supplements to his own articulation on microvita.
' " The points covered in this paragraph are developed out of Sarkar's theory in Bhaktavlra, 'P.R. Sarkar's
Theory of Microvita', in The Microvita Revolution: Towards the New Science of Matter, Life arui Mind, ed. by
Microvitum Sub-Committee (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, undated), pp. 62-68.
' " Bhaktavlra, p. 66.
"* Bhaktavlra, p. 62.
'"Bhaktavlra, p. 63.

68
accelerating changes in the human biological systems for the purpose of psycho-spiritual pursuits.
The biological changes that led to the current highly complex nervous system and well-developed
hormonal system in the human being are cited by Sarkar to illustrate this theory.'^'
As mentioned in Chapter 2, Sarkar first expounded his microvita theory during the years 1986
to 1988, whereas his theory of brahmacakra was first given in the years 1955 to 1961. The theory of
microvita adds a new dimension to the historically earlier brahmacakra theory through the use of a
new set of terminology for the cosmic entity and the universe. In the microvita theory, brahma is said
to exist in two states: nirvisesa and savisesa.'^^ In the nirvisesa state, brahma is known as the
'Supreme Universal Entity', where the cognitive principle (siva) and the creative faculty (sakti)
maintain a dynamic equilibrium and equipoise with each other. In the savisesa state, brahma is known
as the 'Supreme Attributional Principle', with subjective and objective portions. The subjective
portion consists of the 'Knowing principle' or 'Knower-F (jnd purusa) and the 'Doing principle' or
'Doer-I' (krtd purusa). Sarkar defines the 'Knower F as 'expressed energies of different characters -
indestmctible, interchangeable, and inter-transmutable.''^^ He conceives of the 'Doer-I' as a
concentrated package of positive and negative microvita that collectively maintains '...the balance of
the actional universe, creating initial forms of carbon atoms'.'^ Through the action of the 'Doer-F,
carbonic stmctures can eventually be formed to serve as bases for the manifold expressions of life and
mind. In short, it is the subjective portion (comprising the 'knowing' and 'doing' principles) of the
'Supreme Attributional Principle' (savisesa brahma) that drives the entire process of cosmic creation.
The objective portion of the supreme attributional principle consists of the 'Known-F and the
'Done-I'. The 'Known-F is the world of thoughts, ideas, and propensities - the psycho-spiritual
component, while the 'Done-F is the world of 'inferences', consisting of various forms of matter and
energy - the physical component. The 'Known' world contains ideas and the many physico-psycho-
spiritual propensities that can be conceived of, and is also termed the abstract world (bhdvastha). The
'Done' world is composed of physical matter and energy that can be perceived through the sensory
'inferences' of sound, touch, form, taste and smell. According to Sarkar, when microvita come into
contact with either matter or energy, they can cause the creation or transformation of physical
stmctures. The direction of change can be towards either cmdity or subtlety depending on the type of
microvita involved. Similarly, when microvita come into contact with psychic waves (in the world of
ideas and propensities), modification of these waves can also occur.

'^° This point is developed out of Sarkar's theory in Jitendra Singh, Biopsychology: A New Science of Body,
Mind and Soul (Fmulia: Gurukula Publications, 1998), pp. 26-31.
'^' MvA^, pp. 59-73.
'"MvMpp. 155-156.
' " MvA^, p. 155.
''*Ibid
69
 This microvita ontology can be summarised as shown in the table below:

Brahma
Nirvisesa Savisesa
= Attributeless, non-dual Subjective portion Objective portion
consciousness with dynamic
equilibrium of cognitive and Jnd purusa 'Knower-F 'Known-F
operative principles. Krta purusa 'Doer-F 'Done-F

Sarkar stresses that this new ontology of brahma based on microvita theory has no direct one-
to-one correspondence to the concepts of 'mahat', 'aham' and 'citta' of the brahmacakra theory.
However, a careful examination of the brahmacakra and microvita versions does reveal probable
correspondences between their respective concepts. For example, the concept of purusottama (in the
brahmacakra theory) can be linked to the concept of the "subjective portion of savisesa brahma' (in
the microvita theory). These correspondences will be highlighted in the discussion that follows.
The characteristics of the nirvisesa and savisesa aspects of brahma can be compared to those
of nirgutia and sagurui brahma respectively. In both nirvisesa brahma and nirguna brahma, the
creative faculty (sakti) has yet to exert its effect on the cognitive counterpart (siva), and thus both are
objectiess and attributeless. In savisesa brahma and saguria brahma, however, qualification of siva by
sakti has occurred and differentiation of brahma into several distinct, though substantially the same,
portions of consciousness has resulted. The nature and action of the 'Knower-F (jnd purusa) and
'Doer-F (krta purusa) in the savisesa state can be conceived as two functional roles of purusottama,
the cosmic witnessing nucleus that witnesses and simultaneously reflects on and associates with all the
entities in the universe. In other words, purusottama can be said to effect changes in unit entities
through the associative 'mechanisms' of positive and negative microvita. For example, the infusion of
subtle positive microvita into unit minds can have the effect of increasing the density, volume and
mass of the mental body so that it can reflect cosmic consciousness more readily. Since microvita are
themselves consciousness in minute particulate form, the association of microvita with the unit mental
body would automatically transform mind into consciousness. Hence, a 'merger' of the unit and
cosmic entities can be said to have taken place. The 'Done-F may correspond to the physical objects
created within the cosmic citta in both sancara and pratisancara phases of brahmacakra, while the
'Known-F may correspond to the ideas, thoughts and propensities generated in individual units of
citta during the pratisancara phase. Thus, purusottama effects changes to both macrocosm and
microcosm by means of the reflective and associative emanations of microvita in two ways: (a) as krtd
purusa ('Doer-I'), it effects changes to created objects in the macrocosm; (b) as jnd purusa ('Knower-
I'), it effects ti-ansformation of the mind in the microcosm. The above comparisons are purely
speculative, based upon phenomenological analysis of textual material, and were not explicitiy made

70
by Sarkar. The inferred relationship between Sarkar's microvita cosmology and his earlier theory of
brahmacakra can be diagrammatically represented as follows:

3.4 Cosmology'^'

Sarkar's cosmology flows naturally from his metaphysical ontology of siva-sakti and his cosmogony
encapsulated in the theory of brahmacakra. In line with the Indian Tantric tradition, Sarkar links the
creative process with a complex theory of language involving the divine emanation of Sanskrit
syllables out of the causal matrix of guna-bound consciousness (gunayukta purusa). These syllabic
emanations are thought to be vibrational waves deriving from the sfraight-line waves of the primordial
ornkdra. Sarkar elaborates on the stmcture and nature of the cosmos by dividing it into seven lokas or
"worlds', each of which is embedded within a particular layer of the cosmic mind. According to

71
Sarkar, the 'world' is seen as extemal by unit beings but realised to be nothing other than an intemal
thought projection from the perspective of the cosmic mind.
I then move on to a discussion of Sarkar's understanding of the process of life, death and
rebirth, explaining how this is linked to the theory of samskdra - a notion that is much articulated and
accepted within Indian traditions. The discussion in this section shows Sarkar to be firmly grounded in
Indian thought, both Tanfric and Yogic, although several innovations can be noted, for example, in his
concepts of 'imposed' samskdra and in his description of the various causes of death.

3.4.1 Theory of Acoustic Roots

The creation of the universe, in Sarkar's view, is fundamentally a process of gradualfransformationof
pure, infinite consciousness, fu-st into psychological structures and then into physical objects and
finally lifeforms, from whence biological evolution and higher psychospiritual development begin.
Since everything is basically vibratory expressions of the same fundamental consciousness, Sarkar also
terms the universe as a cosmic 'thought projection' or "macropsychic conation', but one that has a
teleological finality - re-absorption into the same infinite pure consciousness that is the ultimate
purpose of all existence. During the process of 'macropsychic conation', vibrations of many and
varied wavelengths are emanated from within the cosmic 'body' of pure consciousness under the
influence of the three forces of prakrti These vibrations initially take the form of subtie acoustic
waves, with a total of fifty different main sounds that are within the range of human perception.
According to Sarkar, there are innumerable acoustic waves in the universe but only fifty main ones can
be perceived by the human mind. These are the fifty sounds of the Sanskrit alphabet and they are
'controlled by fifty main glands and sub-glands of the human body.''^* Collectively, these fifty sounds
create a singular sound in the universe that is called the ornkdra or 'aum', consisting of 'a', '«', and
'ma'. It can also be said that the 'aum' sound was the primordial acoustic vibration that subsequently
gave rise to the variegated sounds of the Sanskrit alphabet.
In line with Indian Tantric conception of the universe and sound, Sarkar gives metaphysical
significance to the Sanskrit alphabet and attempts to link it to the process and nature of creation. In his
theory of acoustic roots, he maintains that 'for each and every action there is a supporting sound in the
universe [which is] ... the acoustic root of that action.''^' Seen in this light, the om sound, being the
totality of all sounds, is also the encapsulation of all the actions in the universe. As such, it represents
the mundane or worldly expression of parama purusa, 'supreme consciousness'. Sarkar also maintains
that every vibration in the universe comprises not only sound but also colour or light. Each vibration,
being a thought projection of sagurui brahma, also represents a particular idea, and hence, "each idea

'^' Main sources are AS 11.18-20 (p. 25), III.1-7 (pp. 29-33); /A/, pp. 32-38 and 47-54; SPSSA, pp. 117-120 and
166-205; and DOTVol 1, pp. 74-124.
'^'DOT Vol. l,p.75.
'^^ DOT"Vol. l,p.76.
72
has a vibrational sound and vibrational colour.'' Thus Sarkar conceives of brahma expressing itself in
the form of ideas with attributes of sound (sabda brahma) and colour (jyoti brahma). In his discourses,
Sarkar spoke far more about sound than about colour, and specifically elaborated on mystical sounds
that are said to be heard during meditation as a result of kundalini movement. This concept will be
discussed in Chapter 6.
In his analysis of the fifty unit sounds of the Sanskrit alphabet, Sarkar distinguishes between
bija ('acoustic root')^ and atibija or mahdbija ('super-acoustic root').^ According to him, most of the
fifty sounds, termed bijas, are primary acoustic roots in themselves, while others, termed mahdbijas,
are the roots of acoustic roots other than the fifty letters. These other acoustic roots, like their
counterparts in the Sanskrit alphabet, sonically represent various ideas and actions. For example, the
sound 'phaf, which according to Sarkar is the acoustic root (bija) of putting theory into practice, has a
super-acoustic root (mahdbija) in the sound /, a component of the Sanskrit alphabet. Sarkar gives an
interpretation of the fifty Sanskrit sounds by weaving together ideas from theory of music, history,
philosophy, psychology, and spiritual praxis. Generally, he considers each of the fifty letters as a
mdtrkd varna ('causal matrix') as 'each is an acoustic root of some important factor, sound, vibration,
divine or demoniacal propensity, human quality, or microcosmic expression.'" For the sake of brevity
and smooth flow of the text, I give Sarkar's explanations of the significance of each of the letters in
Appendix B.^
All of the fifty Sanskrit unit sounds, representing the various propensities (vrtti) of the mind,
are said to be associated with the seven cakras located at various points along the central axis of the
body, a concept that we will tum to in Chapter 4. By theorising on the nature of sounds and then-
relationship with both cosmogony and individual psychology, Sarkar is engaging in an essentially
'Tantric' type of exercise - homologising the microcosmic and the macrocosmic. The macrocosmic
process of cosmic creation occurs in variegated bursts of sound and colour, all from a singular sound
that pervades both macrocosm and microcosm. These various sounds are present as vibrations in the
cosmos and in the human body, representing in seed form the various propensities of the macrocosmic
and microcosmic minds. In the microcosm of a human being, these sounds exist as subtle vibrations
in the mind-body complex and their full expression as vocalised sounds occurs through a six-stage
process. In this process, the vibrational propensities of the mind are expressed as vocalised sounds,
words, or sentences, involving the movement of sakti (here interpreted as 'energy') from the lowest
cakra (at the base of the spine) to the throat cakra. Sarkar terms the six stages pard, pasyanti,
madhyamd, dyotamdna, vaikhafi, and srutigocard.

'DOTVol. l,p. 82.

^Ibid
^ DOTVoll, p. 91.
" Ibid
5 DOT" Vol.1, pp. 82-124. I follow AM's translation of terms of the discourse in question.
*DOrVol.l, pp. 93-98.
73
 hi Sarkar's terminology, the fu-st or primordial stage of linguistic expression is termed pard,
while the potential energy of vocalisation is known as pardsakti (to be distinguished from the pards'akti
at the initial phases of cosmogony). He says:

All the potentialities of vocal expression lie dormant in the form of pardsakti at the
mulddhdra cakra [psychic centre at the base of the spine]. Pardsakti is raised step by
step andfinallyleads to the vocal expression of language.

At this stage, vocahsation is dormant and is neither audible nor perceptible in any way. When the
mind visualises what it wants to communicate, whether consciously or unconsciously, it enters into the
second stage of linguistic expression. At this second stage, the energy of vocalisation moves from the
lowest cakra to the second cakra at the genital area, and enables the mind to visuaHse its
communicative intent. This energy is known as pasyanti sakti. Pasyanti sakti then moves up into the
third cakra (counting upward from the base of the spine) and combines with the energy of the luminous
factor (known as indrasakti) to form madhyamd sakti. Madhyamd sakti is confrolled by the third cakra
and gives extra momentum to the ideas that are to be communicated. At this third stage of linguistic
expression, communicative ideas do not yet have a sound audible to the ear but are 'audible' intemally
in the mind.
Madhyamd sakti then gets transformed into the form of vocalised speech at the fourth stage of
linguistic expression. At this fourth stage, the energy of vocalisation is known as dyotamdnd sakti and
functions at a point between the third cakra (at the navel) and the fifth cakra (at the throat). According
to Sarkar, dyotamdnd sakti is expressed 'as a relentless effort tofransformidea into language' but may
result in only a 'partial or incoherent vocal expression' if the mind is influenced by fear or other
emotions,* or if there is a lack of proper command over language." In Sarkar's view, the stage of
dyotamdnd also exists in collective life wherein human beings since the dawn of civilisation have
always searched for diverse ways to fiilfil their desires. However, he considers that human beings as a
collective have to date been unable to give 'full and rich expression to the vast world of human
thought.''"
At the fifth stage of linguistic expression, the vocal cords situated at the level of the throat
cakra transform the abstract ideas of speech into vocal expression. Thisfransformationis facilitated by
the energy of vaikhari sakti, which is the energy that causes ideas and inaudible intemal sounds to
become audible vocal expressions. The sixth and final stage of linguistic expression comprises the
conveying of the exact language of communication to one's listeners. The energy that mediates this
phase of linguistic communication is known as srutigocard sakti.

'DOrVol.l, p.94.
*Z)C»7'Vol.l,p.96.
"DOrVol.l,p. 97.
''Ibid.
74
 Sarkar seems to have developed his acoustic root theory by borrowing heavily from the Tantric
conception of sound and the universe. While some of his interpretations and analyses are arguably
idiosyncratic, the overall pattem is unmistakably Tantric. The issue of Sarkar's links to traditional
Tantra will be explored further in Chapter 8. For now we leave Sarkar's theory of acoustic roots and
proceed to his conception of the lived worlds of sentient existence.

3.4.2 Sarkar's Worlds

In his treatise Idea and Ideology, Sarkar details his concept of the various possible dimensions of
existence within this universe bounded by space and time. In his worldview, the extemal world exists
in parallel with the internal world or inner mind-states of the individual, a relationship best described
by the concept of macrocosmic-microcosmic homologism. We have seen earlier that the cosmic mind
comprises three increasingly subtie and vast portions of mental space: citta, aham, and mahat. Within
the cosmic citta (the grossest portion), is created the entire physical universe, out of which animate
beings and finally human beings with developed minds emerge after a long evolutionary process.
Thus, microcosms or unit minds (comprising unit citta, aham and mahat) exist within the scope of the
cosmic citta. The entire physical creation is thought to form out of the cmdest layer of cosmic citta,
known as the kdmamaya kosa or 'layer of desire'. Other more subtle layers are the manomaya kosa
('layer of mind'), the atimdnasa kosa ('supramental layer'), the vijndnamaya kosa ('layer of special
knowledge), and the hiratimaya kosa ('golden layer). As the universe, living entities, and the various
layers of cosmic mind are ultimately dynamic vibrations of cosmic consciousness in various
wavelengths and degrees of metamorphosis, they can be described as thought or psychic projections of
the cosmic entity, or in short, as 'macropsychic conation'."
Sarkar uses the term 'loka' to refer to the world in which the different unit minds, with all
their various layers (kosas), exist. Kosas are various layers of the unit mind which also exist in
macrocosmic form as layers of the cosmic mind. Sarkar explains:

The Cosmic Entity extends in different lokas wherein the different kosas and the unit
minds dwell. The term loka refers only to the Macrocosm and not to the unit.'^

Sarkar does not elaborate on these lokas, though he does provide details of the various kosas of the
mind on a microcosmic scale. His interpretations of the lokas beyond the first two are mainly
extrapolations into the macrocosm of his explanations of the higher kosas.
According to Sarkar, the kdmamaya kosa of the cosmic mind gives rise to two worlds - the
bhurloka or 'physical world' and the bhdvarloka or 'cmde mental world'. The bhurloka is the cmdest
level of existence, where material stmctures have taken form in the first layer of the cosmic mind. It
is equated with the entire physical universe, the world in which we live. The bhdvarloka is a slightly

"AyPart30,pp. 16-17.
'^/A/,p.36.
75
subtier state of existence, in which material stmctures are just beginning to take form but have yet to
fully materialise. It can be equated with the early phase of Sarkar's physical evolution, when the five
fundamental factors have just been formed but have yet to fully congeal into material stmctures. Here,
bhdvarloka can be said to be 'mental' from the perspective of cosmic citta but 'physical' from the
perspective of created units. Alternatively, it can be seen as the cmde mental spaces of unit beings,
where the impulses of sensing, perceiving, desiring, and resisting predominate. While each being's
cmde mental space is separate from another's, it makes sense to talk about a collection of these mental
spaces pooled together as the cmde mental worid, bhdvarloka. In this case, bhdvarloka is 'mental'
from the standpoint of both unit and cosmic entities.
Above the kdmamaya kosa, the manomaya kosa of the cosmic mind is the svarloka or 'subtie
mental world', where no physical stmctures exist and objects are purely mental or psychic from the
perspective of both unit and cosmic entities. In this level, the predominant mental faculties are those
of dreaming, memory, problem solving, logical thinking and reasoning, and other higher cognitive
functions. On an individual or microcosmic level, this can be conceived as the totality of each
person's cognitive world. On the macrocosmic level, this may be equated with the collective pool of
cognitive spaces of all sentient creatures.
The atimdnasa kosa of the cosmic mind is the maharloka or 'supramental world', where reside
the deeper faculties of intuition and creativity and imprints of past actions in the form of 'reactive
momenta' (sarnskdras). Reactive momenta are the potential reactions of past actions committed by
the unit mind, individually or collectively, and stored in the thfrd and deeper layer of the mind known
as atimdnasa kosa. Sarkar conceives of this layer as being macrocosmic in nature, and as functioning
as a collective field of karmic seeds shared by all unit entities. In other words, while each unit mind
acts and imbibes the reactions to its actions, these reactions in potentiality exist in the collective field
of the atimdnasa kosa and are expressed when suitable circumstances and conditions prevail.'^
The vijndnamaya kosa of the cosmic mind forms the janarloka or 'subliminal world', where
the highly subtie faculties of discrimination (viveka) and non-attachment (vairdgya) exist. Again, this
subliminal world can be seen as the macrocosmic vijndnamaya kosa that all unit entities share, and
that each entity can develop and access through meditative practices.
The hiranmaya kosa of the cosmic mind is the taparloka, for which no English translation has
been given. On a microcosmic level, Sarkar describes the hiranmaya kosa as the 'golden' layer of the
mind, where there is only an intense attraction for the cosmic entity. It is described as the last 'thin
veil' that separates the individual mind from the dtman, which is in essence identical to brahma,
cosmic consciousness. Extrapolating from the above, the taparloka can be seen as the state of
existence where unit minds experience this golden radiance of the mind that expands beyond the
limited boundaries of the self It is the world of intense urge for merger into the cosmic entity.

13
It can be postulated that collective archetypes, as conceived by Carl Jung, would be considered by Sarkar to
exist in this layer of the cosmic mind.
76
 Beyond all the kosas lies the satyaloka or brahmaloka, which is identified with purusottama,
the witnessing consciousness at the nucleus of the universe. Sarkar also calls this world the 'Causal
Cosmic Body'.'" This is the realm of final spiritual attainment, synonymous with the infinite and
resplendent field of the brahma itself The layers (kosas) of the cosmic mind together with their
witnessing nucleus consciousness (purusottama), and the corresponding worlds (lokas) that they form
can be tabulated as follows:'^

Kosas of Cosmic Mind Lokas (Worlds)

1. Kdmamaya kosa 1. Bhurloka - physical world
2. Bhdvarloka - cmde mental world
2. Manomaya kosa 3. Svarloka - subtle mental world
3. Atimdnasa kosa 4. Maharloka - supramental world
4. Vijndnamaya kosa 5. Janarloka - subliminal world
5. Hiranmaya kosa 6. Taparloka
Purusottama 7. Satyaloka or Brahmaloka
(= cosmic witnessing nucleus) - causal cosmic body

Sarkar differentiates the seven lokas one from another by ascribing to them varying proportions and
intensities of the three gurias - sattvagutia (sentient force), rajoguria (mutative force), and tamoguna
(static force). Sattvaguna is said to be dominant in janarloka and taparloka, while tamoguna is
dominant in bhurloka and bhdvarloka. The relative strength of the guiias distributed across all the
lokas can be tabulated as follows 16

Loka Relative Strength of Gunas Loka Relative Strength of Gunas

Bhurloka Sattvaguna (S) - least Janarloka S - dominant
Rajoguna (R) - less R - least
Tamoguna (T) - dominant T-less
Bhdvarloka S - less Taparloka S - dominant
R - least R - less
7-dominant T-least
Svarloka 5-least Satyaloka All gurias are dormant. This is
R - dominant essentially the state of nirguna
7-less brahma.

Maharloka S - less
R - dominant
T- least

Sarkar unequivocally denies the existence of heaven and hell as commonly understood in
many religious traditions." He conceives of heaven as merely the environment within which a person

'"A5, p. 30.
'^ AdaptedfromlAI, p. 37.
" Described in AMP Part 3, pp. 202-204.
''AS 11.20, pp. 25-26. The sloka reads: Na svargo na rasdtalah [There is neither heaven nor hell].
77
enjoys the pleasurable fmits of his/her good actions, while hell is the environment within which he/she
experiences the painful consequences of his/her evil actions. Such 'heavenly' or 'hellish'
environments can be experienced in this present-moment reality of earthly life. In other words, Sarkar
views heaven and hell more as psychological states than as actual physical planes of existence. In
particular, heaven and hell exist in the pure mental world of svarloka where happiness (sukha) and
pain (duhkha) are experienced.'*

3.4.3 Life, Death, and Rebirth

Sarkar views life as a continuous process of adjustment between physical waves, mental waves, and
prdndh, resulting in the maintenance of the unit stmcture during the introversial phase of the cosmic
cycle, pratisancara. A parallelism of physical and mental waves is essential for the existence of living
structures, or life, while a loss of parallelism in these waves due to '... maladjustment of or
unadjustable elevation or degradation of any one of the constituent factors' will result in physical and
mental dissociation, or death. The three main causes of elevation of physical and mental waves are:
(1) physical clash, or stmggle of the unit entity against other entities and the environment; (2) psychic
clash, or interaction and stmggle between different ideas and mental waves amongst unit entities; and
(3) attraction of the Supreme, or the spiritual force emanated by the cosmic entity to draw all entities
back into Him. This force is manifested in the urge for spiritual development, deeper fulfilment, and
lasting happiness in highly-evolved entities such as human beings. Sarkar gives an example of how
maladjustment of physical and mental waves can occur:

... if a dog comes in contact with a human, the mental waves of the dog contact and
clash with the waves of the human and thereby the dog's mental waves get evolved and
attain a greater wavelength. A stage may be reached when the evolved mental
wavelength of the dog may lose proper adjustment with its physical stmcture. This
loss in parallelism will cause dissociation, and the dissociated mind will have to find a
physical body with which it can find proper adjustment. In common parlance it will be
said that the dog has "died" and undergone a corporeal change.^"

As opposed to elevation in mental waves resulting in evolution, degradation in mental waves resulting
in counter-evolution (or negative pratisancara) can take place. Sarkar says:

... if the mental wavelength of a person cannot adjust properly with the human body,
the psychic body of the person will have to be associated with a properly-adjustable
physical stmcture, which may be of an inferior animal, a plant or still cmder matter
The imbibing of waves of higher wavelengths can rarefy the psychic body of a lower
animal or plant, so that it can have an association with the human physical stmcture,
and vice versa, if the wavelength is made cruder by inculcating meaner thoughts.^'

''AMP Part 3, p. 203.

'"/A/, p. 51.
^'Ibid.
^' lAI, p. 52.
78
 Sarkar explains the immediate physical cause of death as loss of parallelism of physical and
mental waves within the unit stmcture, leading to dissociation of mind and body. The process through
which death occurs is closely linked to the prdridh of the unit entity. For life to exist, proper
adjustment between the physical and mental waves with prdridh is another essential. According to
Sarkar, prdridh is the collective name of ten vdyus or "winds', of which five are intemal and five are
extemal. The names and functions of these vdyus are as follows:

External vdyus
Name: Function:
Ndga Jumping, extending body and throwing
Kurma Contracting body
Krkara Yawning
Devadatta Thirst and hunger
Dhananjaya Sleep and drowsiness

Internal vdyus
Name: Regulates:
Prdna Inhalation and exhalation
Apdna Excretion and egestion
Samdna Adjustment between prdria and apdna
Uddna Vocal cords and voice
Vydna Blood circulation and nerves

In the final moments preceding death, all the intemal vdyus, starting with prdria, apdna, samdna
followed by the next two, gather into one strong force and strike at every delicate point on the physical
body for an outiet. All the extemal vdyus except dhananjaya follow suit and leave the physical
stmcture with the intemal vdyus. Dhananjaya remains in the body, causing the long deep sleep of
death, and only leaves when the body is cremated or has completely decayed. All the vdyus pass into
the limitless space of the cosmos, where they remain until they are re-activated according to the will of
prakrti.
Another two possibilities for the immediate cause of death are admitted in Ananda Marga
philosophy. First, a sudden and drastic change in the physical waves of a living stmcture can result in
loss of their parallelism with mental waves. Such an event, exemplified by an accident or a severe
illness, can frigger death. Second, a prolonged synchronisation of mental waves with the infinite
wavelength of the cosmic entity (brahma), as a result of spiritual practices, will lead to loss of
parallelism between the mind and the body. The mind finally leaves the body and attains a state
known as mukti (merger in cosmic mind) or moksa (merger in cosmic consciousness). This is known
as mahdmrtyu or the 'great death', and is regarded not as '... death in the sense of annihilation, but a
11
merger into a state of infinite beatitude.'

22
The Wisdom of Yoga, p. 47.
79
 hi common with the general Indian worldview, Sarkar sees death not as the end of life. He
views life as continuing in a cycle of rebirths following death, driven by the sarnskdras or 'reactive
momenta' of the unit being. He postulates that the movement of living beings through life cannot
occur without some force driving it. This force can be either the infroversial force of the cosmic mind
that pulls unit minds towards its nucleus, or the self-directed volition, thoughts and actions of unit
minds themselves. Rebirth, in Sarkar's estimation, is a mechanism through which living entities
gradually evolve into higher forms on thefr joumey towards the cosmic entity. However, as unit
minds have the capacity to choose their direction of movement, rebirth can also lead them downward
on the evolutionary scale if they decide to indulge in cmdifying thoughts and actions.
Sarkar provides some clues to the mechanisms of rebuth, which follow on from the
dissociation of the body, mind and prdridh. As previously mentioned, both the psychic waves and the
vdyus merge into the cosmos following death. While the vdyus await further activation by prakrti, the
dissociated psychic body moves in search of a suitable physical basis for its expression, as directed
and aided by the mutative force of prakrti. The dissociated mental body contains all the unexpressed
reactive momentum of its previous lives and requires a material basis for proper expression of that
momentum. The cosmic mutative force (rajoguria) is responsible for providing the mental body with
a physical basis that is able to maintain parallelism with the mental waves. Sarkar sees spermatozoa
and ovum as having specific wavelengths according to the reactive momenta of the parent bodies, and
when an embryo is formed as a result of their union, it also possesses a specific resultant wavelength.
When a parallelism between disembodied mental waves and the embryonic stmcture can be
established, the mental body penetrates into the physical embryo and a new life is formed.
Throughout the entire period when the mind leaves the body and re-situates itself in another
physical structure, the dtman or a unit of witnessing consciousness remains associated with the mind
and its repository of reactive momentum. Although the dissociated mind is in a state of inaction
wherein reactions exist only in potentiality, the witnessing faculty continues to function, acting as a
'residence' for the mind. Here, one is reminded of a substantialist notion of the dtman commonly
upheld by proponents of the upanisadic tradition, which is at odds with the non-substantialist
overtones of Sarkar's other statements on the nature of the dtman?^ It appears that while Sarkar does
not ascribe any sense of personality or ownership to the concept of dtman, he nevertheless sees it as an
entity that ontologically exists and functions, albeit as a 'wave-like' or 'field-like' continuum rather
than as a solidified mass or substance.

3.4.4 Theory of Sam^Mra

Sarkar asserts that the '... mind is an ever-changing functional organism and so it must have a
momentum.'^ Sarkar identifies this momentum as coming from samskdra, which he defines as tiie

^^ See discussion on nature of dtman in subsection 3.2.4.

24
lAI, p. 49.
80
effect of action in the stages leading up to the formation or current status of the unit mind. As
previously discussed, the first emergence of the unit mind occurs as a result of various forces acting
within sancara, the extroversial phase of the cosmic cycle of creation. Sarkar further clarifies that the
'... ultimate cause of momentum of every force is, of course, the Macrocosm [Cosmic Mind], the
entire working principle in sancara and pratisancara.'^'
In the stage of sancara, when only inanimate entities exist, no question of sarnskdras arises
since no mind has yet existed. In the initial stages of pratisancara, when cmde unit minds (citta) have
just evolved, the cosmic mind or macrocosm provides the momentum to move these minds ever closer
towards the cosmic nucleus. Later, when ego or aham evolves out of citta, the unit mind begins to
feel that it is the 'owner' of sarnskdra or reactive momentum, and subsequentiy establishes volitional
control over its mental activities. Human beings, as the most highly evolved forms of physical life
according to Sarkar, are 'owners' of their sarnskdras and thus move through the cycle of evolution or
counter-evolution by means of the mechanism of rebirth. In Sarkar's estimation, rebirth need not
inevitably lead one forward to the culminating point of cosmic consciousness (parama purusa or
brahma). It can also be regressive if the unit mind has volitionally thought or acted in a way that
cmdifies rather than subtilises itself.
In unit beings where the aham and mahat portions of the mind have developed, it is possible
to talk of two kind of actions: original (pratyayamulaka) and reactive (sarnskdramulaka). Original
actions (pratyayamulaka karma) are those that are performed not as a consequence of sarnskdra but as
direct expressions of innate mental propensities (vrtti). Propensities or vrtti are "occupations' that the
mind adopts when expressing its momentum in the course of evolution, the momentum being provided
by the cosmic mind in the early stages of pratisancara. In the case of a more developed unit mind, its
vrtti can be formed according to the configuration of its sarnskdra, as the whirlpool of thoughts and
emotions that constantiy emerge from and dissolve in the mind. In this case, actions performed by the
unit mind as a result of its vrtti are no longer "original' in the strict sense, since these vrtti were formed
through the conditioning effect of its sarnskdra. (Sarkar's theory of vrtti will be discussed more
thoroughly in Chapter 4.)
Reactive actions (sarnskdramulaka karma) are direct consequences of potential reactions or
reactive momentum (samskdra) stored within the unit mind, which the unit mind experiences as pain
or pleasure according to the nature of the original actions. Sarkar says:

It is the result of the original actions that potential reactions, sarnskdras, accme, which
are consumed or dissipated through the retributive actions (i.e. through [undergoing]
the requittals or consequential reactions). So the unit has freedom in original actions
but none in the retributive ones.

" lAI, p. 50.

^* Sarkar's discourse quoted in SPSSA, p. 189.
81
The portion of the unit mind that acts and experiences reactions to its actions is the aham or 'doer I'.
The citta or 'done I', the cmdest portion of the mind, gets distorted in three ways: (1) it takes the form
of extemal objects perceived through the senses; (2) it takes shape according to the deskes of aham;
and (3) it assumes the form of the fmit of action which the aham enjoys or suffers. Thus, the citta is
continuously being distorted, much like a mbber ball being constantly dented by the pressure of
fingers. Just as the mbber ball seeks to regain its original shape, its dented surface bouncing out with
a force of equal intensity, so the citta tries to regain its original balanced state by undergoing the
reaction to action. Sarkar calls this process of retuming to the original unaltered citta state
prdptirphalabhoga or karmaphalabhoga.^' According to him, the intensity of mental reaction is not
always equal and opposite to the intensity of the original action. This is due to changes in time, place,
and person, which have a multiplying effect on the strength of the original action to give a greater
reaction. The longer the lapse of time between action and reaction, or the greater the change in place
and person, the greater will be the reaction in comparison with the action.
Sarkar's theory of sarriskdra has several features that make it unique and different to the
classical Indian doctrine of karma.^ He classifies samskdra into three main types, the first and second
of which are common to other Indian schools of thought: (1) sahajdta or 'inborn' sarriskdra; (2)
pratyamdlaka or 'acquired' sarriskdra; and (3) dropita or 'imposed' sarnskdra. Sahajdta sarriskdra are
those that a unit entity inherits from its former existences, while pratyamdlaka sarnskdra are those that
the entity freshly acqufres through independent thought and action. Aropita sarriskdra, a category
unique to Sarkar's theory, are defined as those sarriskdra that are imposed on the unit entity by various
means.
First, there arejdgatika or 'world' sarnskdra, which are imposed on the mind by contact with
the physical world. These are impressions of sensory objects on the mind due to association with
matter. Second, there are parivesagata or 'environmental' sarnskdra, which are imposed by the
surrounding social and cultural environment. The effect of a person's social company falls into this
category. Third, kartavyagata or 'responsibility' sarriskdra are those that are placed upon a person by
virtue of his/her social responsibility. The roles and responsibilities that define a person's membership
of a particular family, organisation, or country impose a certain pattem of actions and hence reactions
on the person concemed. Fourth, siksdgata or 'education' samskdra are those that are imposed on a
student's mind through various stages of education. Ideas, ideologies, and attitudes conditioned by a
person's education constitute this category of imposed samskdra. Finally, there is vrttigata or
'habituated behaviour' sarriskdra, which are the result of the preceding four kinds of imposed
samskdra. The combined effect of physical, environmental, socio-cultural, and educational
conditioning moulds and shapes the thoughts and actions of individuals, gradually inducing changes to
the hormonal glands and secretions, resulting in long-term behavioural changes. Sarkar views

" A 5 , p. 25.
^* See 5P55A, pp.193-195.
4, pp. 193-195
82
imposed conditioning as having the power to biologically perpetuate certain basic fraits and mentality
in individuals and society.

3.5 Summarising Conclusion

This chapter began with an account of Sarkar's concept of the ontological ultimate, portrayed as a tri-
aspect cosmic entity he calls brahma. Brahma is said to comprise siva or purusa ('consciousness' or
'cognitive faculty') and sakti or prakrti ('operative principle'), which are inseparable in much the
same way as fire is inseparable from its burning capacity. In the scheme of causal relations between
siva and sakti, siva is pre-eminent and the material and primary efficient cause of the universe, while
s'akti is subordinate and the secondary efficient cause and link between the material and efficient
causes. While siva or purusa is pure, unfettered consciousness - a continuous flow of knowing and
luminosity (akharida cidaikarasah) characterised by tmth, cognisance and bliss (sat-cit-dnanda), sakti
or prakrti is made up of three binding forces (guria) - sentient (sattva), mutative (rajas), and static
(tamas).
Depending on the dynamics between siva and sakti, brahma can exist in three states; saguria,
nirguria, and tdraka. The immanent state of brahma, in which sakti has exerted its influence over siva
and where the forces of prakrti have begun to act, is known as saguria brahma. In the saguria state,
purusa exists in its pristine state as the cosmic nucleus consciousness (purusottama). Purusottama is
said to be located in the centre of the entire universe, both macrocosmically and microcosmically. The
transcendent aspect prior to all influence of prakrti over purusa is known as nirguria brahma. Tdraka
brahma is that aspect of the same entity that lies as a bridge between the immanent and transcendent
dimensions of brahma. Sarkar sees tdraka brahma as the tangential point and silver lining between
the unmanifested (avyakta) and manifested (vyakta) consciousness, simultaneously partaking in the
stance of both saguria and nirguria brahma. Tdraka brahma is sometimes equated with purusottama
and acts to maintain order and devotional inspiration in the universe. Understood as a soteriological
concept, tdraka brahma manifests as the perfect human guru, who has the capacity to lead human
beings toward salvation both individually and collectively.
Sarkar simultaneously remythologises and philosophises on the cenfral Hindu personality of
Krsna, as part of the attempt to constmct his AM ontology. He sees Kr§na as a historical
manifestation of tdraka brahma some three thousand five hundred years ago, one who has two
aspects: Vraja Krsna - the playful and sweetiy charming young Krsna of Vrindavan, and Parthasarathi
Krsna - the sfrict and tough community leader who leads and dfrects the forces of righteousness in the
Mahabharata war. On a philosophical level, Sarkar conceptualises vraja krsria as the sweet, attractive,
and spontaneous aspect of purusottama, the pure witnessing consciousness existing as the nucleus of
the universe. Similarly, he views pdrthasdrathi krsria as the directive and confroUing aspect of
purusottama, responsible for leading all beings on to the path of righteousness.

83
 Sarkar explains his view on the nature of the self (which is seen to be identical to the nature of
the universe) through the concepts of dtman and paramdtman. He sees dtman as a continuous flow of
knowledge (jndna) essentially one with and embedded in the infinite cognisant space of paramdtman
(a flow of jndna of infinite scope). Equivocating between a substantialist and a non-substantialist
interpretation of dtman, Sarkar maintains that paramdtman, which is purusottama in association with
the universe and individual beings (and essentially one with brahma), is both the ground and the
witnessing faculty of cosmic and psychological reality.
Sarkar's theory of cosmogony or brahmacakra forms the overall context for his entire
ideology and praxis. He sees brahmacakra as having two phases - sancara ('proper movement') and
pratisancara ('reverse proper movement'). In the primordial and pre-evolutionary stages prior to the
start of creation, several processes are said to occur, which finally precipitate the brahmacakra. In the
primordial phase, the three forces of prakrti - sattvagutia, rajoguria, and tamoguria - flow
haphazardly in all directions with infinite momentum, forming many multi-sided figures of force in
the infinite 'body' of undifferentiated and unmanifested purusa (nirgutia brahma). Here, prakrti is
said to be dormant or anucchunya. In the subsequent pre-evolutionary stage, the three gurias form
themselves into stable triangles of forces in dynamic equilibrium, resulting in a localised portion of the
infinite purusa being acted upon hy prakrti.
Sancara, the first phase of actual creation, then begins with one of the forces bursting out from
one of the vertices of the triangle. It is unclear whether (1) one triangle of forces gives rise to one
universe, in which case the multitude of triangles within infinite brahma give rise to many universes;
or (2) one triangle of forces emits just one entity in the universe, in which case the many triangles
controlled by a common nucleus (purusottama) are responsible for the multiplicity of entities in one
universe. It can be argued that this ambiguity is one salient weakness of Sarkar's cosmogonic theory.
During the cosmogonic process, the sentient force (sattvagutia) is the first to emerge and
along with it is a qualified state of purusa in the form of a linear wave (jddnasakti ndda). This ndda is
the acoustic expression of the primordial sound, orri, which later differentiates into multiple sound
units made up of vibrational waves. Before that happens, the linear waves undergo further influence
by sattvagutia and become transformed into the cosmic mahat, the sense of self-existence in the
previously selfless and objectiess consciousness. The mutative force (rajoguria) takes over the
sentient and fransforms part of the cosmic mahat into the cosmic aham, the sense of doership or
agency and a stronger sense of self The static force (tamoguria) then predominates and fransforms a
part of the cosmic aham into cosmic citta, the coarsest objectified portion of the mind. Together, the
cosmic mahat, aham and citta form the cosmic mind (bhumamanas). It is out of the cosmic citta that
thefive-elemental(pancamahdbhuta) material and living universe finally emerges with the continued
action of the static force.
Pratisancara, the other phase of the brahmacakra, is said to begin when life first emerges
from matter. Living stmctures are formed from a balanced composition of the five fundamental

84
factors (ethereal, aerial, luminous, liquid, and solid), the emergence of prdridh (a collection often vital
energies), and the formation of a controlling nucleus within each stmcture. The static force gives way
first to the mutative force and then to the sentient force, resulting in gradual emergence of citta, aham
and mahat within the unit living stmcture. Citta, aham and mahat, in their microcosmic form,
collectively comprise the unit mind. Evolution of the unit mind is said to be the result of continuing
frictional clashes and pulverisation of matter and ectoplasmic particles (cittdnu), causing subtler and
more expansive layers of the mind to emerge out of cmder ones. Through spiritual devotion, altmistic
service and meditative practices, unit minds are able to expand themselves further and finally attain
the teleological goal of existence - mergence into that supreme consciousness (parama purusa) from
whence all entities have arisen. This completes Sarkar's cycle of cosmic creation (brahmacakra),
which is an ongoing process said to occur from moment to moment from beginningless past to endless
future.
The role of the subtie entities that Sarkar calls microvita in the cosmic creative process,
particularly in the initial formation of life and in subsequent genetic mutations, is a relatively late
addition to Sarkar's worldview. His microvita theory adds a new dimension to the historically earlier
cosmogonic theory of brahmacakra and to aspects of his soteriology, purporting to account for the
evolution of life and the transformation of the mind in response to spiritual praxis. Sarkar sees
microvita as minute emanations of pure consciousness that may be positive or negative in terms of
their impact on the human mind and body. Positive microvita are said to be emanated and utilised by
the sadguru (who is the supreme consciousness in embodied existence) to assist spiritual aspirants in
their meditative and soteriological quest. Sarkar sees such a 'shower' of positive microvita by the
guru on sincere practitioners as synonymous with the grace of the supreme entity (brahma krpd). In
microvita cosmology, Sarkar gives nirguria brahma an altemative appellation of 'nirvisesa' ('without
characteristics') and saguria brahma the appellation 'savisesa' ('with characteristics'). He uses the
terms jnd purusa ('knower-I') and krtd purusa ('doer-I') possibly to refer to the dual role of
purusottama, the cosmic witnessing nucleus, in (1) guiding the process of evolution, and (2) attracting
and accelerating unit beings towards the highest spiritual goal of brahma. From the quasi-scientific
terminology he uses in his microvita theory, it can be argued that Sarkar is consciously trying to couch
his latest philosophy in terms palatable to the modem mind. It is ironical that in this attempt, the very
pedagogy he uses to boost his ideas backfires, revealing an element of confusion in his usage of the
concepts 'vims' and 'sub-atomic particle' when referring to microvita in the physical realm (see
subsection 3.3.4).
In terms of cosmology, Sarkar articulates a theory of acoustic roots (bija) reminiscent of the
traditional Tantric theory of sounds and letters. He sees all acoustic roots or sound units as ultimately
derived from the primordial sound of orri, the fu-st linear vibration emitting from the matrix of creation,
the triangle of forces. These sound units, while existing in the cosmos, are simultaneously represented
in the human body as acoustic roots of various propensities of the mind.

85
 On the cosmic scale, Sarkar conceives of seven lokas or worlds that form all possible
dimensions of physical and psychic existence: bhurloka, bhdvarloka, svarloka, maharloka, janarloka,
taparloka, and satyaloka. These lokas exhibit macrocosmic-microcosmic homologism, a feature
typical of Indian cosmologies. With the exception of the seventh and subtiest world, satyaloka, they
are all essentially layers of the cosmic citta in varying degrees of cmdity or subtiety. The entire
physical universe is said to be formed in the bhurloka of the cosmic citta.
Sarkar's theory of samskdra is the final element in his complex monistic worldview of AM. It
is essentially an articulation of the Indian docfrine of karma from a Yogic and psychosocial
perspective. A clear example of his psychosocial slant on karma is his unique analysis of dropita or
'imposed' sarnskdra - imprints on or distortions of the citta as a result of sociocultural conditioning
and societal imposition (e.g. conditioning as a result of social stmctures such as caste, class, gender
divisions). By including a psychosocial dimension in his cosmology, Sarkar is effectively building a
link to his social, economic, and political concems, concerns that are articulated and acted upon in his
philosophy of Progressive Utilisation Theory (PROUT). Sarkar also offers a conception of life, death
and rebirth based on the mutual adjustment between physical waves, mental waves and prdndh. He
outlines the process of death and dying in terms of the gradual resorption and exit of the vital energies
(vdyus) from the body and a sequential dissolution of the layers of the mind. Rebirth of the deceased
individual is said to be guided by (1) the 'basket' of unexpressed samskdras lying latent in the
dormant mind of the deceased, and (2) the mutative force of the cosmic prakrti, which assists in
finding the dissociated mind a physical body with which its psychic waves are in parallelism. In many
ways, Sarkar's ideas on rebirth are reminiscent of a typical Indian religious outlook, an outlook that
views the cycle of birth, death and rebirth as natural, inevitable (for the unenlightened), and to be
transcended. In elaborating on the finer details of his rebirth theory, Sarkar borrows from Yoga the
notion of sarnskdra, and from Sarnkhya the concepts of prakrti and rajoguria. (A more in-depth
comparison between Sarkar's AM and both Yoga and Samkhya is found in Chapter 7.) In much the
same way as he has appropriated scientific terminology for his microvita theory, Sarkar employs the
scientific metaphor of waves to explain the processes of death and rebirth, a pedagogy that may be
constmed as modem adaptation of traditional concepts so as to target a contemporary and better-
informed audience.

86
 Chapter 4
IMind and Biopsychology

4.1 Introduction
This chapter takes us another step on the joumey into Sarkar's spiritual world, exploring his ideas on
the mind and its workings and a new integrated science of body, mind and spirit that he terms
biopsychology. This chapter draws heavily on Sarkar's compiled discourses in Yoga Psychology (YP:
1998), parts of Idea and Ideology (lAI: 1993), Discourses on Tantra (DOT) Volume 1 (1993) and
Volume 2 (1994), Ananda Sutram (AS: 1996), and the secondary text. The Spiritual Philosophy of Sri
Sri Anandamurti: A Commentary on Ananda Sutram (SPSSA: 1998). The sections in this chapter
examine the themes of psychology and biopsychology in Sarkarian Tantra and are divided into sub-
sections for purposes of clarity and manageability.
Sarkar's layered theory of mind bears some resemblance to the ancient Indian conception of
the five 'selves' of the human being as exemplified in the Taittiriya Upanisad and later in the
philosophical school of Vedanta.' On deeper analysis, however, the terminologies used are found to
be different in several cases and the definitions and meanings applied to them are also found to vary.
Such issues will be more critically and thoroughly examined in Chapter 7. In this chapter, Sarkar's
homologism of the unit mind with the cosmic mind, and its relationship to the nucleus witnessing
consciousness (purusottama), are described, as are his theory of knowledge and his concept of
'propensities' or 'expressed sentiments' (vrtti). Sarkar's theory of knowledge offers an insightful view
of the types of knowledge open to the human mind, while his concept of vrtti seeks to explain deep
forces that drive the mind, how they work, and where they might be located.
Sarkar's biopsychology presents an integrated view of the biology of nerves and endocrine
glands and their relationships to mind, psychology, and spirituality. A cursory examination shows
much of his terminology to be identical or close to traditional Tantric terms and concepts; e.g. sukra,
nddi, cakra, prdria, and kuridalini. However, Sarkar's usage of modem scientific terms such as
•gland', 'nerve', and 'hormone', and his understanding of the links and inter-relationships between the
various biopsychological constructs appear entirely original. This chapter explores his unique
presentation of traditional Tantric constmcts, highlighting in some detail the stmcture and function of
those biopsychological entities central to his teachings.

' Taittiriya Upanisad II.l.l - 5.1, in S. Radhakrishnan (ed.). The Principal Upanisads (London: George Allen &
Unwin, 1974), pp. 541-547. The five "selves' (purusa/dtma) of Taittiriya Upanisad are the 'self consisting of
food' (puruso anna-rasa-mayah), 'self consisting of life force' (dtmd prdna-mayah), 'self consisting of mind'
(dtmd manomayah), 'self consisting of consciousness' (dtmd vijndna-mayah), 'self consisting of bliss' (dtmd

87
4.2 Yoga Psychology
Sarkar's understanding of the mind as a multi-layered entity showing homologism with the cosmic
mind has been briefly discussed in the previous chapter. This section examines in greater detail the
different layers of the mind, as Sarkar conceives them, and seeks to correlate them to other models of
the mind that Sarkar has given in his discourses, hiconsistencies are highlighted and hopefully
resolved through a comparison of Sarkar's various models, with a view to correlating similar
phenomenological features identified between the various stmctures and functions of these models.
The relationship between the microcosmic and macrocosmic levels of the mind shows a neat
symmetry of layers and functions, differing only in scope and boundary. While the microcosmic mind
is spatiotemporally located within the person, the macrocosmic counterpart extends throughout the
physical universe and beyond. However, Sarkar's assertion is that at the level of the three deepest
layers, the microcosmic and macrocosmic minds are essentially one. Hence, it is possible for a person
to gain access to the cosmic mind through going deep into his/her own mind. Sarkar portrays
purusottama as the nucleus witnessing consciousness of all layers of the cosmic mind, and as the
witnessing entity associated with each layer of the unit mind. Depending on the layer of mind in
question, Sarkar gives distinct terms to the witnessing purusottama in order to differentiate between its
various functional forms.
To Sarkar, mind is the instmment of knowledge and he sees knowledge as the
'subjectivization of objectivity or objectivities'.^ According to Sarkar, all forms of knowledge
involving a duality between the knower and the known are the 'umbra and penumbra of knowledge'
rather than tme knowledge itself^ These would include perceiving an extemal object, recollecting a
memory, or cogitating a thought. The only true and pinnacled form of knowledge is non-dual
knowledge, otherwise termed "self knowledge', where the knower and the known become one." This
occurs when the unit mind merges into the unit consciousness (ariucaitanya)' and the unit
consciousness merges into the cosmic consciousness (bhumdcaitanya)^ The supreme stance of
knowledge is, according to Sarkar, to be the supreme subjectivity itself, the ineffable, infinite field of
awareness whence all objects and ideas emerge, wherein they are maintained, and into which they
finally dissolve. Sarkar affirms that devotion (bhakti) is a valid, and indeed the ultimately valid, mode
of knowledge, in addition to the commonly accepted modes of sense inference, authority, and
rationality. The reason is that it is only through a completely selfiess and devotional orientation of
one's whole being towards the supreme entity that the pinnacle of knowledge can be attained. In this

dnanda-mayah). In later Vedanta, these are termed thefivesheaths: annamaya koia, prdriamaya koSa,
manomaya koia, vijndnamaya ko^a, and dnandamaya koia.
^ Anandamurti, Yoga Psychology (Third Edition), ed. by Vijayananda and Acyutananda (Calcutta: Ananda
Marga Publications, 1998), p. 40.
^A^55, pp. 175-176.
"/V55, pp. 172-178.
^A5II.8,p. 21.
^ AMEP, p. 14.
88
process, the unit mind is able to merge completely into cosmic consciousness and thus realise the
ultimate knowledge. To Sarkar, loving is a way of knowing and more - it is knowing par excellence.
An account of Sarkar's psychology would be incomplete without a discussion of his theory of
vrtti, translated as 'propensities' or 'expressed sentiments'. The relationship between vrtti and
sarriskdra is somewhat problematic and requires clarification. Examples of some of the issues to be
explored in this section are whether sarriskdra conditions vrtti, or vice versa, or both; and whether
actions resulting in sarriskdra can affect and either strengthen or weaken certain vrttis. The plethora of
primary vrttis a human being possesses and their loci in the various glands and cakras of the body are
also discussed.

4.2.1 Theory of Mind

In his diverse discourses, Sarkar proposes several distinct but possibly parallel models of the mind that
aim to elucidate what the mind is, how it functions, how it can be developed and how it can be finally
liberated. In addition to these models of the mind's stmcture, Sarkar also describes four possible
states of mind, states that are normative within the Indian tradition, namely: waking (jdgratd),
dreaming (svapna), dreamless sleep (nidrd), and the 'state of non-duality', tufiya. He views the first
three of these states as caused by the action of the operative principle (prakrti) on pristine
consciousness (purusa), and the fourth state as the natural, undivided condition of nirguria brahma.
He says:

Under the influence of Prakrti there can exist three conditions or states between the
unit entity, conscious of its smallness, and the unfathomably great Brahma. These
three conditions are wakefulness, dream, and sleep. None of these three is permanent,
for they are evolved by the influence of Prakrti's three gurias or attributes, viz., sattva,
rajah, and tamah. In all these three conditions Macrocosm and microcosm remain
apparently separate. But the influence of Prakrti being absent in the fourth condition,
which is known as turiya (state of non-duality) or kaivalya (absolute identity with the
divine essence), there remains no distinction between Brahma and the unit. Both are
one consummate whole.'

In addition to the four states, Sarkar mentions senselessness and death (marartam) as two other
possible mind states. He distinguishes senselessness from death, and senselessness and death together
from the other four states in terms of the functioning of mind layers (kosas) as shown in the table
below (kosa is a concept to be elaborated in Sarkar's third and fifth models of the mind). He also
differentiates the first three mind states from one another using the above-mentioned criterion as
follows:'

'55 Part 2, p. 73.

*55Part2,pp. 80-81.
89
 State of mind Active Dormant

Waking • Cmde mind (kdmamaya kosa)

• Subtle mind (manomaya kosa)
• Causal mind (atimdnasa kosa,
vijndnamaya kosa, hirarimaya -
kosa)
Dreaming • Subtle mind • Cmde mind
• Causal mind
Dreamless sleep • Causal mind • Cmde mind
• Subtle mind
Senselessness • Causal mind • Cmde mind
• Subtie mind
(both inactivated due to
extemal blow or shock.)
Death • Cmde, subtle, and causal
minds suspended.
Turiya • All three layers of mind mergec into parama purusa.

Sarkar also homologises the first three states of microcosmic experience with three ontological states
of the macrocosmic mind.'° The waking state in the unit mind is homologised with that state of
cosmic mind wherein sattvagutia is predominant, termed ksirasamudra ('sea of milk'). This state
appears to be identical with the cosmic mahat. The dreaming state is homologised with the cosmic
state wherein rajoguria is predominant, and is termed, on the macrocosmic scale, garbhodaka ('fluid
of creation'). Garbhodaka may be identical with the cosmic aham. The state of dreamless sleep is
homologised with the cosmic state wherein tamoguria is predominant, which is termed kdraridrnava or
kdranasamudra ('sea of causality'). Kdrariasamudra is the created universe, formed within the
cosmic citta. The fourth state, turiya, is beyond any differentiation into unit and cosmic, and exists as
the perennial ground of the mind and the final goal of spiritual development.
Coming now to Sarkar's models of the mind's stmcture, the fu-st describes differentiation of
the mind into three functional components - citta, aham, and mahat. On the microcosmic level, citta,
as seen in the previous chapter, is the cmdest and most primitive portion of the mind that imbibes the
reactions to its actions, and hence is termed the 'done-F. It is a collection of subtier-than-matter
ectoplasmic particles, which were formed as a result of the powdering down of matter particles due to
evolutionary forces. The citta takes the form of the extemal object perceived or mental object
projected and is able to retain that memory trace even after the perception has occurred. It also has the
ability to affect the vital force (prdria) and cellular protoplasm via instincts, which are habituated
propensities that have been biologically perpetuated through the functions and secretions of the glands.
In other words, the citta is primarily instinctive in its function.

Adapted from 5P55A, p. 184.

10
"55 Part 2, pp. 73-75.
90
 Aham is the sense of 'doer-F that is inherent in the citta and emerges when a sufficient degree
of collision and movement within the citta forces the subtier aham to manifest. Aham is the sense of
agency and ownership, otherwise termed the ego, which performs an action and enjoys the results of
that action in the form of pleasure or pain. Its functions are twofold: firstiy, to create a mental image
of an action to be performed on its citta (samkalpdtmaka), and secondly, to enact the action by means
of the citta and the sensory and motor organs (vikalpdtmaka). The more developed sense of ego
present in the aham allows for the expression of some degree of intellect. Sarkar uses the analogy of
two concentric circles to represent the citta and aham: the inner circle with the smaller circumference
can be equated with the citta, while the outer and larger circle is the aham. The aham is thus present
in as well as outside the citta. The surplus area of the aham that extends beyond the boundary of the
citta gives rise to the faculty of the intellect. In this case, the instinctual impulses of the mind
associated with the citta can then be controlled by the intellect of the aham.
Mahat is the subtiest portion of the mind that comprises the sense of the mind's existence.
Mahat is that self-awareness in the mind that is able to observe the workings of the aham and citta, in
terms of both the performance of actions and the resultant enjoyment of their consequences, both
pleasure and pain. Mahat is not directly involved in actions but is indirectly associated with the
extemal world through the aham. Just as aham pervades within and without citta, mahat is intrinsic to
the very fabric of the aham itself as well as extrinsic to it. Again using the concentric circle analogy,
the mahat is the largest and outermost circle that encompasses both the aham and the citta. The
surplus portion of the mahat that extends beyond the boundaries of the citta and aham gives rise to the
faculty of intuition. The predominance of the mahat over the aham and citta allows for the control of
intuition over the forces of intellect and instinct. The presence of a well-developed mahat in the mind
elicits a strong urge to know and understand its subtiest nature and the deepest tmths of life and the
universe. This activity of the mahat marks the beginning of the spiritual quest. It is important to note
here that Sarkar distinguishes the spirit from the mind by defining the spirit or soul, as commonly
termed, as nothing other than the intrinsic pure consciousness (dtman) underlying and beyond the
mind. Atman, being the ultimate nature of the mind and the universe, is the subtlest, infinite and all-
pervasive entity that is fundamentally an endless flow of knowledge (jndna), tmth (sat), cognisance
(cit), and bliss (dnanda). It has a witnessing capacity far more refined and all-encompassing than that
of the mahat. Realization of this dtman, which is identical with the cosmic entity, brahma, is the
summum bonum of Sarkar's spiritual praxis. The first model of the mind is represented in the diagram
below:

91
 Another model that Sarkar uses to describe the mind has an arguably more modem and
scientific ring to it, utilising terms such as 'protozoic mind', "metazoic mind', and 'unit microcosm' "
According to Sarkar, every single cell in the human stmcture possesses a primitive mind, the protozoic
mind, which is completely dominated by basic instincts such as hunger, thirst, fear, sleep, and
procreation. The human being is thus made up of millions of protozoic minds working collectively
and driving its instinctual life. When cells come together to perform speciaUzed functions in a
coordinated way, a more complex metazoic stmcture is formed. In correspondence with the metazoic
stmcture, a higher level of mind, which he calls the metazoic mind, evolves. An example of a
metazoic stmcture would be an organ such as the heart, or in its greatest complexity, the brain. In
addition to the collective protozoic mind of a specialized group of cells that exist in any metazoic
stmcture, there is the metazoic mind that exists alongside it. Unlike the protozoic minds, the metazoic
mind possesses some degree of intellect and rationality, and is able to exert some control over the
instinctual impulses of the protozoic minds. The unit microcosm is the most developed level of mind
possessing mainly intellect, rationality, and intuition and thus exerts overall control over both
protozoic and metazoic minds. The more developed the unit microcosm, the greater its ability to guide
and channel the forces of the protozoic and metazoic tendencies toward nobler and subtier pursuits.
This hegemony of the unit microcosm makes it possible for the individual to develop a sense of
universal love beyond the selfish and instinctual drives of the lower minds. The human mind is thus a
collective mind comprising the unit microcosm, the metazoic mind, and the collective protozoic mind.
The unit microcosm maintains an association with each of the protozoic and metazoic minds
individually, as well as with all the protozoic and metazoic minds collectively.
The most obvious similarity between these two models of mind proposed by Sarkar - the
citta-aham-mahat model and the protozoic-metazoic-microcosm model - is their fripartite division.
On closer examination, the three categories, protozoic mind, metazoic mind, and unit microcosm, do

" yP,pp.l-4.

92
not correspond neatiy with the citta, aham, and mahat of the fu-st model, nor are they meant to. In lAI
(1993), Sarkar specifically uses the term 'microcosm' to refer to the totality of the citta, aham, and
mahat of the unit mind.'^ The unit microcosm has been described as that aspect of the unit mind,
which has the ability to control and direct the flow of the protozoic and metazoic minds toward higher
goals due to its intellectual and intuitional powers. It is also the 'gateway' into the cosmic mind or the
macrocosm in the sense that it can, as a minute part of the vast cosmic mental field, expand and merge
into it provided proper meditative training is undertaken. In his third model, Sarkar further analyses
the citta into five progressively subtier and deeper layers of mind or kosas, the deepest three of which
are said to have the potential to expand to macrocosmic proportions. This would concur with his
preceding assertion that the unit microcosm provides access into the cosmic mind. If unit microcosm
is equated with the totality of unit citta-aham-mahat, this leaves the status of the protozoic and
metazoic minds unclear with respect to the first model. As they are considered less developed than the
microcosm, they cannot be equated with aham and mahat. More light will be shed on this issue when
we investigate Sarkar's third model.
The third model of mind that Sarkar proposes has been briefly discussed in the previous
chapter. This model describes the mind as having five layers of increasing subtlety and scope. In
addition, the material body (annamaya kosa) is itself considered a kosa, being the cmdest layer formed
as a result of the metamorphosis of pure consciousness during cosmogenesis. Hence, while the
physical body is not a part of the mind, it nevertheless contains the potentiality of consciousness
within its very fabric. It is in this sense that it is possible to correlate the protozoic and metazoic
minds with the annamaya kosa, albeit only loosely.
From the above discussion, it appears that the protozoic and metazoic minds (of Sarkar's
second model) do not equate with citta and aham (of the first model) respectively, but rather equate
with the primitive mind present in the physical body - annamaya kosa. This would corroborate
Sarkar's earlier assertion that unit microcosm comprises the totality of citta, aham and mahat within
the individual being. The relationship between the first and second of Sarkar's models of the mind can
now be tabulated as follows:

Model 1 Model 2
- Protozoic mind
Metazoic mind
Citta
Aham Unit microcosm
Mahat

Returning to Sarkar's third model, the first kosa of the mind is termed the layer of desire
(kdmamaya kosa), also translated as conscious or cmde mind. It is responsible for (1) sensing
external stimuli through the sense organs, (2) having desire on the basis of those stimuli, and (3) acting

12
lAI, p. 37.
93
out or expressing those desires through the motor organs. The kdmamaya kosa confrols the sensory
and motor organs and the instincts that propel the individual towards various extemal objects. In
addition, the kdmamaya kosa is the layer of mind that controls the functions of the mulddhdra cakra
('terranean plexus')'^ located at the base of the spine. Sarkar's theory of cakras will be discussed later
in the chapter; suffice for now to mention that the cakras can be seen as sub-stations of the mind
through which the mind exerts its influence over the body and vice versa. Regarding this, Sarkar says:

The human body is made up of five fundamental factors. These five fundamental
factors are being controlled by prdria, the fu-st of the five intemal vital principles. The
prdna is being controlled by the mind ... the different seats of the mind for the indirect
control of the different corporal factors are called "cakras" or "circles" or centres of
psychic force ... the five kosas ... chiefly conttol the five cakras ...'"

The second layer, manomaya kosa or layer of mind, also translated as subconscious or subtle mind.
The manomaya kosa directly confrols the conscious mind and performs the functions of memory
(smararia), contemplation (manana), experience of pleasure and pain as reactions to past actions, and
dreaming.'^ It is also the layer of mind that controls the svddhisthdna cakra ('fluidal plexus') located
at the base of the genital organ. According to Sarkar, there are two main categories of memory,
cerebral and extra-cerebral memory. Cerebral memory is the type of memory that is stored in the
brain cells and consists of memory traces of events and actions that occurred in the present lifetime.
Extra-cerebral memory is memory of events and actions belonging to former Hfetimes that is not
stored in the brain cells. Sarkar asserts that a child of up to five years of age may still be able to
recollect traces of extra-cerebral memory, but that this is not possible once the child grows older. An
older child with access to both cerebral and exfra-cerebral memory in one physical body will not be
able to adjust to the present body and environment and will have to die to take birth in a new body.
Besides memory, contemplation in the form of intellectual reasoning, problem solving, and scientific
and philosophical thinking is a cmcial function of this layer of the mind. It is possible, according to
Sarkar, for the manomaya kosa to be so active that extemal sensory stimuli may not even be received
by the sense organs. Instead, the body responds to the images of the manomaya kosa rather than to
the stimuli of the extemal world.
The third layer is termed the atimdnasa kosa or layer of higher mind, also translated as
'supramental mind', and 'first layer of the superconscious causal mind'.'^ 'Causal mind' is the term
Sarkar applies to the three deepest layers of the mind, which are essentially cosmic in scope and one
with the cosmic causal mind. The atimdnasa kosa goes beyond the limitations of time, space, and
person, and 'sees' into the past, present and future. It is also the layer of intuition and creativity.

'^ YP, p. 137. All subsequent English translations relating to the cakras are taken from the same page.
'" Sarkar's words quoted in SPSSA, p. 162.
" SPSSA, p. 148.
" Anandamitra, Beyond the Superconscious Mind (Fifth Edition) (Manila: Ananda Marga Publications, 1991)
p. 21.
94
 where fresh insights into old problems may emerge, and the layer from which samskdra is fu-st
expressed. In this layer, deeply buried reactions to past actions fu-st manifest in the form of desires
or thoughts. It is also where the desire for spiritual practice (sddhand) first finds expression. The
atimdnasa kosa controls the mariipura cakra ('igneous plexus') located at the navel.
The fourth layer is the vijndnamaya kosa or layer of special knowledge, otherwise translated
as subliminal mind. As the second layer of the causal mind, the vijndnamaya kosa is all-expansive in
scope and can perceive all the vibrational inferences (tanmdtras) of the universe, whereas the lower
kosas can only perceive a fraction of them. It controls the functions of the andhata cakra ('solar
plexus') located at the mid-point of the chest. Many positive mental qualities are said to be
expressed in this layer of the mind, namely mercy (krpd), gentleness (mrdutd), patience (dhairya),
serenity (susthir), non-attachment (vairdgya), steadiness (dhrti), success (sampat), cheerfulness
(hdsya), spiritual ecstasy (romdnca), humility (vinaya), meditation (dhydna), seriousness
(gdmbhirya), enthusiasm (udyama), imperturbability (aksobhya), magnanimity (auddrya), and
focussed attention (ekdgratd)}* The chief characteristics of the vijndnamaya kosa are, above all,
discrimination (viveka) and non-attachment (vairdgya). Viveka is the ability to distinguish the etemal
from the ephemeral, tmth from falsehood, and light from darkness. It allows one to differentiate the
transient pleasures of life from the lasting happiness of spiritual fulfilment. The consequence of
viveka is the ability to renounce or let go of attachment to the pleasures and objects of the mundane
world. This non-attachment is known as vairdgya. For Sarkar, tme vairdgya takes place in the
context of a positive attraction for the cosmic entity, the ultimate reality underlying all finite physical
and mental objects. When love for the supreme consciousness is so sfrong that all finite entities are
seen as expressions of the divine, a natural sense of non-attachment to these objects ensues.
The fifth layer is the hirarimaya kosa or the 'golden' layer, also known as the subtle causal
mind. This is the highest and subtlest layer of the mind; the sense of 'I' is latent and its nature is
'brilliant golden effulgence' accompanied by an intense attraction for the supreme consciousness. It
confrols the functions of the visuddha cakra ('sidereal plexus') located at the throat. Sarkar sees the
hirarimaya kosa as the last thin veil that separates the mind from its witnessing dtman and by
extension, fhe paramdtman or supreme consciousness. He says:

The subtlest expression of the mind is in the hirarimaya kosa which is the first
expression of mahattattva. It is the establishment in this kosa in a universal manner
that is termed savikalpa samddhi. When after emerging from the sarriskdra, the
hirarimaya kosa merges in attributeless Brahma, then alone we call it nirvikalpa
samddhi.

" SPSSA, p. 153.

'^SPSSA, p. 154. This list of qualities attributed to vijndnamaya kosa is given by Anandamiti-a in SPSSA. It
appears that Sarkar never made this assertion in the published discourses of AM.
' Sarkar's words quoted in SPSSA, p. 157.
95
With regard to the relationships between the various kosas, Sarkar says that the consecutively deeper
layers are larger than, and contain, the preceding ones:

The kdmamaya kosa is bigger than the annamaya kosa.^° The manomaya kosa is bigger
than the kdmamaya kosa. The atimdnasa kosa is bigger even than the manomaya kosa.
The vijndnamaya kosa is larger than this. The hirarimaya kosa is bigger even than the
vijndnamaya kosa, and the biggest of all is the [dtman]. '

Sarkar's third model of the mind can be represented as in the diagram below:

Annnmovn knsn

Kdmamaya kosa

Manomaya kosa

Atimdnasa kosa

Vijndnamaya kosa

Hirarimaya kosa

The above discussion reveals that the five kosas of the third model can be equated with the
citta portion of first model, and form a part of the unit microcosm in the second model. Their
relationships can be tabulated as follows:

Model 1 Model 2 Model 3

— Protozoic mind Annamaya kosa
Metazoic mind
Kdmamaya kosa
Manomaya kosa
Citta Unit microcosm Atimdnasa kosa
Vijndnamaya kosa
Hirarimaya kosa
Aham
Mahat Beyond hirarimaya kosa

^ The annamaya ko^a is the physical body, which Sarkar sees as the crudest expression of consciousness and
hence 'continuous' with the mind in a special sense.
SPSSA, p. 157.
96
 In his fourth model of the mind, Sarkar divides the mind into two portions: ectoplasm and
endoplasm. In his cosmology, he mentions how citta is formed from a collection of ectoplasmic
particles known as cittdriu, and citta can thus be termed ectoplasm for short. Citta or collective
ectoplasm has a sense of individuality or 'I' feeling commensurate with the growth in volume and
scope of each unit ectoplasmic particle. The growth of each unit ectoplasmic particle will contribute
to the overall growth of the collective form of ectoplasm. At the same time, ectoplasm is unitary in
stmcture in that it exists as a separate entity in each human mind. We note that Sarkar attributes the
'unit existential faculty and the unit knowing faculty' to the ectoplasm, a curious fact since the
'ectoplasmic stuff has earlier been equated with the citta only, and the terms 'unit existential faculty'
and 'unit knowing faculty* presumably refer to the mahat's stance of subjective existence and
awareness. If the term 'ectoplasm' includes both the unit existential and knowing faculties, this
implies that the mahat, as the subjective knowing faculty of the mind and mental events, is part of
ectoplasm. This concurs with Sarkar's first model since, as previously mentioned, the aham and
mahat exist within the citta though they extend beyond it in terms of 'spatial circumference'.
Sarkar mentions that ectoplasm has an outer covering known as endoplasm, which possesses a
minimum sense of individuality or 'I' feeling and is collective in nature and stmcture. The prefix
'endo-' in 'endoplasm' suggests that the endoplasm acts as a boundary that encloses the ectoplasm and
keeps it in. It can be compared to a final cosmic veil or silver lining that shields and demarcates all
unit minds collectively from the cosmic entity (brahma). When the collective ectoplasm (that is, the
collection of ectoplasmic particles in a unit being) increases in scope and volume, it causes the
expansion, and finally the bursting, of the endoplasm that encapsulates it. When this happens, the unit
'I' is said to merge into the cosmic 'I'. Sarkar's fourth model of the mind can be represented
diagrammatically as follows:

Cosmic entity (Brahma)

Endoplasm
Ectoplasm

Ectoplasm is thus the totality of 'mind-stuff. It is sfructurally composed of minute

ectoplasmic particles and functionally it consists in the faculties of objectification, subjective existence
and knowledge. Through a comparison of phenomenological features between the different models of
mind hitherto examined, it can be argued that the term 'ectoplasm' refers to the citta, while
'endoplasm' is the final and subtlest 'lining' of the mahat where the sense of existential 'F is most

97
attenuated. This equation leaves the problem of aham's location in the scheme of things as proposed
in the fourth model. One possibility is that aham is a part of the ectoplasm, albeit subtler in substance
than the citta. In this case the term 'ectoplasm' would include both the cmder ectoplasmic stuff of
citta and the subtler ectoplasmic stuff of aham, thus resolving the aforementioned problem. The
suggestion that aham is part of the ectoplasm rather than of the endoplasm is corroborated by Sarkar's
statement that the endoplasm contains minimum 'I' feeling.^^ Since aham is the sense of doer 'I' or
ego, it cannot be the same as the endoplasm, where 'I' feeling is minimal. The above demonstrates
that Sarkar's first and fourth models of the mind can be correlated as follows:

Model 1 Model 4
Citta Ectoplasm
Aham
Mahat Endoplasm

The fifth model of mind propounded by Sarkar poses some hermeneutical difficulty in that the
distinctions between the various terms have not been made entirely clear. In this model, Sarkar
divides the mind into two chambers: objectivated mind (or objective mind?), and subjectivated mind
(or subjective mind?). The problem lies in the vague and possibly inconsistent usage of the terms
'objectivated' and 'objective' versus 'subjectivated' and 'subjective'. With regard to the process of
knowing, Sarkar says:

(1) In the mechanical sphere, knowing, or the functional side of knowledge, occurs
with the perception of special types of reflections and refractions, but in the
psychic sphere, it occurs as a result of the subjectivization of objectivity or
objectivities ... We take an extemal object inside ourselves, be it an elephant, a
horse, a vocalized word, a touch, or anything else with which we come in contact
in the outer worid, and assimilate it in our psychic existential 'F feeling. This is
the process of knowing.^^

He goes on to describe two portions of the mind involved in the process of knowing:

(2) Whenever an action of knowing takes place within the arena of the mind, a portion
of it plays the subjective role and another portion the objective role. The mind is
divided into two chambers: the objective chamber which is formed from almost all
the ectoplasmic stuff, and the subjective chamber formed from that portion which
is the knowing self.^

Sarkar makes a statement regarding the 'objectivated' and 'subjectivated' minds witiiout making it
entirely clear whether they are synonymous with the objective and subjective minds respectively:

^^ YP, p. 90.
^^ YP, p. 40.

98
 (3) Many things may be created in both the objectivated and subjectivated minds,
which do not belong to the extemal world; they are exclusively confined to the
intemal domain. They are created within the mind, and there they remain as
mental objects. They become objectivated in the mind independent of any extemal
influence, 25

There is an anomaly conceming the actual number of factors involved in the process of knowing. In
the passage numbered (2) above, Sarkar mentions the division of the mind into two chambers, but
passage (4), below, seems to suggest there is another factor (the first chamber of knowledge) that had
not been discussed:

(4) The third chamber or factor of knowledge is the subjective mind (the second being
the objective mind) ... The subjectivated mind is the witnessing counterpart of the
objectivated mind, and may take its object both from the extemal physical world
and the intemal psychic world. It may create an object within itself; it can convert
its own subject into an object.^^

One possible resolution to this anomaly is to regard the 'first chamber' of knowledge as the
'mechanical sphere' of 'reflections and refractions' mentioned in passage (1) in which Sarkar
discusses the process of knowing. Seen in this light, the second and third chambers of knowledge
would naturally be the objective and subjective minds respectively. Juxtaposing the descriptions of
the objective and subjective chambers in passage (2) with that of the objectivated and subjectivated
minds in passage (4) above, it can be deduced that 'objective' equals 'objectivated' and 'subjective'
equals 'subjectivated' - though the evidence is not entirely conclusive.
Unlike Sarkar's other models of mind, the objective/objectivated mind can be loosely and
separately equated with the citta, the five kosas, and the c/«a-portion of the ectoplasm, in terms of
their relatively similar functions and characteristics. They represent the cmdest layer of mental
experience where sensory perception and objective thought are the chief functional characteristics.
The subjective/subjectivated mind is loosely similar in function to the aham and mahat, both of which
serve as witnessing counterparts of the sense objects perceived. The subjective/subjectivated mind
would encompass the remaining a/iam-portion of the ectoplasm as well as the endoplasm. Sarkar's
first, fourth and fifth models of the mind can be correlated as in the table below:

Model 1 Model 4 Model 5

Citta Ectoplasm Objectivated/Objective
Aham
Mahat Endoplasm Subjectivated/Subjective

^" YP, p. 52.

"yp,p. 61.
^* YP, p. 68-69.
99
 The sixth model of mind is comparatively free of ambiguities and poses littie hermeneutical
difficulty. In this model, Sarkar divides the mind into cmde, subtle and causal levels. He equates the
cmde mind with the kdmamaya kosa, the subtle mind with the manomaya kosa, and the causal mind
with the atimdnasa kosa, vijndnamaya kosa, and hirarimaya kosa collectively. While the cmde and
subtle minds are limited in scope and function, located within the boundaries of the unit entity, the
causal mind is transpersonal in nature and essentially cosmic in scope and function. All three minds -
cmde, subtle, and causal - fall within the scope of citta in the unit mind.
To summarise the foregoing discussion, Sarkar's models of the mind are tabulated and cross-
compared below to highlight the correspondences between the intemal constmcts of these models:

Model I Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Model 5 Model 6

- Protozoic Annamaya kosa - - -
- Metazoic - - -
Citta Microcosm Kdmamaya kosa Ectoplasm Objectivated Cmde mind
Manomaya kosa /Objective Subtle mind
Atimdnasa kosa Causal mind
Vijndnamaya kosa
Hirarimaya kosa
Aham Above Subjectivated
Mahat Hiratimaya kosa Endoplasm /Subjective

Through comparison based on phenomenological features, it is possible to obtain a relatively

coherent and comprehensive understanding of Sarkarian psychology. The nature and function of pure
consciousness, in both microcosmic and macrocosmic aspects, will be discussed separately in the next
section.

4.2.2 Microcosm, Macrocosm and Consciousness

Sarkar's view of the mind encompasses both personal and cosmic levels and reflects a neat
microcosmic-macrocosmic homologism typical of the Indian worldview. This homologism has been
discussed in Chapter 3 in terms of the parallel layers of mind in the unit and cosmic entities. This
section begins with a general comparison of the microcosmic and macrocosmic minds, and then
explores the relationship between the witnessing pure consciousness and the layers of mind on both
unit and cosmic levels.
Anandamitra, a senior nun of Ananda Marga who wrote a commentary on Sarkar's AS, has
made a comparison of the features of the microcosmic and macrocosmic minds based on Sarkar's
teachings. This comparison is paraphrased in the table below:"

27
5F55A, pp. 169-170.
100
 Microcosmic Mind Macrocosmic Mind
Created in pratisancara through matter Created in sancara through localised
being pulverised into subtier factors. bondage of Prakrti over Purusa.

Unable to create original objects or physical Creates physical realities for unit minds by
reality; only transforms and combines existing transforming itself into multiple entities of
physical substances. various degrees of cmdity.

Material world appears as extemal reality, Material world is intemal to Cosmic mind,
differentiated and separate from the observing appearing as one collective unity.
mind.

Requires sense organs to perceive the world. Requires no sense organs as all is intemal for the
Cosmic mind.
Multi-purposive (having many desires). Uni-purposive (has sole desire of merging all
creation into itself).

Unilateral (can only attend to one thing at a Multilateral (can attend to many actions at one
time). time).

The above comparison highlights the relative limitations of the microcosmic mind vis-a-vis the
macrocosmic mind in general, but also describes the salient features and functions of the microcosmic
mind.
In summary, Sarkar's yoga psychology portrays the microcosmic mind as an emergent entity
that arises out of the material factors of the universe through a process of evolutionary clash and
cohesion. This mind stands apart from the extemal world, perceives it through its sensory organs and
faculties, and is unable to create anything original in the world. More importantiy, the mind is seen as
having the capacity for only one action or thought at a time (unilateral) and possessing multiple desires
and motivations (multi-purposive).
Sarkar uses many technical terms drawn from the common Indian stock to describe the various
functional forms of the witnessing consciousness in relation to the mind layers. On the microcosmic
level, the witnessing consciousness or purusottama reflects on and associates with every layer of the
unit mind, and is variously termed prdjfia, taijasa and visva. Prdjna is the functional form of
purusottama witnessing the kdmamaya kosa or crude mind. Taijasa is the witnessing entity of the
rruinomaya kosa or subtle mind, while visva is the witnessing entity of the atimdnasa kosa,
vijndnamaya kosa, and hirarimaya kosa taken collectively, otherwise known as the causal mind (see
table below).

101
 Microcosm Ko^a Mind Witnessing Entity
Annamaya kosa — -
Citta Kdmamaya kosa Cmde Prdjna
Manomaya kosa Subtie Taijasa
Atimdnasa kosa
Vijndnamaya kosa Causal Visva
Hiranmaya kosa
Ahamtattva Above
Mahattattva Hirarimaya kosa — Purusottama

On the macrocosmic level, purusottama similarly reflects on and associates with the various
layers of the cosmic mind. Isvara is the witnessing consciousness of the cmde cosmic mind;

hirariyagarbha is the witnessing consciousness of the subtle cosmic mind; and virdtd or vaisvdnara is
the witnessing consciousness of the causal cosmic mind. Sarkar emphasises that these various terms
used to describe the witnessing consciousness do not represent different entities but rather different
functional forms of the same entity:

By its very nature, if the mind is to possess objectivity it must also have a witnessing
entity. The witnessing entity is the summum bonum of the mind. Philosophy has given
different names to the witnessing entity according to the differences in the nature of the
objective mind. But this does not mean that the same Purusottama is not acting as the
witnessing entity at different stages of the mind. It is He who reflects Himself as the
witnessing counterpart by functional difference due to the changing mental status.^*

The various names of the witnessing entity in relation to the layers of the macrocosmic mind are
tabulated below in order to clarify the relationships:^'

Macrocosm Kosa Mind Witnessing Entity

Mahattattva — — Purusottama
Ahamtattva
Hirarimaya kosa Causal Virdtd or Vaisvdnara
Vijndnamaya kosa
Citta Atimdnasa kosa
Manomaya kosa Subtle Hirariyagarbha
Kdmamaya kosa Cmde Isvara

Thus, according to Sarkar, the microcosmic mind is embedded within the macrocosmic mind,
while the witnessing consciousness exists in association with both the microcosmic mind and the

^* lAI, p. 36.
lAI, p. 37. In this table, the relative positions of citta, ahamtattva, and mahattattva are reversed from that in
the preceding table. This reversed order reflects the actual order in which the macrocosmic mind forms - from
mahat, to aham, to citta (see Chapter 3). Within the macrocosmic citta, the universe forms and living beings
emerge. In living beings, the order in which (microcosmic) mind emerges is from citta to aham to mahat.
Hence the reversal in order of presentation of citta, ahamtattva and mahattattva in these two tables.
102
macrocosmic mind by acting as the ultimate observing and knowing entity of all physical events and
mental processes occurring in thefr respective layers.

4.2.3 Theory of Knowledge

In his writings, Sarkar often emphasises the importance of knowledge in the overall path of spiritual
praxis. He delineates a theory of knowledge closely linked to his conception of the mind and
consciousness. According to Sarkar, knowledge takes place in two spheres of human existence: the
intellectual sphere and the spiritual sphere. Within and across these two spheres, various types of
knowledge are possible. He also mentions that AM epistemology has two branches - pard and apard:

Pard jndna means knowing the Supreme reality beyond the scope of time, space and
person. Apard jndna means the knowledge within the scope of time, space and person
- which is ever changing. The means to attain pard jndna, or absolute knowledge, is
through the appUcation of the pinnacled intellect (agrydbuddhi), and the means to
attain apard jndna, or relative knowledge, is the pinnacled intellect plus circular
approach.^"

It can be argued that what Sarkar calls knowledge in the intellectual sphere belongs to the branch of
apard jndna, while what he calls knowledge in the spiritual sphere belongs to the branch of pard jndna
(see table below).

Theory of Knowledge (Epistemology)

Branches of Knowledge:
Pard jndna (Absolute knowledge) Apard jndna (Relative knowledge)
= knowledge in spiritual sphere = knowledge in intellectual sphere

The various types of knowledge, straddling both intellectual and spiritual spheres, are
analysed in the following discussion. Sarkar calls the two major types of knowledge 'conceptional
knowledge' (paroksa bodha) and 'spiritual knowledge' (aparoksa bodha)?' While spiritual
knowledge is entirely relegated to the spiritual sphere, conceptional knowledge can take place in both
intellectual and spiritual spheres depending on its sub-types. The 'perceptional' (mati jndna) sub-type
of conceptional knowledge functions within the intellectual sphere, while the "spontaneous intuitional'
(sphurtta jndna) sub-type functions within the spiritual sphere (see table below).^^

^°AMP, pp. 262-263.

^'AM/Parts5-8,p. 550.
"AM/Parts 5-8, p. 554.
103
 Types of Knowledge

Spiritual knowledge (aparoksa bodha) Conceptional knowledge (paroksa bodha)

• Functions purely in spiritual or ultimate
sphere.
• Synonymous with full mergence into
nirguria brahma
• Functions in both spiritual and intellectual
spheres.
• Comprises
(1) Perceptional knowledge (mati
jndna) - in intellectual sphere.
(2) Spontaneous-intuitional
knowledge (sphurtta jndna) -
in spiritual sphere.

Perceptional knowledge (mati jndna), functioning within the intellectual sphere, can be further
sub-divided into 'sensory knowledge ' (indriyaja bodha) and 'acquired knowledge' (samskdraja
bodha). Sensory knowledge can be "direct' (sarala sarnyukti) or 'indirect' (tiryak samyukti), and
acquired knowledge can be based on 'habitual instinct' (siddha sarnskdraja) or 'inborn instinct'
(sahajata sarnskdraja).
Direct sensory knowledge (sarala sarriyukti jndna) occurs "when an indriya [sense organ]
directly receives an inferential vibration and conveys it sfraight to the unit citta, thus creating the same
kind of experience in the unit mind.''" In other words, direct sensory knowledge is gained through
direct sensory perception, acquired as a result of contact between a sense organ and its object. Indirect
sensory knowledge (tiryak sarriyukti jndna) is gained through learning and information gathering
rather than direct sensory perception. Sarkar gives the example of direct knowledge of an elephant
acquired through sensory perception contrasted with indirect knowledge of the elephant through
hearing a description of it or seeing its picture. In the case of indirect sensory knowledge, information
about an object is gathered through the senses in the form of representations rather than the actual
object in question. The sub-types of perceptional knowledge (mati jndna) are tabulated as follows:

Perceptional Knowledge (mati jndna)

(1) Sensory knowledge (indriyaja bodha) (2) Acquired knowledge (sarnskdraja
comprising: bodha) based on:
• Direct sensory (sarala sarnyukti) • Habitual instinct (siddha sarnskdraja)
• Indirect sensory (tiryak sarriyukti) • Inbom instinct (sahajata sarnskdraja)

Acquired knowledge based on 'habitual instinct' (siddha samskdraja jndna) occurs 'when one
receives the same piece of information again and again', and on it depends a person's power of
memory.'^ Using the same example, Sarkar explains that when a person sees the elephant a second
time and concludes that the second image is identical to the first, recognizing the second image as that

AM/Parts 5-8, p. 554.

AM/Parts 5-8, p. 550.

104
of an elephant, this can be termed knowledge acquired through habitual instinct. Acqufred knowledge
based on 'inborn instincts' (sahajata samskdraja jndna), according to Sarkar, is merely an extension
of the knowledge through habitual instincts. Sarkar defines inbom instinct as "actually the habitual
instinct carried over from one's previous life' and identifies it with the 'animal-like propensities of
human beings' acqufred over the course of biological evolution.'^ Sarkar cites the example of the
baby mammal automatically knowing how to suck its mother's breast without any form offraining,a
case of acquired knowledge through inbom instinct. In short, the various forms of sensory and
acquired knowledge together make up perceptional knowledge, which can be regarded as the category
of knowledge involving objects of perception and requiring the mediation of sensory and motor organs
(see table immediately preceding this paragraph above).
There is another category of conceptional knowledge (paroksa bodha) which, in contrast to
perceptional knowledge (mati jndna), does not require any sensory or motor mediation; it is termed
'spontaneous-intuitional knowledge' (sphurtta jndna). As mentioned before, spontaneous intuitional
knowledge occurs in the spiritual sphere, as opposed to perceptional knowledge, which occurs in the
intellectual sphere. Sarkar identifies two types of spontaneous intuitional knowledge, namely
'focussed-intuitional' (aparoksabhdsa) and 'spirituo-intuitional' (aparoksd anubhuti) knowledge (see
table below).

Spontaneous-intuitional Knowledge (sphurtta Jndna)

(I) Focussed intuitional knowledge
(aparoksabhdsa)
= Clear, dfrect insight into aspects of
the causal mind.
(2) Spirituo-intuitional knowledge
(aparoksd anubhuti)
= Dfrect cognisance of all objects and
events in the cosmos through
mergence into saguria brahma.

Focussed intuitional knowledge (aparoksabhdsa) is a deep form of knowledge based on

seeing the "objectivities that lie accumulated within the causal mind'." Sarkar defines it as 'the
process to see some parts of the causal mind [the atimdnasa, vijndnamaya, and hirarimaya kosas] with
the help of spiritual effulgence', parts which normally remain unseen through being 'darkened by
static ignorance.'* Sarkar explains that this form of knowledge is beyond the realm of perceptional
knowledge for two reasons: firstiy, the objectivities to be seen are embedded within the causal mind,
not the extemal world; and secondly, the knowledge is acquired through "spiritual effulgence and not
psychic probing'.'' Sarkar does not elaborate on what this "spiritual effulgence' exactiy is. The term
"effulgence' suggests some kind of illumination, perhaps a cognisance of things that have previously
been hidden from view. In the case of focussed intuitional knowledge (aparoksabhdsa), the objects

'^ AM/Parts 5-8, p.551.

''Ibid
''Ibid
'* AM/Parts 5-8, p. 552.
105
clearly cognised by spfritual effulgence are aspects of the atimdnasa, vijndnamaya, and hirarimaya
kosas, which includes the first expression of past sarriskdra and the workings of subtie faculties such
as discemment (viveka), renunciation (vairdgya), and devotion (bhakti).*° This implies that focussed
intuitional knowledge (aparoksabhdsa) involves some kind of dfrect insight into the content and
process of the mind, especially with regard to the workings of its deeper layers or kosas.
Spirituo-intuitional knowledge is an even subtier form of knowledge that is attained when a
person is 'established in the Macrocosmic Mind' and has become 'the knower of all objectivities'."^
To such a person, whose mind has expanded to include the entfre cosmos, all knowledge gained is in
the category of spfrituo-intuitional knowledge. Correlating this with Sarkar's soteriology (to be
discussed in Chapter 5), it appears that this form of knowledge is realised when a person attains the
meditative state of savikalpa samddhi ('france of determinate absorption'),"' that of temporary merger
into saguria brahma.
Both perceptional knowledge (discussed earlier) and spontaneous-intuitional knowledge (in
two variant forms) fall into the macro-category of conceptional knowledge (paroksa bodha). From the
foregoing discussion, it appears that conceptional knowledge necessitates the presence of mental
objects, whether cmde, subtie, or causal, in accordance with the layer of the mind (kosa) in which this
knowledge takes place. However, there is some ambiguity with regard to the precise nature of
focussed-intuitional knowledge and spirituo-intuitional knowledge (the two sub-types of spontaneous-
intuitional knowledge), located as they are, in an epistemological space beyond the discursive,
intellectual mind. There is also little clarification of the difference between spiritual knowledge
(aparoksa bodha) - non-conceptional knowledge occurring purely in the spiritual sphere - and
spirituo-intuitional knowledge (aparoksd anubhuti) - a form of conceptional knowledge occurring in
the spiritual sphere.
Sarkar provides a clue to the distinction between spiritual knowledge and spirituo-intuitional
knowledge in his description of what constitutes "real knowledge':

When the perceiver, perceivable and perception; or the knower, knowable and
knowledge become one; or when the deed and the 'doable' become one with the doer,
one attains non-dualistic self-knowledge, one becomes the embodiment of knowledge.
Only this is real knowledge. All other knowledge is the shadow of knowledge ...
insubstantial knowledge.""

39
AM/Parts 5-8, p. 552.
Saniskdra is said to first express itself in atimdnasa kosa; discernment (viveka) and renunciation (vairdgya)
function in vijndnamaya kosa; and devotion (bhakti) is the prime quality of hirarimaya koia.
41
This form of knowledge resembles Buddhist vipassand in so far as it involves direct seeing into and
understanding of the content and workings of the mind. A rigorous comparison is beyond the scope of the
present thesis.
"^AM/Parts 5-8, p. 552.
*'AS, p. 15.
""AM/Parts 5-8, p. 552.
106
Again, he describes spiritual knowledge thus:

Do you know the difference between intellectual knowledge and spiritual knowledge?
Intellectual knowledge is psychic, and thus cannot help one to attain Brahma ...
Remember, the mind cannot fathom Him. To attain Him one must merge one's mind
in Him."*

In other words, Sarkar is claiming that spfritual knowledge is gained only when one so fully merges
one's mind into the supreme consciousness (parama purusa) that not a frace of duality exists between
self and brahma. He sees this "ensconcement in the field of Supreme Cognition' as the culmination
of the spiritual journey and hints at its nature and the process of attaining it:

A sincere spfritual aspirant understands that Parama Purusa is the Prati bodhasatthd
(Omni-telepathic Entity). What does this mean? Mind is the perceiver and the
apparent knower of objects. The subjective emanations from this perceiving mind are
finally reflected in the Cognitive Faculty. Hence the Cognitive Faculty is called the
Omni-telepathic Entity ... The Omni-telepathic Entity is like a mirror. When a
spiritual aspirant, after relinquishing the authorship of actions, is established in this
Omni-telepathic Entity, he or she attains immortality."'

From the above, it appears that the attainment of non-dual spiritual knowledge (aparoksa bodha)
requires stable abiding in a state of unbounded mirror-like cognisance through a radical letting go of
the mind's sense of ego or agency. Sarkar sees this state as the culmination of the path of knowledge
(jndna yoga); it is arguably synonymous with the realization of nirvikalpa samddhi ('france of
indeterminate absorption'), or temporary mergence into cosmic consciousness or nirguria brahma.
However, Sarkar outlines another route to this supreme knowledge, which he defines as the
path of devotion (bhakti yoga). He says it is possible to attain spfritual knowledge through the attitude
of total self-surrender and love:

What happens to those who accept the Supreme Entity not only as the Omni-telepathic
Entity, but as the life of thefr lives, the soul of thefr souls? Those who accept Him as
an object of genuine devotional sentiment? The answer is that they will certainly attain
immortality. The manifestation of the Supreme Entity will be clearer in those who are
free from the vanity of intellectual knowledge, who love Him as the soul of their soul
... Brahma is love personified, Brahma is unbounded. One who is in deep love with
Him will steadily advance towards the infinite from the world of finitude."*

From the foregoing discussion, it can be inferred that spiritual knowledge is a state of non-dual self-
realization where there exists only a boundless, mirror-like awareness free of any sense of subject,
object, or action, a state that is none other than mergence into nirguria brahma. Spiritual knowledge is

"'AM/Parts 5-8, p. 556.

"'AM/Parts 5-8, p. 557.
*'lbid.

107
thus purely non-conceptual in nature. Spirituo-intuitional knowledge, in contrast, is a state of all-
pervasive knowing and cognisance of all objectivities in the universe, after having attained oneness
with saguria brahma. It is thus conceptual though profoundly subtie in nature. Sarkar's theory of
knowledge can be summed up as in the following table:

Conceptional knowledge Spiritual knowledge

(paroksa bodha) (aparoksa bodha)

Perceptional Spontaneous-intuitional = non-dual knowledge

(mati jndna) (sphurtta jndna) attained in nirvikalpa
1. Sensory (indriyaja bodha): 1. Focussed-intuitional samddhi
a. direct sensory (sarala sarriyukti) (aparoksabhdsa):
b. indirect sensory (tiryak samyukti) involves dfrect
cognisance of causal
mind.
2. Acqufred (sarnskdraja bodha): 2. Spirituo-intuitional
a. habitual instinct (siddha (aparoksd anubhuti):
saniskdraja jndna) attained in
b. inbom instinct (sahajata savikalpa samddhi.
saniskdraja jndna)
Occurs in: Occurs in:
Intellectual sphere Spiritual sphere

4.2.4 Theory of Vrtti

In conjunction with his theory of knowledge, Sarkar also elucidates his ideas about the driving forces
of the mind in terms of the concept of vrtti The term 'vrtti' is usually franslated as 'instinct' on a
physical level, or "expressed sentiment' on a psychological level;"^ another common franslation is
•propensities'.^" Sarkar defines vrtti as 'the way of expression of mind', pointing out that in order to
express itself, the mind 'adopts certain inter- and intra-ectoplasmic occupations' such as love, hatred,
fear and other emotions. He further explains that this innate need for mental expression is a result of
the momentum gathered by the mind over the course of cosmic evolution. He says:

Mind is a state in the process of Brahma Cakra. It being the result of changing
positions, is essentially a stage in the process of motion, and implies a momentum
which it has to express.^'

Vrtti, in other words, is the inherent momentum of the mind finding expression as various emotional
drives that can be described physiologically as instincts and psychologically as sentiments.

''*AM/Parts 5-8, p, 558.

"'/A/, p. 29.
'" YP, p. 136.
"Ibid
108
 Sarkar makes a theoretical distinction between instincts and sentiments with reference to the
degree of association with what he terms 'subsidiary glands' of the body. Subsidiary glands are all the
endocrine glands in the body apart from the pituitary and pineal glands, which Sarkar believes are
intimately linked to the functions of the mind. For Sarkar, 'sentiments' are those psychological forces
or 'occupations'^^ that, when habituated over some time through frequent activation, become
biologically perpetuated as 'instincts' in connection with the various subsidiary glands. In other
words, sentiments appear to be the initial psychological forces formed out of the evolutionary
momentum of the mind. Subsequentiy, as evolution progresses and physical stmctures become more
complex, these sentiments become biologically embedded in the glands as instincts. Regarding
instinct, Sarkar says:

When the psychic flow emanates from the feeling of unit corporality and moves along
the maze of human corporal relationship and again comes back to its starting point,
then that certain psychic flow is known as "instinct". In each and every living being,
including plants, there are instincts, and whenever there is any mind, mind of any form
- developed form or undeveloped form or even mind in a dormant condition - there is
instinct.

He emphasises that instinct is not to be confused with sarriskdra (discussed in Chapter 1) since
sarriskdra is the reaction of an original action, existing in potential form within the mind. When
conditions are conducive, such sarriskdra would then be expressed. Instincts drive the mind to
perform actions that in tum create sarriskdra, which are imprinted on the mind and exist as potential
reactions to be expressed at some later time. While instincts are primarily inbom, they can be
strengthened or weakened through culture, through association with others, through study and
education, and through spfritual practices. In other words, the sarnskdras created by the above-
mentioned means can affect the quality and intensity of the mind's innate vrttis. It is then possible to
say that vrttis are generated according to the inherited and acquired sarnskdras of the mind concemed.
In short, although a subtie theoretical difference exists between instinct (which is not identical to
samskdra) and sentiment, Sarkar sfresses that in practical terms, instincts and sentiments are one and
the same thing.
Sarkar sees the seed of all vrttis as lying in the brain, but says that the first expression of vrttis
occurs in the subsidiary glands (regarded as sub-stations of the different organs in the body). The
mental waves created by the mind are ffrst transmuted into physical waves in the glands or sub-
stations and later fransmitted through the efferent nerves in the body. Sarkar believes that the
complexity of the physical stmcture, in particular the endocrine system, dfrectly reflects the number of
vrttis the organism possesses and vice versa. For example, better-developed animals have more vrttis
than less-developed ones; and human beings, as the most highly evolved organisms according to

"rP, p. 136.
^'yp, p. 82.
109
Sarkar, possess one thousand vrttis. Sarkar re-interprets the traditional Yogic notion of the thousand-
petalled sahasrdra cakra located at the crown of the head as describing the seeds of these one
thousand vrttis localised in the pineal gland. (Sarkar correlates the sahasrdra cakra with the pineal
gland.) He explains that the pituitary gland controls two vrttis - samkalpdtmaka or 'internal
occupations [that] lead towards the Great' and vikalpdtmaka or 'internal occupations [that] lead
towards the mundane or cmde'^" - while the subsidiary glands control forty-eight vrttis.
Samkalpdtmaka leads the mind to knowledge of brahma (pardvidyd), and vikalpdtmaka leads it to
knowledge of the mundane (apardvidyd). Sarkar further explains that these fifty vrttis are expressed
both intemally and extemally by all ten sensory and motor organs (indriyasf^, accounting for a total
of one thousand vrttis (i.e. 50 x 2 x 10 = 1000). The pineal gland itself has no vrttis but is considered
their source and can thus be said to contain the seeds of these vrttis. (The different vrttis will be
delineated and their associated glands and plexuses (cakras) discussed more fully in section 4.3.2.)
Associated with the theory of vrtti is the concept of 'longing', which Sarkar defines as 'the
urge that pulls forward'.^' Sarkar conceives of four types of 'micropsychic' longing that pull
individual minds towards their fulfilment, namely psychophysical longing conceming inbom instinct;
psychophysical longing conceming non-inbom instinct; psychic longing for psychic pabulum; and
longings concemed with apexed psychology. The first category, psychophysical longing conceming
inbom instinct, refers to the force created by natural biological urges that pull the organism towards
various objects of gratification. An example of this type of longing would be a baby's urge for breast
milk upon hearing the sound of its mother. In the case of inanimate matter, Sarkar sees the increase
or decrease in inter-atomic or inter-molecular spaces as an expression of inbom instinct, but does not
explain how inanimate entities are able to have psychophysical longings in the absence of mind.
Another example would be the desfre of a species for certain changes to its collective bio-stmcture in
order to cope better with envfronmental demands. Sarkar says that such changes can actually occur if
the macrocosm or cosmic mind supports the collective longing of the species for mutation.
The second category, psychophysical longing conceming non-inbom instinct, refers to various
physical and/or psychological longings created as a result of learning and experience. These longings
are intimately linked to the development, in the human body, of plexuses (cakras) - where instincts
(vrttis) are spatially located - and of endocrine glands - where instincts are biologically perpetuated.
According to Sarkar, over-secretion or under-secretion of hormones affects the nerve cells, and
indfrectiy affects thoughts. The types of thoughts predominant in the mind create sarnskdras
(reactions in potentiality) that affect the strength of vrttis in the human organism. In this way, instincts
change according to the quality and quantity of hormonal secretion by the glands. The processes of

^* lAI, p. 30.
^^ The ten arefivesensory organs: eyes, ears, nose, tongue and skin; andfivemotor organs: arms, legs, vocal
cords, genitals, and anus.
" YP, p. 104.
110
human growth and development, behavioural leaming, education, and association with society all
impact on the variety and intensity of psychophysical longings vis-d-vis non-inbom instincts.
The third category, psychic longing for psychic pabulum (dbhoga), refers to the pull towards a
psychological 'object of enjoyment', which may be cmde or subtie. Thinking about and longing for a
cmde object, such as a sweet, will render the mind cmde, while contemplating and longing for a subtie
object, such as a noble idea, will render the mind subtie. Sarkar emphasises that in any movement
toward a psychic object, the mind will have to maintain proper adjustment and parallelism with the
body so that the integrity of the organism is maintained. Maladjustment between the physical and
mental waves of an organism, (as discussed in Chapter 3), can cause dissociation of mind and body
and result in death. For example, a dedicated spfritual aspfrant constantiy engaged in contemplation of
brahma will have to maintain psychophysical parallelism through special Yogic postures (dsanas) and
vital energy confrol (prdridydma) so that an equilibrium between body and mind can be created.
The fourth category, longings concemed with apexed psychology, refers to the spfritual
longings of the human mind that flow uni-directionally towards the supreme entity, brahma.
Regarding apexed psychology, Sarkar says:

When the movement of the human mind is not in many lateral dfrections - north,
south, east, and west - but towards the Supreme Entity, then the mind becomes apexed,
pinnacled. This pointed mind either merges in the Macrocosm, or gives up its
individual existence in the Supreme Cognitive Faculty.^'

Such spiritual longings associated with apexed psychology are fulfilled through a process of intense
spiritual practice (sddhand). Sarkar recommends that people commence these practices by the age of
thirteen, because thirteen is the approximate age when the sex glands develop, along with a sense of
dutifulness and responsibility. He sees the sense of dutifulness and responsibility as being closely
related to thefloweringof spiritual longings and the subsequent attainment of apexed psychology.

4.3 Yoga Biopsychology

Sarkar's metaphysic of mind and consciousness, and his theory of knowledge and vrtti, are integral
components of an overall conceptual framework of the body, mind, and spirit that he calls the science
of biopsychology. The preceding discussions have shed some light on the psychological stmctures
and processes envisioned by Sarkar in his articulation of yoga psychology. In this section, this
articulation will be expanded to include the physiological and spiritual processes that, together with
the aforementioned psychological processes, form the larger Sarkarian theory of biopsychology.
While focussing on the details of Sarkar's biopsychology, it is important to remember that in the
Sarkarian project, cosmology, ontology, theology, epistemology, psychology, physiology, ethics, and
soteriology are all organically interwoven into a complete whole. Hence, the various

" YP. p. 120.

Ill
biopsychological processes described in the following sub-sections will show up as intimately
connected to other aspects of Sarkar's teaching.
Cenfral to Sarkar's biopsychology is his concept of sukra or 'vital fluid', a highly precious and
subtle substance derived from the human body's assimilation of food from the environment. Sukra is
the raw material for the synthesis of hormones and other vital bio-chemicals in the body, as well as
the essential nufrient for the brain. Sukra, often used interchangeably with the term 'lymph', is
closely related to the various lymphatic and endocrine glands in the body. Hence the quantity and
quality of sukra, in association with the proper functioning of the glands, are intimately linked to a
person's physical, psychological, and spiritual well-being.
Alongside the sukra, other essential stmctures for the proper functioning of the body-mind
complex in Sarkar's biopsychology are the nddis or 'nerves or subtle energy channels', cakras or
'nerve plexuses', and prdria or 'vital energy'. These terms are not unique to Sarkar, being found in
the classical traditions of Yoga and Tantra. But Sarkar redefines these concepts and translates them
into the idiom of modem scientific understanding. The various cakras of the body (seven in total),
their locations in connection with the three main nddis, and the locations and functions of the prdria
are delineated in this section, as is the distribution of vrttis throughout the cakras in association with
the glands.
A discussion of Sarkar's biopsychology would not be complete without mention of the
quintessential concept of kulakuridalirii or the 'coiled serpentine residing in kula'. Kulakuridaliru is
the force of dormant spirituality lying in the lowest cakra at the base of the spine, and is linked to
Sarkarian cosmology and soteriology. The upward movement of the kulakuridalirii through the central
channel (susumrid) towards the topmost cakra is the underlying mechanism behind spiritual evolution.

4.3.1 Nddis and Cakras

Sarkar's biopsychology, in common with the Indian Tantric tradition, includes the concepts of nerves
(nddis), plexuses (cakras), and vital energy (prdria). It can be argued that Sarkar's science of
biopsychology is but a modem restatement of classical Tantric ideas relating to the body's bio-
energetic system, with use of scientific terminology and quasi-scientific reasoning to explain hitherto
mysterious and often secret teachings. (This line of argument will be pursued in greater detail in
Chapter 6.)
Sarkar's term for nddi, as translated in the AS, is 'nerve',^* though "subtie-energyflows'^^and
'psychic-energy channel'^ have also been used by AM in presenting his teachings. In AS, Sarkar
treats the nerves as a component of the indriyas, or 'organs' (both motor and sensory). The other
components are 'the gateways of the organs, the nerve fluid, and the appropriative pithas (seats) of the

'*A5, p. 28.
^' SPSSA, p. 254.
Anandamurti, Ananda Mdrga Carydcarya Part 3 (Fourth Edition), trans, by Kr§natmananda (Calcutta-
Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sanigha, 1992), p. 76.
112
organs (in the brain).'^' In other words, Sarkar sees the nddi or nerve as an anatomical stmcture that
either transmits the vibrations at the gateways of sense organs to thefr specific neuro-sensory sites in
the brain or, conversely, carries vibrations from the specific neuro-motor sites in the brain to the
gateways of motor organs. He gives the example of the eye (sense organ gateway), the optic nerve
(nddi), the optic fluid (nerve fluid), and the 'optic point of the nerve cell' to illustrate his conception of
the eye indriya. Apart from this quasi-scientific use of the term nddi, Sarkar mentions the names of
three psycho-spiritual channels commonly known in Hindu Tantra as idd, pirigald, and susumrid.
However, he does not specifically label them as nddis, which leaves the status of these channels vis-d-
vis the nddis somewhat ambiguous in his writings. The commentary to AS unambiguously proclaims
that nddis are subtie, psychic energy channels that can be found throughout the body.*^ Even then, the
three channels, idd, pirigald, and susumrid, are not specifically cited as examples of nddis. Leaving
aside the question whether they are to be classed as nddis, the idd and pirigald channels are seen to be
carriers of prdria or vital energy in the body. They start their course of fravel from the base of the
spinal cord and, weaving around the spinal cord, terminate in each nostril.*' The idd terminates in the
left nostril, the pirigald in the right. When the breath flows predominantly through the left nostril, the
idd is considered to be active, and the body remains cool and the mind introverted. When the breath
flows mainly through the right nostril, the pirigald is said to be active and the body and mind become
heated and prepared for physical, extroverted activity. While Sarkar never specifically describes the
stmcture and function of these two channels in the primary texts, he does mention the importance of
maintaining an active left nosfril while performing yoga postures (dsanas)^ and meditation
(sddhand)!'^ and of keeping the right nostril unblocked during and just after meals.^ This is so that
the body and mind are in the state most conducive to either introverted spiritual practices or
extroverted mundane activities. In the case of dsanas and sddhana, the flow of breath through the left
nostril induces a calm and introspective frame of body and mind via the activity of the idd. In the case
of eating a meal and digesting it, the flow of breath through the right nostril allows digestive juices
and processes to function effectively via the activity of the pirigald. The susumrid is considered the
most important of all the energy channels, as it is the passage through which the spiritual energy of
kuridalini rises and moves on its way to the topmost plexus (sahasrdra cakra). The sahasrdra cakra
is, on the microcosmic scale, the seat of supreme consciousness (known variously as brahma, parama
purusa, krsria, or siva). The susumrid is thought to pass through the entfre length of the spinal column
and to extend up to the crown of the head.*' The precise nature and function of kuridalini (and prdria)
will be discussed in the next section. Sarkar describes the points of intersection of the idd, pirigald.

" AS, p. 28.

62
SPSSA, p. 254-255.
*' Anandamitra, Yoga for Health: Ananda Mdrga Yoga Exercises for Men and Women (Manila: Ananda Marga
Publications, 1997), p. 60.
" Carydcarya Part 3, p. 25.
Carydcarya Part 2, p. 25.
^ Carydcarya Part 3, p. 6.

113
and susumrid as the loci of the major cakras (plexuses) in the body. In the SPSSA, Anandamitta
mentions that the 'kuridalini is lying quiet in the mulddhdra cakra (lowermost cakra) because of
obstmctions in these cakras which block her free passageway up the susumrid'.^^ Here the susumrid is
expressly described as the channel through which the kuridalini travels and along which the various
cakras are located. The next passage confirms this:

As the kuridalini rises in the susumrid and pierces the cakras one by one, the bondages
break, and the unit again becomes the Supreme -jtva becomes Siva. Thus the spiritual
joumey is essentially the joumey of the kuridalini, transmuting energy from lower
centres to higher ones; the opening of the susumrid canal; and the progressive release
and channelling of the powerful dormant energies in the human body.*'

In terms of spiritual practice and advancement, Sarkar sees the role of the cakras as
indispensable. While translating cakras as 'plexi' [sic], he also defines a cakra as a collection of
glands and sub-glands, whose location varies from animal to animal.'" His use of the term "plexi'
probably derives from his conception of the main nerve-centres located at the level of each cakra, and
the nerve sub-centres within the various sub-glands." In parallel to this physical definition, he seems
to conceive of the cakras as psychic centres that function much like sub-stations of the mind, where
mental propensities are transmuted into physical energy and expressed in the form of hormones.'^ The
natural or unnatural expression of these propensities is linked to the normal or abnormal secretion of
hormones, and the existence of the mind is fully dependent on the existence of propensities. To
Sarkar, total destmction of the propensities means complete annihilation of the mind. In addition,
most of the myriad hormones secreted by the glands are consumed within the associated plexuses,
with very littie passing into the glands and sub-glands below them. One exception is the mariipiira
cakra (igneous plexus), where the hormones secreted are not absorbed or utilised by any of the
plexuses but are instead excreted from the body."
Sarkar lists seven major cakras situated at strategic points along the susumrid, as represented
in the table below:

"A5, p. 76.
'* SPSSA, pp. 254-255.
"5P55A, p. 255.
'" YP, p. 136.
71 , ™
" YP, p. 158
'^ YP, p. 137,

114
 Cakra ('Plexus') Location
1. Mulddhdra cakra ('terranean plexus') Base of the spinal cord.
2. Svddhisthdna cakra ('fluidal plexus') Level of the genitals.
3. Mariipura cakra ('igneous plexus') Level of the navel.
4. Andhata cakra ('solar plexus') Mid-point of the chest.
5. Visuddha cakra ('sidereal plexus') Level of the throat.
6. Ajnd cakra ('lunar plexus') Mid-point between the eyebrows.
7. Sahasrdra cakra ('outer macro-pineal plexus') Crown of the brain.

In addition to these seven major cakras, Sarkar also emphasises the cmcial importance of the guru
cakra ('inner macro-pineal plexus') in the practice of meditation. He defines the guru cakra as the
inner-side of the macro-pineal plexus situated just within the skull, while the sahasrdra cakra is,
strictly speaking, just above the skull and thus outside the body. Hence, the sahasrdra cakra is
essentially the outer-side of the macro-pineal plexus and represents the culminating locus of the entfre
spiritual quest. Besides the guru cakra, Sarkar mentions another called the laland cakra but fails to
elaborate on what it is or where it is located.
According to Sarkar, the mulddhdra cakra ('terranean plexus') is situated within a larger
stmcture known as the bhauma maridala. He gives no translation for the term bhauma (which means
'terranean'), but does translate the term maridala as "cfrcle', suggesting that it refers to a larger area or
space in which the specific cakra is embedded. He states that the mulddhdra cakra contains a number
of glands and sub-glands, which are seats of four propensities each with an acoustic root. These
propensities are dharma ('psycho-spiritual longing'),'" artha ('psychic longing'), kdma ('physical
longing'), and moksa ('spiritual longing') and thefr Sanskrit acoustic roots are va, sa, sa, and sa
respectively. In Sarkar's Tantric theory of acoustics, the myriad entities of the entire universe are seen
to be pulsating at different vibrational frequencies, all of which can be summated and reduced to fifty
specific acoustic roots. These fifty acoustic roots, as mentioned in Chapter 3, are harmonic variations
of the primordial sound of creation, the ornkdra, and are microcosmically reflected in the vibrational
activities of the fifty different propensities of the human mind. These vibrational activities result in
the acoustic roots that form the entire alphabet of the Sanskrit language. As all objects in the universe
are composed of the five fundamental factors (discussed in Chapter 3), the human body is no
exception. The mulddhdra cakra is the controlling centre of the solid factor in the body, and is in tum
confrolled by the kdmamaya kosa of the mind.
Details on the seven cakras are tabulated below, correlating the cakras with (1) the type of
propensities (vrttis), and the number of glands and sub-glands (see Table 1); (2) the larger areas
(maridala) in which they are embedded, the fundamental factors (bhutas) they confrol, and the layers

73
YP, p. 189.

115
of mind (kosas) that confrol them (see Table 2); and (3) the acoustic roots associated with propensities
contained within the cakras (Table 3).

Table 1. Correlations between Cakras, Propensities, and Associated Glands and Sub-
glands.'^

Cakra Propensities Glands

Sahasrdra cakra Source of all 1,000 propensities of the human mind Outside the cranium

Guru cakra Source of all inspiration and seed of omniscience Pineal gland

Ajnd cakra 1. Apard ('mundane knowledge') Pituitary gland

2. Pard ('spiritual knowledge')
Visuddha cakra 1. S^tdaja (' sound of peacock') Thyroid &
2. Rsabha ('sound of bull or ox') Parathyroid glands
3. Gdndhdra ('sound of goat') (16 sub-glands)
4. Madhyama ('sound of deer')
5. Pancama (' sound of cuckoo')
6. Dhaivata ('sound of donkey')
7. MsdJa ('sound of elephant')
8. Oni ('acoustic root of creation, preservation,
dissolution')
9. Huni ('sound of arousing kulakuridalirii')
10. Phat Cpractication, i.e. putting a theory into
practice')
11. Vausat ('expression of mundane
knowledge')
12. Vasat ('welfare in the subtler sphere')
13. Svdhd ('performing noble actions')
14. Namah ('surrender to the Supreme')
15. Visa ('repulsive expression')
16. Amrta ('sweet expression')
Andhata cakra 1. Asd ('hope') Thymus gland
2. Cintd ('worry') (12 sub-glands)
3. Cestd ('effort')
4. Mamatd ('mine-ness, self-love')
5. Dambha ('vanity')
6. Viveka ('conscience, discrimination')
7. Vikalatd ('mental numbness due to fear')
8. Aharrikdra ('ego')
9. Lolatd ('avarice')
10. Kapatatd ('hypocrisy')
11. Vitarka ('argumentativeness to the point of
wild exaggeration')
12. Anutdpa ('repentance')

All the Sanskrit terms for the different propensities and their respective English translations are taken from IT
pp. 138-144.
YP, pp. 105-125, 136-145, 155-162 and 186-195.
116
Table 1. Continued ...

Cakra Propensities Glands

Mariipiira cakra 1. Lajja ('shyness, shame') Adrenal glands

2. Pisunata ('sadistic tendency') (10 sub-glands)
3. Irsa ('envy')
4. Susupti ('staticity, sleepiness')
5. Visdda ('melanchoHa')
6. Kasaya ('peevishness')
7. Trsna ('yearning for acquisition')
8. Moha ('infatuation')
9. Grhna ('hatred, revulsion')
\O.Bhaya ('fear')
Svadhisthana cakra l.Avajfid ('belittiement of others') Sex glands (i.e.
2. Murccha ('psychic stupor, lack of common prostate and ovaries)
sense')
3. Prasraya ('indulgence')
4. Avisvasa ('lack of confidence')
5. Sarvanasa ('thought of sure annihilation')
6. Krurata ('cmeky')
Mdlddhara cakra 1. Dharma ('psychospiritual longing')
2. Artha ('psychic longing')
3. Kama ('physical longing')
4. Moksa ('spiritual longing')

Table 2. Correlations between Cakras, General Locations, Factors Controlled, and

Controlling Kosas^^

Cakra Embedded in Controls Controlled by

Sahasrdra cakra Brahmarandhra: Source of all 1,000 Nirguna brahma

outside the cranium propensities

Guru cakra Pineal gland Nuclei of all brain Tdraka brahma (i.e.
cells brahma as guru)
Ajna cakra Candra maridala All kosas —

Visuddha cakra Naksatra maridala'^ Ethereal fector Hiranmaya kosa

Andhata cakra Saura maridala Aerial factor Vijndnamaya kosa

Mariipiira cakra Agni mandala Luminous factor Atimdnasa kosa

Svadhisthana cakra Tarala mandala Liquid factor Manomaya kosa

Mulddhdra cakra Bhauma mandala Solid factor Kdmamaya kosa

'* YP, pp. 105-125, 136-145, 155-162 and 186-195.

" Sarkar defines naksa as 'to twinkle' and naksattra as 'that which helps us with its twinkling potentiality' in
YP, p. 140. Actually, naksatra means 'constellation'
117
 Table 3. Correlations between Cakras, Propensities and Acoustic Roots,78

Cakra Propensities Acoustic Roots

Sahasrdra cakra .— —

Guru cakra — —

Ajnd cakra 1. Apard ksa

2. Pard ha
Visuddha cakra 1. Sadaja a
2. Rsabha d
3. Gdndhdra i
4. Madhyama i
5. Pancama U
6. Dhaivata M
1. Nisdda r
8. Om f
9. Hum /
10. Phat ?
11. Vausat e
12. Vasat ai
13. Svdhd o
14. Namah au
15. Visa arri
16. Amrta ah
Andhata cakra 1. Asd ka
2. Cintd kha
3. Cestd ga
4. Mamatd gha
5. Dambha ria
6. Viveka ca
1. Vikalatd cha
8. Aharrikdra ja
9. Lolatd jha
10. Kapatatd na
11. Vitarka fa
12. Anutdpa tha

78
KP, pp. 138-144.
118
 Table 3. Continued

Cakra Propensities Acoustic Roots

Mariipura cakra 1. Lajjd da

2. Pisunata dha
3. Irsd ria
4. Susupti ta
5. Visdda tha
6. Kasdya da
7. Trsrid dha
8. Moha na
9. Grhria pa
lO.Bhaya pha
Svddhisthdna cakra l.Avajnd ba
2. Murccha bha
3. Prasraya ma
4. Avisvdsa ya
5. Sarvandsa ra
6. Kruratd la
Mulddhdra cakra 1. Dharma va
2. Artha sa
3. Kdma sa
4. Moksa sa

Sarkar's description of the cakras and thefr associated acoustic roots (bijas) shows obvious
similarities with traditional Tantric accounts, strongly suggesting his dependence on existing tradition
in the formulation of his teaching. However, his linking of cakras with endocrine glands and mental
propensities (vrttis) in a stmctured manner appears to break away from existing tradition, as does his
theory of the influence of microvita on the cakras.
The mariipura cakra is termed "shelter of greatness' by virtue of being located in the centre of
the body, and termed "shelter of heat' as it is the site of maximum accumulation of heat. Sarkar
mentions that situated in the navel region of the mariipura cakra is a gland of 'thunder-like hardness'
called rudra granthi^^ within which is found the agni cakra. Apart from emphasising the importance
of agni cakra (along with the andhata and djfid cakras) in the performance of action in the world,
Sarkar's position regarding the status of agni cakra vis-a-vis the agni maridala is unclear. It is very
likely that agni cakra is merely another name for the mariipura cakra.
The andhata cakra makes contact with microvita (both positive and negative) via the original,
reflected and refracted light rays from all celestial bodies in the universe. Microvita, as discussed in
Chapter 3, are sub-microscopic subtle entities emanated by cosmic consciousness that serve a variety
of functions including the emergence of life, transmission of ideas, and spiritual elevation. All the
twelve sub-glands of this cakra are affected by all the reflected or refracted light as well as positive
and negative microvita, though positive microvita tend to predominate here. Sarkar also mentions

119
that the andhata cakra exists in the "swaying of the solar plexus, or Visriu Granthi'^ referring
probably to the major gland within which the central point of the cakra is located. The sub-glands of
this cakra house the sub-centres and thefr respective propensities.
Elsewhere in the same source, Sarkar situates the visuddha cakra in the kurma nddi ('sinusoid
nerve') of the throat, and describes it as the centre of speech and as important in the "enlightening of
intellect'.*' Two major glands in close proximity to the visuddha cakra are the thyroid and
parathyroid, called brhaspati granthi and brhaspati upagranthi respectively.*^ Sarkar sees the
visuddha cakra as an important site where positive microvita come into contact with the human body.
Positive and negative microvita travel through the media of light waves and sound (acoustic roots) to
affect the visuddha cakra and control the body positively or negatively. There are a total of sixteen
sounds associated with eighteen light waves coming directly or indirectly from the sun, which contact
the sixteen glands and sub-glands of the cakra. These eighteen light waves derive from the seven
component colours of the spectmm plus ultraviolet and infrared working both intemally and extemally
(i.e. 7 + 2 = 9; 9 + 9 = 18). Sarkar mentions that two of these eighteen light waves come not from the
sun butfromthe moon.
Sarkar pinpoints the location of the djfid cakra (lunar plexus) at the 'upheavals of imagination
in Brahma Granthi [possibly the pituitary gland]'.*' It controls only two propensities, which in tum
direct and control all the other propensities in the lower cakras. These two propensities set the
direction of movement of the emotional and instinctual energy in the mind by activating either the
lower mundane propensities (in the lower cakras) or the higher spiritual propensities (in the higher
cakras). The two controlling propensities are apard ('mundane knowledge') and pard ('spiritual
knowledge'). The right side of the djfid cakra is involved in apard, affecting the cruder propensities
below the navel, while the left side is involved with pard, affecting the subtier propensities in the
upper portion of the body. Sarkar conceives of the djfid cakra as being profoundly influenced by the
reflected light of the moon, which in tum affects the upper cakras (above the navel) and lower cakras
(below the navel) via the left and right sides of the cakra respectively. It is because of this influence
of the moon that Sarkar calls the djfid cakra the lunar plexus. Unlike the lower cakras, the djfid cakra
does not control any physical factor, but is instead 'the seat or central point of the mind.'*"
Apart from moonlight, Sarkar states that all the direct and indfrect, reflected and refracted rays
of all celestial bodies in the universe (for example planets, stars, meteors, comets, suns, moons) have
an impact on all the glands and sub-glands of the human body. He concedes that it is impossible for
asfrology and astronomy to measure and calculate all the effects of these celestial rays on the
individual, for which a completely new science is required. According to Sarkar, astrology can only

" YP, p. 186

"^Ibid
iDia.
*' YP, pp. 186-187.
*^ YP, p. 187.
*' YP, p. 186.
*" Sarkar's words quoted in 5P55A, p. 162.
120
calculate the effects of various planets in our solar system on the individual, but not the totality of
effects from all celestial bodies in the cosmos.*^
The guru cakra is located between the djfid cakra (lunar plexus) and the sahasrdra cakra
(outer macro-pineal plexus), as previously mentioned, and is said to be the physical counterpart of the
sahasrdra cakra (which Sarkar says is a psychological concept more than a physical stmcture).
Sarkar marks the spiritual location of the sahasrdra cakra on the outer portion of the cranium at a
point called the brahmarandhra.^^ He stresses that the sahasrdra cakra is only an 'ideational point'*'
without a physical existence in the nerve cells. In contrast, the guru cakra is just inside the cranium
and is the "controlling point of all the confroUing points of all the brain cells on the physical, psychic
and spiritual planes'.** This ultimate regulating point or prdriakendra is the source of 'a thousand and
one kinds of inspiration and propulsion' that human beings receive.*' It is possible that the guru cakra
may, technically speaking, be the pineal gland with which the sahasrdra cakra is associated, though
Sarkar does not specifically say so. He does stress, however, that the guru cakra contains 'the
supreme potentiality of omniscience',^ and is 'the loftiest point for the purposes of meditation and
contemplation'." As the guru cakra is the point at which tdraka brahma abides as the supreme guru,
it is at this cakra that meditation on the guru has to be performed.

4.3.2 Theory of .$uA:ra and Glands

Sarkar defines sukra as the final essence of the physical body, which is obtained after a process of
digestion and sequential assimilation of food. Food that has been ingested is mixed with digestive
juices and transformed into what Sarkar calls rasa, afluid-likesubstance, while unnecessary material
is rejected as urine and other waste products. The essence of rasa undergoes further transformation to
become blood, with further waste material being rejected. Sarkar goes on to say that the "essence of
blood changes into flesh and the essence of flesh into meda or vasa (fat), and so on, till it changes into
bone, bone marrow and ultimately into sukra'?^ According to him, the physical body is composed of
these seven materials - rasa, blood, flesh, fat, bone, bone marrow, and sukra - with sukra being the
'final essence' Sukra in tum has three component stages of lymph (prdria-rasa or lasikd),
spermatozoa, and seminal fluid (for males), and lymph, ova, and menstmal fluid (for females). It
appears that Sarkar sees lymph as being produced not only from food but also from 'the energy and
vitality acquired from the different quinquelemental factors of this universe, such as water, afr and
light'.''

*' YP, pp. 144-145.

**yp, p. 181.
*' YP, p. 192.
** YP, p. 181.
*' YP, pp. 191-192.
^YP,p. 181.
" YP, p. 192.
'^ lAI, p. 55.
" y p , p. 117.
121
 hi Sarkar's theory, lymph is supplied from the lymphatic glands and fransported through a
series of lymphatic vessels that function in parallel to the blood vessels. The chief functions of lymph
are 'to purify the blood and maintain the beauty and glory of the body''" and to serve as raw material
for the synthesis and production of hormones ('granthirasas'f^ in the endocrine glands. Surplus
lymph serves as nufrient for the brain cells and sfrengthens the brain and intellect. It appears that
Sarkar sees lymph as either identical to or contained in the cerebrospinal fluid, which flows within the
spinal cord all the way to the brain, and in which the brain is bathed. For Sarkar, deficiency or defect
of lymph in any organ results in disease of that particular organ. Hence, he maintains that for
intellectuals whose brain activity levels are high, adequate amounts of lymph are essential.
As previously mentioned, one essential function of lymph is to act as raw material for the
production of hormones, which occurs when lymph comes into contact with an activated endocrine
gland. Sarkar thus speaks of lymph as the initial hormone out of which other hormones are made, with
the rate and quantity of hormonal production depending on certain 'positive and negative catalytic
agents'.'* The main positive catalytic agent for lymph production is chlorophyll, which is obtainable
from fresh green and leafy vegetables. According to Sarkar, chlorophyll accelerates the speed of
production of lymph and should form an essential part of the human diet. Apart from chlorophyll, a
positive psychic and physical environment greatly accelerates the production of lymph. Sarkar regards
association with spiritually minded people and elevating discussion as examples of positive psychic
environments, and spiritually uplifting places as examples of positive physical environments.
Conversely, negative psychic environments such as unwholesome company and discussion, and
negative physical environments such as cinema halls, brothels, and busy commercial venues can retard
the rate of production of lymph and be detrimental to physical and mental health.
Sarkar highlights several important endocrine glands in the body where the hormones
produced are cmcial to physical well-being and psycho-spiritual growth. When the testes (correlated
with the fluidal plexus or svddhisthdna cakraf^ in the male start functioning, the lymphatic glands
there also start supplying lymph for conversion into semen. This conversion of lymph into semen is
directed by the pituitary gland. When semen is produced, the nerves are affected and changes in the
person's thoughts occur. This is especially so when the production of lymph exceeds the body's
capacity to utilise it, resulting in lymph's conversion to excess semen. In this case, sexual desire is
generated in the mind. If the secretion of the testes is normal, a sense of dutifulness develops in the
boy of three years or older. In the case of a teenage boy, if the testes are over-active and there is high
secretion of hormones, he will grow pubic and armpit hafr as the physical effect and will develop the
spirit of rationality as the psychic effect. He will also develop in intelligence since the proper
secretion of the testes helps develop the solar plexus, upon which intelligence is dependent. If over-

'" lAI, p. 55.

'^ YP, p. 187.
'*yP,p. 118.
" YP, p. 137.
122
secretion of testicular hormones occurs between the ages of fifteen and seventeen, the youth will
acqufre the longing for universalism and a desire for supreme consciousness (parama purusa).
Conversely, if there is under-secretion of hormones in the testes in a teenage boy, there will be less
pubic and armpit hair; and if the sex glands do not develop by a specified age, he will become
unsociable and perhaps even cmel between thirteen and fifteen. The same youth will then grow into a
man with less kindness and a proclivity to dogmatism, characterised by a lack of moral strength to
resist dogma and to accept new ideas. Besides the testes, the prostate gland (possibly but not
definitively correlated with the terranean plexus or mulddhdra cakra) is extremely important to the
development of the male body and psyche. The prostate gland is responsible for the feeling of shyness
or shame in the mind. A child of three to five does not experience shyness owing to the under-
development of this gland. In the case of an adult male, shyness is commonly due in part to the
activity of the prostate and in part to social conditioning or imposed sarnskdras. Over-secretion of
hormones from the prostate gland can result in melancholia and pessimism. Conversely, under-
secretion can cause a person to develop a fearful nature and perhaps even to suffer from psychic
hallucinations, fri the case of females, where testes and prostate are absent, some of the lymph
produced by regional lymphatic glands is converted into ova in the ovaries (the female correlate to the
fluidal plexus or svddhisthdna cakra),^^ while a certain portion of it is converted into milk in the
female breasts. In both males and females, some of the lymph is used to maintain proper energy levels
and physical glamour of the body, while some is transported to the brain cells for thefr nourishment.
The characteristics of over- and under-secretion of hormones in the igneous plexus or
mariipura cakra are identical to those just described for the prostate gland."* According to Sarkar,
normal secretion of hormones of the first sub-gland of the igneous plexus, in reaction to socially-
imposed conditioning, results in the propensities of shyness and shame. He goes on to say that over-
secretion of the fifth and sixth sub-glands of the igneous plexus together results in melancholia, while
under-secretion of its ninth and tenth sub-glands together results in the fear complex. While these
features seem to suggest that the prostate gland might be related to the igneous plexus, this is not
probable. While in the case of the prostate, all the effects of hormonal over- and under-secretion are
linked to only one gland, in the case of the igneous plexus, four different sub-glands (not glands) are
involved. The unitary prostate gland can, therefore, be neither one of, nor the totality of, the multiple
sub-glands of the igneous plexus. This implies that the sub-glands of the igneous plexus may function
in synergy with the prostate gland to create the above-mentioned psychological effects.
When adequate lymph is secreted in the solar plexus or andhata cakra'^' (which is associated
with the thymus glands), and when the solar plexus develops, the spirit of love and affection for
children develops. This occurs in all animals such as birds, mammals, and human beings. Sarkar

'* YP, p. 137. To the best of my knowledge, Sarkar does not specifically associate the prostate gland with
mulddhdra cakra, but he does translate mulddhdra cakra as 'terranean plexus'
" YP, p. 137.
"* YP, p. m-llA.
123
views the constant and regular supply of lymph in the solar plexus as essential for its proper
functioning. When lymph supply and hormonal secretions are normal, the male develops a beard and
a muscular chest, while this does not happen when supply and secretions are low. Also, love for
children may be lacking in sterile men and women with low secretion of hormones from the solar
plexus. In the case of spiritual aspirants, high supply of lymph and over-secretion of hormones in the
solar plexus cause the transformation of love for children into love for the brahma. In the case of
males, a thick beard and a well-developed chest may ensue. Sarkar sees the solar plexus as the central
base of all higher human propensities, and considers that a human being will not be able to survive if
the solar plexus is ever dissociated from the body.
When there is adequate supply of lymph and normal hormonal secretion in the thyroid and
parathyroid glands (correlated with the sidereal plexus or visuddha cakra), the voice grows deep and
a moustache develops in the case of a male, along with the quality of self-reliance. Under-
development of these glands will result in a quarrelsome nature in both men and women generally, and
irrationality and vanity in women particularly. According to Sarkar, these glands develop fully by the
age of twenty-four in both men and women, though this is delayed by two years in cold climates.
Slight physical deterioration but psychological growth occurs in people beyond the age of thirty-nine,
and this is followed by more physical deterioration and slight mental deterioration for those beyond
the age of fifty in hot climates and fifty-one in cold climates. Finally, after the age of sixty in hot
countries and sixty-one in cold countries, thinking power gradually degenerates in most people.
The pituitary gland (correlated with the lunar plexus or djfid cakra)'°^ and the pineal gland
(correlated with the inner macro-pineal plexus or guru cakra)'^ are sites of utmost importance in
Sarkar's biopsychology. Sarkar stresses that there is no difference between males and females as
regards the pituitary and pineal glands, and hence there should be no discrimination between the sexes
in terms of entitlement to spfritual enlightenment. In a person who has performed spiritual practices in
previous existences, and after the sex glands have developed by the age of thirteen, the pituitary gland
starts becoming very active. This intense activity of the pituitary gland results in a strong thfrst for
spirituality in the person concemed. In the presence of proper guidance from a spiritual preceptor, the
aspfrant achieves spfritual growth and progress. Sarkar asserts that the pituitary gland is psycho-
spiritual in nature while the pineal gland is fully spfritual in nature, probably alluding to the notion that
while the pituitary gland remains associated with mind and its functions (by virtue of being the
biological locus of both woridly-directed and spiritually-directed propensities), the pineal gland has no
propensity associated with it and is entirely beyond the scope of the mind. As previously mentioned,
he regards the pineal gland as the biological counterpart of the sahasrdra cakra, the microcosmic seat
of parama purusa or nirguria brahma.

'"' YP, p. 123-124.

'"'Ibid
""Ibid
'"" YP, p. 152.
124
 According to Sarkar, the pituitary plexus (referring to the lunar plexus or djfid cakra, not the
pituitary gland) is divided into right and left portions. The right wing confrols the 'qualities,
atfributions, and quanta of the leftistic propensities, which are a little more than four hundred in
number', while the left wing controls the "qualities, attributions, and quanta of the rightistic
propensities, which are also a little more than four hundred in number'.'"' The total of both classes of
propensities is a little less than eight hundred and fifty. Sarkar defines 'leftistic' propensities as those
that 'have a degenerating and depraving effect, such as shyness, shamefulness, melancholia and fear';
'rightistic' propensities as those that propel the individual towards supreme consciousness. In other
words, the leftistic propensities can be loosely equated with vikalpdtmaka ('intemal occupations [that]
lead towards the mundane or cmde'), while rightistic propensities are identical to samkalpdtmaka
('intemal occupations [that] lead towards the Great').'"* While not the actual site of these
propensities, the pituitary plexus (djfid cakra), and by extension the pituitary gland, is the controlling
centre of the totality of propensities that lead the person towards either the mundane or the
supramundane.
In summary, Sarkar sees lymph (via its conversion into hormones) as responsible for many
psychic changes and regards it as absolutely essential for the growth of human qualities such as sense
of dutifulness, parental and universal love, rationality, sense of self-reliance, and thfrst for spirituality.
In addition, all the glands and plexuses (cakras) in the body are interdependent. However, the prostate
gland, the testes and other subsidiary endocrine glands depend more on the lymphatic glands for
adequate supply of lymph, than lymphatic glands depend on the endocrine glands for their essential
functions. In the case of plexuses, the lower plexuses are more dependent on the higher ones than are
the higher plexuses on the lower ones.

4.3.3 Prdridh, Prdnendriya and KurtdalirH

Prdridh is the plural form of the more familiar word prdna, and refers to the composite of ten vdyus or
"airs' that are said to exist in the human body. Sarkar's cosmology describes the process of gradual
cmdification of purusa into five fundamental factors and subsequently the inanimate and animate
orders under the ongoing influence of the three forces of prakrti. The resultant interial force that holds
the stmctural integrity of the living body in the presence of congenial envfronmental conditions and
requisite proportions of the five factors is known as prdridh or "vital energy'.'"' The ten vdyus that
make up prdridh are of two types: 'interial' and 'exterial'. There are five interial vdyus, namely prdria,
apdrm, samdna, uddna, and vydna and five exterial vdyus, namely ndga, kurma, krkara, devadatta,
and dhananjaya. Their functions have been spelt out in Chapter 3 and will not be repeated here.
While it is unclear whether any of these vdyusflowthrough the cenfral passageway, susumrid,
it is possible that some or all of the intemal vdyus are thought of as fraveiling through the idd and

'"' YP, p. 123.

'"* lAI, p. 30.
""/A/, p. 6.
125
pirigald. Uddna, the vdyu responsible for voice and control of the vocal cords, is located at the throat.
Prdna, the vdyu controlling the functions of the heart, lungs, and respfration, is located between the
throat and the navel. Apdna, the vdyu controlling the functions of excretion and the movement of
urine and faeces, is located between the navel and the anus. The vdyu that maintains balance and
adjustment between prdria and apdna is samdna, located at the navel itself Vydna is distributed
throughout the body and is responsible for regulating blood cfrculation and the functioning of the
nerves. Of these five vdyus, the fu-st four are likely to be present in the idd and pirigald, judging from
their physical locations and physiological functions. To recapitulate, the idd and pingald are subtie
channels that travel along both sides of the spinal cord and interweave around it so as to intersect at
the cenfral points of the first six cakras. In confrast, the five exterial vdyus are scattered throughout
the body and have no fixed location. Ndga is the vdyu responsible for expanding the body, in actions
such as jumping, throwing, and stretching. Kurma contracts the body, such as when one is cold.
Krkara assists in spasmodic movements such as yawning, hiccoughing, twisting in pain, and sneezing.
Devadatta causes hunger and thfrst, while dhananjaya causes sleep and drowsiness. While it is still
possible that these exterial vdyus are present in the idd and pingald, Sarkar does not make it explicitly
clear that this is so.
Sarkar speaks of a vital controlling centre situated in the middle of the andhata cakra that
regulates all the flows of prdridh in the body. This centre is known as prdnendriya, which he defines
as 'the collective name of the ten vdyus' and "more or less a co-related activity of ten analysed sub-
factors of vdyutattva' .'^^ He uses other terms such as bodhendriya and bodha vivikti to name the same
thing. From his definition, it appears that the prdriendriya is a localised functional process that
ensures the regulated flow of prdridh (or the ten vdyus) in the body. This is said to occur on the
'physical and psycho-physical level'.'"' Sarkar describes the prdriendriya as a pulsative process of
altemate contraction and expansion (samkoca-vikdsi), whereby the 'auxiliary waves' of the
prdriendriyaflowin a sequence of motion and pause. The nerves flow in the pattern in which the
prdriendriya itself flows and it is this function of the prdriendriya that makes it closely linked to
sensory perception and mental conception. The ability of the citta (cmde mind) to receive tanmdtras
(sensory inferences) from the extemal world is dfrectly linked to the phase that the prdriendriya is in.
In the pause phase, when the flow of the prdriendriya is calm, all the nerves become correspondingly
calm and the flow of information through them is unimpeded. This results in correct perception by the
citta and proper cognition by the aham or ego. This also happens when the prdnendriya, instead of
being at a pause, is in a contraction phase. However, when the prdriendriya is in an expansive phase,
the citta and all the nerves pulsate in tune with the expanding and dynamic waves of the prdriendriya,
impeding the movement of incoming tanmdtras. In such a case, there may be difficulty in perception
or no perception at all. Similarly, the ability of the mind to receive and understand an idea (bhava) is

'°^IAI, p. 27.
'""Ibid
126
directiy linked to the activity of the prdriendriya. A paused or contracting prdriendriya enhances
conception while an expanding, dynamic prdriendriya impedes it.
In addition to its role in perception and conception, the prdriendriya is deemed to be
responsible for recognising 'the objectives from different experienced sense perceptions and innate
psychic projections'."" Sarkar gives the example of perceiving qualities of softness and hardness,
melody and harshness, hot and cold to illustrate this special perceptual function of the prdriendriya.
On a more subtie level, the prdriendriya is the "auxiliary force'"' that subjectively perceives mental
qualities such as kindness, affection, and antipathy in another person.
A central concept of traditional as well as Sarkarian Tanfra is that of the kulakuridalirii or
'coiled serpentine', a psycho-spiritual force or potential that lies normally dormant in the mulddhdra
cakra at the kula or base of the spine. The concept of kulakuridalirii is closely linked to the cosmic
cycle of creation in Sarkar's cosmology. In the third stage of sadcara (the extroversial phase of the
cycle of creation), the straight-line waves of purusa emanating from the vertex of the triangle offerees
become transformed into curved vibrational flows that get sequentially shorter in wavelength. This
represents the gradual cmdification of subtiest consciousness into the manifold forms of the universe.
In this stage, prakrti is known as bhavdni sakti and stays active throughout the entfre phase of
sadcara. Towards the end of the sancara phase, the expressional force of bhavdni sakti reaches its
climax and the final state of cmdification is reached. In this state of cmdity, bhavdni sakti is known
as pardsakti or 'introversial pervasive force', which abides in a "quiescent state as the fivabhdva [finite
subjectivity]' at a point called the svayambhUlinga, translated as 'ultimate point of negativity'."^ This
pardsakti resting at the svayambhUlinga is also known as the kulakuridalirii or 'coiled serpentine'.
Sarkar says:

In the ultimate state of cmdification, the pardsakti lying dormant at svayambhUlinga is

called the kuridalini ("coiled serpentine") ... The last expressional point, which is the
fringe of the bhavdni sakti, is the ultimate state of expression of force the ultimate
state of crudity. In this state of cmdity the pardsakti [introversial pervasive force] that
is lying in a quiescent state as the fivabhdva [finite subjectivity], is called the
kulakuridaliru ["coiled serpentine", or force of fundamental negativity]."'

He goes on to say that the "ultimate point of manifestation is called svayambhulinga ...' which is the
'ultimate point of negativity, wherein resides the kulakuridalirii force, quiescent and coiled like a
serpent'."" As the kulakuridalirii force resides in the point of fundamental negativity, it is also called
the 'force of fundamental negativity'."'

"°/A/, p. 29.
'"Ibid
"^ AS, p. 39.
'"Ibid.
"* AS, pp. 39-40.
"^ AS, p. 40.
Ill
 From the above it appears that the kulakuridalirii force is entirely separate from and perhaps
much subtier than, the prdridh or ten vdyus found in the nddis and possibly the idd and pingald
channels. It is said to be wound up in three and a half coils in a clockwise direction in the lowest
cakra (mulddhdra cakra) at the last bone of the spine (kula). This lowest point in the lowest bone of
tiie body, known as svayambhulinga, is where the living being exists in its cmdest form. Here, the
entirety of the person's divinity, as represented by the kulakuridalirii, exists in latent form. When the
kulakuridalirii is awakened by spiritual practice, in particular through mantra meditation, it uncoils and
rises up the spinal column towards the ultimate point of sambhulinga ('point of self-created
confroUer') at the crown of the head. The details of spiritual practice and its relation to the
kulakuridalirii and associated concepts will be discussed in Chapters 5 and 6. Suffice to mention here
that, for Sarkar, raising the kulakuridalini is the quintessential practice for, and mechanism of, any
genuine spiritual elevation. He sees the inner spirit of this practice as '... to control the [propensities]
and seed sounds of the different glands and to suspend one's self in Paramasiva [the Nucleus
Consciousness], whose rank is beyond the scope of all the instincts and seed sounds'. In this
process, a spiritual aspirant overcomes the pdsas ('bondages') of mental weaknesses and other mental
ripus ('enemies'), and transforms animality into divinity.
In Sarkar's cosmogony, the sambhulinga is the primordial point of creation, the vertex of the
triangle of forces, from where the entire created universe sprouts. It is also the supreme confroUing
point of the unit microcosm from where all psychic and physical expressions originate. Sarkar says
this point is located at the crown of the head (and thus is identical with the sahasrdra cakra):

That is, in the entfre Cosmological order there is a Sambhu point, the starting point,
and similarly, in the unit expression, in the microcosm, there is Sambhu in miniature
form, in microcosmic form, controlling the microcosm. And it is this point [crown of
the head], the controlling point of the pineal gland. It is the site of Parama Purusa,
Paramasiva.

Regarding the sambhu point in the human being, Sarkar says that it is the point where the "entity of a
living being is in subtiest form, is in purest form, is in unadulterated form', where the 'entity of the
living being' presumably refers to the presence of the supreme witnessing entity (purusottama,
parama purusa or paramasiva) in microcosmic form. Sarkar touches upon the precise nature of this
supreme witnessing entity briefly:

Now, wherever there is any expression or wherever there is no expression, the

Witnessing Entity is there, just like the light of a stage, a theatrical stage. When there
is an actor, the light is there, witnessing the activities of that particular actor ... And
when nobody is present - no actor, no dancer, no singer - the light, that very light,
witnesses that "Nobody is present here now." ... where there is expression, that

116
ZJOrVol. 2, p.26.
"Ubid.
"*D07-Vol.l, pp. 63-64.
128
 Cosmic Light, that Cosmic Father, is there. And where there is no expression, the
Father is there to say that nobody is present now - just like the light of the theatrical
stage.'"

WhUe the 'theatrical stage' is obviously a metaphor for the entfre created universe on the macrocosmic
scale, it is nevertheless possible to exfrapolate its meaning to include the entire experiential world of
the individual being, especially given that Sarkar has exphcitly asserted the macrocosmic-microcosmic
homologism of the concept of sambhulinga. Viewed from a microcosmic perspective, the 'light' that
illumines and witnesses the 'theatrical stage' of mental activity (or silence) would refer to the pristine
awareness of dtman - an unbroken flow of knowledge (jfidna).

4.4 Summarising Conclusion

This chapter has explored Sarkar's psychology in terms of the theory of mind, the relationship
between mind and consciousness, the theory of knowledge, and the theory of vrtti Sarkar's blend of
traditional and innovative re-interpretation of Tantric concepts has been discussed under the theory of
sukra and glands, nddis and cakras, and prdridh, prdriendriya and kuridalini.
In his theory of mind, Sarkar posits six different and probably parallel models of the mind that
account for the structure and function of mind, while also having soteriological and practical
implications. These implications will be discussed in Chapters 5 and 6. Synthesising information
from all the six models allows us to constmct a relatively coherent, stmctural overview of the human
mind as understood by Sarkar. From Chapters 3 and 4, we see that Sarkar views the mind as an
emergent entity formed out of the five fundamental factors (ethereal, aerial, luminous, liquid, and
solid) through a long process of evolutionary clash and cohesion. The mind is unable to create
anything original in the world; it merely transforms and combines existing physical substances to form
new substances. It exists apart from the extemal world and perceives and acts in the world via its
sense and motor organs. A limited entity, the mind can attend to only one object or thought at a time
(unilateral) while possessing myriad desires and goals (multi-purposive).
Sarkar differentiates the mind from consciousness by saying that mind is essentially a
fransformed and objectivated state of consciousness, located within the parameters of space and time.
Consciousness, however, is the subtlest state of subjectivity, a "pure knowing' wherein all opposites,
all boundaries, all limitations in thought, language and physicality cease to exist. Sarkar describes
consciousness as having not only a witnessing capacity that observes and knows all that occurs in the
entire universe (physical and mental), but also an associative capacity that allows it to engage with and
fransform all physical and mental objectivities. In relation to the various layers and aspects of the
mind, Sarkar posits the witnessing consciousness existing in various functional forms, observing and
associating with them at all times. His differentiation of consciousness from mind is an important
theoretical move that ultimately underpins the soteriology of AM (see Chapters 5 and 6), insofar as

'"DOrVol. 1, p. 64.
129
mind, as an 'objectivated' phenomenon, is relative and changing, whUe consciousness, in its pristine
state, is the 'final subjectivity' that is absolute and beyond time. Consciousness can thus be identified
with total freedom and bliss, the goal and salvation that all AM practitioners seek.
Based on a multi-layered ontology wherein mind and phenomena are relative while
consciousness is absolute, Sarkar posits the possibility of (1) conceptional knowledge (paroksa bodha)
and (2) spiritual knowledge (aparoksa bodha). All forms of conceptional knowledge are merely
knowledge of relative phenomena except for spirituo-intuitional knowledge, which is essentially
identical to the meditative state of savikalpa samddhi or temporary mergence into saguria brahma. As
such, it approximates knowledge of absolute reality. Also, all types and sub-types of conceptional
knowledge involve some kind of mental object or conception, be it cmde (as in sense objects) or subtie
(as in conception of saguria brahma). Spiritual knowledge, however, is of a different order entirely,
located in a transcendent space totally beyond the scope of the mind. It is non-dual knowledge and is
identical with mergence into nirguria brahma or nirvikalpa samddhi Thus, it is absolute knowledge
in its fullness. For Sarkar, an intimate link exists between authentic knowledge (that is, knowledge of
absolute reality) and salvation or liberation. As we shall see in Chapters 5 and 6, the AM practices
that Sarkar prescribes for his followers are geared towards realisation of just such absolute knowledge,
knowledge that in his view, is none other than absolute love.
Sarkar's theory of vrtti (or 'instinct', 'expressed sentiment', and "propensities') elucidates
dynamic functions of the mind in relation to the physiological make-up of the human body. Stating
that there are a total of 1000 vrttis in the human mind, distributed and localised throughout the seven
major cakras (nerve plexuses) in the body, Sarkar attempts to synthesise biology, psychology, and
spirituality into a coherent framework that helps explain the mechanisms behind spfritual practice and
development. He calls this framework biopsychology, a contemporary and scientifically-sounding
term that may strike a chord with a modem and informed audience. Such a quasi-scientific reframing
offraditionalconcepts can be read as an attempt to adapt Tantra to suit modem needs. In many ways,
Sarkar's appropriation of Tantric concepts such as nddi, prdridh, bija (acoustic root) and kuridalini
does not depart from fraditional Indian Yogic and Tantric theory. Hence, his so-called 'science of
biopsychology' is not particulariy original, although the links that Sarkar makes between fraditional
cakras and modem endocrine glands, and between chlorophyll and lymph production, for example, are
innovative and make rather interesting reading.
The next chapter will explore in detail the soteriological dimension of Sarkarian Tantra, with
emphasis on the spiritual practices advocated by Sarkar and the mechanisms underlying spiritual
development and perfection.

130
 Chapter 5
Ananda IMarga: Frameworks for Practice

5.1 Introduction
The soteriological dimension of Sarkar's Tantra is the main focus of this chapter. We will examine
the context, theory, and disciplines of Sarkarian Tantric praxis as encapsulated in his Path of Bliss or
Ananda Marga (AM). As mentioned in earlier chapters, Sarkar's soteriology is inextricably linked to
his ontology, cosmology, theology, and psychology and metaphysics of mind. This chapter weaves
these various elements of Sarkar's spiritual worldview together in the service of expUcating his Tantric
soteriology and praxis.
In explicating Sarkar's soteriology and praxis, the practical and experiential dimensions of the
texts cannot be ignored, in so far as Sarkar sees all theories as rooted in mystical realisation. Thus, a
complete understanding necessitates nothing short of a 'transcendental' hermeneutic - dfrect spiritual
insight into ultimate reality and its dynamics. In this hermeneutic task, the game-like dialogical
interplay between the interpreter and the texts becomes of crucial significance. Gadamer's idea of
application (Anwendung) in the defining moment of understanding is highly relevant here. In the text-
reader dialogue, I apply my particular historicity and pre-understandings to the texts in each moment
of reading and interpretation. The 'reader's horizon', conditioned by my personal practice of Buddhist
and AM spfrituality, enters into dialectical engagement with the subject matter of the text. In this back
and forth movement between the texts and myself, the horizon of neither text nor reader is privileged,
yet space is aUowed for my direct insights (meditative or otherwise) to play a role in the interpretive
act without necessarily privileging them.
In this way, obscure and difficult soteriological concepts and practices become more amenable
to interpretation and hence more meaningful to the reader. Of particular interest here are the twin
concepts of mukti ('liberation') and moksa ('salvation'). In this chapter, mukti and moksa will be
elaborated and analysed in relation to other paired concepts such as siva-sakti, purusa-prakrti,
savikalpa-nirvikalpa samddhi, and saguria-nirguria brahma. The role of tdraka brahma and
meditative techniques for the attainment of mukti and moksa will be discussed. Other soteriological
terms such as brahmasadbhdva, sahajdvasthd, and dhruvasmrti will be compared with the key
soteriological states of savikalpa-nirvikalpa samddhi, and with the concept of fivanmukta, 'liberated
soul'.
The fundamental requisites for Tantric spiritual practice - guru, mantra, and diksa (initiation)
- will be discussed, as will the five systems of classical Tantra that form the context within which
Sarkar locates his traditional-innovative blend of Tanfra, AM. Sarkar sets as the guiding framework
for his spfritual path, the eight-limbed yoga of Patanjali (to which he has added some innovations) and
the original Sixteen Points of AM (which summarise the entfre system of Sarkarian praxis). Within

131
these frameworks are embedded the various physical, psychological and spfritual disciplines designed
to facilitate the accelerated actualisation of a spfritual aspfrant's full potential.

5.2 Soteriological Goals

Sarkar distinguishes mukti from moksa and hierarchically positions them in order of spiritual ultimacy,
seeing mukti as the penultimate state of merger with saguria brahma (qualified cosmic consciousness)
and moksa as ultimate merger with nirguria brahma (non-qualified cosmic consciousness). In terms of
soteriological finality, moksa is superior to mukti, and nirguria brahma has greater ultimacy than
saguria brahma. This is in keeping with the fact that Sarkar subordinates sakti (operative principle) to
siva (consciousness): siva unqualified by sakti is nirguria brahma, and when qualified by sakti, is
saguria brahma. In both mukti and moksa, the binding and qualifying influence of prakrti weakens
until it finally (1) becomes minimally active, acting only through its sentient force (sattvaguria) in the
case of mukti, and (2) dissolves totally into parama purusa and becomes dormant in the case of moksa.

Mukti arui Savikalpa Samddhi

Mukti is achieved when the spfritual aspfrant, after intense effort and with proper techniques, realises
the state of savikalpa samddhi (trance of determinate absorption) without remainder of 'seeds'
(nirbija). Sarkar equates savikalpa samddhi with samprajfidta samddhi ('proper and exceUent
knowledge'), a term used in the Yoga Sdtra of Pataiijali (ca. second - third century CE).' (Connections
between Sarkar's and Patanjali's articulation of spfritual praxis will be explored in Chapter 7.) The
term "seeds' refers to the accumulated potential reactions in the mind known as sarnskdras, which
serve to generate a sense of separate ego and to draw a person into continued existence within a
limited physical body-mind so that these seeds can be expressed and exhausted. When the aspfrant
attains savikalpa samddhi with 'seeds' (sabija), he or she experiences a temporary union with saguria
brahma before retuming to normal consciousness by the force of unexhausted sarriskdras. In Sarkar's
teachings, it is only with the total exhaustion of sarriskdras through either their natural expression in
the course of daily life, disciplined practice of meditation (in particular the fu-st lesson of sahaja yoga),
or selfless service and sacrifice, that permanent attainment of nirbija savikalpa samddhi is possible.
This permanent realisation is mukti or liberation. When this happens, the spiritual aspfrant will no
longer be able to maintain his or her physical existence, and essentially 'dies' so as to merge his or her
unit mind with cosmic mind (synonymous with saguria brahma).
In AS, Sarkar describes the attainment of savikalpa samddhi tersely:

When the aham and the citta merge into the Macrocosmic Mahat, the merger is called
saguridsthiti or savikalpa samddhi ... The state of utter destruction of the citta and the

' AMI, p. 670.

132
 aham and the state of all-pervasiveness of the mahat constitute saguridsthiti [the state
of transcendentality], or savikalpa samddhi [the trance of determinate absorption].

As seen in the previous chapter, citta is the objective mind consisting of cmde, subtle, and causal
layers sub-divided into five kosas of sequentially increasing subtlety. Citta is the 'done I' or 'objective
r portion of the mind that identifies itself with the various extemal sense objects reflecting on itself. It
is spoken of as a mental plate that assimilates the vibrational waves (tanmdtras) of extemally-existing
physical or internally-produced mental objects by taking thefr characteristics of form and colour, taste,
smell, touch, or sound. Aham is the subjective mind that has a sense of doer-ship, and constitutes the
ego-self of the individual. This subjective portion of the mind feels that it is the experiencer behind the
experience and apparently substantiates the existence of objects. When citta and aham are totally
dissolved into their cause (mahat), a process Sarkar terms pralaya or praridsa ('utter destmction'), the
mind enters into ontological oneness with the cosmic mahat the vast pervasive sense of pure 'I'
feeling that witnesses all the happenings and entities in the universe. In this state there is no longer any
sense of duality between self and the world:

If, through sddhand, people can merge thefr unit minds with the Cosmic Mind of
Parama Purusa, then the unit minds themselves become the Cosmic Mind; their
individual entities are merged in that Cosmic "I". In that condition, there remains
nothing outside. Thus, there is no longer any possibility of physical or psychic clash
with any extemal entity or object. All objects, all ideas, arise out of one's mind. This
is the state of liberation a state of cosmic bliss far above the domain of mundane
pleasures and pains.'

From the above, it appears that the state of savikalpa samddhi is one of non-duality between self and
the universe, accompanied by a subtle pervasive bliss and an insight-knowledge that all ideas and
objects emanate from one's mind. This concurs well with the phenomenology of spirituo-intuitional
knowledge discussed in the preceding chapter, whereby a person attaining such knowledge becomes
'the knower of all objectivities'" (presumably referring to all physical and mental objects of the
universe). Sarkar claims that such knowledge acquired through mastery of savikalpa samddhi is
synonymous with "complete omniscience' (rtambhard tatra prajda), an attainment made possible by
close proximity of the expanded mind to the shining immaculate cognisance of nirguria brahma? (A
deeper discussion on the nature of omniscient or spirituo-intuitional knowledge has already been
offered in Chapter 4, subsection 4.2.3; the process of mind transformation leading to attainment of this
knowledge will be covered in Chapter 6.)
Elsewhere, Sarkar mentions that while there is no duality between self and the world, a highly
refined duality still exists between self and cosmic consciousness. This subtie duality is characterised

^A5, pp. 14-15.

^NSS, p. 224
"AM/Parts 5-8, p. 552.
133
by the feeling that 'I am He' wherein there remain two entities 'I' and 'He' connected by a sense of
"am'.* This statement concurs with Sarkar's cosmogony, in which he affrnns that the cosmic mahat is
a theoretically delimited form of the cosmic consciousness wherein the sense of 'I am' is present.
Thus a union with cosmic mahat would necessarily imply the presence of 'F feeling, however subtle
and vast, which separates one from pure, self-less consciousness. Of this sense of cosmic self Sarkar
says:

Savikalpa samddhi or determinate suspension comprises the fullness of vidyd prakrti

(introversive force); that is, the full establishment of the introversive momentum ... -
the absence of any extroversive force (avidyd), and total cessation of the extroversive
momentum. In such a state, the ego not only exists, it exists in its total fullness and
completeness. This very ego in its Brahma-ic mood evolves the universe, in its Vistiu-
ic mood it preserves the universe, and in its ,^iva-ic mood, it desfroys the universe.

The presence of a vastiy expanded yet subtie ego-sense concurs with the observation that
Sarkar sees samprajfidta samddhi (= savikalpa samddhi) as a state where the "unit citta is converted
into Cognitive Faculty and thus the vikalpdtmaka action of the mind is suspended, although the
sarrikalpdtmaka state of mind is still quite active'.* Sarkar defines sarrikalpdtmaka as that state of
mind when a resolution or decision to perform an action is made but not materialised. It describes a
purely subjective mental action. Vikalpdtmaka is that state of mind in which the sarnkalpa or
resolution to act is objectively materialised in the external world. Hence samprajfidta samddhi
appears to be describing a cognisant state of mind wherein no physical or verbal action can be
performed but mental action is still possible. In comparison, Sarkar says that in savikalpa samddhi the
vikalpdtmaka action of the mind has stopped and the samkalpdtmaka function is only 'nominally
active'.' Thus, the descriptions of samprajfidta samddhi and savikalpa samddhi match up quite well.
More importantiy, the claim of nominal mental activity in samprajfid or savikalpa samddhi is
consistent with the earlier claim (in the preceding paragraph) that a highly subtle and expanded sense
of self is still present in savikalpa samddhi.
Apart from a realisation of oneness with the cosmic entity, the attainment of savikalpa or
samprajfidta samddhi confers upon the practitioner several other benefits: (1) 'requital of reactive
momenta', wherein 'afflictions due to defective cognition gradually disappear'; (2) 'loosening of the
bondages of reactions', wherein one no longer accumulates reactions to actions newly performed; and
(3) "movement towards the undifferentiated state of Cognition', wherein full Self-knowledge
(dtmajfidna) is gradually being expressed as one arrives at close proximity to the resplendent clarity of

^ AMP Part 6, p. 390.

^NKS,p.\%.
'55Part3,pp. 32-33.
* AMP Part 5, p. 313.
' Ibid
134
nirguria brahma.'^ It is also possible for a sddhaka who attains mastery over savikalpa samddhi to
acqufre some or all of the occult powers (vibhutis) normally attributed to the cosmic mind. (These
powers are discussed under the headings of 'guru' in section 5.2 and of 'higher wisdom: abhinnd and
tevijjd' in section 7.4.)

Moksa and Nirvikalpa Samddhi

Moksa is a higher soteriological goal than mukti and is said to be the summum bonum of Ananda
Marga praxis. Sarkar describes it on several occasions as the 'Supreme Stance''^ of spiritual practice.
Moksa is the permanent and irreversible attainment of nirvikalpa samddhi without "seeds' (nirbija),
that is, without any remainder of unexhausted sarriskdras. Nirvikalpa samddhi is a state beyond
savikalpa samddhi and is seen to be the merger of the mind into cosmic consciousness, an ineffable
and totally franscendent state beyond the periphery of cosmic mind. It has been equated to three other
terms, asamprajfidta samddhi or 'supraconscious ecstasy'," sahajdvasthd or 'natural state', and
brahmasadbhdva or 'God-realisation','" which appear to be synonyms of nirvikalpa samddhi. Sarkar
describes nirvikalpa samddhi thus:

When the mahat merges into the Atman, it is called nirguriasthiti (state of
objectiessness) or nirvikalpa samddhi (the trance of determinate absorption, or total
suspension of the mind) ... The totally-absorbed state of the mahat, after merging that
"I" feeling in the Citisakti [Cognitive Principle] - rather than doing the sddhand of
installing the mahat in the Macrocosmic Mahat - is nirguriasthiti or nirvikalpa
samddhi... This state is verbally inexpressible,... it is not mentally apprehensible.'^

Sarkar sees the state of nirvikalpa samddhi as a state of absolute vacuity, where the mind has been
utterly desfroyed. Though the mind does not apprehend or experience anything in that state (for mind
has been desfroyed), it is nevertheless a state of absolute and ineffable bliss that can be verified by the
spiritual aspirant immediately after the event:

In this state of absolute vacuity, the spfritual waves of exhilaration that fill the unit
entity still continue to flow and trail on for some time even after that state of vacuity,
that is, after the mind retums due to unserved sarriskdras ... These very trailing waves

'°AM/, pp. 670-671.

" Sarkar warns that it is at this stage that downfall is likely to occur due to pride and ego-grasping of such
powers by the sddhaka. To progress further on the path, fiill surrender of the self is imperative.
'^ TPRS, p. 22.
" DOr Vol. 2, p. 124. The English translation is from Feuerstein, The Yoga Tradition: Its History, Literature,
Philosophy and Practice (Prescott: Hohm Press, 1998), p. 601.
'*Ibid. The Englishfranslationfor sahajdvasthd is from The Yoga Tradition, p. 494, and that for
brahmasadbhdva is from A^55, p. 208. Cf. P. N. Tiwari, 'Kablr's Devotionalism', in G. M. Bailey and I.
Kesarcodi-Watson (eds.), Bhakti Studies (Delhi: Sterling Publications, 1992), pp. 159-181. Tiwari states that
Kabir offers a model of spiritual practice termed sahaja sddhand (easy or natural method), which is said to lead
one to the mystical trance of sahaja samddhi. On sahaja, Tiwari quotes a commentary on Kablr's text,
Kabirvarii: 'Sahaja is beyond happiness, dualism, the five sense, beyond sensuality:/It is the destruction of the
gurias Jt\i& awareness of one Brahman within one's consciousness ... /these constitute the sahaja state' (p. 167).
" A 5 , p. 15.
135
 of exhilaration and joyous exuberance keep reminding the "mindful" sddhaka
[intuitional practitioner] that his or her "mindless" state had been one of absolute
bUss.'*

In nirvikalpa samddhi, both the vikalpdtmaka and samkalpdtmaka functions of the mind have
completely ceased; as the mind '... loses psychic vitality, the nerve cells, nerve fibres and sense
organs also stop functioning'.
While this state is achieved only temporarily when the spiritual aspfrant still possesses
unexhausted sarriskdras (sabija nirvikalpa samddhi), it is possible for him or her to fully exhaust those
sarriskdras and finally merge into cosmic consciousness permanentiy. As in the attainment of mukti,
realisation of moksa can be speeded up by performing selfless service and sacrifice as means to
exhausting unserved sarriskdras.
In terms of meditative praxis, this ultimate state is attained only through untainted devotional
self-surrender to the divine consciousness, parama purusa. The grace (krpd) of the guru is
instrumental in this endeavour of self-surrender, as it is only by the physical form and presence of the
guru - the human embodiment of the infinite, formless brahma - that devotion can be aroused and
perfected. As mentioned in Chapter 3, the aspect of brahma that manifests as the human guru is
known as tdraka brahma, the 'liberating cosmic entity' that serves as the devotee's personal God
psychologically and the aspfrant's spfritual master physically. Tdraka brahma is Sarkar's altemative
to the Indian notion of avatdra, and is regarded by him as the bridge between nirguria and saguria
brahma, the unmanifest and the manifest.
Sarkar's nirvikalpa samddhi can be equated with spiritual knowledge, described in Chapter 4.
The two states share similar features of total non-duality between the knower and the known, between
self and cosmic consciousness. While Sarkar does not give much description of nirvikalpa samddhi
(and by extension, moksa), he does speak much about the qualities and features of cosmic
consciousness. This can provide us with clues to the nature and phenomenological features of the
nirvikalpa samddhi experience, and give us an insight into the soteriological praxis involved in
realising this state. This is possible since nirvikalpa samddhi is the state of oneness with cosmic
consciousness, and becoming one with cosmic consciousness would necessarily imply becoming one
with its nature and features.
In Sarkar's texts, the nature of cosmic consciousness is often depicted in terms of unsurpassed
luminosity, wherein 'His effulgence outshines even the sun's radiance.''* Sarkar says:

The sun is not jyotisvarupa (characteristically self-effulgent), it is He alone who is

jyotisvarupa. In His radiance, there is depth but no severity; there is sweetness but no
harshness. Observe His calm brilliance in the firmament of your heart ..."

'*A5, p. 16.
"A5, p. 16.
'* AM/Parts 5-8, p. 370.
"Ibid
136
 In every created entity there exists the existential-1 feeling and the ever-wakeful
presence of that Supreme Effulgent Entity.^

From this it appears that Sarkar sees cosmic consciousness in terms of profound 'radiance',
"sweetness', "calm brilliance', 'ever-wakeful presence' that exists in the depths of one's heart. He also
describes cosmic consciousness as akhanda cidaikarasa brahma, the 'unending flow of cognisance
that is brahma'; as siva, 'witnessing consciousness'; as purusa, 'the witness-ship that lies quiescent in
every entity'; and as dtman, 'that which is omni-telepathic'.^' These descriptions portray cosmic
consciousness as having the capacity to observe and illuminate the presence of various objects within
its ever-dynamic cognitive field. The precise meaning of the term 'omni-telepathic entity' is made
clear in the following passage (partly quoted in Chapter 4):

A sincere spiritual aspfrant understands that Parama Purusa is the Prati bodhasatthd
(Omni-telepathic Entity). What does this mean? Mind is the perceiver and the
apparent knower of objects. The subjective emanations from this perceiving mind are
finaUy reflected in the Cognitive Faculty. Hence the Cognitive Faculty is called the
Omni-telepathic Entity. Only when psychic emanations are reflected on the cognitive
plate can one acquire some kind of intellectual knowledge. The Omni-telepathic Entity
is like a mirror ... As this Entity is free from the bondage of mind, obviously He is not
bound by spatial, temporal and personal bondages, and hence is not subject to waxing
or waning.

So it appears that dtman = siva = purusa, which is in essence parama purusa or brahma, is omni-
telepathic because everything that the mind perceives or thinks is instantiy reflected on the flowing,
mirror-like field of awareness that is dtman. The mirror-like nature of the dtman is clearly described
by Sarkar:

In spite of being alone and companionless, the Atman appears to be objectivated due to
the involvement of the mind with objects. It is like a mirror; if you place a red flower
in front of the mirror, the mirror will also become red; if you place a yellow flower
before it, it will tum yellow. Although intrinsically the mirror does not undergo any
change, apparently it will look either red or yellow. In the proximity of objects the
condition of the Atman, qualified by the mind, intellect and body, is similar to that of
the colourless mirror with various objects before it.^'

The above indicates that the experience of nirvikalpa samddhi, a state of oneness with cosmic
consciousness, is necessarily characterised by the salient features of that very consciousness -
radiance, sweetness, calm brilliance, ever-wakeful presence, and dynamic mirror-like awareness. It is
possible that the descriptive terms 'radiance' and 'brilliance' are merely metaphors for clear

™AM/Parts5-8, p.435.
^'A5, p.l.
^^ AM/Parts 5-8, p. 557.
"AM/Parts5-8, p. 325.
137
awareness, which concurs weU with the sense conveyed by the term 'ever-wakeful presence'. In this
case, nirvikalpa samddhi would be an experience of unequalled, illuminating, wakeful awareness,
accompanied by a 'depth' and 'sweetness' free from any 'harshness'. By extension, moksa would be a
permanent abidance in this dynamic state of luminous cognisance and sweetness, free of all bondages
of mind and body.
One anomaly that surrounds this interpretation is an earlier quote and description of nirvikalpa
samddhi as a state of 'vacuity' and 'objectiessness' entirely beyond the scope of the mind. This
suggests that the experience is one of non-cognisance and non-awareness, one in which 'the lights go
out' and nothing can be apprehended. It may be that it is better described as a non-experience or a
contentless experience. However, in the same sutra, Sarkar takes pains to assert that, far from being a
nihilistic, contentless non-experience, nirvikalpa samddhi is an experience that is full of absolute bliss,
exhilaration, and joyous exuberance, and appears vacuous only from the point of view of the mind that
fails to grasp and objectify that infinite state. For Sarkar, an infinite, objectless, and blissful
cognisance that stands as the ultimate spiritual state, while difficult to conceive and even more
difficult to describe, can nevertheless be experienced through proper spiritual practices and through
selfless devotion.
Another clue that points to the argument that nirvikalpa samddhi is not a state of empty
unconsciousness comes from Sarkar himself. In AV, he describes the experience of nirvikalpa
samddhi in another way, with reference to the Vaisnava notions of tildbhdva, the playful sporting
stance of cosmic purusa, and nityabhdva, the original non-qualified stance of cosmic purusa?* Sarkar
says that tildbhdva is the stance of parama purusa when it is "continuing the creation along the
processes of sadcara and pratisaficara'}^ In other words, nirguria brahma abides in its tildbhdva at
the time when a localised portion of itself is being qualified into saguria brahma, and subsequently
into the quinquelemental and living universe. As for nityabhdva, he goes on to say that ' ... in
nityabhdva, this varied expression is conspicuously absent. ... [and] Purusa remains in His original
stance, original rank, even though He is the source of this entire creation.'^* Thus, a sddhaka who has
attained nirvikalpa samddhi, a state of oneness with nirguria brahma (= parama purusa), would
similarly experience that ultimate state in two ways - from the perspective of nityabhdva or tildbhdva.
Sarkar explains:

When the ... sddhaka (being associated with Purusottama [Nucleus Consciousness] )
looks at this universe, he sees the universe with men and things and the various
movements and actions. He will see different pictures at different angles, although he
will look at the same thing from the same place. In the fu-st case, he will see that
Saguria Brahma, Purusottama, Bhagavdn and the universe are all non-existent, there
being only one Supreme Entity - infinite, without any beginning or end, all-pervading
- only Nirguria Brahma. He is in His original rank - nityabhdva. In the second case.

^^AyPart33,pp.60-61.
^'AVPart33,p. 60.
^*AVPart33,pp.60-61.
138
 he sees the universe with people and other living and non-Uving beings. He sees the
universe, with all the varied and kaleidoscopic creation. Which of the two is better is
difficult to sav because without both of these aspects, it is not possible to realise the
madhura bhdva [sweet stance] of Parama Purusa}^

From Sarkar's description, in the passage quoted above, of the two aspects of nirvikalpa
samddhi, it appears that this ultimate attainment beyond the scope of the mind is not an inert and void
state of unconsciousness. Rather, it is one of total clarity and cognisance, with or without the manifold
phenomenal expressions. Furthermore, and perhaps more importantly, Sarkar suggests, in the above
passage, that it is possible for a living practitioner to experience nirvikalpa samddhi in both Tildbhdva
and nityabhdva, and that abiding in both perspectives without prejudicing one or the other enables the
practitioner to realise the madhura bhdva of parama purusa. Could it be that madhura bhdva
constitutes the living experience of a fivan-mukta, a fully liberated being while still in the mortal
frame? It is to this issue of fivan-mukta and the possibility of flvan-mukti as the 'thfrd' soteriological
goal of AM that we now tum.

The 'Third State' of Jivanmuktil

An important and interesting issue that has often been debated within the Indian spiritual tradition, and
advocated by Sarikara's Advaita Vedanta school, is the concept of flvanmukti, or 'living liberation'.
According to exponents of the concept of flvanmukti, it is possible to gain liberation or full realisation
of characterless dtman, even while still embodied. The spiritual aspirant who has realised such
liberation is known as a fivanmukta?^ In Sarkar's texts, there is no mention of this concept. Sarkar
most frequently discusses realisation of the highest soteriological goals (mukti and moksa) and the
stages leading up to them in terms of degrees of unification with parama purusa. He does not make it
clear whether one can realise mukti and moksa while still embodied, and whether they can remain as
stable and permanent states throughout one's mortal life. While the foregoing discussion suggests that
mukti and moksa can be achieved only post-mortem, necessitating relinquishment of the /7ra/:rri-bound
physical body, there are passages suggesting that Sarkar may have been alluding to some kind of 'third
state' (for want of a better word) or a state of embodied Wheration, flvanmukti.
Of a sddhaka who has attained the summum bonum of spiritual practice, he says:

When one is ensconced in the exalted state due to the grace of Guru, what stage does
one's intuition reach? What sort of realisation does one attain? One discovers the
divine play of the Infinite Entity in each and every finite manifestation. One realises
that the Infinite Entity, who is ever present in His vast cosmic stance, is also ever

^'AVPart 33, p. 61. Underline mine.

^ See e.g. Lance E. Nelson, 'Living Liberation in Saiikara and Classical Advaita: Sharing the Holy Waiting of
God', in Andrew Fort and Patricia Y. Mumme (eds.). Living Liberation in Hindu Thought (Albany: State
University of New York Press, 1996), pp. 17-62. Other Vedanta schools such as ViSigtadvaita Vedanta and
Dvaita Vedanta reject Sarikara's view offlvanmukti,offering altemative views of liberation in accordance with
their respective ontological commitments.
139
 present in every molecule and atom. One experiences that the entfre universe is
vibrated and invigorated with His unending cosmic flow. Every entity of this universe,
big and small, every minute expression of pain and pleasure of the numerous
microcosms, lie within His vast ocean of cosmic bliss. ... One reahzes that the
Supreme Cognitive Faculty resides in His immutable form whUe simultaneously
undertaking His tumultuous macrocosmic creation, and is thus the supreme
desideratum of every finite entity. ...

... Behind this playful stance of the Cosmic Entity lies His eternal immutable stance,
which is a passive witness to the everchanging forms of His macropsychic
manifestation. When devotees see His mutable forms with genuine spiritual vision
they realize that they are already ensconced in His immutable stance. This is the state
of supreme realisation. In this state the miseries caused by the binding fetters vanish
and the sddhakas become illuminated by the sweet touch of the playful, blissful,
immutable Parama Purusa. This is the supreme spiritual fulfilment.

The above passage suggests that the "state of supreme realisation' and 'supreme spiritual fulfilment'
consists in being fully immersed in a passive pristine awareness of infinite scope while simultaneously
embracing every changing object, every molecule and atom, every living being, and every experience
of individual pain and pleasure as vibrative, 'playful', and 'blissful' expressions of that very same
awareness. In the same passage, Sarkar does not give a formal term to designate this ultimate state, a
state that appears to contain elements of both tildbhdva and nityabhdva. (These two terms have been
discussed under the last heading of nirvikalpa samddhi.) It is tildbhdva in the sense that phenomenal
objects - thoughts or things - are present within the field of awareness. It is nityabhdva in the sense
that the meditator has dissolved into the 'immutable', "passive' witnessing stance of supreme
cognisance. Thus, it is apparent that this ultimate state of spiritual realisation of which Sarkar speaks is
none other than madhura bhdva, the stance of sweet, unconfined and blissful awareness brought forth
by the realisation of nirvikalpa samddhi in its two aspects of tildbhdva and nityabhdva. Perhaps, this
stance of madhura bhdva in its permanent form is the 'third state', the stance of aflvan-mukta.
Again, Sarkar speaks of establishment in the ultimate consciousness in terms reminiscent of
embodied liberation:

When a spiritual aspirant gets adequately acquainted with His Blissful Entity, we say
that he is established in the Supreme Consciousness. At that stage, both inside and
outside attain unity. Mind then remains aloof from the atfraction of trifles, and real
acquaintance is made with the Supreme Being. While the body remains in the mortal
world, the soul is merged in the Supreme Soul?'

Whether the last sentence quoted above refers to a temporary attainment of nirvikalpa samddhi while
in the mortal state, or to a permanent realisation offlvan-mukti,is not entirely clear. The next passage
suggests that the highest fulfilment for a sddhaka is an embodied state of permanent realisation:

^' AMI Parts 5-8, pp. 482-483.

'° AM/Parts 5-8, p. 483.
140
 The unit entities in which His divine expression is fiiUy manifest are said to have
attained the height offulfilment physically, psychically and spfritually. They realise in
the core of thefr hearts that the entire human life is a "sddhand". Each and every
mundane action of thefrs, such as eating, sleeping, dressing and even breathing, are an
integral part of that "sddhand".^^

In this case, it appears that Sarkar does admit the possibility of embodied liberation, and that this
attainment, closely linked to the realisation of nirvikalpa samddhi, is ultimate for a practitioner of AM.

Anindydnanda Rasa Samddhi

Sarkar mentions another meditative state, termed anindydnanda rasa samddhi (unblemished flow of
bliss samddhi)?^ that may have an intimate link with the 'thfrd state' discussed above. He links
anindydnanda rasa samddhi with the hormonal secretion of the pineal gland (associated with the
sahasrdra cakra) into the pituitary gland (associated with the djrid cakra). He says that if a sddhaka is
engaged in pure and sublime thinking at the time when the pineal hormone is secreted, the hormone
will be able to flow down the left side of the pituitary gland and from there, into plexuses (cakras),
glands and sub-glands, nerve fibres, nerve cells, veins and arteries below the djnd cakra. This
overflow of the pineal hormone (which Sarkar terms amrta, 'nectar') revitalises and imparts bliss to all
the lower cakras, making them healthier and stronger. If, on the other hand, the sddhaka is engrossed
in cmde or unwholesome thinking at the time of pineal secretion, the pineal hormone gets 'burnt up at
the pituitary plexus' and he or she does not experience any bliss at the lower cakras.^*
Sarkar describes the experience of anindydnanda rasa samddhi as follows:

At the time of pineal secretion a sddhaka goes into samddhi - he or she visualises or
experiences a kind of divine aura around the andhata cakra. The sddhaka realises that
he or she is experiencing a divine dip in the holy aura, and feels indescribable bliss in
the heart. In that exalted state of realisation, every object of this universe seems to be
extremely sweet, and one derives immense bliss, which no worldly object could ever
provide. The sun's rays, the moon beams, the land, the water, in fact everything,
appears to be emanating a continuous stream of blissful nectar. ... Even a swom enemy
appears to be very sweet at that time. Everything is sweet. ... Throughout the blissful
experience, a sweet taste is felt. ... In Vaisnava philosophy that stage of samddhi is
called madhura bhdva. In Tanfra it is called anindydnanda rasa samddhi.

The experience of inner sweetness (madhura) and the apparent perception of all things in the extemal
world as similarly sweet characterise this state of samddhi This is reminiscent of an earlier
description with regard to the 'thfrd state' of AM soteriology, the stance of madhura bhdva, which has

" 55 Part 2, p. 10. Italics mine.

'^ AMI Parts 5-8, p. 431. Italics mine.
" Translation adapted from SPSSA, p. 265.
'"AMPPart4, p. 243.
'^ AMP, pp. 243-244.
141
both nityabhdva and Tildbhdva qualities and a profound sense of everything as playful, sweet
expressions of the divine. Like the 'thfrd state', attaining anindydnanda rasa samddhi also requires
the grace of the sadguru - the human manifestation of tdraka brahma:

The special characteristic of this samddhi is that it cannot be attained by one's own
personal efforts, but only through the grace of the Guru. ... When the all-merciful
Tdraka Brahma physically comes to earth in the form of a Sadguru, He helps
deserving sddhakas attain this type of samddhi Even when He is physically absent
from this world. He helps deserving persons attain this samddhi through other gurus.

Is it possible that anindydnanda rasa samddhi is phenomenologically identical to the 'third state' of
supreme spiritual fulfilment, albeit as a temporary version of the latter? If so, a permanent realisation
of anindydnanda rasa samddhi would be equivalent to the ontological and psychological state of a
flvanmukta, a fully liberated being whose body remains in the physical world but whose consciousness
is fully unbound, infinitely vast, and blissfuUy sweet.
Chandranath Kumar (1998), the oldest living disciple of Sarkar, who is highly regarded as an
accomplished yogi within AM, views flvan-mukta as a real possibility in the path of Tantric spiritual
practice. WhUe such a teaching may have been omitted or inconclusively described in Sarkar's
translated and published discourses, one cannot mle out the possibility of its having been taught to
various disciples and privately recorded by them. It is with such a possibility in mind that I have
consulted and given consideration to secondary and tertiary textual sources of AM. According to
Kumar (1998), aflvanmuktapurusa is 'one who has no attachment to his personality or to his personal
requirements'." He goes on to say:

They think of the Cosmic Entity all the time, even when they are not in meditation.
They can never think of themselves or thefr self-attached objects. That kind of person
can be caWedflvan-mukta.A realised soul means one who is capable of merging their
unit mind into that Cosmic Mind at will. That person has realised him, has realised
that Cosmic Existence.'*

Kumar regards a flvanmukta as one who has attained the highest state of nirbija nirvikalpa samddhi
while still embodied, who, in other words, has realised moksa in the physical body. He says that a
mo/:sa-realised person has freed himself or herself from the bondages of prakrti and may leave the
body at will, but that he or she may choose to remain embodied for a certain length of time if so
desired. This is achieved by the potential flvanmukta taking a resolve or vow to stay on in the
embodied state to fulfil certain unfinished tasks, in particular the self-imposed task of saving all beings
from bondages and elevating the human condition. It is possible to speculate that once nirvikalpa

^^ AMP Pan 4, p. 244.

Devashish Donald Acosta (ed.). When the Time Comes: Conversations with Acdrya Chandranath Kumar (San
German: Inner World Publications, 1998), p. 127.
^* Ibid, p. 121.
142
samddhi has been permanentiy attained (that is, moksa), the clear, reflexive, and mirror-like awareness
of infinite purusa shines through the mind in so powerful a way that all duality between the knower
and the known is fully dissolved - the flvan-mukta exists in a perpetual state of non-dual, boundless
awareness, free from any trace of separative ego and thus full of universal love. Kumar distinguishes
two classes offlvanmukta:ordinary spiritual aspfrants who have achieved moksa through practice, and
special liberated or perfected beings who manifest in the world for the sole purpose of bringing
salvation to the world. The first group of flvanmukta may still regress (but in a gradual way) if they
discontinue their regular spfritual practice and only make use of thefr occult powers to help others.
The second group of flvanmukta have no chance of regression, as they are divine manifestations
serving as media through which tdraka brahma (the liberator aspect of cosmic consciousness) works.
Such a manifestation can be equated with mahdsambhuti (discussed in Chapter 3), a great being
formed through the cosmogonic and evolutionary processes of brahmacakra in order to perform a
specific salvational role in the universe.
In relation to mukti, the penultimate goal, Kumar explains that a person who has attained sabija
nirvikalpa samddhi (the highest meditative state with remaining seeds of sarriskdras) and then passes
away is still to be considered as one who has realised mukti, not moksa. Such a person will have to be
rebom in order to complete his or her final task of mo^^a-realisation, though a human body is
definitely ensured. In this case, the person will be able to progress rapidly through the levels of
spiritual realisation with minimal effort.

Dhruvasmrti and Dharmamegha Samddhi

Sarkar mentions another state he calls dhruvasmrti or 'constant memory'. He defines this as a state
'when the memory becomes established, unfailing and spontaneous ... ' and regards it as 'an essential
prerequisite for spiritual samddhi and bliss'." In this case Sarkar is referring to constant
remembrance of, and ideation on, parama purusa achieved through diligent meditative practice. As
this state of dhruvdsmrti appears to necessitate at least a nominal degree of volitional effort, it does not
seem to be referring to the highest attainment of effortless liberation. It is more likely to be a state of
constant but natural mindfulness of the meditative object, a state conducive to subsequent immersion
in savikalpa samddhi Elsewhere in the same source, Sarkar equates dhruvasmrti with a type of
meditative absorption he calls dharmamegha samddhi or 'tmth-cloud' samddhi:

So when, through the symphony of meditation and japa, the rhythm of life persists, it
is caUed dharmamegha samddhi ... then loss of memory does not occur. ... This state
is called dhruvdsmrti, or "infallible, etemal memory."""

"yp, pp. 50-51.

"°yp, pp. 193-194.
143
hi another source, he speaks of the term 'dharmamegha' as referring to a process of mental expansion,
much like a cloud (metaphor for the unit mind) attempts to grow and fiU up the entire sky (metaphor
for cosmic consciousness), bringing all other clouds under its sway. Seen in this light,
dharmamegha samddhi appears to be a state in which the mind is fumly joined to the flowing process
of expansion, or has vastiy expanded but not yet merged into the cosmic mind. That this state of
dhruvdsmrti or dharmamegha samddhi immediately precedes the attainment of savikalpa samddhi can
be seen from another of Sarkar's discourses, in which he gives his own interpretation of the Buddha's
noble eightfold path. In this discourse, Sarkar equates dhruvasmrti or dharmamegha samddhi with the
seventh step of the eightfold path, right mindfulness (samyak smrti):

The person who is established ... in samyak smrti, that is, who never forgets the Lord,
is called - that particular state of mind is called dharmamegha samddhi, that is, the
person is established in proper smrti. That bliss enjoyed by the spiritual aspirant is
called dharmamegha samddhi.

He goes on to say that the attainment of savikalpa samddhi and nirvikalpa samddhi follows on from
the meditator's establishment in samyak smrti, an attainment he equates with samyak samddhi, the
eighth and final step of the Buddha's eightfold path."' Hence, it follows from the above that
establishment in dhruvdsmrti or dharmamegha samddhi precedes the attainment of savikalpa samddhi,
and culminates in the realisation of nirvikalpa samddhi.

Summary of AM Soteriological Goals

In summary, the soteriological attainments of AM as expounded by Sarkar can be tabulated as follows:

Attainment Equivalent Terms Permanent Goal

Dharmamegha samddhi Dhruvasmrti, samyak smrti Vastly expanded mind, but yet
to be merged into cosmic mind

Savikalpa samddhi Samprajfidta samddhi Mukti

(unit mind merged into cosmic
mind)

Nirvikalpa samddhi Asamprajfidta samddhi, Moksa

sahajdvasthd, and (unit mind merged into cosmic
brahmasadbhdva consciousness)

7 Anindydnanda rasa Madhura bhdva, 'state of ? Jivanmukti

samddhi supreme realisation' and (permanent state of embodied
"supreme spiritual fulfilment' liberation)

"' AMP Part 6, p. 390.

"MVPart30,p.65.
"'AyPart30,pp.65-66.
144
 Mukti (= permanent savikalpa samddhi) and moksa (= permanent nirvikalpa samddhi) thus
form the two pinnacles to which the entfre soteriological enterprise of Sarkarian Tantra is directed,
while a third state, flvanmukti, is a possible ultimate realisation attainable by the sddhaka of AM.
These soteriological goals are based solidly on Sarkar's ontological and theological views regarding
saguria-nirguria-tdraka brahma and brahmacakra. Also, each of them depends on specific spiritual
and meditative practices designed to lead to it. These practices will be the focus of the latter half of
Chapter 5 and the whole of Chapter 6.

5.3 The Fundamentals

The fundamentals of spiritual practice in Sarkar's AM are based solidly on traditional Tantric
conception and praxis, namely (1) the cmcial need for a perfect and fully-realised guru; (2) the
necessity for Tantric diksd or initiation; (3) the essential role of the mantra in awakening one's
dormant spirituality and elevating one's mind to its highest level and deepest state of realisation; and
(4) the essence of AM ideology visually represented in the yantra (symbolic diagram) of AM, the
prafika. These fundamentals will be discussed in tum under separate headings.

Guru
Sarkar attaches great importance to the role of the guru and the event of diksd ('initiation') in the
overall soteriological joumey of the spiritual aspfrant. Identifying the guru with brahma, Sarkar sees
him as the transmitter of divine knowledge in the form of spfritual and meditative practices to the
aspfrant who has developed intense desfre for spfritual enlightenment. This transmission takes place
formally through the act of diksd, an initiation of the disciple-to-be into the practice of Tantric
meditation. Instructions on meditation technique are usually accompanied by the prescribing of a
personal mantra (a mental tool consisting of Sanskrit syllables to be silently repeated). Sarkar
believes that the vibration of the mantra has to suit the overall bio-psychological make-up of the
individual and is to be carefully selected for optimal efficacy. He has authorised his trained dcdryas
(spfritual instmctors) to initiate potential students in his absence, emphasising that it is the 'vibrational
force' of the guru (i.e. Sarkar himself), present in the mantra and working through the medium of the
dcdrya, that actually performs the initiation.
Sarkar defines the term guru as "one who dispels darkness', darkness that prevails in the
physical, psychic, and spiritual strata of human existence. In order to fulfil his or her role as one who
dispels physical, psychic, and spiritual darkness, the guru has to possess several essential qualities.
First, the guru has to be conversant with the most precise details of sddhand or "spiritual practice', and
able to teach these practices to others. He or she must also have 'thorough and authentic scriptural
knowledge'"" as well as mastery of the different languages in which the scriptures are written. He or
she needs to possess comprehensive knowledge and intellect and be able to convince others to take up

""D07'VO1.2, p.227.
145
the path of spfrituality. In Sarkar's view, the guru also 'must possess the capacity both to punish, and
to love, or bless, his disciples'; for 'love and punishment should go together, and the degree of
punishment should never exceed the degree of love'.
Such an ideal guru in the spfritual realm is also termed a mahdkaula, one who not only has
elevated and established his or her own kuridalini at the highest level, but also possesses the capacity
to lead others to the same exalted position. Sarkar considers Sadasiva and Krsna as two historical
personalities who could be called mahdkaulas. They are also said to be the two previous
manifestations of tdraka brahma (see Chapter 3), who is the personalised aspect of brahma that
liberates living beings and guides global human society toward morality and bliss. In this connection.
Sarkar mentions the possibility of varying degrees (koti) of pure consciousness (brahma) manifesting
in unit beings (flva), resulting in divine manifestations of different capacities and powers. In line
with his cosmology, Sarkar sees all unit beings as flvakoti - unit manifestations of consciousness -
that possess ordinary levels of ability and potency available to any typical Uving entity. A greater
manifestation of the power of consciousness is said to be found in isvarakoti beings, who may be
gurus possessing a special power to accomplish tasks that are normally considered difficult or
impossible by flvas. Sarkar speaks of three grades of isvarakoti gurus in order of increasing power:
(1) kaldvatdra gurus, (2) amsdvatdra gurus, and (3) khanddvatdra gurus. These three grades of
isvarakoti gurus are said to have appeared in the world in good number, and to have carried out their
roles in various places and time periods before leaving the world. However, the highest grade of
manifestation is the brahmakoti or pdrridvatdra guru, who is the expression of the full power of
consciousness. Such a guru comes into the world in order to 'educate people, to create a Cosmic
vibration in the world - and that vibration continues to guide society as long as it exists.'"' The
brahmakoti or pdrridvatdra guru is thus synonymous with the mahdkaula, the human manifestation of
tdraka brahma. The isvarakoti gurus are also termed kaulas, spiritual personages who have realised
the 'secret' (kula) of self-realisation and who are able to impart that wisdom to others.
Hatiey (2000) suggests that for AM, the opposition of the two brahmakoti gurus, Sadasiva and
Krsna, is resolved by making Sarkar the latest incamation of tdraka brahma, with Sadasiva and Krstia
merged in his person."* The identification of Sarkar with tdraka brahma by his followers is" not
entirely without basis. An examination of Sarkar's discourses reveals that though he never explicitly
identifies himself with Sadasiva and Krgna combined, he does assert that 'only Brahma is the guru, no
one else'."' He goes on to say that 'Brahma alone dfrects the units to the path of emancipation through
the media of different receptacles or bodies';'" and that 'the one formless, beginningless and infinite

"'DOr Vol.2, p. 228.

Prabhat Rafijan Sarkar, Discourses on Mahdbhdrata (Second Edition), trans. Vijayananda (Calcutta: Ananda
Marga Pracaraka Sanjgha, 1991), pp. 35-38.
*''Ibid, p. 37.
"* Hatley, The Dialectics of Bliss, p. 22.
" ' A 5 , p. 34.
""Ibid
146
Parama Brahma (Supreme Consciousness) ... alone has revealed Brahmavidyd (intuitional science) to
us through the medium of the name and form of Anandamurtiji'."
According to Sarkar, tdraka brahma is given the appellation bhagavdn, 'the Lord who
possesses the six bhagas (special attributes)'.'^ Thus, the sadguru, who is the human manifestation of
tdraka brahma is also honoured as bhagavdn, the Lord of aU bhaktas or devotees. Sarkar sees
bhagavdn as possessing the following qualities: (1) all vibhutis or supernatural powers, (2) virya or
vigour and commanding ability, (3) yasa or reputation (both positive and negative), (4) sri or charm,
(5) jfidna or non-dual knowledge of the dtman, and (6) vairdgya or non-attachment. In particular,
the vibhutis are eight in number and consist of (a) ariimd (ability to become minute), (b) mahimd
(abUity to become very large), (c) laghimd (ability to become very light), (d) isitva (abUity to
understand, witness and dfrect actions of all entities), (e) prakdmya (ability to assume any form), (f)
vasitva (ability to control forces of nature), (g) prdpti (ability to actualise any intent), and (h)
antarydmitva (ability to see into the nature of any entity).'" (These vibhutis will be discussed and
compared with thefr Buddhist counterparts in Chapter 7.)
Sarkar emphasises that in addition to the spiritual quaUfications listed above, the guru needs to
possess expertise in the psychic realm, which is cmder than the spiritual. The guru has to be 'aware of
the nature of the human mind - what it is made of, how it should be elevated step by step from cmde
to subtle, how all the unit minds can march together in unison towards the goal - in a word, he must
know both the theoretical and the applied sides of psychology'." Besides knowing the stmcture of
the mind, the guru needs to be 'conversant with the style in which the human mind functions, and also
in the method to control and guide it properly','* in other words, he must know the process of the mind
and how it can be trained and developed. As in the spiritual sphere, the guru has to be leamed in the
humanities and in all branches of human knowledge, so that he or she can teach and inspire others
most effectively.
In terms of the physical world, Sarkar sees the guru as teaching humanity the methods to solve
all worldly problems - 'problems with food, clothing, education and medical treatment'." To Sarkar,
a tme guru has to ensure that all mundane problems of his or her disciples are solved so that psychic
growth and spiritual progress can occur.
Followers of AM would argue that on all three counts listed above, Sarkar amply fits the role
of guru: he meets all the criteria in the physical, psychic and spiritual spheres. According to them,
Sarkar's spiritual ideology and praxis in the spfritual stratum, psychology and biopsychology in the
psychic stratum, Yogic exercises and treatment methods and Progressive UtUisation Theory in the

"CCPart2,p. 1.
'^ See SPSSA, p. 75.
" See SPSSA, pp. 75-76.
'*Ibid.
^^ DOT Vol 2, p. 230.
""Ibid
"Z)07'Vol.2, p.231.
147
physical stratum, all qualify him to be called a guru. Furthermore, AM porfrays Sarkar as a charming,
powerful guru who exhibits all the six attributes of bhagavdn and thus the focal point of devotion.
Sarkar mentions a range of other qualities (together with the several listed above) that a guru
should possess:

The kula guru ... must be modest, soberly dressed, and have right conduct, right
livelihood and a pure mind. In the spfritual field, he must be leamed in theory and
skilled in practice. It is not sufficient for the gum to be leamed in theory only. He
should be highly intellectual and benevolently inclined. He should lead a normal
family life; then only can he act as a preceptor to a person leading a normal family life
... He himself must be estabUshed in dhydna and other spfritual practices. He should
be well versed in theory and skilled in the practice of mantra. Mantra is that,
contemplation and meditation upon which leads to liberation from all worldly
bondages. The kula guru knows the mantras that have been proven and also knows
how these are applicable to individuals. The guru must govern the disciple and also
love him. Those who only administer to or only love the disciple are not worthy of the
dignified position.'*

It is interesting to note that Sarkar sees the family person instead of the celibate monastic as qualifying
for the role of guru. This is akin in spirit to the antinomian and anti-hierarchical character of Indian
Tantrism, in which distaste for class distinctions and priestly hegemony is evident. Also, Sarkar
stresses the importance of the mantra in meditation, in line with classical Tantric thinking.
In addition to his typology of gurus in terms of their degree of manifestation of cosmic
consciousness, Sarkar distinguishes three classes of gurus in terms of ability to guide their disciples to
the final goal. The first, adhama ('lowest or worst') guru, may give some discourses but is not
concemed with the conduct or progress of the disciple. He or she cannot impart anything lasting to the
disciple, and may even accept the disciple's offerings and later leave him or her.
The second, madhyama ('middling') guru, may impart some practices and guide the disciple
to some degree. Such a guru is not able to lead the disciple to the highest attainment because of either
his or her own lack of attainment or lack of effort in guiding the disciple on the proper path. He or she
is said to be able to influence another by the power of his or her vijndnamaya kosa or hirarimaya kosa,
the fourth and fifth layers of the mind respectively. A madhyama guru is able to exert the influence of
either (1) his or her vijndnamaya kosa over the atimdnasa kosa of the student, or (2) his or her
hirarimaya kosa over the vijfidnamaya kosa of the same. Sarkar applies the term gandharva vidyd to
the fu-st case, and the term daivi vidyd to the second case." A madhyama guru exercises gandharva
vidyd and daivi vidyd by means of eloquent, insightful speeches, and kirtana or chanting and the like.*"
The third, uttama prathama ('highest and best') guru, teaches the proper practices and ensures
with strict discipline and selfless love that the disciple follows them correctiy. Such a guru, also
known as a sadguru or 'immutable/ perfect master', acts to keep the disciple on the right path untU the

'*5P55A, p. 210.
"55Partl,p. 64.
148
final goal is reached.*' The only person that can claim to be sadguru is the human embodiment of
tdraka brahma himself, the mahdkaula (= brahmakoti or purridvatdra). The uttama prathama guru
exerts the power of the dtman (= purusa) over the hirarimaya kosa of the student, inspiring him or her
ftl

with spfritual bliss. This power of the dtman over the hirarimaya kosa is termed brahmavidyd.
In addition to these three forms of vidyd that a guru may exert on the disciple, Sarkar mentions
three other forms of kosa influence that he considers negative or unwholesome. First, he refers to the
influence of the atimdnasa kosa of one person over the manomaya kosa of another as rdksasi or
paisdcika vidyd ('demonic influence').*' This form of kosa influence is commonly practised by
practitioners of avidyd Tantra, who may use such powers for selfish or unwholesome motives.
Second, he applies the term bhuta vidyd ('hypnotism')*" to the influence of the manomaya kosa of one
person over the kdmamaya kosa of another. This is akin to the use of psychological suggestion by
powerful or charismatic personalities in order to mesmerise their audience. Third, Sarkar refers to the
influence of the kdmamaya kosa of one person over the annamaya kosa of another as 'the force of
physical attraction'.*'
The various types of gurus as conceived and discussed by Sarkar can be correlated and
tabulated as follows:

Classification 1 Classification 2 Classification 3

Isvarakoti guru: Kaula Adhama or madhyama guru

(1) kaldvatdra
(2) amsdvatdra
(3) khanddvatdra

Brahmakoti guru (or Mahdkaula - manifestation of Uttama prathama guru =

purridvatdra) = manifestation tdraka brahma. manifestation of tdraka
of tdraka brahma. brahma.

Diksd
The most important event in the spfritual joumey of an aspirant is diksd, or 'initiation'. This refers to
the transmission of spiritual energy and meditative technique from the guru to the disciple at a time
when the disciple is ready. It occurs only when the disciple-to-be has an intense urge to realise
brahma, the cosmic entity that is simultaneously the experience of limitiess and metempirical
happiness known as dnanda or 'bliss'. This intense spiritual desire is reciprocated when brahma, in

*" SS Part 1, p. 64 and SPSSA, p. 164.

*' SPSSA, pp. 208-209.
62•55Part l,p. 64.

63 Ibid.

Ibid.
Ibid.
149
the form and function of the living guru (embodied or otherwise), appears to the disciple and initiates
him or her onto the spfritual path.
Sarkar defines 'initiation' as 'resort to a new avenue of progress' and concedes that the
English word does not fully convey the meaning of the Sanskrit diksd.^ He borrows from classical
Tantra to define diksd thus:

The process which produces the capacity to realise the inner import of mantra and
which expedites the requital of the samskdras, or reactive momenta, is called diksd 67

Sarkar describes diksd as having two phases, vaidiki diksd and tdntriki diksd. He views vaidiki diksd
as the initial phase, when the spfritual aspirant is requesting divine guidance on the path of spfrituality.
This is the stage when the disciple-to-be first realises the need for spiritual practice and is sincerely
asking for God to guide the intellect 'unto the path of bliss, unto the path of supreme blessedness'.**
At this stage, there is as yet no transmission by the guru of the practical method for spiritual
development.
Tdntriki diksd is the second phase of initiation, when the disciple-to-be encounters the guru
and receives actual transmission of spfritual practice from him or her. Sarkar further divides tdntriki
diksd into three sub-phases: (1) diparii ('showing the torchlight'), (2) mantrdghdta ('hit of the
mantra'), and (3) mantra caitanya ('consciousness power of the mantra'). Diparii is the fransmission,
from guru to disciple, of the ethical disciplines of yama-niyama (social and personal codes of conduct)
and of the practice of suddhis (preparatory withdrawal processes). These disciplines and practices
help illuminate and pave the way for the mind to go deeper into its tme nature - pristine consciousness
- by creating a harmonious equilibrium within and without the mind. Regarding dipani, Sarkar says:

Before proceeding with the japa of the mantra, the torch light to guide the mind in a
proper frame and, during the process, psychic association with the meaning are
essential ... One cannot perceive any object howsoever valuable in a dark room.
Similarly, without this beacon, one cannot correctly make use of any mantra,
howsoever effective.*'

The second sub-phase, mantrdghdta, is the 'striking'and awakening effect of the mantra on
the sleeping kuridalirii of the disciple, which is transmitted to the disciple by the gum during diksd.
Sarkar believes that the acoustic vibrations of the mantra, when spoken dfrectiy by the guru to the
disciple or when later recited inwardly by the disciple, have the effect of arousing the dormant
spiritual potential lying at the base of the spine in the mulddhdra cakra. This potential (discussed in
Chapter 4) is the force of innate consciousness residing in the human body-mind system that awaits

**DOrVol.2, p. 143.
*'£)C»7Vol. 2. p. 142.
**DOrVol.2, p. 144.
*' SPSSA, p. 257.
150
awakening and full actualisation. For this to occur, the mantra used has to be a siddha mantra
('proven or effective mantra') so that a resonance between the acoustic roots of the manfra and the
mind of the disciple can be obtained. (The nature and functions of the mantra will be discussed in the
last part of this section).
Mantra caitanya, the third sub-phase of tdntriki diksd, is technically the movement of the
kuridalini up along the susumrid following application of the striking force of the mantra on the
kuridalirii. Sarkar defines mantra caitanya as ' ... the condition where, with the help of a particular
sabda ('sound'), a person establishes parallelism between his or her extemal physical vibration and his
or her intemal ectoplasmic vibration, and then raises this to the spiritual level'.'" In this parallelism,
the disciple begins to link his or her mind with the cosmic mind. Sarkar says:

When ... a person coincides his individual rhythmic vibration with the rhythmic
vibrations in the realm of this ... universe [made up of the five fundamental factors],
from that moment onwards his rhythms become vibrated with mantra caitanya ...
individual rhythms have to be made parallel to the Cosmic rhythms..."

In this way, the 'consciousness power' infused into the mantra and contained within it through the
spiritual force of the guru, is unleashed as the continual repetition of and ideation on the mantra
gradually synchronises the disciple's rhythm with the cosmic rhythm.

Mantra^^
Sarkar defines mantra as manandt tdrayet yastu sa mantrah parikirtitah. For this, he gives several
almost identical translations. The ffrst is 'that which, when contemplated on, leads to freedom from
[all sorts of] bondages is called a mantra'.^^ Another translation of the same phrase is 'that collection
of sounds meditation on which leads to liberation'.'" Yet another translation is 'mantra is that
particular word whose repetition or auto-suggestion or outer-suggestion helps the microcosm free
itself of all the fetters of physical and psychic life'." From these statements, it can be gathered that a
mantra is a word made up of a collection of sounds (sabdas) that has liberative potency when
contemplated by a spiritual practitioner. For Sarkar, every mantra is 'sonic or vibrational and is

™Z)OrVol. 1, p.49.
" Ibid
'^ For a detailed discussion on mantra in Tantrism, see Agehananda Bharati, The Tantric Tradition (London:
Rider and Company, 1965), pp. 101-163. Bharati explains mantra as follows: 'mantra is meaningful not in any
descriptive or even persuasive sense, but within the mystical universe of discourse. ... Mantra is verifiable not
by what it describes but by what it effects: if it creates that somewhat complex feeling-tone in the practising
person, which has found its expression in the bulk of mystical literature such as Tantra, then it is verified; or in
other words, the principle of verification of mantra lies in its emotive numinous effect as well as in the
corroboration of such effects in religious literature' (pp. 102-103). In Sarkar's terminology, the meaning of the
term 'bhava' or 'ideation' encompasses the "complex feeling-tone' or 'emotive numinous effect' mentioned by
Bharati.
"D07"Vol.2, p.42.
'^DOrVol. 1, p.48.
''^DOTVol 1, p. 69.
151
vibrating simultaneously in the Cosmic system and in the unit body'.'* A state called mantra siddhi is
reached when, ' ... with the help of a mantra, a person finally establishes the parallelism of the unit
ectoplasmic vibration with tiie Cosmic vibration'." It can be argued that this stage of mantra siddhi
is identical with the attainment of savikalpa samddhi, merger of unit and cosmic minds. In the process
of attaining mantra siddhi, a transition stage known as mantra caitanya occurs, which, as previously
discussed, forms the thfrd sub-phase of the initiation process, diksd, and occurs when the dormant
kuridalini is awakened and starts moving up the susumrid. It is possible that mantra caitanya occurs
each time the disciple meditates conscientiously following initiation, and manages to awaken the
power of the mantra during the period of meditation.
Sarkar makes it clear that for a mantra to be effective in the disciple's meditative practice, that
is, for mantra caitanya to occur, the selected mantra has to suit the sarnskdras of the individual
concemed. This is so that the disciple is able to more easily link his or her own physico-psychic
vibrations with the vibration of the cosmic mind. Additionally, the individual is to have feelings of
universal kinship with and love for the world, in order that inner-outer parallelism in the person can be
attained. Sarkar describes three intrinsic characteristics a mantra must have in order to be effective.
First, an effective mantra needs to be pulsative, that is, it has to be of two syllables to flow with the
rhythm of inhalation and exhalation of the breath. The rhythm of the mantra is thought to induce slow
and deep rhythmic breathing, which is in tum conducive to mental calmness and poise. Second, the
mantra needs to be incantative, that is, its acoustic properties have to be such that they can connect the
totality of physical, psychic, and spiritual vibrations of the individual (also termed jaivi satta or
"entitative rhythm') with the infinite, sfraight-line vibration of the cosmic mind (also termed bhumd
prdria or 'cosmic rhythm').'* To Sarkar, the most effective incantative rhythms are found in the
Sanskrit language, which is thought to originate from ancient yogis who discovered the fifty acoustic
roots of the Sanskrit language located in the fifty glands and sub-glands clustered around the cakras of
the human body. For Sarkar, an effective incantative mantra has to be in Sanskrit. Third, a potent
mantra also needs to be ideative, that is, it has to possess a specific meaning and associated feeling
that centre around the inseparability of the individual and the cosmic entity. Sarkar explains:

Idea is mental tendency ... and practice leads to expansion and attainment ... If one
repeatedly meditates on Parama Purusa, the continued association will cause the
curved psychic waves of the individual to approximate to the sfraight radiation of the
Cosmic Consciousness ... The Supreme knowledge "Aham Brahmdsmi" (I am
Brahma) leads out of all ignorance; nothing else can cause enUghtenment. But if this
tmth remains confined to utterance alone it is worthless. The ideational flow in the
"Soham" mantra has to be imbibed by continuous suggestions, and this is not possible
by mere repetition. This psycho-spiritual principle is the discovery of Tantra ... The
Tdntrikas assert that mere japa [repetition] cannot prove fmitful unless there is

'*£>OrVol. 1, p.49.
"DOTVol. l,p.49.
'* SPSSA, p. 259.
152
 rhythmic parallelism in the waves of the unit mind and the flow of the mantra ..
Without ideational concept, all repetition of a mantra is a waste of time.

In addition to the three essential features of a mantra, there is one other factor, perhaps the
most important factor of all, that needs to be considered. This has to do with the 'empowerment' of a
mantra by the guru's spiritual force, so that it acqufres the status of a siddha mantra. In Sarkar's
view, a perfect guru or mahdkaula has the capacity to infuse certain acoustic vibrations in the cosmic
mind with spiritual vitality and power, so that these acoustic roots become 'highly-charged' siddha
mantras. This process of empowering the mantra by a mahdkaula is known as purascararia. A
siddha mantra, when given to a disciple and used properly and regularly, is highly efficacious in
awakening the disciple's kuridalirii and elevating it towards the sahasrdra cakra. In other words, the
gwrM-empowered siddha mantra is the primary means by which a disciple progresses on the path of
spiritual meditation. Sarkar says:

Those who can move the collective ectoplasm through the medium of their ectoplasmic
rhythm can awaken new power in sabda through their own ectoplasmic strength. The
awakening of this power in sabda is called purascararia in Sanskrit. And those who
can perform such a tough task are called Mahdkaula. They alone are worthy of the
status of guru and no one else. When a Mahdkaula awakens vibrations in the universal
ectoplasmic body through the medium of particular sabdas, those sabdas [are also
altered and] acqufre the status of siddha mantras. A spiritual aspfrant can only achieve
perfection through the medium of those siddha mantras. Other mantras are not
capable of leading to success, and spiritual aspfrants cannot awaken them.*"

In AM, Sarkar has given a siddha mantra 'Bdbd Ndm Kevalam' for regular individual and collective
chanting as a preliminary practice prior to formal meditation. Known as the universal mantra, it is
also used for formal meditation practice and is usually taught to beginners. (A more detailed
discussion of spiritual practice methods will be undertaken in section 5.5.)
Sarkar comments on another mantra that he considers to be an example of a siddha mantra,
the favourite Tibetan prayer: Om Marii Padme Hum?' Giving his interpretation of the mantra, he says
that orri symbolises supreme consciousness, parama purusa, in its creative, maintaining, and
destmctive aspects; mariipadma is the mulddhdra cakra, the location of the kuridalirii force; and hurri
is the acoustic root-sound of spfritual stmggle as the kuridalini makes its way from mulddhdra up to
the topmost cakra. Sarkar says:

So, 'Using aum, I remember Parama Purusa; and mariipadma is the seat of that coiled
serpentine, that sleeping divinity, in the human body. I remember that entity also.' .. .*^

"5P55A, p. 261.
^DOTVol 1, p.52.
" DOTVol 1, pp. 79-81 and A VPart 33, p. 72.
*^Z?07Vol. l,p.79.
153
 ... There are so many depraving forces ... When you want to fight against the mind, a
particular flow is created in your mind ... The acoustic root of that flow is hurri. ... The
hurri sound is created. The huni sound is the acoustic root of fight.

While Sarkar explains the ideation behind this mantra, he does not explicitiy recommend its
practice to his disciples. Thus, his followers do not regard the use of the mantra 'Om Marii
Padme Hum' as part of AM spiritual praxis.

Yantra of AM: The Prafika

Sarkar designed a visual diagram called the prafika, which is said to represent the essence of AM
philosophy and practice, and is used as a device for visual contemplation and protection. The
prafika consists of a six-pointed star made up of two equilateral triangles, one pointing upward and the
other pointing downward. The upward-pointing triangle represents action (karma) - the outgoing flow
of energy through selfless service to humanity, while the downward-pointing triangle represents
knowledge (jfidna) - the inward quest for spfritual enUghtenment through meditation. Within the two
superimposed triangles are a rising sun with effusing rays and a svdstika (an ancient Indian symbol)
embedded within the sun. The sun in the centre of the six-pointed star represents advancement, all-
round progress, while the svdstika represents the ultimate goal of the spiritual aspfrant's joumey -
spiritual victory or salvation. The basic element of the svdstika is the cross, with the horizontal line
representing sakti or prakrti, the operative and creative principle, and the vertical line representing
siva or purusa, the supreme cognitive principle. The 'tails' of the cross are oriented in a clockwise
direction, and indicate that the spiritual force needed to awaken and raise the coiled kuridalirii has to be
applied in the anti-clockwise dfrection. When such a force is applied, the svdstika rotates accordingly
in the anti-clockwise dfrection (see Appendix D to aid conceptualisation of this process).
Sarkar is said to have exhorted his followers to 'protect in all respects and at all costs the
dignity' of the prafika?^ In day to day practice, all AM practitioners wear a small, circular prafika
around thefr necks as a reminder of the ideology and as a protective device against potential negative
forces unleashed by immoral avidyd Tantric practitioners. The use of the prafika, the yantra of AM,
strongly suggests a connection to the traditional Tantric practice of the yantra. The similarities and
differences between the AM prafika and traditional Tanfric yantras, in terms of purpose and actual
usage, will be explored in Chapter 8.

5.4 Context of Praxis: Nature and Systems of Tantra

In his discourses, Sarkar gives several closely related definitions of the term 'Tanfra'. Ffrst, he quotes
a scriptural definition of Tantra as tamjddydt tdrayet yastu sah tantrah parikirttitah, meaning 'Tanfra

*'D07VO1. l,p. 80.

*" AMSSP, pp. 32-33. See Appendix D of this thesis for a visual representation of the prafika.
*^ AMSSP, p. 32.
154
is that which liberates a person from the bondages of staticity'.** According to him, the Sanskrit
syllable tarn (the first syllable of the word tantra) is the acoustic root of staticity, where staticity
denotes the forces of inertia and ignorance that block the physical, psychic and spiritual growth of the
person. Second, Sarkar defines Tantra as 'the practical process that leads to one's expansion and
consequent emancipation'.*' This definition is based on his understanding that tan is the Sanskrit verb
root meaning 'to expand'.
Sarkar endows his brand of Tanfra with several characteristics. First, he distinguishes the
tradition of Tanfra from Veda ('knowledge') by emphasising the essentially practical nature of Tanfra
in contrast to the ritualistic focus of the Vedas. He also claims that Tanfra involves both intemal
meditative practice and extemal stmggle against hostile forces, and serves to fully develop the innate
qualities of the human mind and spirit:

The process of Tantra progressively develops the qualities latent in human beings and
at the same time eliminates the defects. In Tantra, therefore, there is no question of the
path being as sharp as a razor's edge. Because of this spirit, a practitioner of Tantra
becomes elevated and attains mastery over a hostile environment. Tantra does not
accept the teachings of the Vedas that human beings should move intemally, and
carefully avoid any association with their environment ... In Tantra, there is a nice
blending between the intemal sddhand, an ongoing psychic process, and physico-
psychic sddhand.

In the above passage, physico-psychic sddhand is the stmggle with extemal forces or inner
weaknesses enacted in the extemal environment that hinder the disciple's spfritual progress. For
example, Sarkar says:

So Tanfra advises, "lump into your environment without the least hesitation. Don't be
afraid. Fear will leave you step by step. Tomorrow you will not be as fearful as you
are today, the day after you wiU be even less fearful, and ten days from now you'll
notice that you are completely fearless."*'

Another major disagreement between Sarkar's Tantra and the Vedic tradition is in relation to caste and
class segregation. He sees the caste system as opposed to the creation of a weU-knit, equitable, and
egalitarian society, and positively harmful to the total actualisation of a human being's potential. He is
emphatic about Tantra giving full scope for the 'all-round development' of a human being, with every
person having equal status in society. To him, 'there cannot be any compromise between Tanfra and
the caste system'.'"

'*£>OrVol.2, p. 36.
"DOrVol.2, p.37
**DC>rVol.2., pp. 132-133
*'DOrVol.2, p. 133.
90
DOrVol.2, p.33.
155
 A second and main feature of Sarkar's Tantra is its emphasis and focus on the development of
human vigour in the process of shattering all pds'as ('bondages') and ripus ('enemies') of the mind and
transforming animality into divinity. Regarding Tantra, he says:

It represents a pactiess fight. Where there is no fight there is no sddhand. Under such
circumstances Tantra cannot be there, where there is no sddhand, no fight. It is an
impossibility to conquer a cmde idea and to replace it by a subtle idea without a fight
... Hence Tanfra is not only a fight, it is an all-round fight. It is not only an extemal or
intemal fight, it is simultaneously both. The intemal fight is the practice of the subtier
portion of Tantra. The extemal fight is a fight of the cmder portion of Tanfra ... The
practice for raising the kulakuridalirii is the intemal sddhand of Tantra, while shattering
the bondages of hatred, suspicion, fear, shyness, etc. by direct action is the extemal
sddhand.^'

Sarkar uses the example of Tantric practitioners who perform thefr meditation in cremation grounds to
overcome thefr fear and shyness, to illustrate his principle of Tanfric fight and vigour. In this path of
Tantric straggle, Sarkar cautions the practitioner against misuse of mental and spiritual powers gained
through inward meditation and outward fight. He asserts that the ultimate goal is not occult or worldly
power but parama purusa alone, and that practice should be grounded solidly on ethical principles:

If sddhakas remain vigilant and alert regarding the principles of Yama and Niyama,
that is, the cardinal moral principles, there is little chance of thefr degradation. Rather
with their developed mental and occult force, they will be in a position to render better
service to humanity and to utilise thefr intellects in a better way.'^

Systems and Types of Tantra

Sarkar sets forth his path of practice within the context of five systems of Tantra. These five Tantric
systems represent a division he makes from the perspective of spiritual praxis, and he correlates them
with the five traditions of Puranic Hinduism in medieval India - §aivacara, Saktacara, Vaisnavacara,
Ganapatyacara, and Saiu-acara. In Sarkar's definition, Saiva Tanfra sfresses the cultivation and
attainment of knowledge and the psychological elimination of caste or social distinctions; Vaisnava
Tantra focuses on devotion and selfless surrender; §akta Tantra teaches the acquisition and judicious
application of power; Saura Tanfra emphasises medicine and astronomy; and Ganapatya Tanfra is
concemed with social leadership and social unity amongst variant social groups. Sarkar characterises
his AM as a happy blending of Saiva, Vaisnava and Sakta Tanfra, emphasising equally the practice of
knowledge, devotion, and action, though devotion is ultimately privileged." Elements of Saura Tanfra
and Ganapatya Tantra can be seen in Sarkar's teachings in relation to his Yogic remedies and
treatment, and his social philosophy of Progressive Utilization Theory (PROUT) and neohumanism.

"D07'VO1.2,pp.26-27.
92
DOTVol 2, p. 28.
"DOrVol.2,p.5
156
 In addition, Sarkar divides Tantra into two main divisions according to geography the
Gaudiya school and the Kasniin school.'" According to him, the Gau^ya school of Tanfra is less
involved in rituals and accentuates the practical dimension, presumably referring to spiritual praxis;
while the Kasniin school is more ritualistic and less practical. (It is questionable whether proponents
of these two schools would accept Sarkar's characterisation of them.) He does not specifically
identify himself with either of these two fraditions, though an examination of his discourses suggests
that he emphasises the practical dimension of Tanfra more than its rituaUstic dimension. An
exploration of Sarkarian soteriological praxis reveals a noticeable lack of ritualistic practices and an
almost exclusive attention to meditation and a range of supportive practices such as yoga dsanas
(special physical postures), sdttvika ('sentient') diet, ethical codes, kirtana (chanting and dancing to
God's name) as preparation for meditation, and altmistic service.
Another polarity Sarkar introduces to his praxis is the opposition between vidyd and avidyd
Tantra. He defines vidyd Tanfra as "an approach of positive ideas towards the world', and avidyd
Tantra as 'an approach of negative ideas' the following of which will make one's mind crade." He
mentions that a person following the path of positive ideas may attain name, fame, and social status
but fail to attain parama purusa or even the higher lokas (layers of the macrocosmic mind). He
advocates the transcending of both the vidyd and avidyd paths by constant ideation on the supreme
consciousness and disregarding both 'positive' and "negative' ideas - a path he calls madhyama mdrga
('middle path'), which, to him, is synonymous with what the Buddha calls majjhimd patipadd (in
Pali). Presumably, Sarkar regards his dnanda mdrga, based on realisation of parama purusa as its
final goal, as an example of madhyama mdrga. However, Sarkar's description of the characteristics of
vidyd Tantra is not entirely unambiguous, as highlighted by this quotation:

Tantra, as you know, is divided into two branches - Vidyd and Avidyd. Siva
formulated all the Tantras, and thus all Tantrics regard Siva as thefr supreme and final
shelter. In all schools of Tantra there are certain rules, and these are compulsory for
practitioners of both Vidyd and Avidyd Tantra. The difference between the two is that
Avidyd Tantra invariably leads one towards cmdification, and ultimately annihilation;
whereas Vidyd Tantra leads one from cmde to subtle, and invigorates the human life,
mind and soul - in fact, the whole existence - with exuberant joy.'*

While Sarkar says, on the one hand, that following the path of positive ideas or vidyd Tanfra will not
lead to parama purusa, he says, on the other hand, that the same vidyd Tanfra leads one 'from cmde to
subtie, and invigorates the human life, mind and soul ... with exuberant joy'. This anomaly can be
resolved to some extent by examining the next quotation:

'•'£)07'Vol.2, p.217.
'^£)OrVol.2, p.236.
" D O T V o l . 2, p. 237.
157
 One may also strive to make the mind more subtle while endeavouring to exercise
greater control over the mundane world. This is the path of Avidyd Tanfra. In this
endeavour the practitioners remain totally preoccupied with the attainment of name,
fame, prosperity, and material enjoyments these are thefr goals. The piupose of thefr
spiritual practice is to make the mind increasingly subtie, in order to be able to exercise
further control, not only over the physical world, but over the cmde minds of other
microcosms as well. Thefr goal is not noble, and will result in thefr ultimately being
converted into inert matter. So the final result of Avidyd Tanfra is exfreme cmdity.

This implies that it is possible to be fransforming the mind towards subtiety through spiritual practices,
and yet be cmdifying it in the long term through ignoble motivations and ideas. If such a practice,
motivated by "negative' or ignoble aims, can be defined as avidyd, then vidyd Tantra would imply a
form of spiritual practice motivated by "positive' or noble aims (such as helping the weak and
downtrodden, or relieving the suffering of oneself or others). Seen in this light, vidyd Tantra may
bring about increasing happiness and success for oneself and others but may not necessarily result in
the realisation of the highest state, merger with parama purusa. For this, an approach involving
parama purusa as the sole and final goal is essential. In the case of vidyd Tanfra, a person who
initially takes up spfritual practice with noble aspirations and ideals is likely to progress towards the
highest ideal of parama purusa in due course. It can then be said that vidyd Tanfra has the potential,
though this may not be realised, to lead a person from crudity to subtiety and finally even beyond all
duality of vidyd and avidyd to the supreme soteriological goal.

Stages of Sarkar's Tantric Practice

In contextualising his soteriological praxis, Sarkar delineates several models of the variations and
stages of Tantric practice, some of which form an important part of the practice of AM. The first of
these models describes the division of Tantric practice into three distinct and sequential stages -
pasvdcdra (or pasubhdva), virdcdra (or virabhdva), and divydcdra (or divyabhdva). The second
model sub-divides the stage of pasvdcdra into four distinct sub-stages, sub-divides virdcdra into two
sub-stages, and identifies divydcdra with the sub-stage of kuldcdra.^ The third model divides dnanda
mdrga practice into three stages: sdkta, vaisriaviya, and saiva.'^
In the first model, the three stages of pasvdcdra, virdcdra, and divydcdra are meant to portray
the gradual progress of a Tantric sddhaka (spfritual practitioner) as he or she develops on the path.
The first and initial stage, pasvdcdra ('animal way') or pasubhdva ('animal ideation'), is when the
human mind is dominated by animal-like instincts and extemal pressure is required for discipline and
confrol. When, through sustained and consistent effort, a sddhaka is firm in ethical conduct and
obtains relevant guidance in the process of meditation, he or she enters the stage of virdcdra ('heroic
way') or virabhdva ('heroic ideation'). In this second stage, the sddhaka is able to maintain proper

"Z)07'Vol.2, p.238.
'*D07"Vol.2,pp.43-45.
''D07-V0I.2, p.44.
158
ideation on the brahma and progresses on the path by means of both extemal discipline and intemal
desfre for spfritual realisation. The sddhaka has intemaUsed proper ethical principles and engages in
an inner stmggle with negative propensities that bind and cmdify his or her mind. When the sddhaka
is firmly established in this stage, that is, when they have fully confrolled thefr conduct and transmuted
their instincts into divine love, the third stage of divydcdra ('divine way') or divydbhdva ('divine
ideation') is attained. In the third stage, the sddhaka has successfuUy overcome aU negativities and
'rising above petty selfishness, identifies himself or herself with the collective interest, [and] becomes
one with parama purusa''"'.

Following the Visvasara Tantra, Sarkar further divides pasubhdva into the sub-stages of
vaidikdcdra, vaisriavdcdra, saivdcdra, and daksiridcdra; divides virabhdva into the sub-stages of
vdmdcdra and siddhdntdcdra; and identifies divyabhdva with kuldcdra. He does not define and
describe these sub-stages, with the exception of vaidikdcdra, daksiridcdra, and vdmdcdra. According
to him, vaidikdcdra 'has no deep principles, but is merely a set of ritualistic and showy observances
and practices', and thus is the 'lowest grade of sddhand'."^^ Daksiridcdra sddhand describes the path
of practice wherein the sddhaka is afraid to engage in the fight against the bondages of prakrti but
instead propitiates the cosmic operative principle through devotional prayers and eulogies. Sarkar
considers this approach to be defective and ineffectual in gaining self-realisation. Vdmdcdra sddhand,
in contrast, describes the sddhaka's "random and relentless fight' against prakrti's bondages with
courage and valour, but without the guidance of a fixed and sublime goal. Sarkar considers this
approach to be equally ineffective in attaining liberation, as spiritual power gained through stmggle
may be misused and bring harm to self and others.
As an altemative to all the above approaches, Sarkar recommends the path of madhyamdcdra
sddhand, or the 'Middle Way', where the sddhaka fights and stmggles with prakrti, ever maintaining
the goal of brahma fixed in view. Identifying this path with AM, he says:

They move forward towards the spiritual effulgence, or Brahmajyoti, tearing the veil of
darkness of Avidyd. Ananda Marga accepts the path of Madhyamdcdra sddhand,
because in this process sddhakas have a fixed goal. A purposeless and random fight
usually does not bring victory, rather it Causes unnecessary wastage of time and
104
energy.

In his madhyamdcdra sddhand or AM, Sarkar discems three specific stages of practice which
can either be fused into one, or remain separate - sdkta, vaisriaviya, and saiva. He considers tme

'°°DOrVol.2,pp.5-9.
""£)OrVol2, p. 135.
"'^DOrVol.2, p.44.
'°'lbid
'°* DOT Vol 2, p. 90.
159
spiritual practice to be a 'happy combination of these three stages' with each stage having equal
importance.'"' In the first stage of practice, a disciple is regarded as a sdkta, defined as:

... one who is determined to awaken his or her cognitive faculty and fight against the
negative influence of the static principle. Such a person stmggles ceaselessly against
psychic impurities and physical ailments in individual life, and against social evils and
economic disparity in collective life. A Sdkta is not afraid of the crashing load of
unhappiness in life, and never surrenders to pessimism, but fights against the miseries
of Ufe with revolutionary zeal.'"*

Sarkar considers the sdkta stage as the time when the reaping of past sarriskdras is most acutely felt
due to the immense fight against prakrti. The sddhaka develops and utilises the faculties of jfidna
(knowledge) and karma (action) predominantly, since straggle necessarily involves action and
knowledge of action, that is, knowledge of how to struggle and act. As the sddhaka understands that
his or her sorrows and afflictions are results of past actions, he or she does not shrink away from
difficulties but instead embraces them with grace, dignity, and courage. The sddhaka only hopes to
attain parama purusa in the joyful straggle against suffering and problems.
In the second vaisriaviya stage, spiritual practice is characterised by 'the endeavour to throw
oneself into the current of Cosmic bliss and float towards the supreme goal'.'"' This is the stage when
the sddhaka has developed sufficient courage and inner strength to assume a stance of radical letting
go of self and all things. The sddhaka has no task other than to surrender totally to the unfolding of
the cosmic will, and everything and everyone is seen as part of the infinite flow of blissful reality.
Sarkar describes it thus:

The mundane obstacles, the friends and foes, merge in the Vaisnavite sddhakas' world
of blissful ideation. With whom will they fight? They feel that the entfre universe is
an unbroken divine play composed of Rddhd and Krsria. In this stage, there is a clear
dominance of action and devotion. Vaisnavite sddhand is a blissful flow indeed.'"*

The entfre expanse of space and time through which the sddhaka travels as he or she blissfully
proceeds from the cfrcumference into the nucleus of the universe (purusottama) is termed
metaphorically by Sarkar rupasdgara or "ocean of beauteous forms' and rasdmrtasindhu or "ocean of
bliss'. In this stage, the faculties of karma and bhakti (devotion) are predominant while jnana is
secondary. At the culmination of the second stage, the sddhaka merges his or her mind into the cosmic
mind and attains either savikalpa samddhi (which is temporary) or mukti (which is permanent). It is

'"'DOrVol.2,p.5.
"'^DOrVol.2, p.5-6.
""DOrVol.2, p.7.
'°^D07Vol.2, p. 17.
"'Ibid.
160
not entfrely clear from Sarkar's discourses which of the two soteriological attainments is meant. The
only clue to this experience is his assertion that:

The moment before the final merger, sddhakas realise that the Entity who has come in
the form of happiness is thefr dearest Lord, and the Entity who has come in the form of
sorrow is also their dearest Lord. They feel the divine joy of the Cosmic play.

In the final and third progression, the sddhaka enters into the saiva stage, completely and
unconditionally renouncing his or her mind to brahma without any trace of self or any expectations:

In the absence of mind they cannot enjoy the sweetness of the divine play any longer.
At that supreme stage of surrender tildnanda is transformed into nitydnanda. When
sddhakas become ensconced in nitydnanda they are said to have attained the Saiva
stage.'"

For Sarkar, the saiva stage represents the culmination of the entire path of Tantric practice, dominated
by the faculty of non-dual knowledge or jfidna par excellence.
The various stages of Tantric practice enumerated by Sarkar can be correlated as shown in the
following table, based upon a comparison of phenomenological features of each stage of practice
between the three schemas offered by him. From such a comparison, it can be deduced that the
practice of madhyamdcdra or AM - which entails a certain degree of spiritual maturity and a clear
vision of the ultimate - begins at least after the stage of vdmdcdra, one in which a relentless but blind
straggle against the forces of prakrti is said to be predominant. Since the first, or sdkta stage in
Sarkar's madhyamdcdra entails a vigorous fight of the practitioner against pra^/ti, albeit with a clear
vision of supreme brahma in mind, it can be placed within virdcdra, a stage characterised by heroism
and courage. The second and third stages, vaisriaviya and saiva, will then fall under the category of
divydcdra or kuldcdra, the final stage of practice in the first two schemas:

Schema 1 Schema 2 Schema 3 = Ananda Marga

Pasvdcdra Vaidikdcdra
1

Vaisriavdcdra
1 1

Saivdcdra
Daksiridcdra
1

Virdcdra Vdmdcdra
Siddhdntdcdra Madhyamdcdra:
(1) Sdkta
Divydcdra Kuldcdra (2) Vaisriaviya
(3) Saiva

110
DOrVol.2, p. 18.
III
Ibid
161
The Five Makdra of Sarkarian Tantra
A well-known concept in classical Tanfra is that of the pancamakdra, the 'five ma sounds' or 'five
M's'. The term pancamakdra refers to a set of five Tantric practices commonly regarded as
antinomian ritualistic practices, namely: madya ('wine'), mdrrtsa ('meat'), matsya ('fish'), mudrd
('parched grain'), and maithuna ('sexual intercourse'). According to Sarkar, tiiese five practices have
a crade as well as a subtie interpretation, with the subtie interpretation being identical with the path of
yoga. Sarkar views these practices as having been taught by Sadasiva to cater for people with varying
capability to control base animal-like propensities. For those with sfrong attachment to physical
enjoyment, the crade paficamakdra are recommended to assist them in their spfritual practice in the
midst of worldly enjoyment:

While carrying out this practice, they will limit the degree of thefr indulgence. By
limiting the use of objects of enjoyment they will gradually increase their psychic
power, and will ultimately rise above the allurement of enjoyment ... The practice of
this pravrttimulaka [extroversial] paficamakdra will gradually take them to the nivrtti
path."' •

For those with stronger minds and weaker desires, the subtle paficamakdra are prescribed. Sarkar
affirms that AM is based on the subtie paficamakdra and offers his explanation of what these practices
are.
Regarding madya, normally translated as "wine', Sarkar comments on two Sanskrit verses,
which he translates thus:

One who experiences the intoxicating joy from drinking the sudhd, or somadhdra.
113
secreted from the Brahmarandhra [pineal gland] is called a madya sddhaka.

Intense love for Nirvikdra Niranjana Parama Brahma leads to the annihilation of
thought, intellect and ego, and appears as an intoxication, which may be termed a
madya sddhand.'

To Sarkar, the somadhdra, literally 'nectar', secreted from the brahmarandhra (which he identifies
with the sahasrdra cakra, whose physiological correlate is the pineal gland) is a hormone that causes
an intoxicating "divine joy' in the vicinity of the pituitary gland and invigorates the lower glands of the
body. Sarkar explains that since the pineal gland secretion is partially controlled by the moon (which
he calls soma), the hormone secreted is known as somarasa or somadhdra. The phrase 'nirvikdra
niranjana parama brahma' in the second verse quoted above refers to the 'formless, stainless supreme
consciousness' that is the object of the sddhaka's devotion and love. To Sarkar, madya sddhand thus

"'DOrVol.2, p.47.
'"DOrVol.2, p.48.
"''DC>7'VO1.2, p.49.
162
involves the experience of divine joy through the secretion of the pineal gland as a result of intense
love for the supreme consciousness during meditation or other spiritual practices.
Sarkar defines mdmsa (literally 'meat') as 'control over speech' or "surrendering all actions to
God':

Md means "tongue", and it is through the tongue that words are uttered. One who
, "eats" or controls those words is a mdmsa sddhaka.

One who surrenders all one's actions, good, bad, righteous, sinful, wicked - even the
attainment of prolonged penance - to Me, is called mdrrisa.116

For Sarkar, meat is not recommended as food for yoga practitioners and so cannot be the trae meaning
of the concept of mdrrisa. To him, mdrrisa is conscious confrol of speech coupled with a selfless
surrender of all actions good or bad to brahma.
The next makdra, matsya (literally 'fish'), is defined by Sarkar in terms of biopsychology and
has, according to him, nothing to do with eating fish:

One who eats the two fish that swim, one through the Ganges (representing the idd
nddi) and the other through the Yamuna (the pirigald nddi) - that is, one who takes the
breath flows of the left nostril and therightnostril to the trikuti [concentration point of
the djnd cakra] and suspends them there by purna kumbhaka [holding the inhalation]
or sunya kumbhaka [holding the exhalation] - is a matsya sddhaka."^

... When a person feels all the pains and pleasures of others as one's own pains and
pleasures, this sentient feeling is called matsya sddhand."^

According to Sarkar, the second quotation is taken from the sayings of Sadasiva, though he gives no
textual reference. It appears that Sarkar's own interpretation concurs with the two verses above. He
speaks of matsya as the practice of a form of prdridydma or "vital force control' and the state of
universal empathy or compassion.
Sarkar asserts that mudrd (literally "parched grain'), the fourth makdra, has nothing to do with
food or grain but is concemed with keeping the good company of wise and spiritually-minded people:

Bad company leads to bondage; good company leads to liberation. Having understood
this supreme tmth, one should avoid bad company. This shunning of bad company is
called mudrd sddhand.

'"Ibid.
'"Ibid
"''DOTVol 2, p. 50
'"Ibid
'"Ibid.
163
 The fifth and final makdra, maithuna (literally "sexual union') is perhaps the most
controversial and well-known of the five M's of Tantra. For Sarkar, the crade interpretation of
maithuna as sacralised sexual intercourse, though not prescribed as part of AM praxis, is nevertheless
not condemned as wrong or sinful. He sees maithuna or sacralised sex as a transitional practice for
spiritual aspirants with crader propensities to gradually develop self-resfraint, a practice to be finally
renounced when they are ready. For Sarkar, however, maithuna is to be interpreted metaphysically as
the process of raising the dormant spfritual force of kuridalini and uniting it with paramasiva ('nucleus
consciousness') at the sahasrdra cakra:

The lowest vertebra of the spinal cord is called kula. In this part of the mulddhdra
cakra is located the kulakundalirii, or daivi s'akti [divine energy]. The purpose of
maithuna sddhand is to raise the kulakuridalirii and unite it with Paramasiva at the
sahasrdra cakra.

With Tantra as the overall context for Sarkarian praxis, we are now ready to examine how
Sarkar constructs his Yogic path of practice in terms of the commonly accepted framework of
Patanjali's astdngayoga (eight-limbed yoga) and the largely original stracture of the Sixteen Points of
AM.

5.5 Sarkar's Appropriation of Patafijali's Astdriga Yoga

Sarkarian praxis is aimed at the twin goals of mukti and moksa, and arguably also at realising the state
of embodied liberation termed flvanmukti Sarkar contextualises his path of practice within the
harmonious blend of Sakta, Vaisnava, and Saiva Tantra, emphasising the virtues of, and necessity for,
all-round straggle and human vigour. Operationally, he borrows the stracture of the eight-limbed yoga
(astdriga yoga) of Patanjali to define and explain the range of spiritual practices required for realising
the summum bonum. The eight-limbed yoga traditionally consists of yama (code for social balance),
niyama (code for personal integration), dsana (physical posture), prdridydma (control of vital energy),
pratydhdra (mental withdrawal), dhdrarm (concenfration), dhydna (meditation), and samddhi
(suspension of mind in consciousness). Sarkar redefines the factors of the eight-limbed yoga,
particularly the principles of yama and niyama, and correlates some of these factors with perfection of
the layers of the mind (kosas). Regarding the eight-limbed yoga, he says:

Human existence consists of the five kosas and spfritual practice is eightfold. This
spiritual practice is called Dharma. Why is Astdriga Yoga called Dharmal The
purpose of Dharma is to attain perfect happiness and perfect happiness is the
attainment of the soul, there being only partial happiness in each koSa. So long as the
soul is not attained every kosa has to be perfected. Each kosa has to be taken care of
... The annamaya kosa is perfected through dsanas (physical postures). Yama and
niyama sddhand perfect the kdmamaya kosa. The manomaya kosa is perfected through

120
DOTVol. 2, p. 51.
164
 prdridydma. Through pratydhdra the atimdnasa kosa is perfected. The vijfidnamaya
kosa is perfected through dhdrarid and the hirarimaya kosa through dhydna. Only
dhydna samddhi gives access to the soul.

In addition to Pataiijali's eight-limbed yoga, Sarkar discusses the noble eightfold path
(drydstdrigamdrga) of the Buddha in several of his discourses.'^' hi so doing, he re-interprets the
Buddha's eightfold path in the light of AM's cosmotheistic philosophy. He advocates the practice of
these eight principles, but does not use them as an overall framework for his AM praxis. 1 will briefly
discuss Sarkar's understanding of the noble eightfold path at the end of this section.

Yama and Niyama

For Sarkar, the foundational disciplines of yama (codes for social balance) and niyama (codes for
personal integration) are cmcial for the overaU success of the spiritual quest and are the means by
which spfritual aspfrants are kept on the path of morality. He often wams against the practice of
spirituality for the sake of acquiring occult powers or other personal gains, as this will harm both the
practitioner and society if the practitioner's moraUty is not well established. Regarding morality,
Sarkar says:

Morality is the foundation of sddhand (spiritual practice). It must, however, be

remembered that morality or good conduct is not the culminating point of the spiritual
march ... Sddhand in its very start, requires mental equilibrium. This sort of mental
harmony may also be termed as morality ... Moral ideals must be able to furnish
human beings with the ability as well as the inspiration to proceed on the path of
sddhand ... the ultimate end of moralism is the attainment of Supreme Bliss ... In the
sddhand of Ananda Marga, moral education is imparted with the ideal of oneness with
Brahma, because sddhand is not possible without such a moral ideation.'"

In terms of psycho-spiritual effects, the practice of yama and niyama serves to perfect the kdmamaya
kosa (layer of desfre of the mind) by regulating various mental desfres and aversions and channelling
them towards the highest goal, brahma. Yama consists of five principles, namely ahimsd (non-
harming), satya (tmthfulness), asteya (non-stealing), brahmacdrya (leading a divine life), and
aparigraha (non-indulgence). Niyama also consists of five principles, namely sauca (purity), santosa
(contentment), tapah (penance), svddhydyd (clear understanding of spiritual subjects), and isvara
prariidhdna (seeking the shelter of the Lord).
Sarkar defines ahirrisd as 'not inflicting pain or hurt on anybody by thought, word or
action'."" He stresses that ahirrisd does not mean absolute non-violence as the very process of

'"55Partl,p.62.
" ' See e.g. SS Part 19, pp. 80-88 and 'Lord Buddha's Cardinal Principles', Electronic Edition of the Works ofP.
R. Sarkar, pp. 1-3.
" ' Anandamurti, A Guide to Human Conduct (Manila: Ananda Marga Publications, 1991), pp. 2-5. This is
Sarkar's main text on ethical and mental training as preparatory practices for meditation.
"" GHC, p. 7.
165
existence necessarily involves some form of kilUng. He cites the examples of ploughing the land,
respiration, and prophylactic medical freatment, to illusfrate the futility of viewmg ahimsd as absolute
non-violence. He argues that such activities conducted for the mere survival of the species cannot be
considered a violation of ahimsd, since there was no intention of deliberate hurt or harm. He also
rejects the definition of ahirrisd as non-application of force, arguing that there are instances when force
has to be applied to prevent greater harm or to defend justice. To illustrate his case, he cites the
examples of self-defence against unjust military invasion, peace adminisfration and crime control by
the police force, and corrective punishment in the spirit of rectification. He says:

In all actions of life, whether small or big, the unit mind progresses by surmounting the
opposing forces. Life evolves through the medium of force. If this force is not
properly developed, life becomes absolutely dull.'"

However, Sarkar advocates wise consideration and sensitivity when selecting food for dietary
consumption. He gives two essential guidelines:

First, as far as possible, articles of food must be selected from among those items in
which development of consciousness is comparatively little; that is, if vegetables are
available, animals should not be slaughtered. Secondly, under all circumstances before
killing any animal having developed or underdeveloped consciousness, it must be
considered whether it is possible to live in a healthy body without taking such lives."*

He argues that since there are innumerable cells in the human body, which in tum are made up of the
food that is consumed, the type of food ingested will determine the nature of these cells. The nature of
living cells will in tum affect the quality of the mind, an important principle to be remembered and
followed by spiritual practitioners. In short, Sarkar understands ahirrisd to be the careful guidance of
one's thoughts and actions so as not to cause pain or be unjust to others, while recognising the need for
use of physical and/or mental force in certain situations.
Sarkar defines satya, the second principle of yama, as 'proper action of mind and the right use
of words with the spirit of welfare'.'" He sees the practice of satya not as a blind adherence to tmth
per se but as using one's rationality and sensitivity when thinking or speaking the tmth in the spirit of
benevolence. In other words, he gives scope for the withholding of tmth in special cfrcumstances on
rational and compassionate grounds:

Even though the objective of a sddhaka is to achieve that ultimate entity, in the process
sddhakas have to deal with the relativity of their surroundings. Humans are rational
beings: they possess in varying degrees the capability to do what is necessary or good

'^^GHCp.n.
"* GHC, pp. 15-16.
' " GHC. p. 23.
166
 for humanity. In the realm of spirituality such thought, word or action has been
defined as satya.

He cites the example of misdirecting a potential murderer away from an escaping refugee to illusfrate
a specific situation when factual trath is withheld for the sake of saving a life.
Sarkar defines asteya, the thfrd principle of yama, as 'not to take possession of what belongs
to others' or "non-stealing'.'" He describes four types of stealing, all of which are to be avoided by a
spiritual aspirant, namely: physical theft of material objects; mental theft, that is, having an intention
and thought of stealing though not necessarily enacting it for fear of criticism or apprehension;
physicaUy depriving others of what is due to them; and mentally depriving others of what is due to
them, that is, plannuig but not actually carrying out the act of depriving others of thefr due. Sarkar
cites paying inadequate train fares (especially by political leaders or religious missionaries), tax
evasion, bribery, and selling adulterated goods, as illustrative of violation of this principle.
Sarkar gives a new slant to the concept of brahmacdrya by defining it as 'to remain attached
to Brahma'.'^^ He rejects the traditional interpretation of brahmacdrya as celibacy and instead
explains it as a subtie process of contemplation whereby every object is seen as an expression of the
divine:

The meaning of practising Brahmacdrya sddhand is to treat the objects with which one
comes in contact as different expressions of Brahma and not as crade forms. By means
of such an ideation even though the mind wanders from one object to another, it does
not get detached from Brahma because of the Cosmic feeling taken for each and every
object ... Many misinterpret Brahmacdrya to mean preservation of semen. It should
be remembered that neither the words Brahma nor cdrya has any relevance to the word
t(„„,^__-»? 131
semen

He sees the practice of brahmacdrya as a means of transforming preya ('attraction towards the
mundane') into sreya ('atfraction towards ultimate reality') and kdma ('desfre for finite objects') into
prema ('desfre for the Infinite'). In light of this principle, Sarkar advocates a confrolled sex life for
married practitioners without any unhealthy suppression or repression, while stating that ordained
monks and nuns who work as full time missionaries should observe celibacy so that more time and
energy can be channelled into thefr work. He stresses that there is no difference in status between
family practitioners and ordained monastics in AM, and that the fraditional superiority of monastics
over married practitioners is but an exploitative mechanism perpefrated by those of priestly or
religious class who want to keep the masses under control. Sarkar goes so far as to assert that 'a
family person is like a sfrong tree which is self-supporting, while the samnydsi is like the vine which

"* GHC, p. 24.

' " GHC, p. 26.
""G//C, p. 31.
'" GHC, p. 32.
167
twines around the tree for its support.'"' Sarkar regards brahmacdrya as pre-eminent amongst all the
principles of yama, owing to its deep spiritual significance and implications. This is expressed in the
second lesson of sahaja yoga, a set of six meditative lessons taught by Sarkar to his disciples (to be
examined in Chapter 6).
For Sarkar, whUe brahmacdrya implies "control over subjectivity' in the case of enjoyment of
a material object, aparigraha implies 'control over objectivity'.'" That is, the practice of
brahmacdrya is directed intemally towards control of the mind while aparigraha is directed outwardly
towards control of extemal objects. He defines aparigraha as 'non-indulgence in the enjoyment of
such amenities and comforts of life as are superfluous for the preservation of life'."" Aparigraha is to
be practised in the context of compassionate justice and faimess for all, and is to be adjusted in
relation to changes in time, place, and person:

Aparigraha is an endless fight to reduce one's own objects of comfort out of sympathy
for the common people, after ensiuring that individuals are able to maintain solidarity in
their physical, mental and spfritual lives for themselves and their families. ... In
practising aparigraha the objects of pleasure will increase or decrease with person,
place and time, but the definition of aparigraha, as mentioned above, will be
applicable to all people, in all countries and at all times.

The five principles of niyama are deeper practices, each of which according to Sarkar, 'carries
equal weight in the mundane, supramundane and spfritual sfrata'."* He considers isvara prariidhdna
(seeking the shelter of the Lord) as the most important practice amongst the five principles of niyama,
just as brahmacdrya is the most important of the five principles of yama. He explains that
brahmacdrya and isvara prariidhdna are the two main practices, with the other eight practices being
subordinated parts of the two.
The first aspect of niyama is sauca, which means 'purity or cleanliness','" both outer (relating
to the body and environment) and inner (relating to the mind). Sarkar explains sauca as:

The proper use of soap, water or other cleansers to keep the body, clothes or
surrounding clean, is extemal cleanliness. By this cleanliness physical objects with
which people are directly associated are cleaned and made fit for use."* ... Cleansing
the mind is a far more laborious job than cleansing the body, clothes, house, etc.
Intelligent people should not therefore allow their mental purity to be stained. You
must always guard against the tempest of passion: you must not yield to such storms.'"

' " A M P Part 3, pp. 170-171.

' " GHC, p. 40.
"" Ibid.
" ' GHC, p. 44.
"* GHC, p. 48.
' " GHC, p. 49.
"* Ibid.
' " G W C , p. 51
168
Sarkar sees the various instincts for pleasure and selfish motives as driving forces that ultimately cause
distortions in the mind. These distortions result in psychological complexes, which Sarkar calls 'dfrt
of the mind' that requfre cleansing. He advocates application of effort through spiritual practice
(sddhand) as the main method for cleansing the mind. This sddhand takes the form of cultivating a
selfless and universal attitude towards all beings, and deliberate fraining in behaviours diametrically
opposed to negative, selfish fraits:

... the impurity of selfishness ... has to be bumt and melted in the fire of sddhand. ...
The feeling of selflessness, the feeling of universalism is the only remedy to remove
mental impurities. People who have fascination or temptation for any material object
can gradually remove that mental pollution arising out of selfishness by adopting just
the reverse course. ... only selfless service to humanity and the effort to look upon the
world with a cosmic outiook can lead one to be established in mental sauca.

The second aspect of niyama is santosa, which Sarkar defines as 'a state of proper ease'141
He sees the mind as constantiy seeking new and varied objects of gratification, possessing ever
increasing desires that know no end. He identifies santosa with inner contentment:

Contentment is not at all possible if the individual is ranning after camal pleasures like
a beast.'"' ... santosa sddhand lies in being content with the eamings of normal labour,
without any undue pressure on the body and mind. To remain contented, one has to
make a special type of mental effort to keep aloof from extemal allurements.'"'

Sarkar advocates the practice of "autosuggestion' and "outer suggestion' as 'two effective methods to
detach the mind from its lower tendencies' '"" In his view, an inner change elicited by consciously
thinking thoughts opposite to the mean or negative tendencies in the mind constitutes autosuggestion
(e.g. meditative contemplation on benefits of contentment), while change elicited by constant
conveyance of such opposing ideas through the sense organs constitutes outer suggestion (e.g.
listening to a spiritual talk on contentment). For santosa, however, Sarkar advocates autosuggestion
as the method of choice. He emphasises that practising santosa does not mean allowing oneself to be
exploited or oppressed by others who wish to take advantage of one's simplicity. A heroic spfrit to
fight for one's legitimate rights is strongly recommended, even as excessive desires are to be curbed.
Tapah, the thfrd aspect of niyama, means 'to practise penance to reach the goal'.'"' It is to
render service to others who need help in a spirit of self-sacrifice and universal love. For service to

'"° GHC, p. 52-53.

'"' GHC, p. 56.
'*'lbid
'"' GHC, p. 57-58.
'"" GHC, p. 58.
'"' GHC. p. 59.
169
qualify as tapah, it has to involve some form of inconvenience or discomfort to the ego, a sacrifice of
the self for the greater good, and a sense of cosmic ideation:

There must be one and only purpose behind the practice of penance and that is to
shoulder the sorrows and miseries of others to make them happy, to free them from
grief and to give them comfort. ...'"* Those who look upon the served only as an
expression of the cosmos and look after thefr comforts selflessly develop devotion or
• 1 . 147
love for the Supreme m a short time.

To Sarkar, the practice of tapah helps greatiy in expanding the mind and facilitates the process of
meditation on the Supreme, isvara prariidhdna. He wams, however, that tapah has to be practised
with inteUigence and clear knowledge of priorities of need. He urges practitioners to be wary of
opportunists and to give only to those who really need assistance:

Your responsibility is greater for those who are weaker, poorer, less educated, more
ignorant and downtrodden in comparison with you. Your responsibility is very little
for those who are above your level, who are better off and more powerful than you.
Therefore you wiU have to ascertain with discrimination where your responsibility lies
and to what extent; otherwise all your time, energy and labour employed in tapah will
V • .148
be in vain.

Sarkar defines svddhydya, the fourth aspect of niyama, as 'clear understanding of any spiritual
subject'; it involves, in addition to reading or hearing about spiritual topics, an understanding of the
significance and underlying idea of what is being read or heard.'"' He wams against a superficial
interpretation of svddhydya as mere reading or touching the scriptures with one's head or making
ritual offerings, a view which has been perpetrated, according to him, by many religious teachers for
selfish reasons and personal vested interests:

Nowadays reading religious scriptures without grasping the meaning is also considered
to be svddhydya. Religious professionals have misguided the public by thefr
misinterpretation of the term svddhydya.'^ ... Those with vested interests seek to keep
the public away from the true spfrit of the sdstras because this facilitates their
exploitation.'"

In the practice of svddhydya, Sarkar advocates a proper grasp of the idea and spirit behind the words in
any scriptural writing, and cautions that the same word may carry 'different meanings in different

'*'lbid.
'"'G//C, p. 61.
'"* GHC, p. 63.
'"' GHC, p. 65.
""Ibid.
'" GHC, p. 68.
170
contexts'.'" hi a sense, Sarkar is here expressing his view on textual hermeneutics that has practical
and soteriological relevance for followers of his dnanda mdrga.
Isvara prariidhdna is the final and most important aspect of niyama, which Sarkar defines as
'to establish oneself in the Cosmic Idea - to accept Isvara as the only ideal of life'."' He explains that
the term 'isvara' has two meanings, namely 'the confroUer of this universe' or 'He who controls the
thought-waves of this universe', and 'the witnessing counterpart of the objective Prakrti where tiie
static principle is dominant'"" Regarding the second definition, he says:

It is the witnessing entity of the causal world, it is the magnified essence of prajnd, it is
an entity free from all bondages. ... to a sddhaka Isvara is understood to be nothing
other than Saguria Brahma or God.'"

In other words, Sarkar equates isvara with saguria brahma, the qualified or attributional
cosmic consciousness within which the universe exists. As isvara, saguria brahma functions
as the witnessing entity (sdksibhuta) and the wisdom (prajdd) that observes and knows the
totality of the created world.
He further defines prariidhdna as 'to understand clearly or to adopt something as a shelter',
and he understands isvara prariidhdna to mean the adoption of God as the supreme shelter, towards
whom the sddhaka moves with increased speed."* Regarding the method of practice, he says:

Isvara prariidhdna is absolutely based on bhdva or ideation - it is a mental effort in its

entirety. ... One will have to detach the mind from worldly propensities while
meditating upon Isvara (God). Ffrst the mind will have to be withdrawn from the
limited "I" feeling, and focussed at a point. Then one wUl take the thought of the
Macrocosm around that point with the help of the ideation of the mantra prescribed
according to one's own samskdra (mental potentiality). He is the subtlest Entity,
therefore He can be realised only through feeling and by no other means. ... One's
ideation should be expressed mentally and the mind should be its witnessing entity.'"

Sarkar identifies this mental ideation on God with mdnasika japa (mental recitation), as opposed to
vdcanika japa (loud verbal recitation) and uparnsu japa (soft verbal recitation). He views mdnasika
japa as the most effective means of practice of isvara prariidhdna: it allows the mind to rise above all
tendencies and flow with great force and speed towards supreme bliss. He recommends that isvara
prariidhdna be practised both individually and collectively, maintaining that group practice of God
ideation can generate a powerful mental force that accelerates progress and solves all problems. It is
important to note that while isvara prariidhdna is technically placed under niyama, the second 'limb'

' " GHC, p. 67.

' " GHC, p. 69.
'^" GHC, p. 68.
' " GHC, pp. 68-69.
"* GHC, p. 69.
"'G//C, pp. 69-71.
171
of the eightfold yoga, the nature and process of its practice rightfully places it under pratydhdra and
dhydna, the fifth and seventh 'limbs' respectively of the eightfold yoga. It also constitutes the first
lesson of sahaja yoga, the set of six Tanfric meditation techniques taught by Sarkar to his disciples.
(More details on isvara prariidhdna will be examined under these separate headings.)

Asana
After yama and niyama, the thfrd 'limb' of the eightfold yoga is dsana (postures). Sarkar defines
dsanas as 'postures comfortably held' and sees thefr aim as eliciting physical comfort and psychic
composure in one who practises them. Together with proper diet and adequate physical labour,
dsanas are meant to perfect the annamaya kosa or the 'layer' of the physical body. Asanas are to be
practised with unimpeded airflow in the left nostril, as the left nostril is the termination point of the idd
nddi, through which subtie, introversial energy flows. Sarkar recommends a total of forty-two
different dsanas as part of the entfre spfritual path, though there exist many more in traditional hatha
yoga.'^^ He sees the main function of dsanas as correcting the defects of glands and sub-glands and
regulating the optimal secretion of their hormones. This in tum assists in confroUing the activity of
various vrttis in the cakras, with which the glands and sub-glands are intimately related:

Mental expression is brought about through the vrttis, and the predominance of the
vrttis depends on different glands of the body. There are many glands in the body and
from each there is a secretion of a particular hormone. If there is any defect in the
secretion of hormones or any defect in a gland, certain vrttis become excited ... If a
person wants to control the excitement of these propensities, he or she must rectify the
defects of the glands. Asanas help the sddhaka to a large extent in this task, so dsanas
are an important part of sddhand.'^^

In addition to dsanas, Sarkar recommends a set of fifteen different mudrds ('gestures') and bandhas
('locks') that he deems necessary and helpful for physical and mental health. According to him, these
mudrds and bandhas are similar to dsanas, but incorporate more ideation and require no resfriction on
nostril flow.

Prdridydma
The fourth 'limb' of the eightfold yoga is prdridydma or 'the process of breath control along with the
imposition of the ideation of Supreme Consciousness'.'*" To Sarkar, prdridydma is the main technique
for perfecting the manomaya kosa or 'mental layer', as it helps to calm and concentrate the mind,
thereby increasing its apperceptive power. This is achieved through confroUing the ten vdyus
(collectively known as prdridh) in the body by special techniques of breathing with or without mental
ideation. According to Sarkar, prdridydma is of two main classes: hatha-yaugika prdridydma and

"*CC Part 3, p. 23.

Ibid. See CC for more detailed instructions on and rules regarding the practice of AM dsanas
'^YP, p. 149.
172
yudhisthira prdridydma.'^' Hatha yaugika prdridydma involves concentration of mind on a specific
point without accompanying cosmic ideation. Yudhisthira prdridydma involves fixing the mind on a
point of concentration together with ideation on the Supreme. Sarkar regards yudhisthira prdridydma
as part of spiritual practice by virtue of its inclusion of cosmic ideation. A specific technique of
yudhisthira prdridydma is sddhdraria prdridydma, which constitutes the fourth lesson of sahaja yoga
taught by Sarkar (to be discussed in greater detail in Chapter 6). Other techniques that form part of
daily spiritual practice include sahaja prdridydma, visesa prdridydma, and dntar prdridydma, all of
which are to be taught by the most senior teachers of AM known as purodhds. Information on these
techniques is currently unavailable to me. Sarkar also teaches a set of five different prdridydma
techniques designed specifically for therapeutic and healing purposes, which are separate from the
techniques connected with spiritual practice.'*' Four out of the five techniques appear to belong to the
category of hatha yaugika prdridydma.

Pratydhdra
The fifth 'limb' of the eightfold yoga as taught by Sarkar is pratydhdra, which he defines as 'the
withdrawal of the mind from extemal objectivity and goading the withdrawn mind toward Parama
Purusa'.'^^ The practice of pratydhdra is considered to perfect the atimdnasa kosa, or the 'higher
mental' layer, as the sddhaka progressively gains control over his or her propensities. As the
atimdnasa kosa is the layer of mind where sarnskdras first find expression through the propensities,
control over these propensities would mean mastery of this mind layer.
According to Sarkar, pratydhdra consists of four stages, namely yatamdna, vydtireka,
ekendriya, and vasikdra. Yatamdna is defined by him as 'a conscious effort to transcend the negative
influence of the propensities', which involves the firm resolution to follow the spiritual path in spite of
temptations to the contrary as a result of various propensities.'*" It is a preliminary stage in the
practice of pratydhdra where propensities are not yet controlled but where a firm determination to
control them is present.
In the second stage of pratydhdra, which Sarkar terms vydtireka, the sddhaka experiences
partial confrol over his or her propensities. Sarkar says that for a sddhaka in the stage of vydtireka,
'some propensities may be controlled at one time, but unconfroUed at another time'.'*' He cites the
example of a person who may have control over physical desfres but experiences an increase in anger.
The third stage, ekendriya, is the stage where all propensities are under control but only
temporarily. This is when certain propensities may assert themselves sfrongly owing to unexhausted

'*' YP, p. 150.

'*' CC Part 3, pp. 69-73. This work contains details on the practice of therapeutic prdridydma techniques. The
spiritual techniques mentioned earlier in the text, except for sddhdrand prdridydma, have not been described in
print.
'*' YP, p. 149.
""AM/Parts 5-8, p. 583.
"'Ibid.
173
samskdras that are deeply embedded in the mind. While this is a relatively advanced stage of
pratydhdra according to Sarkar, it is nevertheless incomplete as the pdsas (fetters) and ripus (enemies)
of the mind are yet to be totally confrolled. While a sddhaka at this stage may experience great bliss
and concentration of mind and acqufre some occult powers, there is a high likelihood of the pdsas and
ripus expressing themselves through the mind and the indriyas (sensory or motor organs with
associated nerves, nerve fluid, and brain site).
fri the fourth stage, when all the indriyas are fully controlled and the mind is completely
subservient to the dtman (unit consciousness), actual pratydhdra or vasikdra siddhi (attainment of
vasikdra) is said to be reached:

This is real pratydhdra, or vasikdra siddhi, for it means Prakrti has merged into the
Supreme Cognitive Principle. This is called Krsriasararia [taking shelter in Krsria] in
devotional psychology. The importance of pratydhdra sddhand is immense, because it
involves a harmonious blending of knowledge, devotion and action. ... Pratydhdra
begins with vigorous action and culminates in selfless devotion.'*'

For Sarkar, the development of pratydhdra unfolds from the initial phase of vigorous straggle against
all inner and outer obstacles to the final phase of selfless devotion to the Supreme. In vasikdra, the
attitude of vigorous straggle that Sarkar terms sdkta bhdva (ideational stance of sdkta) finds its
consummation. Through straggle, the potential of devotion is graduaUy realised and finally develops
into the fullness of selfless surrender, which he terms vaisriava bhdva (ideational stance of
vflwnava).'** With perfect surrender, the final goal is attained as the mind dives into parama purusa.
It appears from the above that Sarkar is expanding on the meaning of the term pratydhdra to include
meditative realisations technically belonging to the categories of dhydna and samddhi. (I will
elaborate on Sarkar's redefinition of pratydhdra in subsection 6.3.3.)

Dhdrarid
The sixth 'limb' of Sarkar's path of practice is dhdrarid, which he defines as 'locating the mind furoly
in an area or region of the body'.'*' Dhdrarid perfects the vijfidnamaya kosa by developing the
essential qualities of viveka (discrimination) vairdgya (non-attachment) latent in this kosa. According
to Sarkar,

This involves concentrating upon the respective controlling points of the fundamental
factors located within the human body. That is, the mind is to be fixed on specific
cakras [plexuses] and engaged in Cosmic ideation.""

'**AM/Parts5-8,p.583.
'*'AM/Parts5-8,p.584.
"'Ibid.
168 Ihi^

'*'yp, p. 151.
"°Ibid
174
The specific technique for dhdrarid can be found in Sarkar's third lesson of sahaja yoga, which aims
at regulation of and control over the five fundamental factors in the body in the service of subtier
spiritual development. (This will be discussed in greater detail in Chapter 6.) In connection with
dhdrarid, Sarkar mentions a related but distinct practice termed sodhana, which he translates as
"refinement' or 'purification'.'" This practice involves concenfration on the cakras with
accompanying cosmic ideation, and forms the fifth lesson of AM sddhand (sahaja yoga). Sarkar
recognises that this particular spiritual practice of cakra sodhana is an innovation not included in the
traditional eight-limbed yoga.

Dhydna
Dhydna is the seventh 'limb' of the eightfold yoga, which Sarkar defines, in accordance with PataiijaU,
as 'the unbroken flow of mind towards the supreme goal'.'" Dhydna perfects the hirarimaya kosa, as
it involves channelling the mind into a single stream of expansion towards the supreme consciousness,
which is devotion. Sarkar emphasises that dhydna is dynamic, in contrast to dhdrarid, which is static,
and he compares dhydna to a 'thread of molasses' that appears still even though a continuous flow is
present.'" As mentioned in Chapter 4, the essential quahty of hirarimaya kosa is intense attraction to
or devotion for the supreme, which is awakened and perfected by dhydna. Technically, dhydna is the
practice of meditation wherein the mind is gradually expanded and pure consciousness is increasingly
reflected on the purified 'mirror' of the mind.
Sarkar mentions two related aspects of dhydna, which he terms prariidhdna and anudhydna.'^*
Prariidhdna is the process of focussing all propensities onto a single point and directing that pointed
mind towards parama purusa. In order to achieve this, Sarkar says that there has to be a parallelism of
acoustic rhythm and mental rhythm, referring to the synergistic use of both mantra incantation and
mantra ideation (i.e. cognitive, volitional and affective immersion in the mantra's meaning). When
both ideation and incantation are simultaneously present, the ffrst aspect of dhydna, prariidhdna, is
said to be also present. When, however, there is mere incantation without ideation, a condition known
as japakriyd ('act of repetition') rather than dhydna is present. Anudhydna, the second aspect of
dhydna, is said to be the dynamic movement of attention towards parama purusa, a continuous
'chasing after' the supreme goal in spite of the mind being repeatedly distracted from it. Sarkar
describes anudhydna like this:

Anudhydna means you have accepted that Supreme Self as the object of ideation, but
suppose your Lord does not want you, suppose you are a sinner and your Lord does not
want that you should get Him; He will try to dart away from you, but in that case, you
will have to chase him mentally. This chasing of yours is called Anudhydna. You

171
YP,p. 151.
"'Ibid
"'55Partl8,p. 85.
""55Partl8,pp. 82-86.
175
 must say, 'O my Lord, I may be a sinner but I won't spare you, I must catch you.'
When this mentality functions it is Anudhydna.'^^

Progress in dhydna is correlated to the rise of the kuridalirii traversing the various cakras
through the cenfral channel, susumrid. Sarkar says:

So dhydna is meditation on the Supreme Entity so that there is an incessant upward

movement of the mind towards Parama Purusa.

In Sarkar's sahaja yoga, the final ideational phase of the first lesson and the entfre sixth lesson are
essentially practices of dhydna; the first lesson, technicaUy a process of prariidhdna, leads the
practitioner to savikalpa samddhi, and the sixth lesson, technicaUy a process of anudhydna, to
nirvikalpa samddhi.

Samddhi
The eighth and final 'limb' is samddhi, defined by Sarkar as 'merger of the unit consciousness in
Cosmic Consciousness'. Sarkar views it not as a particular lesson but as a result of all the preceding
practices. As discussed in Section 5.1, the two main types of samddhi are savikalpa samddhi and
nirvikalpa samddhi, corresponding to mergence into saguria brahma (qualified cosmic consciousness)
and nirguria brahma (unqualified cosmic consciousness) respectively. (Sarkar mentions other types of
samddhi attainable by the meditator - these will be discussed in Chapter 6.) Nevertheless, as the
attainment of samddhi may only be temporary because of the store of unexhausted sarriskdras, it is
essential to maintain the momentum of practice so that samddhi can be repeatedly attained, the fetters
and enemies of the mind progressively overcome, and the sarriskdras gradually exhausted. Only in
this sense can samddhi be described as a practice on the eightfold path of yoga.
In summary, the eight limbs of Sarkar's astdriga yoga are meant to develop and perfect the
five kosas of the mind in the process of brahma realisation. (More on the process of kosa perfection
will be discussed in Chapter 6.) The development and perfection of the five kosas of the mind can be
correlated with the practices of Sarkar's astdriga yoga as follows:'"

"*55Partl8,pp. 85-86.
"'Ibid
176
 Astdriga Yoga Practice Ko^a of Mind Perfected

1. Yama
2. Niyama Kdmamaya kosa (crade mind)
3. Asana Annamaya kosa (physical body)
4. Prdridydma Manomaya kosa (subtle mind)
5. Pratydhdra Atimdnasa kosa (supramental mind)
6. Dhdrand Vijfidnamaya kosa (subliminal mind)
1. Dhydna Hiranmaya kosa (subtie causal mind)
8. Samddhi Atman (pure consciousness)

Two other factors, lying outside the framework of the astdriga yoga, contribute to the development of
the annamaya kosa, namely (1) proper diet, which in this case means a sentient diet (see section 5.5
for an elaboration on this), and (2) proper amount of physical labour or exercise. (The correlations
between astdriga yoga factors, the six lessons of sahaja yoga, and the kosas developed will be
highlighted in Chapter 6.)

The Buddha's Noble Eightfold Path

The noble eightfold path (drydstdriga mdrga) of the Buddha summarises the entfre path of Buddhist
praxis for the attainment of nibbdna (Pali) or nirvdria (Sanskrit), the ultimate state of enlightenment.
Historically older than Patafijali's eight-limbed yoga, the Buddha's noble eightfold path consists of (1)
right understanding or view (samyag drsti), (2) right intention (samyak sarrikalpa), (3) right speech
(samyag vdk), (A) right action (samyak karmdntd), (5) right livelihood (samyag dflva), (6) right effort
(samyag vydydma), (7) right mindfulness (samyak smrti), and (8) right concentration (samyak
samddhi).'^
In his enumeration of the Buddha's eightfold path, Sarkar changes the order, whether
deliberately or mistakenly, of the eight factors of spiritual practice. He places samyak karmdnta
(factor number 4 in the Buddhist enumeration) between samyag vydydma (factor number 6) and
samyak smrti (factor number 7), effectively changing the sequential order of the entfre path. In terms
of the Buddhist numbering of the eightfold path, Sarkar's version is: I, 2, 3, 5, 6, 4, 7, 8.
Sarkar interprets samyag drsti, factor 1 of the eightfold path as enumerated by him, as
variously (1) 'to see with intuition','*" (2) 'to see properly','*' and (3) to 'know what one is and what
one's goal is', which is parama purusa. He defines samyak sarrikalpa, factor 2, as having a clear
'mission in life' and possessing 'firm determination' to attain it,'*' and samyag vdk, factor 3, as the

' " Anandamih-a provides a similar table in SPSSA, p. 160.

"*5P55A, p. 160.
'™ Bhikkhu Nanamoli and Bhikkhu Bodhi (trans.). The Middle Length Discourses of the Buddha: A New
Translation of the Majjhima Nikdya (Kandy: Buddhist Publication Society, 1995), p. 134.
'*" 'Lord Buddha's Cardinal Principles', p. 2.
'*' 'Lord Buddha's Cardinal Principles', p. 2.
'*' SS Part 19, p. 83.1 switch between this source and YP depending on which of the two provides a clearer
definition of relevant terms. In both cases, the essential meaning of the terms remains unchanged.
'*' 'Lord Buddha's Cardinal Principles', p. 2.
177
proper orientation of 'all expressions, sensory or motor movements''*" or 'proper use of all your motor
organs, efferent organs.''*' He goes on to define samyag dflva, factor 4, as 'proper physical and
psychic occupation','** or physically having a wholesome, non-harmful livelihood and mentally
occupying one's mind with pure, non-harmful thoughts. Samyag vydydma, factor 5, is "proper
exercise of your physical body, ... psychic body, ... and spfritual body','*' equated with proper
physical exercise, intellectual development, and spiritual meditation. Samyak karmdntd, factor 6, is
starting and completing one's work with 'proper zeal' and 'proper sincerity','* while samyak smrti,
factor 7, is "proper memory','*' or remembering in every moment "whatever is congenial to the spirit
of ... human progress', namely the 'name' and 'idea' of parama purusa.'^ Finally, Sarkar defines
samyak samddhi, factor 8, as 'proper suspension of mind ... in Parama Purusa', which, if
permanent, is moksa, salvation.
1 will cursorily analyse, compare, and contrast Sarkar's and the Buddha's separate
enumerations of the noble eightfold path in Chapter 7.

5.6 The Sixteen Points

For his disciples, Sarkar not only provides a complex metaphysical philosophy of mind and the
universe, but also formulates a comprehensive set of Tantric spiritual practices aimed at total and
balanced development of human consciousness. Contextualised within Sakta, Vaisnava and §aiva
Tantrism and set out in the framework of astdriga yoga, the day-to-day practices of AM are further
systematised and delineated by Sarkar in the form of the Sixteen Points. Codified by him in 1971,'"
the Sixteen Points constitute a comprehensive set of methods and disciplines for fransmuting physical
energy into mind, and mind into consciousness; they are to be followed by all disciples with firmness,
devotion and love. While the astdriga yoga framework outlines the steps and sequence of practice,
Sarkar's Sixteen Points detail the actual methods and practices involved. Sarkar exhorts:

There is nothing disorderly in the kingdom of the Lord. Follow an orderly and
systematic life as per sixteen cardinal points and get yourself crowned with success in
aU the strata of life.'"

'*" 55 Part 19, p. 83.

''' 'Lord Buddha's Cardinal Principles', p. 2.
'** 55 Part 19, p. 84.
'*' 'Lord Buddha's Cardinal Principles', p. 3.
'^^ 55 Part 19, p. 85.
'*'55Partl9,p.85.
"" 'Lord Buddha's Cardinal Principles', p. 3.
'"55Partl9,p. 86.
' " Vijayananda, Anandamdrtifi as I Knew Him (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1994), p. 51.
' " Tarak, Ananda Mdrga Social and Spiritual Practices (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sanjgha, 1990), p.
3. This is the main source for my discussion on Sarkar's Sixteen Points. Another tertiary source is Jitendra
Singh & Bhaskarananda, Biopsychology of Spiritual Practices: Science behind the Sixteen Points ofAnanda
Mdrga Practices (Anandanagar: Gurukula Publications, 2000).
178
 The life of the person becomes mechanical if he remains overwhelmed with the
sentiment that one must do such acts, one must perform such service, one must rise in
this manner and sit in this manner, and so on. Happiness disappears there. For this
reason, such ritualism cannot be called real Karma. In the absence of love, penance
undergone for show only is fmitiess. All ritualistic devotion, sham penance, counting
the beads, are meant only for public show. Tme love and the Supreme Goal are lost
sight of Brahma cannot be attained through any show actions, because in ritualistic
thoughts the sweetness of happiness is lacking. Divine Bliss is easily available only to
those who base their sddhand on love.""

Connected to the Sixteen Points are a set of social conduct rales divided into fifteen silas
('ethical disciplines'), forty social norms, and Carydcarya rules. These conduct rales regulate the day-
to-day conduct of Tantric sddhakas who have been initiated into the path of AM and are meant to
promote both individual growth and collective welfare. (They will be discussed later in this section.)
The Sixteen Points are divided into two parts, the first being jaiva dharma ('path for
maintenance of life') and the second bhagavad dharma ('path to salvation').'" Jaiva dharma consists
of seven points relating to the physical health and development of the individual: (1) the urinary organ
should be washed with water after urination; (2) males should either be circumcised or keep the
foreskin pulled back at all times; (3) joint hair of the body should never be cut; (4) males should
always use a kaupina or langota (a type of supportive underwear similar to the loincloth traditionally
worn by Indian ascetics); (5) vydpaka sauca, or half bath, should be performed before meals, dsanas,
meditation, and sleep; (6) full bath should be performed according to the prescribed Yogic system; (7)
a sadhaka's diet should be sdttvika or 'sentient' in nature. While Sarkar lists the Sixteen Points in his
social treatise, Carydcarya Part 2, he does not elaborate on these points in that freatise. For the
purpose of the present study, details of the Sixteen Points are obtained primarily from secondary AM
sources and from Sarkar's own words interspersed throughout the primary texts.

Jaiva Dharma
The first and second points of jaiva dharma relate specifically to maintenance of hygiene and resfraint
of sexual desire. Sarkar's argument is that deposits of urinary sediment in the genitals due to lack of
proper washing and unretracted foreskin (for males) can cause sexual excitation and excessive sexual
desfre, which will divert the mind away from spiritual subtiety. Washing the excretory organs after
urination also helps to prevent accumulation of residual urine that might cause infection. Related to
the fust two points is the fourth point of wearing supportive underwear known as langota for males.
This serves the purpose of protecting and firmly supporting the male genitals, as well as preventing
their excessive stimulation through movement. Sarkar does not give any specific instmction on this
fourth point for females.

""AM55P, p.4.
"'AM55P, pp. 5 and 10.
179
 The third point of not cutting joint hafr is, according to Sarkar, aimed at maintaining proper
function of the thyroid gland. He sees thyroid function as inversely proportional to the function of the
lymph glands located at or near body joints, such as the armpits and the pubic area. The joint hafr and
pubic hafr maintain an optimal temperature for the normal functioning of the lymph glands. If this hafr
is cut, these lymph glands become excessively active, resulting in the thyroid gland becoming less
active owing to the inverse relationship between the two. A consequence of reduced thyroid function
is abnormal secretion of thyroid hormones, resulting in psychological disturbances.
The fifth point, regarding half-bath or full-bath, relates to the need to keep the body cool and
clean prior to important and heat-generating activities such as eating, dsana-practice and meditation.
While sleep does not generate body heat, having a cool and clean body aids in a restful and deep sleep
essential for health. Sarkar sees the digestive processes that follow food consumption as heat
producing, and also the practice of yoga postures, which though gentle, requfres energy and
concentration that comes from metabolism. A cool body will assist in keeping the body comfortable
and preventing over-heating of sensitive glands and sub-glands. Sarkar regards the practice of Tantric
meditation as one that can generate tremendous amounts of heat due to the movement of the kuridalini
through the central channel. This movement may encounter obstacles and blockages in the form of
impurities in the cakras, and heat is produced as a result of frictional forces caused by the kuridalirii
piercing the blocked cakras. The half-bath involves rinsing the mouth and pouring cool water over
selected parts of the body including the face, eyes, elbows and hands, knees and feet, ears and back of
neck, navel and genitals.
Sarkar recommends the full-bath according to the Yogic system as his sixth point. He
recommends three time periods as most suitable for having a bath because of the predominance of
sentient force in the environment. These times are forty-five minutes before and after dawn (moming
sandhyd), forty-five minutes before and after noon (noon sandhyd), and forty-five minutes before and
after sunset (evening sandhyd). The temperature of the water used for bathing has to be equal to or
lower than the body temperature to prevent excessive heating of the skin. The specific method of
bathing involves wetting the navel first, followed by the lower back portion directiy opposite the
navel, the crown of the head and down the spine, and finishing with a thorough bath of the whole
body. Sarkar explains that pouring water on the crown of the head and down the spine refreshes and
energises the nervous system, and prepares the body for the bath. The bath culminates in recitation of
the bath mantra while the body is still wet and facing a source of light. This exercise is meant to help
integrate spfrituality into activities of daily life, and to vitalise the body by absorption of light via the
focussing effect of water drops on the skin.
The seventh point involves consumption of sentient or sdttvika food, thought to be most
appropriate and beneficial for spiritual practitioners because of its harmonising and subtilising effects.
According to Sarkar's cosmology, the sentient force (sattva guria), like the mutative and static forces,
is present in all created objects in the entire universe. Foods are likewise categorised according to the

180
type of force dominant in them. Static food is viewed as harmful to the mind and may or may not be
harmful to the body. Such foods primarily have a duUing and de-energising effect on the mind.
Mutative food is thought to be good for the body but may or may not be good for the mind. Such
foods can cause restlessness and excessive activity in the mind. Sentient food is considered good for
both body and mind, producing sentient ceUs and facilitating elevation of the mind:

If ceUs are affected by food and water, and if the nature of the ceUs affects the nature
of the human mind, obviously human beings should eat the correct diet, because food
and mind are closely related to each other. Any food item, v^ether good or bad, must
not be taken indiscriminately because it may lead to mental degeneration. Sincere
spiritual aspirants must foUow the dictum: Aharasuddhau sattvasuddhih ["a sentient
diet produces a sentient body"]."*

Sentient food is lacto-vegetarian in nature and consists of aU fresh vegetables, legumes and bean
products, wheat and wheat products, most fhiits, and milk and milk products, with the exception of
garlic, onion, mushroom, and eggs. The last four items are classified under static food because of thefr
toxic, de-energising, and heat-and gas-producing effects on the body and mind.

Bhagavad Dharma
The next nine of the Sixteen Points of AM are collectively termed the 'the Lord's Path' or bhagavad
dharma, and are concemed with the psycho-spiritual development of the disciple. These items are: (8)
observing fast as prescribed; (9) doing sddhana regularly; (10) observing uncompromising strictness
and faith regarding the sanctity of the ista (goal); (11) observing uncompromising strictness and faith
regarding the sanctity of the adarsa (ideology); (12) observing uncompromising strictness and faith
regarding the sanctity of the Supreme Command; (13) observing uncompromising strictness and feith
regarding the sanctity of the Conduct Rules; (14) remembering the content of one's oaths always; (15)
compulsory regular participation in weekly dharmacakra (group meditation) at the local jagrti (yoga
centre); and (16) observing C.S.D.K. (conduct mles, seminar, duty, and kirtana).

A. Upavasa
The eighth of the Sixteen Points (also the first point of bhagavad dharma) is upavasa or 'fasting'
Sarkar exhorts his disciples to abstain from food and water on ekadasf, the eleventh day after the day
of the fiiU or new moon. The reason he gives is that on this day, the moon exerts a stronger
gravitational puU on the body and causes the Uquid and gaseous factors in the body to rise up. This
upward rise in the gases and liquids results in congestion of the head and chest, accompanied by
mental disturbance. An empty digestive tract is supposed to counteract this congestive and disturbing
effect, creating improved physical and mental balance and giving the digestive system a much-needed
rest. Fasting is also thought to limit the production of seminal fluid from lymph, and therefore to help

181
in resti-aint of sexual desire. Family members of AM are required to fast twice a month while
missionary monks and nuns fast four times a month, the additional days of fasting being the full and
new moon days.

B. Sddhand
The ninth point is sddhand, 'effort for completion'. Sddhand is the conscious effort made by an
individual to realise the spfritual goal of liberation or salvation, and constitutes the essential spiritual
practices needed to reach that goal. It primarily consists of the meditational systems of sahaja yoga,
kdpdlika yoga, and visesa yoga. In addition, it includes performance of four basic kinds of service or
yajfia, which Sarkar has defined in his own way. The first is bhuta yajna or 'service to the created
world', which Sarkar understands as caring for and maintaining animals, plants, and inanimate objects
in a spfrit of seeing everything as expressions of the Supreme. Next is pitr yajfia or 'service to
ancestors', which is performed through remembrance of and salutation to ancestors during the
recitation of the bath mantra. The third type of service is nr yajfia or 'service to humanity', consisting
of four sub-types: sudrocita sevd, or serving others through physical labour; vaisyocita sevd, or
serving others through financial means; ksattriyocita sevd, or serving those in disfress with physical
prowess and valour; and viprocita sevd, or serving others through spiritual or intellectual teaching.
The fourth type of service is adhydtma yajfia, or service to the Supreme through engaging in spfritual
contemplation during formal meditation and throughout the day. Sddhand also includes the practice of
kirtana (singing and dancing to God's name), paficajanya (waking up at five in the moming for
meditation), and guru sakdsa (taking shelter in the guru). Sarkar defines paficajanya as the specific
time of five o'clock in the moming, when the spiritual and sentient vibration is especially sfrong and
most beneficial for meditation. He advocates devotional singing of his self-composed songs - Prabhat
Sarngit; the practice of kirtana; and silent meditation during this time.

C. Ista
The tenth of the Sixteen Points admonishes the disciple to uphold the sanctity of the ista (goal) with
unshakeable faith and strictness. Ista is defined as the 'goal towards which we are moving, the
personalised aspect of the Absolute, best suited to u s ' . ' " In concrete terms, ista is the divine
consciousness in the form of the guru or spiritual master, who guides the disciple on the path of
emancipation through his instructions and example. AM followers identify the ista as Sarkar himself,
the Tanfric guru. On a more absfract level of meaning, ista is the infinite parama purusa that all
sincere spiritual aspfrants seek to realise, the non-reifiable source, ground, and goal of the universe.

"* YP p. 3.
'^'' AMSSP, p. 16.
182
D. Adarsa
The next item, ddarsa, is the 'ideology' of AM, the practical path by which the disciple progresses
towards his or her ista. Sarkar gives a philosophical definition of ddarsa with reference to a related
concept of bhdva or 'idea'. He defines bhdva as a state of psycho-spiritual parallelism wherein the
psychic waves of the individual mind have attained parallelism with the spiritual waves of the dtman.
This psycho-spiritual parallelism is the mechanism underlying the state of samddhi, which occurs
when the unit mind merges into the dtman following complete transformation of psychic waves of
limited wavelength into straight-line waves of infinite wavelength. Sarkar goes on to say:

When this bhdva or idea is conceived on the psychic level, it is "ideology". Ideology,
therefore, is the conception of idea and nothing else. Hence when we call some
materialistic or political principles of a person, party, nation or federation an
"ideology", it is a wrong use of the term. "Ideology" involves in it a spiritual sense; it
is an inspiration which has a parallelism with the Spiritual Entity."*

In other words, Sarkar sees ideology as a spiritually inspfred set of concepts and ideals conceived in
the post-samddhi state that serves to guide and dfrect the spfritual aspfrant on the path of
enlightenment. He stresses that ideology should be rational and non-dogmatic in nature, free of
superstitions, and scientific in its approach:

Even if a boy says something logical, it should be accepted; and even if the lotus-bom
Brahma says something illogical it should be rejected like straw.'"
What is dogma? Dogma is an idea with a rigid boundary line, which won't allow you
to go beyond the periphery of that boundary line. Thus dogma goes against the
fundamental spirit of the human mind. Tht human mind won't tolerate anything rigid.
It wants movement - not only movement, but accelerated movement. So you should
be vocal in fighting the influence of dogmas ...'"" Spirituality stands for evolution and
elevation, not for superstitions or pessimism.'"'

In our Ananda Marga, spfritual practices are scientific and systematic and based in
rationality. Fear and superstition have no part in it.'"'

Sarkar has described his ideology as one that combines 'subjective approach with objective
adjustment', meaning that the inner subjective quest for God- or self-realisation is to be integrated
with an outer objective engagement with the world. In other words, fransformation of the self is not
separate from transformation of society through selfless service and altemative social stmctures based
on the spirit of universal love he calls neohumanism. Neohumanism is a perspective and emotional
attitude characterised by deep, unbounded love for inanimate objects, plants, animals, human beings.

"* lAI, p. 63.

'"BG,p.79.
200 jpj^^ p JQ4
'"' TPRS, p. 106.
'"' TPRS, p. 98.
183
and all life forms in the universe - it is unconditional love for the universe itself bom out of non-dual
realisation of the cosmic mind.
In short, the eleventh point calls upon the disciple to be uncompromisingly strict and faithful to
the spfritually inspfred ideology of non-dogmatism, rationality, and integration of profound spirituality
with active world engagement - an ideology that forms the essential path leading to final emancipation
for both self and society. This ideology is expressed in the spfritual and social philosophies of Sarkar,
rooted as they are in his appropriation and re-interpretation of the Indian episteme of Tanfra.

E. Supreme Command
The twelfth point exhorts the disciple to 'observe uncompromising strictness and faith regarding the
sanctity of the Supreme Command'.'"' The supreme command is the quintessential injunction given
by Sarkar to all his disciples, which encapsulates the ideals and way of life of dnanda mdrgis
(followers of AM). It exhorts all dnanda mdrgis to practise sddhand twice a day regularly, based
solidly on the moral principles of yama and niyama, and to endeavour to guide others onto the path of
. . 1. 204
spmtuality.

F. Conduct Rules
The thirteenth point relates to observance of AM conduct rales, which consist of yama and niyama, the
fifteen silas, the forty social norms, and a host of other rules collected together in Ananda Mdrga
Carydcarya Part 2. As these rules are extensive and to some extent repetitive, they will not be
discussed here except for the list of fifteen silas or 'rales of behaviour'.'"' These fifteen rales of
behaviour regulate the personal conduct of dnanda mdrgis and are deemed important for the
maintenance of inner equilibrium and the cultivation of inner strength necessary for deep meditation.
They are: (1) forgiveness; (2) magnanimity of mind; (3) perpetual restraint on behaviour and temper;
(4) readiness to sacrifice everything of individual life for ideology; (5) all-round self-restraint; (6)
sweet and smiling behaviour; (7) moral courage; (8) setting an example by individual conduct before
asking anybody to do the same; (9) keeping aloof from criticizing others, condemning others, personal
abuse and all sorts of groupism; (10) strict adherence to the principles of yama and niyama; (11) if any
mistake has been committed unknowingly or unconsciously through carelessness, admitting it

" ' C C Part 2, p. 22.

The supreme command is located at the front of each volume of Sarkar's collected discourses and reads as
follows: 'Those who perform sddhand twice a day regularly, the thought of Parama Purusa will certainly arise
in their minds at the time of death. Their liberation is a sure guarantee. Therefore every Ananda Margi will have
to perform sddhand twice a day invariably. Verily is this the command of the Lord. Without yama and niyama,
sddhand is an impossibility. Hence the Lord's command is also to follow yama and niyama. Disobedience to
this command is to throw oneself into the tortures of animal life for crores of years. That no one should undergo
torments such as these, that everyone might be enabled to enjoy the eternal blessedness under the loving shelter
of the Lord, it is the bounden duty of every Ananda Margi to endeavour to bring all to the path of bliss. Verily is
this a part and parcel of sddhand, to lead others along the path of righteousness.'
CC Part 2, p. 20. See CC and the secondary text AMSSP for details of conduct rules not spelled out in the
thesis.
184
immediately and asking for punishment; (12) even while dealing with a person of inimical nature,
keeping oneself free from hatred, anger and vanity; (13) keeping aloof from talkativeness; (14)
obedience to the stractural code of discipline; and (15) sense of responsibility. Sarkar does not make
clear what the 'stractural code of discipline' is, and no definition is given in any of Sarkar's pubUshed
discourses or AM's secondary texts.

G. Oaths
The fourteenth of the Sixteen Points is constant remembrance of one's oaths made during the process
of initiation. These oaths relate to the promise to avoid all evil actions; to perform good actions; and
to maintain the confidentiality of the Tantric meditative techniques transmitted. The disciple is meant
to recall these oaths every moming upon awakening and to apply them in life. Another essential oath
is the one prescribed by Sarkar for his disciples soon before his death in 1990, which requfres all
practitioners of AM to devote their entfre being to the elevation and liberation of all living and non-
living entities in the universe.'"* This oath is akin to the bodhisattva vow of Mahayana Buddhism, but
extends beyond it to include all inanimate objects, since all things and all life-forms are seen as
pulsative expressions of pure consciousness and are to be embraced with compassion and love.

H. Dharmacakra
The fifteenth point pertains to regular participation in weekly group meditations known as
dharmacakra held at the various local AM centres. Sarkar greatly emphasises the need for weekly
dharmacakra, saying that this is a time for spiritually minded people to come together for mutual
support and company. He calls this extemal satsafiga or the "company of the Absolute' in the form of
pure-minded fellow practitioners, as opposed to intemal satsafiga - inner closeness to the Absolute
through meditation. Sarkar affirms:

Even a gold vessel needs polishing occasionally. Not maintained, it gathers dust and
dirt and loses its lusfre. Similarly, even a good person, a spiritual aspfrant needs proper
maintenance, for in a world of constant change, care must be taken that the change be
always towards the better or the higher. Keeping good company is essential for this
positive development... [and] is conducive to liberation and salvation.'"'

He also makes it clear that attendance at weekly dharmacakra can be a tremendous boost to one's
meditative progress:

'"' Dharmavedananda, Who's Afraid of the Tantric Guru, p. 407. This oath, later known as the Mahaprayana
Oath, reads: 'All my energy, all my mind, all my thoughts, all my deeds are to be goaded unto the path of the
collective elevation of human society, without neglecting other animate and inanimate objects, right from this
moment until the last point of my living on this earth.'
"" TPRS, p. 29.
185
 In collective isvara prariidhdna the combined mental efforts work together, and so give
rise to the expression of the higher signs in a very short time ... do not miss the
opportunity of collective isvara prariidhdna whenever some of you convenientiy meet
together. The indomitable mental force aroused as a result of collective isvara
prariidhdna will help you solve any problem, great or small on this earth. It is for this
reason that you should always be zealous to attend weekly dharmacakra regularly.

I. C.S.D.K.
The sixteenth and final point is observance of C.S.D.K.: conduct rales, seminar, duty, and kirtana.
Conduct rules have been mentioned under the thirteenth point, and their appearance here constitutes a
replication, a phenomenon that occurs frequentiy in Sarkar's delineation of AM's moral and social
codes. A probable explanation for this anomaly is that these instractions were most likely given and
repeatedly stressed with additional content on several different occasions. When compiled in one
book (namely Ananda Mdrga Carydcarya Part 2), the repetitiveness and replication of some of the
rules become apparent. Seminars (S) are formal teaching and leaming sessions conducted by senior
mdrgis or dcdryas (monks and nuns of AM) to help all members to increase thefr grasp of AM
philosophy. Duties (D) are tasks that have been allocated to any mdrgi by an dcdrya or margi in an
organisational position, and are to be done with dedication and zeal by the mdrgi concemed. Kirtana
(K) is the singing of, and dancing to, the universal mantra of AM, 'bdbd ndm kevalam', which is to be
practised as a supportive technique prior to formal meditation. In conjunction with kirtana, Sarkar
prescribes two other dances, known as kausiki and tdndava, which are meant to aid physical health and
spiritual development, and are to be practised twice a day.
Sarkar is said to have designed kausiki specifically for women in 1978 for the development of
confidence and inner strength. As tdndava consists of strenuous jarring movements that may hurt the
female reproductive organs and stimulate the secretion of the male hormone, testosterone, its practice
is proscribed by Sarkar for women. In its place, they are to practise kausiki:

While dancing kausiki, one seeks to establish the link between the microcosm and the
Macrocosm. This process is commonly known as mysticism. Kausiki pertains to the
innermost kosas, the layers of existence. Kausiki dance is like the blossoming of the
innermost Self.'"'

Kausiki is a spiritual dance consisting of a sequence of sixteen movements performed in rhythm to the
chanted mantra 'bdbd ndm kevalam', accompanied by a specific ideation with each direction of
movement. It is supposed to be a remedy for twenty-two specific diseases and an aid in developing
strength,flexibility,cardiovascular fitness and endurance.
Sarkar also recommends tdndava as a specifically spfritual dance for men. According to him,
tdndava was invented by Sadasiva some seven thousand years ago and is meant to develop the courage

^"^ GHC, pp. 75-76.

^°'AM55P, p. 22.
186
and vigour of a spiritual warrior. It is said to have a masculinizing effect on the body and to develop a
firm determination to stmggle against all forms of fear and inertia. Involving vigorous jumping from
one foot to the other, with the raised knee crossing the point of the navel, heart or throat, tdndava is
performed with the ideation of a spfritual warrior:

'I will face the fear of death, which surrounds me on all sides, and overcome it with the
power of the life force of my mind. No force wUl deter me from my goal. No evil
tendency, no enemy, no bondage can shake my determination to be victorious. I dance
light, strong and graceful to the joyful rhythm, the indomitable beat of my Cosmic
Father's will. Victory to the Supreme Father.'""

In soteriological terms, the Sixteen Points aim at sublimating physical energy (bhdvarii sakti)
into psychic energy (bhairavi sakti), psychic energy into spiritual energy (kausiki sakti), and spiritual
energy into supreme consciousness (citisakti or purusottama). (In Chapter 3, 1 discussed the
cosmogonic conversion of kausiki sakti into bhairavi sakti and finally into bhdvarii sakti. The
sequence of spiritual evolution replicates the cosmogonic process but in reverse order.) Also, the
Sixteen Points can be seen to affect and develop all the kosas simultaneously: the first seven practices
of jaiva dharma predominantly control the annamaya kosa and kdmamaya kosa, while the following
nine practices of bhagavad dharma predominantly affect the manomaya kosa through to the deepest
hirarimaya kosa. These correlations are highlighted in the following tables based on my analysis:

Sixteen Points (Jaiva Dharma) Ko^as Developed

1. Use of water on urinary organ

2. Circumcision or retraction of
penile foreskin for males
3. Maintenance of joint hair

4. Use of langota (tight fitting underwear) Annamaya kosa and kdmamaya kosa

5. Vydpaka sauca (half bath)

6. Bath according to prescribed system

7. Sentient (sdttvika) diet

^"'AM55P, p. 83.
^"DOrVol. l,pp.2-3.
187
 Sixteen Points (Bhdgavad Dharma) KoSas Developed

8. Upavasa (fasting) Annamaya kosa, kdmamaya kosa, and

manomaya kosa by:
(a) cleansing body
(b) abandoning sensual attachment
(c) enhancing willpower of the mind
9. Sddhand (spiritual practice) All five mental kosas

10. Ista (Ideal or Goal) All five mental kosas by:

(a) directing all propensities in all kosas
11. Adarsa (Ideology) towards ista through ddarsa, which is
devotion
12. Supreme Command (b) performance of sddhand twice daily
and devotional effort to lead all beings
towards spirituality
13. Conduct Rules Kdmamaya kosa, manomaya kosa, and
atimdnasa kosa by:
14. Oaths (a) restraint of sense-desires
(b) engaging in inspirational thoughts,
altruistic motivation, and wholesome
actions and service
15. Weekly Dharmacakra All five mental kosas

16. C.S.D.K. (Conduct rules. Seminar, C, S, D - kdmamaya kosa and manomaya kosa
Duty, Kirtana + Kausiki + Tdndava) K - annamaya kosa + all five mental kosas
especially the deeper ones due to ideative and
devotional component of dances.

The Sixteen Points can also be regarded as essential physico-psycho-spiritual practices that, through
the perfection and expansion of the kosas, expand the unit mental plate (citta). They increase the
magnitude of the citta (mental plate = ectoplasm) and cause it to progressively burst through the
linings of the aham (sense of doership = ectoplasm) and the mahat (sense of self-existence =
endoplasm), resulting in oneness with the all-pervasive and underiying ground of unconfined
consciousness (parama purusa)?'^

In summary, the Sixteen Points of AM are a set of strict and demanding disciplines involving
physical, psychic, and spiritual effort from the practitioner. Designed by Sarkar for the total
development and perfection of the human being, these points represent AM's Tantric path in its
entirety, a path that promises to lead the individual to the twin goals of liberation and salvation, and to
secure bliss for society and all of creation. The ascetic nature of many of AM's practices perhaps
reflects Sarkar's appropriation of traditional Tantric vows tinged with ascetic elements of Jaina praxis,
in the service of meditative and spiritual growth. To the essentially spiritual and subjective quest, he

Jitendra Singh and Bhaskarananda make a similar point in Biopsychology of the Spiritual Practices, p. 76.
Our interpretations of ectoplasm and endoplasm differ in that they equate ectoplasm with citta and endoplasm
with aham, while I equate ectoplasm with both citta and aham taken together and endoplasm with mahat (See
subsection 4.2.1 for my interpretation of Sarkar's models of mind.)
188
adds the idealistic and socially revolutionary goals of selfless service and societal transformation.
Inayatullah, a noted Sarkarian scholar, makes the foUowing comment on Sarkar's setting of practicaUy
impossible goals for his disciples' service and missionary work:

This could be read as an effort to provoke actions beyond human capacity, actions
which require assistance from a greater source of agency. An interesting difference is
here discemible between Sarkar and Tantrik gurus of the past; rather than, as a test of
character and preparation for spiritual initiation, having the disciples build houses out
of stone only to desfroy them again and again (as with Milarepa and his gum Marpa in
Tibetan Tantra), Sarkar's proverbial stone houses are in fact houses for the poor and
disadvantaged and do have value to society and not the self alone. Of course as a
spiritual guru, a Tantrik guru, his goal may have been as much to inspire greater bhakti
[devotion] and ego-surrender in his disciples as to fransform society.

5.7 Overview of Ananda Marga Practice Frameworks

In this chapter, I have detailed the overall soteriological framework of Sarkar's spiritual praxis,
discussing (1) its ultimate soteriological goals, (2) the fundamental pre-requisites for Sarkar's Tantric
practice, (3) the Tantric context of and spfritual developmental sequence in Sarkar's AM, (4) the
sequential listing of practice steps and principles in terms of Patafijali's astdriga yoga, and (5) the
complete system of spiritual practice methods encapsulated in the Sixteen Points.
In line with traditional Indian thinking, Sarkar conceives of the final goal of spirituality as
Self- or God-realisation, in the twin aspects of mukti and moksa. Traditionally, the distinction between
mukti and moksa has not always been clearly demarcated. Sarkar departs from tradition by making a
clear distinction between these two attainments, defining mukti as permanent realisation of oneness
with cosmic mahat or saguria brahma, and moksa as permanent realisation of oneness with
unqualified cosmic purusa or nirguria brahma. When the state of oneness with saguria brahma is only
temporary owing to unrequited sarriskdras buried in the mind of the practitioner, that attainment is
called savikalpa or samprajfidta samddhi. Similarly, the state of temporary oneness with nirguria
brahma is termed nirvikalpa or asamprajfidta samddhi. Sarkar also calls nirvikalpa samddhi the state
of brahmasadbhdva or sahajdvasthd, the latter term denoting that this ultimate state is one of ease and
naturalness, a primordial state of the mind prior to the distorting influence of prakrti. He sees moksa
as superior to mukti in terms of teleological finality, and nirvikalpa samddhi as superior to savikalpa
samddhi in terms of meditative attainment. A loosening or total disappearance of the bondage of
prakrti is essential to the attainment of mukti or moksa respectively.
Sarkar appears ambivalent about the possibility of a third soteriological goal, that of flvan-
mukti or embodied liberation. Some passages in Sarkar's texts suggest a state akin to attainment of
flvan-mukti, which he calls 'the state of supreme realisation' or 'the supreme spiritual fulfilment'."" In
particular, the attainment of tildbhdva and nitydbhdva together enables the sddhaka to realise the

' " Shaman Hatley and Sohail Inayatullah, 'Karma Samnyasa: Sarkar's Reconceptualization of Indian
Asceticism', Journal ofAsian and African Studies, vol. 34, no. 1 (1999), pp. 11-21.
189
sweet stance of madhura bhdva, a mode of being highly suggestive of flvan-mukti Sarkar s
soteriology mirrors his ontology and cosmology, neatly matching the twin goals of mukti and moksa
with the twin ontological modes of saguria brahma and nirguria brahma. Whether the third state of
flvan-mukti correlates with the mode of tdraka brahma is unclear, although circumstantial evidence
exists for just such correlation."*
On a different note, Sarkar's soteriology is not isolated from the social and the political,
insofar as his monistic and arguably non-solipsistic cosmology enables the formulation of a social
ideology that is infrinsic to the AM movement. It can be argued that his synthesis of the spiritual and
the social as two parts of the one whole of AM reflects the integral spirit of Tantra.
In keeping with the Tantric fradition of gMrw-veneration, Sarkar espouses guruvdda (guru-
doctrine) as a central feature of his soteriology. He defines a suitably qualified guru as one who has
fully realised parama purusa and who has the power to raise the kuridalirii of others on a massive
scale. Such a sadguru or perfect master, according to Sarkar, is none other than the mahdsambhuti
('great manifestation') of tdraka brahma, the personalised and liberating aspect of parama purusa. He
or she is given the title mahdkaula or "great knower of the secret of liberation or salvation' and is
regarded as the uttama prathama gum or 'highest and best guru'. Sarkar enumerates many qualities
of the sadguru, among which perfect knowledge of spiritual practices, strict discipline, and selfless
love rank as the most important. He sees the conjunction of the sadguru and the disciple in a life-
transforming event known as tdntriki diksd or 'Tantric initiation'. During diksd, the guru's spfritual
energy (gurusakti), the proper meditation technique, and the disciple's personal ista mantra are
transmitted from teacher to disciple, awakening and raising his or her dormant kuridalirii. According
to Sarkar, a traly efficacious mantra, apart from being empowered by a sadguru, has to be (1)
pulsative - that is, the mantra has to flow smoothly with the rhythm of the breath; (2) incantative -
that is, the mantra needs to have acoustic properties that can link the individual rhythm (jaivi satta)
with the cosmic rhythm (bhumd prdria); (3) ideative - that is, the mantra has to have an expansive and
subtie meaning centred on the feeling of non-duality between individual and cosmic consciousness;
and (4) suited to the samskdra of the individual practising the mantra. In his conceptualisation of the
salvific tools of mantra and initiation, Sarkar appears to be in keeping with certain key ideas of
traditional Tanfra. While Sarkar does not claim that he is tdraka brahma, the emphasis on the figure
of the guru, on the guru's indispensability and his supernatural powers in the ideology of AM lead to
an inevitable self-styling of Sarkar as the sadguru.

""AM/Parts 5-8, p. 483.

Compare this with Anandamiti-a's comment in SPSSA, p. 259: 'When one can maintain continual parallelism
between his own rhythm and the Cosmic rhythm, he becomes afivan-mukta,a liberated soul. For him, every
particle of dust in the universe is as sweet as honey, and his existence, too, is as sweet as honey to the universe.'
See When the Time Comes, p. 127: Chandranath Kumar identifies a class offivan-muktawith divine
manifestations serving as media through which tdraka brahma acts; this suggests that the mode of being of such
fivan-muktas is a state of oneness with tdraka brahma.
190
 Apart from the essential pre-requisites of Sarkar's spiritual praxis, correct and effective
practice of AM requires an appreciative understanding of its Tantric context and overall sequence of
spiritual development. Sarkar distinguishes his brand of Tantra from the Vedic fradition by repeatedly
emphasising the practical, contemplative, and non-discriminatory nature of Tanfra as opposed to the
ritualistic and caste-oriented focus of the Vedas. He also highUghts that Tantra, as he understands it, is
characterised by a spirit of vigorous straggle against all physical, mental and spiritual obstacles, and
aims to develop the qualities of human vigoiu- and energy. He contextualises his AM within the
framework of the five systems of §aiva Tantra, Sakta Tanfra, Vaisnava Tantra, Ganapatya Tanfra and
Saura Tantra, in which the ffrst three systems predominate. He considers AM practice as a happy
blending of the practices of §aiva Tantra, Sakta Tantra, Vaisnava Tanfra, with a balanced emphasis on
the development of knowledge or wisdom (jfidna), selfless action (karma), and devotion (bhakti).
Within the context of Tantric straggle, Sarkar detaUs the progression of human development in three
main stages: (1) pasvdcdra ('animal way') or pasubhdva ('animal ideation'), (2) virdcdra ('heroic
way') or virabhdva ('heroic ideation'), and (3) divydcdra ('divine way') or divyabhdva ('divine
ideation'). He further describes three stages of spiritual practice (sddhand): (1) sdkta, (2) vaisriava
stage, and (3) saiva stage. A comparison of these three stages of sddhand with the preceding three
stages of human progress suggests that AM practice begins at the stage of virdcdra and progressively
culminates in the stage of divydcdra.
In common with traditional Tantra, Sarkar mentions the five M's of madya ('wine'), mdrrisa
('meat'), matsya ('fish'), mudrd ('parched grains'), and maithuna ('sexual union'), but stresses that
they are to be interpreted metaphorically in AM as referring to ethical and spiritually helpful
behaviour (e.g. mdrrisa = control of speech; and mudrd = keeping virtuous company), meditative
experience (e.g. madya = experience of divine bliss due to pineal secretions) and inner practices (e.g.
matsya = control of vital force flowing through the idd and pirigald nddis; and maithuna = merging of
sakti into siva by means of intense spfritual practice). It is possible that Sarkar is attempting to
demystify esoteric practices of traditional Tantra in order to render his brand of Tantra more palatable
to the contemporary audience. Such an attempt would also be in keeping with his phUosophy of
rationalisation and non-dogmatism,"' although whether he succeeded in rendering AM entirely free of
dogmatic content is debatable.
Sarkar operationalises his path of practice using the framework of Patafijali's astdriga yoga, a
sequential listing of eight practice steps. He generally follows the traditional interpretation of astdriga
yoga but occasionally redefines some of its terms to suit his own ideology. Each of these steps affects
and develops a particular layer (kosa) of the mind, rendering the mind purer, more crystalline, and thus
more able to reflect the brilliant luminosity of parama purusa. Sarkar's six lessons of meditation

" ' See Sarkar'sfrequentusage of terms such as 'scientific', 'rationality', and 'rationalisation', in e.g. YP, p. 164:
'The third faculty which human beings should know is the process of transmutation and diversion of different
psychic pabula in a scientific manner' and p. 165: ' ... creating more scope for rationality and rationalisation on
the different planes of existence - physical, psychic and spiritual.'
191
(sahaja yoga) embody and operationalise the steps of the astdriga yoga, and will be discussed in
Chapter 6. Sarkar freely appropriates the Buddha's noble eightfold path, giving an idiosyncratic
sequencing and interpretation of the path factors. It is unclear why Sarkar refers to the Buddhist path
when much of his philosophy and praxis is derived from Hindu systems such as Yoga and Samkhya
(to be explored in Chapters 7 and 8). The incommensurability of Buddhist andtman and Hindu dtman
does not appear to have been addressed by Sarkar even as he freely appropriates the Buddhist
eightfold path. However, he does redefine steps of the eightfold path in light of his ideas on parama
purusa and samddhi, a process that can be cautiously labelled as a 'Hinduisation' of Buddhist doctrine
in the service of personal philosophical constraction.
The actual soteriological practices prescribed by Sarkar are set within the Sixteen Points of
AM. These sixteen practices have thefr specific effects on the various kosas of the mind. More
importantiy, they are designed to systematically transmute physical energy into psychic energy,
psychic energy into spiritual energy, and spfritual energy into the blissful cognitive faculty in a step-
wise fashion until the final goal of identity with parama purusa is reached. While original in stracture
and formulation, the Sixteen Points are made up of components derived from Yogic, Tantric, and
devotional praxes and can thus be said to be traditional in many ways. To this blend of traditional
elements are added Sarkar's personal innovations, such as the dances of kausiki and tdndava, and the
supreme command. In Chapters 7 and 8, we will discuss Sarkar's links with fraditional Indian
spiritualities more deeply.

192
 Chapter 6
Ananda Marga: Practice and Transformation

6.1 Spiritual Disciplines

As social and spiritual preceptor of AM, Sarkar prescribed a range of disciplines for the development
of the body, the fraining and expansion of the mind, and the realisation of the infinite consciousness
within; and he gave principles and strategies for the re-stracturing and renewal of human society. In
this chapter, I shall focus solely on the psycho-spiritual disciplines aimed at i>ra/iwa-realisation and
the mechanisms and dynamics of spfritual growth as one progresses on the AM path.

Range of Disciplines and Methods

I aim not only to analyse the psycho-spiritual practice methods taught by Sarkar, but also to describe
how these methods relate to AM's soteriological goals. Sarkar teaches the integral practice of the
threefold Yogic disciplines of jfidna, karma, and bhakti yoga, the spirit of which informs a set of
Tantric meditative techniques known as sahaja yoga (the yoga of natural ease) or rdjddhirdja yoga
(the 'king of kings' yoga). Sahaja or rdjddhirdja yoga essentially operationalises several limbs of the
eightfold yoga but extends beyond them in terms of both content and mechanics. Sahaja yoga is
primarily based on the theory and practice of kuridalirii yoga and involves the use of mantra,
visualisation, concentration, and ideation. While these techniques eventuaUy aim at raising the
kuridalini from the lowest to the topmost cakra, they do not dfrectly manipulate the force of kuridalirii
but instead work on strengthening and purification of the cakras, development of one-pointedness and
open awareness, and the experience of pure devotion. Jfidna yoga will be discussed in section 6.1.1;
karma yoga in section 6.1.2; bhakti yoga in section 6.1.3; and the six lessons of sahaja yoga in section
6.1.5.
A preliminary to formal meditation is the practice of kirtana (discussed in section 6.1.4),
devotional singing and chanting of the universal mantra of AM, 'Bdbd Ndm Kevalam', accompanied
by rhythmic dancing. The mantra is sung or chanted to different tunes, some composed by AM
members and some by Sarkar himself, all of which represent musical styles from the various countries
and cultures into which AM has spread. The practice of kirtana is aimed at preparing the body and
more importantiy the mind for deep meditation, by inducing a state of relative concenfration, devotion,
and detachment from gross thoughts and disfractions.
Advanced meditative practices accessible only to AM dcdryas, both ordained and lay, are
kdpdlika and visesa yoga. For Sarkar, both men and women, householders and renunciates, are
entitied to be trained as dcdryas. Renunciate dcdryas are celibate monks and nuns (sarrinydsins) who
have dedicated thefr entire lives to missionary work. Family dcdryas are men and women who lead
normal family and societal lives but with the authority to teach meditation and spirituality, and to
initiate potential aspfrants. The two forms of meditation - kdpdlika and visesa yoga - are highly
193
esoteric; printed information about them is unavailable, to the best of my knowledge. However, there
are scanty and extremely brief references to these meditation techniques interspersed throughout AM's
primary and tertiary texts, and it is from these that the information in section 6.1.6 is drawn. It is
likely that there are other esoteric meditation techniques deliberately kept secret and away from
general access, a policy firmly embedded in the Tantric tradition.' These techniques may have been
imparted by Sarkar to certain selected individuals and kept secret for reasons not clearly stated. One
possible reason is that these techniques are kept secret in the interest of public safety, on the grounds
that they are highly potent and potentially dangerous if misused by unqualified persons or persons
with ill intent. Naturally, such undocumented techniques will not be discussed here.
Amongst all soteriological techniques, Sarkar privileges the cultivation of bhakti or devotion,
which he equates with the highest non-dual knowledge. The types of bhakti, its relation to the
"pinnacled intellect' or agrydbuddhi, and its culmination in kevala bhakti and moksa will be
explicated. In particular, the concept of neohumanism - love for all beings and the entfre cosmos -
will be discussed in section 6.2 as an essential component of the liberation of self and intellect. The
practical cultivation of neohumanism is very much linked to the blossoming of devotional sentiment
and inspfres the efforts of AM practitioners to bring about positive social transformation.
Section 6.3 will explore the dynamics and mechanisms underpinning the dawning of pure
consciousness in the process of spfritual development. This spiritual joumey takes place within the
dialectical interplay of the forces of vidyd and avidyd, and involves a meticulous process of physico-
psycho-spiritual transmutation and elevation. The mechanisms of consciousness liberation involve
biopsychological changes, transformation of mind-states through the stages of samddhi, the upward
movement of the kuridalirii through the susumrid, and the mediating activity of microvita - an
expression of the guru's grace (krpd).

Nature of Spiritual Path and Ideal

Before delving into these disciplines, a brief discussion on the nature of the spiritual path (dharma
sddhand) and of the ideal spfritual practitioner (sddhaka), as understood by Sarkar, is warranted here.
Sarkar terms the second half of his Sixteen Points bhdgavad dharma, 'the Lord's Path', a term which
he also applies to his entire ideology and praxis, AM. He says that 'to long for and ran after the Great
is dharma' and that 'dharma should always be practised.'' He views the fundamental nature or
characteristic (dharma) of human beings as intrinsically thfrsting for infinite happiness or bliss
(dnanda), which can only be found in brahma. This innate nature (dharma) of humanity shares four
salient characteristics with the spiritual path that leads to the Lord, or bhdgavad dharma: (1) vistdra
('expansion') - continual expansion of the mind toward the infinite brahma and consequent blooming

Conversations with AM dcdryas have revealed the possible existence of techniques with names such as
microvita sddhand, bhairava sddhand and madhura sddhand, though to date I have found no documentary
evidence of such techniques. It is likely that such techniques are reserved for selected initiates in keeping with
the tradition of Tantric secrecy.
194
of universal love; (2) rasa ('flow') - constant alignment of the mind's dynamism with the universal
sport or play (tild) of brahma, or total surrender to parama purusa; (3) sevd ('service') - inner
(meditative) and outer (social or physical) acts of unconditional service motivated by a spontaneous
sense of oneness with brahma in oneself and in all things; and (4) tatsthiti ('stance of Thatness') - the
result of the fu-st three characteristics, which is 'ensconcement in Parama Purusa.'^
Sarkar conceives of the ideal spiritual practitioner as a sadvipra, a term that implies a
spiritually inspired intellectual grounded in trath, morality, and benevolence. The sadvipra ideal is
one that aU AM practitioners strive to attain, and one that may bear a relationship to the spiritual status
of jivanmukti, a permanent state of living liberation. However, it is an ideal that extends beyond the
traditional Indian notions of siddha, arhat, and bodhisattva by virtue of the social, physical and
environmental dimensions present within its overall soteriological intent. The sadvipra perhaps comes
closest to the Buddhist bodhisattva, a being who strives for enlightenment for the sole purpose of
bringing all sentient beings to liberation; a sadvipra, however, is said to broaden his or her
soteriological concem to include not only all sentient beings but also the inanimate world (e.g. care for
and proper utilisation of mineral or metallic resources) and the natural environment (e.g. protection of
flora, oceans, lakes, rivers).
In particular, Sarkar distinguishes the sadvipra from a conventional yogi, whose sole intent is
personal liberation; he describes the sadvipra as a socio-spiritual revolutionary who strives to integrate
the subjective realisation of spfritual consciousness and the objective fransformation of society and the
world. According to him, an AM practitioner is essentially a contemporary tdntrika, one who
challenges the delusory stmctures of his or her own mind and the oppressive, exploitative, duhkha-
eliciting stractures of human society, through a combination of Yogic exercises, Tantric meditation,
altraistic service, and an altemative system of socio-economics and politics based on universal love
(neohumanism).
Sarkar sees a sadvipra as having developed all four "mentalities' (varrias)* of human
psychology in a balanced way: the mentality of (1) a vipra - an intellectual and possessor of
knowledge both secular and religious;' (2) a ksattriya - a warrior who 'through incessant fight ...
[has] acqufred the mental capacity to control matter as they choose';* (3) a vaisya - a capitalist or
business-minded person who "profit[s] by trading and broking without being dfrectly involved in
production';' (4) a sudra - a labourer or worker who is intellectually dull and who 'by nature is always

AS II.6-7, pp. 19-20: Brhadesaridpranidhdnarn ca dharmah tasmdddharmah saddkdryah.

'A^55, pp. 154-156.
Sarkar redefines the traditional notion of varna ('caste') as the predominant psychology, which is neither
hereditary nor fixed within any person, of each of the four social classes in the social cycle as articulated in his
philosophy of PROUT.
' Prabhat Raiijan Sarkar, Human Society (Second Edition), trans. Vijayananda (Calcutta: Ananda Marga
Publications, 1999), p. 213.
Human Society, p. 155.
Human Society, p. 133.
195
absorbed in material thoughts'.^ In other words, a sadvipra is to have integrally developed the
qualities of intellectual strength and acuity, fearlessness and heroism, enterprise and dynamism, and
the willingness to work hard and serve others. Of such ideal sadvipras, Sarkar says:

Sadvipras are those whose efforts are all dfrected towards the attainment of Bliss. ...
Sadvipras will wage a ceaseless, pactiess stmggle against immorality and all sorts of
divisive tendencies. ... Those spiritual revolutionaries, who work to achieve such
progressive changes for human elevation on a well-thought out, pre-planned basis,
whether in the physical, metaphysical or spiritual sphere, by adhering to the principles
of morality, are sadvipras. ... People will recognise sadvipras by their conduct, thefr
devotion to service, thefr dutifulness and their moral integrity. These sadvipras will
declare fumly, 'AU human beings are of the same caste,' 'All human beings have equal
rights,' 'AU human beings are brothers and sisters.'... [Sadvipras] have a correct
philosophy and a correct spfritual practice based on the principles of morality (yama
and niyama) ... [they] work for the good of all countries, for the all-round
emancipation of humanity ... [and they] will be the guiding personalities of the society
of tomorrow.'

In the context of the spiritual path and ideal discussed above, I will now explore the various methods
of psycho-spiritual progress practised by followers of AM.

6.1.1 Jfidna Yoga

In Sarkar's soteriological praxis, a balanced approach to the development of the faculties of intellect-
cum-intuition, action, and devotion is essential. Sarkar identifies the intellectual-cum-intuitional
approach with jndna yoga, the actional approach with karma yoga, and the devotional approach with
bhakti yoga. These three approaches constitute, for him, the ways and means of realising union of
microcosm and macrocosm, of unit consciousness and cosmic consciousness. In practice, these three
approaches are integrated in the daily spfritual life of AM practitioners, though in theory, it is possible
to analyse them separately. Sarkar himself recommends a combined practice of jfidna, karma, and
bhakti yoga as the most rapid and effective way of realising parama purusa:

If a person lacks knowledge [jfidna] and action [karma] and calls the Macrocosmic
Entity on the strength of devotion [bhakti], it is not altogether impossible to attain Him,
but that path is somewhat inconvenient. That is why I say that even though one's
mission may be fulfilled through devotion alone, it is better to complement devotion
with knowledge and action. ... Those sddhakas who advance maintaining a balanced
adjustment among the three will ultimately realise the Supreme Entity.'"

Human Society, p. 156.

'7'P/?5, pp. 155-162.
'"AM/Parts5-8,p.474.
196
The Place of Jfidna in Sarkar's AM
In this section, the first approach of jfidna yoga as conceived by Sarkar wiU be discussed. Sarkar
defines jfidna yoga as the path of practice that develops and utilises the faculty of knowledge or the
intellect. According to him, tme jfidna is spfritual knowledge and not the ordinary, conceptual
knowledge that concems the world:

One is to attain Him, to come in contact with the Divine Father, by jfidna, karma, and
bhakti What is jfidnal Jfidna is spiritual knowledge, not mundane knowledge.
Mundane knowledge is distorted knowledge. It is not knowledge at aU. Spiritual
knowledge is trae knowledge. But what is spiritual knowledge? One must know what
one is, what one's goal is. This is spiritual knowledge.

It appears that although Sarkar sees knowledge as useful for a spiritual practitioner, he rates it as
secondary to devotion:

Those who are real devotees will not neglect karma (action) and they will also acquire
knowledge necessary to perform real action. Knowledge and action cannot take a
devotee to Parama Purusa - devotion can. But for serving humanity, for objective
adjustment, knowledge and action are essential. Devotees wiU have to leam this."

In Sarkar's view, a spiritual aspirant who has knowledge and action but lacks devotion cannot attain
the highest liberation. Knowledge and action are important in so far as they aid in the cultivation of
devotion:

So knowledge and action will help you in developing devotion, but your unification
with the Supreme Self will be established with the help of devotion only. Where there
is action, and where there is knowledge, but there is a lack of devotion, nothing can be
done."

There is, however, evidence of some ambivalence regarding the position of knowledge and
intellect in the AM path of practice. While Sarkar seems to extol devotion over knowledge on many
occasions, there is at least one occasion when he does the opposite, elevating the path of knowledge
(here identified with the saiva approach) over the path of surrender (here termed prapatti mdrga):

The first question that the jfidna mdrgis pose whenever they see an object, whether
psychic or spiritual, is invariably, 'What is this?' Thefr next question is, 'What is its
source or origin?' Then they proceed further along that line to another source of
knowledge where both reflection and refraction end. That is, the mind of the inquirer
reaches a point where it fails to comprehend that plate on which the processes of
reflection and refraction operate. The point where the mind loses its capacity to

11
BG, p. 80.
" B G , pp. 178-179.
" BG, pp. 83-84.
197
 analyse or compare further is the Supreme Point; and this is the Saiva cult of
knowledge. Judged in this light, Ananda Marga philosophy also supports the Saiva
cult as it strives for the further enrichment and advancement of the cult of knowledge.
It encourages the development of intellect and wisdom, and thus motivates people to
acquire more and more knowledge. This is a great boon for humanity, as the highest
treasure of human beings, which distinguishes them from the other creatures, is their
inteUectual superiority. ... Therefore, this philosophical consciousness, which can also
be called 'Ananda Marga consciousness', wUl lead humanity to greater intellectuality.
And the constant pursuit of inteUectuality leads one to its furthest point, the place
where intuition begins ... the path of sddhand is not devoid of intellect or intuition;
rather it is based on intuition ... the non-§aiva cult, which I prefer to call prapatti
mdrga, is said to have a serious defect; it hampers, at the very outset, the development
of humanity. It states that whatever is happening in this universe is due to the Cosmic
will, without which not even a single blade of grass can move. This doctrine is called
prapattivdda. A jfidna mdrgi says in refutation, 'Well, it is a hundred percent trae that
nothing in this universe, not even a blade of grass, can move without His will. This is
exactly what we wish to discover in jfidna mdrga: that He desired it, and then the blade
of grass moved. What is the harm if we want to find out how His desfre causes
everything to happen?' And here lies the difference between the two cults, and the
superiority of the Saiva cult over the non-Saiva cult.'"

The above passage indicates unambiguously that intellect-intuition has an edge over mere
devotion on the spiritual path, which seems to contradict the preceding quotation on the soteriological
finality of devotion. This anomaly can be resolved when we examine Sarkar's conception of intellect
(buddhi) and intuition (bodhi). In his cosmology, Sarkar defines intellect as the faculty that develops
owing to the surplus of aham over citta, and intuition as the faculty that develops owing to the surplus
of mahat over aham, in the unit mind. Thus the path of intellectual enquiry or knowledge leads
ultimately to the realm of intuition associated with pure mahat or existential 'I', the apparent
subjective and detached witness of the mind and sensory objects. But as mahat is the last veil between
the mind and the dtman, arriving at mahat through intellect and intuition still falls short of the ultimate
realisation. The next step requfres a radical letting go of the apparent subject, which coincides with
the highest a/man-knowledge and the highest devotion. Hence, spiritual devotion can be viewed as
the final practice following a rigorous path of intellectual and intuitional enquiry, while blind devotion
without prior enquiry is unequivocally inferior as a soteriological practice.
Regarding the exact nature of knowledge, it is clear that Sarkar distinguishes between
mundane knowledge and spiritual knowledge. It is possible, however, that there is a subtie yet distinct
difference between provisional and final spiritual knowledge. He asserts that knowledge (jfidna) of
one's true nature and one's ultimate goal is only the first step towards taking the proper and requfred
action (karma) in order to reach that goal. Along the path of spiritual practice and action, it is again
knowledge (jndna) of relevant and effective practices that assists the practitioner to move closer to the
goal. These two kinds of jfidna appear to be provisional forms of spiritual knowledge that facilitate
the commencement and continuation of the spfritual path:

'" YP, pp. 44-45.

198
 If one knows what one is, what one's desideratum is, then one will have to move
toward the terminus of his life. This movement, this practical approach, this actional
approach, is called karma..." Now when you go to perform an action, you will have to
leam the skill of performing it. Hence there is a need for knowledge.'*

Final spiritual knowledge can be identified with devotion (bhakti), which in Sarkar's definition is
nothing other than knowledge of the dtman (dtmajfidna):

This very spiritual knowledge alone is devotion. Knowledge finally transforms itself
into devotion after constant effort. That is, when knowledge realises that nothing is to
be effected by it, then alone it surrenders to devotion."

In Sarkar's view, devotion is paradoxically both a means and an end of the path, a practice for self-
realisation as well as the fmit of that practice itself. In the initial stages of the path, devotion arises
when the amount of karma or selfless service exceeds the amount of jfidna or intellectual knowledge.
This devotion then engenders a surrendering of the ego that results in a glimpse or initial realisation of
parama purusa, which subsequently strengthens the practice of jfidna, karma, and bhakti in an ever-
progressing virtuous cycle. The ultimate realisation is reached with the attainment of kevala bhakti
(compete devotion), where the devotee, the devotional act, and the object of devotion merge into one.
Kevala bhakti is synonymous with ultimate spiritual knowledge or dtmajfidna.
From the above discussion, it can be argued that while Sarkar places knowledge below
devotion in terms of soteriological effectiveness, it is only provisional spiritual knowledge that he is
downplaying, not ultimate arman-knowledge. In the final analysis, drman-knowledge is devotion, and
devotion is dtman-knowledge. It can be argued that the distinction between knowledge and devotion
breaks down at the ultimate stage, and neither can be privileged over the other.

The Practice of Jndna Yoga

In practical terms, Sarkar appears to have envisaged jnana yoga in four distinct ways:
(1) Jndna as discriminative insight into the difference between the pure 'I' feeling (mahat) and
the luminosity of consciousness (citisakti or dtman), an insight that he calls vivekakhydti
('ensconcement in discrimination') or visayaka samdpatti ('ultimate dissolution of
microcosmic object');
(2) Jfidna as clear conception of every kosa of the mind in terms of (a) its nature and
characteristics, and of (b) where one kosa ends and the next kosa begins - a form of knowing
arguably synonymous with focussed intuitional knowledge (aparoksabhdsa) (see subsection
4.2.3);

" YP, p. 80.

'* YP, p. 178.
" YP, p. 124.
199
(3) Jfidna as omniscient knowledge (trikdladarsirii sarvajfid) of aU things in the universe, whether
past, present or future, acqufred through establishment in savikalpa samddhi; this form of
knowledge is synonymous with spirituo-intuitional knowledge (aparoksdnubhuti) discussed in
subsection 4.2.3;
(4) Jfidna as ultimate spfritual knowledge (aparoksa bodha) of parama purusa, wherein the
knower, the knowing, and the known become one in an ineffable, transcendent state of cosmic
cognisance - nirvikalpa samddhi.

Sarkar stresses that apparent 'emptying' of the mind in states of meditative absorption does
not indicate that samddhi is devoid of knowledge. He explains that in samddhi, the conscious,
subconscious and unconscious minds fuse into one, and the mind remains 'fuU of knowledge',
knowledge that he calls prajfid. In Chapter 3, I mentioned prajfid as the technical name of
purusottama (nucleus consciousness) in its stance of witnessing the kdmamaya kosa of the unit mind.
Here, the term 'prajnd' may imply a similar witnessing function of the mind in the absence of sensory
perceptions, perhaps suggesting a form of subtle awareness of the pure 'I' feeling (mahattattva), a
mental state of bliss (dnanda), or exfra-cerebral memory and information embedded in the cosmic
causal (unconscious) mind.

(1) Jfidna as Vivekakhydti:

In the path of jfidna, Sarkar attaches great importance to the search for the essence of one's
self, the essence of spirituality. To him, this essence lies in the very depths of one's mind and can be
discovered by tuming the attention inwards, even in the midst of worldly existence:

The essence of dharma, spirituality, is hidden in guhd. There are several meanings of
guhd in Sanskrit. One indicates the cave wherein God resides. It is unwise to leave the
world, to leave service to humanity and go to the Himalayas to attain Paramapurusa.
Well! This universe itself is Paramapurusa - where will you go by leaving it? ... If He
wishes you to achieve Him, you can get Him here and now. What He sees is your
aspfration for Him. Remember it - that at every step of your life He is testing whether
you have been able to arouse love for Him in your mind ... The other meaning of guhd
is 'I am', that is, the essence of dharma, Paramapurusa, is hidden in your own 'I-
ness'. That which is hidden in your own 'I-ness' - is it essential for you to go to the
Himalayas in search of it?"

For Sarkar, knowing and attaining the supreme consciousness is not a distant, almost impossible goal,
but rather a concrete experience that can occur in the present moment. It only requires a pure heart of
love and a clear recognition of the mind's true nature through sddhand:

'*AVPart33,p.56.
"AyPart33, pp. 169-170.
200
 Why speak of attaining Him in the future? You have already attained Him; you are
simply not able to see Him. ... The Supreme Consciousness is there in you as the oil is
in the oilseed. Crash the seed through sddhand and you attain Him; separate the mind
from Consciousness and you wiU see that the resplendence of the Supreme
Consciousness illuminates your whole inner being. He is there like butter in curd;
chum it and He will appear from within. Chum your mind through sddhand and God
will appear like butter from curd. He is like a subterranean river in you. Remove the
sands of mind and you will find the clear, cool waters within.'"

The above passage suggests that it is possible to realise and know brahma through a process of
spiritual practice (sddhand) - a process that enables one to see that the luminosity of supreme
consciousness is not ultimately separate from the mind but exists within and emerges from it, just as
oil exists in and emerges from the oilseed. It also suggests that pure cognisance can be distinguished
from the activities of the mind much like an underground flow of 'clear, cool waters' when the 'sands
of mind' have been removed. The act of distinguishing cognisance from the subtiest activity of the
mind, the mahat, is vivekakhydti; it is an insight that is cmcial to the practice of the second lesson (to
be explored in subsection 6.1.5).

(2) Jfidna as Aparoksabhdsa:

Sarkar stresses that in trying to understand and know the supreme consciousness lying innate
and hidden in the guhd, a clear and deep understanding of the mind is necessary. This understanding
entails analytical insight into the stmcture and function of the mind, on the basis of which recognition
of the nature of consciousness becomes possible:

Each and every individual has an 'I'. That 'I' is connected with extemal physicalities,
with extemal objects. Now when 'I' is connected with external objects, that 'I' is the
subtlest portion of mind. 'I exist'. While saying, 'exist', indirectiy we say, 'I exist in
this world, exist in such and such a place.' The object is mute here; the object is not
expressed but the object is understood. This 'F of 'I exist' is the subtiest portion of
mind. Now you know that in the mind of each and every living being is this feeling of
'I exist'. 'I am, I exist'. This 'I' is the subtiest mind. But don't you know that there is
the feeling of 'I exist' in you? You know it. You know this fact, that there is the
feeling of 'I exist' in you. Don't you know it? Then 'I know the fact that I exist. I
know the fact that there is a feeling of "I exist" in me.' Now here, the 'I' of 'I exist',
the subject of the sentence 'I exist', is the subtlest mind. And the 'I' of 'I know', the
subject of the sentence 'I know that I exist', is the Atman, is the Spirit, is the Soul. It is
not the mind ... Now this 'I exist' is the subtiest mind and it is called guhd in Sanskrit.
And what is the essence of spirituality? The 'F of 'I know'. 'I know that I exist'.
That 'I' of 'I know' is the essence of spirituality. You know so many things, but you
have to know your Self When you know your Self, that stage, that stance, is the
Supreme Stance; your sddhand, your spiritual practice is for that realization, to know
your own ' I ' . "

'"AyPart33, p. 171.
^'AVPart33, pp. 135-136.
201
Sarkar mentions that only by having 'perfect conception of each kosa' and by 'observing every current
of the mind' can a sddhaka gradually 'blend the mind with its original subject', thus attaining brahma-
hood." This insight into the kosas is to be gained through the exercise of 'spiritual effiilgence', a term
that probably means an awareness that is able to observe clearly and accurately (see discussion in
subsection 4.2.3 on the nature of focussed intuitional knowledge).

(3) Jiidna as TrikdladarsinTSarvajna (or Aparoksanubhuti):

Sarkar sees the fruition of jfiana as the attainment of omniscience (sarvajna), a result of
mastery of savikalpa samadhi, and as the reahsation of perfect non-dual knowledge of brahma
(aparoksa bodha), a result of mastery of nirvikalpa samadhi. To him, omniscience does not mean
knowing everything past, present and future simultaneously in every moment, but rather the ability to
know anything at any one time, without limitation of location or distance, by simply exercising the
power of one-pointed concentration:

In the sphere ofjnana, when people make their minds singularly pointed - when they
reach the pinnacle of intellect, then they can at will place and establish the mind on any
particular point or bindu. What happens then? This outer world - the external
physicality, the material existence comes under the purview of their memory. That is,
whenever they wish they can recollect or evoke anything in their mind. So in that state
of affairs, the fun is that the whole world then becomes their special point or bindu for
concentration and recollection by becoming one and the same with the singular minded
individual. By simply closing his or her eyes, he or she wUl be able to perceive what is
written in what particular page of a book and in what library. ... He or she only
perceived the whole world in his or her mind and has kept the recoUection of the
universe alive in his or her memory, and he or she started recoUecting things such as
'this is that' or 'that is that' ... That is, when one attains God, one becomes
omniscient. Brahmavid sarvavid dtmavid brahmavid. So how can one acqufre tme
knowledge? If you want to know all - know one. Then everything will be known to
23
you.

(4) Jfiana as Aparoksabodha:

Sarkar teaches a method that enables the practitioner to know and realise the 'F of 'I know',
the infinite flow of cognisance (akhanda cidaikarasa) within. He describes it as constant ideation on
the supreme witnessing consciousness, but not in the sense of taking it as an object of mental
concentration. Instead, he asserts that parama purusa is the ultimate subjectivity and can never be
made an object of the mind. The only method of realisation is to be constantiy vigilant and non-
forgetfiil of the fact that parama purusa is observing aU the mental and physical activities of the
individual at every moment. When this 'remembering' becomes permanentiy estabHshed, the
practitioner's mind can more easily merge into the 'Cognitive Faculty' and attain ultimate spiritual
knowledge. In other words, to know ultimate reality is to be that very reality:

^S'Partl, pp. 59-60.

AFPart6,pp. 58-59.
202
 Paramapurusa is the subject for the whole cosmos, and the cosmos is His object. He
is the Supreme Subjectivity; you are His object. It is not possible to make Him your
object, as you are His object. Then what are you to do? You have to take the ideation
that He is always witnessing you. The wise do not take Paramapurusa as thefr object;
they think that they are being witnessed by Him. Paramapurusa is not my object, but I
am the object of Paramapurusa. When a man feels this feeling constantiy, aU the time,
this stage is called Dhruvasmrti [constant remembrance]. You know that you are the
object of Paramapurusa, but you do not remember it all the time. When through
sddhand a man never forgets that Paramapurusa is always witnessing him this is
called Dhruvasmrti. In this stage alone a man attains tme knowledge.

How can the Cognitive Faculty, the Supreme Knower of the mind, become the object
of knowledge in the practical field? The fact is that when the first stage of mind, or the
existential 'I', thinks of the subject 'I' of 'I know', its existence becomes subtier than
the subtiest, and then finally merges into the Cognitive Faculty. ... So we clearly
understand that to know the Cognitive Faculty means to merge in It. It is like a salt
doll trying to fathom the depth of the ocean, and in the process becoming one with the
ocean itself."

The culminating merger of one's mind into parama purusa as a result of the constant attempt
to know it constitutes the final knowledge attainable by a sddhaka on the path of AM.
Sarkar uses another term to describe this absolute knowledge, namely abhedajfidna,
'integral knowledge'.'* He explains that whenever svajdtiya ('intra-specific'), vijdfiya (inter-
specific'), and svagata ('intra-stmctural) bheda ('differences') are eliminated, 'the relative
entity merges into the Absolute' and experiences the sdmarasya ('equipoise') of abhedajfidna
- equanimous integral knowledge." The removal of these three kinds of bheda occurs hand in
hand with the decrease in separation between the unit and cosmic minds, as a result of intense
attraction for parama purusa. Sarkar calls the dissolution of this spatial gap between the unit
and cosmic minds daisika vyavadhdna vilopa?^

General Features of Jfidna Yoga

In his definition of knowledge, Sarkar makes a distinction between knowledge of the dtman (as
previously discussed) and knowledge of the objective world, for which the term vidyd is more
commonly used. He recognises two forms of vidyd, namely pardvidyd ('subjective knowledge') and
apardvidyd ('objective knowledge'). In his view, pardvidyd is that branch of knowledge that brings
the spiritual aspfrant close to the very edge of dtmajfidna. It can arguably be identified with
provisional spiritual knowledge, as discussed earlier, constituting the various theoretical and technical
aspects of sddhand that leads the mind to oneness with macrocosmic mind but not the supreme
consciousness. Sarkar divides the process of pardvidyd into four stages:

^" A y Part 6, pp. 123-124

"A^55, pp. 171-172.
'*AVPart33,p.48.
_'^AVPart33,pp.48-49.
^'AyPart33,p.49
203
 ... first, the comprehensive study necessary for the removal of any deficiency of
knowledge; second, the process of rational analvsis to derive benefit from knowledge
acquired and to control one's own intemal and extemal ideas; thfrd, the consolidation
of the spiritual ideology through pariprasna [spiritual inquirvl; and fourth, self-
surrender [prdnipdta] to the Cognitive Faculty."

He states that pariprasna (spfritual inquiry) is a very important part of the process of pardvidyd, which
together with sevd (selfless service) and prdnipdta (complete surrender), enables a sddhaka to realise
ultimate oneness with parama purusa. Pariprasna consists in asking suitably qualified dcdryas or
feUow practitioners relevant questions relating to spfritual practice, so as to dispel any doubts one
might have or to resolve any problems that arise in the course of practice.'"
In addition to pardvidyd Sarkar makes it clear that the cultivation of apardvidyd is essential for
the spfritual aspfrant to 'successfully face the hard realities of this dusty earth, for prosperity in the
material sphere'." Disciplines such as physical science, psychology, geology, biological and medical
science, and the humanities are all included in the category of apardvidyd. To him, it is also essential
that human beings develop the fields of literatiu-e, art, and various non-malevolent forms of
entertainment so as to fully utilise "all the potentialities of the human heart'." Sarkar's aim is to
create well-rounded human beings through apardvidyd, beings who will then move further toward
evolutionary and spiritual perfection through pardvidyd.
Sarkar's approach to knowledge reflects the mission statement of AM, which is
dtmamoksdrtharri jagaddhitdya ca, or 'Self-realisation and service to all creation'. The goal of Self-
realisation is achieved by means of pardvidyd while that of service to the world is achieved by means
of a happy integration of pardvidyd and apardvidyd. For Sarkar, true and beneficial service to the
world cannot occur without genuine spfritual practice that seeks to transform all selfishness and
negativity within the mind:

... if someone works exclusively for the welfare of the world -jagaddhitdya ca - one
should realise that to render selfless service, an absolutely pure mind is required, with
the expansiveness of the vast ocean and the serenity of the blue sky. Otherwise, while
promoting the welfare of the world, one may develop a selfish desire in one's mind in a
weak moment, as a result of which one may bring harm to oneself as well as to the
universe."

At the same time, Sarkar wams against attempting to develop spiritually without any concem for
collective well-being:

^' A^55, pp. 172-173. Underline mine

'"AM/Parts 5-8, p. 536
" AM/Parts 5-8, pp. 174-175.
"AM/Parts 5-8, p. 175.
"AM/Parts 5-8, p. 174.
204
 Those who think they can concem themselves with pardvidyd only, and finally,
through its help, arrive at self-knowledge, are mistaken. Because while working
exclusively for self-realisation - dtmamoksdrtham - the worms of selfishness will
burrow deep into the human mind and finally sap all the sweeter and finer human
sensibilities, all the generous expansiveness of the human mind, and fling the person
into a quagmire of remorse.'"

In the final analysis, Sarkar's path of jndna yoga is not to be practised in isolation from the
paths of karma (selfless action) and bhakti (devotion), as evidenced from the preceding discussion on
the nature, types, and soteriological efficacy of knowledge. For Sarkar, the ultimate state of
knowledge is arrived at through knowing properly and profoundly, acting and serving selfiessly, and
most importantly, through loving purely with all the sweetness and devotional feeling of one's heart.

6.1.2 Karma Yoga

Sarkar's definition of karma yoga has been briefly alluded to in the discussion on jfidna. To him,
karma yoga is the path of selfless action and consists in the practical application of both spiritual and
mundane knowledge. When a spiritual aspirant knows the nature and goal of his or her existence, the
next step of actually practising the path that leads to this goal comes into play. As mentioned
previously, the path consists in both inner spiritual practice and outer social action, for which both
pardvidyd and apardvidyd are necessary. The application of pardvidyd and apardvidyd in the spirit of
non-attachment and selflessness constitutes karma yoga.
In Sarkar's view, karma is to be performed ceaselessly, since the very fact of existence
necessarily entails some form of action for its maintenance. The dilemma lies in the common Indian
(and Sarkarian) understanding that every action (karma) engenders a reaction or fmit (karma phala)
that may be either immediately reaped or stored as a potential for futiu-e fmition (sarriskdra). The
accumulation of sarriskdra binds the individual to further existence and prevents liberation and
salvation. Sarkar recommends three methods for preventing the accmal of sarriskdra through the
performance of action, which constitute his path of karma yoga practice:
(1) relinquishing desire for the fmits of action;
(2) abandoning the conceit of performing the act;
(3) surrendering all actions to Brahma?^
According to Sarkar, these three methods are different aspects of one and the same process of acting
without self.
The first aspect, phaldkdrnksd tydga, involves letting go of the desfre for the fraits of action. It
is essentially the practice of being so fully attentive to the task itself that there remains no scope for
cogitation over the potential results of the action. This entails working wholeheartedly for the
accomplishment of an act without worrying over the success of failure of its outcome. This is not.

^"AM/Parts5-8, p. 173-174.
" 5 5 Parti, p. 28
205
however, sufficient to prevent the accumulation of sarnskdras, according to Sarkar, as it is stiU
possible for one to perform an action without a view to its result, but with a need for self-satisfaction
or with a sense of vanity. The second aspect, kartrtvdbhimdna tydga, therefore aims to overcome this
sense of self-satisfaction or vanity by consciously letting go of the notion of personal agency in aU
actions. Contemplating that one is merely an instrament of brahma and that the persons or objects
served by one are also instraments of brahma does this:

By merely relinquishing the desire or pursuit of the fraits of action it is hard to get rid
of the vanity of a doer, of the idea that 'I do', in so far as we cannot extricate ourselves
from the objects of our actions or from the contemplation of accomplishment. To
avoid these, one has to always contemplate that one is a machine, and Brahma alone is
the machine operator who gets the work done through this machine. But even this is
not sufficient to eradicate the vanity of a doer. The reason is that one may believe that,
although a machine, yet he or she is superior to others having been selected by the
machine operator for that particular action being performed at that point of time. To
avoid such thoughts, the belief has to be developed that only Brahma is served or
chosen by Brahma. That is, Brahma inspfres us to donate and again receives the same
through others. It is simply by the grace of Brahma that we act and have the
favourable opportunity of performing this act.'*

The third aspect, karma samnydsa, is the final step in karma yoga wherein the mind and aU
actions are totally surrendered to brahma leaving no residual trace of ego. This is accomplished by a
special process of contemplation in which the actor and the action are seen as expressions of brahma:

The only way is to surrender all actions to Brahma and to ideate that Brahma performs
every action. Such actions will not be called our own. Brahma alone has performed
the actions, and their consequences, whether good or bad, will be home by Brahma
alone. In that case we have no separate identity ... Those who have surrendered all
actions unto Brahma have no reason to fear to act. It also keeps the mind completely
engrossed in Brahma. Sarrmydsa means surrendering the mind to the Supreme Object
or Brahma?^

In relation to the attainment of AM's summum bonum, Sarkar says of karma sarrinydsa:

It is invariably tme that the separate identity of the soul is completely dissolved by
totally submitting the mind to Brahma. As a consequence of this, human beings
qualify for the attainment of liberation (mukti) or salvation (moksa)?^

Sarkar teaches another technique for the performance of action without the outward movement
of the mind and its consequent bondage. He calls this technique madhuvidyd or 'honey knowledge',
which is a way of maintaining inward contemplation on brahma in the midst of outward actions.

'*55Partl, pp. 30-31.

"55Partl, p. 31.
'*55Partl, p. 32.
206
Madhuvidyd entails contemplating that whatever one associates with in the world is an expression of
brahma. It is a practice of regarding all persons and objects with 'cosmic feeling' when performing
any action. Sarkar says that this practice is capable of leading the aspirant to mukti or liberation; and
it constitutes the second lesson of sahaja yoga (to which we will retum in subsection 6.1.5).
Madhuvidyd, entailing ideation of the objects of action as brahma, can be seen to complement the
practice of karma samnydsa, which involves seeing the actor and action as brahma. Sarkar praises the
practice of madhuvidyd:

This madhuvidyd will pervade your exterior and interior being with the ecstasy of the
bliss of Brahma. This bliss will permanently alleviate all your afflictions. Then avidyd
[the force leading to cmdeness] cannot come with its ferocious jaws wide open to
devour you. The glory of One and only One Benign Entity will shine forth to you from
one and all objects."

As mentioned previously in the discussion on jfidna yoga, Sarkar's karma yoga involves the
actual practice of various ethical, spfritual, and social disciplines, all of which are geared towards
realisation of the ultimate soteriological goal. In its broadest sense, karma yoga would thus include
observance of yama and niyama, the sixteen points, the fifteen silas, all other conduct rales, and
practice of all meditative techniques taught by Sarkar. In particular, performance of actions or service
(sevd)*^ for the welfare of the world in the spfrit of non-attachment, selfless surrender and devotion,
which in some cases requires personal sacrifice (tapah), constitutes the quintessential practice of
karma yoga. The spfrit of non-attachment and devotional surrender is cultivated by means of the three
aspects of phaldkdrriksd tydga (abandoning desfre for results of actions), kartrtvdbhimdna tydga
(renouncing vanity of performing an act), and karma sarrinydsa (total surrender of actions to brahma),
in connection with the practice of madhuvidyd (seeing all as brahma), as described in the foregoing
discussion.

6.1.3 Bhakti Yoga

Underlying all the various practices and disciplines that Sarkar recommends, and arguably surpassing
all other approaches to AM's ultimate goal, is the path of devotion or bhakti yoga. Sarkar describes
devotion as the ultimate soteriological technique that bestows the final realisation of moksa or
salvation, and even equates complete devotion (kevala bhakti) with moksa itself. In his texts, he
delineates and describes various types of devotion, extolling the virtues of, and encouraging his
disciples to cultivate, the highest devotion of total self-surrender.
In his discourses, Sarkar never speaks of devotion directed to himself; on the confrary, he
consistentiy directs disciples' devotion to parama purusa, the 'Cosmic Father' of all. Paradoxically,

"BG, p. 39.

207
however, in keeping with the Tanfric fradition, the guru is identified with the ultimate reality that
disciples seek to attain. We see, in AM's portrayal of Sarkar, the resolution of the dialectical tension
between the personaUties of Krsna and §iva in his person, and his acquisition of the status of
mahdsambhuti, the "great manifestation' of tdraka brahma - the personal aspect of parama purusa.
In this sense, devotion to Sarkar as guru and mahdsambhuti becomes devotion to parama purusa, and
vice versa.
Sarkar defines bhakti as 'longing for the Supreme': 'sapdrdnuraktfisvare' (having
pdrdnurakti for isvara).*' Sarkar explains pdrdnurakti as the attraction one feels for the 'Supreme
Brahma or Infinite Cosmic Consciousness', which has the capacity to release a person 'frorn the grip
of the indriyas [sense and motor organs] and through sublime meditations establish him or her in the
finer sublimated senses, in the infinite blessedness beyond the bounds of the universe'. In his view,
the force of attraction between aU entities in the universe (expressed physically in gravitational force
and psychologically in desire) supports the contention that bhakti - attraction for the supreme - is
naturally present in aU beings. He sees bhakti as merely an extension of physical and psychic
attraction into the realm of the infinite, directed inwardly to the spirit rather than outwardly to objects
of material or mental gratification. He identifies devotion with love, which has die quaUty of making
the mind equanimous and poised:

That which makes the mind soft and strong and sfrenuous, so it may keep itself in a
balanced state even in the condition of pain, that which perpetually creates a pleasant
feeling within is called love. Devotion is identical with love. The moment devotion is
aroused, the love of God comes."'

When bhakti is perfected, it transforms into an all-pervasive and unconditional love that is brahma
personified:

When the devotional depth comes, love, too will be brimming with high sentiments,
full and over-flowing. In that stage alone will come yoiu- final realisation of the
Supreme Consciousness. Where 'I' is, 'He' is not ... where 'He' is, 'F is not.
Remember, devotion is the prerequisite of sddhand. Maturity of devotion is love, and
maturity of love is He.

Sarkar makes it clear that developing pdrabhakti or supreme devotion (devotion solely
directed to God) requires at the outset the faculty of suddhd buddhi ('benevolent intellect')."' This

"" The four types of service discussed under nr yajfia in Sarkar's Sixteen Points are relevant here. They are
Sudrocita sevd (physical service), vaisyocita sevd (financial service), ksattriyocita sevd (protective service), and
viprocita sevd (intellectual-spiritual service).
"'55 Parti, p. 66.
"'55Partl, pp. 66-67.
"'BG, p. 186.
"" BG, p. 149.
"^ YP, p. 96.
208
means that the disciple needs to be motivated by benevolence in all thoughts and actions. A pure mind
with intellect guided by kindness is pre-requisite for the cultivation of pardbhakti.
Sarkar lists and defines many types of devotion, each of which a person may adopt according
to his or her own nature and conditioning, or samskdras. The first and lowest type is crade devotion
or tdmasikd bhakti Crade devotion is characterised by craving for finite pleasures rather than desire
for supreme bliss; those who may be outwardly religious but are inwardly affected by negative
tendencies, such as violence, pride, and jealousy, belong to this category. In some instances, it may
manifest as prayer to God with a request to harm one's enemies due to the driving forces of hafred and
ignorance. It is not considered trae bhakti since it seeks refuge in cmde objects and actions rather
than in the divine. The second type is mutative devotion or rdjasikd bhakti, characterising those who
engage in spfritual practices for the sake of attaining finite goals. In this form of bhakti, devotion to
God is expressed through worship, praise, and offerings in the hope of gaining ends such as fame or
fortune, without causing harm to others. Again, it appears that the underlying motives are mundane
ends, not the supreme goal. The third type is sentient devotion or sdttvikd bhakti, characterising
spiritual practice that is driven by several possible motivations: one is the devotee's wish to exhaust
his or her personal sarnskdras and to attain emancipation from the cycle of life and death; another is
engagement in spiritual practice out of a sense of duty to family or cultural tradition, or out of fear of
negative public perception upon failure to do so. In other words, sentient devotion is essentially self-
cenfred: its energy is directed not towards the ultimate reality of brahma but towards preoccupations
of the self, however noble.

Apart from the three forms of devotion listed above, Sarkar mentions another variant of
devotion known as jddnamisra or pradhdnibhuta bhakti. In this form of devotion, the sddhaka
(spfritual aspirant) develops remembrance of brahma even after the attainment of his or her mundane
goal through spfrituality. Together with tdmasikd, rdjasikd, and sdttvikd bhakti, jndnamisra (or
pradhdnibhuta) bhakti is placed under the category of 'inferior devotion' or gaurii bhakti. This is
because even though jddnamisra bhakti contains some genuine spiritual attraction, it remains tainted
by a dormant desire for wealth or knowledge, and is considered the highest form of inferior devotion.
Beyond these forms of bhakti are the variants of superior devotion or mukhya bhakti The first
is nirguria bhakti or non-qualified devotion, characterised by a wholehearted attraction for and
orientation to brahma for its own sake and without any extraneous motives. When this nirguria bhakti
becomes permanently established, it transforms into what Sarkar terms kevala bhakti or total devotion
- the culmination of the path of bhakti and synonymous with moksa or salvation. In this stage, the
devotee, the act of devotion, and the object of devotion no longer exist separately, but are merged into
one inseparable whole:

If there is undivided knowledge with the object, then there exists one and only one
entity, and that is why such devotion is called kevala bhakti. Kevala bhakti is not

209
 attained by baths, exercises or efforts. Those who have not been blessed with Divine
Grace even in the least cannot have any reaUzation about it."*

Sarkar identifies two phases in nirguria bhakti, namely rdgdnugd bhakti and rdgdtmikd bhakti
In rdgdnugd bhakti, the penultimate form of devotion, the devotee wants nothing except the pleasure
of loving the supreme entity, brahma. Ego is highly attenuated at this stage and only pure devotion
and the enjoyment of bliss exist in this form of devotion. However, because of the frace of bliss and
pleasure the devotee derives from the devotional act, it is not considered the highest devotion. A
subtie duality still exists between the devotee and the object of devotion. Sarkar equates this
penultimate devotion with gopibhdva or vrajabhdva, a state of devotional contemplation advocated by
dualist schools of Indian philosophy.
The most superior form of devotion is what Sarkar calls rdgdtmikd bhakti, which is total love
for the supreme entity without any expectation or derivation of bliss for oneself. Instead, rdgdtmikd
bhakti is characterised by complete surrender of the devotee to brahma with the only aim of offering
him pleasure and bliss:

And by dint of ... rdgdtmikd devotion, the Yogi comes in closest contact with the
Supreme Self and becomes one with Him. When his love is to give pleasure to the
Lord and not to enjoy pleasure for himself, his mind gets subjectivated. That is, his
mind gets metamorphosed into the mind of the Lord, and that's why this rdgdtmikd
bhakti is the only devotion. By this devotion, the Yogi gets established in this stance
of Supreme Beatitude."'

In this highest devotion, the devotee is able to merge his or her mind completely with the ultimate
pristine consciousness, leaving no trace of duality or even mind itself; it is the objectiess state of
nirvikalpa samddhi In his AM, Sarkar advocates the practice of nirguria bhakti in its rdgdnugd and
rdgdtmikd forms, and discourages all inferior forms of devotion tainted by egoistic concems.
Sarkar differentiates three grades of devotees in terms of their knowledge of spiritual
philosophy and practice, and their degree of dedication - inferior, intermediate, and superior:

Those bearing neither knowledge nor eamestness are inferior devotees. Those who
have reverence but have no knowledge of the sdstras [scriptures, philosophy], are the
intermediate type of devotees. Those versed in the sdstras, competent in sddhand
practices, and of firm mind are the devotees of the highest degree. Kevala bhakti is
attainable only by the highest grade of devotees."^

It is apparent from the above passage that Sarkar ultimately privileges devotion that is supported by
spiritual knowledge over mere reverence and faith. He maintains, however, that devotion can be

"*BG, p. 145.
"'BG, p. 83.
*^BG, p. 148.
210
attained by anyone, and that one need not be an intellectual to be on the spiritual path. This may be
the case for inferior and intermediate grades of devotion, but not applicable to the highest grade.
Regarding the practice of devotion, Sarkar sfresses the concept of bhdva or "spfritual ideation'.
The term 'ideation', as used by Sarkar, is difficult to interpret, as it connotes both thinking about an
object's meaning, and a gut-level feeling deeper than the conceptual mind. While it is not devoid of
cognitive processing, ideation is better described as a 'felt experience' involving the whole being, and
can be compared to a state of contemplative presence. In other words, bhdva is 'the feeling of the
mind when the citta is dominated by sattvaguria and the mind is radiant with love for the Lord'.
Sarkar comments:

Bhdva is that whereby the mindstuff [citta] becomes purged and dominated by the
sentient principle, brilliant with the rays of the sun of love. As a result of the bhdva,
man directs his natural attractive forces towards the adored. But here the adored is not
outside him; the adored is the life of his life, the mind of his mind and the life-master
of his entfre existence. When this feeling of devotion for the adored awakens the
introversion of his tendencies, then he becomes absorbed with this bhdva. He attains
the state of self-realisation.'"

Sarkar operationalises the practice of bhdva in the techniques of 'auto-suggestion' and 'outer-
suggestion', aimed at eliciting and maintaining what he calls psycho-spiritual parallelism. These
techniques are embedded in the ffrst and second lessons of sahaja yoga, which dfrect the attention of
the practitioner towards the essential and tme nature of mind and of the universe respectively.
Through the ideation encapsulated in the lessons, the practitioner becomes aware of the unity of self
and the universe with the infinite consciousness that is brahma.
Another essential concept in the practice of bhakti is the spiritual quality of madhura ('honey-
like sweetness'), and its associated notion of rasa - which means both 'flow' and more technically,
'aesthetic mood'." When a sddhaka is able to align his or her entitative flow or aesthetic mood (rasa)
- the totality of all his or her thoughts, feelings, and volitions in a singular qualitative experience -
with the flow of cosmic consciousness through constant bhdva, he or she realises in varying degrees
the state of bliss (dnanda). This bliss is essentially characterised by a quality of sweetness, madhura,
which is compared metaphorically to the sweetness of honey. In samddhi, this madhura is most
intensely felt, but even in ordinary states of mind, a fainter madhura can be experienced whenever
relaxed awareness and sincere surrender are engendered by practice of AM meditation." Through the

"'5P55A, p. 233.
"'5P55A, p. 145.
" Klostermaier quotes the Rasa School, which defines rasa metaphorically as "emotional experience of beauty in
poetry and drama', in Klaus K. Klostermaier, A Survey of Hinduism (Second Edition) (Albany: State University
of New York Press, 1994), p. 537. I prefer to use the term 'aesthetic mood' to capture the essence of that
emotional experience termed rasa.
" Madhura is basically the same as the experience of rasa, which Sarkar defines as 'to be saturated with ever-
blissful awareness - to enliven human existence with sweetfreshness.... [which] becomes possible only when
211
practice of bhakti, an AM sadhaka learns how to let go of rigid expectations and to allow reality to
organically unfold. He or she leams to embrace aU experiences, be they pleasant or unpleasant, as
sweet expressions of the unconstmcted ground of consciousness.
A more advanced practice - tiie sixth lesson of sahaja yoga - is the key technique in tiie
perfection of bhakti, wherein the devotee channels aU his or her propensities into a single sfream of
devotion towards ultimate reality in the personal form of the guru. This technique reUes on mature,
unconditional devotion and tiie divine grace of brahma, aimed at nothing less than realisation of
kevala bhakti, which is synonymous witii moksa. The practice of kirtana, devotional singing and
dancing of AM's universal mantra, also involves the process of ideation on brahma, which facilitates
ego-surrender and devotion. We now tum to the nature, practice, and aims oikfrtana.

6.1.4 Kirtana
The practice of devotional chanting, with or without rhythmic dancing, is known as kirtana in the
Hindu tradition. It is widely practised within theft/zafe-orientedmovements and is regarded in some
circles as the technique par excellence for realising God. In the case of AM, Sarkar sees kirtana
(involving both song-like chanting and dancing) as the primary means of awakening devotion and one-
pointedness in the mind, and inducing flexibility and comfort in the body, prior to formal silent
meditation. Sarkar's teachings on this practice wiU now be explored.
The mahdmantra, or universal chant, of AM is Baba Nam Kevalam. According to one source,
Sarkar gave this mantra in 1970." The words 'Baba Nam Kevalam' are rendered variously by AM as
'Love is aU there is', 'Everything is the expression of Supreme Consciousness', and 'Only the Name
of the Beloved' All these three interpretations seem far-fetched, if not wrong, though AM followers
would claim that they capture the essential spirit of the mantra that Sarkar attempts to convey.
According to AM, the mantra is written and spoken in Sanskrit, the ancient language of the yogis of
India. However, it is perhaps historically more correct to see the mantra's wording as a corraption or
coUoquiahsation of Sanskrit, since 'bdbd' is not strictly an original Sanskrit word, and 'riam' lacks the
final vowel of Sanskrit 'noma' 'Bdbd' is a term of endearment commonly used amongst Indian
people to address a well-respected male elder in the family or community; it is usually associated with
a grandfather figiu-e. In the case of AM, the term 'bdbd' has come to refer, on one level, to Sarkar
himself as the beloved guru and father, and on another level, to parama purusa, the aU-loving cosmic
entity that is the source, sustenance, and destination of life and the universe. In the second of the three
interpretations cited above, supreme consciousness is regarded as the beloved cosmic father of
humanity and of aU creatures.
In kirtana, the mantra is chanted to different tunes, liiythms and melodies, some of which
were composed by Sarkar himself though most are creations of his followers from various parts of the

one maintains a constant link with the Supreme Entity ... inNSS,p. 155. Through the practice of AM's second
lesson, this "constant link' is maintained and madhura, or rasa, is experienced.
"Krpananda, With My Master (Manila: Proutist Universal, 1990), p. 123.
212
world. It is ideation on the meaning of the mantra that is cmcial for Sarkar, not the tunes, though he
recommends pleasant and inspiring tunes for aesthetic and meditative reasons. The dance that
accompanies the chanting of the mantra is known as lalita mdrmika, and according to Sarkar, was
invented by Parvafi, the wife of the alleged father of Tantra in India, Sadaliva. Sarkar is said to have
appropriated this dance for the specific purpose of kirtana, advocating the combined practice of
singing and dancing as a powerful means of purifying the mind, and transforming and uplifting the
heart. The dance consists of altemate, rhythmic stepping of one foot from side to side, together with
slight bending of the other knee and either raising both arms in the air or placing the palms together at
the heart in a gesture of prayer. Sarkar's view is that the utilisation of as many sensory (in this case,
the ears) and motor organs (arms, legs, and vocal cords) in the service of ideation and devotion can be
a potent aid to deep meditation. He says of the dance:

The lalita mdrmika dance can maintain adjustment with kirtana without causing any
sort of fatigue in the human body. That is why it has been prescribed for kirtaria.
Mdrmika means 'that which touches the core of the heart (marma)' that is why it is
called lalita mdrmika. Parvafl was the propounder of this dance.'"

In practice, however, kirtana can be performed solely by singing and chanting the mantra while
seated, without the dance accompaniment. Clapping the hands while singing is common and aids in
maintaining the musical rhythm.
As mentioned previously, the practice of kirtana is designed specifically to prepare and
concentrate the mind for meditation and to transform the emotions by channelling them into a single
stream of devotion flowing towards parama purusa. Sarkar explains the rationale behind the
integrated engagement of vocal cords, ears, hands, and feet in kirtana:

There are two ways to withdraw the indriyas (sensory and motor organs) in order to
direct the mind towards the Supreme Consciousness. One is to dfrect the mind
inwardly, and the other is to keep all the indriyas engaged in the same type of work.
So while inventing kirtana, this science was taken into account. In kirtana what does
the tongue do? What it does best - it speaks. The vocal cords move in uttering words.
The ears listen to the uttered words and the hands and feet move also. Thus all the
indriyas are engaged; they are not aUowed to do this or that."

In addition to the employment of as many organs as possible in the practice of kirtana, Sarkar
recommends the use of a drum to accompany and set the rhythm for the singing and dancing:

Moreover, there is also a system for musical accompaniment in kirtana, because

sometimes while doing kirtana, our ears may be distracted ... So, normally a mrdariga
(dram) is prescribed, for playing of mrdanga serves the purpose of attracting the mind

'" Anandamurti, Light Comes, ed. by Anandamitra and Vijayananda (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications,
1986), p. 148
" L C p . 151.
213
 and helping it associate with the vibrations of the kirtana. Thus immediately the mind
retums to the ideation of the kirtana.^^

The combined effect of mental concentration and devotional sentiment elicited by kirtana
serves to purify the devotee's mind and heart, thus preparing the ground for the deeper and more
complex meditative procedures of sahaja, kdpdlika, or visesa yoga. Sarkar describes the state of those
who have correctiy performed prolonged kirtana as 'so purified ... that they feel as if they have just
taken a holy bath in a sacred river'."
Sarkar advocates kirtana not only for its psycho-spiritual benefits, but also for other practical
purposes: for overcoming physical and psychological problems and even natural calamities. He sees
the sincere collective practice of kirtana as generating a powerful and concentrated force that can
potentially solve worldly problems and avert natural disasters:

When a large number of people do kirtana, then not only is thefr physical force
concentrated, but also thefr collective psychic power, getting inspfration from Parama
Purusa, starts to flow in a single channel ... and this concentrated physical and psychic
force removes the accumulated sorrows and miseries of the material world. ... Thus
just as kirtana is a valuable aid to sddhand, it is equally useful for the removal of
worldly afflictions. These worldly afflictions are partly created by Prakrti (the Cosmic
Operative Principle), and partly by human beings. Whoever has created these miseries,
all the obstacles and dangers are removed by collective kirtana - flood, drought,
famine, pestilence, earthquake, and all such natural calamities can be averted if people
do kirtana with sincerity."

In terms of personal psychological conflicts and problems, Sarkar recommends group kirtana as a
therapeutic aid that can remove both current and future afflictions:

Besides this, kirtana removes various psychic troubles also - the troubles which have
already arrived, and the troubles which have not yet come but of which there are
forebodings. All these are removed through kirtana. If kirtana is done beforehand,
then those future troubles can be forestalled while they are still in the premonition
stage. Why are they removed? It is not because of the collective psychic energy that
they are removed, but because of the fact that so many minds are moving with
tremendous force towards Parama Purusa, getting inspfration from Him.*"

From the above passages it is clear that Sarkar gives kirtana high position in his scheme of
spiritual practice, extolling both its mundane and its supramundane benefits. It appears from his
comments that the material and psychological effects ascribed to kirtana, in terms of both averting
natural disasters and solving psychological problems, are meant to be taken literaUy. However, it is

'*LCp. 152.
" LC, p. 154.
'* LC, p. 155.
" L C , p. 156.
*"LC, p. 157.
214
possible to read Sarkar's praises for kirtana as pedagogical devices to awaken interest in and
dedication to kirtana practice in the minds of his followers, quite apart from whether the beneficial
effects are necessarily or empirically trae. Be that as it may, this second line of reasoning need not
necessarily negate the first, since Sarkar's unequivocal words suggest that he really believed in the
supernatural effects of kirtana, and that his statements are simultaneously a proclamation of his beliefs
and a message of edification for his followers.
It is possible to analyse the practice of kirtana into several component aspects, each of which
affects the mind in a specific way and acts to develop a particular kosa. These aspects are (1)
rhythmic dancing and posturing of hands; (2) melodious singing or chanting of the mahdmantra; (3)
listening to the mahdmantra being sung or chanted; (4) coordination of the breath in order to sing or
chant effectively; and (5) focussed attention on the meaning of the mantra and lovingly releasing
oneself into the unconfined 'space' of universal consciousness. The ffrst aspect, rhythmic dancing and
posturing of hands, controls and channels the activities of the body (annamaya kosa) in a positive
direction. The second and third aspects, melodious singing or chanting of and listening to the
mahdmantra, engages the sensory mind (kdmamaya kosa) in a spiritually elevating manner and tums it
away from crade or unwholesome pre-occupations. The fourth aspect, breath coordination during
mantra singing, mimics prdridydma and controls the discursive mind (manomaya kosa). The fifth
aspect, devotional mantra ideation, withdraws (pratydhdra) awareness from subtler mental
impediments, focusses attention (dhdrarid), and leads the mind towards parama purusa in a smooth,
malleable flow of awareness (dhydna). Thus, the fifth aspect of kirtana serves to simultaneously
perfect the atimdnasa, vijfidnamaya, and hirarimaya kosas. As a whole, the practice of kirtana has the
effect of purifying and developing all the kosas of the mind simultaneously, a factor that might
account for its central place in the entfre soteriological praxis of AM.

6.1.5 Sahaja Yoga: The Six Lessons of Meditation

Perhaps the most essential aspect of Sarkar's entfre soteriological praxis is his basic system of Tantric
meditation encapsulated in the six lessons of sahaja yoga, literally 'union through the natural state'.
This system of meditation is also known by another name, rdjddhirdja yoga or 'king of kings path to
union'. According to Sarkar, rdjddhirdja yoga was fu-st taught by an Indian saint named Astavakra to
his disciple Alarka in Bengal over two thousand years ago. The system of meditation supposedly
taught by Astavakra is a process of confroUing all the cakras and propensities in the human body.
Sarkar appears to have followed in Astavakra's footsteps by declaring that the "different types of
lessons in Ananda Marga sddhand axe designed to strengthen the different cakras and confrol the
propensities'.*' For example, he claims that guru dhydna (meditation on the gum) performed at the
guru cakra strengthens and increases control over the sahasrdra cakra, which in tum increases control
over the body and mind. Whether Sarkar's six lessons directly replicate the methods of Astavakra is

*' YP, p. 160.

215
not known. In this section, general details of the theory and practice of Sarkar's six meditative lessons
will be described, as far as they can be ascertained from printed sources.*' In accordance with the
Tantric tradition (to which AM claims to belong), such meditative techniques are fransmitted
individually from guru to disciple in a relationship of great trust and respect, and are kept confidential
in the interest of personal and public safety. Hence, the precise technical and pedagogical details of
the sahaja yoga techniques are not described here, primarily out of respect for the Tantric fradition,
and secondarily, because such exposition falls outside the boundaries of the methodology I employ in
this study.
Before exploring the six lessons of meditation, it is appropriate to give a brief account of
Sarkar's definitions of yoga and meditation. In his texts, Sarkar gives three definitions of yoga: (1)
yogascittavrttinirodhah, 'yoga is the cessation of ectoplasmic occupations or mental modifications';
(2) sarvacintd paritydgo niscinto yoga ucyate, "yoga is the state in which the faculty of the mind
completely stops functioning and the Supreme Witness remains in His characteristic witness-ship'; (3)
samyogo yoga ityukto fivdtma paramdtmanah, "yoga is the state in which unit consciousness merges in
Cosmic Consciousness, and becomes one with the Original Entity'.*' Of these three definitions,
Sarkar prefers the third, as the first two suggest a measure of suppression of thoughts and propensities
natural to the mind. He advocates a channelling and transmutation of propensities towards the subtlest
wakeful consciousness rather than mere suppression. Nevertheless, he suggests that the innermost
meaning of the three definitions of yoga is the same if interpreted correctly.
Sarkar defines meditation as "concentrated thinking' wherein an attempt is made to coincide
the "controlling point of the "F' feeling' with "some other subjectivated form'.*" For Sarkar,
concentration is signified by constant attentional flow toward the supreme goal of parama purusa, the
establishment of which is a state of psycho-spiritual parallelism known as bhdva or, as Sarkar
translates it, 'idea'. He goes on to explain that 'ideation' occurs when 'idea maintains adjustment with
the glands and sub-glands', and that the three forms of ideation - namely knowledge, action, and
devotion - are all required to effect psycho-spiritual parallelism or the state of 'idea'.*' It is clear that
Sarkar uses the terms 'idea' and 'ideation' in a special and idiosyncratic sense, respectively referring
not to 'thought' and 'thinking', as in common parlance, but rather to a specific "state of being' and
'body-mind practice' (integrated application of physical and mental faculties). In other words, the
body-mind practice (ideation) of knowledge (jfidna), action (karma) and devotion (bhakti), in
association with practical understanding of glands and cakras, aids in eliciting the state of being (idea)
characterised by a stable and constant flow of attention toward its subtle object of contemplation,
supreme consciousness. Strictiy speaking, the endless flow of consciousness (akhdnda cidaikarasa)

Main sources are Chidganananda, Ananda Mdrga Meditation: Rdjddhirdja Yoga (The Most Sublime and
Kingly Tantra Yoga) (unpublished undated manuscript); Ananda Marga Publications, Yoga: The Way of Tantra
(Manila: Ananda Marga Publications, 1991); and CC Part 3, pp. 69-73.
*'AM/Parts5-8, p. 387.
*"AM/Parts5-8, p. 181.
*^ AM/Parts 5-8, p. 182.
216
can never be made the object of ideation since it is said to be the ultimate subjectivity of the universe.
In this case, ideating on supreme consciousness as an 'object' means utilising the subtiest concept that
can be conceived as a mental device to evoke a supramundane experience - oneness with cosmic
mahat (savikalpa samddhi) or oneness with cosmic purusa (nirvikalpa samddhi). In the case of
oneness with cosmic mahat, mind is present but in an infinitely expanded form, where dualities
between self and other, physical and mental, good and bad, have completely disappeared. In the case
of oneness with cosmic purusa, mind is no longer present, having dissolved into the ocean of
objectiess consciousness; the subtie duality between self and consciousness has totally disappeared, fri
both cases, the clarity and resplendence of pure cognisance shines through with utmost intensity and
continuity. Sarkar says:

Subjectivity is of two types - mental and spiritual. In mental subjectivity the mind
merges into its own enhanced subjectivity [cosmic mahat], and in spiritual subjectivity
the mind merges into spirituality [cosrrac purusa].^

The attainment of oneness with cosmic mahat or with cosmic purusa requires certain conditions such
as mental concentration and knowledge of locations and functions of brain cells and cakras. In the
case of oneness with cosmic purusa, the additional factor of total self-surrender or devotion is
essential:

In the process of meditation the following things are involved - brain cells, apexed or
pinnacled psychology, concentrated thinking. Guru cakra and ultimately devotion. All
these are utilised in dhydna yoga, which ultimately ensconces the sddhaka in complete
omniscience.*'

There is another aspect of the meditative process that is important for the practice of Sarkar's
six lessons, especially the first lesson. This involves the concept of spatial and volumetric expansion
of the mental field, whereby continual deliberate expansion of the mind's periphery and volume can
result in the mind breaking through into its cosmic counterpart and merging with it. Sarkar describes
this process in terms of psychic progress, involving the concepts of endoplasm and ectoplasm
(compare Sarkar's fourth model of mind):

Psychic progress takes place in the realm of ectoplasm and endoplasm ... Endoplasm is
the outer surface of ectoplasm. The collective form of ectoplasm increases the sense of
individuality - 'I' feeling. With the growth of unit ectoplasm its volume and scope
increases, and the collective form of ectoplasm will increase. With the increase of the
collective form of ectoplasm, the endoplasm will gradually expand and burst. Thus,
the unit 'I' merges in the Cosmic 'I'.**

** AM/Parts 5-8, p. 183. Bracketed annotation mine.

67
AM/Parts5-8, p. 182.
217
Sarkar gives an example to illustrate his concept of mind-space expansion. Here he links the 'size' of
the mind-space with the "size' of the mental image or concept (or 'subjectivated pabula') held by the
mind in the process of meditation, claiming that the greater the size of the concept, the greater the
expansion of mind-space:

The area of the mind depends solely on its subjectivated pabula. The area of the
subjectivated pabula increases or decreases the jurisdiction of the mind. The
subjectivated pabula have their definite periphery. Suppose you see the face of any
person then close your eyes. Now, suppose you compare how much of your mental
field is occupied with this image. Say one-fourth. Then try to increase its size. Again
try to increase its size up to your capacity. This is the jurisdiction of your mind. This
is subjectivated pabula. When you are seeing some extemal object with your eyes, that
is objectivated pabula. Your mind has more space than the objectivated pabula. Hence
the jurisdiction of the mind depends on the subjectivated pabula, not the objectivated
pabula. Extemal objects are objectivated pabula.*'

It is possible to glean from the above passage that Sarkar differentiates between first-order
sensory perception of extemal objects and second-order mental representation of those perceived
objects. He terms the physical objects of first-order perception 'objectivated pabula', and the mental
images of second-order representation 'subjectivated pabula'. Sarkar's assertion that the mind-space
is larger than the objectivated pabula corresponds to the spatial metaphor of the aham being larger
than the citta, and the mahat larger than the aham. This also echoes the idea that the deeper kosas of
the mind are larger in scope than the immediately preceding ones. This assertion underscores the
concept that the largest mind-space of all is the cosmic mahat, expansion to which is the aim of the
first meditative lesson. It also underscores the idea that focussed and constant contemplation on the
largest and subtlest 'subjectivated pabula' of cosmic consciousness (the subtlest conceivable concept)
can elicit an expansion of the individual mind-space to cosmic proportions.
When the mind-space of the meditator has expanded into cosmic proportions, it becomes
sufficiently pure and clear to reflect the radiant luminosity of parama purusa, which is the timeless
and immeasurable flow of blissful cognisance distinct but not ontologically separate from the mind
itself. Thus, when the unit mind merges into cosmic mind, it also becomes, in a sense, one with
cosmic consciousness owing to its full reflection of the light of cognisance. This is the state of
savikalpa samddhi when temporary, and mukti when permanent. Sarkar says:

But we cannot catch the full reflection of Brahma on the unit-mahattattva (I-feeling).
For this, Cosmic Consciousness is not at fault, the fault lies with the plate of our unit-
mahattattva. If the reflection of just [the] foot of an elephant, instead of its full figure,
is caught in small mirror, it will look like a pillar in that mirror. ... So sddhakas have
to increase the dimension of the plates of their mahattattva, and they will also have to
make it scrupulously clean, so that they may reflect the entfre universe in themselves.
Partial reflection makes the world appear to be disjointed and heterogeneous. But
68
AM/Parts5-8, p. 89.
*'AM/Parts 5-8, pp. 183-184.
13-184.
218
 when you are able to see this heterogeneous world fully on your mental plate, the
world will not appear to you as the world anymore, but only as a product of your
imagination. Then, possessed with such a vast mind, you will further realise that you
are not 'you' anymore - your 'you-hood' is being absorbed in the stainless, super-
white effulgence of that Empyreal Splendour.'"

The first lesson, isvara prariidhdna, is designed to lead one to the state of savikalpa samddhi by means
of such mental expansion. Even when the mind has become cosmic, it still has another step to take
before reaching the final state of nirvikalpa samddhi For this to happen, the vast mirror mind has to
be totally dissolved into cosmic consciousness:

If Brahma is no longer the witnessing entity of His Cosmic Mind and if the unit also is
not the subjective counterpart of his small mind, the two become one due to their
objectiessness. Such a state is called Nirvikalpa Samddhi ... So it is clear that due to
its being a reflection of Consciousness, the individuality [unit consciousness] of the
unit, too, is omnipresent, omni-inherent and omniscient; but this individuality with its
limitless cognitive potentials is unable to comprehend the state of Super-perfection or
Omneity due to its being the limited intellectual manifestation of the Mdyd-ic mirror
[i.e. Cosmic Mind]. With the disappearance of the influence of this Mdyd-ic mirror, its
reflected existence also disappears and it is then that it merges itself in the Original
Entity - it regains its own characteristic self, its own homogeneous status."

The sixth lesson, guru dhydna, is practised after the first lesson and is specifically designed to lead the
unit mind into the vast, mirror-like cosmic mind, and finally into the all-luminous silence of parama
purusa.
While the six lessons are taught to the disciple in the order numerically listed, the practice of
these lessons in formal meditation sessions is not necessarily sequential." For example, the second
lesson is an art of dynamic meditation to be applied in the course of one's daily activities; it is not
practised as part of a formal meditation session. The other lessons, however, generally follow one
another in order of numerical sequence, with the first lesson being practised first and the sixth lesson
practised last. The six lessons of sahaja yoga are:
(1) isvara prariidhdna or 'seeking the shelter of the cosmic confroUer'
(2) madhuvidyd or 'honey knowledge'
(3) tattva dhdrarid or 'concentration on the fundamental factors'
(4) prdridydma or 'confrol of vital energy'
(5) cakra sodhana or 'purification of the plexuses'
(6) guru dhydna or 'meditative flow towards guru'

'"55 Part 3, pp. 29-30.

"55Part3,p. 31.
" The six lessons are taught by Sarkar, the guru, either in person or through his dcdryas, to suitably qualified
and sincere disciples in a systematic and graduated manner (starting from the first lesson and ending with the
sixth) over an extended period, depending on the rate of progress of the disciple.
219
Sarkar claims that the six lessons encapsulate the intrinsic 'divine flow' (svarasa) of brahma and
possess the power to impart bliss and spiritual progress to all who practise them:

In Ananda Marga, this divine flow of Brahma is embedded in the different lessons of
spiritual meditation. Thus, those who practise this meditation, whether in the present
or the future, whether within time or beyond time, will cry, sing and dance with
exquisite spiritual joy, and advance steadily towards the blissful Macrocosmic stance.

First Lesson: Isvara Prariidhdna

The first lesson of Sarkar's sahaja yoga, is termed isvara prariidhdna, and constitutes the
quintessential technique for the realisation of savikalpa samddhi. Sarkar has defined this state of
savikalpa samddhi or sagurmsthiti as the merging of the unit mahat into the cosmic mahat, which is
synonymous with merging into saguria brahma. (The cosmic mahat is the most expansive and
inclusive layer of saguria brahma.) As described in Chapter 3, sagurui brahma comprises the tri-level
cosmic mind of mahat, aham and citta and its associated witnessing consciousness, paramdtman. As
the witnessing paramdtman is intimately associated with the cosmic mind, a merger with cosmic
mahat necessarily includes the concomitant presence of the witnessing consciousness. The
significance of this observation will emerge more clearly as we explore the technicalities of the first
lesson.
The first lesson contains five distinct but closely connected stages: dsana, bhuta suddhi, dsana
suddhi, citta suddhi, and dhydna. The first stage is dsana, 'posture', involving correct positioning of
the body for optimal meditative outcome. The postures recommended are padmdsana (lotus posture),
ardha padmdsana (half-lotus posture), siddhdsana (perfect posture), or bhojandsana (easy cross-
legged posture) according to the ease of and capacity for meditative sitting of the individual. The
hands are clasped in front of the body and placed lightiy on the lap, while the eyes are kept closed.
The rationale for the various aspects of the posture is: (1) closed eyes control visual distraction; (2)
pressing tongue against palate controls sense of taste; (3) interlocking fingers confrol sense of touch;
(4) sitting in fresh and clean surroundings optimises the effect of smell; (5) a quiet environment and
time of day assists in reducing distractions of sound; (6) motor expressions are controlled by the firm
relaxed posture; (7) erect, balanced spine enhances wakefulness and concentration; and (8) upright
sitting affords deeper and more rhythmic breathing.

The second stage of the first lesson is bhiita suddhi, 'purification of the created world'. This
stage involves withdrawal of attention from the world and its problems, as the mind is systematically
guided away from its "pre-occupation with the external world, freeing it from its day-to-day
complexes, fears, desires, tensions ...'.'" This technique helps to bring the mind into a relatively
relaxed and calm state so that it is ready to move on to the next phase.

"AM/Part 5-8, p. 569

Ananda Marga Publications, Yoga: The Way of Tantra (Fourth Edition), (Manila: Ananda Marga Publications,
1991), p. 56.
220
 The thfrd stage is dsana suddhi, "purification of posture', which involves witiidrawal of the
mind from 'its conditioned identification with the body'." Here, attention is gradually and
systematically withdrawn from the body, inducing a pervasive sense of balance and equipoise.
The fourth stage, citta suddhi, 'purification of the mind', consists in dfrecting the mind to a
specific point (ista cakra), allocated by the guru through the dcdrya and concenfrating solely on it.
The mind's identity is then purely that of a point of consciousness suspended in infinite empty space,
and subsequently in infinite pure consciousness.
The final stage is dhydna, 'flow of mind', where the mind is merged or unified with infinite
consciousness through the use of a specially-selected mantra known as the ista mantra. Ideation on
and silent repetition of the mantra enables the practitioner to conceptualise the flowing merger of his
or her consciousness into cosmic consciousness. At this stage, mantra ideation is accompanied by a
reflexive awareness that is clear, probing, and simultaneously enhanced and expanded by the ideation
itself The importance of this witnessing counterpart needs to be highlighted as it constitutes the very
subjectivity that is to be transmuted into cosmic proportions. This transmutation is accomplished by
virtue of the fact that the object of awareness, namely parama purusa, is inherently ungraspable by the
mind; the unfabricated, non-conceptual purusa unfolds and permeates one's whole being as the mind
is 'chumed' through its persistent but unsuccessful attempts to grasp infinite awareness. With regard
to this witnessing activity in the first lesson and the process of transmuting prakrti-hound mind into
unfettered pure cognisance, Sarkar says:

First the mind will have to be withdrawn from the limited 'F feeling [citta suddhi], and
focussed at a point [ista cakra]. Then one will take the thought of the Macrocosm
around that point with the help of the ideation of the mantra prescribed according to
one's own sarriskdra (mental potentiality). He is the subtlest Entity, therefore He can
be realised only through feeling and not by other means. ... One's ideation should be
expressed mentally and the mind should be its witnessing entity.'*

'Oneness in objectivity results in oneness in subjectivity.' So when the objectivity of

the microcosm gets converted into objectivity of the Macrocosm, the flvdtman - the
subjective counterpart of the microcosm - is transformed into the subjective
counterpart of the Macrocosm, that is, Purusottama.^^

In the second passage quoted above, to convert the 'objectivity of the microcosm' into the
'objectivity of the Macrocosm' is to try and grasp infinite consciousness as one's mental object. It is
to expand one's ordinary, limited sense of self into the limitiess sense of 'cosmic self through mantra
ideation. This attempt will enable the 'subjective counterpart' or reflexive awareness of the unit mind
to be liberated into purusottama, the infinite flow of unconfined, self-less cognisance. When this pure

" Yoga: The Way of Tantra, p. 56.

'*G//C, pp. 70-71.
"/A/, p. 16.
221
cognisance (purusottama) co-emerges with and shines through the subtie expansive sense of self
(cosmic mahat), the state of savikalpa samddhi is reached.
At this stage, a few words on the concepts of ista cakra and ista mantra are needed. The ista
cakra is that point which, when concentrated upon, is able to lead the practitioner to his or her spiritual
goal. This point is carefully selected for each individual according to a prescribed system given by
Sarkar, and is meant to coincide with the predominant cakra in each person, chosen on the basis of
certain vibrations within that cakra. The ista cakra is considered to be the nuclear point of a person
and to be his or her unique "gateway' to cosmic consciousness. For the purpose of spfritual
meditation, Sarkar says that only a higher cakra is to be selected as the ista cakra:

The navel cakra, or mariipura cakra, the svddhisthdna cakra and the mulddhdra cakra
are directiy linked with the mundane faculties. For this reason, in the sphere of
spiritual practices, the mariipiira cakra and the one below it are generally not
recognised as cakras for repeating the ista mantra. The recognised cakras for japa
[repetition of manfra] are the andhata cakra, visuddha cakra, and djfid cakra and a few
other cakras and upacakras of the upper region.

The ista mantra is defined as 'the mantra which leads to the uhimate goal'." It is a set of Sanskrit
acoustic roots put together in a meaningful and soteriologically effective way for the purpose of
meditation. We have earlier seen that for a mantra to be effective, it has to possess three qualities - it
has to be pulsative (in natural rhythm with the breath), incantative (having specific sound vibrations),
and ideative (having an expansive meaning). The mantra also needs to be empowered by an
enlightened spiritual master who is able to vibrate those mantric sounds with his or her psycho-
spiritual force. In addition, the vibrational quality of the mantra has to suit the vibrational quality or
'entitative rhythm' of the individual.^" The entitative rhythm is the sum total of the entfre individual's
bio-rhythms (heartbeat, metabolic rate, breathing rate, blood circulation rate, brain waves, nerve
impulses etc.) and constitutes the person's specific "melody'. Through the use of a specially selected
mantra that resonates with the entitative rhythm of the individual practitioner, his or her "melody' is
raised to subtier and slower frequencies until it becomes one with the infinite cosmic vibration.
It is instmctive to analyse the first lesson and compare its various stages with the steps of the
eight-limbed yoga, the operational framework of Sarkar's AM. The first stage of the first lesson
(dsana) can obviously be correlated with the dsana limb of the eight-limbed yoga. It can also be seen
as an initial part of pratydhdra (withdrawal of the senses and the mind) in as much as the posture
assumed in meditative sitting assists in guiding the attention inwards and maintaining it. The second
to fourth stages (bhuta suddhi, dsana suddhi, and citta suddhi), involving a gradual and systematic
process of detaching attention from the extemal world, the physical body, and the activities of the
mind, can justifiably be correlated with the pratydhdra limb of the eight-limbed yoga. In addition, the

'*yp, pp. 189-190.

"CCPart2,p. 1.
222
fourth stage, citta suddhi, involves a process of concentrating the mind at a singular point (the ista
cakra), identifying it as an infinitesimal point of consciousness in an infinite sea of consciousness. At
this stage, all mental activities should have been calmed and suspended. The phenomenological
features of this stage render it very similar to the sixth of the eight limbs, dhdrarid or concenfration,
wherein the mind is made one-pointed and free of extraneous thoughts. Finally, the fifth stage in the
first lesson, dhydna, is comparable to the seventh limb known by the same term, dhydna. Here the
mind's periphery is expanded and its self-awareness correspondingly enlarged through a dynamic and
constant process of ideation on the cosmic entity. The mind becomes a smooth flow of ideation that
directs and merges its cognisant mindspace into the vast cognisant mindspace of the cosmic mind.
(See the foUowing table for a summary of the above discussion.)

Lesson Limb of Eight-limbed Yoga Kosa

1.1 Asana 3. Asana Annamaya
1.2. Bhuta suddhi 5. Pratydhdra Atimdnasa
\.3. Asana suddhi
1.4. Citta suddhi 5. Pratydhdra Atimdnasa
6. Dhdrarid Vijfidnamaya
1.5. Dhydna 1. Dhydna Hirarimaya

As mentioned before, the first lesson is also known as isvara prariidhdna, which
coincidentally is the fifth principle of niyama, the second limb of the eight-limbed yoga. This seems
to be an anomaly in terms of the structuring and sequencing of the path of practice, when we consider
that the stages of isvara prariidhdna reflect and operationalise the thfrd, fifth, sixth, and seventh limbs
respectively of the eight-limbed yoga. One possible resolution is to see isvara prariidhdna, articulated
under the fifth principle of niyama, as a general statement of the spiritual aspirant's ultimate goal and
shelter rather than as a technique of spiritual practice. In this case, isvara prariidhdna - the first lesson
- would be the concrete operationalisation of that viewpoint (that is, isvara as one's goal and shelter)
as well as a practical demonstration of the other limbs, as mentioned.
Another interesting correlation is that between the stages of the first lesson and the layers
(kosas) of mind presented by Sarkar. As mentioned previously (section 5.4), the various limbs of the
eight-limbed yoga serve to perfect different kosas of the mind. Pratydhdra perfects the atimdnasa
kosa, dhdrarid the vijfidnamaya kosa, and dhydna the hirarimaya kosa. As the second, third, and
fourth stages (bhiita suddhi, dsana suddhi, and citta suddhi) of the first lesson involve pratydhdra,
they can be seen to work on the atimdnasa kosa. The fourth stage, citta suddhi, also involves a
process of dhdrarid and can therefore be said to work on the vijfidnamaya kosa as well. The fifth

Yoga: The Way of Tantra, pp. 41- 43.

223
stage, dhydna, involves the flow of the mind towards the supreme consciousness and can be said to
develop the hirarimaya kosa. In sununary, it appears that the first lesson of sahaja yoga
operationalises practically some of the factors of the eight-limbed yoga and serves the purpose of
perfecting the unit causal mind (comprising the atimdnasa kosa, vijndnamaya kosa, and hirarimaya
kosa) so that merger into the cosmic mind can occur.
In addition, Sarkar prescribes a preliminary lesson that is usually given to persons who are not
ready to leam the first, such as young chUdren or adults who have never attempted meditation
before.*' The phases and sequence of the preliminary practice are exactiy identical to those of the first
lesson except that neither the ista mantra nor ista cakra is prescribed. Instead, the new student is
given what Sarkar calls the ndma mantra, 'Name mantra', referring to a specific name of parama
purusa used as a mantra. As in the first lesson, Sarkar advocates ideation on the meaning of the
mantra in conjunction with repetition of the mantric sounds. Of this preUminary process of
meditation, Sarkar says:

They should be taught to sit in padmdsana [lotus posture], but instead of interlocking
the fingers, they may rest one palm upon the other, and keep the spine erect. They will
then be instructed to feel or imagine that everything around them, and what ever they
visualise, is Brahma?^

Second Lesson: Madhuvidyd

The second lesson of sahaja yoga is known as madhuvidyd, 'honey knowledge'. While the first
lesson aims at realisation of the tme nature of the self, the second lesson enables a realisation of what
the universe traly is. The second lesson is based on and further extends the first lesson's subjective
realisation of the cosmic mind into the activities of daily living. It consists of three parts: (1) ardha
isvara prariidhdna, 'half meditation'; (2) guru mantra, "weighty mantra'; and (3) gurupujd, 'offerings
to the spiritual master', otherwise called varridrghyaddna or 'offering of colours'.
The awareness of cosmic mind attained during formal meditation is maintained even while
engaged in one's daily tasks and relationships by silent repetition of and ideation on the ista mantra.
Through associating the ista mantra with the breathing process in the midst of activities, the
practitioner '... trains himself to hear his mantra as being the sound of the breath, so that each breath
is making him aware of that cosmic state'." This is the practice known as ardha isvara prariidhdna or
'half meditation', which forms the first part of the second lesson.
The next part of the second lesson is known as guru mantra, the word 'guru' here meaning
'weighty' or 'important'. This mantra is taught to the disciple for use prior to the performance of any
action, such as eating, drinking, walking, or speaking. Ideation on the guru mantra involves seeing
every entity, animate or inanimate, in the entire universe as an expression of the same cosmic

*'CCPartl,p.5.
''Ibid.
*' Yoga: The Way of Tantra, p. 57.
224
consciousness. This practice, in conjunction with the practice of half meditation described above, has
a twofold effect: first, it frees the meditator from the notion of self in the performance of actions;
second, it prevents the arising of attachment or aversion in the mind of the meditator in the course of
relating to any object or person in the world. In other words, the combined practice of guru mantra
and ardha isvara prariidhdna helps to bring a sense of presence, awareness, equanimity, and
spaciousness to any action, situation or relationship. Establishment in this practice results in a
meditative state known as dharmamegha samddhi ('cloud of trath absorption'), where the inner and
outer merge and all objects and thoughts are seen as consciousness:

Fear complex also vanishes and thereby when this [second lesson] is established one
goes into dharmamegha samddhi. Dharmamegha samddhi is attained when the mind
is saturated by Dharma or Infinity. The extemal objects and intemal feelings become
saturated with Dharma. They also become one indivisible Cosmic Consciousness. So
all objects are He; all ideas are also He. All, right from soul to so-called matter, is
He.«"

As discussed in section 5.1, dharmamegha samddhi is identical to dhrdva smrti ('permanent

remembrance') or samyak smrti ('proper remembrance'), and necessitates constant application of
vivekakhydti, the insight knowledge of differentiating the self-less dtman (consciousness or cognitive
faculty) from the self-conscious mahat (existential 'I' feeling). In other words, successful practice of
guru mantra and ardha isvara prariidhdna in the second lesson requires that the sddhaka be able to
see clearly the difference between dtman and mahat in every moment. Regarding the practice leading
to samyak smrti (= dharmamegha samddhi), which is essentially the second lesson, Sarkar says:

... Internally, ista mantra and guru mantra. But you forget it. Because your smrti is
very dilute. So the best object of smrti is Parama Purusa. Never forget Him. Always
take His name, as per the advice of your dcdrya. This is samyak smrti, that is, proper
memory.*'

The combined effect of guru mantra and ardha isvara prariidhdna practice is also to prevent
accumulation of sarriskdras in the mind of the meditator so that liberation and salvation can be attained
as quickly as possible. The second lesson is thus a technique of meditation-in-action, assisting the
practitioner to live in a life-affirming yet liberated manner by seeing all things, people, and events as
brahma.
The third part of the second lesson is guru pujd or 'offerings to guru, the spiritual master'. It is
also known as varridrghyaddna or 'offering of colours'. This offering is practised immediately after
formal meditation (that is, all lessons except the second) and involves a conscious surrendering of all
attachments, good or bad, to brahma in the role and form of the guru. These attachments, in the form

'" Ananda Mdrga Meditation, p. 5.

"AyPart30,p. 65.
225
of thoughts and emotions, are regarded as mental 'colours' that obstruct the natural unblemished
clarity of the mind, and are fiiUy surrendered during guru pujd. In a deeper sense, these mental
colours or occupations are none other than explosions of consciousness in the form of light and colour
(jyotibrahma), essentially one with the ultimate reality that the devotee surrenders to. Guru pdjd,
comprising inner ideation and mindful gestures, enacts this total surrender and reminds the devotee of
the non-duality of mental colours and pure consciousness. It is thus a method of purifying the mind
and preventing the accumulation of new sarriskdras. As with the first lesson, patient and conscious
effort over a period of time is necessary for competence and stability in the second lesson, comprising
ardha isvara prariidhdna, guru mantra, and guru pujd.
In comparing the purpose and method of the second lesson with the eight-limbed yoga, it is
possible to correlate the second lesson with brahmacdrya, the fourth and quintessential principle of
yama. Both brahmacdrya and madhuvidyd (second lesson) are based on the ideation that everything
without exception is a manifestation of the supreme consciousness. In particular, the various parts of
madhuvidyd appear to be phenomenologically similar to several factors of the eight-limbed yoga.
Both ardha isvara prariidhdna and guru mantra involve a process of withdrawing the mind's attention
away from self and extemal objects per se, and focussing instead on their essential reality as brahma,
pristine cognisance. The mind is continually led towards subtlest pure consciousness such that life
becomes a blissful flow of open, pliant and penetrating awareness with little or no ego-object duality.
The features of (a) consistent attentional withdrawal and (b) attentional channelling towards subtiety,
bear a resemblance to pratydhdra and dhydna respectively of the eight-limbed yoga. In addition, the
surrendering of attachments in guru pujd can arguably be correlated to pratydhdra again since both
involve conscious letting go of extemal and intemal preoccupations. The correlation between guru
pujd and pratydhdra is in fact made in the SPSSA, the canonical commentary to AS, which lends
support to the foregoing argument.** Further support for the claim that the second lesson can be
correlated with pratydhdra comes from the following statement by Chidganananda, another senior
disciple of Sarkar:

... the second lesson helps a person to withdraw the 'I' ness from, and to remain
unaffected by, physical waves ... when the idea of Cosmos or Infinity is taken as the
object, attachment and hatred flee away from the mind because all attachment and
hatred linger only when the idea is not of the Whole or Infinity.*'

It can be deduced from correlations between parts of the second lesson and limbs of the
eightfold yoga above, that the second lesson develops the atimdnasa (through pratydhdra) and
hirarimaya kosas (through dhydna) of the mind, as shown in the table below:

See SPSSA, p. 151. This correlation between pratydhdra and guru pQjd is not made in the second edition
(1998) of the same tide, for reasons unknown.
87 *
Ananda Mdrga Meditation, p. 5.
226
 Lesson Limb of Eight-limbed Yoga Ko^a

2.1. Ardha isvara prariidhdna 5. Pratydhdra 3. Atimdnasa

7. Dhydna 5. Hirarimaya
2.2. Guru mantra 7. Dhydna 5. Hirarimaya

2.3. Varridrghyaddna or 5. Pratydhdra 3. Atimdnasa

Guru Pdjd

Third Lesson: Tattva Dhdrarid

The third lesson of sahaja yoga is ra?n'a dhdrarid or "concentration on the fundamental factors'. This
lesson involves focussing the mind on specific cakras in the body aided by visualisation of their form
and colour and silent recitation of their acoustic root sounds. Certain techniques are also used to
regulate the activities of the idd and pingald nddis so that an unblocking of the susumrid (through
which kuridalini ascends) is facilitated. In Sarkar's view, the physical body is composed of five
fundamental factors - ethereal, aerial, luminous, liquid, and solid. These exist throughout the body but
are controlled by specific cenfres along the body's central axis. These centres are the cakras or
plexuses discussed in Chapter 4, and each cakra is thought to confrol one of the fundamental factors.
The third lesson thus aims to control the five fundamental factors by concentrating on the
cakras in a dynamic way. The overall effects are: (I) maintenance of physical health and vitality
through control and balancing of the five factors; (2) withdrawal of 'I' feeling from the cakras so that
the ffrst and sixth lessons becomes easier to perform; and (3) transcendence of attachment to material
objects and sensory experiences (pleasant or unpleasant) due to the 'tremendous mental force'
generated through the third lesson. The reason behind point (3) is that all material objects are
composed of the five factors, and subjective control over these factors intemally translates into control
over the same extemally.*'
When the mechanics of the third lesson are compared with the eight-limbed yoga stmcture, it
becomes clear that the thfrd lesson fits in with the sixth limb, dhdrand, since both entail a process of
mental concentration using specific focal points in the body. Regular practice of the third lesson thus
develops the vijfidnamaya kosa of the mind through the power of dhdrarid. These correlations are
summed up in the following table:

Lesson Limb of Eight-limbed Yoga Ko^a

3. Tattva dhdrarid 6. Dhdrarid 4. Vijfidnamaya

*' Yoga: The Way of Tantra, pp. 57-58.

Ananda Mdrga Meditation, p. 6.
227
 The third lesson is generally practised after the first in formal meditation sessions, though it
can also be done just prior to the fu-st. Whichever is the case, the effects of the third lesson are
thought to carry over from one formal meditation session into the next, so that the precise sequence of
practice is not cmcial. In other words, practising the thfrd lesson after the fu-st in one session
facilitates the sixth lesson in the same session and later enhances the first lesson in the subsequent
session. The same logic applies to the fourth and fifth lessons in relation to the first. The third, fourth
and fifth lessons come after the first because: (1) they involve fairly developed powers of
concentration and visualisation on the part of the meditator in order to be performed effectively, and
(2) they are ancillary practices that primarily enhance the quality of the sixth lesson, though they also
enhance the dhydna phase of the ffrst.

Fourth Lesson: Prdridydma

The fourth lesson of sahaja yoga is prdridydma, "confrol of vital energy'. The technique involves deep
regulated breathing, proper use of the ista mantra and cakras, and proper ideation. As discussed in
Chapter 4, prdria is a collective term for the five intemal and five extemal vdyus or "winds' in the
body, which are vital to the proper functioning of both body and mind. Sarkar sees the activity of
prdria as inextricably linked to the receptivity and power of the mind. For him, the confroUing centre
of all the vdyus in the body, known as prdriendriya, lies in the midpoint of the andhata cakra?' The
pulsative waves of the prdriendriyaflowin rhythm with the inhalation and exhalation of the breath, in
an expanding and contracting manner (samkoca-vikdsi). These prdriendriya waves simultaneously
cause the waves in all the nerves to flow in synchrony with themselves, making it more difficult for
incoming sense inferences to be received by the citta (cmde mind). However, in the intermittent
pauses between inhalation and exhalation, the prdriendriya stops pulsating and creates such calmness
in the psycho-physical organism that clear perception and conception become possible. In
prdridydma, the meditator induces deep and slow breathing with long pauses, so that psycho-physical
calmness is facilitated and the power of the mind is enhanced. When done proficiently, prdridydma
can even elicit deep spiritual experiences:

This is the psycho-philosophy behind the practice of prdridydma, wherein the sddhaka
tries to let this prdriendriya remain in the state of pause, thereby merging the paused
mind into the ocean of consciousness just to have the experience of the supramental
stratum."

Thus, the fourth lesson utilises the breathing process to enhance the mind's concentration and
calmness so as to facilitate realisation of the dtman. In this respect, the fourth lesson (just as the third)
serves as an aid to the first and sixth lessons.

'" Yoga: The Way of Tantra, p. 58.

" lAI, pp. 26-29.
" /A/, p. 28.
228
 In addition, the fourth lesson provides four other benefits." First, it enhances physical energy,
glamour and strength, as it brings under control all the vdyus that maintain life. Second, it can awaken
previously dormant nerves in the body and make them function properly. By purifying the nerves and
their innervated glands, it can provide immense physical and psychic force. Thfrd, it 'develops
intelligence and opens the more expanded layers of the mind'.'" Fourth, it increases appetite by
hastening digestion and metabolism.
The fourth lesson can be equated with prdridydma, the fourth limb of the eight-limbed yoga,
for obvious reasons. It is said to develop the manomaya kosa by virtue of the fact that it effectively
calms and focuses the thinking, reactive mind. (See table below for correlations.) As the fourth lesson
is regarded as highly potent and potentially risky, it is deemed best to leam the technique from a
trained dcdrya.

Lesson Limb of Eight-limbed Yoga Ko^a

4. Prdridydma 4. Prdridydma 2. Manomaya

Fifth Lesson: Cakra Sodhana

The fifth lesson is cakra sodhana or 'plexus purification'. The technique involves using the ista
mantra in a special way in conjunction with cosmic ideation, so as to vibrate the cakras and bring
purification and bliss to the bodymind." Impurity in the cakras is identified as due to dominance of
the static (tamoguria) and mutative forces (rajoguria) resulting in either inertia or turbulence in the
cakras and their propensities. In this state, self-awareness is either inert (mind dominated by dullness)
or restiess (mind dominated by restiess activity). Cakra sodhana enables the sentient force
(sattvaguria) to establish dominance over the static and mutative forces, creating a clear, malleable
self-awareness that is peaceful and harmonious.'*
The fifth lesson, when properly practised, will bring a sense of freshness, lightness, rapture,
bliss, and ease to the bodymind, enabling the meditator to feel greatly rested and energised after the
practice. As cakras are the loci of various vrttis or propensities, the rhythmic vibrations throughout
the cakras induced by the fifth lesson help to control these propensities more effectively. These same
vibrations are also said to develop the innumerable protozoic and metazoic minds towards greater
subtiety. The fifth lesson works on the physical, psychic, and spiritual dimensions simultaneously, as
it involves all the cakras directiy, and all the subsidiary plexuses and glands indirectly. While the
thfrd lesson imparts 'retention and conception', the fifth lesson imparts more 'joy and thrill'."

" Ananda Mdrga Meditation, pp. 8-9

Ananda Mdrga Meditation, p. 9.
Ananda Mdrga Meditation, p. 12.
Ananda Mdrga Meditation, p. 10.
Ananda Mdrga Meditation, p. 12.
229
 Cakra sodhana, as Sarkar admits, does not fall under any category in the eight-limbed yoga
framework, though it can be related to the sixth factor, dhdrarid, in the sense that pin-point
concenfration on the cakras is necessary. As the fifth lesson involves a dynamic and smooth-flowing
style of meditation, it can also be regarded as having the property of dhydna. Perhaps an accurate
placement of the fifth lesson would be in the transitional space between dhdrarid and dhydna. Since
the fifth lesson includes aspects of both dhdrarid and dhydna, it effectively develops the vijndnamaya
and hirarimaya kosas of the mind (refer to table below).

Lesson Limb of Eight-limbed Yoga Kosa

5. Cakra sodhana 6. Dhdrarid 4. Vijfidnamaya

7. Dhydna 5. Hirarimaya

Sixth Lesson: Guru Dhydna

The sixth and final lesson is guru dhydna or 'meditation on the guru'. This lesson involves meditation
on the form and figure of the guru, with devotion and surrender, and is especially effective when the
personal relationship between disciple and guru has grown deep and profoundly loving. For this
lesson, the guru has to be an exceptional personality who not only is fuUy enlightened but also can
impart brahma-realisation to any number of people by his or her mere wish.'* The sixth lesson
operationalises the concept of tdraka brahma - the liberative aspect of cosmic consciousness linking
the manifest (saguria) and unmanifest (nirguria) brahma - by regarding the guru as the manifestation
(mahdsambhuti) of that entity. Thus, surrendering to the guru means surrendering to the liberative
tdraka brahma, who alone can lead the disciple from manifest to unmanifest reality. Regarding
meditation on the guru, Sarkar says:

The Guru cakra is the highest cakra. The Guru cakra is used as the place of dhydna
.... In this Guru cakra, the aspirant meditates on the Guru - on that ennobling Entity
- channelising his or her mundane bondages into the non-mundane realm, and
elevating his or her non-mundane psychic bondages to the realm of the supramental
entity, the source of supra-cognitive power. Hence, dhydna yoga is tiie best yoga for
sddhand."^

The sixth lesson is specially designed for realisation of nirvikalpa samddhi, and its potency
and efficacy are thought to derive solely from the grace (krpd) or vibrational force of the guru. This
grace or vibrational force is said to be cystallised in the visual image of the guru, an outpouring of
which is said to occur, descending on the disciple who receptively directs attention to it. This

98
Ananda Mdrga Meditation., p. 13.
99
YP, p. 190.
100
' YP, p. 192.
230
vibrational force is said to function much like the power of consciousness embedded in the ista mantra
(mantra caitanya), awakening and saturating the disciple's whole being with timeless presence (sat),
clear cognisance (cit), bliss (dnanda), and sweetness (madhura). On the disciple's part, an attitude of
openness, self-surrender, and love is essential for success in this lesson, where meditation becomes
effortless and strong natural attraction for the highest consciousness is the sole driving force. In other
words, the practice of bhakti yoga can be said to reach its culmination in the sixth lesson of guru
dhydna. For obvious reasons, the sixth lesson would be identical to the seventh limb of dhydna in the
eightfold stmcture, and is regarded by Sarkar as the meditation technique par excellence. It is the
quintessential technique for perfecting the hirarimaya kosa and for bringing the devotee into
indivisible union with the beloved parama purusa.
From the foregoing discussion, it can be surmised that the main meditative techniques are the
first and sixth lessons, while all the other lessons, particularly the thfrd, fourth, and fifth, serve to
support those two. The second lesson is a meditative technique in itself, though one that is dynamic
and engaged, requiring no formal posture or specific time and place. Proficiency in the second lesson
would, no doubt, enhance the first and the sixth lessons and vice versa. Thus, all the six lessons are
designed to be inter-complementary and inter-enhancing. They are also designed to have a
developmental and transformative effect on all the kosas of the mind by hamessing the various
processes of the eight-limbed yoga (astdriga yoga). Correlations between the six lessons and the limbs
of the astdriga yoga can be summarised as in the table below:

Lessons of Sahaja Yoga Limbs of Astdriga Yoga

1. Isvara prariidhdna 2: isvara prariidhdna (fifth point of niyama)
1.1 dsana 3: dsana
1.2 bhuta suddhi 5: pratydhdra
1.3 dsana suddhi 5: pratydhdra
1.4 citta suddhi 5 & 6: pratydhdra & dhdrarid
1.5 dhydna 1: dhydna

2. Madhuvidyd 1: brahmacdrya (fifth point of yama)

2.1 ardha isvara prariidhdna 5 & 7: pratydhdra & dhydna
2.2 guru mantra 5 & 7: pratydhdra & dhydna
2.3 varridrghyaddna 5: pratydhdra

3. Tattva dhdrarid 6: dhdrarid

4. Prdridydma 4, 6 & 7: prdridydma, dhdrarid, & dhydna

5. Cakra sodhana 6 & 7: dhdrarid & dhydna

6. Guru dhydna 7: dhydna

231
Based on the effects of the astdriga yoga limbs on the kosas (analysed in Chapter 5), I conceive of the
separate effects of the six lessons (which operationalise the eight limbs) on the kosas of the mind as
follows:

Lessons of Sahaja Yoga Ko^as Developed

1. Isvara prariidhdna Annamaya, atimdnasa, vijfidnamaya & hiranmaya

2. Madhuvidyd Kdmamaya, atimdnasa, & hiranmaya
3. Tattva dhdrarid Vijfidnamaya
4. Prdridydma Manomaya, vijfidnamaya & hirarimaya
5. Cakra sodhana Vijfidnamaya & hirarimaya
6. Guru dhydna Hirarimaya

6.1.6 Kdpdlika and ViSesa Yoga: Advanced Practices

Sarkar gave advanced meditative practices to those of his senior disciples who qualified for them.
These practices include kdpdlika yoga, literally "skull-bearer yoga', and visesa yoga, 'special yoga',
on both of which very little printed information is available. According to tertiary sources, kdpdlika
yoga was accessible only to junior dcdryas (termed brahmacdris or for females brahmacdririis) who
were qualified to receive the avadhuta (or avadhutikd) initiation personally from Sarkar. Receiving
this initiation would make the brahmacdri or brahmacdriru a senior dcdrya. The fransmission of
kdpdlika yoga thus coincides with higher initiation into senior discipleship of an avadhuta or
avadhutikd, which is presentiy still possible through avadhuta or avadhdtikd trainers.'"' Such trainers
are purodhds, the highest disciplic order within AM.
In AM, both lay (grhi) and monastic (saninydsi) disciples are entitled to become avadhutas or
avadhiitikds, just as lay disciples are entitled to become family dcdryas alongside the order of
monastic dcdryas. In both the lay and the monastic orders, being an dcdrya is a prerequisite to
becoming an avadhiita or avadhdtikd. Similarly, visesa yoga is taught only to senior dcdryas (that is
avadhutas or avadhiitikds, both lay and monastic) who have the necessary qualifications to leam it.
Exactiy what these qualifications are is not publicly known and no document specifying such details is
available, to the best of my knowledge. Completing all the lessons of visesa yoga enables a senior
dcdrya to be initiated into the highest order of discipleship, purodhd-hood. A purodhd is considered
the most senior and most intensively trained disciple of Sarkar, with a group of purodhds forming the
highest spiritual body within the AM organisation. The lessons of visesa yoga were imparted only to a
few selected individuals either by Sarkar himself or, since his death, by incumbent purodhds}^^

'"' Who's Afraid of the Tantric Guru, p. 162.

'"^CCPartl.p.?.
232
According to oral sources, visesa yoga is still being practised by incumbent purodhds but is rarely
taught to new and aspiring practitioners.'"'
A brief and general description of kdpdlika yoga now follows. Kdpdlika yoga is essentially an
advanced and intensive meditation practice that helps in controlling certain lower instincts such as
fear, shame and hatred. This meditation is performed in a graveyard, cremation ground or any lonely
place between the hours of midnight and three o'clock in the moming during the time of the new
moon. Dharmavedananda, a senior dcdrya of Sarkar, says:

The eerie, death-shrouded atmosphere helps to manifest one's latent fears and baser
instincts while the lonely silence encourages deep concenfration. By this practice, the
aspfrant rapidly gains control over the lower self. At this time, Baba [referring to
Sarkar] also gives the initiation which follows the brahmacdri stage, called avadhuta
(or avadhutikd for Didis). In Ananda Marga, the brahmacdri wears an orange shirt,
orange turban, and a white lungi [a large cloth wrapped around the lower body] or
pants, while the avadhuta wear an orange turban, orange shirt and orange lungi The
uniform is a compromise with the pressing need of modem society for such workers;
historically an avadhiita was a naked yogi covered only by ashes, unattached to
pleasure and pain, and rarely, if ever, seen in society.'""

In Sarkar's redefinition of Tantra, the word 'kdpdlika' takes on a new and sanitised meaning, referring
to the fearless and well-controlled spiritual warrior who remains in society to provide selfless spiritual
and social service. Historically, in India kdpdlikas are wild Tantric practitioners who engage in
antinomian practices such as wine drinking, cannibalism, and sexual rituals in places such as
cemeteries.'"' In Sarkar's Tantra, the selection of a cemetery as the venue for kdpdlika meditation is
arguably the only commonality it has with the orgiastic kdpdlika sect of traditional Tantra.
Admittedly, as the details of AM kdpdlika practice are kept secret, it is impossible, in this study, to
verify the exact nature of such practice.
Visesa yoga is arguably the most advanced form of meditation practice taught by Sarkar.
While details about the practice are unavailable to me, there are scarce references to this practice
interspersed throughout Sarkar's texts. These references will now be discussed. The first detail about
visesa yoga is that it involves some kind of prdridydma, a fact cursorily mentioned in one text.'"* This
particular reference states that only a purodhd is qualified to teach visesa prdridydma along with two
other techniques, sahaja prdridydma and dntar prdridydma. No other details are given for these
techniques. Another clue to the nature of visesa yoga comes from Sarkar's discourse on the meaning
of the Sanskrit word 'vdrdriasT. In this discourse, Sarkar defines vdrdriasi as 'to forbid birth', and he
philosophically identifies it with a particular point between the djfid and sahasrdra cakras, on
attaining which the individual is no longer rebom:

"" Conversations with senior AM dcdryas suggest that the elite circle of purodhds have monopoly over the
methods of visesa yoga and are highly selective about who they impart these methods to.
'"" Who's Afraid of the Tantric Guru, p. 162.
"" See e.g. Feuerstein, Tantra: The Path of Ecstasy, p. 102.

233
 hi both Enghsh and Bengali the meaning of the word 'vS' is 'to check' or 'to stop'
Vdr + anat = vdraria which means 'to forbid' It is a negative command. Similarly, ni-
var + anat = nivarar^. Now, 'anas' means 'birth' Va + anas = varanas. In
Sarnskrta, varanas becomes vdrdriast in the feminine gender. Philosophically,
vdranasi refers to a particular point or 'bindu' In the spiritual sphere, when one
reaches that bindu one no longer takes rebirth - the cycle of birth and death stops and
the aspirant no longer has to retum to this world ... It should be understood that this
vdrariasT does not refer to a particular city of Uttar Pradesh in India but to a point
situated between the ajfia and sahasrdra cakras, that is, between the pituitary and
pineal glands. Spiritual aspirants, through the practice of sddhana and with the help of
the Divine Spirit, become established in that point, attaining great mental power and
omniscience. Such people do not have to take another birth in this world.'"'

Sarkar goes on to say that the practice of visesa yoga enables a person to understand the secrets of the
bindu, through which the mind attains a state beyond birth and death:

That point, that vdrdriasT, which, as I have said, is situated between ajna and sahasrara
cakras, is bright and luminous ... One may leam the secrets of this point through the
practice of viiesa yoga. During this meditation the mind ascends to such a height that
there is no further need to acquire a new body. Those who have not yet learnt visesa
yoga wiU leam it in the future and will come to realise its significance, and will like
it.'"*

From the foregoing discussion, it can be surmised that the practice of visesa yoga, whatever else it
may entail, involves a special meditative point called the bindu and some technique of breath confrol
or praridyama.
Sarkar not only describes the bindu, on a microcosmic level, as a point betweai the ajna and
sahasrara cakras, but also identifies it, on a macrocosmic level, with the vertex (Jaimabija) of the
triangle (trikoria) of inter-changing forces. (The trikona is a concept first expounded in Sarkar's
cosmogonic theory of brahmacakra.) In AMI, he gives another term, bJja bindu (seed of creation), for
the vertex of the triangle of forces w^ich has become unbalanced (guriaksobha), so that the resultant
sentient force (sattvagutia) bursts forth and qualifies pristine/^wrw^a into cosmic mahat."^ From the
discussion in Chapter 4, Sarkar seems to homologise the Ttjfia cakra with the cosmic mahat and the
sahasrdra cakra with purusottama, in so far as the passage of the kuridalim through the Sjna cakra
equates with mergence into cosmic mahat (or saguria brahma), and its arrival at the sahasrara cakra
equates with mergence into cosmic purusa (or nirguria brahma). In other words, the ajnd cakra and
the sahasrara cakra are the microcosmic 'seats' of saguria and nirguria brahma respectively.
Following the same logic of homologism, the microcosn-iic bindu situated between the ajnd and
sahasrara cakras is very appropriately homologised with the seed point (bija bindu) at which nirguria
brahma is about to be transmuted into sagurui brahma.

'"*CC Part 3, p. 69.

'"•'^KPart7,p. 1.
'°*^FPart7, p.2.
234
 In his brahmacakra cosmogony, Sarkar gives a special name for purusa at the bija bindu,
calling it sambhdliriga or simply sambhu (see subsection 3.3.2). He compares the transmutation of
sambhu into the linear flow of bhairava with the process of externalising a thought. (Bhairava is the
phase of purusa when the latter is being influenced by the sentient force to become cosmic mahat.Y"^
In AMI, Sarkar says that sambhU changes from being a placid awareness into highly volatile bursts of
form and energy in the process of its transformation - first into bhairava, and later into bhava.
Similarly, a suppressed thought or desfre causes confusion and entanglement in the mind, at the time
Mvhen this thought or desire begins to take form:

When people's suppressed desires begin to take concrete form in the extemal world,
they become confused: they wonder what should be done and what should not be done.
When people watch the extemahsation of an intemal thought, which had been confined
for a long time in the innermost recesses of the mind, ... they obviously become
confused. The same thing occurs when the tranquil sambhu becomes metamorphosed
into bhairava: it can no longer remain within hard and fast mles and regulations ... it
assumes a particular form, although a distorted one ... when sambhU undergoes change
in the flow of energy, it reaches its second stage. ... In order to commence the process
of creation, sambhU needs to imbibe tremendous momentum.'"

The above discussion leads to the suggestion that the biruiu, being the point at which sambhU
first metamorphoses into bhairava, is inextricably involved in the process of thought and emotional
manifestation. In other words, meditation in visesa yoga arguably involves (a) the point-origin (bindu)
of thought or emotion located between the djnd and sahasrara cakras, and peihaps (b) the observation
of how such thoughts or desires actually burst into form and expression.
Chandranath Kumar (1998), reputed to be the oldest living disciple of Sarkar and a respected
family acarya of AM, makes brief mention of one prerequisite for the leaming and practice of visesa
yoga. He recounts his own experience with Sarkar:

I can teU you vdiat Baba told me. He took a promise from me in July 1955 to sit for
one and one half hours per session. I started sadhana in 1953, but Baba started
teaching me visesa yoga in 1955. Before initiating me into visesa, he first asked me if
I was prepared to sit for a minimum of one and one half hours per sitting. It is a
minimum, not a maximum."'

It appears from the above account that visesa yoga is a highly demanding practice in terms of time and
commitment, and one that is given only to those who are prepared to make the necessary sacrifice.

'"'AM'Part9,p. 617.
"" See subsection 3.3.2 of this thesis for a discussion on the phases of cosmogony and the various names given
to purusa and prakrti in those phases.
'"AMPartl0,p.'729.
" ' Devashish Donald Acosta (ed.). When the Time Comes: Conversation with Acdrya Chandranath Kumar
(Puerto Rico: Inner Worid PubHcations, 1998), pp. 68-69.
235
 The next section will discuss a related aspect of Sarkar's spiritual praxis - Neo-Humanism.
Strictiy speaking, Neo-Humanism falls under the rabric of his social philosophy; however, as it is an
important concept and, to a large extent, a practical method that lies at the basis of his spiritual and
social ideology, a brief discussion of this philosophy is appropriate at this point.

6.2 Neo-Humanism as Praxis

Sarkar designates a phUosophical and practical approach to life and the universe, which he calls Neo-
Humanism. Neo-Humanism, for Sarkar, is the quintessential spirit underlying the entire soteriological
path and the elan-vital that sustains the entire edifice of his social ideology, PROUT (Progressive
Utilisation Theory). Sarkar defines Neo-Humanism as "newly explained Humanism' that 'includes
within its scope not only human beings and animate creatures, such as plants and animals, but also all
inanimate entities as well, for the scope of Neo-Humanism extends down to the smallest particles of
sub-atomic matter'.'" He also makes it clear that Neo-Humanism is not just a philosophical concept
but also a practical approach to spfrituality:

Everything in this universe moves, and this movement is from imperfection towards
perfection. So perfect spirituality is our goal, and Neo-Humanism is our approach ...
And what is the cult? The cult is the movement of Neo-Humanism. That is, the cult is
the movement of all human expressions, all human manifestations - and not only
human expressions, or human manifestations, but all expressions, all manifestations of
all living beings, including flora and fauna.""

Sarkar makes a very close link between the practice of Neo-Humanism and the cultivation of
devotional sentiment, or bhakti yoga. In one sense, the perfection of devotion is essential for reaUsing
the highest state of cosmic consciousness, which in tum enables the person to view aU things and aU
life forms in the cosmos as vibrational parts of himself or herself:

And when spiritual aspirants enter the final phase and become one with Parama
Purusa, certainly there remains no duality in them. They will realise the fact that
everything is in Him, everything cometh from Him, remaineth in Him, and goeth back
to Him. There is no question of any duality. Everything becomes theirs, and they
become everyone's."'

This integral view of non-duality and perfection of devotion is a state of being identical with Neo-
Humanism:

All molecules, atoms, electrons, protons, positrons and neutrons are the veritable
expressions of the same Supreme Consciousness. Those who remember this reality.

Prabhat Ranjan Sarkar, Neo-Humanism in a Nutshell Pan 1 (First Edition), trans. Vijayananda and Jayanta
Kumar (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sanjgha, 1987), p. 50.
Ibid, pp. 48-49. The word 'cult' is used in Sarkar's writings in the sense of 'practice' or 'process'
"^ Ibid., pp. 53-54.
236
 who keep this realisation ever alive in their hearts, are said to have attained perfection
in life. They are the real devotees, the real bhaktas. When this devotional cult does
not remain confined to a mere practice but instead is elevated to a devotional
sentiment, a devotional mission, to the realm of devotional ideation - when the
underlying spirit of humanism is extended to everything, animate and inanimate, in this
universe - 1 have designated this as Neo-Humanism."*

In another sense, Sarkar sees Neo-Humanism as the essential attitude a spiritual practitioner needs to
establish in his or her mind prior to the attainment of moksa, without which the final goal can never be
realised. He makes it clear that one who has realised cosmic consciousness will exhibit concrete
actions of benevolence in the world. Conversely, a lack of benevolent actions would indicate that the
supreme realisation has not been attained, because of a lack of Neo-Humanistic sentiment:

Now ... those who are established in Cosmic Cognisance, Cosmic Cognitive Principle,
certainly do something for the universe both in action and in thought. Those who do
not do so are either far away from that Supreme Stance or have missed that Supreme
Stance at the last moment, just before attaining salvation. But those who actually attain
the goal of salvation, of final emancipation, must establish themselves in Neo-
Humanism just on the eve of their final merger with Parama Purusa - maybe, for a
few moments only; otherwise it is impossible for them to establish themselves in
perfect spirituality and attain Parama Purusa. Neo-Humanism is the last word for
attaining Him."'

Sarkar advocates the practice of Neo-Humanism from the very start of the spiritual path, as far
superior to its adoption at the last moments before salvation. Practising Neo-Humanism from the start
will inspire and allow more time for the practitioner to render greater service to the world:

Those who did not accept Neo-Humanism from the beginning - who accepted it just
before the final stage - also follow a defective path. Perhaps they did not lose anything
personally but there was certainly a collective loss for the whole humanity, for the
world was deprived of thefr service."*

In addition to its role as the motivating force for and affective expression of spiritual
perfection, Neo-Humanism is, for Sarkar, a philosophical stmcture that can support the growth of
devotional sentiment or bhakti As stated before, devotion is the quintessential quality necessary for
ultimate emancipation and is likened by Sarkar to a precious, tender asset to be carefully nurtured and
guarded against the forces of materialism:

The devotional sentiment is the highest and most valuable treasure of humanity. ...
This element of devotion, the most precious treasure of humanity, must be preserved

"* Prabhat Ranjan Sarkar, The Liberation of Intellect: Neo-Humanism (Third Edition), trans. Ananda Mitra and
Vijayananda (Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1987), pp. 6-7.
'" The Liberation of Intellect, p. 54.
'"Ibid
237
 most carefuUy. Because it is such a tender inner asset, to preserve it from the
onslaughts of materialism, one must build a protective fence around it, just as people
put up a guardrail around a small tender plant. Now the question is, what is this
protective fence? It is a proper philosophy which will establish the correct harmony
between the spiritual and material worlds, and be a perermial source of inspfration for
the onward movement of society.

In other words, studying, reflecting on, understanding and applying the philosophical principles and
ideals of Neo-Humanism - a spfritual practice in itself - can be a powerful means of nourishing the
existence and growth of devotion.
The process by which Neo-Humanism aids the growth and development of devotion,
culminating in spiritual perfection, is the progressive liberation of the inteUect (buddhi) from self-
limiting dogmas. Sarkar defines dogma as "a preconceived idea which forbids human beings to out
step the limits of that idea or object'."" Dogmas, be they religious, cultural, economic, poUtical or
scientific, are ideas with rigid boundary lines that prevent expansion of the intellect and mind, ideas
which, according to Sarkar, are inimical to the project of &ra/ima-realisation. The philosophical ideals
of Neo-Humanism are designed to transform the mindset of the practitioner by shifting his or her ego-
identity away from self, family, culture, ethnicity, country, geographical locus, species, and even life
itself, towards unification with the cosmos in its entirety, animate and inanimate. The universalistic
concepts of Neo-Humanism act as mental objects that so enlarge the periphery of the mind, that
intellect (buddhi) is 'liberated' into intuition (bodhi), and intuition into devotion (bhakti) at the
culminating phase of spfritual praxis. In Sarkar's terminology, the Neo-Humanistic sentiment replaces
all forms of 'geo-sentiment' (sentimental identification with one's locality at the expense of other
localities), "socio-sentiment' (sentimental identification with one's society at the expense of other
societies), and even 'humanistic sentiment' (sentimental identification with the human species at the
expense of other species).'" In the perfection of Neo-Humanism, intellect expands and liberates into
devotion, devotion into cosmic cognisance - where all forms of limiting identification cease with the
total dissolution of duality between self and cosmos, between self and universal purusa.
In summary, Neo-Humanism can be regarded as (1) a philosophical structure that is used for
contemplation in order to liberate the intellect and cultivate devotion; (2) the fundamental motivation
for spfritual practice and social service; and (3) a state of realisation in which one loses all
identification with limiting categories and instead feels oneness with all life and all things - equivalent
to savikalpa samddhi.

The Liberation of Intellect, pp. 3-4.

The Liberation of Intellect, p. 37.

238
6.3 Dynamics and Mechanisms of Spiritual Evolution
According to Sarkar, the process of spiritual development occurs on all three levels of human
existence - physical (body), psychic (mind), and spiritual (consciousness). This developmental
process expresses itself as dialectical straggle between the forces of vidyd (wisdom) and avidyd
(ignorance), necessitating constant and consistent application of viveka (discriminative insight) and
culminating in the final reconciliation of all opposites in the non-dual realisation of parama purusa - a
coincidentia oppositorum of vidyd and avidyd.'^^
We will explore the physical aspects of spfritual evolution by focussing on Sarkar's account of
biopsychological changes that accompany spiritual practice. The glands and plexuses involved in
spiritual growth, and the effects of food and dsanas on it will be discussed. We will next clarify the
various mental processes and stages of psychological transformation that take place as a practitioner
progresses on the spiritual path. In particular, the stages of samddhi in connection with the raising of
the kuridalirii and the various grades of experience indicative of spiritual advancement will be
analysed, with attention given to their phenomenological features. While the initial and intermediate
stages of samddhi relate to the mind, the attainment of ultimate samddhi transcends the mind and
enters the realm of consciousness or spirituality. Finally, the role of the guru's grace (krpd) and its
connection to minute emanations of pure consciousness - microvita - in the spiritual progress of the
practitioner will be discussed. The mechanism by which microvita affect the consciousness of the
practitioner will be highlighted.

6.3.1 Dialectics of Change

According to Sarkar, the spfritual path is a dialectical stmggle between vidydmdyd (force of
knowledge or introversion) and avidydmdyd (force of ignorance or extroversion), a straggle that is
simultaneously the rdsatild or 'playful flow'"' of parama purusa. Avidydmdyd manifests itself in the
human mind in five ways, namely: (1) avidyd ('erroneous belief); (2) asmitd ('ego-sense'); (3) rdga
('blind attachment'); (4) dvesa ('aversion'); and (5) abhinivesa ('psychic obsession')."" Vidydmdyd
affects the human mind by firstiy, awakening its desfre for leading a spfritual life (effect of samvit
sakti), and secondly, inspfring the person to take practical actions to move towards parama purusa
(effect of hlddini sakti) (see subsection 3.2.1 for discussion of sakti). When walking the spiritual path,
the practitioner continues to experience the unwholesome influence of the five expressions of
avidydmdyd, and needs to exert constant effort, guided by vidydmdyd, to overcome and franscend
them.

The Liberation of Intellect, pp. 9-14.

Eliade uses the term 'coincidentia oppositorum' to describe the resolution of dichotomy and polarity in
religious meanings, culminating in the dialectical synthesis of opposites in religious experience. See Mircea
Eliade, The Quest: History and Meaning in Religion (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1969), pp. 133-174.
'"AM/Parts 5-8, p. 567.
""AM/Parts 5-8, pp. 563-570.
239
 One key to resolving and transcending this spiritual dialectic is through the exercise of viveka
('conscience' or discemment). Viveka is a propensity that lies 'embedded' in the vijndnamaya kosa of
the mind. Viveka is fully expressed through the perfection of the vijfidnamaya kosa, as is the
propensity of vairdgya ('non-attachment'). This viveka has five aspects, namely: (1) nitydnitya viveka
('discemment between permanent and impermanent'); (2) dvaitddvaita viveka ('discernment between
dualism and non-dualism'); (3) dtmdndtma viveka ('discernment between pure cognisance and non-
cognisance'); (4) padcakosa viveka ('discemment of the five layers of mind'); and (5) mahdvdkya
viveka ('discemment of the great word'), seen by Sarkar as the resultant of the first four types of

viveka.
Following the Pataiijala Yoga Sutras (YS), Sarkar defines the five unwholesome expressions of
avidydmdyd by quoting from the YS, and even interprets them in much the same way except for
abhinivesa. These interpretive definitions are given as follows:
(1) Avidyd is essentially the mistaken perception or belief in people that (a) the transient is
permanent, (b) the impure is pure, and (c) the 'finite objects of Prakrti are thefr own.'"*
(2) Asmitd is to 'confuse drksakti (witaessing entity) with darsanasakti (faculty of sight)' and to
personally assume 'full authorship of an action'. It is essentially to forget that purusa, the
'Cognitive Faculty', 'is the witnessing force behind the faculty of seeing, behind the
existential I-feeling [mahat or buddhi].''^^
(3) Rdga is 'blind attachment' or the 'tendency to run after certain objects in the pursuit of
pleasure.'"*
(4) Dvesa is the opposite of rdga and is the attempt to 'divert the mind from those objects or ideas
[that are] ... painful or tormenting ... to escape from the anticipated pain.'"' It is essentially
recoiling from suffering or aversion.
(5) Abhinivesa is 'psychic obsession' powered by the 'acquired samskdras of human beings.'"" It
is essentially keeping oneself alienated from the 'Cosmic flow' (brahmarasa or pardrasa) due
to over-identification with one's individual flow (svarasa) of vanity, conceit or other ego-
centred propensities. This interpretation of abhinivesa is different from that of the YS, which
states: 'As in the ignorant so in the learned; the frnnly established inbom fear of annihUation
is the affliction called abhinivesa.''^' In Sarkar's interpretation, fear is not specifically
mentioned.
Sddhand or spiritual practice is basically an effort to overcome these expressions of avidyd
and to move ever closer towards oneness with parama purusa, the timeless and unlimited continuum

' " AMI Parts 5-8, pp. 526-537.

127 ^^^ ^^^^^ 5-8, pp. 563-564: anitya aiuci duhkha andtmasu nitya suci sukha dtmakhydtih avidyd (YS II.5).
AMI Pans 5-i, pp. 5(>4-565\drkdar:§ana^aktyohekdtmatdiva asmitd (YSll.G).
AMI Parts 5-8, p. 565: sukhdnusayi rdgah (YS 11.7).
129
AM/Parts 5-8, p. 566: duhkhdnusayi dvesah (YS II.8).
130
AM/Parts 5-8, pp. 566-567: svarasavdhl vidufo 'pi samdrudhah abhinive^ah (YS II.9).

240
of blissful cognisance. However, overcoming these five avidyd propensities does not mean desfroying
them but skilfully hamessing and channelling them towards parama purusa. The resolution of the
vidyd-avidyd dialectic lies not in suppressing or obliterating negative propensities, but in fransmuting
them into positive forces capable of bringing good to oneself and society. To that end, the exercise of
viveka ('conscience') is cmcial.
Sarkar defines viveka as "a special type of vicdra (deliberation) ... where there is a conscious
endeavour to decide in favour of sreya (benevolence) when confronted with the two opposing ideas of
sreya and preya (malevolence).'"' Of the five kinds of viveka that he describes as essential to
authenticity and progress on the spiritual path, the ffrst is nitydnitya viveka, or discemment of what is
permanent from what is not. This discemment results in the spiritual aspirant accepting and taking
refuge in that which is beyond change and time, namely the cosmic entity, brahma. He stresses that
nitydnitya viveka enables one to develop one's critical and intellectual faculties, which empowers the
individual to reject and fight against dogmatic assertions and practices, particularly religious ones. He
cites the Indian caste system and the anti-scientific stance of traditional religions as examples of
conventional and temporary ideas that need to be distinguished from dharma, the universal and etemal
tmth that vitalises all life."'
Dvaitddvaita viveka, the second type of discemment, allows a person to "analyse whether the
Etemal Entity is one or more than one and come to a conclusion accordingly.'"" Through exercising
this form of discemment, the sddhakd is said to be able to conclude, at least intellectually, that there is
a singular ultimate trath underlying the manifold expressions of the universe.
Atmdndtma viveka, the third type of discemment, enables a person to 'analyse whether the
Permanent, Non-dualistic Entity is consciousness (dtmabhdva) or non-consciousness
(andtmabhdva).''^^ By exercising this faculty of dtmdndtma viveka, the sddhaka is able to discern the
three factors of 'knower, knowledge and knowable' and 'come to the realisation that all three are
changeable and perceptible and hence non-consciousness by nature.'"* In other words, he or she
penefrates with insight that the so-called 'knower', the act of knowing, and the object that is known
are impermanent and hence ultimately unreal, though conventionally they are perceptible and are thus
real to that extent. Sarkar goes on to say that the sddhaka then discems the ultimately real as "nothing
but Consciousness'.'"
Paficakosa viveka, the fourth type of discemment, is the ability to discern the physical body
(annamaya kosa) and the five kosas of the mind as separate layers, each with its own characteristics
and functions. More importantly, Sarkar sees paficakosa viveka as the insight into consciousness, as

131
Hariharananda Araqya, Yoga Philosophy ofPatanjali, trans. P. N. Mukerji (Albany: State University of New
York, 1983), p. 126.
'"AM/Parts 5-8, p. 526.
'"AM/Parts 5-8 , pp. 526-531.
""AM/Parts 5-8, p. 532.
"'Ibid
"* AM/Parts 5-8, p. 533.
"'Ibid
241
distinct (but not necessarily separate) from all the kosas; it enables correct 'ideation on one's own
consciousness beyond these kosas.'
Sarkar sees the fifth and final form of discemment, mahdvdkya viveka, as the result of the first
four. It is the ability to realise that brahma is the etemal trath, singular and non-dual, of the nature of
pure consciousness, and the witnessing ground of all the kosas. Sarkar regards mahdvdkya viveka as
leading a sddhaka to come to the conclusion that brahma carmot be attained by action (karma) and
knowledge (jfidna) alone but requires the 'abundance' and 'eruichment'"' of devotion (bhakti). In
other words, only through total and selfless surrender of all that is anitya, andtman, dvaita, and of the
five kosas, can a sddhaka finally attain the consummation of viveka - parama purusa.
From the above discussion, it can be seen that the five types of viveka assist the sddhaka in
clearly and correctly ascertaining the ultimate goal and object of meditation. In addition, mahdvdkya
viveka, the fifth type of discemment, also enables him or her to transcend the contradictions and
straggles of spiritual practice through the culminating act of devotion. After identifying, through the
first four types of viveka, the supreme object of meditation as that endless and infinite process of
consciousness (akhdndacidaikardsa brahma), the sddhaka is finally able to 'channelise all positive
and negative propensities of mind toward Him.''"" Rather than attempting to desfroy the forces of
avidydmdyd in the mind, one utilises the energies of the 'mental enemies' (ripus) to benefit oneself
and society:

Spiritual aspirants will not desti-oy the six ripus (not even kdma or physical longing)
but will utilise them for thefr benefit. When utilised as aids for spiritual progress they
will do no further harm. So-called jddnis may fight the propensity of krodha (anger),
but devotees will utilise it to fight staticity. They will shatter the meanness and
pettiness of the mind through psychic strength and fearsome temper. So-called jfidnis
claim that the propensity of greed (lobha) is harmful, but devotees disagree - they
nurture greed to attain Him. Jfidnis abhor vanity or pride (mada), but devotees say that
the only object of pride in their lives is Paramapurusa. Jfidnis detest the propensity of
blind attachment (moha), but devotees say, 'I am already in love with Him. I have a
blind attachment for attaining my Lord.' The propensity of jealousy (mdtsarya) as a
ripu is very bad, but a spiritual aspfrant will never take it as harmful. In this way,
spiritual aspirants keep their vision fixed on Brahma.'*'

When taken in the context of the entire spfritual praxis of AM, Sarkar's comments in the
passage quoted above are not to be taken as condoning harmful states of mind and actions, hi the
spirit of Tanfra, Sarkar is exhorting his disciples firstiy, to straggle against negative forces, and attain
mastery and control over them (saktd stage), and secondly to surrender fully one's mind, consisting of
both positive and negative propensities, to brahma (vaisriava stage). This surrender is made possible
by constantly keeping the view and ideation of brahma alive in the sddhaka's heart and mind, even as

"*AM/Part5-8,p.535.
'"AM/Parts 5-8, p. 537.
'"" AM/Parts 5-8, p. 568.
'*'lbid.
242
negative tendencies assert themselves. In this way, the power of consciousness directs and hamesses
the force of these tendencies, transmuting them into forces for beneficial and noble purposes. This
transmutation is fundamentally the sublimation of physical energy (bhavdni sakti) into psychic energy
(bhairavi sakti), psychic energy into spfritual energy (kausiki sakti), and finally spfritual energy into
the essence of pristine consciousness, purusottama. Hence, the dialectic of vidyd and avidyd reaches
its resolution through the combined practice of the five types of viveka, in a spirit of prdnipdtena,'*^
complete surrender to the supreme.

6.3.2 Biopsychological Changes

Sarkar envisages the process of spfritual growth as intimately connected to changes in the glands,
hormones, and nervous system. According to him, correct spiritual practice wiU help elicit such
changes:

By spiritual cult, spfritual sddhand, you may bring about certain changes in your
nervous system, nerve cells and nerve fibres, control the secretions of the hormones
from different glands and sub-glands, and become elevated. By this process of
elevation a person becomes superhuman and goes beyond the periphery of the common
human psychology.'"'

Sarkar does not give detailed and biologically precise information about changes in the nervous
system brought about by spiritual practice; he does, however, use physiological terminology
considerably in a general and sweeping manner to outiine what he understands to be the physical
correlates of spiritual development. The following discussion will mainly focus on the bodily,
hormonal, and glandular changes.
One of the most obvious changes involves the glamour of the physical body. According to
Sarkar, a sentient or pure vegetarian diet and regular spfritual practices will, over time, produce a
sentient body: all the cells of the body become healthy and radiant with vitality. He goes so far as to
say that these cells collectively emanate an effulgence that creates an aura around the body of the
spiritual aspirant. A diet containing a large proportion of green leafy vegetables will also supply large
quantities of chlorophyll. As previously discussed, chlorophyll acts as a catalyst for the production of
lymph, which in tum serves as raw material for hormone production. Hormones in requisite quantities
are, in Sarkar's view, essential to the growth of the body and the development of nobler qualities of
mind. As a spfritual aspfrant continues to partake of green vegetables in the course of spiritual
practice, adequate, and in some cases, high supplies of certain hormones are made available and the
growth of human qualities becomes possible. An adequate supply of testicular hormones in a male
develops the spfrit of rationality, while over-secretion in a youth creates a strong longing for parama
purusa. Hence, an optimal supply of testicular hormones is a biopsychological change that occurs as

142
AM/Part 5-8, pp. 536-537.
'"'KP, p.201.
243
spiritual practice progresses. In the case of the solar plexus (andhata cakra), an over-secretion of
hormones in this plexus will transform human love into universal love, as well as developing a beard
and a large chest in a male. Again, an over-supply of hormones from the solar plexus is a
biopsychological change associated with spiritual progress.
Through the practice of dsanas, the thyroid and parathyroid glands are thought to secrete their
hormones in a balanced way, causing deepening of the voice and growth of a moustache in the male.
If there is proper hormonal secretion, the quality of self-reliance will develop in both males and
females, and negative traits of irrationality, vanity, and a quarrelsome nature will thereby be
prevented.
In the case of the pituitary and pineal glands, continued and correct spiritual practice causes
secretion of relevant hormones in the upper glands, which maintains a balance in all the other glands.
Sarkar believes that, sometimes in meditation, the glands and sub-glands above the djfid cakra
(associated with the pituitary gland) secrete sudhdrasa or 'bliss-causing hormones' that get consumed
by the djfid cakra. When this happens, the 'irises of the eyes move upwards and a state of trance
ensues'.'"" Sarkar describes this state:

A pleasant drowsiness of tandra [somnolence] mixed with nidrd [sleepiness]

overcomes the eyes, and the person is immersed in a type of slumber of a subtle loka
[realm]. This kind of yoga nidrd, bhdva nidrd, adhydtma nidra is known as hypnosis
in English. Bear in mind that is has no connection with hypnotism or mesmerism.
Hypnotism or mesmerism is outer-suggestion, while hypnosis is autosuggestion.'"'

In the same way, when 'bliss-causing hormones' from the upper regions flow downwards to the
visuddha cakra (associated with the thyroid and parathyroid glands) in times of successful meditation,
certain biopsychological effects can be observed:

A great many of the hormones secreted by the upper glands are metabolised in it and
absorbed here, and very littie of these hormones descend down. If one's sddhand is
perfect then the sound of the voice becomes sonorous and pleasant for some time, to
some extent a state of intoxication ensues, the sinusoid nerve throbs a littie, the body
tums motionless and stonelike, and the skin becomes thin and light to some degree.'"*

The remainder of 'bliss-causing hormones' flow downwards to the andhata cakra and become almost
entirely absorbed there. Sarkar equates the bodily bliss experienced in meditation with the effect of
these hormones on the andhata cakra:

The entrancing action of the bliss-causing hormone of the upper region, which is
designated sudhdrasa in Sanskrit, when it reaches here leads to the greatest sensation

'**YP, p. 187.
'*'lbid
'"* YP, p. 188.
244
 in this spot, and the mind gets lost in the higher realm. The developed sddhaka
remains submerged in this beatific condition of intoxication.

Exactiy how these biopsychological effects are related to the various stages of samddhi and the rise of
the kuridalini is not clearly stated by Sarkar. The above passages seem to describe, in terms of
biopsychology, some of the experiences a meditator is likely to have in the process of serious and
committed meditative practice.
Sarkar regards the pituitary and pineal glands as of the utmost importance in the ultimate
spiritual attainment. He comments that when a meditator 'sfrikes the pineal gland, salvation is
achieved', presumably referring to the ascent of the kuridalirii to the topmost cakra. No information
about the biopsychological changes of this ultimate experience has been explicitly given. In the case
of the pituitary gland, Sarkar mentions that the left side of this gland is particularly important for
spiritual progress, linked as it is with the propensity of pardvidyd (knowledge leading to the Supreme).
He says that when the left side of the pituitary gland is developed but not the right side, a meditator
may be rebom in a human body in the next life to continue sddhand. If, however, both sides of the
pituitary gland are developed, the meditator will attain fera/ima-knowledge, if not omniscience
(trikdladarsi sarvajnatva) - superknowledge of all things existing in the past, present and future.'"*

6.3.3 Mind Transformation: Process and Stages

In the aspfrant's quest for spfritual fulfilment, the process of kosa purification and perfection plays an
essential role. The three gurias - tamoguria, rajoguna, sattvaguria - exert varying degrees of influence
over each kosa. Such influence is govemed by the principle that the subtler and deeper the kosa, the
greater the predominance of the sentient principle (sattvaguria) and the less the influence of the static
principle (tamoguria). In Sarkar's view, spiritual progress is contingent upon gradual purification of
the kosas so that they can fully reflect, and thus become one with, the pristine radiance of parama
purusa. I will discuss the process of kosa purification and perfection briefly in this section.
In his accounts of spiritual praxis, Sarkar discusses several pathways of spfritual evolution,
each comprising a series of stages of realisation that marks the practitioner's progress. In particular,
the six stages of self-realisation (classified as samddhi) and the four stages of pratydhdra yoga will be
described here, with attention to the phenomenological features of each stage. The range of mystical
sounds that can be heard by the practitioner in the course of spfritual elevation will be described and
correlated with the six stages.
Sarkar also provides a map of spiritual progress in terms of the quality, depth, and extent of
knowing that a practitioner comes to possess as he or she develops on the AM path. In this section, I
will discuss these stages of knowing and examine how they relate to the schema of the four
pratydhdra stages and to Sarkar's theory of knowledge (see subsection 4.2.3).

'*'lbid.

245
 Apart from the highly regarded attainments of savikalpa and nirvikalpa samddhi, Sarkar also
mentions several other types of samddhi, representing profound states of realisation that a meditator
may attain in the course of practice. These samddhi states will be briefly discussed. He gives another
schema for categorising various states of spiritual ecstasy in a hierarchical order, and groups them
under the headings of dasd, bhavd, bhavd samddhi, and mahdbhavd.'*^ I will attempt to correlate all
the above schemas on the basis of thefr phenomenological features.

Process of Mind Transformation

The process of spiritual development depends on progressive purification and perfection of the layers
of mind, the five kosas. In Sarkar's theory of mind, the kosas are differentiated from one another
according to prakrti's degree of domination over each of them. All the three gurias of prakrti operate
in all kosas; but as regards their influence on each kosa, one guna is said to be dominant, one to be
intermediate, and one to be the least. The influence of the gurias on the five kosas can be tabulated as
150
follows

Bondage of Guitas
Kosa Dominant Intermediate Least
Kdmamaya static sentient mutative
Manomaya mutative static sentient
Atimdnasa mutative sentient static
Vijndnamaya sentient static mutative
Hirarimaya sentient mutative static

Each kosa contains impurities that need to be cleansed in order that pure consciousness can be clearly
reflected in them. These impurities are due to the influence of the static and mutative principles,
which generate the many propensities of the mind under the influence of avidyd mdyd. Avidyd mdyd is
the extroversial force of supreme consciousness that pushes unit entities further away from the nucleus
of spiritual fulfilment. Under the influence of avidyd mdyd, the mutative and static forces gain
strength over the sentient force and start dominating the cycle of creation in sequence (discussed in
Chapter 3). One variant of avidyd mdyd, known as viksepa sakti or 'force of distortion or repulsion',
is chiefly responsible for generating the many propensities and ideas that disturb the mind's natural
peace via the static and mutative principles. Of the bondage imposed on the kosas by the gurias,
Sarkar says:

148
YP p. 121.
Anandamurti, 'You Should Do Accordingly', pp. 1-2. Electronic Edition of the Works of P. R. Sarkar
(Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 2001).
"° Taken from SPSSA, p. 158.
246
 Just as in a dfrt-free ... mirror you can see an original object very well, and when it
becomes dirty the knowledge of the object becomes hazier, exactly so is the case with
self-visualisation of dtman in the mental mirror ... The greater the influence of Prakrti
or avidyd, the greater the impurities. This is the reason why the lower cells or kosas
are less capable of expressing His greatness than the higher ones.'"

Purifying and perfecting the kosas would mean encouraging the power of vidyd mdyd (the
infroversial force of supreme consciousness) in the mind, so that the sentient force gains dominance
over the other two and the brilliance of the dtman can shine. Thus, a fundamental requfrement of
spiritual development is increasing sattvification of the kosas by means of proper sddhand.
According to Sarkar, the sddhand of kosa purification and perfection relies upon (1) a clear
understanding of and insight into the kosas, (2) step-wise introversion of mental tendencies, and (3)
merging of each kosa into the next one until final mergence into the dtman:

The mind is the object of dtman. To attain dtman, blend the mind with its original
subject. Unify the object with the subject ... There is only one way to self-realisation
and it is to fuse the mind with the knower of the mind, that is, to eliminate the cmde
manifestation of the dtman. How is this possible? This is possible only through the
introversion of the tendencies, and the tendencies are introverted only through
knowledge and sddhand. It is not possible to infrovert them until each and every kosa
is realised. When the mind realises that the physical body is the vehicle of the mind,
then you will know that there is progress in sddhand; that is, it is necessary to have
perfect conception of each kosa. For this, it shall have to be conceived where one kosa
ends and another begins ... Only those philosophies which carry us to the highest
levels of the soul by observing every current of the mind are the real philosophies; the
rest are only academic logic."

In other words, spiritual progress is indicated by a deepening insight into the various kosas, and
increasing ability to merge each kosa into the next. With this insight and ability comes an increasing
confrol over the cakras and vrttis, as the mind becomes more and more elevated and subtle. Since
each kosa controls a corresponding cakra, beginning with the mulddhdra cakra and ending with the
visuddha cakra, the merging of a crader kosa into a subtier one would mean control over a lower
cakra by a higher one. This correlates with the gradual ascent of the kuridalini through the various
cakras. Sarkar says:

The all-round, perfect sddhand is the sustained effort to identify every kosa with the
inner self completely. The more a sddhaka goes forward in his sddhand, the more his
cakras and vrttis get gradually controlled by the higher and higher kosas. It will not do
for a sddhaka to stop here. At the final stage of his sddhand, even the bearing of the
djfid cakra, that is, the whole of his mind-entity, has to be taken to the higher loka; that
is, taking it to the Brahmaloka, he has to merge it in ... Consciousness. It is in the
sahasrdra, the seventh cakra, the thousand-petalled lotus seat of Brahma in the summit
of the skull, that he can get himself established in real happiness ... That state is indeed

151
SPSSA, pp. 158-159.
'"55 Parti, pp. 59-60.
247
 the ultimate goal of the unit - his own characteristic state. That state is the
characteristic state of Brahma also. There exists neither you nor He separately - the
two become one

From the foregoing discussion, it appears that the merging of lower kosas into higher kosas is
identical in process to the rise of the kuridalirii through all the cakras. This is corroborated by the
assertion that 'as the mind rises to higher and higher kosas during mental concentration, it hears the
'divine sounds' of the kuridalirii rising to higher and higher cakras'.'^ Sarkar gives a vivid
description of the sounds that can be heard:

The sound which originates from the vibration of the kdmamaya kosa resembles the
sound of ankle bells. When the manomaya kosa vibrates, the sound resembles flute
music. The Vaisriavas call it the flute sound of Lord Krsna. The vibration of the
Cosmic thought projection reverberates in the atimdnasa kosa like a long bell sound.
In vijfidnamaya kosa, this sound resembles the buzzing of a bee or the roaring sound of
the sea. In hirarimaya kosa, one hears a feeble orh sound ... One hears that particular
Cosmic sound where his mind is stuck. In the absence of mental concentration, one
does not generally hear any of these sounds of the orrikdra.' '

The process of spiritual development involving the stepwise sattvification of the kosas on the
one hand, and the rise of the kuridalirii on the other, occurs in stages and results in profound
transformation of the mind. I will now explore in some detail these stages of fransformation.

Schema 1: Six Stages of Realisation

Sarkar attributes the six stages of self-realisation to the supposedly historical personage, Krsna. He
views them as the means by which Krsna imparted different grades of fcraftma-realisation to his
devotees. The six stages are: (1) sdlokya, (2) sdmipya, (3) sdyujya, (4) sdrupya, (5) sdrsthi, and (6)
kaivalya. In effect, Sarkar is affirming that these six stages of spiritual progress are as relevant now as
they were in the days of Krsna. Appropriating them into his own praxis, Sarkar reiterates their role as
a guiding framework to chart the practitioner's progress on the path. Consistent with Sarkar's
privileging of bhakti, this framework is rooted in and permeated by the spfrit of devotion, and
describes the degree of closeness and intimacy between the devotee and the object of devotion.
The first stage is sdlokya, literally 'same sphere'."* Sdlokya is the realisation that the devotee
is existing in the same world- and time-space as the supreme consciousness, parama purusa. In this
stage, the devotee is said to have the feeling that 'I exist, my Lord exists', and to be able to experience
the pervasive presence of the supreme consciousness.'" The presence of non-dual and infinite
stability, clarity, and bliss has yet to fully unfold in the devotee's mind; it flashes forth sufficientiy for

'"55Part4, pp. 88-90.

"" SPSSA, p. 163.
'"55Part4, p. 81.
"* SPSSA, p. 63.

248
him or her to feel its possibility and its existence. The experience of sdlokya corresponds to the rise of
the kuridalini through the svddhisthdna cakra, and represents the initial yet vital stage in the progress
of the spirit."* On this experience, Sarkar conunents:

In the first stage he [feels] that the Supreme Father [is] with him, in the same status.
He is not in the sky. He is everywhere. He is with you. If you are here and He is in
the sky, then you are alone here and He is also alone there. No, no, no, no. In the ffrst
stage, the feeling [is] that. 'Where I am. He is also with me' ... This first pleasure is
called sdlokya samddhi."^

The main feature of this stage is that apart from the sense of one's existence, there exists alongside it a
greater reaUty that transcends the personal and the specific. This reality is interpreted theologically as
the Supreme Father whose presence can be felt by the devotee. He or she also experiences a subtle
pleasure concomitant with the feeling of divine presence, and becomes able to hear certain inner
sounds. In sdlokya, the devotee is able to hear the sound of crickets, which is a cmde expression of
the orrikdra, the cosmic sound that emanates from the point of creation.'*"
The second stage of realisation is sdmipya, 'proximity'.'*' In this stage, the devotee feels an
increasing sense of closeness and intimacy with the supreme entity. The kuridalirii rises further and
crosses the mariipiira cakra, giving the devotee the pleasure of proximity with parama purusa. Sarkar
describes it thus:

And in the second stage, it is, 'I have come very close, very near that Supreme Father, I
am in close proximity to that Supreme Progenitor. By my sddhand the gap between
my father and myself is being reduced.''*'

In the second stage, they feel they are close to Parama Purusa, close enough to talk to
him in friendly terms, even regarding extremely personal matters, and thus be relieved
and comforted by Him. Sometimes people feel so close to Him that they may or may
not disclose thefr personal difficulties but they go to Him just for relief, just for
consolation, and they feel sufficiently sfrengthened to withstand the difficulties and
troubles, the storms and stresses of personal life.'*'

In sdmipya, as the kuridalirii pierces the mariipura cakra, the devotee is able to hear the 'jhum jhum'
sound, akin to the sound of ankle bells.'*" Again, this is but an expression of the etemal cosmic sound,
which becomes audible to the devotee as he or she progresses on the meditative path. The main
feature of this second stage is a sense of neamess between one's existence and the existence of that

'"NKS, pp. 13-15.

"*fiG, p. 161.
' " B G , p. 162.
'*" SPSSA. p. 64.
'"Ibid
"'Ibid
'^^ NKS, p. 15.
'*" SPSSA. p. 64.
249
greater reality, here interpreted as the divine source of one's being. This sense of closeness is
accompanied by a subtie pleasure characteristic of the second stage.
The third stage is sdyujya, 'in close contact, just side by side, just touching'. Here, the
devotee experiences such close contact with the supreme entity that an actual tactUe experience is
possible. There is almost no physical separation between the devotee and the object of devotion:

Next comes the stage of sdyujya. It implies close contact, almost touching the body,
the closest contact that can ever be imagined'**... and here in sdyujya, you feel the
, . 167
tactual expenence.

In the third stage, the devotee is again able to hear an inner sound, but one that is subtier than the
previous ones - a sweet flute sound. This occurs when the kuridalirii,risingeven further, pierces the
andhata cakra. The main feature of the third stage of sdyujya is an affective state of imminent contact
with a greater reality, which is expressed in a tactual mode of experience. The experience of tactile
sensations in concomitance with hearing an inner flute sound in what is presumably a meditative state
suggests synesthesia, where the different and separate sense modalities cross boundaries and blend
together into one organic experience.
With more spiritual practice, the devotee is able to realise the fourth stage of sdrupya, 'same
form'.'** Sdrupya occurs when the kuridalini ascends and crosses the visuddha cakra, giving rise to a
"subtier samddhi' during which the devotee is able to hear the sound of a ringing bell. This experience
is marked by a sense of oneness with the supreme entity, though not quite a complete merger:

In sdrupya, the feeling is 'I am one with Him.' Not close contact, but oneness. 'I am
one with the Supreme Progenitor, with the Supreme Cognition.''*'

The next stage of sddhand is sdrupya. It implies that, not only am I close to Him, but
whenever I think of Him, I see Him in all dfrections. Now how do people attain this
state of realisation? One may attain this state by becoming His closest and most
intimate companion - for instance, as His father, mother, wife, son or any near or dear
relation.""

The main feature of the fourth stage is coincidence between personal and franspersonal realities,
wherein the sense of duality is attenuated but still present. The auditory experience in this stage has
changed into one of a ringing bell, a supposedly subtier manifestation of the cosmic sound.
With greater progress in spiritual practice, the kuridalirii rises even further and pierces the djfid
cakra, the controlling point of the pituitary gland. This signifies attainment of the fifth stage of

'*' BG, p. 162.

'** BG, p. 16.
'*'fiG, p. 162.
'** SPSSA, p. 64.
'*' BG, p. 164.

250
sdrsthi, 'same experience'.'" In this stage, the devotee feels that 'I am He', and merges his or her
individual identity with the identity of the supreme entity. Sarkar describes this stage:

Sdrsthi implies that the spiritual aspirant realises Parama Purusa in all possible ways
and in all conceivable manners. Not only do the devotees see him, but they also
remain united with Him, one with Him. That is the sddhaka has the feeling that I exist.
He also exists and there is a link between us. The subject is there, the object is there,
and the verb is also there to establish the connection.'"

Sarkar argues that sdrsthi is still tainted by a highly subtie sense of duality between the devotee and
the object of devotion, and cannot be the ultimate attainment. It is synonymous with savikalpa
samddhi, wherein the mind of the individual merges into the cosmic mind of parama purusa. Here,
the presence of the mind - the sense of 'I am He' - creates the subtle separation between itself and the
unconfined naked cognisance underlying the mind and the universe. The devotee at this penultimate
stage hears a 'continuous, sonorous sound, like a conch shell, which becomes the sound of ocean or
thunder, and finally merges in the Oiri sound'.'" The main feature of the fifth stage of sdrsthi is a
maximal proximity between personal and franspersonal realities such that separation between the two
becomes almost impossible. A highly attenuated sense of duality exists but is so refined that no
practical differentiation between the unit and the cosmic is possible. The devotee experiences himself
or herself as the cosmic ground from which all that exists in the universe originates, the ground in
which the universe is sustained, and the ground into which the universe finally dissolves.
The final stage of kaivalya is reached when the kuridalirii arrives at the sahasrdra cakra, the
controlling point of the pineal gland and the seat of parama purusa. Sarkar sees this final stage as
identical to nirvikalpa samddhi, wherein the duality between self and consciousness finally dissolves,
and only one entity exists:

Kevala means 'only', and the noun of kevala is kaivalya. That is, only one entity
exists. That entity may be 'I', that entity may be 'He', but the differentiation between
'F and 'He' disappears. So 'I exist' or 'He exists' - these two ideas disappear. Exists.
This is the stage of non-attributional consciousness. It is the supreme stage of Yogic
sddhand. It is the Supreme Stance of a yogi.''*

There are no inner sounds at this stage, as the mind is totally dissolved, and no experience (as
commonly understood) is possible. The main feature of this stage is an ineffable infinite
consciousness or cognisance free of all identity and differentiation. Kaivalya is, in effect, the highest

""yV/^5, p. 16.
' " SPSSA, p. 64.
"'NKS,p. 18.
' " SPSSA, p. 64.
""SG, pp. 164-165.
251
attainable state in Sarkar's soteriology, a permanent realisation that is none other than moksa, the
summum bonum of AM.
In his explanation of these six stages of realisation, Sarkar does not attempt to clarify whether
they describe ttansitory mystical states (or 'peak experiences') that a practitioner achieves while
meditating, or whether they signify stable states of being (or "plateau experiences') that constitute the
day-to-day lived experience of the practitioner concemed. This ambiguity can be partly resolved by
seeing these stages as having both 'peak' and "plateau' qualities. When first experienced in the course
of formal meditation, these states are not yet habituated by the practitioner and remain novel and
highly intense experiences. When these experiences have been consolidated into the life of the
practitioner over time, they become more stable and familiar ontological states that the practitioner
abides in, and through which he or she experiences the worid. This interpretation can be supported by
one of Sarkar's assertions:

When a spiritual aspirant gets adequately acquainted with His Blissful Entity, we say
that he is established in the Supreme Consciousness. At that stage, both inside and
outside attain unity. Mind then remains aloof from the atfraction of trifles, and real
acquaintance is made with the Supreme Being. While the body remains in the mortal
world, the soul is merged in the Supreme Soul.

This passage suggests that Sarkar acknowledges and supports the ideal of 'embodied liberation' or
flvanmukti - the stable ontological state of a fully enlightened being. More importantiy, it lends
credence to the notion that the stages of realisation (apart from the sixth stage) can be viewed as stable
states of being as well as transient mystical experiences.
The foregoing discussion shows that the ascent of the kuridalini from the base cakra to the
topmost cakra is intimately linked to the degree of mystical union with the divine, and the depth of
spiritual realisation of it. Indeed, the rise of the kuridalirii and the stages of spfritual progress may well
be describing two aspects of the same experience. They arguably describe the same phenomenon from
two different vantage points, one quasi-physiological and the other psychological. Regarding the
movement of the kuridalirii, Sarkar wams that there are several points of high resistance where its
ascent may be impeded. The first obstacle is located in the region of the mariipura cakra, in a gland
known as rudra granthi, 'knot of Rudra', which is itself technically associated with the agni cakra. A
firm adherence to yama and niyama coupled with purity of body and mind is essential for the
kuridalirii to move beyond this point so that sdmipya samddhi (second stage of realisation) can be
experienced. The next obstacle lies in the andhata cakra, also known as visriu granthi, 'knot of
Visnu'. Crossing this barrier of the visriu granthi will allow the devotee to experience the third stage
of realisation - sdyujya samddhi The thfrd barrier is at the djnd cakra or the brahma granthi, 'knot of
Brahma', the crossing of which results in the fifth stage of realisation - sdrsthi or savikalpa samddhi

"^ TPRS, p. 12.

252
Penefrating the brahma granthi requfres an intense desire to realise supreme consciousness on the part
of the devotee, and spontaneous grace bestowed upon the devotee by the guru. This is because, in the
gap between the djrid cakra and the sahasrdra cakra, the spiritual aspfrant loses all willpower and
mental control over the kuridalirii. This region is known as nirdlamba puri; it is where the kuridalirii
becomes nirdlamba, 'supportless'. The attraction of the devotee for the supreme entity coupled with
the vibrational force of the guru's grace is thus essential for the ultimate merger into non-attributional
consciousness - the state of nirvikalpa samddhi."^ Sarkar gives this assurance:

It is the supreme stance of a yogi. Now, by sddhand, one is to arouse and raise that
sleeping divinity. But for this, one requfres Divine help; and I know one is sure to get
Divine help. And I know still further, that in future, for infinite time and infinite space,
one will be getting this Divine favour. And you are all sddhakas, you will certainly
attain that supreme stance and enjoy that Divine blessedness. You are sure to enjoy it,
my sons and my daughters.'"

Schema 2: Four Stages of Pratydhdra Yoga

In addition to the six stages of realisation discussed above, Sarkar gives another schema of spiritual
progress based upon a redefinition of the notion of pratydhdra, 'withdrawal' (the fifth limb of the
eight-limbed yoga). He states that there are four stages of human progress in the physical, psychic and
spiritual spheres, which describe the stmggles a spfritual aspfrant needs to undergo, and the
realisations he or she attains, on the way to the final goal. The four stages of pratydhdra yoga, as
defined by Sarkar, are (1) yatamdna, (2) vydtireka, (3) ekendriya, and (4) vasikdra.
Close examination of Sarkar's description of these four stages suggests that he is expanding
on the meaning of pratydhdra (withdrawal) by (1) adding the spirit of stmggle and the overcoming of
obstacles to the traditional concept of pratydhdra as withdrawal; and (2) equating pratydhdra with the
entire path of psycho-spiritual development, comprising elements of dhdrarid (sixth limb) and dhydna
(seventh limb). This is evident in his analysis of ekendriya, the third stage of pratydhdra, to which we
will tum later.

(1) Yatamdna
The first of the four stages is yatamdna, 'endeavouring', which implies that the spiritual
aspfrant's efforts in overcoming obstacles are still continuing. This is the stage when the aspfrant
utilises all his or her physical, mental and spiritual force in the performance of actions that are
dedicated to the welfare of the universe, including himself or herself. In this effort, the aspfrant
encounters, fights with, and overcomes the many physical, mental or spiritual bondages of life in the
quest for attainment of permanent liberation or paramdrtha. Sarkar defines yatamdna as those actions
based on the spirit of universal welfare:

"* SPSSA, pp. 262-263.

' " SPSSA, p. 263.
253
 There is only one case when Parama Purusa sanctions mental thought. What is that?
It is when the human mind is dedicated to the welfare of the entfre humanity without
any discrimination, when the sole intention is to promote universal weU-being. When
the human mind, motivated by such sentiments, engages itself in action tiu-ough the
body - only that action can be treated as real yatamdna. Other endeavours should not
be defined as such.'

He also says that yatamdna is the 'conscious effort to transcend the negative influence of the
propensities'.'" Seen either way, this stage suggests that the aspfrant is actively straggling with
various obstacles in the service of a higher and nobler goal, which in this case is that of universal
welfare and permanent liberation.

(2) Vydtireka
The second stage of pratydhdra is vydtireka, which, according to Sarkar, concems 'human
psychology''*" and describes the stage when 'some propensities may be controlled at one time, but
uncontrolled at another time'.'*' In this stage, the mind is able to focus on an object for a long time
but is still unable to remain effortlessly and permanentiy one with it. The aspirant attempts to direct
the mind away from extemal objects (physical sphere) and intemal thoughts (psychic sphere) and lead
it towards the supreme consciousness (spiritual sphere). In relation to vydtireka, Sarkar gives an
illuminating account on the function and process of the mind:

The human mind attaches itself to three types of objects: physical, psychic, and
spiritual. In the mundane sphere the mind jumps continuously from one object to
another. For example, on seeing some rasogollas (delicious Indian sweets) you
immediately feel a desfre to eat them. But maybe you think, 'No I shouldn't eat any. I
shouldn't be so greedy. That would be very unbecoming of me.' ... So you teU
yourself, 'No, I won't eat any rasogollas.' But the moment you withdraw your mind
from the rasogollas you happen to smell the aroma of freshly made tea and think how
nice it would be to have a cup. Your mind drops the object of rasagolla, but now
embraces another object: tea. You tell the tea boy, 'Two cups of tea please', even
though you may feel a little ashamed that you have succumbed to the influence of yet
another object of desire. While sipping your tea you decide to never again allow your
mind to be swayed by the desire for any other object - never, never again. But, alas!
The very next second, you think, 'Oooh, what a beautiful shirt that boy's wearing. I
should get myself one like that.' So now the mind is mnning after a shirt. It cannot
stay attached to any one object for long but jumps unconfroUably from object to object.
Then you think, 'Oh dear, I'm going to be late in getting home today, I bet mum's
complaining already, "How long will I keep the food warm for him. What a nuisance.
I won't wait any longer". What shaU I say when I come home? Let's see ... yes, I'U
say, "Sorry I'm late today mum. I won't be late again in future".' So now you are
thinking about the conversation you'll be having with your mother. And the mind
continues to jump from one object to another. Most of the objects in this example are
physical - the rasagolla, the tea, the boy's shut - but your planned conversation with

"^AMP Part 5, p. 361.

'"AM/Parts 5-8, p. 583.
'*" AMP Part 5, p.l.
'*'AM/Parts5-8, p. 583.
254
 your mother in your mind is psychic, for after picturing the image of your mother in
your mind, you use your mental ear to hear her words. 182

The above example illustrates Sarkar's point that the mind always requfres an object for its existence,
and this object can be physical (derived from the extemal world), psychic (derived from inner
memory), or spiritual (paradoxical concenfration on consciousness as the 'subject'). He says:

It is the characteristic of the mind to remain attached to one object at a time. It cannot
remain attached to one object for a long period of time, nor can it remain objectless.
As the mind has to select an object to maintain its existence, it would be wise to select
the biggest, the best, the most lasting, and the most loving object. Parama Purusa is
the only such object.'*'

Sarkar uses two technical terms for the different objects of the mind. A physical object dfrectly
perceived from the extemal world he calls visaya or ddhdra. A purely mental object (e.g. a specific
memory, an imagined conversation, a concept or idea) he calls abhoga or "pabulum' of the mind. In
the stage of vydtireka, when the mind is moving from one visaya to another, from visaya to abhoga or
vice versa, or from one abhoga to another, Sarkar explains that the potential for mental balance is
nevertheless present in the space between two mental objects:

When the mind jumps from one object to another - say, from rasogolla to tea - what
happens during the intervening period? What is the mental pabulum at that time? It is
an important question. A very interesting thing happens. When your mind starts to
move from rasogolla to tea, it still remains attached to rasogolla for a certain time. It
has taken a decision to move, but nevertheless hesitates a while before moving towards
tea, because it is not completely sure it wants to leave rasogolla altogether. If the
atfraction for tea is stronger than the attraction for rasogolla it will be able to jump to
tea. But if the attraction for rasogolla is extremely strong, according to one's inherent
sarriskdras, it will take up more mental space than the attraction for tea, and the mind
will be unwilling to take tea as its mental object. In between these two extremes there
is another state - a state of mental balance (of course it may not be perfectly balanced).
At that stage the latent human sarriskdras of mind become more active; that is, that type
of samskdras which one has been expressing for many years become more assertive.
At this stage one's mind becomes expanded, one's resolve becomes sfronger, and one
decides. 'No, I shouldn't drink tea because it's a stimulant. Rasogolla is much more
beneficial for health so I should be more partial to it.' When this discriminating faculty
asserts itself the person will shun the tea. In this balanced state of mind, one's acqufred
sarriskdras become more active. Those who strive regularly to elevate the mind
through the practice of sddhand, thus acquiring the state of balance, remain unaffected
by sarriskdras. They immerse themselves in a serene flow.'*"

The above passage suggests that the acqufred or latent tendencies of the mind become more
active during the space between two mental objects; such latent tendencies determine which dfrection

'*'AMPPart6, pp. 372-373.

'*'AMP Part 6, p. 375.
'*''AMPPart6, pp. 377-378.
255
thoughts flow in or which thought becomes predominant at any given moment. However, these
tendencies do not affect one who has cultivated equanimity and balance through meditation. Sarkar
implies that the space between mental objects is a state of relative balance wherein discriminative
wisdom and serenity can be found. From the foregoing discussion, the stage of vydtireka can be said
to be one in which the practitioner is able to persistently: (1) channel his or her attention towards
parama purusa, taking consciousness as the ultimate subjectivity rather than as an object of discursive
thought; and (2) remain in the space of balance and equipoise in the midst of mental movements.

(3) Ekendriya
The third of the four stages of psycho-spiritual progress is ekendriya, which signifies that the
propensities of the mind have been brought under control but not permanently. Though this is a
relatively advanced level of development, the mind in ekendriya is not fully or permanently freed from
the pdsas (fetters) and ripus (enemies). In this stage, the mind is relatively expanded and may be able
to assert some control over other unit minds as well as the cosmic mind. In other words, so-called
occult powers may be possible for an aspirant at this stage of spiritual progress. Sarkar compares the
process of mental expansion to a cloud enlarging to fill the entire sky:

Although the human mind can be compared to the strings of an instmment, it would be
more precise to compare it with a cloud which fills up the sky, bringing all objects
within its domain. How does the human mind expand? It can best be explained with
the analogy of the cloud. Imagine there is a tiny patch of cloud in a comer of the sky.
Gradually it expands its size until it covers the whole sky. This is ectoplasmic
expansion. As the mind expands in all dfrections, it brings all objects within its
periphery. It is essential for the mind to maintain a perfect adjustment between itself
and its objects ... In the ekendriya stage, which is the third stage of pratydhdra, one
expands one's ectoplasmic sphere just like a cloud filling the sky - whenever the cloud
passes over an object it brings it within its sphere of influence ... The Cosmic Mind is
extremely vast; the unit mind is tiny. The unit mind only expands in the ectoplasmic
sphere, like the cloud filling the sky and in the process of expansion brings other unit
minds within its sphere of control. When it expands tremendously it can also assert
some influence on the Cosmic Mind.'*'

In the culminating phase of ekendriya, the aspfrant focuses "all the expressions of the sensory
and motor nerves and all the energy and subtle power of the organs ...' and dfrects tiiem singularly
towards the goal of macrocosm (or cosmic mind). The foregoing description of ekendriya suggests
that its practice involves (1) mental concentration to a point (dhdrarid) and (2) channelling of the one-
pointed mind towards parama purusa (dhydna). The result of this concenfration and flow of the mind
is savikalpa samddhi, which comes under the eighth limb of astdriga yoga. Let us recall my earUer
contention (see p. 253) that Sarkar, in his soteriological praxis, has extended the meaning of
pratydhdra by including, within its definition, the processes of dhdrarid and dhydna. In the case of

"^ AMP Part 6, pp. 379-380.

256
ekendriya, we see Sarkar's inclusion of focussing (dhdrarid) and meditative flow (dhydna) of attention
towards parama purusa within ekeruiriya's final phase, thus supporting that very contention.

(4) Vasikdra
The fourth and final stage of schema 2 is vasikdra. This is when the aspfrant is totally
immersed in a state of love and devotion towards the supreme consciousness so that all mundane
longings and even the mind itself are suspended. In this stage, all propensities of the mind are fully
controUed by the dtman and 'Prakrti has merged into the Supreme Cognitive Principle'.'** This is, in
effect, the state of nirvikalpa samddhi and can be realised only through selfless devotion. Sarkar
admits that 'vasikdra siddhi is only attained by devotees'.'*' This inclusion of the highest attainment
of nirvikalpa samddhi (= vasikdra) under pratydhdra is yet another example of Sarkar* s redefinition of
the term pratydhdra. In his definiiion, pratydhdra starts with sensory and mental withdrawal, extends
into concentration (dhdrarid) and smooth channelling (dhydna) of the mind, and culminates in
meditative absorption (samddhi).

Schema 3: Stages of Knowing

In addition to the ffrst two schemas of spfritual progress - schema 1 focussing on degree of existential
closeness with parama purusa and schema 2 focussing on extent of mastery over the mind - Sarkar
offers a third series of stages centred on degree of profundity of knowledge. Schema 1 arguably
reflects a consideration of spiritual progress from the perspective of devotion (bhakti yoga) while
schema 2 can be compared to progress from the angle of practical meditative endeavour (karma yoga,
pratydhdra yoga). In schema 3, he speaks of spfritual development from the perspective of knowledge
(jfidna yoga), which is linked to the third stage of pratydhdra yoga, ekendriya.
Sarkar compares the process of mental expansion and of bringing all objects within the mind's
influence to the process of subjectivisation or knowing (jfidna). He says that this process of knowing
has three stages: ava-dtmasthikdraria ('superficial assimilation of projections'), upa-dtmastkikdraria
('assimilation of projections through close contact'), and samyak-dtmasthikdraria ('perfect
assimilation of projections'). Ava-dtmasthikdraria is the normal process of knowing an object
through mere study of its extemal characteristics. It is a 'superficial psychic assimilation of extemal
objects through direct perception, inference, or authority', which Sarkar regards as highly
unreliable.'** At the beginning of spfritual practice, a practitioner may only be able to acquire
knowledge by means of ava-dtmasthikdraria.
Upa-dtmasthikdraria is the second stage in the process of knowing. It is a deeper form of
knowledge involving the intuitive understanding of the psychology of extemal objects, animate or
inanimate. This form of knowledge requires some expansion of the mind's innate faculty of intuition,

'**AM/Parts5-8, p.584.
"'Ibid
'**AM/Parts5-8, p. 388.
257
which occurs in the stage of ekendriya, the third stage of pratydhdra yoga. Here, the practitioner has
developed his or her concenfration to such a degree that dfrect intuitive knowledge of mental
dispositions becomes possible. Sarkar describes this process of knowing:

So in the stage of upa-dtmastKikdraria one comes in contact with the inner heart, the
inner life, and the inner mind of all objects, leading to one's knowledge becoming
deeper and more confirmed. The mind derives much contentment from its contact with
the inner mind of certain plants, animals and human beings, for through such contact
one can render better service to them ... This contact with the inner mind of a free,
animal or human being depends on the freshness or strength of your mind. If for some
reason your mental power is lost, the capacity to acqufre knowledge through superficial
psychic assimilation and upa-dtmasthikdraria will also be lost.

Samyak-dtmasthikdraria is the third stage of knowing, when spiritual aspirants 'form a clear
understanding of the physical, psychic, and spiritual realms of life'. This is equated with omniscience,
a permanent knowledge of everything in the entire universe, knowledge that dawns when 'human
beings withdraw the entfre intuitive element and focus it on the spiritual point of ideation'. This is
arguably the culmination of ekendriya, the thfrd of the four stages of pratydhdra yoga. It is attained
through the process of dharmamegha (cf. Section 5.1) and can be identified with the attainment of
savikalpa samddhi:

When the sky filling cloud of the mind is dfrected towards Parama Purusa it is called
dharmamegha in scripture. Human beings come in close proximity with Parama
Purusa through the science of dharmamegha. That stage is called samyak-
dtmasthikdraria ... They thereby come to know of everything of this universe. Thefr
knowledge is lasting, final and absolute. The scripture says, rtambhard tatra prajfid,
i.e. their knowledge is filled with veracity ..."" To bring about the greatest fulfilment
of life, sddhakas will have to reach the pinnacle of the state of ekendriya. That is,
instead of directing their mind-stuff towards crade objects, they must channeUse thefr
minds towards the Macrocosm, and embrace the Macrocosm fully as thefr goal.'"

This stage of samyak-dtmasthikdraria is probably identical to the attainment of spirituo-intuitional

knowledge (aparoksd anubhdti), a form of spontaneous intuitional knowledge (sphurtta jndna) that
dawns when savikalpa samddhi is attained (see sub-section 4.2.3 for discussion on the various types of
knowledge considered to be possible by Sarkar).
In AMP, Sarkar embeds the three stages of knowing within his discussion on the four stages of
pratydhdra yoga, identifying ava-dtmasthikdraria, upa-dtmasthikdraria, and samyak-dtmasthikdraria
collectively with the third stage of ekendriya. In other words, the practitioner grows in depth and
extent of knowledge as he or she develops in degree and power of one-pointed concentration. Finally,

'*'AM/Parts 5-8, p. 389.

""AM/Parts5-8, p. 390.
'"Ibid
258
in the pinnacled stage of savikalpa samddhi, the practitioner realises the omniscience (sarvajfidna or
samyak-dtmasthikdraria) of the cosmic mind.
Schema 3 leaves out any discussion on the place of focussed intuitional knowledge
(aparoksabhdsa) and spfritual knowledge (aparoksa bodha) in the developmental progression of
knowing. Since spiritual knowledge has been equated with attainment of nirvikalpa samddhi (see
subsection 4.2.3), it naturally follows that aparoksa bodha is a stage that comes after samyak-
dtmasthikdraria ('perfect assimilation of projections') in schema 3. The position of aparoksabhdsa is
less clear, though its intuitive and focussed nature suggests that it may be analogous to, if not identical
with, the second stage of upa-dtmasthikdraria ('assimilation of projections through close contact').

Schema 4: Other States of Samddhi

Apart from savikalpa (samprajfidta) and nirvikalpa (asamprajfidta) samddhi, Sarkar mentions several
subsidiary forms of samddhi that a spfritual aspfrant may attain during the course of practice. These
include dharmamegha samddhi (discussed in Section 5.1), anindydnanda rasa samddhi (discussed in
Section 5.1), karikdlamdlirii samddhi, rdgdnuga samddhi, rdgdtmika samddhi, tanmdtrika samddhi,
and atimdnasa yoga samddhi. Sarkar mentions in passing that there are 'thirty-two prominent states of
bliss' that can be experienced by highly developed practitioners, of which anindydnanda rasa samddhi
is one.'" The descriptions of these meditative states do not suggest any specific sequence of
attainment amongst them; however when they are taken one by one, it is evident that samprajfidta
samddhi is synonymous with savikalpa samddhi and thus precedes nirvikalpa samddhi (see Section
5.1), while rdgdtmikd samddhi is a higher stage following rdgdnuga samddhi.'^^
The overriding attitude to these profound meditative states is that of surrender to the cosmic
grace, since Sarkar stresses that realisation of samddhi is ultimately dependent on parama purusa and
not on the individual. Thus, while personal effort is strongly encouraged, concem about the nature
and sequence of attainment of these samddhi states is discouraged in AM. Sarkar suggests that
experience of the various states of samddhi is not absolutely necessary for attaining the ultimate
realisation, just as passengers on a train may not be aware of the towns they are passing through on the
way to their final destination:

Of course, to attain supreme spiritual salvation, it is not necessary for a sddhaka to

experience any samddhi at all. For example, passengers travelling on a Calcutta-bound
train may or may not be able to see the sights of Jamalpur or Bhagalpur towns if the
doors and window-shutters are closed. Although the passengers are unaware of the
towns they are passing through, they still reach thefr destination. In the spiritual world
also, the sddhaka, while ideating on the Supreme, will certainly pass through different
stages of realisation without necessarily being aware of it.""

'"AMP Part 4, p. 244.

'"AMPPart5, pp. 313-329.
" " A M P Part 4, p. 244.
259
 A discussion of those samddhi states that have not been previously discussed will now follow.

(1) Karikdlamdlini Samddhi:

In his texts, Sarkar says very little about karikdlamdlini samddhi, except that it is a state of
immense bliss as a result of oneness of the sddhaka with either paramd prakrti ('supreme operative
principle') or paramasiva ('supreme consciousness' as nucleus of the universe):

the samddhi in which sddhakas associate themselves with Paramd Prakrti as

kankdlamdlini and experience inseparable joy is described as karikdlamdlini samddhi.
During this samddhi sddhakas experience indescribable bliss. They totally forget their
human existence and feel oneness with Parama Prakrti or Parama Siva. One cannot
utter anything except some inarticulate sounds through the sides of the mouth.
Breathing becomes heavy, the entire nervous system feels immense pressure, and the
activities of contraction and expansion in the nervous system become violent.'"

According to Sarkar, kankdlamdlini is the name of Kali, one of the wives of SadaSiva, who was said to
have worn a garland of human skulls around her neck and to be in a continuous state of meditative
ecstasy. Sarkar names that particular meditative state kankdlamdlini samddhi.
It is unclear how kankdlamdlini samddhi relates to the other states of samddhi, especially in
relation to the six stages of realisation, and in particular, to the sixth stage of sdrsthi or savikalpa
samddhi. It appears from the description given in the above quote that kafikdlamdlini samddhi
involves a great amount of physical or neurological upheaval, suggesting that it might not be full
attainment of oneness with cosmic mind owing to some degree of mental association with the body.
In the subtier state of savikalpa samddhi, the sddhaka's mind would have transcended any
identification with the body and entered into the supra-physical and tranquil experience of cosmic
mind. Thus, karikdlamdlini samddhi may arguably be correlated to sdrupya samddhi, wherein the
bodily sense is still present but subtiy identified with the absfract 'form' of cosmic consciousness.

(2) Rdgdnuga and Rdgdtmika Samddhi:

Sarkar describes two other forms of samddhi possible for an AM practitioner, rdgdnuga
samddhi and rdgdtmika samddhi. Rdgdnuga samddhi is the state attained through intense cultivation
of rdgdnugd bhakti, a devotional attitude of great love for supreme consciousness in the hope of
experiencing bliss for oneself This is not the highest state, as duality still exists between the mind and
supreme consciousness:
During the state of rdgdnuga samddhi, sddhakas usually sit silently in meditation.
They take deep breaths and during each breath make a violent 'hunkar' sound. In
rdgdnuga samddhi the unit mind retains its existence and feels blissful owing to the
close proximity of Parama Purusa.'^

195
AMP Part 4, p. 245.
"*AMPPart5, p. 323.
260
Another rare account, this time of the rdgdnuga samddhi experience, is given in AMP-}^

On May 10*, 1969, at Ranchi jagrti, a certain sddhaka had the unique experience of the
rdgdnuga samddhi. Ffrst the sddhaka concentrated his mind on the different cakras in
the different parts of the body, and in the process of dhydna on djfid cakra (pituitary
plexus), he went into samddhi. During samddhi the above-mentioned symptoms were
present [deep breaths, violent 'hunkar' sound]."*

Sarkar equates this state of rdgdnuga samddhi with gopibhdva and vrajabhdva - terms used in the
Vaisnava philosophy to refer to deeply devotional attainments. Comparing the features of rdgdnuga
samddhi with the six stages of realisation, one can arguably equate rdgdnuga samddhi with the second
stage of realisation, sdmipya samddhi, since in both states, the aspfrant feels a close proximity to the
supreme consciousness accompanied by bliss.
Rdgdtmika samddhi is the state attained when the aspirant so intently cultivates the attitude of
rdgdtmikd bhakti - the devotional mindset that seeks to realise supreme consciousness out of pure love
and the desfre to give it bliss - that samddhi results. Here, a channelling of all the mind's propensities
towards supreme consciousness is essential:

When sddhakas have a strong desire to be established in Parama Brahma and dfrect all
their psychic thoughts and feelings towards Him, there arises a devotion called
rdgdtmikd bhakti When the sddhakas enter into samddhi while ideating on their goal
with that devotional sentiment, it is called rdgdtmika samddhi.'^

An account of rdgdtmikd samddhi is given in the AMP and reads as follows:

On May 10*, 1969, at Ranchi jagrti, a sddhaka attained rdgdtmikd samddhi He sat in
dhydndsana and with his mind concenfrated on each cakra, he began to do dhydna on
the supreme object of ideation. He realised that each of his cakras is being controlled
by his Ista. Not only that he also felt that his Ista is perceptibly present in his blood,
nerves, indriyas, etc. He began to take deep breaths. After remaining in that state, he
started to roll on the ground. In this samddhi there is less physical calmness than in
. . 200
raganuga.

On the basis of the above account alone, it is impossible to correlate rdgdtmika samddhi to any
particular stage of realisation owing to a lack of substantial similarities. However, it can be speculated
that since rdgdtmika samddhi involves at least a sense that the ista (= supreme consciousness) is
present within the aspirant's body, it bears resemblance to the stage of sdyujya samddhi, where the

It is unclear whether this and the following accounts of various forms of samddhi were actual descriptions
given by Sarkar or insertions by the editors based upon information given by the meditators concerned.
' " AMP Part 5, pp. 323-324.
'"AMPPart5. p. 324.
^°" AMP Part 5, p. 324.
261
devotee experiences tactual contact with supreme consciousness. It can also be correlated to sdrupya
samddhi, where the devotee feels that he or she is of the same form as supreme consciousness - an
indication that the bodily sense is still present in this stage. Seen in this hght, both rdgdnuga samddhi
and rdgdtmika samddhi are preliminary attainments that come before the realisation of savikalpa
samddhi, the attainment of full concentration leading to merger in cosmic mind. However, these
suggested correlations remain speculative.

(3) Tanmdtrika Samddhi:

Sarkar defines tanmdtrika samddhi ('absorption on inferential waves') as the concentrative
state attained as a result of one-pointed focus on any object of the 'quinquelemental worid' (a term he
uses to refer to the worid ultimately composed of the five fundamental factors, paficamahdbhuta). \a
keeping with his cosmogonic theory, Sarkar views aU quinquelemental objects as ultimately
equivalent to vibrational loops of energy or inferential vibrations (tanmdtra) packaged into condensed
forms:

This quinquelemental universe is composed of solid, liquid, luminous, aerial and

ethereal factors with thefr respective inferences or tanmdtras. This universe is a
• 2,01
collection of innumerable inferential or tanmdtrik vibrations.

He says that tanmdtrika samddhi is attained once the sddhaka is able to gain full concenttation on and
hence full control over a quinquelemental object or particular tanmdtra (i.e. sound, touch, form, taste
or smell):

During sddhand, the mind has got to be one-pointed. That point is the silver line
between the relative world and the absolute world. In the course of sddhand, when a
sddhaka achieves full control over objects (an object is nothing but a collection of
inferential vibrations), he or she is said to have attained tanmdtrik samddhi.

For example, a practitioner who focuses attention on tactile sensations (sparsa tanmdtra) may with
persistence and continuity of attention, attain such total concentration that dissolution of all sensations
in a state of tanmdtrika samddhi ensues.'"' Since tanmdtrika samddhi is attained by full concentration
on a tanmdtra rather than on parama purusa, it can be argued that tanmdtrika samddhi comes before
sdlokya, the first of the six stages of purusa realisation.
Sarkar wams against concentration on mean thoughts or crade objects, as that will lead the
practitioner into states of improper or negative tanmdtrika samddhi. He names two such states,

'"'AMP Part 4, p. 246.

"^Ibid
Ibid. Sarkar speaks of the world as a "positive projection' of tanmdtras; a converse process of withdrawing
tdnmdtras into 'invisibility' through one-pointed meditation results in tanmdtrika samddhi.
262
prakrtitina avasthd and videhatina avasthd?^ Prakrtitina avasthd is a state of absorption into the
cmde material matrix and results in the person being transformed into inanimate objects such as stone
or paper after death. Such evolutionary regression can happen to people who are totally engrossed in
the material world and who possess a singular, lifetime obsession for material objects such as money.
Videhatina avasthd is a state of absorption in sensual thoughts or conceptual proliferation, resulting in
a person being bom into disembodied states of existence such as gandharva, kinnara, or vidyddhara.
(These disembodied states of existence will be discussed in subsection 6.3.4, as they are essentiaUy
forms of microvita.) Hence, in Sarkar's view, these two states of absorption are definitely to be
avoided by any sincere sddhaka whose aim is the ultimate realisation of parama purusa.

(4) Atimdnasa Yoga Samddhi:

Sarkar appears to be using the term atimdnasa yoga samddhi to refer to a range of meditative
experiences, all of which are characterised by a sense of unity and franquillity, differing only in
profundity and degree. This samddhi can be experienced by concenfrating on any cakra, from
mulddhdra right up to the djfid. Sarkar does not clarify whether the shifting of concentration point
from the mulddhdra cakra to the djfid cakra corresponds to the rise in the kuridalirii from the former
cakra to the latter. A discourse in the A V describes the experience of atimdnasa yoga samddhi in this
way:

Then Baba asked him to concentrate on the various cakras, from the mulddhdra
upwards, and each time to try to imagine and see oneness. As the cakras under
concentration rose higher and higher, the sddhaka said that he was feeling oneness
more. Moreover, his mind was feeling more and more franquil, in contrast to the
disturbance he had felt earlier when viewing the audience. Finally, when his
concentration reached and surpassed the djfid cakra at the trikuti (between the
eyebrows), the sddhaka got more and more deeply immersed in samddhi till at last he
lost control of his body. ... The name of the samddhi he was enjoying was atimdnasa
yoga samddhi. '

It is unclear how atimdnasa yoga samddhi correlates with the six stages of realisation, since the
placement of concentration on increasingly higher cakras need not necessarily correspond to the rise
of the kuridalirii through those cakras. Be that as it may, the phenomenological characteristic of
'oneness' in the different degrees of this samddhi suggests that a gradual merger into cosmic mind is
occurring. At the djfid cakra, when full atimdnasa yoga samddhi is attained, the degree of 'oneness'
becomes so intense that it can arguably be identical to union with cosmic mind - a state in which the
sense of duality and conflict with other entities in the world ceases. Thus, atimdnasa yoga samddhi
can, with reservation, be correlated with all the six stages of realisation; it culminates in the realisation
of sdrsthi, oneness with cosmic mind or saguria brahma.

'""AMP Part 4, p. 248.

""AVPart33,pp. 87-89.
263
Schema 5: States of Spiritual Ecstasy
Sarkar gives another schema detailing the 'various states of spiritual ecstasy' that wise devotees might
experience as a result of thefr 'constant contemplation of God', namely dasd, bhdva, bhdva samddhi,
and mahdbhdva}^^ He mentions that the names of these states are appropriated from Vaisnava
philosophy and can be linked to the elevation of the devotee's mind through 'cordons' of the static
(tamas), mutative (rajas) and sentient (sattva) principles.
According to Sarkar, the first phase of progression in samddhi can be termed dasd, describing
the subtie inner pleasure that a sddhaka experiences as he or she is about to cross the 'cordon of the
static principle'.'"* This experience of inner pleasure is accompanied by articulation of sounds such as
'hah-ah-ah' as a result of the difficulty in expressing those feelings of pleasure. The cordon or
bondage of the static principle is most evident in the mulddhdra and svddhisthdna cakras. These two
lowest cakras are controlled by the kdmamaya kosa (dominated by the static principle) and the
manomaya kosa (moderately influenced by the static principle) respectively. In other words, to say
that one is close to crossing the cordon of the static principle is to say that the kuridalini is close to
passing through the svddhisthdna cakra.
Sarkar continues by saying that once the sddhaka's mind passes beyond the influence of the
static principle, that is, beyond the control of the mulddhdra and svddhisthdna cakras, he or she
experiences another type of inner pleasure called bhdva?^ In bhdva, the sddhaka is said to feel the
presence of both the universe and the supreme entity, and to feel strong physically, mentally and
spiritually. He or she will express his or her bliss by vocalising 'Bdbd\ BdbdV. Here, the sddhaka
crossing beyond the cordon of the static principle suggests that his or her kuridalini is rising beyond
the svddhisthdna cakra, resulting in the spiritual ecstasy known as bhdva. Comparing with the six
stages of realisation (Schema 1) enumerated earlier, bhdva appears identical to sdlokya samddhi, the
first stage of realisation.
Sarkar gives a brief description of the experience of dasd and bhdva:

At the time of dasd, the sddhaka feels bliss within and falls down, and during bhdva,
the sddhaka feels proximity to God, feels great bliss, and falls down. ... The sddhaka
attains states of da^d and bhdva according to thefr sarriskdras}'°
hi the next stage, when the spfritual aspirant 'crosses the cordon of the mutative principle', he
or she experiences a spiritual ecstasy known as bhdva samddhi?" Sarkar defines bhdva samddhi as
that concentrated, blissful state of mind when there is only one propensity in the mind - intense desire
for parama purusa. It is the samddhi attained through a fullness of devotional sentiment and is

'°*AVPart33,p.53.
Ibid, and Anandamurti, 'You Should Do Accordingly', pp. 1-2. Electronic Edition of the Works ofP R
Sarkar.
208
'You Should Do Accordingly', p. 1.
'"' Ibid
^|"AVPart33,pp.54-55.
' " 'You Should Do Accordingly', p. 1.
264
characterised by a sense of closeness with the cosmic entity, free of any perception of the world.
Sarkar mentions that bhdva samddhi can only be experienced through focussing the mind on parama
purusa in any of the lower four cakras:

During samddhi the vibrations in different parts of a sddhaka's body are not controlled
by the unit mind but the Cosmic Mind. There is a feeling of indescribable bliss
throughout the body, which causes the sddhaka to shiver continuously. Bhdva
samddhi can be experienced in any of the four lower cakras. As soon as the mind rises
above the andhata cakra a higher samddhi is experienced.'"

A rare account of a sddhaka's personal experience of bhdva samddhi is given in AMP:

On May 10*, 1969, at Ranchi jdgrti, a sddhaka experienced bhdva samddhi Sitting in
dhydndsana he began to practise dhydna on mdlddhdra cakra. As soon as he
connected his mind with the Cosmic Mind he felt the sweet waves of cosmic bliss.
Then he took his mind to deeper realms, practising dhydna in svadhisthdna and
mariipiira cakras. At this time he directed all his psychic energies to Parama Purusa.
Only one thought was dominant in his mind - Parama Purusa exists and no other
entity. Then while doing dhydna on svadhisthdna and mariipura cakras, he had a
feeling that Parama Purusa was his own. At this stage the sddhaka remained absorbed
in limitless bliss. Waves of bliss constantly flowed through the glands, nerve cells and
fibres causing him to remain totally oblivious of the extemal world.'"

The cordon of the mutative principle that is transcended in bhdva samddhi is most likely the
mariipiira cakra. This cakra is confrolled by the atimdnasa kosa, where the mutative principle is
predominant. Hence, crossing the cordon of the mutative principle arguably means the passage of the
kuridalirii through the mariipura cakra. Again, comparing with the six stages of realisation, bhdva
samddhi appears to be identical to sdmipya samddhi, the second stage of realisation.
When the mind of the sddhaka rises beyond the influence of the sentient principle, he or she
experiences dissolution of the duality between self and the cosmic purusa. This state of non-dual
ecstasy is termed mahdbhdva. The jurisdiction of the sentient principle is the vijfidnamaya kosa,
hirarimaya kosa, and the djfid cakra (which is not controlled by any kosa but which is the seat of the
unit mind, linked to the cosmic mahat). The vijfidnamaya kosa and hirarimaya kosa confrol the
andhata and visuddha cakras respectively. Hence, passing beyond the influence of the sentient
principle means the rising of the kuridalirii through the andhata and visuddha cakras and beyond the
djfid cakra. In this case, mahdbhdva is synonymous with sdrsthi (= savikalpa samddhi), the fifth of the
six stages of realisation. This synonymy is consistent with Sarkar's statement that 'mahdbhdva ... is a
kind of savikalpa samddhi.'^'*

^'^ AMP Pan 5, p. 328.

'"Ibid.
""AyPart33,p.54.
265
 Sarkar seems to use the term mahdbhdva in a broader sense than referring to sdrsthi alone. He
mentions that 'when the sddhaka feels the closest proximity of Parama Purusa, even within his
embrace, that bhdva is called mahdbhdva.'^^^ Again, in another discourse, he says that 'all higher
samddhis are different expressions of this mahdbhdva ... but all those samddhis which are within the
boundaries of the sentient principle are qualified samddhis, attributional samddhis.' Since the
sentient principle is said to be dominant in the andhata cakra, the visuddha cakra, and the djfid cakra,
the higher samddhis of mahdbhdva must be synonymous with sdyujya samddhi and sdrupya samddhi
as well as sdrsthi, respectively the third, fourth and fifth of the six stages of realisation.
Sarkar describes the experience of mahdbhdva as follows:

At the time of mahdbhdva, the sddhaka feels the tactual presence of Parama Purusa
and falls down. At that time, every nerve cell, every nerve fibre and every pore of the
human body feels the divine touch. ... Again, according to one's dasd and bhdva, one
attains mahdbhdva. That is why one who has attained mahdbhdva becomes sometimes
restiess, sometimes calm, now laughs and now weeps.

Summary
In his texts, Sarkar does not point out synonymies of the various stages of meditative attainment and
leaves them un-correlated. Reasons for this are unclear and would requfre a separate academic
investigation. Nevertheless, based on the foregoing analysis and discussion, it is possible to correlate
many of these stages of meditative attainments as in the table below:

Schema 1 Schema 2 Schema 3 Schema 4 Schema 5

(Bhakti Yoga) (Karma Yoga) (Jndna Yoga) (Samddhi) (Spiritual Ecstasy)

Pre-meditation - Ava- — —
dtmasthikdrana
Pre-Sdlokya Tanmdtrika samddhi Dasd
Sdlokya — Bhdva
Sdmipya ? Yatamdna & 1 Upa- Rdgdnuga samddhi Bhdva samddhi
Sdyujya ? Vydtireka dtmasthikdraria Rdgdtmika samddhi
Sdrupya Karikdlamdlini
samddhi Mahdbhdva
Sdrsthi Ekendriya Samyak- Atimdnasa yoga
dtmasthikdrana samddhi
Kaivalya Vasikara — — —

Two other stages of pwrMsa-realisation, namely dharmamegha samddhi and anindydnanda

rasa samddhi, that have been discussed in Section 5.1 can also be correlated to the table above. I have
shown that, according to Sarkar, dharmamegha samddhi is a slightly less advanced state than

215
216
Ibid
'You Should Do Accordingly', p. 1.
266
savikalpa samddhi and thus arguably occupies a position somewhere before sdrsthi but after sdrupya
in Schema 1. I place dharmamegha samddhi after sdrupya for the reason that the experience of
dharmamegha samddhi appears phenomenologically 'subtier' than that of sdrupya. While sdrupya is
characterised by phenomenological oneness with the 'form' of parama purusa, suggesting some
degree of visualisation, dharmamegha samddhi is characterised by a subtle bliss arising from constant
mindfulness of and insight into the distinction between mahat and dtman/purusa, a state in which the
mind expands indefinitely into the vastness of the cosmic mind like a cloud filling up the sky. This
mindfulness, insight, and mental expansion occurs without constming parama purusa as a mental
object, but with steady abidance in parama purusa as the supreme subjective knowing. Hence, the
experience of dwelling in blissful, non-conceptual cognisance seems to be subtier than the experience
of becoming identical in 'form' (a visual concept) to that same supreme cognisance.
In Section 5.1,1 have discussed anindydnanda rasa samddhi as a state of realisation that may
be intimately linked to the attainment of flvan-mukti, embodied liberation. As such, it is possible to
place anindydnanda rasa samddhi as an attainment in its own right, one that arguably comes after both
sdrsthi (= savikalpa samddhi) and kaivalya (= nirvikalpa samddhi). Based on the above discussion.
Schema 1 can be modified to include both dharmamegha samddhi and anindydnanda rasa samddhi as
foUows:

Modified Schema 1

1. Sdlokya
2. Sdmipya
3. Sdyujya
4. Sdrupya
5. Dharmamegha samddhi
6. Sdrsthi
7. Kaivalya
8. Anindydnanda rasa samddhi

The stages of spfritual progress have been discussed in detail in this section. It is clear that for
Sarkar, the various stages of meditation and the dynamics of spfritual growth can be articulated in
different ways, and this is what he has done in his discourses. The question remains why Sarkar offers
variant schemas of spiritual progress usually without correlating them; such correlation is a logical
necessity if overall coherence and to some extent, validity, of his philosophy and praxis is to be
achieved. Probing into this issue extends beyond the concems of this study. For now, we will proceed
to the final aspect of our discussion of spfritual change by investigating the role of grace (krpd) and
microvita (minute emanations of cosmic consciousness) in this process.

217
AVPart33,pp.54-55.
267
6.3.4 Microvita and Krpd
Sarkar's theory of microvita, in many ways unique to his teachings,"* is an articulation of the nature
and function of minute living entities that are directly emanated by cosmic consciousness into the
universe. The general categories of microvita and their role in cosmogony and evolution have been
discussed in Chapter 3. In this section, the specific types and roles of microvita involved in spiritual
attainment will be explored. In particular, the link between microvita and divine grace (krpa) will be

elucidated.
Sarkar mentions seven main types of positive microvita (he also calls them devayoms), which
have an effect on a person's spiritual progress.'" These microvita are: (1) yaksa, (2) gandharva, (3)
kinnara, (4) vidyddhara, (5) prakrtilTna, (6) videhalTna, and (7) siddha}^" He describes them as subtie
microvita that can be experienced either through the inferences of sound, touch, form, taste and smell,
or directly within the mind. These subtle microvita are to be distinguished from the cmde microvita
that are instrumental in the emergence of life in the imiverse. The first group of these subtle microvita,
known as yaksas, is 'instmmental in arousing the propensity to accumulate more and more wealth''"
Whai people become engrossed in accumulating wealth, yaksas 'begin their fi-enetic dance' in their
minds,'" and are responsible for diverting the mind away from parama purusa towards wealth
accumulation.'" However, the desire for wealth is based on the noble intention of performing good
deeds in the world, and wdiile ultimately unsatisfactory, is nevertheless not evil. Ultimately, this form
of microvita has a retardative impact on a person's spiritual growth, as the mind gradually forgets the
supreme goal.
Another group of microvita, known as gandharvas, is responsible for arousing love for fine
arts in the human mind. These microvita have the potential to lead human beings fiirther into
spirituality, as they primarily inspire the mind toward subtle ideas of art, music and aesthetics.
Kinnara microvita are yet another group, chiefly responsible for creating a thirst for beauty and

^'* While the term and concept of 'microvita' is new, the names of certain types of microvita (for example,
gandharva) already exist in the common Indian stock of religious terminology. The terms 'devayonV and
'pretayonV, which Sarkar uses for the two main classes of microvita, are widely used in the Hindu tradition as
well as in the Buddhist one (as 'devas' and 'pretas'). Also, there appears to be some fuzziness, in Sarkar's
writings, as to the actiial nature of microvita themselves - are they (a) human beings who are subsequentiy
rebom into the various realms of microvitic existence, (b) direct emanations of parama purusa, or (c) in a
convoluted sense, both cosmic emanations and human beings, since according to brahmacakra theory, every
entity is an emanation or projection of supreme consciousness?
Sarkar also mentions in passing seven major types of negative microvita or pretayoriis: (1) durmukha -
conflict-inducing microvita; (2) kabandha - suicide-inducing microvita; (3) madhyakapala - destabiUsing
microvita; (4) mahakapdla - sinister, destmctive microvita; (5) brahmapiSdca - suppressive/exploitative
microvita; (6) akasTpreta - ambitious, criminahstic microvita; and (7)piSdca - avaricious, desirous microvita.
VAe'ss, pretayoriis were, in their former existences, human beings possessing die negative traits that they now, as
disembodied microvita, induce in others.
In addition to these major types, Sarkar also mentions (1) gandhayaksirii - an intermediate type of microvita
that is partly positive and partly negative; and (2) gandharukmirii - a distinct type of positive microvita
transmitted through smell that promotes non-attachment to worldly pleasures and a deep urge for spirituality (see
MvN, pp. 105-108).
" ' MvN, p. 13.
'"MviV, p. 14.
"'MvA^,p. 111.
268
beautification. This form of microvita can have a double effect on the human mind. If they direct the
niind towards cmde matter in the service of self-decoration, spfritual regress occurs. If, instead, they
'lead the mind towards purity and beautification, and then help merge the refined mind in the Supreme
Entity', then spiritual progress becomes possible."" Sarkar considers microvita that lead the mind
towards cmdity as 'enemy' microvita and those that lead the mind towards subtiety as 'friend'
microvita.
Vidyddhara microvita are a group of microvita that 'create a deep urge in the human mind to
attain good qualities'.'" These microvita can encourage the mind either to develop positive character
traits and perform noble deeds, or to seek material benefits such as name and fame. The former
variant is relatively more positive than the latter. Prakrtitina microvita are a category of microvita
that attracts human beings to indulge in crade material pleasures of life. They gradually cradify the
mind and bind it in dogmas that serve to legitimise human indulgence in the senses. Videhatina
microvita are those that cause the human mind to become restless and to rash from one object to
another. They distract the mind from supreme consciousness and make it 'oblivious to the supreme
purpose of life', ultimately throwing it into 'utter confusion'."* People who are obsessed with the
material world may, through the concentration attained as a result of such obsession, be rebom as
disembodied prakrtitina microvita after death, while those who are chronically distracted through
material or psychological concems may be rebom as videhatina microvita.'"
The seventh type of microvita is siddha microvita, which is a collective name for the group of
microvita that assist human beings on the path of spirituality. Sarkar affirms:

These microvita enable the human mind to rise above the physical and psychic strata,
and they guide it to the world of cognition. Those who afready have an urge to develop
the cognitive faculty are helped by these microvita to increase their urge more and
more. Those who have a desire to embrace the life of a renunciate are inspired greatly
by these microvita ... Those who crave mystic realisations ultimately become
enlightened beings. These siddha microvita convey the clarion call of the vast ocean
of Supreme Consciousness deep into the minds of ordinary human beings who gaze at
their tiny plots of land, and lead them towards the Supreme Entity."*

In essence, siddha microvita are positive microvita responsible for spiritual elevation in human beings
and are released by supreme consciousness for the upliftment of all entities in the universe:

""MviV, p. 15.
' " MvN, p. 15.
' " M V M p. 16.
227
AM/Part 6, pp. 383-384. PrakrtHina microvita include former practitioners who, in their previous human
existence, worshipped parama purusa with the strong, mistaken belief that the divine was to be found in
idols/icons of gods/goddesses. Videhatina microvita include former practitioners who, in their previous human
existence, were distracted by their frustrations with life and consequently beseeched God for liberation. Thus, as
microvita, both of these types are considered 'positive' and harmless to humans, though they might have failed
to realise the supreme goal due to their former attachments.
'^Ibid
269
 The Universal Entity, sitting in one place, has been using microvita to accelerate the
spiritual growth of individuals in different celestial bodies in different ways. Only that
Supreme Entity who is conversant with these techniques and can teach them to
individual spfritual aspfrants is the Supreme Gum. He keeps all within His contact,
and with the help of microvita, elevates aU spfritually.'"

Sarkar asserts that it is possible for a spfritual aspfrant to obtain visions of luminous bodies or
khamurti ('heavenly appearance') by the grace of parama purusa. These luminous bodies are none
other than siddha microvita, and they can grant the aspirant spiritual experiences upon request. It is
also possible for highly realised spfritual practitioners who have yet to fully surrender all their
attachments to be rebom as siddha microvita after death. Such siddha microvita will assist sincere
spiritual practitioners who are stUl alive and are working hard in thefr spiritual practice, hi this way,
siddha microvita are very helpful on the path of spiritual practice.
The actions of microvita on a human being occur through the mediation of the cakras. h
Sarkar's view, negative microvita exist and move about throughout nature, while positive microvita
have to be specially emitted. Negative microvita affect the human body and mind through the lower
cakras, especially the fu-st and second ones, and can cause pain and disease in the lower digestive tract
and in the reproductive and excretory organs. Positive microvita emanated by supreme consciousness
function predominantiy in the higher cakras, especiaUy the djrid and sahasrdra cakras. Sarkar states
that spiritual progress can be effected through application of positive microvita to the djnd and
sahasrdra cakras. He equates this helping role of the supreme consciousness with the efforts of the
sadguru, the perfect spiritual master:

If a man is a die-hard sinner or inveterate criminal, and if positive microvita are applied
to him, the Sadguru will have to labour hard. If a man is psychically or mentally weak,
the Sadguru will also have to labour hard while applying positive microvita to his
body. And in the case of those who are physically, psychically and spirituaUy weak.
He will have to labour still harder. In this case, the nerve cells and nerve fibres in the
body of the weak man will have to be thoroughly cleaned, hence the labour involved
will be immense.'

This emanation and application of positive microvita to the cakras of the spiritual aspfrant by the guru
can be equated with 'bestowal of grace' on the aspirant. The effect of this grace (krpd) is to elevate the
aspfrant's mind towards ultimate merger with supreme consciousness. For that to happen, it is
imperative that the aspirant be sincere and dedicated in spiritual practice. In Sarkar's view, parama
purusa in the form of the guru can bestow special grace on the worthy disciple, though his shower of
grace is open and accessible to all. Sarkar also explains the rationale behind collective spiritual
practice and the company of spiritual people in connection with the elevating effects of positive

' " MvN p. 23.

"" MvA^, p. 40.
270
microvita. He states that spiritual company generates positive microvita, which in turn benefit the
group as a whole:

If positive microvita are created through satsafiga, this will influence the collectivity.
It has been observed that when a sddhaka meditates alone, he or she may enjoy
spiritual bliss, but if one is in the company of many sddhakas, one will enjoy more
bUss."'

The foregoing discussion has explored some of Sarkar's ideas on microvita and thefr relation
to spiritual growth. In summary, Sarkar conceives of subtie microscopic emanations of pure
consciousness termed microvita, which can be either positive (that is, conducive to health and spiritual
progress) or negative (that is, leading to ill health and spiritual regress). Negative microvita are
naturally present in the universe, possibly emitted during the cosmogonic process; positive microvita
are deliberately emitted by parama purusa when practitioners perform spiritual practices such as
meditation or kirtana, or when the sadguru mysteriously and freely bestows his or her grace on the
disciples. Positive microvita are thus instmmental in the spiritual development of practitioners, and
they effect such development through being assimilated into the higher cakras of practitioners' bodies.
This concludes our discussion of the entire Tantric praxis of AM as conceived by P. R. Sarkar.

6.4 Overview of Ananda Marga Praxis

I have covered in detail the soteriological praxis of Sarkar's AM in Chapters 5 and 6. AM has, as its
summum bonum, the spiritual attainments of mukti, moksa, and possibly also flvan-mukti. Sarkar says
that mukti is the permanent realisation of savikalpa samddhi (also known by other names such as
samprajfidta samddhi and sdrsthi) while moksa is the permanent realisation of nirvikalpa samddhi. It
is possible that Sarkar also speaks of a 'third state' of flvan-mukti (embodied liberation), which
combines the features of both savikalpa and nirvikalpa samddhi in a living ontological state of
permanentiy freed consciousness. Sarkar alludes to this state with the descriptive phrase 'the supreme
spiritual fulfilment' I argue that the temporary attainment of this state of embodied liberated
consciousness can be equated with anindydnanda rasa samddhi, 'absorption of unblemishedly blissful
flow'. This samddhi is attained through a combination of the sincere dedicated efforts of the AM
practitioner and the grace (krpd) of the sadguru.
The fundamentals of AM's Tantric practice are (1) an authentic and qualified guru, who is
identified with tdraka brahma, the personal liberative aspect of cosmic consciousness (i.e. Sarkar
himself); (2) the need for Tantric initiation (diksd); and (3) the use of a personally prescribed mantra
in meditation. These fundamentals are contextualised within the overall combined framework of
Sakta, Saiva, and Vaisnava Tanfra, and embedded in the practice steps of Patafijali's astdriga yoga.
Sarkar's AM claims to be authentically Tantric but eschews the literal interpretation of the five M's of

'"Ibid.
271
traditional Tantra: madya ('wine'), mdmsa ('meat'), matsya (fish), mudrd ('parched grain'), and
maithuna ('sexual intercourse'). AM favours the symbolic and subtie interpretation of these
antinomian religious practices, hi addition, Sarkar has given a comprehensive and inclusive system of
spiritual practices that he calls the Sixteen Points. The Sixteen Points lay out for the AM practitioner
the entire path of practice leading to the ultimate goals of mukti, moksa, and arguably jivan-mM^ri.
In his AM, Sarkar advocates balanced practice of jfidna yoga, karma yoga, and bhakti yoga,
three traditional hidian approaches to liberation that he has appropriated and given his own slant of
interpretation. Sarkar sees jfidna yoga as systematic cultivation of intellect and intuition, a practice
that includes mastery of both mundane (apardvidyd) and spiritual knowledge (pardvidyd). He states
that jfidna yoga culminates in the attainment of omniscience through perfect mastery of savikalpa
samddhi, and in the ultimate realisation of spiritual (aparoksabodha) or integral knowledge
(abhedajfidna) through perfect mastery of nirvikalpa samddhi Strictiy speaking, spfritual knowledge
cannot be attained through jfidna yoga alone; it requires an act of selfless, devotional surrender
(bhakti) following attainment of savikalpa samddhi in order for the ultimate state to dawn upon the
practitioner. In this sense, Sarkar, sees ultimate knowledge as equivalent to perfect devotion.
For Sarkar, karma yoga is the practice of selfless action and compassionate service to the
universe. Karma yoga requires that the AM practitioner (1) lets go of the desire for the fraits of
actions, (2) contemplates that both the subject and object of actions are mere instraments of brahma,
(3) surrenders mind and actions to brahma by seeing both the subject and the action itself as
expressions of brahma, and (4) sees all objects and persons in the universe as sweet expressions of
brahma using the technique of madhuvidyd, 'honey knowledge' (the second lesson of AM
meditation). Karma yoga, in its broadest sense, includes the practice of all the ethical (e.g. yama and
niyama, fifteen silas), spiritual (e.g. six lessons), and social (e.g. four types of sevd, implementing
PROUT) disciplines of AM, in a spirit of non-attachment and cosmic sentiment.
In Sarkar's AM, bhakti yoga is regarded as the pre-eminent approach to spiritual practice. It
consists in developing intense attraction for the creative and pulsative flow of supreme consciousness,
brahma. This development of bhakti (devotion) is based on expanding and sublimating the natural
atfraction that all beings and indeed all things possess for one another. Devotion is in essence
unconditional love, a love that makes the mind equanimous, smooth, and poised. Sarkar advocates the
practice of the highest form of devotion that he calls nirguria bhakti, 'non-attributional devotion'.
Nirguria bhakti is expressed in two ways, namely rdgdnugd bhakti and rdgdtmikd bhakti. Rdgdnugd
bhakti is characterised by the attitude of wanting nothing except the pleasure and bliss of loving
brahma, a devotional sentiment that is still tainted with a subtie sense of ego-enjoyment and duality.
Rdgdtmikd bhakti, the subtier of the two forms of devotion, is an attitude characterised by complete
surrender to brahma for the sake of giving bliss and pleasure to 'him'. This second form of devotion
enables the devotee to merge into nirguria brahma, and when permanently established, is fransformed
into kevala bhakti ('perfect devotion') - a permanent state of devotional union synonymous with

272
moksa. A fully-surrendered devotee regards all life events, all experiences pleasant or unpleasant, as
the unfolding of the sweet will of pristine consciousness. Bhakti is cultivated by the technique and
state of bhdva, 'ideation', which Sarkar defines as the purification of the mind through the sentient
force of love. Sarkar operationalises bhdva as the practice of ideation on the non-duality of unit and
cosmic entities, a practice embedded in the six lessons of AM meditation.
Kirtana is an essential preliminary and, in a sense, meditative, practice in AM praxis. It
consists in the singing or chanting, accompanied or not by dancing, of the mahdmantra ('universal
mantra') of AM: Bdbd Ndm Kevalam ('The Beloved is All There Is'). Sarkar sees kirtana as a
powerfiil means of cultivating and expressing devotion, resolving psychological problems, enhancing
formal meditation, and averting natural disasters and worldly afflictions. From a comparative
phenomenological analysis of the practice of kirtana with the eight-limbed yoga, I argue that kirtana
contains elements of dsana, prdridydma, pratydhdra, dhdrarid, and dhydna. It thus has the potential to
purify and develop all the kosas of the mind based on correlation of the limbs of astdriga yoga with
their corresponding effects on the kosas.
The central component of AM praxis is the six lessons of sahaja yoga, a system of meditation
designed and prescribed by Sarkar for deserving disciples. For Sarkar, the ultimate aim of these
lessons is to attain yoga, which he defines as the oneness of unit and cosmic consciousnesses. The
first lesson, isvara prariidhdna, consists of five stages: (1) dsana, (2) bhuta suddhi, (3) dsana suddhi,
(4) citta suddhi, and (5) dhydna. It involves ideation (bhdva) on an individually prescribed ista
mantra accompanied by concentration on the ista cakra, which is also individually prescribed. The
first lesson has the potential to lead the practitioner to merger with cosmic mahat (saguria brahma) in
the state of savikalpa samddhi. The second lesson, madhuvidyd, consists of three parts: (1) ardha
isvara prariidhdna, (2) guru mantra, and (3) varridghyaddna. The ffrst part, ardha isvara prariidhdna,
involves the continual ideation of the ista mantra in the midst of everyday activities. The second part,
guru mantra, involves ideation on the non-duality of all actions and phenomena with brahma and is
practised immediately prior to performing any volitional action. The third part, varridghyaddna,
involves the mental offering of all attachments in the mind to brahma in the role and form of the guru.
The second lesson is dynamic meditation in action, and enables the practitioner to realise dhruvasmrti,
also known as dharmamegha samddhi.
The third lesson, tattva dhdrarid, involves concentration on specific cakras in the body,
accompanied by visualisation of their form and colour and silent recitation of thefr acoustic root
sounds. It is a supplementary technique that enhances the first and sixth lessons by purifying the five
fundamental factors of solid, liquid, luminous, aerial, and ethereal factors in the body. The fourth
lesson, prdridydma, involves deep regulated breathing accompanied by use of the ista mantra and
cakra and by proper ideation. Like the third, the fourth lesson is a supplementary technique that
facilitates the first and sixth lessons by regulating vital energy (prdna) flow in the body.

273
 The fifth lesson, cakra sodhana, involves the purification of the cakras by using the ista
mantra in a special way in conjunction with proper ideation. It is another anciUary technique that aids
the first and sixtii lessons by cleansing the cakras through confrol of the various propensities
embedded in them. It gives energy and bliss, and creates a pliant and clear awareness that can be put
to good use in the sixth lesson. The sixth and final lesson, guru dhydna, involves devotional
meditation on the form of the guru, the embodiment of tdraka brahma. It requires the practitioner to
pinnacle his or her mind to such a degree of penetrative focus that the mind dissolves into the
unfathomable ocean of parama purusa. The sixth lesson is thus designed to lead the practitioner to the
state of merger into nirguria brahma, nirvikalpa samadhi.
Apart from the six lessons of sahaja yoga, Sarkar taught the advanced techniques of kapalika
yoga and visesa yoga to selected suitably quahfied dcdryas of AM. Kapalika yoga involves
meditation at a cemetery between the hours of twelve midnight and three in the moming during the
time of the new moon. It is aimed at conquering the propaisities of fear and shyness, and imparts
vitality and courage to the practitioner. Visesa yoga involves some form ofprdriayama and use of the
bindu, located between the djna and sahasrdra cakras, as a point for meditation. From oblique
references, I suggest that visesa yoga might also involve some kind of observation of the unfolding
process of thought and emotion, as they manifest out of the pulsative silence of consciousness.
PubUshed accounts of the above two forms of meditation are extremely rare and very little information
can be gleanedfromavailable sources.
Sarkar encompasses his entire praxis with the spirit and philosophy of Neo-Humanism, the
reahsation and feeling that all being and aU things in the universe are inter-related owing to their
common origin in parama purusa. This reahsation and feeling is expressed as a universal and non-
discriminatory love for all animate and inanimate entities. It also serves as the primary motivation for
spiritual practice and is intimately linked to the devotional sentiment {bhakti). The perfection of Neo-
Humanism comes with the attainment of savikalpa samadhi. Neo-Humanism as a practice involves
cultivating this universal sentiment and motivation in everyday life, and reflecting on Neo-Humanistic
principles as part of spiritual practice.
All of the spiritual practices that I have discussed bring about changes in the body and mind of
the AM practitioner in many ways. These changes take place as part of a dialectical process of
stmggle between the forces of vidyamayd and avidyamaya. This stmggle occurs in the mind of the
practitioner as well as in the social and global contexts. The practitioner, through the exercise of five
kinds of viveka (nityanitya viveka, dvaitddvaita viveka, dtmanatman viveka, pancako§a viveka, and
mahdvdkya viveka), identifies clearly the goal of his or her spiritual movement and finally channels all
negative (avidya) and positive (yidya) propensities towards the supreme source, parama purusa. The
Sixteen Points of AM assist the practitioner in doing precisely that - channeUing and sublimating all
propensities by transmuting physical energy ioto psychic energy, psychic energy into spiritual energy.

274
and finally spiritual energy into consciousness itself, whence both vidyd and avidyd find their
consummation and synthesis in the wholeness of metempirical purusa.
Along the way of dialectical spiritual progress, the AM practitioner experiences certain
biopsychological changes in his or her body and mind as a result of regular sddhand. These changes
include (1) increase in the glamour of the skin owing to a sentient diet; (2) hormonal changes resulting
in (a) developnient of beard, moustache and chest, and deepening of voice in males, (b) growth of self-
reliance and reduction of irrationality, vanity and quarrelsome nature in all persons, (c) strong desfre
for parama purusa, and (d) growth of universal love, among others; and (3) development of and
increased hormonal secretion from the pineal and pituitary glands, resulting in revitalisation of lower
glands and nerve plexuses.
Profound mind transformation in terms of attainment of various states of samddhi involves the
gradual purification and development of the kosas of the mind, enabling the mirror-like mind to
expand to cosmic proportions and to fully reflect the shining luminosity of infinite purusa. As each
kosa is purified and expanded, it merges into the next kosa and so on, continuing until all kosas merge
into the cosmic mahat, which in tum, finally merges into cosmic purusa. Thus, the static dominance
of the kdmamaya kosa gives way to the mutative dominance of the manomaya kosa and atimdnasa
kosa, then to the sentient dominance of the vijfidnamaya kosa and hirarimaya kosa, and finally to the
non-qualified parama purusa.
Sarkar gives several schemas of meditative stages and attainments. They consist of: (1) the
six stages of realisation - sdlokya, sdmipya, sdyujya, sdrupya, sdrsthi, and kaivalya; (2) the four stages
of pratydhdra - yatamdna, vydtireka, ekendriya, and vasikdra; (3) the three stages of knowing - ava-
dtmasthikdraria, upa-dtmasthikdraria, and samyak-dtmasthikdraria; (4) a range of meditative
absorptions comprising dharmamegha samddhi (discussed in Section 5.1), anindydnanda rasa
samddhi (discussed in Section 5.1), karikdlamdlini samddhi, rdgdnuga samddhi, rdgdtmika samddhi,
tanmdtrika samddhi, and atimdnasa yoga samddhi; and (5) four states of spiritual ecstasy - dasd,
bhdva, bhdva samddhi, and mahdbhdva. I have attempted to correlate all these schemas of spiritual
realisation in a table on page 266 under subsection 6.3.3.
Finally, I have discussed the role, types, and functions of microscopic emanations of pure
consciousness, which Sarkar terms microvita. Sarkar speaks of seven major types of microvita: yaksa,
gandharva, kinnara, vidyddhara, prakrtitina, videhatina, siddha. These microvita are generally
considered positive though they do not always induce spfritual progress in the practitioner.
Gandharva, kinnara, vidyddhara, yaksa, prakrtitina, and videhatina microvita are not invariably
harmful to humans but can distract the spiritual practitioner from realising the ultimate goal of parama
purusa. Siddha microvita are invariably 'friendly' and can assist in the spiritual progress of the AM
practitioner. The sadguru has the ability to emanate and direct positive microvita in order to inspire or
enlighten anyone he or she chooses. Such microvita exert their benevolent effects through the
recipient's cakras, and are in essence the krpd (grace) of the guru.

275
 We have now completed our separate explorations into the cosmology, ontology, psychology,
epistemology, and soteriology of AM, as taught by the late P. R. Sarkar. hi the next chapter, I will
critically compare and contrast Sarkar's AM with older hidian traditions of thought and practice,
attempting to draw out thefr commonalities and differences and to highlight how Sarkar has re-
invented Tantra through his unique blend and innovation of concepts and practices from these
traditions. In doing so, I aim to argue the thesis that Sarkar is an authentic, but in many ways, a
radical, contemporary guru of the long and possibly ancient Tantric tradition.

276
 Chapter 7
The Indian Philosophical Legacy

7.1 The Indian Spiritual Panorama

The spiritual legacy of India embraces both identity and change, both unity and diversity, within its
historically unique episteme.' It seeks the very depths of the self for answers to the perennial quest for
trath and liberation from suffering. Many varied and colourful sfrands of Indian speculative
philosophy and praxis exist within this spiritual panorama, including the classical orthodox schools of
Samkhya, Vedanta, Yoga, Mimanisa, Nyaya, and Vai^esika; and the heterodox schools of Buddhism,
Jainism, and the Carvaka philosophy.' In particular, the orthodox philosophical schools of Sainkhya,
Vedanta, and Yoga, and the heterodox teachings of Buddhism will be examined in relation to Sarkar's
thought, as they bear the closest resemblance to his ideology. The pan-Indian movement of Tantra
synthesises many of these strands of thought but adds a unique mode of praxis that radically
transforms the way to spfritual fulfilment and realisation. This Tantric strand straddles Buddhist,
Hindu, and Jaina traditions, and exhibits many practical commonalities with all these traditions,
despite varying philosophical speculations.
In this chapter, we will be attempting to map out a selection of Indian philosophical traditions
and to compare each of them with Sarkar's Ananda Marga. In this process, similarities and
differences will be highlighted, and an analytical account of how Sarkar may have appropriated and
redefined traditional Indian concepts will be offered. On the basis of his philosophical and practical
conformity, albeit with some innovative re-interpretations and conceptual syntheses, with much of
traditional Yogic and Tantric teachings, I will argue, in Chapter 9, that Sarkar is an authentic guru of
the Tanfric tradition, despite his non-allegiance to any known disciplic lineage (sampraddya) of
Tantra. The method employed is both historical-comparative and phenomenological. It seeks to trace
possible lines of influence on Sarkar's thought by surveying various historical manifestations of Indian
spirituality and comparing thefr cenfral ideas and practices with Sarkar's on their own terms.
Common phenomenological features and themes will be explored and cross-compared, and
divergences will be noted and accounted for wherever possible.
As it has been argued that a presuppositionless exegesis is impossible, the current comparative
study takes place in the dynamic context of dialogical fusion of horizons of the reader and the texts.
One expression of such fusion of horizons can be observed in the use of the phenomenology of

' See Buddha Prakash, 'The Hindu Philosophy of History', Journal of the History of Ideas 16 (1958): 494-505.
Prakash points out: 'The Hindu view of life is based on an organic conception of nature. According to it nature
is so organically constituted that all its acts emerge from the convergence of the fimctions of its whole system
and effect in turn, the working of its whole process' (p. 495). See also P. T. Raju, The Philosophical Traditions
of India (London: Allen and Unwin, 1971), pp. 25-38.
' On the integral nature of Indian philosophy and religion, Raju comments: 'Indian religion is a reflective way of
life and therefore embodies philosophy also. In its purely academic formulations, which appeared later, this

277
meditative experience to illuminate aspects of the texts being read. This happens only rarely in this
study and I have made it explicit whenever this is done. In the main, however, the analyses are based
purely on textual evidence and scholarly opinion, and the interface of the phenomenology of
experience and textual exegesis is merely hinted at as a potentially useful approach in future Sarkarian
studies. 1 must admit that in accounting for both possible borrowings on Sarkar's part and his
departures from traditional thinking, more can and should be examined from the perspectives of
history and linguistics. A more extensive and profound use of historical research and evidence as
well as a more thorough linguistic analysis of primary texts, may prove exfremely fmitful in
Sarkarian-Indological comparisons. However, such a line of inqufry faUs outside the scope of the
current study and will be left to other scholars or some future work.
It is also important that I clarify certain assumptions I have made in relation to the textual-
comparative endeavour. Ffrst, it is assumed that Sarkar, having been bom and bred in modem-day
India, would have had access to the plethora of ideas and texts that characterises India's spiritual
heritage. Whether he assimilated those ideas through formal studies or through informal 'osmosis' by
virtue of his socio-historical location in Indian culture and history, is hard to know and would require
more careful historical research. Suffice to say that Sarkar's attendance at Vidyasagar College in
Calcutta would have exposed him in some measure to the historical and spiritual legacy of his
forefathers, and may well have been an important source of his religious knowledge and subsequent
philosophical constmctions. Second, assuming that Sarkar's philosophical knowledge has its roots in
conventional leaming in no way dismisses or negates the traditional understanding within AM (or
within any Indian spiritual tradition for that matter) that Sarkar draws his insights and knowledge from
an infinite, transcendent source, being, as his followers hold, a fully realised guru who is one with
cosmic consciousness. It may well be that Sarkar's epistemological roots lie in a realm beyond history
and language, but in so far as his ideas bear resemblance (in varying degrees) to traditional Indian
philosophies, it is not unreasonable to attempt to chart possible lines of intertextual relationships; for
texts are as much historical documents as they are pools of wisdom, ideas, and knowledge of the
collective consciousness of people across space and time and perhaps even beyond that. That Sarkar
may have drawn on this collective pool of knowledge, whether through conventional leaming or
through meditative realisation, inevitably points to intertextual connections (if we understand texts in
the way just described), and to the validity of this study's aims and approach, whichever
epistemological mode one chooses to privilege.
The selection of classical Indian systems is arguably best limited to those traditions deemed
most similar to Sarkar's project and hence most relevant for comparative study. In this chapter, the
Vedic and Upanisadic roots of Sarkar's thinking will be explored first with a view to situating Sarkar
in the historical stream of Indian religiosity and spfrituality. The Vedantic concepts of brahman,
mdyd, mukti, and moksa will then be compared with thefr Sarkarian counterparts to draw out their

combination of philosophy and religion may not be so obvious, except when the problems of ethics and salvation
278
similarities and differences. Sarkar's extensive usage and redefinition of Samkhyan terminology in his
cosmology suffice to characterise him as a neo-Samkhyan philosopher, while his heavy reliance on
Yogic techniques of meditative fraining places him within the traditional lineage of Yoga, though not
without idiosyncratic modifications to commonly accepted interpretations. Finally, Sarkar's ideology
and praxis will be compared with thefr Buddhist counterparts, and a preliminary attempt to highlight
the Buddhist strands in his thinking will be made.

7.2 Vedic Sources: The Samhitas and the Upanisads

Almost all the salient ideas and practices of Indian spirituality can be traced to the ancient source texts
of the Veda, the 'sacred knowledge' According to Klostermaier, the Veda consists of several
categories of literature: the four Sarnhitas ('Collections'), the early Upanisads, the Brahmanas, and the
Aranyakas, which together, comprise the §rati ('that which has been heard'), divine revelation. Other
texts such as the Dharma^astras, Itihasa, and the Puranas constitute the Smrti ('that which has been
remembered'), sacred tradition.' Proponents of later §aiva, Sakta, and Vaisnava traditions argued,
against vehement opposition from the orthodox Brahmanic camp, for the inclusion of thefr own
revealed scriptures - the Agamas, the Tantras, and the Sarnhitas - within the fold of §rati. In practical
terms, the Agamas, Tantras, and Vaisnava Sarnhitas exerted as much influence on the development of
Hinduism as the Veda did, and could justifiably be considered part of the §mti. In terms of religious
orthodoxy, however, many Hindus would reject the claim that these later texts constitute infallible,
divine revelation.
Of the four Samhitas found in the Vedic corpus, the Rgveda Sarnhita is the oldest and
acknowledged by some scholars as a source for the composition of the Samaveda Sarnhita and the
Samhitas of the Black (Krsna) and White (§ukla) Yajurveda." Klostermaier (1997) draws on Gonda's
observation that the final codification of the four Vedas took place in pre-Buddhist times (ca. 600
B.C.E.), following centuries of oral fransmission.' In this chapter I will focus primarily on the Rgveda
since its textual material is the oldest and perhaps most relevant to the comparison with Sarkar's work.
I will also make a brief examination of the Atharvaveda in relation to Sarkar's AM, since the
Atharvaveda has been regarded by scholars as containing ostensibly Tantric material, evident in its
many magical spells and charms.* While comparisons between the Vedic corpus and Sarkar's AM
texts show obvious parallels, it is unlikely that Sarkar himself would have drawn directiy from Vedic
material. It is far more likely that Sarkar is intellectually indebted, if at all, to later classical religious
traditions which have either drawn on the Vedic corpus in their separate textual constractions or used
Vedic scriptural quotes to legitimise their separate philosophical positions within mainsfream orthodox

are discussed; but it has continued to exist' (p. 27).

' Klaus K. Klostermaier, A Survey of Hinduism (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1994), pp. 66-71.
N. Ross Reat, Origins of Indian Psychology (Berkeley: Asian Humanities Press, 1990), p. 3.
See Klostermaier, Survey, p. 67. For this dating, he draws on Jan Gonda, Vedic Literature (Sarnhitds and
Brahmanas), History of Indian Literature, Vol. 1 (Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz, 1975).
* See Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 353
279
religion. Whichever may be the case, it is instractive to note conceptual parallels between Sarkar and
the Vedas, insofar as Vedic notions may have indirectiy filtered down to him via the classical and
medieval schools of Indian religiosity.

The Rgveda
Reat (1990) locates the composition of the Rgveda as extending from 1500 to 800 B.C.E. , while
others, such as Feuerstein, date its composition to as far back as between 4000 and 2000 B.C.E.*
Notwithstanding the uncertainty about its dating, the Rgveda contains ancient material that may have
provided germinal ideas for the subsequent metaphysical speculations of the Upanisads. According to
Reat (1990), the Rgveda is conspicuously silent on three major themes of the later Upanisads, namely:
(1) the notion of an innermost essence that is the Self (dtman) of the person; (2) the notion of cyclical
rebirths driven by the accumulated karma of individual beings; and (3) the possibiUty of spfritual
liberation (moksa), escape from the cycle of rebirths synonymous with realisation of brahman.^
However, in several of the later hymns, it does contain, in germinal form, the notion of a singular
ultimate reality in the form of a cosmic purusa. This monistic tendency is said to be an outgrowth of
Vedic speculations and to foreshadow the subsequent development of the Upanisadic idea of brahman
as the terminal and singular ground of all being.'"
The Rgveda consist of a collection of more than a thousand hymns dedicated to various
deities, such as Agni (the fire god), Surya (the sun god), and Indra (the thunder god). Elements of the
Rgveda were exfracted to form the bulk of both the Samaveda and the Yajurveda. In the case of the
Samaveda, the hymns are coupled with appropriate musical instmctions for recitation; in the
Yajurveda, the hymns are incorporated into instructions for performance of Vedic ceremonies. The
Atharvaveda is a collection of hymns and spells of different sorts, and may have its origin partially in
the indigenous culture of India. Scholars differ in opinion on the true purport and purpose of the four
Vedas. Some see them as mere instraments for the performance of Vedic sacrificial rites (yajfia),'^
while others perceive a deeper mystical dimension to these ancient texts, seeing in them the presence
of a Proto-Yoga or a primitive technology of consciousness fransformation."
Feuerstein argues that certain hymns of the Rgveda point to (1) speculations on the ultimate
singular source of the variegated universe, (2) the creation and evolution of the cosmos, (3) a

Reat, Origins, p. 6.
George Feuerstein, The Yoga Tradition: Its History, Literature, Philosophy and Practice (Arizona: Hohm
Press, 1998), p. 590.
Reat, Origins, pp. 7-8.
Ibid. For an interpretation of the Vedic religious vision, see William K. Mahoney, The Artful Universe: An
Introduction to the Vedic Religious Imagination (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1998).
According to Mahoney, earlier Vedic texts also speak of the 'unified integrative principle', rta (cosmic order or
universal law), which is 'that hidden structure on which the divine, physical, and moral worlds are founded,
through which they are inextricably connected, and by which they are sustained. ... the Vedic concept of Rta can
rightiy be understood to stand as the precursor to the classical South Asian notion of dharma ...' (p. 3).
See Klostermaier, Survey, p. 67.
See Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, pp. 136-141.
280
conception of the non-Vedic ascetic or proto-yogi termed kesin, and (4) a quasi-spiritual practice of
'visionary, ecstatic intuition' (manisd).^^ Of particular interest to Feuerstein in relation to Vedic
monistic speculations are verse 6, verses 20 to 22, and verse 46 of hymn 1.164, the famous Asya-
vdrriiya Sukta. Verse 6 enquires about the nature of the unborn One who is the cause of the universe.
Verses 20-22 speak of two bfrds that occupy the same tree, with one bfrd eating the fraits of the tree
while the other merely looks on. These three verses can be interpreted in various ways, the best-
known being the Vedantic interpretation of the fmit-eating bird as the deluded being frapped in
conditioned existence, and of the onlooking bird as the detached Self that underlies the whole of
nature. Verse 46 speaks of the nameless singular Being who is given different names by various
sages:

They call him Indra, Mitra, Vamna, Agni, and he is heavenly nobly winged Gamtman.
To what is one, sages give many a titie; they call it Agni, Yama, Matari^van.'"

These verses arguably point to the germinal conception of a singular underlying cause and ground of
the pluralistic universe, foreshadowing the later Upanisadic conception of brahman and the equating
of it with the innermost essence of one's self, dtman.
Hymn 10.129, known as the Ndsadiya Sdkta or 'Hymn of Creation', is an instance of Vedic
philosophical speculation on the creation and evolution of the cosmos. The verses of this hymn ask
probing questions on the origin of the universe, and the seventh verse even proffers an equivocating
rhetorical question on whether the One knows or knows not the whence and wherefore of creation:

Whence arose this creation, whether it created itself or whether it did not? He who
looks upon it from the highest space, He surely knows. Or maybe He knows not."

An idea in hymn 10.129 that is of interest to us is the notion of desfre being the first seed of the mind,
which in tum gives rise to the existence of the world:

In the beginning, desire - the first seed of mind - arose in That. Seer-poets, searching
in thefr heart with wisdom, found the bond of existence in non-existence.'*

This earlier Vedic cosmogony arguably contributes to the psychocosmogony of the later Upanisads
and classical philosophical systems (darsana), wherein the primal source of the objective universe is
also the source of the subjective mind-stractures of intelligent human beings.
Another hymn that points to cosmogonic speculations is hymn 10.90, the Purusa Sukta or
'Hymn of Person'. In this particular hymn, the primeval Person (purusa) is said to cover the entfre

" See Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, pp. 136-141. The quote is taken from p. 138.
'" Rg Veda 1.164: 46, quoted in Reat, Origins, p. 14.
" Rg Veda 10.129: 7,tianslatedin Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 151.
281
universe and extend ten digits beyond it, suggesting the notion that the Creator pervades his creation
yet transcends it. The primeval purusa gives rise to the created order through sacrifice and
dismemberment of his body.

1. A thousand heads hath Purasa, a thousand eyes, a thousand feet. On every

side pervading earth he fills a space tenfingerswide.
2. This Purasa is all that yet hath been and all that is to be; the lord of
immortality which waxes greater still by food.
3. Such is his greatness; and Purusa is superior to this. All existing things are a
quarter of him, and that which is immortal in the sky is three quarters of him.
4. With three-fourths Purasa went up; one-fourth of him again was here. Thence
he strode out to every side over what eats not and what eats.
11. When they divided Purasa, into how many parts did they distribute him?
What was his mouth? What were his arms? What were called his thighs and
feet?
12. The Brahman was his mouth; the Rajanya became his arms; the VaiSya was his
thighs; the Sudra sprang from his feet."

Verses 11 and 12 describe the creation of human beings through enumeration of the four 'castes' of
Vedic society at that time, correlating each caste with a particular body part of the cosmic Person.
In both the Ndsadiya-Sukta and the Purusa-Sukta, we find concepts that are remarkably
similar to ones taught by Sarkar, although it is unclear whether Sarkar borrowed these notions dfrectly
from the Rgveda (as discussed at the beginning of section 7.2).'* Firstly, the notion of a singular cause
underlying the entire creation is essentially Sarkar's concept of brahma, which he also calls parama
purusa, a term reminiscent of the cosmic purusa mentioned in the Purusa-Sukta. While lacking the
detail of philosophical speculation found in Sarkar's monistic cosmogony, the germinal monism of the
Rg Veda nevertheless provides the earliest concept of cosmic unity known to India, a monism that is
later to contribute to the sophisticated speculations of the classical darsanas. (The potential line of
influence on Sarkar's thought from three of the six classical darsanas will be investigated in the next
section.) Secondly, the Vedic idea of desire as the 'first seed of the mind' and thus of the entire
cosmos is echoed in Sarkar's concept of kdma-bija, the seed of desfre or vertex point from where the
cosmogonic process bursts forth. In Sarkar's elaborate brahmacakra theory, it is the spontaneous
desfre and will of parama purusa that provides the impetus for creation. Thirdly, the Vedic concept of
purusa as pervading the cosmos with 'one-quarter' of its 'body' and extending beyond it with 'three
quarters' is reflected in Sarkar's twin notions of saguria brahma and nirguria brahma. For Sarkar,
saguria brahma is the localised portion of the spatially infinite nirguria brahma that has been
transmuted from pure consciousness into mind and matter. As such, saguria brahma appears

'* Rg Veda 10.129: 4, translated in Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 150.

Rg Veda 10.90: 1-4 and 11-12, quoted in Reat, Origins, pp. 18-20.
'° In 55 Part 24, pp. 51-54, Sarkar quotes and comments on Verses 1 and 2 of the Purusa-Sukta, explaining them
in the context of his brahmacakra theory and biopsychology. Here, Sarkar appears to be quotingfromthe
RgVeda in an attempt to legitimise his own ideology, rather than using it as a source for his own ideas.
282
analogous to the one quarter of purusa present in 'all existing things' and nirguria brahma to the three
quarters of purusa 'immortal in the sky'." Fourthly, the basic idea of the universe and its cause being
of a single substance, as found in the Purusa Sukta, is again refiected in Sarkar's notion of
consciousness (which he takes to be the meaning of the term 'purusa') as the fundamental 'stuff of
which reality, both objective and subjective, is made. Thus, Sarkar, in formulating his philosophical
synthesis of AM, appears to be drawing on notions common to Upanisadic and Tantric constractions,
constmctions that may be traced back to the emerging cosmogonic speculations of the ancient Vedas.
The issue of the conceptual and practical origins of the Upanisads and Tanfras is subject to much
scholarly debate and beyond the scope of this study.'"

The Rgveda offers no dfrect or detailed information on spiritual practices such as the yoga and
meditation that were central to many later texts, such as the comparatively late Yoga Upanisads (ca.
900-1200 CE.?), for example." However, several scholars, such as MiUer (1974), Frawley (1991),
and Crangle (1994), perceive an underlying stracture of spiritual praxis in the Vedas, arguing that a
range of meditative methods have been utilised and spoken of by the Vedic rsw." According to
Miller, there are two main words for prayerful meditation in the Vedas, namely brahman (from the
verbal root brh meaning 'to expand') and dki (meaning 'intensive thought, inspired refiection, or
meditative vision'). Three distinct but related stages of 'meditation' are said to be documented in the
Vedas, namely (1) 'mantric meditation' - in which the Vedic rsis become mentally absorbed through
the use of sacred utterance or mantra; (2) 'visual meditation'- in which a particular deity is prayerfully
visuaUsed; and (3) 'absorption in mind and heart' - in which 'the seer, on the basis of what Miller
calls a 'seed-thought', explores the great psychic and cosmic mysteries that led to the composition of
the cosmogonic hymns'." The culmination of these three meditative stages is realisation of the
'fearless Light''" or 'the sun hidden by darkness'," which Feuerstein equates with ecstasy or samddhi.
Crangle discusses the notion of updsand or 'subsitution meditation' and argues that the shift from
extemal sacrifice to intemal worship/meditation represents an important stage in late Vedic
contemplative practice.'* While the practice of dM or deity visualisation is highly probable in the

'^ Prom RgVeda 10.90:3.

See e.g. Patrick Olivelle, Upanisads (New York, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1996), pp. xxiv-xl; and
Teun Goudriaan, 'Tantrism in History', in Hindu Tantrism, ed. Sanjukta Gupta, Dirk Jan Hoens, and Teun
Goudriaan (Leiden/Koln: E. J. Brill, 1979), pp. 13-30. On the Upanigadic contribution to Tantra, Goudriaan
says: 'Certain Upanijads are among the oldest sources of Tantric yoga methods .... The most important of them
are the Dhyanabindu, Nadabindu and Yogatattva Upanisads' (p. 22).
" See Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 415.
See Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, pp. 138-140, where he draws on the work of J. Miller, The Vedas: Harmony,
Meditation and Fulfilment (London: Rider, 1974) and David Frawley, Gods, Sages and Kings: Vedic Secrets of
Ancient Civilization (Salt Lake City, Utah: Passage Press, 1991).
Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 139.
^* RgVeda 6.47: 8.
^ Rg Veda 5.40: 6.
Edward Fitzpatiick Crangle, The Origin and Development of Early Indian Contemplative Practices. Studies
in Oriental Religions, Vol. 29. Edited by Walther Heissig and Hans-Joachim Klimkeit. (Wiesbaden: Otto
Harrassowitz, 1994), pp. 59-62.
283
ritual context of the Vedas, it is less likely that a state understood by yogis to be samddhi was actually
described in the Vedas. Reat argues:

... the case that can be made for the development of Indian yoga from these few vague
concepts found in the Rg Veda is exfremely weak. An equal or better argument can be
advanced in favour of the theory that many of these Vedic concepts, if they have any
relationship to yoga at all, derive from contact with non-Vedic thought."

The 'few vague concepts' that Reat mentions are notions found in three classes of hymns, namely
those dealing with (1) ritual ingestion of the drag soma; (2) tapas ('mystical heat'); and (3) the 'long-
haired' (kesin) shaman. In Reat's view, these Vedic examples 'resemble Indian yoga only insofar as
any examples of shamanistic mysticism must necessarily resemble yoga.'^ Whatever the case may
be, the manfric utterances and deity visualisation of Vedic prayerful meditation may well be
precursors to the later and more sophisticated Tantric techniques of mantra and ista-devatd (one's
chosen tutelary deity) meditation. If this indeed is the case, the embryonic quasi-Tantric praxis of the
Vedas can be said to contribute, at least in part, to the pool of knowledge of later medieval Tanfra,
from where Sarkar may have drawn some of his Tantric ideas such as mantra incantation and cosmic
ideation (contemplating the unity of self and cosmic purusa).

The Atharvaveda
Feuerstein dates the composition of the Atharvaveda to a few centuries after the Rg Veda, but contends
that much of its material may be as old as the oldest hymns of the /fg." As mentioned in the previous
section, the Atharvaveda consists mostly of magical spells and charms, aimed at promoting peace,
health, prosperity, love, and even misfortune on enemies. The contents of the Atharvaveda thus
appear to be proto-Tantric in character insofar as they share magical and mundane concerns that are
evident in the mantric rites of later Tanfra. Interspersed throughout the Atharvaveda appear to be
several cosmogonic and quasi-mystical hymns that suggest an element of esoteric speculation,
speculation that may have contributed to later, more developed Tanfric ideas such as nddi and prdria.
Feuerstein identifies a number of hymns that arguably contain mystical or quasi-mystical
elements that suggest links between the Atharvaveda and later Yoga. For example, hymn 4.1
supposedly tells of Vena's mystical realisation of the 'womb (yoni) of being and non-being''" and
hymn 9.1 supposedly intimates the 'secret of the 'honey whip' (madhu-kasa)', which is a ' ...
mysterious substance ... said to have sprang from the elements that were generated by the Gods and
upon which the sages contemplate.'" Hymn 10.7 is said to consist of an enquiry into the nature of tiie
'World Pillar' (skambha), a divine ground that sustains the whole universe. In the same hymn, it is

" Reat, Origins, p. 148.

'* Ibid
^' See Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 153.
'" Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 154.
284
said that this skambha is realised by those who 'know the transcendental reality (brahman) within
their own heart'" and that this realisation takes place through the practice of austerities (tapas). Verse
15 of the same hymn mentions the notion of nddi (a concept later taken to mean 'current' of life-force
or prdria), suggesting to Feuerstein that the subtle-body concept of later Hatha Yoga and Tanfra may
have already been present in seed form in the ancient Vedas." Hymn 11.4 mentions the notion of life-
force, prdria, which is said to ' ... clothe man, as a father could clothe his dear son.''"
The above discussion highlights the possible contribution of the Atharvaveda to subsequent
philosophical speculations of Yoga and Tantra, although as it stands, the evidence for such a
contribution remains scanty and debatable. Be that as it may, the presence of notions such as madhu-
kasa, skambha, brahman, nddi, and prdria in the Atharvaveda indicates that the later Yogic and
Tantric usage of these terms (or thefr derivatives) did not occur in a historical and contextual vacuum.
Whether or not the older Vedic meanings of these terms concur with their later Yogic and Tantric
counterparts, it can be said that later thinkers would have found in the Atharvaveda a readily available
source of terminology for thefr philosophical constmctions. Therefore, insofar as such historical
relationship exists between the Atharvaveda and Tantra, Sarkar can be said to have ultimately based
some of his own speculations on, and borrowed some of his terminology from, the incipient fund of
knowledge already present in the Atharvaveda.

The Upanisadic Corpus

The post-Sanrihita part of the Vedic corpus consists of the (1) Brahmanas - prose works that are
systematisations of Vedic sacrificial rituals and mythology; (2) Aranyakas - 'forest teachings' very
similar to the Brahmanas that are meant as ritual books for retfring orthodox brahmins who lived in the
forests, dedicated to a Ufe of solitary contemplation and ritual; and (3) Upanisads - mystical and
philosophical teachings that intemalise Vedic rituals, and represent a synthesis of Vedic cosmology
and non-Vedic (indigenous Indian) psychology. The Upanisads are also known as the Vedanta or
'Veda's End', signifying their status as the culmination of Vedic speculative thought. As the
Upanisads, far more than the Brahmanas and the Aranyakas, contain mystical and philosophical
teachings directiy relevant to our current comparative project, I will limit my discussion to them. The
present discussion, like all other sections in Chapters 7 and 8, is not meant to be exhaustive of the
topic. I merely aim to highlight some obvious parallels between Upanisadic and Sarkarian thought,
sufficient to argue the case for Sarkar's inteUectual debt to earlier strands of Indian phUosophising.
While it is possible that Sarkar drew directiy from the Upanisads, it is perhaps more likely that he was
influenced by Upanisadic ideas elaborated in the historically later darsanas. Be that as it may,
Sarkar's debt to the Upanisadic legacy, whether direct or indirect, will be the focus of this subsection.

"Ibid.
"Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 155.
" Ibid
^Ibid
285
 I will focus on comparisons of Sarkar's teachings with selections from the early Upanisads,
leaving aside comparisons with the later ones, in particular a collection of sectarian texts known as the
Yoga-Upanisads (possibly 900-1200 C.E.). Although these later texts contain developed Yogic ideas
that are closer to Sarkar's own than the early Upanisads, they reflect historical sectarian development
of more fundamental ideas, some of which are fraceable to the early Upanisadic corpus. As this
section is concemed with the ancient Indian roots of Sarkar's thinking, I will therefore not deal with
these later Upanisads.

The Earliest Upanisads

Traditionally, the principal Upanisads are said to number variously ten, eleven, fourteen, or eighteen,
depending on the authorities that franslate or comment on them." According to OUvelle (1996), the
scholarly consensus is that the Brhadaranyaka and the Chandogya are the earliest Upanisads, and most
likely pre-Buddhist (ca. 700-500 B.C.E.).'* They are followed by three other prose Upanisads -
Taittfriya, Aitareya, and Kausitaki - which are probably pre-Buddhist and date to approximately 600
to 400 B.C.E. Next come five verse Upanisads - Kena, Katha, l^a, SvetaSvatara, and Mundaka - all
of which are probably 'the earliest literary products of the theistic tradition, whose later literature
includes the Bhdgavad Gitd and the Puranas.'" They are assigned to the last few centuries B.C.E.,
and are followed by two late prose Upanisads, the Pra^na and the Man(lukya, both of which were
probably composed at the beginning of the common era.'* In this section, I limit discussion to the ten
earliest Upanisads starting with the Brhadaranyaka and ending with the Mundaka.
The Brhaddrariyaka Upanisad is both an Aranyaka and an Upanisad, as is recognised in its
title. It is probably the oldest of the Upanisads, apart from some individual passages that may be
younger than those of others, in particular, the Chandogya." Two passages from the first chapter of
the Brhaddrariyaka Upanisad articulate a notion that is echoed in Sarkar's concept of brahma:

In the beginning this worid was just a single body (dtman) shaped like a man. He
looked around and saw nothing but himself The fu-st thing he said was, 'Here I am!'
and from that the name 'F came into being."" ...
... In the beginning this world was only Brahman, and it knew only itself (dtman),
thinking: 'I am brahman.' As a result, it became the Whole. ... If a man knows 'I am
brahman' in this way, he becomes the whole world."'

This Upanisadic conceptualisation of brahman becoming conscious of its self-existence is reflected in

Sarkar's notion of cosmic mahat, the first evolute, that is basically a reflexive self-awareness of

^^ Sarvepalli Radhakrishnan, The Principal Upanisads (New York: Humanities Press, 1953), p. 21.
Olivelle, Upanisads, p. xxxvi.
Olivelle, p. xxxvii.
'* Ibid.
" Olivelle, pp. 3-4.
"" BU 1.4.1 translated in Olivelle, p. 13.
"' BU 1.4.10 translated in Olivelle, p. 15.
286
brahma, a sense of 'I am' or 'I exist'. An AM practitioner who realises oneness with the cosmic mahat
becomes unified with the cosmos, just as the Upanisadic sage becomes 'this whole world' upon
realising that he or she is brahma.
Sarkar likens the human being attempting to find and merging into parama purusa to a salt
doll trying to fathom the depth of the ocean and inevitably dissolving in it. This analogy resembles a
comparison made in the Brhaddrariyaka Upanisad:

When a chunk of salt is thrown in water, it dissolves into that very water, and it cannot
be picked up in any way. Yet, from whichever place one may take a sip, the salt is
there! In the same way this Immense Being has no limit or boundary and is a single
mass of perception. It arises out of and together with these beings and disappears after
them...

The passage quoted above also underscores the message that the ultimate Being or reality is limitiess
and consists of a boundless perception that is co-emergent with all beings. This idea seems to be
expressed in Sarkar's notion of the cosmic mind (comprising citta, aham and mahat), a mind that is
infinite in scope and gives rise to the multitudinous world while simultaneously perceiving it.
In chapter 2 of the Brhaddrariyaka Upanisad, there is a section comparing all reality to honey,
and in particular, describing the self (dtman) as the 'honey of all beings'. The following passages
expound the honey doctrine (madhu-vidyd) by declaring that all reality is contained in the dtman and
the dtman in all things, each being like honey to the other:

This self (dtman) is the honey of all beings, and all beings are the honey of this self.
The radiant and immortal person in the self and the radiant and immortal person
connected with the body (dtman) - they are both one's self. It is the immortal; it is
brahman; it is the Whole. This very self (dtman) is the lord and king of all beings. As
all spokes are fastened to the hub and the rim of a wheel, so to one's self (dtman) are
fastened all beings, all the gods, all the worlds, all the breaths, and aU these bodies
(dtman).*^

This honey-like nature of reality and the dtman is echoed in Sarkar's notion of all things as sweet,
blissful expressions of the supreme purusa or brahma. This insight is most concretely expressed in the
second meditative lesson of AM, which is named madhu-vidyd ('honey knowledge'). Also, Sarkar's
concept of the relationship between entities and purusottama sounds familiarly close to the notion that
all things are fastened to the dtman, just as "spokes are fastened to the hub and rim of a wheel'. In his
view, all entities in the cosmos are intimately linked to purusottama, the cosmic nucleus of the infinite
dtman within which the universe exists.

"^ BU 2.4.12ti-anslatedin Olivelle, pp. 29-30.

"' BU 2.5.14-15 n-anslated in Olivelle, p. 32.
287
 The Chdndogya Upanisad is primarily concemed with the cosmic and ritual correspondences
of the Saman (the Samavedic chant in the Soma sacrifice) and the High Chant (Udgitha). There is
littie in the Chandogya that is of interest for our comparison with Sarkar's AM, except for an allusion
to the honey doctrine (madhu-vidyd) in the third chapter, and some references to the dtman in the third
and seventh chapters. The thfrd chapter begins with a comparison of the sun to the honey of the gods
and the rays of tiie sun to honey cells of the hive. It is difficult, from the passages themselves, to claim
that the notion of the universe as a honey-like manifestation of brahman exists in the Chandogya. The
passages on the dtman are less ambiguous and point to the notion of an infinite and inexhaustible
reality that is simultaneously within and without. Verses 12 and 14 describe the nature of brahman and
dtman respectively, and Verse 14 equates the two:

And take what people call 'brahman' - clearly, it is nothing but this space here outside
a person. And this space here outside a person - clearly, it is the same as this space
here within a person. And this space here within a person - clearly, it is the same as
this space within the heart; it is full and non-depleting. Anyone who knows this
obtains full and non-depleting prosperity. ..."'

... This self (dtman) of mine that lies deep within my heart - it is smaller than a grain
of rice or barley, smaller than a mustard seed, smaller than even a millet grain or a
millet kemel; but it is larger than the earth, larger than the intermediate region, larger
than the sky, larger even than all these worlds put together. This self (dtman) of mine
lies deep within my heart - it contains all actions, aU desfres, all smells, and all tastes;
it has captured this whole world; it neither speaks nor pays any heed. It is brahman.

Sarkar's notion of the dtman resembles the same notion described in the passages quoted above,
although as discussed in Chapter 3, Sarkar articulates the notion of dtman in a seemingly non-
substantialist and process manner. He speaks of dtman as a continuum of cognisance that witnesses
and knows, without any sense of an 'F or a self. This 'F feeling, according to Sarkar, is merely a
thought construct, termed mahat. To Sarkar, it is this dynamic flow of cognisance that spontaneously
bursts forth into thoughts, feelings, propensities, and the multitudinous objects of the universe in the
process of brahmacakra. The infinite and inexhaustible nature of this flow of cognisance termed the
dtman echoes a similar notion in chapter 7 of the Chandogya, a notion of the dtman as the 'plenitude',
albeit in a manner that does not suggest a non-substantialist metaphysic:

Plenitude, indeed, is below; plenitude is above; plenitude is in the west; plenitude is in

the east; plenitude is in the south; and plenitude is in the north. Indeed, plenitude
extends over this whole world. ... Next, the substitution of self - "The self, indeed, is
below; the self is above; the self ... extends over this whole world. ... A man who sees
it this way, thinks about it this way, and perceives it this way; a man who finds
pleasure in the self, who dallies with the self, who mates with the self, and who attains

44
Olivelle, p. 95.
"' CU 3.12.7-9,ti-anslatedin Olivelle, p. 122.
"* CU 3.14.3-4, u-anslated in Olivelle, p. 124.
288
 bliss in the self- he becomes completely his own master; he obtains complete freedom
of movement in all the worlds."'

The Taittiriya Upanisad contains several passages that are very relevant to our comparison
with Sarkar's AM. The notion of the five sheaths of the dtman is seen in chapter 2 of the Taittinya, in
which the self (dtman) consisting of food (annarasamaya), lifebreath (prdriamaya), mind (manomaya),
perception or understanding (vijndnamaya), and bliss (dnandamaya) is described:

From this very self (dtman) did space come into being; from space, afr; ... from plants,
food; and from food, man. Now, a man here is formed from the essence of food. ...
Different from and lying within this man formed from the essence of food is the self
(dtman) consisting of lifebreath, which suffuses that man completely. ... Different
from and lying within this self consisting of breath is the self (dtman) consisting of
mind, which suffuses this other self completely. ... Different from ... is the self
(dtman) consisting of perception, which suffuses ... Different from ... is the self
(dtman) consisting of bliss, which suffuses this other self completely."*

The concept of five sheaths of the self is echoed, with some modification, in Sarkar's kosa theory of
the mind." Sarkar retains the terms 'annamaya', 'manomaya', and 'vijfidnamaya' but replaces
'prdriamaya' and 'dnandamaya' with 'kdmamaya' and 'hirarimaya' respectively. He also adds
atimdnasa kosa to the list, placing it between manomaya kosa and vijfidnamaya kosa. This addition
expands Sarkar's list of kosas into six. The order of the five sheaths (or six in the case of Sarkar)
differs between the Taittiriya and Sarkar, as set out below:

Taittiriya Upanisad Sarkar

1. dtma-annamayah 1. annamaya kosa
2. dtma-prdridmayah 2. kdmamaya kosa
3. dtma-manomayah 3. manomaya kosa
4. atimanasa kosa
4. dtma-vijndnamayah 5. vijfidnamaya kosa
5. dtma-dnandamayah 6. hirarimaya kosa

Another conceptual difference is that while the Taittinya categorisation of sheaths pertains to the
dtman itself, Sarkar's kosas pertain directly to the mind, and only indirectly to the dtman. For Sarkar,

"' CU 7.25.1-2, translated in Olivelle, pp. 165-166.

"* TU 2.6.1-5,ti-anslatedin Olivelle, pp. 185-187.
49
It seems likely that the set of kosa terminology used by Sarkar is original. To the best of my knowledge, no
classical or contemporary sources predating Sarkar's Idea arui Ideology (first published in 1959) posit this
modified terminology of the five sheaths.
289
the five kosas, together with the aham and mahat constitute the mind, which are themselves
transformations of the dtman that is thefr source and ground.
In section 6 of the same chapter of Taittfriya Upanisad, there is a passage that describes the
creation of the world as a result of the inherent desfre of brahman to become many:

He had this desire: 'Let me multiply myself Let me produce offspring.' So he heated
himself up. When he had heated himself up, he emitted this whole world, everything
that is here. After emitting it, he entered that very world. And after entering it, he
became in tum Sat and Tyat, the distinct and the indistinct, the resting and the never
resting, the perceived and the non-perceived, the real (satya) and the unreal (anrta).

Sarkar, in his brahmacakra tiieory, appears consonant with this notion of the One desiring to become
many by attributing the commencement of the cosmogonic process to the will (icchd) and desire
(kdma) of parama purusa. Sarkar terms the point in the triangle of forces from which creation begins
as kdmabija (seed of desfre) or icchdbija (seed of will).
In chapter 3 of the Taittiriya, there is a passage attributed to the sage Bhrgu that equates

brahman with dnanda, 'bliss':

So Bhrgu practised austerities. After he had practised austerities, he perceived:

'Brahman is bliss - for clearly, it is from bliss that these beings are bom; through bliss,
once bom, do they live; and into bliss, do they pass upon death.'

This is perhaps the clearest indication of Sarkar's intellectual debt to the Upanisadic fradition, since the
idea of brahman as dnanda features as the central concept of Sarkar's entfre ideology. Like the sage
Bhrgu in the Taittuiya, Sarkar speaks of dnanda (which is brahma) as the ultimate source, immanent
ground, and final desideratum of the universe. Sarkar's entire soteriological praxis is geared towards
attainment of this dnanda.
Apart from the Taittinya, we see, in the first chapter of the Aitareya Upanisad, another
description of the urge of brahman to create the universe:

In the beginning this world was the self (dtman), one alone, and there was no other
being at all that blinked an eye. He thought to himself: 'Let me create the worids.''"

A similar idea is found in Sarkar's articulation of the brahmacakra theory. Sarkar echoes the Aitareya
by stating that 'monotonous loneliness' was the reason for parama purusa's creation of the universe
with all its beings, beings that are essentially fragments within its cosmic mind." In section 3 of the

'"At/ 1.1.1, translated in Olivelle, p. 195.

"55Partll,pp.92-93.
290
Aitareya, there is a passage that describes how and where brahman 'enters' the human body and dwells
therein:
So he split open the head at the point where the hairs part and entered through that
gate. This gate (dvdr) has the name 'Split' (vidrti), and that is the heaven of pleasure
(ndndana).^

The point on the head where 'the hafrs part', in the above passage, sounds very like the crown or
sahasrdra cakra of Sarkar's biopsychology. In Sarkar's view, the sahasrdra cakra is situated at the
topmost point of the central channel and is correlated with the pineal gland. He speaks of this cakra as
the microcosmic seat of the infinite, non-qualified brahma and thus of supreme bliss. We can thus see
the obvious similarity between the 'gate' mentioned in the Aitareya and the much later and more
elaborated notion of Sarkar's sahasrdra cakra. In spite of the similarities, it is likely that Sarkar drew
his ideas from the Tantric tradition, where the concept of cakra is far more developed, rather than
directiy from the Upanisads. Nevertheless, it is instractive to note the possible foundations of later
Indian speculative thought, at least in part, in the ancient Vedic corpus.
Another passage in the Aitareya describes brahman as cognition or the power of knowing, a
concept that is very close to Sarkar's definition of brahma:

Who is this self (atman)? ... Is it that by which one sees? Or hears? Or smells odours?
Or utters speech? ... Is it awareness? Perception? Discemment? Cognition? Wisdom?
... Thought? ... Memory? ... WiU? ... Love? Desire? But these are various
designations of cognition. It is brahman; ... It is everything that has life ...
Knowledge is the eye of all that, and on knowledge it is founded. Knowledge is the
eye of the world, and knowledge, the foundation. Brahman is knowing."

Sarkar defines brahma as the supreme cognitive faculty, the infinite and unending flow of
consciousness underlying and animating all existence. The passage quoted above again points to an
Upanisadic precursor to Sarkar's own thinking on the notion of brahma.
The Kausitaki Upanisad contains one passage that describes the monistic and all-inclusive
essence (brahman) of the universe as the real (satyam). This passage occurs in the form of a dialogue
between brahman and a knower of brahman:

Brahman then asks him: 'Who am I?'

And he should reply: 'The real.'
'What is the real (satyam)T
'Sat is whatever is other than the gods and the lifebreaths (prdria), while Tyam consists
of the gods and the lifebreaths. All of that is comprehended by this word "real"
(satyam). That is the full extent of this whole world. And you are this whole world.''"

52 AU 1.3.12, translated in Olivelle, p. 197.

"At/3.2-3, translated in Olivelle, pp. 198-199.
'" KsU 1.6, translated in Olivelle, p. 205.
291
This immanent view of brahman is reminiscent of Sarkar's concept of saguria brahma, the infinite
consciousness (purusa) qualified by prakrti to become real, not illusory, transmutations of its subtie
essence in the form of the universe. To Sarkar, the worid is real (satyam), tiiough relative and
changing in comparison with brahma, the ultimately real.
The Kena Upanisad present brahman as the unknowable and ineffable essence that is the
creator of all, including the gods. Chapter 1 of the Kena contains several cryptic verses that bear
conceptual similarities to Sarkar's thought on brahma:

That which is the hearing behind hearing,

the thinking behind thinking,
the speech behind speech,
the sight behind sight - ...
Sight does not reach there;
neither does thinking or speech.
We don't know, we can't perceive,
how one would point it out.
It is far different from what's known.
And it is farther than the unknown - ...
Which one cannot express by speech,
by which speech itself is expressed -
Leam that that alone is brahman, ...
Which one cannot grasp with one's mind,
by which, they say, the mind is grasped -
Leam that that alone is brahman,
and not what they here venerate.'*

The verses quoted above point to the ineffability and unknowability of brahman, as that which is
beyond even the grasping mind. This notion is akin to Sarkar's view that brahma or parama purusa is
the ultimate subjectivity of the universe, an entity that can never come within the scope of the
objectifying mind. In other words, Sarkar, in keeping with the Kena, speaks of brahma as that which
can never be objectified or perceived by the mind. Rather, for Sarkar, brahma is known only through
being brahma, aided by a spiritual process involving action, knowledge and devotion.
The Katha Upanisad speaks of the ultimate reality of brahman-dtman as residing in 'the
cave of the heart', a concept that is echoed in Sarkar's description of dtman (which is essentially
brahma) concealed in the 'cave' (guhd) of the 'F feeling ('mahat'):

O Naciketas, you who understand -

the fire altar that leads to heaven,
to the attainment of the endless world,
and is its very foundation.
Know that it Hes hidden.

See A5 2.14: Brahma satyam jagadapi satyamdpeksikam [Brahma is Absolute Truth; the universe is also truth,
but relative.]
'* KeU 1.2-5,ti-anslated
ti-anslatedininOlivelle,
Olivelle,p.p.227.
227.
292
 hi the cave of the heart."

The primeval one who is hard to perceive,

wrapped in mystery, hidden in a cave,
residing within th' impenetrable depth -
Regarding him as god, an insight
gained by inner contemplation,
both sorrow and joy the wise abandon.'*
Finer than the finest, larger than the largest,
is the self (dtman) that lies here hidden,
in the heart of a living being.
Without desires and free from sorrow,
a man perceives by the creator's grace
the grandeur of the self."

The verses quoted above indicate that the dtman is realised through insight, by means of 'inner
contemplation' and the 'creator's grace', suggesting that both knowledge (jiidna) and devotion (bhakti)
are critical to self-realisation. Again, we see a parallel in Sarkar's soteriology of meditation and
devotion, a soteriology in which both meditative insight and devotional self-surrender to the grace of
brahma are necessary for ultimate spiritual realisation.
The Isd Upanisad contains doctrines and ideas expressing theistic and devotional
tendencies suggestive of other similar texts broadly assigned to the same time and milieu.*" The
simultaneously monistic and theistic view of the Ka can be seen in Sarkar's 'cosmotheistic' notion of
brahma as both the immanent substance and transcendent creator of the universe. The Upanisad says:

This whole world is to be dwelt in by the Lord,

whatever living being there is in the world. .. .*'
It moves - yet it does not move
It's far away - yet it is near at hand!
It is within this whole world - yet
it's also outside this whole world.*'

Sarkar's notions of saguria brahma - which is within and comprises the world - and nirguria brahma -
which is utterly beyond the world - seem to reflect a view similar to, though intellectually more
sophisticated than, the Upanisadic view expressed in the verse quoted above.
The Svetdsvatara Upanisad appears to contain ideas from the Sarnkhya -Yoga tradition and
to be influenced by emerging theistic tendencies that are most apparent in the popular Bhagavad Gita.*'
It is in the Sveta^vatara that we first see the notion of the brahmacakra or 'wheel of brahman' being

" KaU 1.14,ti-anslatedin Olivelle, p. 233.

'* KaU 2.12,ti-anslatedin Olivelle, p. 236.
" KaU 2.20, translated in Olivelle, p. 237.
*" Olivelle, p. 248.
*' /t/ 1,tianslatedin Olivelle, p. 249.
*' IU5, translated in Olivelle, p. 249.
*' Olivelle, p. 252.
293
articulated. The term 'brahmacakra' is of central importance in Sarkar's entfre ideology; it is a
concept that he elaborates into a complex theory of cosmogony and evolution with the aid of
terminology and ideas from Samkhya-Yoga and Saivism, among others. Olivelle and Radhakrishnan
give variant translations of verse 6 of chapter 1 of the SvetaSvatara, the first possibly expressing a
dualist soteriology and the second a monistic one:

(1) Within this vast wheel of brahman, on which all subsist and which abides in all, a
goose keeps moving around. When he perceives himself (dtman) as distinct from the
impeller, delighted by that knowledge he goes from there to immortality.*"

(2) In this vast brahma-v/heel, which enlivens all things, the soul flutters about
thinking that the self in him and the Mover (the Lord) are different. Then, when
blessed by him, he gains etemal life.

Olivelle's translation of verse 6 implies that a person realises the deathless state by seeing the
difference between his self and the prime mover of the universe, which is probably brahman, a view
that is resonant with the Sarnkhyan soteriological notion of distinguishing purusa (consciousness) from
prakrti (material nature). Radhakrishnan's translation of the same verse implies a totaUy different
understanding of liberation, liberation that is realised by overcoming the separation of one's self from
the Lord, since it is the sense of differentiation of the self from the 'Mover' of the brahmacakra that
causes the self s continual 'fluttering' in the world. In this case, Sarkar's ontology and soteriology are
more consistent with the interpretive translation of Radhakrishnan than with that of Olivelle,
unequivocally stating the idea of non-dual realisation of self and brahma as the fundamental
soteriological insight. In short, Sarkar appears to have drawn from the SvetaSvatara the notion of a
"wheel of brahma', symbolising the cosmological order, as well as the idea of salvation as the self
realising its ultimate oneness with the Mover of this wheel, which is brahma. The idea of the Mover
may well be a precursor to Sarkar's conception of purusottama, the conscious nucleus of the
cosmological order that controls, witnesses, and enlivens all entities revolving around it.

Verse 15 of the Sveta^vatara compares the dtman to oil in sesame seeds and butter in curd,
which can be obtained through sincere seeking and austerity:

Like oil in sesame seeds and butter in curds, like water in the river-bed and fu-e in the
fire-drills, so, when one seeks it with truth and austerity, one grasps that self (dtman) in
the body (dtman) - that all-pervading self, which is contained [in the body], like butter
in milk.**

Here again, we see Sarkar's debt to the Upanisadic legacy through his usage of exactiy the same
analogies of oil in sesame seeds and butter in curd to illustrate the nature of consciousness, which is

*" SU 1.6, translated in Olivelle, p. 253.

SU 1.6, translated in Radhakrishnan, The Principal Upanisads, p. 713.
** SU 1.15,ti-anslatedin Olivelle, p. 255.
294
concealed within the mind of beings just as oil or butter is potentially found in thefr respective
unrefined counterparts. Just as realising the dtman requfres sincerity and austerity, Sarkar states that
finding this pure consciousness within the mind requires sincere and constant practice of meditation,
practice that can be likened to the effort of austerity.
Finally, several verses in the Svetalvatara describe the nature of the one God (which is
brahman) as the lone 'witness' that shines through the world and beyond:

The one God hidden in all beings, pervading the universe, the inner self of all beings,
the overseer of the work, dwelling in all beings, the witness, the spectator, alone,
devoid of qualities, ...*'

There the sun does not shine, nor the moon and stars; there the lightning does not
shine, of this common fire need we speak! Him alone, as he shines, do all things
reflect; this whole world radiates with his light.**

Sarkar speaks of brahma as the all-effulgent entity whose light shines brilliantly and infinitely in and
beyond all things. He characterises this effulgent brahma as the witness of the cosmos, which, in its
nirguria state, is free of all qualities that can delimit or define it. The resemblance of Sarkar's ideas to
those of the Sveta^vatara is striking.
The Mundaka Upanisad gives the well-known image of sparks flying out of a fire to
characterise the nature of multiple entities issuing forth from a single and substantially identical source:

As from a well-stoked fire sparks fly by the thousands,

all looking just like it.
So from the imperishable issue diverse things,
and into it, my friend, they retum.*'

In the verse quoted above, the sparks, representing all the multifarious objects and life-forms of the
cosmos, are said to ultimately retum to the same source from which they came - a teleology that is
deeply resonant with Sarkar's docfrine of pratisaficara, the evolutionary joumey of all entities back to
their cosmic origin in brahma. Apart from this verse, the rest of the Mundaka reiterates the general
Upanisadic stand of monism and, to a greater extent than the other Upanisads, the opposition to Vedic
ritualism. All these are consonant with Sarkar's ontological stance of non-dualism and his critical view
of pure ritualism bereft of any meditative or liberative significance.
The last Upanisad that we are going to investigate is the Mandukya, fraditionally assigned
to the Atharvaveda, which identifies the sacred syllable Om with the cosmos, brahman, and the dtman.
The most interesting comparison between the Mandukya and Sarkar is with regard to a set of terms

*' 5t/ 6.11,ti-anslatedin Olivelle, p. 264

"* SU 6.14,tianslatedin Olivelle, p. 264
69
MuU 2.1.1,tianslatedin Ohvelle, p. 271.
295
common to both of them - Vaisvanara, Taijasa, and Prajna. The beginning verses of the Mandukya
read:

Brahman is this self (dtman)... consisting of four quarters.

The first quarter is Vailvanara - the Universal One - situated in the waking state,
perceiving what is outside, ... and enjoying gross things.
The second quarter is Taijasa - the Brilliant One - situated in the state of dream,
perceiving what is inside, ... and enjoying refined things.
The third quarter is Prajria - the Intelligent One - situated in the state of deep sleep -
deep sleep is when a sleeping man entertains no desires or sees no dreams; become
one, and thus being a single mass of perception; consisting of bliss; and thus enjoying
bliss; and having thought as his mouth. He is the Lord of all; he is the knower of all;
he is the inner confroUer; he is the womb of all - for he is the origin and the dissolution
of beings.

In these verses, Vaisvanara appears to be the witness of conscious, waking experience; Taijasa the
witness of the state of dreaming; and Prajna the witness of the state of deep, dreamless sleep. In
confrast, Sarkar uses the term 'Vaisvanara' to refer to the witnessing entity of the causal cosmic mind -
the three subtlest kosas of the macrocosmic citta, namely the hirarimaya kosa, vijndnamaya kosa, and
atimdnasa kosa. To denote the witnessing entity of waking experience, when the kdmamaya kosa (in
addition to the other four kosas) is active, Sarkar uses the term 'Prajria'. This is in confrast to the usage
of the same term in the Mandukya, wherein Prajiia is said to witness the state of deep, dreamless sleep.
With regard to the state of dreaming, Sarkar uses the term 'Taijasa' to denote the witoessing entity of
the manomaya kosa, the subconscious layer of the mind that is said to be particularly active in
dreaming. Thus, Sarkar and the Mandukya agree on the usage of the term 'Taijasa'. The above
discussion indicates that Sarkar may have borrowed his terminology pertaining to the various
functional forms of the witnessing entity from the Mandukya Upanisad, a possibility corroborated by
evidence of conceptual similarities between Sarkar's teachings and the Upanisadic corpus unearthed in
this section.

7.3 Classical Hindu Philosophies

The foregoing presentation focussed on the roots of Indian religion found in the Vedas and Upanisads,
and provided an overview of similarities, differences, and possible connections of core Indian
religious ideas with the concepts of Sarkar's AM. Critical comparisons were made from the
viewpoint of religious doctrine and to some extent religious praxis. In this section, the focus shifts
towards a more philosophical critique of Sarkar's ideas, examining how they converge with, diverge
from, and perhaps synthesise the various premises and arguments of classical Hindu philosophical
schools, most notably Samkhya, Yoga, and Vedanta. I will elucidate how Sarkar attempts to resolve

'" MaU 2-6, translated in Olivelle, p. 289.

296
some of the major logical and philosophical problems posed by these systems in his arguably
syncretistic way.
As noted in Chapter 1, the demarcation of religion from philosophy in Indian thought is
somewhat artificial and perhaps alien to the Indian worldview, where the strands of religion,
philosophy, ritual, art, and myth are all woven together into an organic and seamless whole.
However, in this phenomenological comparison of ideas between Sarkar and his Indian predecessors,
such a demarcation serves a practical exegetical purpose. It allows a more analytical and thorough
treatment of the ideas presented in Indian thought in a manner that is both systematic and clarifying.
Admittedly, the style and content of this demarcation reflects my horizon as a reader, based on my
understanding of how Indian thought can best be understood.

7.3.1 Samkhya and Sarkarian Metaphysics

Of all the systems of Indian philosophy, the school of thought (darsana) that comes closest to Sarkar's
philosophy is probably Samkhya, 'Enumeration'." With origins lost in antiquity, Samkhyan
metaphysics has had a huge impact on Indian thought in general, having been incorporated, in one
form or another, into the philosophical elaborations of later Indian systems (in the theologies of
Saktism, Saivism, and Vaisnavism, for example). Possibly the oldest among Indian systems,
Sarnkhyan ideas have been found in the cosmogonic hymns of the Rgveda, parts of the Atharvaveda,
and in the Upanisads. The idea of all things evolving from one principle that divides itself, and the
Upanisadic classification of phenomena under a finite number of categories, may reflect Sarnkhyan
influence, though there is insufficient evidence to support either of the two contending views: that the
Upanisads are based upon a developed Sarnkhyan philosophical system; or that Samkhya developed
out of the ideas found in the Upanisad. The major textual sources for the Samkhya system are the
Sdmkhya-Kdrikd (SK) of Isvara Krsna, dating from the thfrd century C.E., and the Sdrrikhya-Sutra

attributed to Kapila himself (regarded by traditional Indian works as having lived in the sixth century
B.C.E.). Apart from Kapila, two other teachers, namely Asuri and Pancasikha, are often referred to in
later Sarnkhyan treatises as important originators of Sarnkhya philosophy. Scholarly opinion
considers the Sdnikhya-Siitra to be a later work than the Sdmkhya-Kdrikd. (perhaps as late as the
fourteenth orfifteenthcentury CE.) and finds little evidence to support the historicity of Kapila, Asuri
or Paficagikha."

Metaphysical Cosmology
The basic philosophy of Samkhya has been classified as dualistic realism, positing two fundamental
and irreducible realities that exist from beginningless to endless time: purusa (the male principle

' Gerald James Larson, 'The History and Literature of Samkhya', in Gerald James Larson and Ram Shankar
Bhattacharya (eds.) Encyclopaedia of Indian Philosophies Volume 4: Sanjkhya A Dualist Tradition in Indian
Philosophy (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1987), pp. 48-65.
" Larson, Encyclopaedia, p. 7. See also Klostermaier, Survey, p. 399 and Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 101.
297
identified as pure consciousness) and prakrti (the female principle identified as the material mafrix of
the universe). Larson describes Sanrikhya variously as "process materiaUsm', 'contentiess
consciousness','" and 'rational reflection'," highlighting the cosmological, teleological, and
pedagogical dimensions of Sarnkhyan philosophy. According to the SK, multiple purusas and a
singular prakrti exist separately in polarity prior to the creation of the universe. When purusas come
into proximity with prakrti, they mysteriously and mistakenly identify with the changes undergone by
the three gurias or forces of prakrti, while primordial prakrti herself is divided into the multiplicity out
of which evolve the entire cosmos and all the individual entities within it.'* There is regularity and
pattem in the evolution of microcosms, in that each microcosmic entity is characterised by the
presence of the three gurias in different proportions. These three gunas are sattva or lightness, rajas
or passion, and tamas or darkness, which in thefr original state, prior to the influence of purusa, are in
equilibrium with one another. Cosmic evolution begins when the association of purusa with prakrti
causes the gurias to lose thefr equUibrium and to start the evolutionary process. The first product of
evolution is the mahat (the 'great one') or buddhi ('intellect'), followed by the aharnkdra ('ego
principle'), which issues from it. From aharnkdra arises manas (the 'lower mind') and the ten
indriyas (five cognitive senses of sight, smell, taste, touch, and hearing and five conative senses of
speech, prehension, movement, excretion, and reproduction). In addition, the aharnkdra gives rise to
five tanmdtras ('subtle essences') that underlie the five sensory abilities. In tum, the tanmdtras give
rise to the five bhutas ('gross material elements') of earth, water, fire, afr, and ether. In total, classical
Sarnkhya recognises twenty-four principles of material existence (prakrti) together with an infinite
number of transcendental consciousnesses (purusa)^ The whole thrust of Samkhya soteriology is to
remove human beings from the 'threefold misery' of life and to offer, as the primary means for doing
this, the method of 'discriminative knowledge of the manifest, the unmanifest and the knower'.'*
This is understood to be a process of separating pure consciousness (purusa) from the material
principles (prakrti) by discriminative gnosis and not through any form of Yogic or meditative practice.
The emancipatory process involves purusa casting off sensory perception, and realising the trae nature
of prakrti, the source of ego and conceptual thought. This liberation of purusa occurs at death, when
prakrtifinallyceases its activity and purusa gains kaivalya, 'aloneness' or 'perfect freedom'.
Interesting and fraitfiil comparisons can be made between Sarnkhyan and Sarkarian
metaphysics, as Sarkar's texts are replete with terminology common to Sainkhya. In Idea and
Ideology, one of his two philosophical masterpieces, Sarkar uses extensively the binary opposition of
purusa and prakrti to characterise his ultimate reality, which he calls brahma. The Sdmkhya-Kdrikd

Larson, Encyclopaedia, pp. 65-72.

Larson, Encyclopaedia, pp. 73-83.
Larson, Encyclopaedia, pp. 83-103.
'* See e.g. Sdmkhya-Kdrikd 18, in Nandalal Sinha (trans.), 'The Sanjkhya Philosophy', in B.D. Basu (ed.) The
Sacred Books of the Hindus, Volume 2 (New York: AMS Press, 1974), p. 18.
"Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 103.
'* Sdrrtkhya-Kdrikd 2, p. 3.
298
describes purusa as a 'witness, solitary, indifferent, spectator, and non-agent', in other words, a
passive and detached observer. As in Samkhya, Sarkar describes purusa as pure cosmic
consciousness, the witnessing cognitive aspect of ultimate reality, and prakrti as cosmic energy, the
dynamic operative aspect of the same. But unlike Samkhya, he describes purusa not only as
witnessing consciousness (sdksi) but also confroUer of the gurias (guTiayantraka).^° While stating that
purusa does no action on the world dfrectiy (akartd), he nevertheless describes purusa as acting
indfrectiy by confroUing the operation of the gurias. Thus, Sarkar's conception of purusa as dynamic
and creative witness is in contrast to Samkhya's notion of purusa as mere passive witness, a
theoretical move that aUgns Sarkar closer to the Tantric viewpoint.*' Sarkar dialecticaUy unifies
purusa and prakrti on a higher level into an integral entity he calls brahma, the supreme cosmological,
ontological, and soteriological trath. Instead of regarding purusa as entfrely distinct and separate from
prakrti, a stance often labelled dualist (with reference to a single purusa and the singular prakrti) or
pluralist (with reference to multiple purusas and the singular prakrti), Sarkar sees purusa and prakrti
as merely two polar aspects of one unity-totality. In the terminology popularised by Mircea Eliade,
Sarkar's unity of polarities is an instance of coincidentia oppositorum.^^ For Sarkar, ultimate reality
is unequivocally singular and the multiplicity of the universe emerges and evolves out of the 'body' of
brahma - a monistic stance echoing that of Kashmir Saivism, and to a much less extent Advaita
Vedanta.
While some scholars maintain that Samkhya's dualism of purusa and prakrti reflects a
dualism of a male and female principle,*' others argue that the perceived male-female polarity in
Sarrikhya's purusa-prakrti pair is a result of the influence of Tanfric conceptions of reality, an error of
superimposition made by scholars who claim that such gender polarity exists in Sarnkhya.*" Sarkar
unambiguously ascribes a masculine identity to purusa and a feminine identity to prakrti (see
subsection 3.2.1 for discussion), suggesting his conformity to a Tantric rather than Samkhya
interpretation of these paired concepts. The terms siva and sakti, rather than purusa and prakrti, are
used in Tantric traditions, and Sarkar's obvious equations of siva with purusa and sakti with prakrti
clearly indicate his attempt to synthesise, in his Ananda Marga cosmo-ontology, Sarnkhyan and
Tantric ideas.
Sarkar's cosmogony begins with the sequential and progressive qualification of purusa by the
three gurias of prakrti within the infinite atfributeless (nirguria) brahma. This process of qualification
results in the graded metamorphosis of purusa into progressively less subtle and more limited forms.

" Sdmkhya-Kdrikd 19, p. 18.

°"A511.15, p. 24.
^' Jacobsen writes: 'Tantiic yoga ... conceives of consciousness not only as seer (drastr) but also as spontaneous
doer (kriyd).' Knut A. Jacobsen, 'The Female Pole of the Godhead in Tantiism and the Prakrti of Sanjkhya',
Numen, 43 (1996), p. 60.
*' Mircea Eliade, The Quest: History and Meaning in Religion (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1969).
*' See e.g. Narendranath Bhattacharyya, History of the Tantric Religion (Delhi: Manohar, 1987), p. 113.
*'' See e.g. Knut A. Jacobsen, 'The Female Pole of the Godhead in Tantiism and the Prakrti of Samkhya',
/Vame«, 43 (1996), pp. 56-81.
299
though purusa substantially remains unchanged in any way. Thus, while substantially immutable,
purusa metamorphoses itself from one into many and from subtie into coarse, much like water vapour
condensing into liquid water, or liquid water freezing into ice while remaining essentially H2O. In
confrast, Samkhya posits that the proximity and association of multiple purusas with the singular
prakrti diggers a cascade of evolutionary changes within the body of prakrti, resulting in the various
categories of material existence. In Samkhya, prakrti is the material and instmmental cause of the
universe, botii macrocosmic and microcosmic, while the distinct and plural purusas remain essentially
unchanged by the activities of prakrti Though unchanged, purusa nonetheless interacts with prakrti
and mysteriously and mistakenly identifies with the manifold activities of prakrti
In Sarkar's cosmogony, the first evolute that emerges out of the delimiting influence of prakrti
over purusa is the cosmic mahat or the sense of self-existence within brahma, cosmic consciousness.
Mahat is the first expression of qualified (saguria) brahma as a result of the action of sattvaguria, and
is also the fu-st and subtiest layer of cosmic mind. For the sake of clarification, it is worthwhUe
reinforcing that, in Sarkar's view, saguria brahma is constituted of the cosmic mind in association
with its witoessing consciousness (purusottama) throughout the entire cycle of creation
(brahmacakra). There appears to be no substantial difference between the Samkhyan and Sarkarian
views of the three gunas (the forces of prakrti) except in relation to the definition of rajoguria. Hatiey
(2000) points out:

These forces are ubiquitous in Indian thought, particularly in Sarnkhya, and are
typically utilised for building taxonomic classifications and associations: tamas is dark,
heavy, static; rajas is movement, passion, activity; sattva is light, pure, sentient ...
Sarkar however opts for a dialectical understanding of the gurias by declaring rajas as
merely an intermediate phase of sattva and tamas. To further emphasise the opposition
between these two, Sarkar largely removes the negative qualities traditionally
associated with rajas, such as passion, making it a neutral 'mutative' principle.*'

Hatley adds, however, that there are times when Sarkar applies the usual triplicate nature of the gurias
in ways that leave out a dialectical interpretation. Be that as it may, it is reasonable to say that Sarkar
makes some attempt to modify the commonly understood meaning of rajoguria as and when it suits his
purpose.
According to Sarkar's cosmogony, out of the singular mahat arises the singular cosmic aham,
the sense of individuating agency within the cosmic mind, as a result of the action of rajoguria. From
the cosmic aham arises the cosmic citta, the objectified portion of the cosmic mind that functions as a
perceptive mental plate as well as subsfratum for the thought projections that form the material
universe. Sarkar views the manifold objects of the universe as essentially thought-forms within the
cosmic citta, all of which are constitutively microscopic waves of consciousness vibrating at varying

Shaman Hatley, The Dialectics of Bliss: Interpretations of the Ananda SUtram (Unpublished manuscript,
2000), p. 13.
300
frequencies and wavelengths. The cosmic citta and all its objectified thought-forms are produced
through the action of tamoguria. It is in this vein that Sarkar calls the universe a 'macropsychic
conation', a case of matter emerging from mind.
Sarkar shares with Samkhya this idea of matter emerging from mind but conceives the nature
of the events and their sequence differentiy. In Samkhya, the first evolute arising out of the interaction
of multiple purusas with prakrti is again the mahat, though there is ambiguity as to whether it is
macrocosmic, microcosmic, or both, in nature. The Sarnkhyan mahat appears phenomenologically
identical to Sarkar's mahat, though Sarkar makes a clear distinction between the cosmic mahat that
emerges out of purusa in the ffrst phase (sadcara) and the unit mahat that forms in the second phase
(pratisaficara) of the cosmic cycle. The Sarnkhyan aharrikdra also appears phenomenologically
identical to Sarkar* s aham, whether taken microcosmically or macrocosmically, though again, Sarkar
locates the macrocosmic and microcosmic counterparts of aham sequentially at specific points in his
brahmacakra while Sarnkhya seems not to do so. For that matter, Sarnkhya does not present the
cosmogonic process in a neat cyclical fashion as does Sarkar.
The next evolute in Sarnkhya is manas or lower mind, and though it appears very similar to
Sarkar's citta, it differs from it in one very important respect: in Sarnkhya, manas does not give rise to
the bhdtas and tanmdtras as does the cosmic citta; instead aharnkdra does. Moreover, it is unclear
whether in Sarnkhya the term manas refers to some sort of macrocosmic 'lower mind', or a
microcosmic one, or both. In addition, while Sarnkhya sees the ten indriyas as arising dfrectly out of
the aharrikdra, Sarkar conceives of the indriyas as evolving biologically out of sufficiently complex
physical and mental stractures, which have themselves been formed from the five fundamental factors
(bhdtas) that evolved out of cosmic citta.
The above discussion suggests that the Sarnkhyan influence in Sarkar's thought may be so
great as to qualify him as a neo-Sainkhyan thinker. Sarkar's re-writing of Samkhyan concepts of
purusa and prakrti appears to have solved two difficulties faced by Samkhya philosophy as identified
by Loy: (1) the issue of how numerous, distinct and unrelated, yet omnipresent purusas could occupy
the same infinite space without affecting one another; and (2) the problem of how the radical dualism
of purusa and prakrti allows for any possibility of alliance between them.** In his redefinitions of
purusa and prakrti, Sarkar appears to have done precisely what Loy suggests as potential resolutions
to the above problems: '(1) conceiving of purusa not as distinct from each other, but as various aspects
or reflections of one unitary consciousness; and (2) conceiving of prakrti not as distinct from this
unified consciousness, but as an aspect of it.'*' Thus, these departures from traditional Sarnkhyan
cosmogony and ontology, as highlighted above, align Sarkar more closely with Tantric integralism
and bipolar monism. (We will investigate Sarkar's connections with Tantra more closely in Chapter
8.)

86
See David Loy, 'Enlightenment in Buddhism and Advaita Vedanta: Are Nirvdria and Moksa the Same?',
International Philosophical Quarterly, 22.1 (1982): p. 67.
301
Soteriology
In terms of soteriology, Samkhya conceives of liberation (here termed kaivalya) as simply the process
of progressive withdrawal of individual purusas from the influence of prakrti by discriminative
wisdom. As Klostermaier puts it:

Spirit, having been restiess in connection with matter, realises matter to be the cause of
its restiessness. By realising the nature of prakrti as contrary to its own nature and
recognising all objective reality as but evolutes of prakrti the spirit becomes self-
satisfied and self-reliant. The very dissociation of purusa from prakrti is its
liberation.**

The Sdmkhya-Kdrikd gives a vivid simile to describe the relationship and soteriological
dynamics between purusa and prakrti}^ Purusa is compared to a spectator observing prakrti as a
dancer, who after showing all her skills, has no choice but to repeat her performance over and over
again. The spectator loses interest as he realises the repetition, and seeing that he no longer pays any
attention to her, the dancer ceases all performance. This simile indicates how the witnessing purusa
gradually loses interest in and becomes disengaged from the activities of prakrti after an insight into
their repetitive nature, finally resulting in the cessation of prakrti's activities and its own
emancipation. This emancipation can occur while the individual is still alive, with purusa remaining
associated with the body, though no new momentum is produced that will bind purusa further in
material existence. This is compared to the way a potter's wheel keeps moving for a while even
without being pushed, owing to the forces applied previously.'" In contrast, Sarkar sees liberation not
as a dissociation of individual purusas from prakrti but as a process of prakrti merging, in stages, back
into the infinite and singular pwrMsa with which she is coeval. As the power of prakrti wanes through
the course of pratisancara, coupled with the meditative efforts of the spiritual practitioner and the
attractive force of the cosmic witnessing nucleus (purusottama), the human mind overcomes the
bondage of prakrti, expands into deeper kosas, and finally merges into its source, the dtman that is
essentially one with parama purusa. Attaining this final merger results not from discriminative
knowledge alone but from a balanced application of action (karma), knowledge (jfidna), and devotion
(bhakti). The introversial force (vidydmdyd) and grace (krpd) of parama purusa are cracial to this
process of emancipation.

Hence, while for Sarnkhya, liberation consists in purusa-prakrti dissociation, for Sarkar,
liberation is a matter of prakrti-purusa merger. The Sarnkhyan soteriological process involves
progressive withdrawal of consciousness from all objective perceptions, and mental and egoic
activities so as to be totally alone in a state of kaivalya; the Sarkarian approach involves progressive
mental expansion such that pure consciousness becomes so increasingly reflected that mind finaUy

^'Loy, p. 67.
*' Klostermaier, Survey, p. 401.
*' Sdmkhya-Kdrikd 59, "The Sanrikhya Philosophy', p. 46.
302
merges into consciousness - a state which Sarkar also calls kaivalya. Sarkar's kaivalya differs,
however, from its Samkhyan counterpart in that it is not a state of utter 'aloneness' of individual
purusasfromone another and from the world but rather a state of profound unity with the attributeless
ground of all existence (nirguria brahma) and thus with all things. Sarkar's kaivalya is synonymous
with nirvikalpa samddhi or merger into nirguria brahma. Again, while Sarnkhya achieves its goal by
means of discriminative knowledge or wisdom alone, Sarkarian Tanfra does so by means of a
combination of action, knowledge, devotion, cosmic attraction, and grace.

Theory of Causation
Finally, it is instractive to compare the theory of causation elucidated by Sarkar with that of Sanrikhya.
Saixikhya's causation theory is technically called satkdryavdda, meaning that the effect (kdrya) is pre-
existent (sat) in its cause, and also prakrtipariridmavdda, meaning that the effect is a real
transformation (pariridma) of nature (prakrti). The SK describes it thus:

The effect is ever existent, because that which is non-existent, can by no means be
brought into existence; because effects take adequate material causes; because aU
things are not produced from all causes; because a competent cause can effect that only
for which it is competent; and also because the effect possesses the nature of the
cause."

This theory is opposed to the vivarta ('illusory change') doctrine of idealistic schools of thought such
as Vedanta and the Cittamatra school of Mahayana Buddhism. Prakrtipariridmavdda does not apply
to Sarkar's philosophical stance on causation, a stance that could possibly be described by the term
'purusapariridmavdda'. Sarkar does not, however, mention the terms satkdryavdda and
purusapariridmavdda in any of his published discourses. He nevertheless posits that all created
entities are produced out of the 'stuff of pure consciousness, being transformed and tangible states of
the formless and limitiess ground of existence. The created universe is real and not illusory, though it
exists as a conventional reality in relation to the ultimate reality of brahma. Hence, the universe does
not arise out of nothing but rather is a manifestation of latent creative potential embedded within
purusa. (See Chapter 3 for a more detailed discussion of Sarkar's cosmogonic and causation theory.)
While Sarkar and Samkhya disagree on the original material of the universe and the details and
sequence of the cosmogonic process, they nevertheless seem to concur on the doctrine of
pariridmavdda - the view that the effect is a real, not illusory, transformation of its cause. This
indicates yet another Sarnkhyan line of influence on Sarkar's thought.
It is debatable whether Sarkar accepts the causation view of satkdryavdda, which amounts to
the argument that the variegated universe afready exists in the undifferentiated, unconditioned reality
of brahma. In our discussion of Sarkar's cosmogonic theory in Chapter 3, we note that the objective

^ Sdmkhya-Kdrikd 67, p. 49.

303
universe is essentially a thought projection of brahma, an actual metamorphosis of the fundamental
'stuff of pure cognisance. While the basic material of the universe pre-exists in its cause, brahma, tiie
universe itself does not yet exist in the primordial ocean of pure cognisance. In this sense, Sarkar
seems not to have advocated the doctrine that the universe 'pre-exists' in its material cause, stating
instead that the universe exists as a real potential awaiting actualisation rather than as a fully actualised
effect in nirguria brahma. This potential for universal manifestation is activated as a result of the
innate desfre (kdma) and will (icchd) of brahma, which permit prakrti (the operative aspect of
brahma) to exert its binding and transformative influence over the purusa (the cognitive aspect of
brahma) of infinite manifestive potential.

7.3.2 Yoga and Sarkarian Soteriology

We will now proceed to a discussion of the dimensions of praxis within classical Yoga in comparison
with Sarkarian Tantric Yoga. The term 'Yoga', apart from its technical reference to the system of
thought and praxis associated with Patanjali, is often used to refer to various styles or methods of
practice aimed at union with ultimate reality. Chaudhuri mentions several well-defined Yogic
disciplines, namely the 'yoga of breath control' (hatha), 'yoga of mind confrol' (raja), 'yoga of action'
(karma), 'yoga of love' (bhakti), 'yoga of knowledge' (jfidna), 'yoga of being-energy' (kuridaliru), and
•yoga of integral consciousness' (purria).^ In this section, we will refer to Yoga not in this general
sense of style or method but in the specific sense of Yoga as primarily the system encoded by Patanjah
in his Yoga-Sdtra.
The classical Yoga of Patanjali shows parallels to Samkhyan metaphysics but, unlike
Samkhya, elaborates a range of Yogic practices aimed at the attainment of its highest goal, samddhi
(usually translated as 'ecstasy' or more accurately 'enstasy'). While some scholars claim that the
Yoga of Pataiijali is nothing but a 'meta-psychological technique based upon the philosophy of the
Sarnkhya'," others support the view that while Yoga does draw on parts of Sarnkhyan philosophy, it
nevertheless gives them new interpretations, thus justifying Yoga's recognition as a separate
philosophical system.'" Sarkar's emphasis on spiritual practices for the concrete realisation of his
philosophical and theological ideals warrants a close comparison with fraditional Yogic praxis and
ideals.
The authoritative school (darsana) of classical Yoga can be fraced to two main authoritative
sources. One of these is the Yoga-Sdtra (YS) composed or compiled by Pataiijali (ca. second third
century C.E.). YS is regarded by some scholars as a text that represents the culmination of a long

" Sdmkhya-Kdrikd 9, 'The Sanjkhya Philosophy', p. 8.

" Haridas Chaudhuri, 'Yoga Psychology', in Charles T. Tart (ed.), Transpersonal Psychologies (Boston: Harper
and Row, 1975), p. 236.
" See e.g. P. T. Raju, The Philosophical Traditions of India (London: George Allen and Unwin, 1971), p. 165.
See e.g. Ian Whicher, The Integrity of the Yoga Darsana: A Reconsideration of Classical Yoga (Albany: State
University of New York, 1998), p. 45.
304
development of Yogic speculation and technology." The other main authoritative source for classical
Yoga is the Yoga-Bhdsya (YB) of Vyasa (ca. fifth - sixth century C.E.), a commentary to the YS.^ In
this section, we will be examining the philosophy and practice of yoga espoused in the YS and YB,
drawing freely from scholarly studies on the topic, and comparing and confrasting with Sarkar's
formulation of his Yogic path. A comparative examination of the metaphysics, cosmogony,
psychology, soteriology, and higher states of consciousness (samddhi) will be attempted.

Metaphysics
Classical Yoga can be described as both a psycho-metaphysics and a soteriology, expounding both a
map of the inner and outer universe and a path of practice leading from bondage to salvation. The
central and most important concept of classical Yoga is that of the pure identity called purusa, the
'unseen seer' behind the field of physical and mental experience. V/hether purusa is to be regarded as
singular or plural is unclear, but its characteristic as pure consciousness (cit) or sheer awareness (citi)
is well established." Purusa exists apart from the ordinary mind, which is characterised by fluctuating
thoughts and emotions and produced by the interaction of purusa with prakrti As material existence
is by nature blind and unconscious, it is the proximity of purusa to insentient prakrti that causes the
phenomenon of consciousness. Patanjali's metaphysical dualism gives rise to the philosophical
conundram of how a fundamentally transcendent purusa can interact with the material prakrti to
engender the entirety of afflictive experience. Pantanjali attempts to account for this by positing an
'alliance' or saniyoga between purusa and prakrti, between the pure witness and the body-mind
complex.'* The exact nature, function, and mechanism of this correlation are not entirely clear,
though the predominance of sattvaguria or factor of luminosity in the subtlest level of prakrti indicates
it is like the intrinsic luminosity of purusa^^ It is possible that this similarity between prakrti and
purusa allows their mutual interaction, bestowing upon the prakrtic mind a sense of self (asmitd-
mdtra) and intelligence (buddhi).
Whereas classical Yoga is ambiguous with regard to the singularity or plurality of purusa,
Sarkar unequivocally declares purusa to be singular, and gives it the name parama purusa to signify
its ultimate and all-inclusive nature. To Sarkar, it makes no sense to speak of plural monadic entities
that are fundamentally free of all qualities and qualification underlying the apparent manifestations of
the universe. Following Tantric non-dualism, he sees only one, singular entity, which encompasses
the totality of reality within its very 'body'; and he argues that this is the conclusion pluralistic or
dualistic philosophies have to reach if they are to follow thefr own logic to the very end. While

'^ See Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 284.

'* Ian Whicher, 'Yoga and Freedom: A Reconsideration of Pataiijali's Classical Yoga', Philosophy East and
West, vol. 48, no. 2 (1998), pp. 272 -322.
" See YS IV.22,1'5 IV.34, and YB 1.2 in Swami Hariharananda Araiiya, Yoga Philosophy ofPatanjali, trans, by
P. N. Mukerji (Albany: State University of New York, 1983), pp. 387-405, and 7.
'* See YS 11.23-24 and YB 11.17 in Hariharananda, pp. 190-198 and 151.
" See ra 11.17.
305
accepting cit (pure consciousness) and citi (sheer awareness) as essential features of parama purusa,
Sarkar does not hesitate to add sat (unchangeability) and dnanda (bliss) to its being. Sarkar's purusa
is not a mere detached witness but also a vibrant and blissful existence intimately connected to the
manifest world. Defining prakrti as inseparable from and coeval with purusa, comprising two
essential aspects of brahma, Sarkar avoids the problem of how an eternally isolated purusa can
associate and interact with prakrti He cleverly proposes that while it is possible to functionally
distinguish pwrMsa from prakrti, they are in reality not dual but singular. In the nirguria state, brahma
is attributeless and ultimately undefinable, and the closest conceptualisation of it that one can obtain is
to say that purusa just exists while prakrti is dormant or inoperative as its three gurias have yet to
differentiate from one another. In nirguria brahma, prakrti is merely an undifferentiated matrix of
haphazardly moving forces that defies linguistic categorisation. The will of parama purusa is what
triggers off the process of creation, beginning with the formation of triangles of forces, leading to the
bursting forth of creative energy and the progressive qualification of purusa into mahat, aham and
citta to form the cosmic mind. The qualification of purusa signals the stage of saguria brahma, which
is essentially a 'localised' portion of the infinite ocean of nirguria brahma undergoing a process of
metamorphosis. In the nirguria state, brahma is objectless and there is only pure consciousness and
sheer awareness ad infinitum. In the saguria state, consciousness reflects on the cosmic mind and on
subsequently-evolved material elements and living entities as cosmic witnessing awareness. Hence,
since purusa and prakrti are coeval and co-acting by their very nature, Sarkar resolves the conundram
of how the pristine and transcendent purusa can ever be influenced (in a hitherto unknown and
mysterious way) by another power that is etemally apart from it.

Cosmogony
The cosmogony of classical Yoga is very similar to the Samkhyan model, involving the singular or
plural purusa(s) on one side, and the 'franscendental core of material existence' (prakrti-pradhdna) on
the other. Prakrti-pradhdrui is also termed the 'undifferentiated' or alitiga, a primordial
undifferentiated field of energy containing the infinite possibilities of the universe. In this field, the
three gurias are said to be in perfect balance until the proximity of purusa upsets tiie harmony and
triggers the unfolding of the various principles of existence. The first principle to emerge out of the
aliriga is the linga-mdtra, the 'matiix of differentiation' or 'higher mind' (buddhi), which is identical
to the Sarnkhyan mahat. This is also viewed from a psychological perspective as the cosmic sense of
individuation or pure existence, asmitd-mdtra. The principle of individuation (asmitd), which is
synonymous with the Samkhyan aharnkdra, is the microcosmic counterpart of asmitd-mdtra. From
the linga-mdtra (or buddhi or asmitd-mdtra) arise the five 'subtie potentials' (tanmdtras) and the
eleven 'senses' (indriyas), with the 'lower mind' (manas) regarded as the eleventh sense. The five

306
subtie potentials in tum give rise to the five 'material elements' (bhutas) that form the basic building
blocks of the universe.'""
Sarkar's cosmogony echoes that of classical Yoga as well as that of Sainkhya, but with three
very important differences. Ffrst, as noted previously, purusa and prakrti are not separate entities but
two aspects of the same whole. In keeping with the Tantric ttadition, Sarkar identifies purusa and
prakrti with siva and sakti respectively. Second, whereas in classical Yoga, the linga-mdtra or
buddhi is a transformed state of prakrti and material in essence, in Sarkarian Tantric Yoga, the mahat
(the Sarkarian counterpart of linga-mdtra or buddhi) is but a transformed state of purusa under the
binding influence of prakrti Similarly, the asmitd of Yoga and the aham of Sarkar are further
transformations of thefr respective causa materialis - prakrti for Yoga and purusa for Sarkar. Third,
Sarkar applies the term aliriga to the unmanifested and unqualified purusa, not to the undifferentiated
matrix of matter (prakrti), as is the case with classical Yoga. The reasons for these differences can
only be speculated upon and hinted at. It is possible that Yoga's dualism and Sarkar's monism are in
whole or in part, due to the different perspectives adopted in light of distinctive insights gained from
distinct meditation practices of the two traditions. It is obvious that both Yoga and Sarkar's Ananda
Marga are not mere speculative philosophy but essentially forms of praxis aimed at ultimate liberation
of the mind. It is thus reasonable to assume that the distinctive meditative experiences and insights of
the founders of these two systems would have impacted on thefr philosophical formulations.

In the case of Yoga, the recognition that all material and mental existence is gross and
conducive to suffering may have led to a meditative practice that strives to eliminate all forms of
sensory perception and cognitive modifications (yogas citta-vrtti-nirodhah), so that the complete
cessation of all objects and all egoic activity in kaivalya is deemed the highest state. From the vantage
point of this lofty state, all forms of experience are cmde, liable to suffering, and utterly different from
the transcendence of kaivalya. Hence, the natural philosophical speculation to arise out of such an
experience (or non-experience) would be the positing of a pure franscendent purusa that is completely
separate from the mutable material prakrti In Sarkar's case, while not denying the close similarity
between his nirvikalpa samddhi and Yoga's kaivalya (and thus the similar if not identical meditative
experiences they point to), one can see in Sarkar's non-dualism a more integral and encompassing
vision at work. The unity of vision afforded by a spacious clear awareness that is co-emergent with
the objects of the mind and that simultaneously observes and knows them may allow for a radically
different philosophical picture to emerge. The experience of bare attention and insightful observation,
where thoughts, feelings, and sensations are seen to arise out of and dissolve back into the expansive
silence of the mind (and thus are essentially non-distinct from the silent awareness that 'lights up'
within them), may well be the source of Sarkar's cosmogonic speculations. As investigation of
possible correlations between meditative experience and speculative philosophy requires far more
extensive methodological discussion and textual examination than can be undertaken here, it is best

'""See y511.19-24 and Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, pp. 319-324.

307
left for future studies. The above discussion is just a brief, and no doubt less than satisfactory, foray
into this potentially fmitful area of research.
Adding to the foregoing debate is the argument by Whicher that kaivalya denotes not an
ontological state of isolation of purusa from prakrti, but an epistemological re-alignment of the
relationship between purusa as pure witnessing awareness and prakrti as objects of the mind. The
'aloneness' of purusa refers not to an ontological isolation but to the freedom of reflexive
consciousness from misidentification with the objects of mind and body, so that it shines forth in its
true nature as it engages with prakrti in a non-attached and non-reactive way. The purusa-realised
person is able to act creatively in the world, to have thoughts and emotions and experiences, without
being enslaved by egoic identification or ensnared by the wiles of prakrti. Whicher's view is
supported by Chappie, who argues that the final passage of the YS affirms kaivalya as a purified 'way
of being in the world without falling into the trap of considering oneself different from what is seen: a
moment of pure consciousness takes place wherein the seer does not become enmeshed in prakrti.''^'
This interesting proposition brings the Yoga viewpoint much closer to Sarkar's Tantric perspective.'"'

Psychology
Alongside Yoga's cosmogony is the Yogic theory of mind, which espouses the idea that 'habit
pattems' (vdsands) and "deeply rooted impressions' (sarriskdras) drive, and are in tum fed by, a
person's "mental processes' (vrtti). In Yoga psychology, it is the complex interplay of vdsands,
sarriskdras, and vrtti that sustains the afflictive sense of self (asmitd), resulting in suffering.'"'
Sarkar's yoga psychology seems to echo the classical Yoga concepts of sarriskdras and vrtti but
curiously leaves out the notion of vdsands. An examination of Sarkar's elaboration on sarnskdras
can, however, shed some light on why this might be the case. Let us recall from Chapter 3 that Sarkar
describes various types of sarnskdras that may be imposed upon a person by the world. In this
connection, vrttigata sarriskdras, habituated behaviours formed as a result of physical, social, cultural,
and educational conditioning, closely resemble Yoga's concept of vdsands or habit pattems. It is thus
possible to see vdsands as incorporated under the concept of sarnskdra in Sarkar's Yogic discourse.
Another point of similarity between Sarkarian and classical Yoga psychology is the bi-
directional nature of the mind. Patanjali's discussion of 'subtilisation' (pratiprasava) as a means for
liberation is based on the notion that the mind can be directed outwardly toward expression'"" or
channelled inwardly to the point of cessation (nirodha).'°^ This invites comparison with Sarkar's

y5 IV.34: 'Kaivalyam is the calling back of the gunas which have been emptied of their purpose (of
performing) for purusa. Then there is steadfastness in the own form (of the seer): the power of pure
consciousness (citi-sakti)', translated in Christopher Chappie, 'The Unseen Seer and the Field: Consciousness in
Sanjkhya and Yoga', in Robert K. C. Forman, The Problem of Pure Consciousness (New York: Oxford
University Press, 1990), p. 67.
'"' Whicher, 'Yoga and Freedom', p. 278-297.
'"' Whicher, 'Yoga and Freedom', p. 276.
'""y5III.13.
'"^ YS III.9.
308
discussion of the extroversial and introversial movement of the cosmic mind (see Chapter 3), and more
specifically, of the exfroversial (which leads to cmdification and affliction) and introversial tendencies
(which lead to subtilisation and liberation) of the individual mind.
Sarkar's conceptualisation of mental functioning is basically Yogic, while his elaboration of
biopsychology, drawing on both biological and Yogic concepts, shows him up as a modem
reinterpreter of fraditional Yogic ideas. Sarkar's correlation of vrttis with endocrine glands is a
salient example of his attempts at reinterpretation.

Soteriology
As classical Yoga is first and foremost a praxis aimed at liberation from suffering, it is to Yogic
soteriology that we will now tum our attention, comparing it, in some detail, with the soteriological
praxis of Sarkar. The soteriological praxis advocated by Pataifijali is his eight-limbed path to union
(astdnga yoga) comprising the eight factors of discipline (yama), restraint (niyama), posture (dsana),
breath control (prdridydma), sense-withdrawal (pratydhdra), concentration (dhdrarid), meditation
(dhydna), and ecstasy or enstasy (samddhi).
Sarkar recognises the same eight limbs but reinterprets some of them. For Patanjali, yama
consists of five ethical principles aimed at regulating the social interactions of the yogi by channelling
all actions towards a higher goal. Ahirrisd or non-harming is non-violence in thought and action
towards others. Satya is tmthfulness in speech and asteya is non-stealing of what does not belong to
oneself. Brahmacdrya is defined as abstention from sexual activity in thought, word, and deed.
Aparigraha is defined as non-acceptance of gifts, expressing the spfrit of greedlessness of a yogi.
Sarkar does not differ greatly from the traditional understanding of yama, though he does make several
adjustments to the concepts of ahirrisd, satya, asteya, brahmacdrya, and aparigraha in light of modem
and pragmatic considerations. For him, ahirrisd is not pure and total non-application of force but
rather purposeful non-infliction of pain on any creature in thought, word, or deed. This allows for the
use of force for physical survival, for self-defence, or to prevent a greater harm, without violation of
the principle of ahirrisd. Satya, in Sarkar's thinking, is fransformed into benevolent tmthfulness rather
than strict adherence to trath per se. This recognises that it may be necessary to withhold the trath for
compassionate reasons. Asteya is not mere non-stealing both physically and mentally, but also
refraining from depriving others of their due both physically and mentally. Sarkar radically
reinterprets brahmacdrya by defining it not as total abstention from sexual activity but as remaining
inwardly attached to brahma. He gives a Marxist critique of the equation of brahmacdrya with
celibacy by commenting that such an idea is but a political and socially legitimising move to maintain
the superior position of celibate brahmins and religious professionals in society. For Sarkar,
brahmacdrya is more an inner state of intimacy with God than an outward abstention from sex. The
Sarkarian critique and definition of brahmacdrya also reflect his egalitarian concems in line with the
Tantric legacy he is supposed to represent. Aparigraha is, for Sarkar, not mere non-acceptance of

309
gifts but a life of voluntary simplicity such that one does not indulge in pleasures at the expense of the
rest of society. It also involves ensuring that the minimum needs of all members of society are met,
the definition of minimum needs being set in accordance with changes in time, place, and person. It
can be argued that in Sarkar's hands, yama undergoes a modem transformation that includes an
egalitarian concem and renders it more applicable to contemporary life.
In Yoga, niyama consists of another five principles aimed at harmonising the inner self of the
yogi, further channelling the psychophysical energy freed up through yama towards ultimate reality.
Sauca or cleanliness is purity of body and mind, with extemal cleanliness achieved by bathing and
proper diet and intemal cleanliness achieved by concenfration and meditation according to the YB.
Santosa or contentment is a sense of renunciation that sees pleasure and pain, success and failure with
equanimity. Tapah or austerity comprises such practices as prolonged immobilized standing or
sitting; bearing of hunger, thfrst, cold, and heat; formal silence; and fasting. Svddhydyd or study is
deep penetration into the meanings of sacred texts and for some commentators, also means meditative
recitation (japa) of the texts. Isvara-prariidhdna is devotion to the Lord, where the Lord is one of the

transcendent purusas regarded as special and distinct from the others owing to its omniscient and
omnipotent self-awareness. In other words, isvara is not subject to the illusion of finitude as are all
other purusas in the cosmos, and hence acquires divine status in relation to the rest.
Here again, Sarkar partially accepts traditional interpretations of niyama but adds to them new
dimensions of meaning suggestive of social egalitarianism and practical common sense. He regards
sauca as both extemal (physical, envfronmental) and intemal (mental) cleanliness, and suggests that
the best way to cultivate the latter is to develop feelings of selflessness and universalism. He does not
depart much from the classical interpretation of sauca except that in place of concentration and
meditation for mental purity, he advocates selfless service to all beings as the method of choice. For
Sarkar, santosa is 'a state of proper ease''"* where one is contented with one's life and financial
situation and the body and mind are not under undue stress. He advocates the practice of
autosuggestion as a way of cultivating santosa, by consciously and regularly reinforcing ideas of
letting go and greedlessness in one's mind. He wams, however, against the folly of being exploited
or cheated by greedy persons as a result of cultivating santosa and recommends vigilance of one's
rights and the strength to stand up for them as and when necessary. Unlike classical Yoga, Sarkar
does not advocate ascetic austerity for austerity's sake; he states that the only purpose of tapah is 'to
shoulder the sorrows and miseries of others to make them happy, to free them from grief, and to give
them comfort'. He sees tapah as a powerful means of expanding the mind to include the whole
universe, and says that any form of physical labour for the sake of serving others can be regarded as
tapah. He expresses his social concem here by emphasising that tapah should be practised only for
those who really need it and not for those who are merely out to exploit. Svddhydyd, according to

'"* GHC, p. 56.

'"' GHC, p. 59.
310
Sarkar, is to clearly understand the tme meaning and significance of any religious text or idea. Unlike
classical Yoga, he does not equate svddhydyd with japa and he wams against religious professionals
who interpret scriptures in distorted ways so as to support their vested interests. In this understanding
of svddhydyd, Sarkar's social critique and anti-exploitative consciousness are again clearly
demonstrated. Finally, Sarkar views isvara not as merely one special purusa out of the many (as is
the case in classical Yoga) but as identical to saguria brahma, the qualified supreme consciousness
that is the creative ground of all existence and the controller of the universe. To him, isvara-
prariidhdna is adopting saguria brahma as the shelter and refuge of one's life and moving towards him
as rapidly as one can through mental ideation or bhdva. More specifically, Sarkar identifies isvara-
prariidhdna with the ffrst meditative lesson of sahaja yoga. Obviously, the difference between
Sarkar's and Patanjali's interpretations of isvara-prariidhdna lies in their differing metaphysical,
cosmological, and soteriological speculations.
Let us now compare Sarkar's definition of the other limbs of the eight-limbed yoga with that
of classical Yoga. Asana or posture, according to Patanjali, is the immobilisation of the body, deemed
an efficacious method of preparing the physical body for deep inner work. The YS recommends that
the yogi's posture should be stable and comfortable, with limbs folded, and the mind allowed to
become inwardly quiet. The large number of postures commonly associated with Hatha Yoga does
not, strictiy speaking, belong to the contents of the YS but to a later historical work of yoga, the Hatha-
yoga-pradipikd, composed around the fourteenth century CE.
Prdridydma or breath control is essentially a technique of controlling and dfrecting the body's
life force or vital energy (prdria) through regulation of the breath. The breath is thought to be
intimately linked to prdria and, by extension, to the mind. Control of the prdria aids in the control of
the mind.
In pratydhdra or sense withdrawal, the next step in Patanjali's Yogic path, the mind's
attention is effectively withdrawn from the environment and the senses so as to become increasingly
absorbed in inner consciousness. All the preceding steps have progressively moved from social and
personal regulation, to bodily regulation, and now to sensory inhibition leading to mental composure.
The next step, dhdrarid or concenfration, is holding the mind on a specific object or locus,
which may be a part of the body (such as a cakra) or an extemal object that is intemalised (such as the
image of a diety). The underiying process is ekdgratd or one-pointedness - a state of focussed
attention that is held on a particular object for a period of time.
When dhdrarid becomes continuous so that the attention fixed on the object is smooth and
without a break, one has attained the next stage, dhydna or meditation. Whereas in dhdrarid, the
fixity of attention is intermittent and in succession (like drops of water), in dhydna it becomes an
unbroken stream like a flow of oil or honey. Of dhydna, Hariharananda (1983) comments that when '
... knowledge is continuous it appears as though a single idea is present in the mind'.'"*

'"* Hariharananda, Yoga Philosophy, p. 251.

311
 When the above five stages of PataiijaU's yoga are compared with Sarkar's corresponding
definitions, there appear only minor divergences; Sarkar appropriates most of what is commonly
accepted in the Yoga tradition. However, it can be noted that Sarkar's prescription of specifically
forty-two dsanas for physical health and mental composure, and his modem biological explanation of
the effects of dsanas represent departures from the classical view embedded in the YS. He also seems
to favour a physiological explanation of the effects of prdridydma, prosaically saying that the long
pause between inhalation and exhalation calms and stabilises the waves of the nervous system, which
is in tum conducive to mental silence and meditation. Also, for Sarkar, prdridydma is not merely
control of the breath and vital energy but involves a subtier process of mental ideation. In relation to
this, he sfrongly recommends the use of cosmic ideation - that is, imbuing the mind with an expansive
sense of cosmic consciousness - during the entfre process of prdridydma. Specific details of the
practice are given in Sarkar's fourth meditation lesson of sahaja yoga and in the difficult visesa yoga.
An innovation of Sarkar's in relation to the eight-limbed yoga is his practice of cakra
sodhana, which constitutes the fifth meditative lesson of sahaja yoga. He asserts that cakra sodhana
is a practice unique to Ananda Marga sddhand, one that is not found in the eight-limbed yoga. Cakra
sodhana is a dynamic practice of cakra purification, the mechanics of which place it somewhere
between dhdrarid and dhydna. While it certainly involves some measure of concentration, it is not
fixity on one point but a fluid movement of attention through different points. It thus possesses the
qualities of both concentrative dhdrarid and smooth-flowing dhydna.

States of Samddhi
The final step in Patafijali's yoga is samddhi or meditative absorption, characterised by total
identification of the meditator with the meditated object. In this state, ' ... meditation becomes so
deep that only the object stands by itself, obliterating as it were, all traces of reflective thought'.'"' A
series of increasingly deep states of samddhi culminating in complete liberation or kaivalya is
mentioned in Patafijali's yoga. These states are classified into samprajfidta samddhi (conscious
ecstasy), asamprajfidta samddhi (supraconscious ecstasy), and dharmamegha samddhi ('cloud of
dharma' ecstasy). Feuerstein equates samprajfidta samddhi with the Vedantic savikalpa samddhi and
asamprajfidta samddhi with nirvikalpa samddhi, although it is uncertain whether Patanjali would
agree with such an equation."" Six forms of samprajfidta samddhi are mentioned in YS: (1) savitarka
samdpatti ('ecstasy coinciding with cogitation'); (2) savicdra samdpatti ('ecstasy coinciding with
reflection'); (3) nirvitarka samdpatti ('ecstasy beyond cogitation'); and (4) nirvicdra samdpatti
('ecstasy beyond reflection'). In Vacaspati MiSra's commentary on YS, the Tattva-Vaisdradi (TV)
(ca. ninth century C.E.), four other states are mentioned: (1) sdnanda samdpatti ('ecstasy coinciding
with bliss'); (2) sdsmitd samdpatti ('ecstasy coinciding with sense of individuation'); (3) nirdnanda

'"' Hariharananda, Yoga Philosophy, p. 252.

"" George Feuerstein, The Essence of Yoga (London: Rider, 1976), p. 119.
312
samdpatti ('ecstasy beyond bliss'); and (4) nirasmitd samdpatti ('ecstasy beyond sense of
individuation').'" In contrast to samprajfidta samddhi, wherein some mental concept whether gross
or subtle is present as the meditative object, asamprajfidta samddhi is a totally arrested state of mind
wherein all mental fluctuations disappear, leaving only latent impressions of both the fluctuations and
the arrested state. It is devoid of all mental objects, a cessation of phenomenal experience attained
only through supreme detachment (para-vairdgya). Asamprajfidta samddhi can be equated with
temporary realisation of kaivalya, a state wherein purusa is freed from prakrtic influence and stands
'alone' in its power of pure seeing (citisakti). Dharmamegha samddhi is the highest state attainable
immediately prior to realisation of kaivalya. This samddhi is characterised by full saturation of the
mind by a permanent discriminative discemment (viveka khydti), which sees clearly the distinction
between purusa and buddhi (the first evolute). On attaining this state, all afflictions due to ignorance
and all sarriskdras or karmdsayas of past actions, virtuous or otherwise, are totally eUminated. From
dharmamegha samddhi arises the liberation of purusa from prakrti - the final freedom that is
kaivalya. It is unclear from the YS whether asamprajfidta samddhi and dharmamegha samddhi are
identical or whether one precedes the other.
The question of living liberation or flvanmukti is also not clarified in the YS, leaving the
possibility of such attainment an open question. However, Chappie argues that discriminative
discemment (viveka khydti) 'provides a way to prevent the predominance of ignorance and the other
four afflictions (klesas), and can be equated with a state of living liberation.'"' This argument finds
support in Whicher, who champions an epistemologically oriented interpretation of purusa-prakrti
disentanglement. He affirms:

As a fully liberated being the yogin is now able to engage in life spontaneously and
innocently yet animate freely a full range of feelings, emotions, and passions without
being overtaken by them and without causing harm to others.'"

Comparing classical Yoga's list of meditative stages with Sarkar's, we find certain
commonalities as well as some differences. Before proceeding with the critical comparison, a note on
methodological stance is warranted here. In the process of infra- and inter-textual comparison of the
phenomenological features of meditative states, my horizon as a meditatively-trained reader plays an
important role. It is worth mentioning again that my personal meditative experiences and reflections
have an impact on how I read the texts. They form an integral part of the horizon I bring to the texts,
which playfully engages the texts in the production of meaning and tmth. That such a fusion of
horizons between text and reader occurs in the following discussion is made explicit at this juncture.

Whicher, Integrity of the Yoga Darsana, pp. 253-254.

Christopher Chappie, 'Living Liberation in Sai^ikhya and Yoga', in Andrew O. Fort and Patricia Y. Mumme
(eds.). Living Liberation in Hindu Thought (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1996), p. 122.
' " Whicher, Integrity of the Yoga Darsana, p. 292.
313
 The first point of comparison is Sarkar's and Patanjali's separate descriptions of two
meditative attainments, namely samprajfidta samddhi (conscious ecstasy) and dharmamegha samddhi
('cloud of dharma' ecstasy). Sarkar does not delineate the various forms of samprajfidta samddhi as
Pataiijali does in his YS (or as Vacaspati Mi^ra does in his TV, for that matter), but instead gives a list
of six realisation stages he calls sdlokya, sdmipya, sdyujjya, sdrupya, sdrsthi, and kaivalya. For
Sarkar, these six stages of samddhi signify progressively deeper levels of communion (or union in the
sixth stage) with cosmic consciousness, and are based on focussed contemplation of the subtiest
divinity itself rather than on any gross or subtie representation of the divine. In other words, these
samddhi states rely not on the physical or mental image of divinity (or of tanmdtra, aharnkdra, buddhi,
or prakrti for that matter, as in Patanjali's yoga), but on a deeply-felt, intuitive presence of pristine
consciousness that is attended to by the mind in meditation. Ideation, for Sarkar, is not mere thinking
or cogitation but an experiential recollecting of sheer awareness so as to establish that awareness in the
stream of experience. Since sheer awareness or pristine consciousness can never be objectified, one
has to literally become awareness in the process of trying to ideate on it. Also, in Sarkar's meditative
pedagogy, the essential object of attention is the mantra, a vocalic and semantic tool that quickens and
aids the process of ideation. In the initial stages, the mantra's sound and meaning become
increasingly established within and begin to occupy the entfre field of awareness. Continued
awareness of this field of sound and meaning then graduaUy gives way to a deeply-felt intuitive sense
of vast, sheer awareness. Persisting even further leads to intensification of the awareness and
dropping away of the mantra altogether to reveal a dynamic pulsation accompanied by spacious clarity
and autoreflexivity. The foregoing description is a highly condensed phenomenological summary of
the ffrst lesson of AM meditation. In light of the preceding discussion, it would seem as if Sarkar's
six stages could not, in any way, correlate with Patanjali's four samdpattis of samprajfidta samddhi,
given that they (Patarijall's) utilise mental concentration on gross or subtle representations of cosmic
principles (tattvas).
However, it may still be possible to draw rough conespondences between these two sets of
meditative attainments provided we apply a degree of interpretive licence to the four samdpattis of
Patanjali. Instead of interpreting vitarka and vicara as gross and subtle images of tattvas in the literal
sense, we can take them to mean relatively coarser and finer apprehension of any meditative object, be
it a tattva or a subtie conception of parama purusa. In the case of Sarkar's Tantric meditation, where
the object used is the intuitive feeling of infinite consciousness via a mantra, savitarka samdpatti
could mean the initial state of reliance on a subtle conception of that consciousness (where subject-
object duality is present) while savicdra samdpatti could indicate the gradual fading away of the
concept to give the actual experience of consciousness itself (in which the subject-object duahty
becomes attenuated and the mantra fades away). As the meditation deepens, cogitation, however
refined, dissolves altogether, giving a direct, whole-body experience of pure consciousness in two
degrees of profundity (corresponding to nirvitarka and nirvicdra samdpatti). Hence, it may be that

314
(1) savitarka samdpatti conesponds to Sarkar's sdlokya samddhi, wherein one feels the simultaneous
existence of one's self and the cosmic consciousness at the initial stages of ideation; (2) savicdra
samdpatti corresponds to sdmipya samddhi, wherein one feels exfremely close to cosmic
consciousness, indicating an increasing union of subject and object; (3) nirvitarka samdpatti
corresponds to sdyujjya samddhi, wherein one feels the physical touch of cosmic consciousness
(which ideation continues at a refined level), indicating an even greater degree of unity and deeper
intensity of experience; and (4) nirvicdra samdpatti corresponds to sdrupya samddhi, wherein one
feels the pervading presence of pure consciousness in one's whole being and everywhere. In nirvicdra
samdpatti or sdrdpyd samddhi, even the mantra and refined ideation on consciousness have
disappeared, revealing an integral experience of pulsative clarity and sheer aware presence. In
addition, Sarkar's six stages may well correspond in some way to Vacaspati Misra's four samdpattis,
though it remains extremely difficult and highly speculative to correlate them precisely and this will
not be attempted here.
The second point of comparison between Sarkar and Pataiijali is with regard to another
meditative attainment, asamprajfidta samddhi (supraconscious ecstasy. An examination of Patanjali's
description of asamprajfidta samddhi shows that it is an objectiess state of consciousness wherein no
mental fiuctuations (vrtti) exist and all cogitation has ceased. It is also identified with a temporary
attainment of kaivalya, free from both the meditating subject and the object of meditation. This
seems very similar to Sarkar's conception of nirvikalpa samddhi, the objectiess state of full mergence
into nirguria brahman. Though the YS does not say the same of asamprajfidta samddhi, Sarkar makes
it clear that nirvikalpa samddhi, though objectless, is nonetheless a state of perfect bliss.
Third, Sarkar uses the Vedantic appellations, savikalpa samddhi and nirvikalpa samddhi
throughout his discourses and weaves them into his schema of six meditative stages. The YS makes no
mention of savikalpa and nirvikalpa samddhi, while Sarkar's terms for the first five stages (sdlokya,
sdmipya, sdyujjya, sdrupya and sdrsthi) can be found in medieval Vaisnavism."" In Chapter 6, we
saw how Sarkar defines samprajfidta samddhi as synonymous with savikalpa samddhi, wherein the
mind's sarrikalpdtmaka action is only nominally active. In the same chapter, I also argued why and
how dharmamegha samddhi is a less advanced stage than savikalpa samddhi. This observation
confrasts with classical Yoga's placement of dharmamegha samddhi above samprajfidta samddhi in
its scheme of soteriological praxis. From this discrepancy, it appears that Patafijali's dharmamegha
samddhi cannot be equated with Sarkar's, based as they are on two different sets of hierarchical

'" Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 375: 'Liberation is thought to be of different degrees, depending on the
devotee's level of proximity to, or identification with, the Lord. At the lowest stage, the devotee dwells in the
divine location ... in the Lord's company. This is called sdlokya mukti. When the devotee's power and glory
equals that of the Lord, it is known as sdristi mukti When he or she is abiding in close proximity to the Lord, it
is called sdmipya mukti. The penultimate level of liberation is sdrupya mukti, in which the devotee attains
perfect conformity with the Lord. Finally, there is ekatva mukti, or the "liberation of singleness" ..." Sarkar
uses the same terms (except for ekatva mukti and qualifying them as samddhi rather than mukti) but defines and
orders them differently; he adds another state, sdyujya, to the list and names the highest attainment kaivalya, a
term probably borrowed from Samkhya-Yoga.
315
stmcturing of soteriological experience, in spite of outward similarity in terminology. One can thus
surmise that Sarkar's sdrsthi or savikalpa samddhi, rather than his dharmamegha samddhi, is more
likely to be synonymous with Patanjali's dharmamegha samddhi This is consistent with YS's view
that dharmamegha samddhi is penultimate to the attainment of kaivalya (the temporary attainment of
which is asamprajfidta samddhi), just as Sarkar's savikalpa samddhi (= sdrsthi) is penultimate to the
attainment of moksa or kaivalya, the sixth stage of realisation (the temporary attainment of which is
nirvikalpa samddhi). For clarity and ease of comprehension, the foregoing comparison of meditative
attainments in Patanjali's Yoga and Sarkar's Tantra is set out in the following table:

Patanjali's samdpatti/samadhi Sarkar's samddhi

savitarka sdlokya
savicdra sdmipya
samprajfidta nirvitarka sdyujjya
nirvicdra sdrupya

dharmamegha sdrsthi (savikalpa)

asamprajfidta kaivalya (nirvikalpa)

The foregoing discussion of meditative states in classical Yoga and Sarkarian Tantra
concludes our foray into this area. It points to a potentially fruitful approach to Indological research,
one which combines phenomenology of meditative experience with critical exegesis of textual
accounts of meditation, in order to shed light on otherwise obscure and technical teachings. We now
go on to examine Sarkar's relationship to what is perhaps Hinduism's most articulate and prominent
school of thought, Vedanta.

7.3.3 Vedanta and Sarkarian Ontology

Vedanta ('Veda's End'), also known as Uttara-Mimdrrisd ('Later Inquiry'), is probably the best known
and most widely expounded tradition of Hindu thought outside India. As its name suggests, Vedanta
centres its theoretical and practical speculations on the later two portions of Vedic revelation: the
Aranyakas (forest treatises composed by hermits) and the Upanisads (mystical scriptures composed by
contemplative sages). These two collections of texts provide a ' ... metaphoric reinterpretation of the
ancient Vedic heritage' and ' ... preached the intemalisation of the archaic rituals in the form of
meditation'. Textual sources of the Vedanta comprise the voluminous Upanisads, the widely-
accepted Bhagavadgitd (possibly c. 600-500 B.C.E.), and the Brahma Sutra of Badarayana (c. 200
CE.)."*

" ' Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 99.

"Ubid.
316
 Vedanta is di-vided into several branches, each of which attempts to define the non-dual,
singularly whole nature of absolute reality in one form or another. The greatest exponents of Vedanta
are Safikara (c. 788 -820 C.E.), associated with the Advaita (non-dualistic or monistic) strand of
Vedanta; Ramanuja (c. I0I7 - 1127 C.E.), associated with Vi^istSdvaita (quahfied non-duahstic)
Vedanta;'" and Madhva (c. 1238 - 1317 C.E.), associated witii Dvaita (duahst) Vedanta.'"

Safikara's Advaita Vedanta

Of the three, Sankara is peifraps the best-known representative of Vedanta, whose non-duahstic
ontology bears some resemblance to, and perhaps exerts some influence on, Sarkar's view on the
nature of brahma. Sankara's rejection of aU subject-object knowledge as false and distorted also
resembles Sarkar's assertion that all conventional dualistic knowledge is merely the shadowy 'umbra'
and 'penumbra' of tme knowledge. It is to a comparison of Sankara's and Sarkar's epistemological
and ontological -views that I now tum.
Among Sankara's best known works are his commentary on Gaudapada's KarikS to the
Mandukya Upanisad and his commentary on the Brahma Sdtra of Badarayana known as Safikara-
bhdfya."^ Sankara asserts that all human knowledge based on subject-object duality is ' ... distorted
by adhyasa, superinqjosition, which falsifies knowledge in such a way that the subject is imable to
find objective tmth.'"" He further claims that while the object of knowledge may be tme, doubtful, or
false, the subjective 'knower' is nevertheless always tme, independently existent, and distinct from all
objects. He caUs this inherently existing and a priori subject the atman, which is ultimately
saccidananda - existence, consciousness, and bliss. Human beings are said to be normally unaware of
the distinction between atman, the absolute undifferentiated reality, and non-atman, the relative reality
of myriad things and persons. This unawareness, termed avidya or ignorance, is there even prior to
one's birth and is what keeps beings trapped in the cycle of birth and death, sarhsara. Avidya, also
termed rriaya, creates the illusion that the pluralistic universe comprising manifold objects and
individuals actually exists, when the only reality that ever was, is, and ever will be, is the singular
dtman. Thus, in Sankara's ontology, human beings (jiva) are said to be 'fictional self-identities
performing unreal activities out of attachment to objects, emotional states and ideas about a world that
does not reaUy exist.'"' In other words, the world as perceived by the ordinary person is mithya,
illusory."' According to Sankara, it is only through Self-knowledge or atma-jndha, synonymous with

"^ Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 100 and pp. 384-385.

"* Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, pp. 385-386.
' " Klostermaier, Survey, pp. 413-416.
"" Klostermaier, Survey, p. 415.
'^' Julian Woods, 'Karma in the Bhagavadgitd According to Sankara and Ramanuja', in Katherine K. Young
(ed.), Hermeneutical Path to the Sacred Worlds ofIndia: Essays in Honour ofRobert W. Stevenson (Atlanta,
Georgia: Scholars Press, 1994), p. 41. Woods argues that Saiikara's 'illusion' doctrine forces him to discount a
sadhana based on karma or egoless action, in contrast to his later philosophicalrival,Ramanuja.
"' See e.g. Kalidas Bhattacharyya, 'Vedanta as Philosophy of Spiritual Life', in K. Sivaraman (ed.), Hindu
Spirituality: Vedas through Vedanta (New York: Crossroad PubHshing, 1989), pp. 231-258. Bhattacharyya says
that Advaita Vedantins, though provisionally recognising the world, ' ... seek ultimately to get awavfromit,
317
elimination of the obscuring avidyd, that the undifferentiated singular reality of atman manifests,
obliterating the phenomenal world and aU signs of plurality.'"
Epistemologically, Sarkar foUows Sankara in saying that only non-dual dtma-jnana is tme
knowledge in the sense that it is the only form of knowledge free from all perceptual mediation and
distortion. For Sarkar, dtma-jnana is identical to spiritual knowledge (aparoksa bodha), realised
through a mergence of the unit mind into nirguna brahma, which is also the attributeless, infinite
dtman prior to aU qualification and manifestation. Like Sankara, Sarkar also speaks of dtman as the
ultimate subject, the supreme subjectivity or witnessing entity that substantiates the existence of all
objects. He even appUes the Vedantic appellation of saccidananda to the dtman, portraying it as the
etemal, cognisant, and bUssful entity underlying aU phenomenal ejqjressions. One noteworthy feature
of Sarkar's description of atman is the use, on several occasions, of process-like metaphors such as
pravaha, dhdrd, or rasa (aU translated as 'flow') to express the essential nature of atman. For
example, he defines paramdtman (or brahma) as akhanda cidaikarasa - an unbroken flow of
cognisance"" - and as ekatn jndnam anantarn - a continuous, infinite flow (pravaha) of knowledge or
intellect.'" Ontologically, however, Sarkar does not appear to have subscribed to the notion of dtman
as a static, inert pure consciousness and an uninvolved witaess (sdksi) of all personalities (jiva) and
objects - a notion often ascribed to Advaita Vedanta metaphysic."*
Another key difference between Sarkar's epistemology and Sarikara's hes in the means to
ultimate dtman realisation. While Sankara extols jfiana as the supreme means to such realisation,
Sarkar privileges the liberative praxis of bhakti. For Sankara, inquiry into brahman (wiiich is
ultimately identical to dtman), rooted in the path of knowledge is the only means to perfect brahman
cognition. For Sarkar, the process of spiritual cultivation begins with intellectual inquiry but continues
with intuitional knowledge bom of concentration, and finally culminates in total sunender of the ego-
sense to the infinite brahma (which is devotion). To him, knowledge leads up to but does not, by
itself, bring about ftiU brahma realisation. This can only come by means of devotional self-surrender
at the penuhimate phase of spiritual practice. When full devotional surrender (kevala bhakti) is
established, the limited self dissolves into nirgutia brahma, and perfect knowledge - wherein the
knower, the knowing, and the object of knowledge become one - is said to be attained. A similarity,
however, can be seen in Sarikara's and Sarkar's separate notions of renunciation, though Sarkar
appears to have stressed the importance of renunciation in karma yoga far more than Safikara did. For
Sankara and Sarkar, a key aspect of renunciation is abandoning the sense of authorship in activities.

leaving it so much to the Umbo of nothingness that as once experienced it appears in retrospect to have been a
wholly inexplicable magic show' (p. 246).
' " Woods, 'Karma', p. 42.
""y4M/Parts5-8,p. 502.
' " YP, p. 175 and AMP Part 3, p. 182.
See P. T Raju, The Philosophical Traditions of India (London: George Allen & Unwin, 1971), pp. 181-182;
and Woods, 'Karma in the Bhagavadgitd...', p. 62.
318
which comes about through realisation of dtman as the sole, unbounded reality.'" But adding to
Sarikara's emphasis on arman-realisation as the crax of renunciation, Sarkar also sfresses the
importance of (a) seeing all entities acted upon as manifestations of brahma, and (b) surrendering the
fmits of all action to brahma. This difference can be accounted for by Sarkar's leanings towards a
realist interpretation of consciousness, a consciousness that expresses itself in all forms and objects
through metamorphosis of its essential subtie cognisance. Thus, for Sarkar, the world of objects,
persons, actions and their results is not illusory (as in Sarikara's case), but is rather a real (or better,
conventionally real) existent, since its ultimate constituent is pure consciousness. The contemplative
attempt to view all entities as expressions of brahma and to surrender the result of actions to brahma
can be read as valid steps to ultimate realisation of brahma as the All.
A thfrd difference between Sarkar's epistemology and Sarikara's is in the way they each
conceive of the nature of avidyd or mdyd. For Sankara, mdyd is the illusion that many separate beings
and objects exist, when in reality only brahman is real. He says that mdyd itself is unreal and
disappears for one who is able to see the only reality there is - brahman - through jfidna. Sarkar
criticises such a view of mdyd by arguing that it is self-confradictory and nonsensical to talk about
unreal objects appearing as real by virtue of an equally unreal mdyd.'^ For Sarkar, mdyd is as real as
brahma, being essentially the operative aspect (prakrti), coeval and co-existing with the cognitive
aspect (purusa), of the infinite brahma. He describes mdyd as having both vidyd and avidyd qualities,
with vidydmdyd as the force that atfracts unit beings towards the nucleus and source of thefr existence
(purusottama) and avidydmdyd as the force that repels or obscures unit beings from the same. Thus,
unlike Sarikara, who views mdyd as ultimately unreal and essentially concealing or distorting in its
effect, Sarkar views mdyd as a real force that exerts itself on the mind and has either a binding or a
liberating effect.
Sarikara's ontology, as previously mentioned, is essentially non-dualistic and philosophically
termed visuddhddvaitavdda, the doctrine of pure non-dualism. Sarikara shares the Upanisadic view of
dtman-brahman identity and asserts that the inherent self of a person is none other than the universal
self of all existence. In his view, the ultimate reality of brahman is 'etemal (nitya), infinite (anantam),
unchanging (nirvikdra), non-characterisable (acintya), and without parts, properties, or distinctions
within it (nirvisesa).''^^ Interpreting the Upanisadic doctrines of ultimate brahman and isvara, the
Lord and Creator of the universe, Sarikara makes a distinction between nirguria brahman (brahman
without attributes) and saguria brahman (brahman with attributes); he equates nirguria brahman with
the Upanisadic supreme brahman (parabrahman) and saguria brahman with isvara

' " For Sarikara's view on renunciation, see Roger Marcaurelle, 'The Basic Types of Renunciation in Hinduism:
With Special Reference to Sarikara's Gita-Bha§ya', in Katherine K. Young (ed.), Hermeneutical Paths to the
Sacred Worlds of India: Essays in Honour of Robert W. Stevenson (Atianta, Georgia: Scholars Press, 1994), pp.
104-122. For discussion on Sarkar's approach to renunciation and karma yoga, see Chapter 6, subsection 6.1.2.
"^ NKS, pp. 77-95 and pp. 106-115.
' " See VivekacCiddmani 400-403, partially quoted in I. Kesarcodi-Watson, 'Sarikara, Ramanuja and Bhakti', in
G. M. Bailey and I. Kesarcodi-Watson (eds.), Bhakti Studies (New Delhi: Sterling Publications, 1992), p. 105.
319
(aparabrahman).'^° In his view, saguria brahman or isvara is only ' ... a temporal manifestation of
brahman, creator for as long as creation lasts'"' and is ultimately ontologically subservient to nirguria
brahman, the pure and unchanging reality. Nevertheless, isvara is said to be 'eternally inseparable
from his intelligence (prajnd), which is characterised by omniscience', and the innately free
(svdtantrya) creator of the universe.'" To account for the creative 'activity' of saguria brahman,
Sarikara appeals to the metaphor of tild - the world is created by the spontaneous, effortless, playful,
motiveless sport of isvara, a non-contingent action that in no way modifies or particularises isvara in
the process.'" It is worth mentioning that Sarikara and his philosophical successors (post-Sarikara
Advaitins) differ in their view of the causative role of brahman. For Sarikara, brahman is the material
cause of the universe, while for later Advaitins, brahman is described as cause "only in the sense of
vivarta (manifestation)'."" In this regard, Sarkar appears ontologically closer to Sarikara than to post-
Sarikara Advaitins. It is also possible that personhood in the sense of intellectual agency can be
ascribed to Sarikara's nirguria brahman, placing Sarkar far closer to Sarikara in their conceptions of
ultimate reality.'" In this case, Sarikara's nirguria brahman would not be merely an inert,
transcendent witness but also a personal agent that stands as the final logical cause of the universe.
However, Sarkar, in line with Tantric thinking, expands on Sarikara's definition to portray
brahma/brahman as a plenitude of dynamism and creative potency, actively transforming itself into
the universe and acting in it.
The Advaita tradition claims that the notion of Uld is merely a provisional teaching, one
viewed from the empirical perspective (vydvahdrika) of cosmic ignorance (mdyd). From the absolute
point of view (pdramdrthika), according to Advaitins, there is only undifferentiated oneness; tild and
all multiplicity are fully 'subrated' in brahman.'^^ In contrast, Sarkar would appear to reject the
Advaitins' description of Uld as a delusion rooted in mdyd, opting instead for a realist definition of
divine playfulness. In other words, for Sarkar, the spontaneous creative activity of parama purusa is

"" See Bradley Malkovsky, 'The Personhood of Samkara's Para Brahman', The Journal of Religion, 77.4
(1997): 541-562. Malkovsky argues, contrary to common scholarly perception of nirguria brahman as
impersonal and with some evidence from primary texts, that 'to ascribe personhood to ^arAiara's parabrahman
not only is legitimate exegetically but also does not thwart his basic intent, which is to teach the necessity of
knowing the supreme brahman for the sake of liberation ... [and that] despite Sarikara's formal distinction
between nirguna and saguria brahman, in practice he does not shy away from ascribing features to the supposed
attributeless nirguria brahman. These same characteristics he also frequently assigns to isvara. Both are
conscious, sinless, omnipresent, eternally complete, pure, and free' (pp. 552-553). In other words, Malkovsky
says that nirguna brahman, while definitely not anthropomorphic, is nonetheless personal insofar as it exists as a
subjective intellectual agency, one whose relationship with the created world 'cannot be ontological but logical
only' (p. 558).
"' Klostermaier, Survey, p. 416.
" ' Leslie C. Orr, 'The Concept of Time in Sarikara's BrahmasHtra-bhdfya', in Katherine K. Young (ed.),
Hermeneutical Paths to the Sacred Worlds of India. Essays in Honour of Robert W. Stevenson (Atianta,
Georgia: Scholars Press, 1994), p. 75.
' " Orr, p. 76.
"" Orr, p. 83.
' " See Malkovsky, 'Personhood', pp. 551-562.
"* Frederic F. Post, 'Playful Illusion: The Making of Worlds in Advaita Vedanta', Philosophy East and West
48.3 (1998): 397.
320
real, not Ulusory, and the plural universe, made up ultimately of condensed consciousness, is also real,
albeit relatively. In this cormection, it is worthwhile noting that it is equivocal as to whether dnanda
(bliss) obtains as a feature of nirguria brahman, equal in value and status to features of sat (existence)
and cit (consciousness). Some scholars argue that dnanda is indeed accepted by Sarikara as a feature
of nirguria brahman, while others argue that 'no features of brahman, in the sense of visesas or
characteristics, are permissible under Sarikara's system'.'" In contrast to Sarikara's apparent
ambiguity in relation to the issue of dnanda, Sarkar unequivocally asserts that brahma is dnanda, that
ultimate reality is trans-empirical bliss beyond the opposites of pleasure/happiness and pain/sorrow.
Here again, Sarkar seems to be in keeping with a Tantric conception of reality while seemingly using
Advaita terminology.

Leaving aside the concept of tild, Sarikara's concepts of saguria brahman and nirguria
brahman give rise to several difficulties, namely: (1) the difficulty in accounting for the manifestation
of saguria brahman if brahman is simultaneously conceived as being unchanging (nirvikdra), partless,
without distinctions (nirvisesa), and non-characterisable (acintya); (2) the nature and degree of reality
of saguria brahman, the creator, if creation is ultimately unreal; and (3) the difficulty in reconciling a
purely non-dualistic ontology with the idea of brahman that is differentiated into two distinct forms.
Sarkar appears to follow Sarikara's lead by making a distinction between the qualified aspect
of saguria brahma and the unqualified aspect of nirguria brahma.'^^ However, Sarkar superimposes a
thfrd aspect, tdraka brahma, onto the above twofold scheme, articulating the need for a linking,
interfacing entity between the transcendent reality of nirguria brahma and the immanent ground of
saguria brahma. In relation to the first dilemma faced by Sarikara, Sarkar posits that saguria brahma
is a transformation (pariridma) of purusa, pure consciousness, by the contemporaneous prakrti, the
operative principle, within the limitiess 'body' of nirguria brahma. He resolves the problem of change
in an unchanging entity by arguing that apparent transmutation of form in no way affects the essential
nature of consciousness. He also argues that transmuting a localised portion of infinite purusa takes
nothing away from it, nor does it break purusa into parts, just as subtracting a limited (or any) quantity
from infinity leaves infinity undiminished in any way. In relation to the second dilemma, Sarkar
asserts that both saguria brahma and the universe are equally but only conventionally and empirically
real - saguria brahma is a metamorphosis of ultimate consciousness into mind, while the universe is a
metamorphosis of cosmic mind into matter and life-forms. By subscribing to a form of metaphysical
and epistemological realism, one based on the primacy of consciousness as substance, Sarkar avoids
the problem of having to posit a nebulous mdyd to account for the existence of an ontologically
indeterminate creator and creation. Finally, with regard to the thfrd dilemma, Sarkar explains that
while saguria brahma, tdraka brahma, and nirguria brahma are three distinct forms and functions of

' " Michael W. Myers, 'Sarikaracarya and Ananda', Philosophy East and West, 48.4 9 (1998): 553. Myers
presents the opposing views of Govind Chandra Pande, who argued for inclusion of dnanda as a feature of
brahman, and B. N. K. Sharma, who argued otherwise.
"* Sarkar cites the term brahman without the final n, as in brahma.
321
the singular brahma, they are nevertheless identical in substance and essence - the nature of pure
consciousness remains imstained and unchanged through aU three forms of brahma; only the degree of
expression of consciousness differs. For example, saguna brahma con^rises the omniscient cosmic
mind with its three layers of mahat, aham, and citta, as weU as the multivariate material and animate
entities in the universe. The totality of aU these is none other than quintessential consciousness
existing in varying degrees of latency or expression. Thus, mahat is materiaUy much 'subtler' than a
stone, not because the consciousness that makes up the stone has been substantially altered in some
way from that of mahat, but because consciousness, having a greater scope of auto-reflection as
mahat, is manifested to a for greater degree in mahat than in the stone. Theftmdamentalnature of
consciousness as saccidananda remains unaltered.
From the above discussion, it appears that Sarkar might have been aware of philosophical
problems in Sarikara's thought, and perhaps attempted to resolve some of them through philosophical
synthesis and irmovation exemplified in his AM ideology. In any case, Sarkar's philosophical effort
demonstrates an appropriation of Advaita Vedanta terminology and to a considerable extent, its
ontology and epistemology. It justifies the assertion that an overlay of Vedanta concepts and
reasoning characterises Sarkar's AM ideology.

Ramanuja's Visistadvaita Vedanta

Ramanuja, the proponent of a qualified non-dualist form of Vedanta, differs most considerably from
Sarikara in terms of ontology."' Among Ramanuja's best known works are StfBhdsya, a commentary
on the Brahma Sdtra, and Veddrtha Sarngraha, a compendium of Vaisna"va Vedanta.'"" Sources of
Ramanuja's philosophy include the textual legacy of the Upanisad, the GTtd, and the Brahma Sdtra,
supplemented by the Pancaratra Agamas and the Divya Prabandham, a rich collection of Tamil
- 141 ''

devotional poetry composed by the Alvars ('souls submerged in the love of God'). Unlike Sarikara,
who asserts that brahman is the sole and absolute reality, Ramanuja advocates a less extreme version
of non-dualism, wherein the pluralistic universe, consisting of aU objects, living beings, and conscious
subjects, is not unreal but exists as the 'body' of brahman, the ultimate reality that is personal, not
impersonal. He argues that reality is tiered into three levels: (1) 'the world of material things', (2) 'the
muhiphcity of jTvdtmas, indi-vidual beings', and (3) 'brahman, yhiho is identical with T/vora ...[and]
none other than Visnu'.'"' Thus, Ramanuja's ontology of qualified non-duahsm suggests that while
the many are essentially one, their oneness in substance does not obliterate the real distinctions
amongst them.

"^ For a clear articulation and philosophical exegesis of Ramanuja's metaphysical and epistemological realism,
see C. J. Bartley, The Theology ofRamanuja: ReaUsm and Religion (London: RoutiedgeCurzon, 2002).
'"° Klostermaier, Survey, p. 251.
'"' S. S. Raghavachar, 'The Spiritual Vision of Ramanuja', in K. Sivaraman (ed.), Hindu Spirituality: Vedas
Through Vedanta (New York: Crossroad Publishing, 1989), pp. 263-264.
'"' Klostermaier, Survey, p. 419.
322
 Another point of disagreement between Ramanuja and Sarikara is in relation to the concept of
brahman. Ramanuja conceives of brahman as entfrely saguria, rejecting the Advaita distinction
between saguria and nirguria brahman. He argues for the personal concept of isvara, who is none
other than saguria brahman, and the creator and lord of nature (prakrti) and living beings (flvas).
Ramanuja's isvara is said to have a perfect, radiant body that is 'immutable', 'full of beauty and youth
and strength', 'omnipresent', and existing as antarydmin, 'the inner mler of all.''"' Ramanuja defines
and describes brahman as follows:

The word brahman means purusottama, who is by his very essence free from
imperfections and possesses an unlimited number of auspicious qualities of
unsurpassable excellence. The term brahman applies to all things possessing
greatness, but primarily it denotes that which possesses greatness essentially and in
unlimited fullness; ... Hence the word brahman primarily denotes him alone and in a
secondary sense only those things that possess a small amount of the Lord's qualities
... The term is analogous with the term bhagavat. It is the Lord alone who is sought
for the sake of immortality by all those who are afflicted by the threefold misery.'""

Thus, for Ramanuja, brahman is the personal supreme being, purusottama, who is infinitely great and
the auspicious Lord of salvation. Ramanuja's personal conception of brahman lends itself to a
soteriology that is devotional rather than cognitive, extolling the primacy of divine grace and the need
for self-surrender on the part of the devotee in the quest for salvation.'"'
Ontologically, Sarkar's non-dualistic vision of advaitadvaitddvaitavdda appears to echo
Ramanuja's visistddvaitavdda in that both view the world and its multiplicity not as illusory
distinctions due to the effects of some mysterious mdyd, but as real entities existing within the infinite
'body' of brahma/brahman. Sarkar, however, makes it plain that all created entities are ultimately real
transformations of the subtle material of pure consciousness in varying degrees of development, and
that they will all, in thefr own time, retum to pure consciousness at the pinnacle of their evolution. At
the culmination of each unit being's evolution, the delimited and contracted consciousness is released
from the binding forces of prakrti and plunges into the oneness and evenness (samatd) of parama
purusa. This ontological and soteriological orientation is different from that of Ramanuja. In the case
of Ramanuja, the basic distinction between the unit being and isvara (who is identified with Visnu)

'*'lbid.
'** Klostermaier, Survey, p. 420.
'"' Raghavachar describes Ramanuja's spiritual pathway as comprising, in ascending order, karma yoga, jfidna
yoga, and bhakti yoga. In this schema, karma yoga is 'the progression to God through action' whereby the
devotee regards the Lord as the 'paramount agent' and oneself as a tool of the divine (p. 265). Jfidrux yoga is the
link between karma and bhakti and consists of contemplation of 'the human self as a centie of knowing by the
exercise of that very knowing itself and by developing that potency to its fullness of actualisation through the
knowing of God' (p. 266). Bhakti yoga is thefinalor supreme way to God-attainment, which is 'love of God
founded on knowledge ...', and is 'self-rectifying ... self nourishing and [which] grows through practice' (p.
268). Pardbhakti is the highest devotion prior to direct vision of God (pardjfidna), a vision that results in
subsequent greater love for God termed paramd-bhakti. According to Raghavachar, bhakti yoga culminates in
'prapatti (self-surrender), or sarandgati (seeking refuge) or bhara-samarpana (burden-transfer)' (p. 270), which
is afinal,unrepeatable, and absolute giving up of one's responsibility to God.
323
does not fully disappear at the point of liberation; the unit merely becomes liberated from its
limitations and assumes the 'same form' (sarupya) as the Lord. Such a state is characterised as 'a kind
of fellowship with and in the divine Person - a condition of continuous love-devotion ... ' and is
attained only after death. In this sense, Sarkar's non-dualism appears to go further than that of
Ramanuja to argue for a kind of non-dual ontological finality. Put another way, Ramanuja's and
Sarkar's concepts of moksa are not the same, with Ramanuja positing a quasi-dualistic divine
communion of devotee and the divine, and Sarkar propounding a non-dual obliteration of all barriers
between yivfl and brahma.
A key difference between Sarkar's and Ramanuja's ontological views is with regard to the
nature of brahma/brahman. While Ramanuja sees brahman solely as a personal Lord full of
auspicious qualities and hence saguria, Sarkar maintains a tri-aspect view of brahma as simultaneously
nirguria (without qualities), saguria (with qualities), and tdraka (liberative and personified). While
Sarkar agrees with Ramanuja that brahma is an entity of infinite greatness, he describes brahma as
ultimately an unsullied, pulsative ocean of cognisance that is constantly engaged in a process of
blissful expression. Sarkar's Tantric conception of brahma allows for the notion of a creative and
salvific personification of consciousness in the form of tdraka brahma, who is simultaneously the
supreme teacher of spiritual practices and the focus of devotional surrender. In this way, Sarkar
appears to be attempting, in his AM ontology, to reconcile the Advaita Vedantic notion of sagurm-
nirguria brahma with the Vi§istadvaita Vedantic notion of a personal isvara.
From a soteriological point of view, Sarkar's moksa is akin to Ramanuja's liberation in one
sense: they are both attained post-mortem. However, as discussed in Chapter 5, it is likely Sarkar also
speaks of the supreme attainment of flvan-mukti, an embodied liberation that is not admitted in
Ramanuja's philosophy. In the case of soteriological praxis, both Sarkar and Ramanuja uphold the
view that devotion and self-surrender constitute the ultimate means for salvation. This mode of
salvation is made possible in Sarkar's AM by the concept of personified consciousness, tdraka
brahma, which enables the AM practitioner to visualise and develop devotional sentiment toward a
personal form of parama purusa. Unlike Ramanuja's approach and final goal, Sarkar's devotional
praxis is aimed at catapulting the AM practitioner into the unconditioned expanse of nirguria brahma
through the devotional 'pole-vault' of tdraka brahma. As such, devotional sentiment cultivated
towards the personified brahma can be seen as a pedagogical device that harnesses the immense
power of devotional love in the service of ultimate liberation.

Madhva's Dvaita Vedanta

On the surface, Sarkar's non-dualistic ontology appears incommensurate with Madhva's dualistic
version of Vedanta. However, several aspects of Madhva's thought make it worthwhile comparing
with Sarkar's AM, in as much as Sarkar's devotionalism, based on the personal concept of tdraka

'"* Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 385.

324
brahma, gives room for ejqjression of quasi-duahstic ideas and practices. Madhva's best known
works include the Brahma Sutra Bhdsya (a commentary on the Brahma Sdtra), the Anuvyakhyana (a
short summary exposition of the Brahma Sdtra)'*^ and the Gita Bhasya and Gitd Tatparya (two
commentaries on the Bhagavad Gitd)}** Madhva is regarded to have 'evolved a synthesis between the
Vedic and the Vaisnava traditions''"' and to have transformed the formless and attributeless brahman
of Advaita into 'God with infinite qualities and innumerable manifestation forms.'
Madhva's ontological position is that of radical dualism, seeing a fimdamental and etemal
separation between indi-viduals and God. He bases his entfre system 'upon the presupposition of the
pafica bheda, the five differences between Jfvara and jivdtman, between prakrti and Isvara, between
the indi-vidual jivas and the various inanimate objects.'"' Like Ramanuja, Madhva conceives of
brahman as Isvara, v^o is Visnu, the personal yet absolute creator of the entfre universe who is
omnipotent and omniscient. Visnu is said to be of the nature of sat (being), cit (consciousness),
dnanda (bliss), cetarid (spiritual), and anantagunaparipurna possessing an infinite number of
attributes)."' He has a spiritual, non-material (aprdkrta) body, which manifests at wiU in the world as
the various avataras. Visnu is also known as Hari, who creates the universe through an act of
spontaneous playful wiU - his tild, and on v^^ose wiU depend all events and activities of the cosmos.
Like Ramanuja, Madhva conceives of Hari living in the created order as antaryamin, the irmer ruler,
and additionally as sdksi, the inner witness, residing in each and every living being. In his -view, Hari
controls and wields nature (prakrti) as an instmment in his hands."'
On the microcosmic scale, each living being possesses an dtman, a soul that is of the nature of
saccidananda and a mirror image of Hari/Visnu. The relationship between a living soul and the divine
Lord is that of bimba-pratibimba, a metaphor of reflection in w^ich God is the independent
'archetype' and souls are dependent 'prototypes'"" The individual dtman is powerless in itself and
depends entirely on God for aU its activities. The universe functions entirely to God's will and
individual souls possess innate inclinations of which there are three: sdttvika (noble inclination),
rdjasa (mixed inclination), and tamasa (ignoble inclination). These innate natures of the souls are
unchangeable and rdjasika and tamasika souls are not likely to attain any spiritual progress, if left to
themselves. However, aU souls possess 'delegated freedom of will' (from God) and thus have limited
freedom to pursue either a noble or an immoral direction in life, with sdttvika souls having a greater
chance of progress.'"

'"' Klostermaier, Survey, p. 423.

'"* Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 580.
'"' K. T. Pandurangi, 'Vedanta as God-Reahsation (Madhva)', in K. Sivaraman (ed), Hindu Spirituality: Vedas
Through Vedanta (New York: Crossroad Publishing, 1989), p. 299.
"° Pandurangi, "Vedanta', p. 300.
' " Klostermaier, Survey, p. 423.
" ' Pandurangi, 'Vedanta', p. 300.
" ' Klostermaier, Survey, p. 423.
"" Pandurangi, 'Vedanta', p. 301.
' " Pandurangi, 'Vedanta', pp. 307-308.
325
 Soteriologically, Madhva conceives of total self-surrender to Visnu as the ultimate means to
liberation, a surrender that is effected by love cenfred on ritual worship of the image of Visnu.
Updsand, worship and meditation, consists of a number of esoteric 'knowledges' (vidyds) that the
devotee seeks to cultivate, including prdriavidyd (knowledge of vital energy), madhuvidyd (honey-
knowledge), padcdgnividyd (knowledge of the 'five fires'), and purusavidyd (knowledge of pure
consciousness)."* The spirit of all worship is devotional surrender (bhakti), and devotion developed
through sravaria (listening to scripture), manana (reflection), and nididhydsana (meditative
contemplation), is said to lead to right knowledge (jfidna), which in tum secures the grace of the Lord
that leads one to mukti, liberation.'" Hence, Madhva conceives of a spiritual developmental process
that begins with spfritual leaming, continues through spiritual reflection and meditation, and
culminates in spiritual devotion that bestows final liberating knowledge of the Lord. In his view, final
liberation is not total merger of the dtman into Visnu, but consists in etemal freedom of the soul in the
blissful company of the Lord. In keeping with the concept of a personal God of infinite qualities, the
Madhva tradition does not advocate nirguriopdsand, 'worship and meditation on God as devoid of all
attributes.'"* In terms of spiritual attainment, Madhva speaks of a state fiinctionally similar to that of
Advaita's flvanmukti, a state characterised by eradication of all negative forms of karma through
God's grace, and leaving only residual karma (effects of past actions currently ripening) to work itself
out.'" This state of embodied liberation is termed aparoksa-jndna, direct knowledge of God. Madhva
posits that the highest and final stage of liberation is bhoga, post-mortem enjoyment of the Lord,
which is granted to sincere practising devotees by an act of grace.'*" Bhoga comprises various forms
of post-mortem realisation, namely: (1) sdlokya - remaining in one world or another to help other
seekers; (2) sdmipya - being in proximity to God and attending upon Him; (3) sdrupya - assuming
forms similar to God; and (4) sdyujya - uniting with God and enjoying spiritual bliss.'*'
Ontologically, Sarkar's non-dualistic stance departs from Madhva's dualistic view. Several
similarities can, however, be noted. Sarkar resembles Madhva in that (1) he calls the ultimate reality
Visnu and Hari, though he uses these names to illusfrate respectively the all-pervasiveness and
'sarriskdra-steahng''^^ natures of parama purusa rather than as actual names for a personal deity; (2)
he sees the universe as an expression of the spontaneous tild of the supreme, and prakrti as the
instrament of purusa (identical in status to Madhva's Visnu); and (3) he describes dtman as

"* Pandurangi, 'Vedanta', p. 311.

'^' Klostermaier, Survey, p. 425.
'^^ Pandurangi, 'Vedanta', p. 311.
'^' Daniel P. Sheridan, 'Direct Knowledge of God and Living Liberation in the Religious Thought of Madhva',
in Andrew O. Fort and Patricia Y. Mumme (eds.). Living Liberation in Hindu Thought (Albany: State
University of New York, 1996), pp. 91 and 104.
Sheridan describes bhoga as 'supreme bliss, the direct and immediate knowing of God as God with full
consciousness ... [and] the culmination of aparoksa-jndna already begun while embodied' (p. 106).
'*' Pandurangi, 'Vedanta', pp. 315-316.
Sarkar speaks of parama purusa, in the form of tdraka brahma, as having such great compassion for
suffering beings that he freely 'steals' or takes the burden of samskdras of suffering beings upon himself without
them knowing.
326
saccidananda (though he differs from Madhva regarding the nature, ontological status, and scope of
the atman).
Soteriologically, Sarkar agrees with Madhva on the ultimate efficacy of b/iakti and appears to
have borrowed from Madhva in his usage of the terms sravaria, manana, and nididhydsana. Sarkar,
however, expands on the meaning of sravaria to include listening to devotional songs such as kirtans
and bhajans, in addition to attending spiritual talks. He interprets manana as reflecting deeply on
spiritual tmths learnt through sravaria, and nididhydsana as meditative self-sunender (exemplified in
guru dhydna) that is synonymous with bhakti. Thus, wdiile Sarkar uses Madhva's terms in his
soteriology and in most cases does not depart very much from Madhva's own view, he does give
certain terms a different slant in meaning, which is in keeping with his self-understanding of the
spiritual path (for example, nidhidhyasana). A key difference between Sarkar's and Madhva's
conceptions of bhakti is that, whUe Madhva relies on ritual worship of the image of Visnu as a focal
point of devotion, Sarkar eschews all forms of image-worship, maintaining that murtipujd or image-
worship is a cmde practice not suited to spiritual aspirants seeking the ultimate subtlety of liberation.
Yet, Sarkar does not object to the visualisation of the personal form of the divine (embodied in the
guru) in meditation; rather, he promotes it as the supreme practice of dhyana that can lead the aspirant
to nirvikalpa samddhi, the highest reahsation devoid of all attributes. In this sense, Sarkar
paradoxically appears to be in harmony with the Dvaita tradition's rejection of nirgunopasana as the
method of choice for liberation-attainment, while subscribing to the goal of attributeless samadhi.
Sarkar adopts the terms used by Madhva to describe advanced states of spiritual reahsation, namely
sdlokya, samTpya, sdrUpya, and sdyujya, but re-interprets them in the context of his non-dualist praxis
(see Chapter 6, subsection 6.3.3). In Sarkar's approach, these states describe increasing depth of the
sense of meditative identification with cosmic consciousness, rather than any real co-existence or
communion with God in some divine realm.
In conclusion, a preliminary comparison of Sarkar's AM with the three major forms of
Vedantic thought shows how Sarkar has attempted to reconcile some of the opposing viewpoints
represented by these schools, and in the process constmcted a synthetic blend of their central ideas in
his AM ideology. This Vedantic blend appears to resolve some of the philosophical dilemmas of
Advaita ontology discussed earlier. It also serves as a surface stmcture over more fimdamental
notions derived from Samkhya and Yoga, as we have seen, and on an essentially Tantric vision of
reality, as we shall see in Section 7.5.

7.4 Buddhist Comparisons

In this section, we make preliminary comparisons between Sarkar's Ananda Marga and the basic
teachings of Buddhism. As Buddhism has a long and rich history replete with philosophical and
practical innovations, the present study will limit its focus to essential doctrines and practices of
Buddhism. In particular, I rely largely on the Pali Nikayas (in English translation) as primary source

327
references, as these texts contain some of the earliest recorded and arguably most authentic teachings
of the historical Buddha. I also refer to the English-language translation of the Visuddhimagga, an
important text belonging to the Theravada Buddhist fradition, the oldest surviving teaching lineage
that relies heavily on the Pali Nikayas. Except for a few cursory remarks, I do not attempt to compare
and contrast accounts of AM and Buddhist meditation to any great extent. This is because such a task
requires far greater academic rigour and detaU than can possibly be achieved in this section. I limit
my discussion to the Pali tradition not because of any bias against the Mahayana and Vajrayana
traditions, but simply because of practical consfraints of space. Interesting comparisons can be made
between Sarkar's AM and the systems of philosophy-praxis in both Mahayana and Vajrayana
Buddhism. For example, Sarkar's sadvipra ideal can be compared with the Mahayana bodhisattva
ideal,'*' while his concepts of purusa and siva can be compared with the Vajrayana concepts of 'clear-
light mind' and 'intrinsic awareness'.'*" However, for the reasons afready mentioned, such
comparisons are left to some future work.

The Four Noble Truths

Gotama, the historical Buddha, summed up his teachings with the systematic and pithy axioms of the
Four Noble Tmths (Pali: cattdri ariya-saccdni). These state the reality of: (1) dukkha or
'unsatisfactoriness' in life and experience; (2) the origin of dukkha (dukkha-samudaya), which is
tarihd-avijjd or 'craving bound up in ignorance'; (3) the cessation of dukkha (dukkha-nirodha), which
is nibbdna or final deliverance from suffering; and (4) the path leading to the cessation of dukkha
(dukkha-nirodha-gdmirii-patipadd), namely the Noble Eightfold Path (ariya atthangika magga).
Gotama states his first Noble Truth thus:

And what, monks, is the Noble Tmth of Suffering? Birth is suffering, ageing is
suffering, death is suffering, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and disfress are
suffering. Being attached to the unloved is suffering, being separated from the loved is
suffering, not getting what one wants is suffering. In short, the five aggregates of
grasping are suffering.'*'

The 'five aggregates of grasping' are the five component processes that make up a human being,
namely: the aggregate of form or materiality (rupa), the aggregate of feeUng (vedand), the aggregate

'*' For discussions on the bodhisattva ideal, see Har Dayal, The Bodhisattva Doctrine in Sanskrit Literature
(London: Kegan Paul, 1932); and Sangharakshita, A Survey of Buddhism: Its Doctrines and Methods Through
the Ages (Seventh Edition) (Glasgow: Windhorse Publications, 1993), pp. 431-493. See also Santideva,
Entering the Path of Enlightenment (Bodhicarydvatdra), trans, by Marion L. Matics (London: Allen and Unwin,
1971).
For discussions on clear light mind and intrinsic awareness, see respectively Tenzin Gyatso, The World of
Tibetan Buddhism: An Overview of its Philosophy and Practice,tians.and ed. by Geshe "Thubten Jinpa
(Massachusetts: Wisdom Publications, 1995), pp. 94-96 and 126-129; and Longchen Rabjam, The Practice of
Dzogchen, trans, by Tulku Thondup and ed. by Harold Talbott (New York: Snow Lion Publications), pp. 330-
349.

328
of perception (sadnd), the aggregate of mental formations (sankhdrd), and the aggregate of
consciousness (vinndna). Gotama goes on to outiine the origin and cause of this suffering in terms of
craving manifested in three different forms:

And what, monks, is the Noble Tmth of the Origin of Suffering? It is that craving
which gives rise to rebirth, bound up with pleasure and lust, finding fresh delight now
here, now there: that is to say sensual craving, craving for existence, and craving for
non-existence.'**

It is evident that, for Gotama, craving by the psychophysical organism is what drives the whole
process of rebirth and its natural corollary of suffering, both physical and psychological. In a sense,
the arising of the entire life-worid of the individual living being is a direct result of craving, and when
once arisen, this individual life-world is marked with suffering, again due to the force of craving. This
points to another central piece of Buddhist doctrine, namely that of Conditioned Arising (paticca-
samuppdda). The standard version of PS (paticca-samuppdda) is given in terms of a series of twelve
links (also known as bhavacakra, the "cycle of becoming') beginning with ignorance (avijjd-paccayd)
and ending with aging-and-death (jard-marana), grief, lamentation, pain, sorrow, and despafr - the
entire mass of suffering.'*'
It has been pointed out that the PS formula ' ... purports to explain the origin of suffering
(dukkha)... ' and is, in effect, ' ... an elaboration of the second Noble Tmth, tracing the chain of
causal dependence back beyond craving (tanhd) to its ultimate origin in ignorance (avijjd)' '^^ This
individual life-world and its arising, as elaborated in PS, can be interpreted in a dual sense:
microcosmic and psychological, and/or macrocosmic and physical.'*' PS and by extension, the second
Noble Truth, can thus be seen as purely mental phenomena on an individual level (a dukkha-eliciting
cognitive, volitional and emotional process that temporally arises and dissolves) and/or a cosmic
physical process of life-world origination in space and time, expressed in the cycle of rebirths.
In a 55 discourse, Sarkar critiques the Buddhist model of the Four Noble Traths for portraying
a pessimistic view of existence. Sarkar does not formulate his AM ideology in a manner dfrectly
mirroring the Four Noble Truths, but offers an altemative vision of existence, a vision that he claims is
optimistic and affirmative when compared to the Buddhist one. In his vision, Sarkar offers
counterstatements that can be organised into a fourfold stmcture: (1) the 'world is not full of sonows,
rather it is full of joys'"" (dnanda); (2) the cause of the universe is the personal parama purusa, the

'*' Walshe's translation in Maurice Walshe (tiansl.). Thus Have I Heard: The Long Discourses of the Buddha
(London: Wisdom Publications, 1987), p. 344.
'** Walshe, p. 346.
'" Rod Bucknell, 'Conditioned Arising Evolves: Variation and Change in Textual Accounts of the Paticca-
samuppdda Doctiine', Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 22/2 (1999), pp. 311-342.
"* Bucknell, p. 312. In his footnote, Bucknell bases his equation of the PS formula with the second Noble Tmth
onANl: 177.5-14.
'*'For a brief statement of this dual interpretation of PS, see Bucknell (1999), pp. 327-328, footnote 46.
""55Partll,p.90.
329
'embodiment of bliss'"' (dnanda-svarupa); (3) all entities 'exist with Him, and ultimately they will all
merge in Him'"'; and (4) the way towards supreme bliss is by 'doing sddhand and kirtana ...'.
Echoing the Taittfriya Upanisad's proclamation of bliss, Sarkar argues that:

... the world is certainly full of joy because it is from joy that the universe has
emerged, in joy it is being maintained, and finally the culminating point of all
movement is the Supreme Bliss.

In this way, it can be said that Sarkar does offer an altemative version of the 'Four Noble
Tmths', one that is couched in terms of the ontological concept of purusa and its epistemological
correlate, dnanda. Let us now compare Sarkar with Gotama in terms of the first and second Noble
Traths. In chapter 2 of AS, Sarkar concisely defines his concept of dnanda as follows:

2-1. A congenial mental feeling is called happiness.

2-2. The attachment to happiness is the primary vrtti (propensity) of living beings.
2-3. Infinite happiness is dnanda (bliss).
2-4. This dnanda is called Brahma.

Sarkar defines happiness as a congenial mental feeling, a state of parallelism between the waves of
incoming stimuli (both material and mental) and the individual's mental waves conditioned by his/her
accumulated "reactive momenta' (sarriskdra). Sarkar further explains dnanda in his auto-commentary
to AS by emphasizing that each and every living being, not content with a little, seeks out that "endless
happiness (that) is a condition beyond the precincts of weal and woe'."* This very seeking is the
innate urge or propensity of every living being. He equates this dnanda with the singular, limitless,
and 'self-same blissful entity' called brahma, which is 'the composite of siva and sakti'.'^^
The interplay of siva and sakti results in the manifestation of the universe and subsequent
evolution of life. Within the context of dnanda and brahma, Sarkar also explains how suffering and
stagnation arise and exist in life. The problems in life rest in the failure of the mind to realise its
original and basic nature - pure, witnessing consciousness and bliss. The mind ignorantly pursues
crade objects of gratification in the hope of finding permanent happiness, which, however, can be
found only in realising brahma. Incidentally, this very search for happiness is inspired and propelled
by none other than this witnessing consciousness itself, though it is somewhat misplaced in loci and
misguided in means. This search for bliss in the wrong places and with improper means is due to the
forces of extroversion (avidyd mdyd) within the mind. However, Sarkar never sees suffering as an

"'55Partll,p.91.
"'55Partll,p.94.
"'55Partll,p.94.
""55Partll,p.97.
"'>15, pp. 18-19.
"*A5. p. 19.
"'Ibid.
330
ultimate truth, only as a relative one, since suffering can exist only when experienced by the mind.
What is within the orbit of the mind is, for Sarkar, constantiy changing and not the ultimate reaUty that
is changeless and timeless.
Hence, the origin of life and the world, and of the living search for and experience of dnanda,
ultimately rests in the blissful, supreme brahma. From the Sarkarian perspective (though Sarkar never
explicitiy formulated his concepts in this way), the trath of dnanda, the world, and life, and the
corresponding trath of their origin, can be likened to the fust and second of Gotama's Four Noble
Tmths. Embedded within these traths is Sarkar's explanation of the origin of suffering in the world,
which is rooted in the cosmogonic process of brahmacakra (as opposed to the bhavacakra of
Gotama). To sum up, whereas for Sarkar, life is characterized by the personal search for bliss or
dnanda, in all its forms, variations, and degrees of subtiety, for Gotama, life is pervaded by suffering
or dukkha in its various forms and expressions. The most important difference between the two
thinkers is that Sarkar postulates an ultimate first cause for the entfre macrocosmic and microcosmic
order, while Gotama does not. Gotama focuses on the nature and origin of every individual's
suffering, and states that ignorance and craving, beginningless and primordial, are the twin causes of
this suffering. These two forces are also the cause of the repeated physical rebirths of the individual.
So, Sarkar can be described as fundamentally cosmotheistic while Gotama is either agnostic or
atheistic. In the Abhidhamma literature of later Buddhism, an attempt is made to account for the
origination of the universe by appealing to the notion of collective karma. It is the collective craving-
ignorance in myriad individual minds that drives the cosmogonic process."* However, the ultimate
origin of these minds and the primary elements that comprise the raw material for cosmogenesis
remain unaccounted for.
On another level, however, Sarkar's and Gotama's views on the arising of suffering bear
certain similarities. Sarkar's twin forces of avidyd mdyd and Gotama's avijjd-tarihd seem to correlate
loosely in form and function, one pointing to a veiling of some fundamental soteriological tmth, the
other describing an active propulsion towards things (sensory and mental pleasures) that do not finally
satisfy but bring suffering instead. But while Gotama takes suffering as the starting point of his entire
soteriology, Sarkar relativises and contextualises suffering within his discourse on dnanda and its
origin in brahma. For Sarkar, bliss is more fundamental than suffering.
Gotama's third Noble Tmth purports to explain the possibility of suffering's end through the
relinquishing of craving for sensual pleasure, existence, and non-existence:

And what, monks, is the Noble Trath of the Cessation of Suffering? It is the complete
fading-away and extinction of this craving, its forsaking and abandonment, liberation
from it, detachment from it.'"

178
For a detailed discussion of the Abhidhammic conception of the origin and evolution of the physical universe
and life, see C.P. Ranasinghe, The Buddha's Explanation of the Universe (Ceylon: Lanka Bauddha Mandalaya
Fund, 1957).
Thus Have I Heard, p. 347.
331
Thus, Gotama describes the cessation of suffering in a negative formulation that entaUs the total
extinction of craving, the cause of suffering. In terms of PS, this means the elimination of ignorance,
which then automatically results in the cessation of craving and of the entfre chain of causation leading
to suffering. This cessation of suffering is equated with nibbdna, an ineffable state which is complete
freedom from all craving and dukkha. Nibbdna is often depicted as 'without support, non-functioning,
objectiess' (appatittham, appavattarn, andrammariam).'^^ In positive terms, Gotama describes
nibbdna as 'the highest bliss' (nibbdnarn paramarn sukharn)'^' and as 'discernment, non-manifestive,
infinite, shining in every respect' (vinndnarn anidassanarn anantarn sabbato-pabharn). Nibbdna, in
other words, is the final goal of life and the culmination of Buddhist spfritual practice. Realising the
cessation of dukkha, which is nibbdna, also signifies the end of all future rebirths.
How this goal is achieved is stated in the fourth Noble Tmth:

And what, monks, is the Noble Tmth of the Way of Practice Leading to the Cessation
of Suffering? It is just this Noble Eightfold Path, namely:- Right View, Right
Thought; Right Speech, Right Action, Right Livelihood; Right Effort, Right
Mindfulness, Right Concentration.'*'

The Noble Eightfold Path is traditionally divided into the three trainings of moraUty (sUa),
concentration (samddhi), and wisdom (parifid). This path is entirely a matter of individual effort,
relying on nothing other than the teachings and practices laid down by Gotama, implemented within
the context of a community of like-minded practitioners (the Sarigha).
Sarkar's equivalent of the third Noble Tmth is expressed in terms of liberation (mukti) and
salvation (moksa). Sarkar succinctiy explains this twin aspect of the final goal in chapters 1 and 2 of
AS:

1-21. When the aham and the citta merge into the Macrocosmic Mahat, the merger
is called saguriasthiti or savikalpa samddhi.
1-22. When the mahat merges into the Atman, it is called nirgunasthiti (state of
objectiessness) or nirvikalpa samddhi.
1-23 . This state (of nirvikalpa samddhi) is beyond the mind.
2-5. That (Brahma) having been attained, all thirst is permanentiy quenched.'*"

He states that the ultimate goal of life and spiritual praxis lies not in the cessation of dukkha per se, but
in the attainment of ' ... this most exalted state of God-realisation, Brahmasadbhdva'.'^^ Such an
attainment naturally brings with it the total dissolution of all thirst, bondage, and suffering. Liberation

'*" Peter Harvey's translation, in his The Selfless Mind: Personality, Consciousness and Nirvaryi in Early
Buddhism (Richmond, Surrey: Curzon Press, 1995), p. 203.
'*' Buddharakkhita's translation, in his Dhammapada: A Practical Guide to Right Living (Bangalore: Buddha
Vacana Trust, 1986), p. 80.
'*' Harvey, The Selfless Mind, p. 199.
' " Walshe, Thus Have I Heard, p. 348.
'*''/15, pp. 14-15andl9.
332
(mukti) is permanent merger of the unit mind into cosmic mind, while salvation (moksa) is permanent
merger of the unit mind into cosmic consciousness. It is highly possible that Sarkar speaks of a third
state of embodied liberation (flvan-mukti), which he terms the 'supreme spiritual fulfilment'.
Comparing Sarkar and Gotama on the third Noble Trath, we find that in describing an
experience that essentially defies linguistic conventions, Sarkar takes a via positiva approach while
Gotama takes a via negativa approach. Both see the final goal, the supreme fulfilment of spiritual
praxis, as the cessation of all forms of suffering. For Sarkar this cessation takes place as a corollary of
brahma realisation, while for Gotama the cessation of suffering is itself the focus and goal; it is
nibbdna itself. A preliminary comparison of Sarkar's nirvi/calpa samddhi and Gotama's nibbdna
shows a striking similarity in phenomenological features. Both teachers portray the highest state as
objectiess, non-manifestive, infinite, all-radiant, and of the nature of highest bliss.'*'
Another similarity lies in the recognition that two forms of nibbdna or samddhi are possible for
a spfritual aspfrant. Gotama distinguishes 'nibbdna with remainder of upddi (sa-upddi-sesa)' from
'nibbdna without remainder of upddi (an-upddi-sesa)', where upddi is usually translated as
'substrate':

In him, the five sense-faculties still remain, through which, as they have not departed,
he undergoes the pleasant and the unpleasant, he experiences happiness and suffering.
In him, that which is the desfruction of attachment, hatred, and delusion, this is called,
monks, the element of nibbdna with remainder of upddi ... Here itself, monks, all that
is experienced, with no delight for him, will become cool; this is called monks, the
element of nibbdna without remainder of upddi.'^^

It has been argued by Harvey and others that 'remainder-less' nibbdna (an-upddi-sesa
nibbdna) is synonymous with the state of nibbdna after death. The following passage seems to
corroborate this claim: 'Between the night in which the Tathagata gains supreme enlightenment,
Cunda, and the night in which he attains the Nibbdna-element without remainder, whatever he
proclaims, says or explains is so and not otherwise'.'*' From this it appears that the ffrst (sa-upddi-
sesa) is the state of one who has attained nibbdna but is still living in a physical body with mind intact,
and is thus experiencing the results of past craving (though aU craving has ceased from the moment of
nibbdna realization). The second (an-upddi-sesa) is the state of a nibbdna-realized being who has
completely exhausted his store of karmic reactions and left the physical body. This pair invites
comparison with Sarkar's sabija (with seed) and nirbija (without seed) samddhi In sabija samddhi,
the mind attains the highest nirvikalpa state with sarriskdras (reactions to past actions) remaining to be
exhausted. In this case, the person leaves that highest meditative state and retums to ordinary

'*' NSS, p. 208.

'*'/lMParts5-8,p.483.
187
A more thorough and critical discussion on this is beyond the scope of the present study.
"* Harvey, The Selfless Mind, pp. 180-181.
'*' Walshe, Thus Have I Heard, p. 436.
333
consciousness so as to experience and exhaust these potential reactions. When all reactions have been
desfroyed, he merges totally and permanentiy into that infinite peace - nirbija nirvikalpa samddhi -
which is final moksa. In respect of these teachings, the convergence of ideas between Sarkar and
Gotama is striking. However, Masefield (1979) has cast doubt on the fraditionally accepted notion of
the distinction between sa-upddisesa and an-upddisesa nibbdna as referring to the pre- and post-
mortem states respectively.'^ This implies that the apparent commonality between Sarkar's nirvikalpa
samddhi and Gotama's nibbdna will have to be more thoroughly and critically investigated.
Sarkar's equivalent of the fourth Noble Tmth is in essence his Path to Bliss (dnanda mdrga),
which integrates the three systems of Saiva Tantra, Sakta Tantra, and Vaisnava Tantra, and the
traditional Yogic paths of knowledge (jfidna), action (karma), and devotion (bhakti). The spfritual
practice (sddhand) of AM is set in the framework of the eight-limbed yoga (astdriga yoga). From
Chapter 6, we see that Sarkar identifies devotion as the pre-eminent spfritual practice, characterised by
selfless surrendering of all one's being to the highest consciousness, parama purusa or paramasiva.
The process of surrendering is said to be full of sweetness and is experienced by the devotee as a
blissful flow, where inner and outer reality is transformed into a world of blissful ideation and an
unbroken divine play.
An important difference between Sarkar and Gotama relates to the need for a spiritual
preceptor or guru. Gotama exhorts his followers to 'live as islands [or lamps] unto yourselves, being
your own refuge, with no one else as your refuge, with the Dhamma [teaching] as an island, with the
Dhamma as your refuge.'"' (The Pali dipa means both 'island' and 'lamp'; in the case of the passage
just quoted, 'lamp' seems more appropriate especially when used in reference to the Dhamma.)
Sarkar instead urges that while one has to make continuous efforts to 'long for and ran after the
Great', the final attainment requires the elevating force and saving grace of the guru, who is ultimately
synonymous with an aspect of brahma himself. This liberating and interfacing aspect of brahma,
termed tdraka brahma, is the link between the manifested (saguna) and unmanifested (nirguria)
brahma. The guru acts in the world as a realised master to lead beings toward liberation and salvation.
As regards the fourth Noble Tmth, both teachers prescribe a path of practice having an
eightfold stracture and a subdivision into three categories of praxis. For Gotama, the ultimate praxis
for nibbdna attainment is pafidd, a direct cognitive insight into the nature of suffering, its cause, its
end, and the way to its end. For Sarkar, it is bhakti, a complete surrendering of the self to the cosmic
entity that is simultaneously a state of total, non-dual self-knowledge where the knower, the knowing,
and the known are one. Sarkar comments on the Buddhist summum bonum by saying that it is
essentially 'jndna nirvdria', and is to be attained by the path of knowledge. For Sarkar, bhakti
supersedes jfidna - or rather, bhakti is jfidna par excellence.'^^

"" Peter Masefield, 'The Nibbana-Parinibbana Contioversy', Religion vol. 9 no. 2 (1979), pp. 215-230.
'" Walshe, Thus Have I Heard, p. 245.
'^ NSS, p. 268.
334
The Noble Eightfold Path
Sarkar's appropriation of an eight-factored pedagogy in his astdriga yoga framework compares
interestingly with the Gotama's noble eightfold path, which consists of a different set of eight factors.
In particular, Gotama's emphasis on mindfulness (sati) (factor 7 of the noble eightfold path) is
strikingly absent from Sarkar's eight-limbed yoga, which seems prima facie to focus more heavily on
withdrawing (pratydhdra), concentrating (dhdrarid), dfrecting (dhydna), and transforming the mind's
energy than on clear awareness of it. In his discussion on the four foundations of mindfulness
(satipatthdna), Gotama emphasises the cultivation of knowledge of and insight into the
impermanence, selflessness, and dukkha-eliciting nature of body and mind. Such insight is said to lead
the Buddhist practitioner from bondage of dukkha to ultimate liberation, nibbdna. Sarkar does not
include insight as a specific item in his eight-limbed yoga, and while insight is not formally
acknowledged in the Buddhist noble eightfold path, it is nevertheless commonly associated with the
practice of mindfulness. As such, insight is arguably implicit in the Buddhist eightfold path.
In Chapter 5,1 mentioned Sarkar's idiosyncratic interpretation of the Buddha's eightfold path,
and highUghted some key differences between Sarkar's and the Buddha's delineations of the path.
Here, I attempt to further compare Sarkar's interpretation with the fraditional Buddhist interpretation
of the eightfold path.'" First, Buddhists interpret right understanding (Pali: sammd ditthi) as proper
understanding of the Four Noble Traths, seeing these traths as the framework for one's entfre path of
practice. Sarkar re-interprets right understanding as possession of a proper philosophy and vision of
life, one that is rooted in parama purusa. Second, the Buddhist interpretation of right thought (sammd
sarikappa) as thoughts of renunciation (nekkhamma), non-ill-will (avydpdda), harmlessness
(avihirnsd) contrasts with Sarkar's general statement that sammd sarikappa is having firm and proper
determination to achieve one's spfritual goal. Thfrd, right speech (sammd vdcd) in the Buddhist sense
means refraining from lying, slander, and harsh and frivolous speech; in Sarkar's case, right speech is
taken to mean proper control of one's sensory and motor organs so that one's behavioural expressions
will be wholesome and beneficial to society. Fourth, right action (sammd kammanta) in the Buddhist
sense is refraining from taking life, stealing, and sexual misconduct; in Sarkar's case, it is to finish
one's allotted work properly and without giving up halfway. Fifth, Buddhists define right livelihood
(sammd dflva) as refraining from certain harmful vocations such as butchery, arms trade, and slave
trade; Sarkar defines it as having socially beneficial vocations (without specifying what occupations
are proscribed), and more importantly, as occupying one's mind with the thought of parama purusa.
Sixth, right effort (sammd vdydma) in the Buddhist sense is exerting effort to prevent or eliminate
unwholesome mind-states, and to arouse or perfect wholesome mind-states; in Sarkar's sense, right
effort is proper physical, mental and spfritual exercise so as to maintain physical health and promote
spiritual development. These exercises are the various Yogic and meditative practices of AM.
Seventh, Buddhists define right mindfulness (sammd sati) as cultivating the four foundations of

"' The following definitions of the Buddhist eightfold path are drawnfromWalshe, pp. 348-349.
335
mindfulness, namely mindfulness of body (kdydnupassand), feelings (vedandnupassand), mind
(cittdnupassand), and mind-objects (dhammdnupassand); Sarkar defines right mindfulness as proper
recollection of parama purusa, achieved through moment-to-moment practice of madhuvidyd, AM's
second meditative lesson. Finally, Buddhists define right concenfration (sammd samddhi) as attaining
the four jhdnas; Sarkar defines sammd samddhi as attaining either savikalpa samddhi (oneness with
quahfied purusa) or nirvikalpa samddhi (oneness with unqualified purusa), or both.
While mindfulness and insight are absent from Sarkar's rendering of the eight-limbed yoga,
one can nevertheless note the practice of mindfulness incorporated in Sarkar's AM in three ways: in
the ffrst and second lessons of sahaja yoga, respectively isvara prariidhdna and madhuvidyd, and in
the meditative stance of madhurabhdva. In the first lesson, isvara prariidhdna, the meditator's
attention is focussed on the ista cakra while simultaneously ideating on the tme infinite nature of the
mind, which is parama purusa. WhUe doing so, the subjective awareness witnesses the objective
ideation and paradoxically becomes enhanced as a result of the doubling back of the ideation onto its
witnessing counterpart. This is because the ideational concept is none other than that of infinite
witnessing consciousness, reminding the meditator of the fundamental nature of the mind and
strengthening his or her very awareness in the process. In this sense, the quality of mindfulness and
clarity is systematically developed through the first lesson. In paying attention to the ista cakra, a
specific point on the body, some degree of mindfulness of the body (kdydnupassand) can be said to be
present. In witnessing the subtie, pleasurable feeling of mantric pulsations during the process of
ideation, some degree of mindfulness of feelings (vedandnupassand) is also present. In being aware
of the resulting expansiveness and clarification of the mind through ideation, an element of
mindfulness of mind-states (cittdnupassand) exists. Finally, in witnessing the sound and imaginative
meaning of the mantra in the meditation proper, one can be said to be observing the very components
of thought, which can have auditory, visual, and semantic aspects. This observation of a 'special
thought', the mantra, is arguably a kind of mindfulness of mind-objects (dhammdnupassand). Thus, it
can be noted that the first lesson utilises and develops the faculty of clear mindfulness, although in
deeper stages, it eliminates other random, uncontrolled thoughts and expands the clarified mind to
infinite proportions, approaching perhaps the arupa states of concentration of the Buddhists.
fri the second lesson, madhuvidyd, the meditator's attention is skilfully dfrected and expanded
to include all observable phenomena in his or her experience, free from all emotional or cognitive
distortions. To the extent that it involves clear, open awareness of phenomena without emotional
entanglement, madhuvidyd resembles the Buddhist practice of mindfulness. It can thus be argued that
some degree of mindfulness, as practised in the Buddhist sense, is essential to successful practice of
AM's second lesson. The essential difference is that madhuvidyd observes all experiential content and
simultaneously utilises the subtie ideation that all objects are natural expressions of pristine
consciousness; mindfulness merely observes whatever appears in one's experiential field without
judgement, ideation or comment. The paradox of madhuvidyd, however, lies in the fact that such

336
ideation retums the mind's attention back onto itself, which is the clear, unbounded knowing and
witnessing nature of consciousness. Also, Sarkar's techniques of awareness and insight may be
included in more advanced meditative lessons, such as visesa yoga; or may have otherwise been
expressed in a hidden and highly philosophical language requiring further interpretation. The
philosophical notion of a witnessing entity pervasively and etemally aware of all objects and events in
the cosmos suggestively points to a meditative stance of clear, insightful awareness. However, to
interpret such a notion in meditative terms would require the use of a meditation-based hermeneutic.
A deeper discussion on insight awareness and the use of a meditation-based hermeneutic in Sarkar's
teachings is beyond the scope of this thesis.
In Chapter 5,1 suggested that madhurabhdva may be the essential realisation underlying the
thfrd state of flvanmukti A salient feature of madhurabhdva is that the meditator observes and realises
that everything and every being in the universe is blissful and sweet, as they continually emerge and
dissolve within the infinite sphere of his or her shining consciousness. This stance of madhurabhdva
comes about through having previously realised both nityabhdva (= nirvikalpa samddhi) and tilabhdva
(savikalpa samddhi). The inclusive, blissful and sweet awareness of madhurabhdva resembles the
stance of mindfulness to the extent that they are both non-judgemental, non-discriminating, and all-
embracing. However, no mention is made of 'sweetness' in Buddhist mindfulness though a subtle
bliss intrinsic to mindfulness is said to be present.""
Sarkar's interpretation of the eight factors of the Buddha's path clearly departs from the
Buddhist, non-substantialist understanding of its path. Through his interpretation, Sarkar appropriates
Buddhist concepts in the service of his cosmotheistic and equivocally substantialist project.
Furthermore, Sarkar's soteriological praxis, when compared with its Buddhist counterpart, suggests a
greater emphasis on concentrative meditation (samatha) than on insight/awareness (vipassand)
meditation. However, this point is complicated by the fact that (1) cultivation of moment-to-moment
awareness is not entirely absent in AM praxis; and (2) awareness and insight practice, possibly hinted
at in Sarkar's cosmological concept of purusottama, may exist in the advanced practices of visesa
yoga.

Meditative Concentration: Jhdna, Arupa andNirodha

In this section, I briefly mention some possible connections between Sarkar's and the Buddha's
accounts of meditation, with the aim of highlighting the need for more rigorous analysis in some
future work. In the Pali Buddhist texts, frequent mention is made of progressively deeper states of
meditation known as the four jhdnas and the four arupas, and in some cases, the state of cessation of
perception and feeling (safirid-vedayita nirodha). The four jhdnas represent a sequence of meditative
concentration characterised by progressively deeper one-pointedness, clarity, and equanimity. The
four arupas (also known as ardpa or non-material jhdnas) describe advanced and highly subtle states

337
of absorption in (1) the realm of infinite space (dkdsdnaficdyatana), (2) the realm of infinite
consciousness (vififidriaficdyatana), (3) the realm of no-thingness (dkificafindyatana), and (4) the
realm of neither-perception-nor-non-perception (nevasaftrid-ndsanfidyatana). The state of safifid-
vedayita nirodha is said to be the culmination of the jhdnas and the arupas.'^^
On surface comparison, the four jhdnas do not appear to resemble any of the meditative
attainments spoken of by Sarkar. The Buddha's description of the four jhdnas does not focus on the
form and content of meditative experience, but rather on the process of it, detailing what mental
factors arise and cease as the mind becomes progressively one-pointed and subtilised. This contrasts
interestingly with Sarkar's description of the stages of realisation - sdlokya, sdmipya, sdyujya,
sdrupya, sdrsthi, and kaivalya - in terms of the ontological concept of parama purusa (see Chapter 6).
However, the Buddha's extremely terse, content-oriented descriptions of the arupa states,
characterised by infinity of space, infinity of consciousness, no-thingness, and neither-perception-nor-
non-perception, may find an echo or two in Sarkar's description of savikalpa samddhi or sdrsthi In
Sarkar's meditative progression, each stage of realisation is defined by the degree of closeness or
union between the meditator's mind and the 'object' of supreme consciousness. Thus, accounts of the
arupas and AM meditative realisations may be commensurately compared in terms of thefr respective
objects of meditation and phenomenological features. Also, it may be possible, from an analysis of
the AM meditative process itself rather than of its content, to draw out similarities between Sarkar's
and the Buddha's accounts of meditation. For reasons afready mentioned at the beginning of this
section, this task is best left to a separate work.
In several instances in the Pali Buddhist texts, the series of meditative attainments is said to
culminate in the cessation of perception and feeling (sandd-vedayita nirodha or nirodha samdpatti).'^
This ultimate state of cessation is highly regarded in the Theravada Buddhist tradition and has been
equated with realisation of nibbdna in the here and now."' On one occasion, Anuraddha, one of the
foremost disciples of the Buddha, gave the following reply to the Buddha's query:

Here, venerable sir, whenever we want, by completely surmounting the base of neither-
perception-nor-non-perception, we enter and abide in the cessation of perception and
feeling. And our taints are desfroyed by our seeing with wisdom. Venerable sfr, this is
another superhuman state, a distinction in knowledge and vision worthy of the noble
ones, a comfortable abiding, which we have attained by surmounting the preceding
abiding, by making that abiding subside. And venerable sir, we do not see any other
comfortable abiding higher or more sublime than this one."*

In the Buddha's description of the third yTidna, the factor of mindfulness is accompanied by joy (sukha). In
AS II.3, Sarkar defines bliss (dnanda) as infinite happiness (sukhamanantam).
For the Buddha's description of the jhdnas and arupas, see e.g. Walshe, Thus Have I Heard, pp. 102-104 and
pp. 229 respectively.
' * See e.g. DN II 71 (in Walshe, p. 229) and MN I 209.
Winston L. King, Theravdda Meditation: The Buddhist Transformation of Yoga (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass,
1992), pp. 103-105.
"* MN I 209, astianslatedin Bhikkhu Nanamoli and Bhikkhu Bodhi, The Middle Length Discourses of the
Buddha: A New Translation of the Majjhima Nikdya (Kandy: Buddhist Publication Society, 1995), p. 304.
338
hi his counter-reply to Anuraddha, the Buddha praises him and supports his assertion that there is ' ...
no other comfortable abiding higher or more sublime than that one.'"' Buddhaghosa, the prominent
commentator on the Pali texts of the Theravada tradition, states the reason for attaining the ultimate
'jhdna' of cessation:

Why do they attain it? Being wearied by the occurrence and dissolution of formations,
they attain it thinking 'Let us dwell in bliss by being without consciousness here and
now and reaching the cessation that is nibbana'."'^

Buddhaghosa also mentions that only 'non-retumers' (andgdmi) and 'noble ones' (arahant), the
penultimate and ultimate attainments possible for a Theravada Buddhist practitioner, are able to attain
sanrid-vedayita nirodha?^' The above discussion suggests that the experience of sarind-vedayita
nirodha is synonymous with a temporary realisation of nibbdna, a state that is accessible only to
highly realised practitioners who are near or have reached the completion of thefr spiritual paths.
This particular view of sannd-vedayita nirodha bears close resemblance to Sarkar's
description of the state of nirvikalpa samddhi, the 'highest' meditative absorption possible for an AM
practitioner, characterised by total mind transcendence and an ineffable vacuity that is simultaneously
full of bliss. In nirvikalpa samddhi, no experience in the ordinary sense of the word is possible, since
it is beyond mind and experience; the fact that this state is one of infinite bliss is inferred by the
practitioner immediately post-samddhi. In other words, the AM practitioner, following emergence
from nirvikalpa samddhi, infers from the deep composure and bliss that persist in his or her mind that
the preceding 'experience' must have been one of ultimate bliss and peace. This is very similar to the
following description of post-sannd-vedayita nirodha:

It is a Nibbanic 'experience' indirectly - by inference, by anticipation, and by

•postexperience.' As stoppage of thought and feeling, it is inferred to be Nibbanic.
With cessation already predefined as Nibbana-in-this-life, the meditator so views it
when anticipating or preparing to enter it. And in the postexperience, it is felt as utter,
irrefragable peace because of the feeling tone of the stoppage of thought just occurring
and the prestoppage conception of cessation as Nibbanic.""

Sarkar's nirvikalpa samddhi again echoes the description of another Buddhist meditative
attainment, the twin realisation of Path and Fruit (magga-phala).^^ According to Buddhaghosa, the

""Ibid.
'"" VsM XXIII. 30, in Buddhaghosa, The Path of Purification Vol 2, tians. Bhikkhu Nanamoli (Berkeley &
London: Shambhala PubHcations, 1976), p. 828.
'"' VsM XXXIII18, in Buddhaghosa, Path of Purification, p. 18.
^^ King, Theravdda Meditation, p. 105.
"" Theravada Buddhist meditative praxis rests on the dual cultivation of samatha (calm) and vipassand (insight),
or in some cases, vipassand alone, culminating in the threefold insight into anicca (impermanence), dukkha
(unsatisfactoriness), and anattd (non-self). It is insight into anattd alone that is said to destroy all kilesas
(defilements) andfinallyrelease one from dukkha - realisation of nibbdna. The apparent diametric opposition of
Buddhist andtta to Hindu dtman suggests that Buddhist meditative realisations are incommensurable with Hindu
339
term 'Path' refers to that moment of consciousness in which the meditator first plunges into the
unconditioned element (dhdtu) of nibbdna, y/hi\e the term 'Frait' refers to three successive moments of
nibbanic-consciousness following the initial Path moment. Essentially, the Path and Frait moments are
identical in nature and are distinct only in temporal sequence. There are a total of four separate
occasions of Path and Fruit realisation, each corresponding to one of the four stages of sainthood -
stream-winner (sotdpanna), once-retumer (sakaddgdmi), non-retumer (andgdmi), and the noble one
(arahant). Once the meditator has achieved the first Path and Fmit moments of a sotdpanna, he or she
is able to attain, at wiU, subsequent Frait moments of that particular stage of sainthood. The same
applies to the other stages of sainthood. While Sarkar does not specify the number of times that
nirvikalpa samddhi needs to be attained before fuU liberation ensues, he does make it clear that
attainment of nirvikalpa samddhi is essential for salvation (moksa), just as realisation of the Path and
Frait of all four stages of sainthood is essential for fuU enlightenment in the Buddhist schema.
The above discussion suggests that Sarkar's AM and Theravada Buddhist praxis may share
certain commonalities, although fully describing and accounting for these similarities (and differences)
require far more than what this thesis can accomplish. Suffice to mention that Sarkar, in keeping with
the Hindu inclination for metaphysical speculation, uses the ontological discourse in speaking about
meditative attainments, while Theravada Buddhists, in keeping with the Buddha's emphasis on
empirical observation, make greater use of the phenomenological mode of discourse. Whether the two
modes of discourse ultimately point to the same reality remains uncertain; I have merely highlighted
possible connections here, leaving the analyses and drawing of conclusions to some later work.

Higher Wisdom: Abhinnd and Tevijjd

The Buddha's emphasis on insight-knowledge as the quintessential means for enlightenment
(sambodhi) is reflected in the final stages leading up to liberation from all suffering, epitomised in the
Sdmanfiaphala Sutta or 'Discourse on the Fraits of the Homeless Life'.'°" In this sutta, the Buddha
describes the five higher knowledges (abhififids) that a meditating monk achieves following mastery
of the four jhdnas. The first abhidnd is knowing and seeing that the body is made up of four material
elements and the mind or consciousness is bound to and dependent on the body. The second abhinnd

(and perhaps AM) ones, pointing as they do to different sets of insights and experiences. However, as Loy
argues, it is possible to attempt a reconciliation of Buddhist and Hindu realisations by seeing them as two sides
of the same coin, one asfirst-personphenomenological description and the other as third-person philosophical
description of the same experience. Loy says: 'Early Buddhism may be seen to emphasise the nothing, the
extensionless point which shrinks to non-existence; Sarikara emphasises the unique world which remains. But
they are describing the same phenomenon. ... One should not identify with any physical or mental phenomenon;
in other words, one leams to relax and "let go" of literally everything. In doing so, the sense of self "shrinks to
an extensionless point" and when that abruptiy disappears - which is enlightenment - "what remains is the
reality co-ordinate with it." On the one side nothing, not even the extensionless point, is left - this is the
Buddhist void, the complete absence of a self. On the other side remains - everything, the whole world, but a
transformed one since it now encompasses awareness within itself; this is the non-dual brahman of Vedanta' (p.
70): see David Loy, 'Enlightenment in Buddhism and Advaita Vedanta: Are Nirvdria and Moksa the Same?',
International Philosophical Quarterly, 22.1 (1982): pp. 65-74.
'"" DN I 47-86: in Walshe, Thus Have I Heard, pp. 91-109.
340
is production of a mind-made body that possesses a form complete with all limbs and faculties - an
'astral' or 'psychic' body akin to a physical body. The third abhinnd is acqufring various supemormal
powers (iddhi) such as multiplication of self, appearing and disappearing at will, passing through solid
objects such as walls and mountains, sinking into and emerging from the ground, walking on water,
flying through the sky cross-legged, physically touching the sun and moon, and fravelling to the
celestial (Brahma) world. The fourth abhinnd is possession of the 'divine ear' that is able to hear
sounds, 'both divine and human, whether far or near.'"" The fifth abhidfid is knowledge of the minds
of other beings, being able to distinguish the different mind-states of other beings (e.g. a mind with or
without hate, a mind with or without passion, etc.).
The Buddha goes on to describe the three key insights (tevijjd) leading to full liberation: (1)
knowledge of previous existences; (2) knowledge of the passing away and arising of beings or the
'divine eye'; and (3) knowledge of the destmction of the corraptions.'"* The first of the three insight-
knowledges involves remembering every detail of one's past lives; the second involves seeing how
and where beings pass away and are rebom according to the wholesome or unwholesome kamma that
they have accumulated; the third involves knowing as it really is, the four noble traths with respect to
suffering (dukkha) and the corruptions (dsava), and being consequently delivered from the cormptions
of sense-desire, becoming, and ignorance. The third knowledge also involves recognising that one is
fully liberated from the cycle of birth and death as a result of destraction of those corraptions.
Tuming now to Sarkar, we can see several similarities and differences between Sarkar's
articulation of occult powers, omniscience, and spiritual knowledge and the Buddha's account of the
abhififids and tevijjd. First, the abhififids of supemormal powers, divine ear, and knowledge of others'
minds resemble some of the eight occult powers (vibhutis) that an AM practitioner may attain upon
becoming one with the cosmic mind. These powers are the natural capacities of the cosmic mind and
are fully exhibited in the human manifestation of tdraka brahma, otherwise known as Bhagavan, the
Lord. The eight occult powers are: (1) aiiimd - ability to become very small and to penetrate into the
secrets of atomic (or sub-atomic) stracture; (2) mahimd - ability to become very big, surpassing any
object in the universe; (3) laghimd - abiUty to become very light, to walk on water, and to be
anywhere in the universe; (4) isitva - rating capacity or the ability to witness, understand and dfrect
the actions of all entities in the universe; (5) prakdmya - ability to take any form; (6) vasitva - ability
to control forces of nature, create new life, and resurrect the dead; (7) prdpti - abiUty to immediately
materialise any thought or desire; and (8) antaraydmitva - ability to penetrate into the inner nature of
any entity."" Comparisons between the abhinrias and the vibhutis can be tabulated as follows:

"" Walshe, Thus Have I Heard, p. 105.

'"* Walshe, Thus Have I Heard, pp. 106-107.
""5P55/1, pp. 75-76.
341
 Buddhist iddhis and abhififias AM vibhutis

Third abhififid
1. Self multiplication
2. Appearing and disappearing at will
3. Passing through solid objects
4. Sinking into and emerging from ground
5. Walking on water
6. Flying through sky cross-legged
7. Touching the sun and moon
8. Travelling to the Brahma world
Fourth abhififid: Divine ear
Fifth abhififid: Knowledge of others' minds
Prakdmya - taking any form at will.
Laghimd - being anywhere at will.
Ariimd - becoming so minute as to be able
to enter into solid objects or the earth.
Laghimd - becoming so light as to be able
to walk on water and fly through the sky;
being able to go anywhere at will.
Isitva - being able to witness speech or
sounds of all entities.
Anataraydmitva - being able to see into
the inner nature of all entities.

The first two abhififids - knowledge of the elemental nature of the body and production of a mind-
made body - do not have evident counterparts in Sarkar's AM. Similarly, three vibhutis, namely
mahimd, vasitva, and prdpti, do not have evident counterparts in the Sdmanfiaphala Sutta.
The Buddhist tevijjd can be compared with AM's omniscience (trikdlasarvabhuta jfidna) and
spiritual knowledge (aparoksa bodha). In particular, the first two knowledges - knowledge of
previous existences and knowledge of passing away and arising of beings - fall within the scope of
Sarkar's trikdlasarvabhuta jfidna, a direct knowledge of all things existing in the past, present and
future. Such omniscient knowledge, according to Sarkar, is a frait of perfection in savikalpa samddhi
or merger into the cosmic mind. The third knowledge - knowledge of the desfruction of cormptions -
resembles, in function and status, the ultimate spiritual knowledge that is the fruit of perfection in
nirvikalpa samddhi The most obvious difference is that in the case of the Buddha's third knowledge,
the four noble truths constitute its substance, whUe in the case of Sarkar's spiritual knowledge, the
singular trath of parama purusa experienced as non-duality of knower, knowing, and the object of
knowledge is of the essence. It is debatable whether these two ultimate knowledges are identical, but
they have this in common that upon realising these knowledges, a total eradication of limiting and
unwholesome mental tendencies occurs. In the Buddhist case, the corraptions are eliminated, never to
arise again; in AM's case, the eight bondages (asta pdsa) and six enemies (sadripu) no longer beset
the mind.
hi this comparison of AM with Buddhism, questions have been raised as well as answered.
Many points of ambiguity remain and requfre further clarification and understanding, hi the next
chapter, we will retum our attention to the Hindu context of Sarkar's teachings, in an attempt to sort
out the possible influences on Sarkar's thinking, and the degree to which he is a contemporary
advocate of classical and Bengali Tanfra. Finally, in the concluding chapter, I will sum up aU die
various stands of hidian thought and praxis that appear to have contributed to Sarkar's formulation of
AM, and argue the thesis that Sarkar, in spite of his avowed non-allegiance to any known gum-
disciple lineage or religious tradition, can be justifiably regarded as an authentic guru of Tantra.
342
 Chapter 8
The Tantric Legacy

This chapter wiU continue from the previous chapter with an analysis of the three main schools of
Tantra as understood in their traditional context. Attention will be paid to how Sarkar has
reconceptualised traditional concepts in the service of his AM project. The Saiva and Vaisnava
traditions are of particular interest for their relationships to Sarkar's Tantric praxis and his concept of
bhakti respectively. In particular, Sarkar's brahmacakra theory will be compared with the cosmology
of Kashmir Saivism. The contribution of Sakta concepts such as kuridalirii and sakti to Sarkar's AM
will also be discussed. The Bengali milieu, in which Sarkar grew up and in which he developed his
mission, is pertinent to an examination of the sources of his ideas. As such, Sarkar's AM will be
compared with Bengali Vaisnavism and Tantrism for commonalities and differences, with suggestions
on how Sarkar may have adapted key ideas from Bengali spfrituality in formulating his own ideology.

8.1 Medieval Hindu Systems

The five major traditions of medieval Hinduism, namely the Sakta, Saiva, Vaisnava, Ganapatya, and
Saura sfrands, correspond to Sarkar's 'five schools of Tantra', which form the context of his Tantric
philosophy and praxis, both spiritual and social. As a pan-Indian movement from the fourth century
onwards, Tantra can be historically identified as a syncretistic, popular and highly esoteric stream of
Indian spirituality that draws its sustenance from a wide variety of sources.' This section will examine
the general features of three out of these five Hindu Tantric systems and posit how elements from
these three may have been interwoven and built into Sarkar's spiritual worldview. The Sakta, Saiva,
and Vaisnava systems will be examined in light of thefr similarities, differences, and possible
contributions to Sarkar's Tantra.
Mishra states that any practice or teaching that claims to be authentically Tantric needs to be
measured against two criteria: (1) whether that particular practice is consistent with Tantric
philosophy, and (2) whether an in-depth analysis of the Tanfric texts produces evidence for that
particular practice/teaching.' As mentioned previously in Chapter 5, Sarkar saw his Ananda Marga as
a unique blending of the Sakta, Saiva, and Vaisnava systems of Tantric practice; examining the central
features and doctrines of these traditional systems will allow us to gauge the authenticity of Sarkar's
AM in relation to them. It is therefore to these systems that we now limit our attention.

See Feuerstein, Tantra, pp. 1-31. For an excellent historical discussion on Tantiic religion, see Teun
Goudriaan, 'Tantiism in History', in Sanjukta Gupta, Dirk Jan Hoens, and Teun Goudriaan (eds.), Hindu
Tantrism (Leiden/KOln: E. J. Brill, 1979), pp. 13-46.

343
8.1.1 Saktism and Sarkarian Tantra
The Sakta tradition is identified with worship of the female aspect of the divine, Devi, in any of her
varied manifestations. It is regarded by some scholars as identical to the historical movement of
Hindu Tantra, whose literary works can befracedto the 5* century CE. or slightiy earUer. Feuerstein
(1998) argues that Goddess worship or worship of the feminine psychocosmic principle, Sakti, is
cenfral to many Tantric schools, and may have existed even in ancient Vedic times. He says:

The Tantric masters and practitioners merely drew on the existing sacred lore and ritual
practices revolving around the Goddess, as cunent especially in nu-al communities of
India. Some scholars have therefore assigned to Tanti-a an age equaUing, if not
surpassing, that of the Vedas.

Amongst some Westem scholars and believers, the Sakta tradition has been almost exclusively
equated with Hindu Tanfra, though from Sarkar's perspective, the Sakta system of phUosophy and
practice is only one of the five major strands of Tantra. Other scholars, though, use the term 'Tantra'
broadly to include not only the Sakta tradition, but also the Saiva tradition of Kashmfr. For clarity and
consistency, I will henceforth use the term 'Sakta-Tantric tradition' to refer to what scholars
commonly take to be Hindu Tantra, and the word 'Tantra' alone when referring to the broader usage
of the term (which is consonant with Sarkar's definition of Tantra). Bhattacaryya (1982) mentions the
existence of five major cults in India associated with the common non-Brahmanical masses - the
Vaisnava, Saiva, Sakta, Ganapatya, and Saura cults. In his view, these five cults have all been
associated with Tantrism in terms of their various philosophies, rituals, and social practices. He states
that these five cults amalgamated into a composite religious system over the course of history under
Brahmanical (Vedic) influence to become the Smarta Pancopasana.' In a rather similar way, though as
a feat of modem adaptation rather than of medieval amalgamation, Sarkar's Tantra - otherwise known
as Ananda Marga - has been claimed by Sarkar himself to be a unique synthesis of the Sakta, Saiva
and Vaisnava systems. We will now explore how Sarkar may have borrowed elements of the Sakta-
Tantric tradition in the constraction of his own Tantric system.
In the Sakta-Tanfric fradition, the feminine principle in the form of a female deity is given
prominence over all male deities such as Siva and Vispu. In this fradition, ultimate reality is seen to
be the supreme matter or life-force rather than supreme spfrit or consciousness (as is the case in the
Saiva tradition). The most important textual sources of this fradition include the comparatively late
Devi Puranas - collections of myths, lore, and speculation centred on the female supreme deity - and

' Kamalakar Mishra, Kashmir Saivism: The Central Philosophy of Tantrism, p. 31.
See e.g. Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 454. Feuerstein stresses, however, that 'the boundaries between
Saivism and Saktism are ratherfluid'(p. 454).
" Ibid.
^ Narendra Nath BhaUacaryya, History of the Tantric Religion: A Historical, Ritualistic, and Philosophical
Study (New Delhi: Manohar Publications, 1982), pp. 272-273.
344
the Sakta Tanti-as - a large number of texts pertaining to Sakti worship and ritual.^ Sakta-Tantrikas, or
practitioners of the Sakta-Tanfric tradition, divide the path of practice into seven stages.' The fnst
three of these seven involve common Hindu practices such as common worship (Vaidikacara),
devotion to Visnu (Vaisnavacara), and meditation on Siva (Saivacara). The fourth to seventh stages
represent forms of practice unique to the Sakta-Tanfra tradition, namely Daksinacara ('right-handed
worship'), Vamacara ('left-handed worship'), Siddhantacara ('perfect worship'), and Kulacara
('divine way of life'). Daksinacara involves worship of DevT as the supreme Goddess using Vedic

rites and repetition (japa) of her name, while Vamacara involves Goddess worship, usually in a group,
where the five makdras - mdrrisa ('meat'), matsya ('fish'), mudrd ('parched grain'), madya
('intoxicants'), and maithuna ('sexual intercourse') - are employed in a highly secretive and ritualistic
fashion. Siddhantacara comprises all the aforementioned practices except that thefr practice is no
longer kept a secret from the public. The public acknowledgement of one's allegiance to such
practices, widely perceived to be antinomian and anti-social, is regarded as a sign that one has
transcended distinctions between pure and impure, good and bad. The highest stage of Sakta-Tantric
practice is Kulacara, wherein the practitioner has supposedly transcended all conventional morality
and prohibitions as a result of his or her realisation of ultimate reality. Such a practitioner, termed a
kaula, is deemed to have penetrated the veils of illusory concepts and is completely free of all
bondages, seeing him or herself in all things and vice versa.
Tuming to Sarkar's articulation of his Ananda Marga, it can be seen that Sarkar displaces all
the aforementioned dcdras with his Madhyamacara, the 'middle path'. He mentions all seven stages
of Tantric practice in his texts but does not identify any of them with his Ananda Marga, a path to
which he gives the new term 'Madhyamacara'. Sarkar's Madhyamacara is characterised by straggle
against the forces of mdyd (sakti in its world-creating and world-deluding phase) and a constant
movement towards spiritual enlightenment with brahma as the ultimate goal. He eschews all practices
involving ritualistic worship and the five makdras (to which he gives subtier psychological and Yogic
interpretations), privileging instead the inner practices of meditative concentration and ideation.
While agreeing with the general Kulacara view that a realised soul has transcended all duality, moral
judgement, and differentiation, Sarkar nevertheless enjoins a strict moral and social code for foUowers
of his Madhyamacara. This strict adherence to morality is said not to be due to a differentiating,
unenlightened mind that mechanically judges between good and bad, but rather to be rooted in the
integral vision of the world as relative trath - a real world with traly existing objects - whose essence
is ultimately brahma, infinite consciousness. In other words, Sarkar does not deny the reality of the

See e.g. Klostermaier, Survey, pp. 279-283; and Teun Goudriaan, 'Intioduction', in Hindu Tantrism, pp. 3-12.
Examples of Sakta Tantias include the Vdmakesvara Tantra, Rudraydmala, Tripurd Rahasya and Mahdnirvdria
Tantra. Goudriaan says: 'The texts themselves ... are not unanimous about the number of Tantras, but the
number 64 is mostfrequentamong them' (p. 11). He continues: ' The Sakta Tantras are usually presented as
dialogues, or rather interviews, between this divine couple [Siva, the Highest Being, and Devi, the Great
Goddess], although in a small minority of texts ... Devi is the proclaimer' (p. 13).
See Klostermaier, Survey, p. 285.
345
worid and its ways but contextualises it against the larger and deeper reality of brahma, which is
simultaneously the material substance of the world, its fu-st cause, and its final goal. In this light,
moral behaviour reflects the integral understanding that a conventionally real world demands
conventionally appropriate action, though such action is entfrely ego-less and ultimately immersed in
the sea of the divine. Sarkar does, however, acknowledge that for those who are unable to conti-ol
their basic instincts, the private practice of the five makdras with an attitude of sacredness and with
brahma as the ultimate goal can be a stepping-stone to higher and subtier practices of AM. Thus,
while Sarkar's Tanfra does not include antinomian practices traditionally associated with the Sakta-
Tantricti-adition,it does not condemn them outright as long as they are practised in the correct spirit.
Within the Sakta-Tantric tradition, concepts of yantra, mantra, kuridaliru-sakti, and the
psychophysiology of nddis and cakras feature prominentiy in its modes of worship and meditation.*
The yantra is a graphic and geometric symbol of the Goddess used specifically for worship and
meditation, of which the Sfiyantra is perhaps the best known example.^ It usually comprises letters of
the alphabet, representing the mantra-hody of the Goddess, arranged in special geometric pattems in
conjunction with two (or more) interlocking triangles, one upward-pointing (symbolising Siva) and
one downward-pointing (symbolising Sakti). Concentric wheels, upon which are inscribed letters of
the alphabet and bija-mantras ('seed spells') representing aspects of divinity, encfrcle the triangles.
Four walls bound the entfre pattem, each wall with a gate facing one of the four cardinal dfrections,
representing a door through which the devotee may enter the divine sanctuary by means of meditative
worship. In such worship, the devotee's attention is progressively shifted from the periphery to the
innermost centre of the yantra, wherein he or she finally identifies with the cenfral reality of the
Goddess. In common with the Sakta-Tanttikas, Sarkar has designed a specific yantra for his AM,
which he calls the pratika. Here, he parts company with the Saktas, for instead of being a symbol for
female divinity, the pratika is meant to symbolically encapsulate the entfre ideology of AM. The
pratika sums up the AM's mission statement, which is 'self realisation and service to the entke
creation'. It serves as a contemplative device that reminds followers of the message that a balanced
practice of inner realisation and outer action will lead to all-round progress and finally to spiritual
victory. In designing the pratika, Sarkar reinterprets the purpose of yantra as a 'pictorial mission
statement', an aid to contemplation on, and affirmation of, one's beliefs and values rather than as a
symbol for divine worship.'"

See Klostermaier, Survey, pp. 286-289. The Tanti-ic theory of cakra, nddi, and kuridalini is described in two
comparatively late works (16 century CE. ?), the Satcakraniruparia and Pddukdpaficaka, both of which have
been translated by Sir John Woodroffe under the pen-name of Arthur Avalon; see Arthur Avalon, The Serpent
Power: The Secrets of Tantric and Shaktic Yoga (New York: Dover Publications, 1974).
For a more detailed discussion on the symbolism of Sriyantra, see Dirk Jan Hoens, 'Mantra and Other
Constituents of Tantiic Practice', in Hindu Tantrism, pp. 114-115.
In practice, it is commonly accepted by AM practitioners that the pratika does have a subtle liberative effect
on the mind as a result of the special vibrations it emanates, and that wearing the pratika as a pendant around the
neck 'defeats any occult avidyd practices and guarantees one protection of the guru at all times' (see AMSSP D
32). ' ^'
346
 In Sakti worship, the use of yantra often goes together with mantra and the enactment of
mudrds (hand gestures with specific religious meanings)." One central idea is that of the physical
body being the seat of divinity: the macrocosm of the divine universe is reflected in every detail in the
microcosm of the body. The letters of the alphabet are thought to form the body of the Goddess and of
the devotee as well. A Sakta-Tantric practice known as nydsa involves placing each letter of the
alphabet upon a different part of the body and consequently transforming each part into its divine
form." The body of the worshipper is thus ritually and systematically divinised through the use of
letters of the alphabet, which are believed to possess divine potency much as mantras do. In confrast,
Sarkar does not advocate a practice such as nydsa, nor does he subscribe to the idea that each letter of
the alphabet constitutes the physical body of the devotee. Instead, in his theory of biopsychology, the
fifty letters of the Sanskrit alphabet correspond to the acoustic properties of the fifty vrttis or
propensities of the human mind, distributed in a systematic manner throughout the ffrst six cakras of
the body. In his view, each cakra contains a specific acoustic pattem constituted by the various
acoustic roots (and hence propensities) that are associated with that cakra. While Sarkar's theory of
letters differs considerably from the Sakta-Tantric view, it is nevertheless reminiscent of the peculiarly
Tantric style of correlating and coalescing language, linguistics, psychology, physiology, and
metaphysics into one holistic framework. Sarkar and the Saktas differ in the details of how such a
correlation and convergence of ideas should take place. For Sarkar letters, or more precisely their
acoustic roots, are intimately linked to the psychophysiology of the body, which reinterprets the
traditional notion of cakras as nerve plexuses and associated glands. It can be argued that in Sarkar's
rewriting of Tantric ideas, an attempt has been made to adapt some of the terminology to the epistemic
stmctures and knowledge base of modemity, rendering it more palatable to modem readers.

The concepts of kuridalirii-sakti and cakras are probably the best known aspects of the Sakta-
Tantric tradition, and indeed feature prominently in its soteriology." Sakti is thought to be coiled up
like a snake at the base of the spine where it lies dormant until awakened through Tantric worship.
When as a result of Tanfric worship, the kuridalirii-sakti awakes and rises up the spinal cord through
the six cakras, finally reaching the 'thousand-petalled lotus' at the crown of the head, the blissful
union of siva and sakti takes place. This represents, for the devotee, a state of liberation and highest
happiness. In Sakta-Tantric philosophy, the cakras are depicted geometrically and pictoriaUy, with a
certain geometric shape and a specific number of lotus petals corresponding to each cakra.
Klostermaier (1994) summarises:

" See Dirk Jan Hoens, 'Manti-a ...',pp. 115-117

Hoens distinguishes two forms of nydsa: mantranydsa (placing of mantra) and mdtrkdnydsa (placing of whole
alphabeO; see Dirk Jan Hoens, 'Mantia ...', pp. 109-110.
For an account of Sakta-Tantric spiritual praxis, see Sanjukta Gupta, 'Tantric Sadhana: Yoga', in Hindu
Tantrism, pp. 163-185. Gupta says: 'The two disciplines which are characteristically Tantric, and which are
indeed always present in Tantia yoga, are meditation on mystic syllables (Mantra yoga) and a scheme of
meditation, known as Laya yoga or Kundalini yoga, which concerns an elaborate mystical physiology [italics
mine]' (p. 163).
347
 Thus mulddhdra, the ffrst of the cakras, lying at the base of the spine, the root of
susumrid and the resting place of Kuridalirii, is depicted as a triangle encircled by an
orb with four lotus petals, on which the syllables vam, sam, sarri, sarri are written. In
the centre of the lotus lies the syambhu liriga of a rast-brown colour ... The next cakra
is svddhisthdna, a six-petalled lotus at the base of the sexual organ; above it is marii-
pura, the jewel-city, a ten-petaUed golden lotus in the navel. In the region of the heart
is andhata cakra, a deep-red lotus with twelve petals; above it, at the base of the throat,
is visuddha cakra, the dwelling place of the god of speech, a lotus with sixteen petals.
Between the eyebrows we have djfid cakra, a two-petalled lotus ... the place of the
bija-mantra Om and the dwelling place of the three main gurias. Here dwell Para-Siva
in the form of a swan and Kdti-Sakti.

The above depiction of the cakras confrasts with Sarkar's understanding of them. In his depiction, the
lotuses with thefr petals are symbolic of glands with thefr sub-glands; there is no talk of deities such as
the 'god of speech', 'Para-Siva', and 'Kdti-Sakti' at certain cakras. Not surprisingly, the number of
glands and sub-glands (and propensities) in Sarkar's cakra theory corresponds exactly to the number
of petals in each cakra in the Sakta-Tantric version. Again, it can be noted that Sarkar's
reinterpretation gives a scientific gloss to the fraditional notion of cakras and perhaps makes it more
acceptable to contemporary minds. Klostermaier (1994) mentions two other cakras additional to the
commonly known seven, which are depicted in the Sakta-Tantric tradition:

Above this [djfid cakra] is the manas cakra and soma cakra, with sixteen petals. These
are krpd, grace; mrdutd, sweetness; dhairya, fumness; vairdgya, renunciation; dhrti,
constancy; sampat, wealth; hdsya, gaiety; romdricd, enthusiasm; vinaya, discipline;
dhydna, meditation; susthiratd, relaxation; gambhirya, seriousness; udyama, effort;
aksobhya, imperturbility; auddrya, generosity; and ekdgratd, onepointedness. Above
this cakra is the nirdlarriband puri, the city without support, wherein the yogis behold
the radiant Isvara.'^

Comparing the 'sixteen petals' of the above passage with Anandamitra's'* description of the sixteen
atfributes found in the fourth layer of the mind, the vijfidnamaya kosa, one notes a dfrect and identical
conespondence. While Anandamitra locates these sixteen attributes in the vijfidnamaya kosa, which
confrols the andhata cakra, the Saktas locate them in the manas and soma cakras, which supposedly
exist above the djdd cakra. The exact correspondence between petals and attributes, in number and
nature, strongly suggests a borrowing on Anandamitra's part from the Saktas, though a satisfactory
explanation for the shift from manas and soma cakras to vijfidnamaya kosa would need to be found. It
also appears that Sarkar does not recognise the sixteen attributes mentioned by Anandamitta,
suggesting a discrepancy between Sarkar's original works and the works of his commentators.

'" Klostermaier, Survey, p. 288.

'^Ibid.
Anandamitra, commenting on Sarkar's AS in her SPSSA, mentions sixteen attiibutes of the vijfidnamaya koia
(confroUing kosa of the andhdta cakra), which Sarkar makes no mention of in his texts. Sarkar enumerates a list
of twelve propensities situated in the dndhdta cakra, a list which differs in number and content from
Anandamitia's listing of sixteen attributes.
348
 With regard to the sahasrdra cakra, the Saktas posit that this topmost cakra houses the
supreme deity, Devi, and that each petal of the lotus contains all the letters of the alphabet. Here, all
the expressions of the universe exist in unmanifested form. This idea is echoed by Sarkar's assertion
that the sahasrdra cakra contains the unmanifest seed of aU the one thousand propensities of the mind.
Again, a theory of mythical letters and macrocosmic creation in the Sakta-Tantric fradition is
translated by Sarkar into a theory of microcosmic biopsychology.

8.1.2 Saivism and Sarkarian Tantra

We will now move on to examine the Saiva-Tanfric tradition and its possible connections to Sarkarian
Tantra. Both the northem and southem variations of Saivism will be discussed, though our primary
focus wiU be on the non-dual Saivism of Kashmir, since Sarkar's non-dualist metaphysic and Tantric
praxis bear closest resemblance to those of Kashmir Saivism. A comparative critique of Sarkarian
Tantra will be undertaken on the basis of that discussion.
The Saiva tradition is identified with worship of and devotion to Siva as the supreme deity of
the universe. Klostermaier notes that Siva worship has been traced back to the Indus civilisation,
where lirigas or phallic symbols, as well as seals interpreted as Siva Mahayogi ('Siva, the Great Yogi')
and Siva PaSupati ('Siva, Lord of the Beasts'), have been found. He also mentions that Saivism is
historically rooted in the Tamil country, with the figure of Siva having been formed from a variety of
sources including northwest Indian tribal religions, the official Vedic religion, and the indigenous
Indus civilisation. Early textual sources of Saivism can be traced to the Rgveda, Yajurveda,
Atharvaveda, and the relatively later SvetaSvatara Upanisad. The epics, Ramayana and Mahabharata,
also mention several Siva myths and stories. The main sources of Saivism are, however, the Siva
Puranas and Agamas, which are regarded as comparatively late compositions possibly containing
much ancient material." Klostermaier comments:

In the Puranas, Siva mythology reaches its fullest development and also its exclusivity:
Siva is the Only Lord, Visnu and Brahma are inferior to him ... The Saiva Agamas
detail the mode of worship that has to be followed in Saiva temples and homes ...
From very early times Saivism has been connected with rigorous asceticism. Yogis are
traditionally Saivas, seeing in Siva himself the Mahayogi.'*

In Sarkar's Tanfra, the semi-historical, semi-mythical figure of Siva features prominently and
assumes an air of real-life historicity. In Sarkar's view, Siva was a historical figure who lived in India
about seven thousand years ago and who was instmmental in systematising and teaching a primordial
form of Tantra. Sarkar sees Siva as a great community leader and Tantric guru who lived and thrived
in a region he calls Rarh, roughly corresponding to the area of north-western Bengal and north-eastern
Bihar. In Sarkar's writings, Siva is the first manifestation of tdraka brahma, the liberating aspect of

" SPSSA. pp. 262-267.

349
the cosmic entity, whose sole mission was, and still is, to bring salvation to humanity both individuaUy
and collectively. Sarkar gives his ideas on Siva in one of his major works, Namah Sivdya Sdntdya,
which is a collection of talks on Siva (both as a historical personage and as a philosophical concept)
delivered between the months of April and August in 1982. In Sarkar's historical depiction of him,
Siva was not only a well-loved spiritual guru but also a humanitarian and a pioneer of the arts and
sciences, without whom human culture and civilisation would not exist as we know them. Sarkar's
Siva 'played a cmcial role in propelling human society on a forward path in education, medicine,
social code, music, dance, phonetics and of course, intuitional science'.'^ It appears that Sarkar's
historiography, while having some basis in historical evidence, claims far more than can be
substantiated by currentiy available evidence on Siva. It can, thus, be read as an attempt at
mythological contextualisation and perhaps legitimation for Sarkar's own role as a mass guru and the
harbinger of a new civilisational order.

Pdsupata Sect
Saivism manifests in Northem and Southem Indian varieties, and in several sects and philosophical
schools, of which the oldest on record is the Palupata sect. '° The teachings of the PaSupata sect are
largely identical to those of the Saiva Siddhanta school of South India. The PaSupata sect, itself
subdivided into many sub-sects, stresses the liberation of the self through both individual effort and
Siva's grace, and sees the person in bondage as ' ... pasu, an ox, whose Lord is Siva ...'. The sect
advocates the practice of japa (manfra repetition) and meditation as well as a plethora of odd
behaviours such as bathing in ashes, dancing like a madman, snoring, and limping, presumably as
signs of divine intoxication." While Sarkar certainly endorses the practice of japa and meditation,
and the idea of self-effort in combination with divine grace, his soteriological praxis has no place for
ritualistic and eccentric behaviours. These behaviours are perhaps seen by him as superstitious
dogmas, contrary to the spirit of rationality which he takes pains to identify with his own ideology. It
can be argued that Sarkar's accentuation of the interior meditative rather than the exterior ritualistic
aspects of Saiva praxis exemplifies his aim of rationalising and reviving the essence of Tanfra.

Saiva Siddhdnta
A major sect of Saivism is Saiva Siddhanta ('the Final Trath of Siva') or Tamil Saivism, which is
based on the recorded teachings of Tamil saints and mystics known as Nayanars and on the twenty-
eight recognised Agama texts." Historically, Saiva Siddhanta flourished in South India during the
period between the seventh and the ninth centuries CE. This school regarded ultimate reality as siva,
whose essence is sat ('being') and cit ('consciousness'). Unlike the schools of Vedanta, Saiva

'* 5P55A, p. 267.

" NSS, p. xi.
20
See e.g. Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, pp. 344-346; and Klostermaier, Survey, pp. 263 and 267-268.
Klostermaier, Survey, p. 267.

350
Siddhanta perceives the world not as an illusion but as a real, albeit limited, expression of siva. Here,
the term siva is used as a quasi-philosophical, theistic concept, representing both a personal god and an
ontological substance of the universe. As such, siva is regarded as having utmost benevolence for
suffering humans; he manifests in bodily form as a guru to save them from bondage and pain:

Diksd, initiation, is the direct cause of liberation; but diksd is not possible without
knowledge ... There are three different kinds of knowledge: pasu jndna and pdsa
jfidna give only knowledge of the soul, of words and things. Only pati jfidna gives
liberation. The way to it leads through the guru's teaching; it is Siva who appears in
the form of a guru, opens the eyes of the devotee, performs the purificatory rites, and
removes the obstacles."

In Saiva Siddhanta, the spirit of loving devotion to siva is upheld and devotees are urged to smrender
totally to his grace for spiritual emancipation. In conttast to the Pa^upata sect, the Saiva Siddhanta
privileges siva's grace and extols complete devotion to siva above all else. For Saiva Siddhantins, the
state of liberation is 'the state of love' and 'devotion as expressed in self-sunender is not a mere
method (sddhand), but participation in the final liberation itself'" Spiritual emancipation is
conceived as a state of union with Siva, attained by the devotee while still embodied. The ideal of
embodied liberation (flvan-mukti) features prominentiy in Saiva Siddhanta." It is defined as the state
of such total identification with Siva that self, other, and the world all become expressions of the
divine. However, such identification does not imply that the individual soul merges into Siva; the soul
remains distinct from the Lord while contemplating its oneness with Siva.
Saiva Siddhanta's ontological concept of siva as the immanent ground of a real but finite
world, its emphasis on loving sunender to the divine, its view of siva manifesting as the guru, and its
relegation of salvational potency solely to siva's grace - all these resemble, in many ways, Sarkar's
own ideology and praxis. A significant difference lies in the varying emphasis on embodied liberation
(flvan-mukti) between Saiva Siddhanta and Sarkar. While Saiva Siddhanta unambiguously asserts the
possibility and desfrability of the state of flvan-mukti, of which at least seven grades are admitted,
Sarkar does not explicitly and unequivocally state the possibility of flvan-mukti Also, in relation to
the guru, Sarkar asserts that the true guru is not the human teacher but brahma, for brahmaiva
gururekah ndparah: 'Brahma alone is gum, no one else'.'* In this way, Sarkar emphasises divine

" See e.g. Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, pp. 367-370; and Klostermaier, Survey, pp. 268-270.
Klostermaier, Survey, p. 269.
" Chacko Valiaveetil, S. J., 'Living Liberation in Saiva Siddhanta', in Andrew O. Fort and Patricia Y. Mumme
(eds.). Living Liberation in Hindu Thought (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1996), p. 225.
See e.g Chacko Valiaveetil, S. J., 'Living Liberation in Saiva Siddhanta', pp. 223-239. Valiaveetil says: '...
we cannot speak of a particular moment in the spiritual life of the aspirant (sddhaka) when he or she becomes a
flvanmukta. There are ups and downs in his or her spiritual experience. ... It is a continual process that lasts all
through one's life. Theflvanmukta'slife continues as before, but in place of attachment to and union with the
fetters (pdia), now there is intense attachment to and union with Siva. Total freedom from the bonds is possible
only at liberation after death (videhamukti)' (p. 226). The fivanmukta thus '... freed of egoism and attachment to
things ... becomes God's instiument in bringing his or her salvation to the world' (p. 239).
"/15, p. 34.
351
power behind the human teacher and strives to shift the locus of devotion to the supreme entity itself
In contrast to Saiva Siddhanta, Sarkar names brahma rather than siva as the supreme guru, though in
essence, context and function, they are not substantially different. FinaUy, it appears that Sarkar goes
further than Saiva Siddhanta in admitting the possibility of ontic oneness of the individual and the
divine.

Vira-Saivism or Lingdyata Sect

Another important Saiva school, is Vfra-Saivism ('Heroic Siva religion'), otherwise known as the
Lingayata sect. This school originated with Basava in the twelfth century C E . though its adherents
believe that it has ancient roots and was merely reorganised by Basava." Vfra-Saivism bases itself on
the twenty-eight Agamas and the Tamil Nayanars, as well as later writers. The most distinctive
feature of the school is that its adherents worship siva in the form of a phaUic symbol (liriga), a
miniature stone form of which they wear in a small box attached to a necklace. They practise the
pancdcdra ('fivefold worship'), comprising ' ... daily worship of the liriga, moral and decent life and
work, amity toward all Lingayats, humility, and active straggle against those who despise Siva or iU-
treat his devotees'; and the astdvararia ('eightfold armour'), comprising ' ... obedience toward the
guru, wearing a linga, worship of Siva ascetics as incamation of Siva, sipping water in which the feet
of the guru have been bathed, offering food to a guru, smearing ashes on [their] body, wearing a string
of rudrdksa beads, and reciting the mantra: sivdya namah'}^ For the ordinary adherent, faithful
observance of these commandments is deemed sufficient for salvation, while for others, worship and
meditation leading to oneness with Siva are deemed necessary. Sarkar's spiritual praxis bears little, if
any, resemblance to, these commandments and ritual practices, the only exceptions being meditation
and mantra recitation (albeit using a different mantra and possibly different meditative techniques).
For Sarkar, rituals play no part in spiritual release, while morality, meditation, devotion, and service
are essential.
Greater similarities can be found in theology and ontology, however, as Vfra-Saivism teaches
that the soul is one with siva and that the individual is but a body of siva. In other words, paramasiva
('supreme siva') is seen to be the material and insfrumental cause of the universe, while sakti, the
creative principle, resides etemally in paramasiva and brings forth all things during cosmic creation
and absorbs them back into itself during cosmic desfruction. The separation between the individual
(jiva) and the Lord (siva) is due to ignorance, and it is through bhakti (devotion) - a part of diva's sakA
- that final liberation is possible. Sarkar* s ideas on cosmogony and soteriology resemble their
historically older Vfra-Saiva counterparts to some extent. For Sarkar, the cognitive principle or siva is
both the material and chief efficient cause of the universe, and creation takes place as a result of the
qualification of siva by sakti, its creative principle. Sarkar gives precise information about how

" See e.g. Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, pp. 350-351; and Klostermaier, Survey, pp. 273-274.
'* Klostermaier, Survey, p. 273.
352
creation sprouts forth from one vertex of the triangle of forces set up by sakti, a view that is richer in
detail and explanation than, but not unlike, the general cosmogonic proposition of Vfra-Saivism. One
cmcial difference lies in thefr divergent views on the final joumey and destination of the universe.
Sarkar interprets the process of cosmic retum in terms of individual self-realisation through spiritual
practice, devotion, and the attractive grace of siva as pure consciousness, rather than as dissolution of
the universe into the divine matrix at a particular end-point. For Sarkar, 'thermal death' of the
universe, wherein the universe progressively loses heat and everything dissolves into the oblivion of
the Absolute, can never occur. The picture is of a constantly creative and evolving universe wherein
new entities are ever being produced from matter, even as a few sufficientiy evolved individuals are
merging into their divine origin by virtue of thefr dedicated spiritual practice and a touch of cosmic
grace. In this process, matter itself is constantly produced from the limitless parama purusa, so the
cycle never ends; nor did it ever have a beginning. As in Vfra-Saivism, Sarkar sees bhakti as the
primary means by which one can realise final release, though for him, self-effort in the form of a
disciplined and moral life, regular meditative practice, and selfless service to the universe are also
essential, though insufficient in themselves, for the realisation of enlightenment.
On the social front, Vfra-Saivas are ardent social reformers, striving for greater social justice
and equality. They champion widow remarriage, late marriage, and abolition of the caste system, and
are generally quite progressive in economic and social matters." All these bear resemblance to the
ideals of Sarkar's AM, which challenges the dowry, maniage, and caste systems offraditionalIndia in
favour of greater egalitarianism, rationality, and cross-cultural mixing, both in principle and in
practice. While not directly related to Sarkar's spfritual ideas, these similarities in social ideals
between Vfra-Saivism and AM suggest a striking confluence of spirit. While it is not possible to say
with any certainty whether Sarkar bonowed from Vira-Saivism when constmcting his social ideology,
it can be suggested that Sarkar's anti-traditionalism and critical stance toward oppressive power
structures are not entfrely unprecedented. Such a spirit of radical reform may well be an underlying
(and at times openly manifest) cunent in the sfream of Indian spirituality, in which Sarkar is located
both historically and culturally.

Kashmir Saivism
Northem Saivism, also known as Kashmir Saivism, will now be the focus of our comparative analysis
vis-a-vis Sarkarian Tanfra. Like its southem counterpart, Northem Saivism bases itself on the
voluminous Agama literature, traditionally said to comprise twenty-eight root (mula) scriptures and
207 secondary scriptures (called Updgamas)^ While its adherents claim the Agamas (as well as the
Tantras) as official revelations that merely restate the tmths of the Vedas for the cunent degenerate
age (kdli-yuga), mainstream Brahmins reject this claim and regard these texts as false revelations.

See Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 351.

Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 351. An illuminating account of Kashmir Saivism can be found in Kamalakar
Mishra, Kashmir Saivism: The Central Philosophy of Tantrism (Portland: Oregon Press, 1993).
353
There are four main interlinked systems of Kashmir Saivism, namely the Krama and Trika systems,
the Spanda or 'Vibration' school, and the Pratyabhijiia or 'Recognition' school. In Kashmir Saivism
or Tantrism in general, theoretical concepts of Sainkhya, such as the twenty-five tattvas, are
incorporated into Tantric cosmology by relegating them to a position inferior to ultimate
consciousness (paramasiva) and the powers (saktis).
The Krama system has two branches of practice; one focussed on the God Siva and the other
on the Goddess Kali as the divine Absolute. Both branches teach a practical method rather similar to
the eight-limbed path of Raja Yoga, but with yama, niyama, and dsana grouped together as one
category and with tarka (reasoning) added as a separate 'limb' of practice. Vamacara practices such
as use of wine, meat, and sex during Tantric rituals are canied out in the Kali branch of the Krama

system."
The Trika ('triadic') system of Saivism is derived from the notion of three inseparable and
interdependent aspects of the divine: siva (masculine pole), sakti (feminine pole), and nara (the
common person seeking liberation). The Trika Saiva perspective on nondualism differs from that of
Sarikara's Advaita Vedanta in that it 'seeks to encompass the rich diversity of manifestation within the
nondual principle at its heart.'" This nondual ontology of Trika Saivism is in effect 'a supreme
nondualism (parddvaita) that goes beyond "both dualism and nondualism".''" Flood describes Trika
Saivism as basically ' ... a system of initiation and liturgy ... which originated in the cult of cremation
ground as part of a wider Tantric tradition caUed the Kaula ('Familial') . . . ' . " The Kaula movement
considers itself Saiva, though it also worships female deities, including Kali. Trika Saivism will be
compared with Sarkarian Tantra with reference to the ideas of Abhinavagupta and his successors, such
as Ksemaraja.
Regarding the theory of causation, Abhinavagupta is a proponent of satkdryavdda, the
doctrine that effects or manifestation pre-exist in the cause, that is, Siva. MuUer-Ortega highlights the
observation by Alper that Abhinavagupta's brand of satkdryavdda is more clearly categorised as a
'highly qualified pariridmavdda' or 'dbhdsavdda' ?^ This is the view that attempts to reconcile

" See Knut A. Jacobsen, 'The Female Pole of the Godhead in Tanfrism and the Prakrti of Sainkhya', Numen 43
(1996): 60. Regrading dualism in Tanfra, Jacobsen points out that the "sexual polarity of the divine is, however,
radically different from the Samkhyan dualism' (p.60), since Sanjkhya's dualism is that of matter versus spirit
rather than of male versus female.
32
Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, pp. 352-353. For an elucidation of sexual yoga as a means of awakening and
confroUing kuridalini drawn from Trika, Krama, and Kaula textual sources, see Lilian Silburn, Kuridalirii:
Energy of the Depths, trans. Jacques Gontier (Albany: State University of New York, 1988).
Elizabeth Chalier-Visuvalingam, 'Union and Unity in Hindu Tantiism', in Hananya Goodman (ed.). Between
Jerusalem and Benares: Comparative Studies in Judaism and Hinduism (Albany: State University of New York
Press, 1994), p. 196. On ultimate reality in Trika Saivism, Visuvalingam says: ' ... the Absolute is characterised
by the totality of two powers (sakti), that of knowledge (jfidna) and that of activity (kriyd)' (p. 196).
' Elizabeth Chalier-Visuvalingam, 'Union and Unity ...', p. 197.
Gavin Flood, Body and Cosmology in Kashmir Saivism (San Francisco: Mellen Research University Press
1993), p. 11.
See Paul E. Muller-Ortega, The Triadic Heart of Siva: Kaula Tantricism of Abhinavagupta in the Non-Dual
Shaivism of Kashmir. First Indian Edition (Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications, 1997), pp. 97-98. In his discussion
354
pariridmavdda - the philosophical position that evolution of the universe is a real transformation of a
single causal reality - and vivartavdda (but without illusionism) - the position that 'this real process of
transformation [from Siva into the cosmos] represents a progressive decline in level of reality from
the, as it were, most real to the least real.'" Muller-Ortega adds that 'Abhinavagupta's goal was the
extremely tricky task of attempting to be faithful to the fiuid and subtiy shifting clarities of Yogic
perceptions and experiences, relating them to, but never attempting to straightjacket them in, the
categories of technical philosophy.''* Comparing with Sarkar, we can see Abhinavagupta's
dbhdsavdda reflected in Sarkar's brahmacakra theory, where he attempts to posit parama purusa as
the singular material and efficient cause of a real, not illusory, universe. And like Abhinavagupta,
Sarkar states that the universe is relative tmth," since it possesses a lower degree of reality compared
with the absolute reality of parama purusa. It is also possible to apply Muller-Ortega's reading of
Abhinavagupta to Sarkar himself, seeing Sarkar as seeking to accomplish, with his Yogic perceptions
and experiences, precisely what Abhinavagupta was attempting to do with his. This observation
remains speculative at best in the absence of further evidence. Be that as it may, the agreement
between Sarkar and Abhinavagupta in terms of causal theory is striking, suggesting an intellectual
debt on Sarkar's part to the theological and philosophical enterprise of earlier Tantric yogi-thinkers.
The best-known scriptural sources of Kashmir Saivism include the Saiva Agamas, the
Sivasutra, the Vijndna Bhairava, the Spandakdrikds, the Isvarapratyabhijfidkdrikd, the
Pardtrisikdvivararia, and the Tantrdloka.*° While the Agamas tend to portray a dualistic orientation
between the devotee and Siva, the SivasUtra brings out and emphasises the non-dualist strand of the
earlier Agama doctrines. A major teaching of the Sivasdtra, which is one of the source texts of the
Spanda tradition, is that of the four methods (updya) of achieving ultimate union with siva as pure
consciousness. In order of decreasing subtiety and profundity, these methods are: (1) anupdya (no-
means), which is the practitioner's spontaneous and effortless realisation of siva through the spiritual
master's fransmission of the teaching and his consciousness-power; it is 'the sdmbhavopdya itself, in

on Abhinavagupta's causal theory, Muller-Ortega draws on Harvey P. Alper, 'Siva and the Ubiquity of
Consciousness: The Spaciousness of an Artful Yogi', Journal of Indian Philosophy 7 (1979): 345-407.
"Paul E. Muller-Ortega, The Triadic Heart, p. 98.
^Ubid.
See AS 11.14: brahma satyarn jagadapi satyamdpeksikam [Brahma is absolutefruth;the universe is also tmth,
but relative].
The Tantrdloka is perhaps Abhinavagupta's best-known work. For a brief but clear account of the major texts
of Trika Saivism, see Kamalakar Mishra, Kashmir Saivism: The Central Philosophy of Tantrism (Portland:
Rudra Press, 1993), pp. 36-44. The Pardtrisikdvivararia expounds a metaphysics of language ascribing cosmic,
ontic, and soteriological significance to Sanskrit phonemes, underpinned by a concept of the Supreme Word
(vdk) and its relation to consciousness. Based on such metaphysics, the text focuses on the theory and practice of
mantra for soteriological purposes. See Jaideva Singh, Pardtrisikdvivararia: The Secret of Tantric Mysticism
(Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1988). Singh comments that the 'four stages of va^ as pard, pafyanti, madhyarna
and vaikhari represent a gradual descent (or ascenO from the undifferentiated, franscendental level to the
differentiated, gross level.' (p. xv). Sarkar echoes this linguistic metaphysic in his theory of acoustic roots but
gives it his own interpretation (see Chapter 3, subsection 3.4.1).
' See Jaideva Singh (tians.), Siva Sutras: The Yoga of Supreme Identity (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1979), pp.
xvi-xvii, and xliv-lii.
355
its highest maturity ...';"' (2) sdmbhavopdya (divine means), a powerful and dfrect vision of reality
spontaneously flashing forth in the practitioner's sUent mind by means of a subtie exertion (udyama)
of its innate freedom (svdtantrya) and reflexive awareness;"' (3) saktopdya (empowered means), a
process of refransmuting thought consfructs (vikalpa) back into thefr essence and source - pure
consciousness - by directing attention to pure (suddha) concepts such as the idea of one's identity with
siva;"" and (4) driavopdya (individual means), the least advanced level of practice, which resorts to
objective spfritual supports such as mantra recitation, posturmg of the body, breath confrol, sense
withdrawal, concentration on a fixed point, and meditation on a specific divine or cosmic form. Also
included in this means are aU forms of outer ritual that act as gross objects of concentration for the
mind."' A collection of 112 practices belonging to the category of driavopdya can be found in the
Vijndna Bhairava, a popular scripture probably composed in the seventh century C E . that also serves
as an initiatory manual for aspfring Saiva yogis."*
Another source for the practices of driavopdya can be found in Ksemaraja's exposition of the
Sivasutra,*^ which according to Dyczkowski (1987) is in tum based on the Netratantra and the
Svacchandabhairavatantra. Ksemaraja's commentary, written in the tenth centifry C.E., extols the
basic model of the eight-limbed (astdriga) yoga taught by Patanjali but with each limb defined in terms
of Tantric terminology and praxis. Of particular interest is a preUminary Tantric technique called
'purification of the elements' (bhdtasuddhi), 'through which the body is homologised with the
macrocosm and so made a fit vessel for the pure, conscious presence of the Deity within it'."*
Ksemaraja identifies bhdtasuddhi with a meditation (dhydna) technique wherein all the forces of the
body are visualised to be dissolving away. This is performed in two ways: the first method,
'contemplation of dissolution' (layabhdvand), entails visualising the entire cosmos with its principles,
mantras, letters, and syllables arising within one's body and then moving attention away from grosser

*^ Jaideva Singh, Siva Sutras, p. xxiii.

"" Singh quotes Abhinavagupta: 'When there is vikalpa, neither accept nor reject, it will retire of itself and you
will find yourself to be what you are' (Singh, Siva Sdtras, p. xxvi).
** In Saktopaya, thefransformativepower of spiritual praxis comes from mantra Sakti, the psychospiritual force
embedded in the mantra, which has the capacity to gradually immerse the consciousness of the practitioner in
Siva, divine consciousness. The use of manfra in Saktopaya thus differs from its use in Anavopaya. In the case
of driavopdya, mantra repetition is based on a sense of bheda or difference between practitioner and the divine.
See Jaideva Singh, Pratyabhijfidhrdayam: The Secret of Self-Recognition. Fourth Revised Edition (Delhi:
Motilal Banarsidass, 1982), p. 29.
"^A clear and insightful account of the four means to self-realisation is found in Mark S. G. Dyczkowski, The
Doctrine of Vibration: An Analysis of the Doctrines and Practices of Kashmir Saivism (Albany: State University
of New York Press, 1987), pp. 172-218.
"* Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 354.
"' See Jaideva Singh, Siva Sutras: The Yoga of Supreme Identity (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1979). Kjemaraja
is a widely noted disciple of Abhinavagupta.
Dyczkowski, Doctrine, p. 210; cf. the following comments by Agehananda Bharati: 'The oldest and most
tenacious form of manfric identification is the process of bhdtasuddhi, "purification of the elements", which is
... actually a step-by-step dissolution of grosser into subtier elements in the cosmographical hierarchy, and
culminates in a visualised merger with whatever supreme being or state the particularfraditionpostulates. In this
rite, which is a congeries of thoroughly standardised mantras and mudrds, a process of gradual involution is
thought to take place whereby at first the body is identified with its various elementary sources; ...'. Agehananda
Bharati, The Tantric Tradition (London: Rider and Company, 1965), p. 112.
356
to progressively subtier elements and finaUy right back to the primordial source. The second method,
meditation on the 'Fire of Consciousness' (dahacintd), involves a reproduction within the yogi's mind
of the process of macrocosmic destmction by the Fire of Time (kdldgni). Dyczkowski describes it
thus:

At the microcosmic level the yogi reproduces this process by mentally placing the
letters of the alphabet, in the prescribed order, on the limbs of his body starting from
the left toe to the top of the head. As his attention progresses upwards, he visualises
the Fire of Time moving with it in such a way that his bodily consciousness, together
with the universe of differentiated perceptions, is graduaUy burnt away leaving in its
place the white ashes of the undivided light of consciousness."'

Comparing the above discussion with Sarkar's description of AM praxis reveals several
interesting convergences and divergences. Like Ksemaraja, Sarkar bases his framework for praxis on
the eight-limbed yoga of Patafijali, and again like Ksemaraja, he redefines some of the factors to fit in
with his Tantric worldview. While Sarkar does not divide his path of practice into four levels as does
Kashmir Saivism, examination of his meditative techniques shows striking resemblances, both in
stmcture and emphasis, to the means (updyas) described in the texts of Kashmir Saivism. Sarkar's
emphasis on Yogic postures (dsanas), breath control (prdridydma), concentration (dhdrarid),
meditation (dhydna), and mantra recitation (japa)^° coincides with the methods advocated under
'individual means' (driavopdya). What is more interesting is that Sarkar operationalises pratydhdra
(in the form of the suddhis and varridghyaddna), prdridydma, dhdrarid, dhydna, and japa in his set of
six meditation lessons (sahaja or rdjddhirdja yoga) and ranks some of these lessons as having
precedence over others. The practices of prdridydma (the fourth lesson) and tattva dhdrarid (the third
lesson) are regarded as supportive aids to the first and sixth lessons (which are dhydna proper) and
thus are meant to lead to the 'higher' practice of dhydna. This concurs with Ksemaraja's placing of
prdridydma and dhdrarid under the category of driavopdya - somewhat limited means that are meant to
lead towards more advanced practices of saktopdya and sambhavopdya.
Sarkar's emphasis on the three suddhis (purificatory withdrawal from the world, physical
body, and mind) as preliminary phases of the first lesson exemplifies his Tantric outlook as well as the
idea that these are preparatory means towards the subtler method of mantra repetition and ideation.

"' Dyczkowski, Doctrine, p. 211.

Sarkar's concept of japa refers to manfric utterance without necessarily involving ideation on its meaning,
such as when singing the universal manfra 'bdbd ndm kevalam' aloud or during 'half-meditation' (silent
repetition of one's ista mantra while engaged in everyday activities). In this case, the vibrations of the mantra
act to naturally effect peace, bliss, and clarity in the mind. Cf. Andr6 Padoux, 'Manfras - What Are They?', in
Harvey P. Alper (ed.), Mantra. First Indian Edition (Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications, 1997), pp. 295-318.
Padoux comments: 'In kuridalirii yoga, phonemes and mantras are associated with the cenfres (cakra) of the
subtie body. Such connections between sounds and cakras look confrived and arbifrary, but we should not reject
these notions as immediately absurd. ... Scientific investigation has shown that certain sounds (as well as the
complete absence of sound) have effects, and the effect produced when the sound is emitted or received seems to
be related to certain parts of the body. Some sounds may cause the body to vibrate, may have physiological
effects, or may help to awaken certain states of consciousness.' (p. 314).
357
Sarkar stresses that mantra repetition is meaningless and ineffectual without proper ideation on its
special expansive meaning. He asserts that the nature of the mind is to constantiy think, and that a
skilful way of working with a thinking mind is not to suppress its natural activity but to replace cmde
ideas with progressively subtier ones. In the first lesson, he advocates the use of the subtiest and
purest concept - that of cosmic reflexivity - as the sole object of one's meditation. In the ffrst lesson,
the personal mantra is silentiy repeated, together with constant ideation on its meaning - the essential
oneness of cosmic reflexive awareness with individual reflexive awareness. It is this ideation, together
with the vibratory energy of the mantric sounds, which serves as the springboard to higher
consciousness for the practitioner." This ideational component of the first lesson can be justifiably
equated with the level of saktopdya, wherein the practitioner utilises a pure (suddha) concept to
facilitate the realisation of his or her identity with siva. According to Sarkar, the first lesson, when
done conectiy, leads the practitioner to savikalpa samddhi, a state of universal self-awareness
metaphysically equated with merger into saguria brahma (qualified pure consciousness):

... after continued spiritual practice the mahattattva, that is, the 'F feeling, gets
metamorphosed into the Macrocosmic 'F feeling ... the state of aU-pervasiveness of
the mahat constitutes saguridsthiti [the state of ttanscendentality], or savikalpa
samddhi [the state of determinate absorption]."

The realisation of this state of saguridsthiti or savikalpa samddhi as it unfolds within the practitioner's
mind bears close resemblance to the level of sdmbhavopdya, wherein the practitioner ' ... penetrates
directiy into the universal egoity of pure consciousness ...'." In this level of practice, the yogi's
attention is fixed on the "abounding plenitude' of reality:

The yogi who practises the Divine Means [Sdmbhavopdya] is not concemed with any
partial aspect of reality but centers his attention dfrectly on its abounding plenitude ...
the forms of contemplative absorption, empowered (sakta) and individual (dnava), that
are the fruits of the other means to realisation both attain maturity in this state of
undifferentiated awareness. This awareness is the pure ego manifest at the initial
moment of perception (prdthamikdlocana), when the power of the will to perceive is
activated.'"

" Cf. Harvey P. Alper, 'The Cosmos as Siva's Language-Game: "Manfra" According to Ksemaraja's
Sivasdtravimarsirii', in Harvey P. Alper (ed.). Mantra. First Indian Edition (Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications,
1997), pp. 249-294. Alper explains manfric utterance as, amongst other things, 'a tool of cognition', a
'metaphoric' recapitulation of the structure of the world, and a 'disclosive utterance' disclosing the dual
quiescent-active nature of the self (pp. 268-280). Alper says: 'Kgemaraja understands a mantra, in the proper
sense of the term, to be a tool of redemptive thought... [which is] grounded in and hence able to lead one back
to Siva-who-is-consciousness' (p. 269). Sarkar's concept of manfric ideation having the capacity to lead one
back to parama purusa echoes Ksemaraja's view.
"/15, pp. 14-15.
" Dyczkowski, Doctrine, p. 180.
'" Ibid.
358
The above statement suggests that the state of undifferentiated awareness experienced at the level of
Sdmbhavopdya represents the maturity of the fmits of driavopdya and saktopdya. The qualifying
attiibutes of 'universal egoity' and 'pure ego' strongly suggest that sdmbhavopdya and its fmit are
present in the culmination of Sarkar's first meditative lesson, where the mahat or pure 'I feeling' is
cosmicised in the state of saguridsthiti or savikalpa samddhi
The highest practice of 'no-means' (anupdya) is the dfrect experience of unintermpted
awareness and bliss synonymous with liberation itself without the mediation of any means.
Dyczkowski (1987) distinguishes two levels of anupdya:

At the higher level nothing can be said about it. It is literally the reality which cannot
be described in any way or approached by any means. To this level belong those rare,
highly spiritual souls who are bom fully enlightened and come into the world to show
others the way to attain their liberated state ... Most yogis, however, have to prepare
themselves for this state and when they are ready, achieve instant access to it through
the practice of Anupdya as the most subtle means possible (suksmopdya).^^

He goes on to say that at this lower level of anupdya, the role of the spfritual master is paramount:

When the disciple is truly fit to receive the teachings and be liberated, all the Master
needs to do is to tell him that he shines by the light of Siva's consciousness and that his
tme nature is the entire universe ... When such a disciple sits before his Master, all he
has to do is to gaze at him and be aware of his elevated state to feel the fragrance
(vdsand) of the Master's transcendental consciousness extending spontaneously within
him ... If the disciple does not possess the strength of awareness to allow the Master to
infuse this consciousness into him directly in this way while his eyes are open, he is
instracted to close them ... The Master then bestows upon him a vision of former
perfected yogis (siddha) while the disciple is in a state of contemplation with his eyes
closed. Through the vision of these perfected yogis ... he recognises thefr level of
consciousness and so experiences it within himself. The disciple's consciousness thus
suddenly expands within him like the violent and rapid spread of poison through the
body ... He thus becomes one with his Master in the unifying bliss of universal
consciousness ... Although it is possible to catch glimpses of the highest reality in
advanced states of contemplation before attaining perfect enlightenment, these states,
however long they last, are transitory (kaddcitka) and when they end the vision of the
absolute ceases with them. The highest realisation, however, persists in all states of
consciousness. It happens once and need never happen again.'^

The above passage suggests that the dawning of the highest consciousness occurs through either
gazing with eyes open at the guru, or for one who is sufficiently prepared and ready, visuaUsing with
eyes closed a perfected siddha. In this highest state, the disciple becomes one with the guru in the
'unifying bliss of universal consciousness', beyond all concepts and description. Glimpses of this
state may occur transientiy many times before the final attainment, but when the highest realisation
dawns, it occurs once and becomes permanentiy established.

" Dyczkowski, Doctrine, p. 178

Dyczkowski, Doctrine, pp. 178-179.
359
 It is possible to see similarities between Sarkar's description of the highest attainment of
nirguiidsthiti (nirvikalpa samddhi) and the realisation of anupdya as described above. Ffrst, Sarkar's
nirguridsthiti is described as a 'state of objectiessness ... beyond the orbit of the mind' and hence is
neither mentally apprehensible nor verbally expressible. This resembles, albeit weakly, the first and
higher aspect of anupdya, which defies linguistic description. Second, those 'rare, highly spiritual
souls who are bom perfectly enlightened' and who abide in this highest state of anupdya remind us of
Sarkar's concept of a mahdkaula - a fully-enlightened master from birth who has no guru and whose
sole purpose is to spiritually liberate other beings. A mahdkaula is able, at will, to enter and abide in,
as well as cause others to enter and abide in, nirguridsthiti or nirvikalpa samddhi. Thfrd, the absolute
bliss of Sarkar's nirguridsthiti - resulting from merging the mahat in the citisakti (cognitive principle)
echoes anupdya's 'unifying bliss of universal consciousness' achieved through oneness with the
guru. Fourth, Sarkar's sixth meditative lesson, which involves visualisation of the perfect guru and
which leads to nirguridsthiti when performed with total sunender to the guru's grace, suggests a
subtle, near-effortless practice similar to the 'methodless method' of anupdya. Also, in both cases,
the quintessential act is to gaze upon the physical guru or to visualise a perfect siddha (which, in
Sarkar's case is himself as the sadguru) as the ultimate means for reaching the highest realisation.
The concept of embodied liberation (flvanmukti) is articulated in such Kashmir Saiva texts as
the Spandakdrikd, the Vijfidnabhairava, and the Pardtrisikdvivararia.^^ The state of flvanmukti
involves a profound and permanent shift in one's identity from a limited being to the unbounded
plenitude of Siva, while simultaneously seeing all things as part of this plenitude." Thus, unlike the
'Samkhya-like introvertive kaivalya', flvanmukti in Kashmir Saivism is 'an extrovertive and open-
eyed samddhi, the nature of which is the pervasiveness of Siva, the unitary stmcture of unbounded
consciousness.'^ Sarkar's description of the 'thfrd state' (see Chapter 4, section 5.1), likely to be
refening to flvanmukti, sounds very similar to the Kashmir Saiva description of flvanmukti This is not
surprising, considering that both Kashmir Saiva thinkers and Sarkar share a largely identical

">i5, p. 15.
'* See Paul E. Muller-Ortega, 'Aspects of Jivanmukti in the Tanfric Saivism of Kashmir', in Andrew Fort and
Pafricia Y. Mumme (eds.). Living Liberation in Hindu Thought (Albany: State University of New York Press,
1996), pp. 194-195.
" Cf Navjivan Rastogi, 'The Yogic Disciplines of the Monistic Saiva Tanfric Traditions of Kashmir: Threefold,
Fourfold, and Six-Limbed', in Teun Goudriaan (ed.). Ritual and Speculation in Early Tantrism: Studies in
Honour of Andre Padoux. First Indian Edition (Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications, 1993), pp. 247-280. On the
state offlvanmuktiin Kashmir Saivism, Rastogi comments: 'The dissolution of all the states means emergence of
the state of pure awareness in which the universe is ever shining in its totality. Emancipation within life
(flvanmukti) is nothing but one's establishment in such afrance[ontic state?] on a permanent basis technically
described as being "ever-awake" (nityodita) samddhi.' (p. 253). See also Jaideva Singh, Pratyabhijfidhrdayam:
The Secret of Self-Recognition, Fourth Revised Edition (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1982), p. 31, who says: '...
that is perfect samdveSa ['immersion into divine consciousness'] in which even after getting up from the
contemplative state, it continues, and the world no longer appears as mere "earth, earthy", but as "apparelled in
celestial light", as an expression, and as play of the Universal Consciousness, and the aspirant feels himself also
as nothing but that consciousness. Then the world is no longer something to be shunned, but an eternal delight
Uagaddnanda).'
* Paul E. Muller-Ortega, 'Aspects ...', p. 195.
360
cosmological ontology, an ontology that allows for an active and spiritualised engagement with a
world that is not illusory but real, albeit relatively.*'
We now shift attention to another important strand of Kashmir Saivism, namely the Spanda
docfrine and system of practice, crystallised in the Spandakdrikd and thefr commentarial literature.
The Spanda school can be regarded as a distinct fradition within Kashmir Saivism whose focus is not
on extemal rituals but on practical Yogic methods for realising ultimate reality.*' One important
commentary on the Spandakdrikd is the Spanda-nirriaya by Ksemaraja. According to Singh, the
Spandakdrikd is a collection of verses that serve as commentary on the Sivasutras and that emphasise
the dynamic aspect of divine consciousness.*' The term spanda means a 'throb' and refers to the
creative yet motionless pulsation of absolute consciousness underlying all existence. The Spanda
docfrine affirms the nature of the dtman as not simply a static witnessing consciousness but an
endlessly pulsative field of cognition and activity. Spanda is not a movement in space and time but
an instantaneous vibration in the infinite consciousness:

Spanda, therefore, in the case of the Supreme is neither physical motion, nor
psychological activity like pain and pleasure, nor prdnic activity like hunger or thfrst.
It is the throb of the ecstasy of the Divine I-consciousness (vimarsa) ... Spanda is,
therefore, spfritual dynamism without any movement in itself but serving as the causa
sine qua non of all movements ... The Infinite Perfect Divine Consciousness always
has vimarsa or Self-awareness. This Self-awareness is a subtle activity, which is
spiritual dynamism, not any physical, psychological, or prdnic activity.*"

In his exposition of his Tantric cosmology, Sarkar does not directly mention spanda except for
a general statement that supreme consciousness radiates his vibrations from a nucleus that is seated in
the hearts of sincere devotees who sing his name:*'

" On the Kashmir Saiva explanation of bondage and liberation of beings, Muller-Ortega says: 'Bondage is
consfructed during the primordial, cosmogonic process as part of the self-shadowing, self-concealment, and self-
limitation that Siva operates on Himself. Employing His unlimited power offreedom(svdtantrya-Sakti), Siva
confrives to limit the great and fundamentally unconstricted light of consciousness so that the worlds of
experience andfransmigrationmay arise. ... [Similarly] enlightenment and liberation while still alive arise solely
due to the operation of Siva's will, this time manifesting itself in the form of the Saktipdta, the descent of the
power of Siva.' (p. 199). This view is reflected, in part, in Sarkar's articulation of his brahmacakra cosmology.
See Jaideva Singh, The Yoga of Vibration and Divine Pulsation: A Translation of the Spanda Kdrikds with
Ksemardja's Commentary, the Spanda Nirriaya (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1992). Paul E.
Muller-Ortega, in his foreword to Singh's work, points out that the Spandakdrikd is 'intimately linked with the
original sfrata of the development of Kashmir Saivism as a separate initiatory fradition.' (p. xvi).
See Jaideva Singh, Yoga of Vibration, pp. xxv-xxxv.
Jaideva Singh, Yoga of Vibration, p. xxix.
Cf Paul E. Murphy, Triadic Mysticism: The Mystical Theology of the Saivism of Kashmir (Delhi: Motilal
Banarsidass, 1986), pp. 79-108, on the place of devotion in Kashmir Saiva praxis. Murphy points out that the
Spandakdrikd speaks of a "continuous veneration toward Siva ...', but since 'devotionalism was not systematised
in Kashmir during Vasugupta's scholastic period (ca. 825-50), it is difficult to say with certainty who were the
advocates or propagators of thisfrendwithin the Triadic schools at that time. However, three significant
representatives of devotionalism emerged in Kashmir in the five hundred years between the last half of the ninth
and the end of the fourteenth centuries, they were: Bhatjta Narayana, Utpaladeva, and Lalla'; ... Predominant in
all three is the advocation of a path of love unencumbered by techniques and means.' (p. 84).
361
 It is tme that Ndrdyana is everywhere, but the origin (sphuraria), radiation (viksurarta),
and sensation (spandana) of His vibration wUl not be everywhere. He is everywhere,
but that vibration originates from that place where His nucleus is. He seats that
nucleus at that place where devotees sing His name.**

Nevertheless, phenomenological comparison shows up a concept similar and possibly related to that of
spanda, namely the citisakti of purusottama. The terms citisakti and purusottama do not originate
from Sarkar but are part of the common Indian stock of philosophical terminology, coming primarily
from the Sarnkhya-Yoga tradition. Sarkar conceptualises citisakti as the radiating, pervasive, and
activating power of pure consciousness that associates with each and every entity in the universe. In
his cosmology, purusottama is the nucleus of the infinite consciousness that refiects on and associates
with his mental objects (macrocosmically expressed as physical entities) by means of his citisakti, or
activating power of consciousness. All the objects of the universe are dynamic expressions of
purusottama himself, who radiates and metamorphoses himself in all places. Sarkar states:

Each and every atom and molecule of the Macrocosm is nothing but Purusottama. It is
He who is omnipresent as the witnessing entity as well. As the sun by its radiation
pervades the solar system, so does Purusottama His system by His Citisakti. Thus in
the Cosmic Mind both the radiated stuff and the witnessing entity are Purusottama
Himself ... As witnessing entity Purusottama connects Himself to His mental object
with the help of His Avidydmdyd and reflects Himself on the object as Citisakti. "This
reflection is not like a reflection in a minor but a reflection involving association like
the rays of the sun.*'

This shows that Sarkar's absolute reality of pure consciousness is not a mere passive and detached
witnessing entity, but a highly creative, dynamic awareness that simultaneously manifests and
reflexively witnesses itself as objects. These objects collectively form the entire physical universe,
which is formed out of the subtier field of cosmic citta (objectivated mind-stuff). Cosmic citta is in
tum metamorphosed out of the cosmic aham (active agency), and cosmic aham is but a cmdified form
of the cosmic mahat (pure ego). Cosmic citta, aham, and mahat together form the cosmic mind or
macrocosm, which is self-aware by virtue of the citisakti of pure consciousness. This idea comes
very close to the concept of spanda as the self-awareness (vimarsa) of absolute consciousness.
One particular sti-and of Sarkar's thought closely resembles the idea that absolute
consciousness is not a mere passive witness but an active participant. This can be found in his concept
of tdraka brahma, the cosmic liberator that stands at the interface between the saguria (qualified) and
nirguria (non-qualified) aspects of brahma, whom Sarkar identifies with krsna and purusottama:

But Krsria as Purusottama, Krsria as Tdraka Brahma is a very, very active Entity,
never passive ... Unlike the Sarnkhya Purusa, Tdraka Brahma calls everyone towards

**/lVPartl,p. 39.
*' lAI, p. 40.
362
 Himself: 'Come on, come on, come to Me. I have come here for you only. I am
verily yours. Come and sunender to Me without any hesitation, without any
reservation. I will take care of your future.'

Another similarity lies in Sarkar's concept of icchd bija or 'seed of desfre', which is the
primordial impulse of pure consciousness to create the universe. In Sarkar's view, it is this pulsation
of wiU and desfre within the fabric of consciousness that causes the entire cosmogonic process to
occur and to continue. This pulsation is beginningless and endless, and the cycle of creation
(brahmacakra), consisting of the exfroversial (sadcara) and introversial (pratisancara) phases,
continues indefinitely. This comes very close to the idea of the 'throb' or spanda intrinsic to absolute
consciousness, which ' ... constantly phenomenalises into finite expression' .*'
Another tradition of Kashmir Saivism is found in the Pratyabhijna or 'Recognition' school,
founded by Somananda (ninth century C.E.). The Pratyabhijna school can be seen as the theological
articulation of the Trika and Spanda traditions, which are concerned with initiatory liturgy and
practical yoga respectively. The main textual sources include the Isvarapratyabhijfidkdrikd written by
Utpaladeva, Somananda's disciple, and the Tantrdloka, written by Abhinavagupta, a widely noted
master and scholar of Kashmir Saivism.'" According to Lawrence, Utpaladeva and Abhinavagupta
conceived the Pratyabhijiia system 'simultaneously as a philosophical apologetics and an
intellectualised "spiritual exercise".'" Another important source is the Pratyabhijfidhrdayam, a
succinct exposition on the tenets of Siva-recognition written by Ksemaraja." The Pratyabhijiia school
is based on the doctrine that liberation is 'recognising' one's identity not as the finite body-mind but as
the infinite consciousness that is siva. This recognition frees the practitioner from all bondage and
illusion, and is arrived at through progressively penetrating layers of illusion created by mdyd, the
cosmic illusion-making principle. In this process of Yogic practice, the grace of siva and the
guidance of an authentic guru are essential. In terms of cosmology, the Pratyabhijna school
enumerates thirty-six cosmic principles (tattva) beginning with siva and sakti, which are the ultimate
consciousness and its power respectively, and a list of other principles including purusa and prakrti
Here, purusa or 'Male' is defined as the individual subject formed through the activity of mdyd and
differs from the classical Samkhya-Yoga idea of a transcendent self; while prakrti or 'Nature' is the

^^ NKS, pp. 52-53.

" Dyczkowsi, Doctrine, p. 77.
Flood, Body and Cosmology, pp. 11-15.
" David Lawrence, 'Siva's Self-Recognition and the Problem of Interpretation', Philosophy East and West, 48.2
(1998): 197.
72
See Jaideva Singh, Pratyabhijfidhrdayam: The Secret of Self-Recognition, Fourth Revised Edition (Delhi:
Motilal Banarsidass, 1982). This text expounds a cosmogony closely echoed by Sarkar, an example of which
can be seen in sdtra 5: 'Citi (universal consciousness) itself descending from (the stage of) cetand (the
unconfracted conscious stage) becomes citta (individual consciousness) inasmuch as it becomes confracted
(sarikocirii) in conformity with the objects of consciousness (cetya)' (p. 59). Also sdtra 4 states: 'The
(individual) experient also, in whom citi or consciousness is confracted has the universe (as his body) in a
confracted form' (p. 55). Singh comments that all objective and subjective entities of the world are but 'the
totality of manifestations' of Siva, 'a solidified form (dSydnatdrupa) of cir-essence' (p. 55).
363
'matrix of all objective aspects of manifestation ... [and] every purusa has its own prakrti'. The Hst
ends with the remaining principles of Sarnkhya philosophy, namely the higher mind (buddhi), the ego-
creator (aharnkdra), the lower mind (manas), thefivecognitive organs (jndnendriya), thefiveconative
organs (karmendriya), the five subtie elements (tanmdtra), and the five coarse elements (bhuta). It
is worth noting that in Pratyabhijiia Saivism, Sanrikhya principles have been appropriated as part of its
overall theology but given a lesser status. Pratyabhijna cosmogony appropriates but adapts the notion
of supreme speech (pardvdk) in its account of cosmic manifestation, of which Lawrence says:

Utpaladeva and Abhinavagupta [proponents of Pratyabhijna philosophy] interpret

Supreme Speech as Slva's very self-recognition (ahampratyavamarsa). ... they explain
their cosmogonic myth of Siva emanating the universe through Sakti as His self-
recognition. In this process there is a progressive fragmentation of the Lord's self-
recognition from the unitary condition "I" into the recognitions of apparently separate
objects as 'This," or more fully, "This is that," "This is blue," and so forth."

Sarkar concurs with the Pratyabhijna tradition that siva and sakti integrally constitute the
ultimate reality that he calls brahma. In much the same vein as Pratyabhijna Saivism, he defines siva
as the cognitive principle and sakti as the operative principle. He also seems to concur with
Pratyabhijna cosmogony, in terms of the gradual fragmentation of the unitary condition of ultimate
reality into the expressed multiplicity of the cosmos, through a graded process of divine 'self-
recognition'. Sarkar's rendering of mahat as the 'I-am' principle, aham as the 'I-do' principle, and
citta as the 'I-have-done' principle, suggests an increasingly complex and divided self-cognisance of
parama purusa as it is progressively (but free-willingly) influenced by its sakti, or prakrti While he
does not subscribe to the thirty-six principles of Pratyabhijna in toto, he nevertheless appropriates
Samkhya concepts in elucidating the process of brahmacakra or the cosmic cycle of creation. For
example, Sarkar makes use of the terms bhuta to refer to the basic elements of matter and tanmdtra to
refer to sensory inferences or modalities. He also uses terms such as citta, aham, and mahat, derived
arguably from the Patanjali Yoga tradition, to elucidate his cosmogonic and evolutionary process.
An interesting resemblance between Sarkar's cosmic mahat and Pratyabhijiia's sadasiva (the
thfrd principle after siva and sakti) can be observed. According to Pratyabhijna theology, saddsiva or
'etemal siva' is that aspect of the absolute consciousness that ' ... encounters itself vaguely as an
object' and translates into the experience of 'I am This'.'* This description suggests that saddSiva is a
kind of self-cognisance by the pure consciousness principle, resulting in pm-e self-identity, one that
seems to resemble Sarkar's idea of cosmic mahat, the pure 'I am' feeling - consciousness's sense of
its own self-existence. Also, Sarkar's conception of all objects - sensory inferences and mental
objects such as thought and emotion - as ultimately vibratory waves of pure consciousness in different

" Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 356.

'" Ibid.
" David Lawrence, 'Siva's Self-Recognition ...', p. 200.
364
phases and frequencies bears close resemblance to the Pratyabhijna notion of objects as fmally being
cognitions (pardmarsa) of the ultimate, Siva." Apart from the foregoing observations, it is very
difficult to ascertain whether and to what extent Sarkar may have bonowed from Pratyabhijna
Saivism; the topic requires further historical and textual analysis.
The preceding discussion has shown how Sarkar's Tantra resembles or differs from the Saiva
tradition in its several major forms. When comparing Sarkar's cosmology with that of the Saiva
systems, it can be noted that while Sarkar uses the term 'brahma' (in its variant forms) extensively
throughout his texts, the Saiva systems do not, but instead (and understandably) lay stress on 'siva' as
the ultimate reality. Sarkar, however, takes pains to emphasise that while siva has primacy over sakti,
the two are inseparable aspects of the same ultimate reality, brahma, the infinite cosmic
consciousness. Here he seems to synthesise the Saiva concepts of siva (pure consciousness) and salcti
(creative energy) with the Yoga and Vedanta concepts of saguria and nirguria brahman. However,
Sarkar cites the term 'brahman' without the final 'ri as 'brahma' to signify essentially the same idea.
It is also evident that Sarkar uses Sarnhkya terminology extensively throughout his texts, effectively
equating Sarnhkya terms such as purusa and prakrti with Saiva terms such as Siva and Sakti
respectively. This is quite different in style to Saiva traditions, which generally incorporate Sarnkhya
concepts into Saiva cosmology, but relegate these concepts to a position and status secondary to
ostensibly Saiva ones.

8.1.3 Vaisnavism and Sarkarian Bhakti^^

Vaisnavism, at least in its contemporary form, is perhaps the largest of all Hindu traditions and the one
that has, according to Klostermaier (1994), ' ... developed the most variegated and richest mythology
of all schools of Hinduism'." Klostermaier goes on to say:

Contemporary Vaisnavism, the largest among the Hindu traditions, has its sources not
only in Vedic religion but also in Dravidian fraditions and in tribal and local cults, the
earliest of which were the worship of Narayana and of Vasudeva ^ s n a , as described in
some portions of the Mahabharata and the Pancaratra cults of Bhagavatism, records of
which still exist in the early Visnu-Puranas and the Vaisnava Sanrdiitas.*"

Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 355.

See Paul E. Muller-Ortega, 'Tantric Meditation: Vocalic Beginnings', in Teun Goudriaan (ed.). Ritual and
Speculation in Early Tantrism: Studies in Honour of Andre Padoux. First Indian Edition (Delhi: Sri Satgum
Publications, 1993), pp. 227-245. On the nature of objects, Muller-Ortega writes: 'Objects are indeed finally
cognitions (pardmarsa) because they are nothing more than cognitions within the Supreme. Perception is thus a
process in which the infinite consciousness encounters its own interference pattems and takes cognisance of
them.' (p. 236).
For a brief sociohistorical account of the bhakti movement in India, see Jayant Lele, 'The Bhakti movement in
India: A Critical Intioduction', Journal of Asian and African Studies XV 1-2 (1980): 1-15. On the possible
origins of bhakti, Lele offers the argument that 'bhakti was explicitiy a revolt against this dichotomous view
which had upheld the duality of existence of those engaged in debating sterilised absfractions [e.g. the elite group
of Sanjkhyan and Vedantic thinkers] and those practising mindless rituals [e.g. lower caste common folk]' (p. 3).
" Klostermaier, Survey, p. 240.
80
Klostermaier, Survey, p. 240. Cf Jan Gonda, Medieval Religious Literature in Sanskrit (Wiesbaden: Otto
Harrassowitz, 1977), pp. 7-8: 'It seems safe to assume that in the centuries preceding the Bhagavadgitd
365
According to Klostermaier, the idea in later Vaipnava speculation that Visnu is the material cause of
the universe can be traced back to a hymn in the Rgveda}' The following discussion will focus on
those schools of Vaisnavism deemed most closely related to Sarkar's Tantra, with attention paid to
thefr theology and practices. A school of later Vaisnavism known as Sri-Vaisnavism, which centi-es
on worship of tiie Goddess Sri - the consort of Visnu - and which is popular in South India, will not
be discussed here since it bears relatively littie resemblance to Sarkar's theology.
Among the fundamental tenets of Vaisnavism are the notions that Visnu is immanent in all
beings while being simultaneously transcendent, and that Visnu descends in bodily form as avatdras
to save the worid from evil and destruction. The traditional list of ten avatdras of Visnu is well
known, with Krsna and Rama being the most popular and most widespread of the ten. The avatdra
yet-to-come, Kalki, is said to be the ' ... eschatological manifestation of Visnu on a white horse ...'
and '... the final liberator of the worid from ... strife and ... evil influences' .*' As noted in Chapter 3,
the best-loved and best-known avatdra is Krsna, a semi-legendary, semi-historical figure whose image
as sweet child, playful cowherd, and passionate lover in mythology endears him to many as an
intimate and personal saviour. At the same time, Krsna features prominentiy as the teacher and
saviour par excellence in the highly popular and influential religious classics, the Bhagavadgitd and
the Bhdgavata Purdria. Brajbhumi, the district of Mathura, has long been the geographical cenfre of
Krsna worship, with places such as Vrindavan, Govardhana, and Gokula associated with him since
83
ancient times.
In Sarkarian Tantra, the figure of Krsna takes a philosophical tum, with Sarkar tending
towards a more ontological than mythical view of krsria. While he does not dispute the common view
that Krsna existed as a great historical personality, and in fact, attempts to reconcile the young, playful
Krsna of Brajbhumi with the adult, serious Krsna of the Gita, he nevertheless emphasises the
cosmological and soteriological functions of Krsna. In Chapter 3, we noted how Sarkar equates krsria
with the philosophical concept of purusottama, the cosmic witnessing consciousness existing as the
supreme nucleus of the universe. To him, krsria is that all-attractive entity synonymous with cosmic
consciousness itself, which is the ultimate source and refuge of the entfre cosmos. Krsria is, in effect,
the cosmological nucleus from which the universe emanates, by which it is confrolled, and to which all
living beings retum by the attraction of its centripetal force (vidyd mdyd). In this soteriological

(probably 2"'' century B. C.) various cults and beliefs, presumably tending towards some more or less distinct
forms of monotheism, contributed to the rise of this multiform religion. In the ancient works belonging to the
Vijnuitefradition,the Mahd-Ndrdyar^-Upanisad (approximately 3*^ century B. C.) and the Bhagavadgitd,
Vijiiu himself is only mentioned in passing, in contradistinction to Narayaija and Kf^ria who in the course of
time came to fuse with the Vedic figure who was to give his name to the amalgamation. How the three cults
succeeded in combining is for lack of textual evidence largely shrouded in mystery.'
*' Ibid. The hymn is found in Rgveda 10.90. Commenting on the identification of the Rgvedic Puruja with
Narayana in the Satapatha Brdhmarm, Gonda says: 'In the same and other Vedic texts, the Puruga and creator
god Prajapati, the lord of creatures (or of his offspring), tend to fuse, and the latter is described as becoming and
as imitating, that is identifying himself with, Vigiju.' (p. 8).
*' Klostermaier, p. 244.
*' Klostermaier, p. 245.
366
joumey, not all beings will move towards krsria at the same speed - some will attain liberation (mukti)
or salvation (moksa) earlier and some later. Sarkar also identifies krsria philosophically with tdraka
brahma, the interfacing, 'tangential' aspect of brahma that bridges its saguria (qualified) and nirguria
(non-qualified) dimensions so as to function as a personal liberator of living beings. Unlike
Vaisnavism, AM does not privilege krsria as a deity above all others but rather reconceptualizes him
as an ontological principle that serves both cosmological and soteriological functions.
The basic theology of Vaisnavism follows that of the Pdricardtra Satnhitds, which are
systematically ananged collections of texts or compendia dealing with subjects such as philosophy,
theory of mantras, theory of yantras, mdydyoga, yoga, temple-building, image-making, domestic
observances, social rales, and festivals.*" The Pdncardtra Sarnhitds accord Visnu supreme status
above all other deities including Vedic ones, and make him the cenfral focus of all ritual, worship, and
cosmology. Philosophically, Visnu is the supreme creator, and is the efficient, material and
instmmental cause of the universe. He is all-pervading and immanent in all things and in time,
though essentially he exists free from all limitations of time, space and object. Described as sat-cit-
dnanda (being, consciousness, and bliss), Visnu is the gentle protector of and loving refuge for all
beings. He is chiefly refened to as bhagavat, possessing the six divine attributes (bhaga) of
'knowledge/omniscience (jfidna); sovereignty (aiSvarya); potency (Sakti); indefatigable energy (bala);
the ability to remain unaffected by any change ... (virya); [and] brilliant and self-sufficient conquering
power (tejas).'^^ Visnu exists in five different forms: as para - the absolute and transcendent form,
variously named Parabrahman and Paravasudeva; as vydha - cosmic manifestations of his powers in
the four figures of Vasudeva, Samkarsana, Pradhyumna, and Aniraddha, who exist for the purpose of
creation and worship; as vibhava - earthly incamations (full or partial) known as avatdras (as
discussed previously); as antarydmin - the inner controller that exists in the human heart; and as
drcdvatdra - the physical image of God used for ritual and worship.
Sarkar defines visriu as the 'all-pervasive entity' and equates it with brahma or parama
purusa. It appears that he uses the term visriu as one of the epithets of cosmic consciousness, which
pervades the entire universe through to infinity. In this sense, Sarkar concurs with the Vaisnavas'
conception of Visnu as the inunanent and limitless entity that is the efficient, material and instmmental
cause of the universe. Closely following Paricaratrins, Sarkar uses the term 'bhagavdn' to describe
tdraka brahma, the liberative aspect of the supreme entity. However, he describes the six bhagas
slightly differentiy from the Paricaratrins, enumerating them as jfidna (knowledge of the Self),
aiSvarya (possessing all occult powers), yaSa (reputation), Sri (charm), virya (vigour and power), and

*" Jan Gonda, 'Medieval Religious Literature in Sanskrit', in Jan Gonda (ed.), A History of Indian Literature
Vol. 2 Ease. 1 (Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, 1977), p. 57. Sanjukta Gupta writes, in 'The Pancarafra Attitude
to Manfra', in Harvey P. Alper (ed.). Mantra. First Indian Edition (Delhi: Sri Satgum Publications, 1997), p.
224: 'PaficarStia is one of the oldest Vaisnava sects ... [and] its primary scriptures spread over half a
millennium, from approximately 500-1000 A.D.'
" Sanjukta Gupta, 'The Pancarafra Attitude to Manfra', p. 225.
367
vairdgya (non-attachment).** Also, he does not mention the five expressive forms of Visiju (or of
brahma for that matter) and in fact, disapproves of the concept of avatdra and totally eschews the
practice of ritual image (drcdvatdra) worship.
In terms of soteriology, Pancaratra defines salvation as having two aspects: 'gnosis, [or]
realisation pf one's unity with god' and 'a state of blissful communion with god, an emotional
experience'.*' The fust aspect is achieved through Yogic meditation while the second involves total
emotional sunender (prapatti) to the Lord. Gupta comments that 'the combination of these two very
disparate views of salvation means that, for the Pancaratrin, prapatti is not just passive; it must make
itself effective by service to god, updsand.'*^ Sarkar models after Pancaratrin praxis in two essential
ways: (1) that prapatti or total self-sunender is of the essence; and (2) that meditative unification
(yoga) and devotion (bhakti) both have a role to play in reaching salvation. However, Sarkar
dismisses the need for extemal rituals, opting instead for selfless social service (sevd) as the sacrifice
of choice.*'
The earliest attempt to systematise Vaisnavism, according to Klostermaier, seems to have
relied on Sarnkhya philosophical concepts but atfributes supreme status to Visnu.^ In Vaignava
Saixikhya, prakrti (the creative matrix) and kaivalya (liberation) are thought to be caused by Visnu, the
supreme controller of the universe. Another sfrand of systematic Vaisnava philosophy can be seen in
the various systems derived from Vedanta, in the writings of Ramanuja (a ViSistadvaita Vedanta
exponent), Madhva (a Dvaita Vedanta exponent), and Vallabha (exponent of pustimdrga, 'way of
grace')." I have already discussed the ontological views of Ramanuja and Madhva as Vedantists in
Chapter 7 and will not repeat that discussion here. Rather, I will focus on the devotional and
conspicuously Vaisnava element in their writings, seeing how these ideas compare with Sarkar's brand
of devotionalism.

Rdmdnuja's ViSistddvaita Veddntic Vaisriavism

Ramanuja equates brahman (a Vedantic concept) with Visnu, who acts as the redeemer by entering
into sarrisdra, enduring pain and suffering, and leading human beings to conununion with their Lord
through the medium of avatdras and the guru. In Ramanuja's cosmology, individual beings or flvas
are essentially particles of the divine, but through heedlessness they become entangled in woridly
suffering and need divine intervention. Visnu remains as antarydmin within the hearts of flvas so as
to guide and bless them while allowing them freedom of will to choose either good or evil ways. The

** See Chapter 3, subsection 3.2.2.

*' Gupta, 'The Paiicarafra ...', p. 231.
Ibid. According to Gupta, updsand has two components: meditation or internal sacrifice (antarydga) and
ritual or external sacrifice (bahirydga) (see pp. 233-234). These two components, together v^ith prapatti,
constitute Paficarafrin spiritual praxis.
While it can be argued that AM practices such as kirtana and guru pdja should be considered rituals, it is
probably more correct to regard them as ancillaries to meditation, involving none of the complex preparatory
acts associated with ritual worship etc.
^ Klostermaier, Survey, p. 249.
368
main practice for a Visiju devotee is devotion or bhakti, which translates into preparing him- or herself
for God's grace and granting of salvation. Self-sunender or prapatti is the quintessential act for
devotees. Two factions of Ramanuja's Vaisnavism developed after his death, one of which, the
Northern school, likens the process of salvation through bhakti to the activity of a young monkey,
which clings to its mother in order to be carried away from danger. The other faction, the Southem
school, likens the process of salvation to the activity of a young kitten, which merely lets itself be
picked up by its mother and canied away from danger.
In his soteriological praxis, Sarkar highly commends prapatti or total self-sunender (identical
to bhakti) not only as the method par excellence for attaining supreme consciousness, but also as the
fruit of practising jndna yoga and karma yoga in combination. Like the Southem school, Sarkar
advocates the 'kitten-like' sunender of the devotee to the Lord, and in NKS, he speaks of the inner
spirit of prapatti as follows:

Thus we should say: "Oh Lord! Thy will be done. I am a machine. Utilise this
machine in any way You like. I am nothing but a mere tool in your hands." This is the
spirit of Prapattivdda.

He does not, however, dismiss the value of knowledge (jfidna) and action (karma) altogether, and in
many instances he stresses the importance of performing selfless, benevolent service and the constant
pursuit of deeper intellectuality and intuition along the path of practice." In fact, in his delineation of
the stages of Tantric practice, he identifies the Saiva stage of non-dual knowledge as the culmination
of the spiritual quest, following the Vaisnava stage of blissful self-sunender.'" Comparing with
Ramanuja, one sees that Sarkar's tdraka brahma, who manifests in the world out of his compassionate
resolve by creating a physical body out of the five fundamental factors (pancabhdtas), exhibits close
resemblance to the idea of brahman incamating as the great Redeemer of beings from sarrisdra.
Although Sarkar claims that the concept of tdraka brahma differs from that of avatdra, it can be
argued that in their underlying idea and function, the two appear to be similar, if not the same, varying
only in degree of theoretical refinement. While Vaisnavism regards an avatdra as the full or partial
incamation of the Lord, it fails to account for one paradox: since the world itself is the material
expression of God, how then is it possible for God to fully incarnate as a saviour? Sarkar argues that
according to incamation theory, it would be more consistent to say that the whole universe is the
'incarnation' of God. To overcome this problem, Sarkar proposes the concept of a tri-aspect brahma:
the fust aspect is nirguria brahma - the infinite, atfributeless, undefinable consciousness beyond all
thought and expression; the second is saguria brahma - the localised portion of nirguria brahma that
becomes qualified by prakrti and metamorphoses into the universe and living beings; and the third is

' Klostermaier, Survey, pp. 251-257.

^^ NKS, p. 28.
" See e.g. yp, pp. 44-45.
'"DOrVol.2, pp.7-9.
369
tdraka brahma - the tangential consciousness at the silver lining between saguria and nirguria brahma
that takes a physical form to guide and liberate living beings within saguria brahma. In this way
Sarkar avoids the conundram faced by the avatdra theory, yet retains its essential idea of a world
saviour of some sort. He claims that the figure of tdraka brahma is a creation of devotional sentiment
and perhaps sees its role as one of hamessing and dfrecting the powerful human emotions of love and
devotion in the service of ego-transcendence.

Madhva's Dvaita Veddntic Vaisriavism

Madhva, known for his dualist variant of Vedanta, sees individual beings as images of Visnu, like
reflections in a minor. In his view, the relationship between Visnu and jiva is best described as
bimba-pratibimba or 'splendour and reflection'." In other words, Madhva sees Vi?nu as the infinite
splendour that reflects on the 'minor' of his own body to create multiple but delimited 'reflections' of
himself in the form of individual beings. In keeping with his dualist metaphysic, Madhva teaches that
the reflecting Visnu is ultimately separate and distinct from the reflections of myriad beings. He
subscribes to the doctrine of predestination, whereby some persons are destined to be liberated while
others are simply never to be liberated and are destined to remain in bondage. Through devotion and
practice, a living being is said to be able to achieve etemal communion with the creative Lord of his or
her existence, Visnu.
Madhva's dualist concept of Visnu andj^va directly conflicts with Sarkar's non-dualist view
of the essential identity of Siva and flva. However, Madhva's idea of bimba-pratibimba is in
resonance with Sarkar's notion of flvdtman (unit cognisance) as microcosmic reflection of the
unbounded and dynamic process of paramdtman (supreme cognisance). While the cognitive faculty
within each unit entity (jiva) is essentially the reflected luminosity of the infinite cognitive faculty, the
body-mind complex of each unit is a tmly-existing, condensed form of cognisance itself rather than a
mere reflection of Visnu. Ontologically, Sarkar, with his Saiva-Tantric brand of non-dualist reaUsm,
parts company with Madhva and his Vedantic and essentially dualistic idealism.

Vallabha's Pustimdrga
Vallabha, another Vaisnava master, is celebrated for his doctrine of salvation known as pustimdrga,
the way of grace. Vallabha's pustimdrga is essentially a 'revelatory-only' path that discredits the use
of reason for the realisation of brahman, as is done in Advaita Vedanta. He upholds family life as the
means to eam God's grace, seeing sevd or service as a mode of worship of the Lord that bestows the
highest bliss. In other words, the family person's entire life is divinised by virtue of the performance
of sevd. In contrast, if renunciation of family ties (samnydsa) is undertaken without genuine love for
the Lord, spiritual harm may result. The quintessential practice is dtma-nivedana or total sunender to

" Klostermaier, Survey, pp. 44-45.

370
the guru of the self and all that belongs to the self Pustimdrga is higher than karmamdrga,
jfidnamdrga, and even bhaktimdrga of other schools, for:

Pusti is the uncaused grace of God, for which the devotee prepares but cannot dfrect or
influence ... On the human side, pusti means doing things out of pure love and not
because an action is enjoined by the Veda, and also not because the intellect recognises
the majesty and exalted nature of God. The pustimdrga is open to all, also to women
and low-caste people, even to the patita, the 'fallen*, for whom other schools of
Hinduism hold out no hope of salvation. It is free from Vedic command and is
interested in establishing only a relationship between the soul and its Lord - even if
this relationship is one of anger and resentment.^*

An important feature of Vallabha's soteriology is his conception of the ultimate and most
desirable state to be attained by a practitioner of pustimdrga. He does not discount the possibility of
moksa but emphasises the preferability of a state he calls nitya tild or 'permanent [divine] play'. In
nitya tild, the devotee does not merge into God but remains in 'etemal enjoyment of the company of
God', and attains this state purely through the uncaused grace of the Lord. Vallabha says:

He who thinks of God as all and of himself as emanating from him and who serves him
with love, is a devotee ... the highest devotee leaves everything, his mind filled with
Krsna alone ... he is wholly absorbed in the love of God. No one, however, can take
the path of bhakti, except through the grace of God. Karma itself, being of the nature
of God's will, manifests itself as His mercy or anger to the devotee ... the law of
karma is mysterious ... we do not know the manner in which God's will manifests
itself; sometimes, by His grace He may even save a sinner who may not have to take
the punishment due to him."

The fullness of devotion is achieved in stages starting with the seed of bhakti existing as prema
('love') in human hearts, planted there through the grace of God. Prema is gradually nurtured and
developed through listening to scriptures, chanting the Lord's name, performing household duties with
a mind fixed on Krsna, self-sunender, and sevd ('service'), here interpreted as worship of the Lord in
the form of Sri Govardhana-nathaji (a particular physical image of Krsna).'*
Turning again to Sarkar, we see similarities and also differences between him and Vallabha.
First, in agreement with Vallabha, Sarkar highlights the essentiality of devotional self-sunender and
the performance of selfless service and familial duties with a mind absorbed in cosmic ideation. He
also identifies the human guru as the central soteriological factor and advocates the practice of dtma-
nivedana. Like Vallabha in relation to his pustimdrga, Sarkar sees his path of Ananda Marga as open
to people of any caste, social and ethnic groups, gender, and even to those who have acted wrongly in
the past. This is exemplified in his outspoken opposition to the caste system, widow and gender
oppression, and socio-economic exploitation as actualised in the various departments, and social and

'* Klostermaier, pp. 255-256.

" Quoted in Klostermaier, p. 256.
371
spiritual functions of the AM organization. Sarkar's stand against capital punishment in his social
philosophy of PROUT reflects his acceptance of wrongdoers who are wUling to reform themselves.
Another similarity lies in Sarkar's elevation of the status of the family person or householder in the
domain of spiritual attainment. In line with his Tanfric leanings, Sarkar stresses that the family
practitioner (grhi) and the renunciate (samnydsin) are on par in terms of spfritual potential and status
and are to be equally respected. Unlike Vallabha, however, Sarkar places emphasis on the cultivation
of knowledge and advocates a blending of intellect, intuition, devotion, and action as the best way of
realising the trath. He does not subscribe to the idea that fruth is solely revelatory and that inteUectual
enqufry has no place. Also, for Sarkar, the ultimate goal is moksa - the merging of the individual self
into the highest cosmic consciousness; it is not etemal enjoyment in the company of God. To him,
the Vaisnava's nitya-tild represents a penultimate stage of devotion where dualism still exists, and
though blissful, is not the culmination of the spiritual path. FinaUy, Sarkar does not accept any form
of image or idol worship, in contrast to the Vallabha Vaisnavas who worship the Lord in the form of
Sri Govardhana-nathaji. In the contrast between Sarkar and Vallabha, the opposition between Saiva-
Tantric non-dualism and Vedantic duaUsm is highlighted.
In the history of Vaisnavism, perhaps the most illustrious and widely known humanfigureis
Caitanya, often given the appellation 'Mahaprabhu' to signify his status as ' ... the Great Lord of the
Hare Kr§na movement'.'' Caitanya lived in sixteenth century Bengal, where he and his disciples
initiated a mass devotional movement cenfred solely on worship of Krsna. The tradition that Caitanya
and his followers belong to is called Gaudiya Vaisnavism; its influence has extended far beyond the
boundaries of Bengal largely through their efforts. Caitanya is well known for his highly devotional
displays of God-intoxication, manifesting in singing, dancing and chanting God's name. He
popularised the practice of ndma-kirtana or singing God's name, encapsulated in the famous universal
mantra 'Hare Krsria Hare Krsria, Krsria Krsria Hare Hare, Hare Rdma Hare Rdma, Rdma Rdma Hare
Hare'. (A more detailed discussion of Caitanya and his possible influence on Sarkar's thought and
praxis will be attempted in the next section when examining Sarkar's Bengali connection.)

8.2 The Bengali Connection

Sarkar's connection to the land and culture of Bengal is evident from his familial and ancesfral ties to
Burdwan, an old township situated in West Bengal close to the border with Bihar. Sarkar is said to
have spent much time there, especially during his school vacations, when he and his family would go
to Burdwan for holidays and to visit relatives.'"^ It is thus probable that Sarkar imbibed elements of
the Bengali religious milieu that were to become significant in his later life as he formulated his AM
ideology. It is also probable that the Bengali religious context exerted a continuing influence on
Sarkar's thinking as AM was highly active in West Bengal, with Calcutta being the site of the

'* Klostermaier, pp. 256-257.

" Klostermaier, p. 257.
'"*' Dharmavedananda, Who's Afraid, p. 425.
372
organisation's headquarters since 1981-82."" I will discuss two main sfrands of Bengali religion that
may had an influence on Sarkar's teachings, namely Bengali Vaisnavism and Bengali Tanfrism.

8.2.1 Bengali Vaisnavism

Vaisnavism has been a major religious presence in West Bengal for many centuries, and like Saivism
and Saktism, may be traced to Mauryan times, certainly to the Gupta and Pala periods."" Bengali
Vaisnavism is a complex product derived from two principal sources: (1) the general history of
Vaisnavism in India, and (2) the doctrines and practices developed by Caitanya and his followers in
16* century Bengal."" The central axis of Bengali Vaisnavism is devotion (bhakti) to Krsna, the most
celebrated incamation of the deity Visnu, and to Krsna's divine lover, Radha. The Gitd Govinda of
Jayadeva (12* century C.E.), eulogising the love between Krsna and his lover, Radha, is perhaps 'the
most celebrated Sanskrit poem composed in Bengal''"" As mentioned in the last section, the best-
known Vaisnava in Bengali religious history is Caitanya Mahaprabhu, who made significant and
essential contributions to Bengali Vaignavism as we know it today. This section will focus on
Jayadeva's and Caitanya's contributions to Bengali religion, highlighting some of the essential
elements of Bengali Vaisnavism in the process. I will then compare these elements of the Vaisnava
faith with aspects of Sarkar's ideology and praxis that resemble them.
In Jayadeva's Gitd Govinda, the passionate love between devotee and his or her Beloved Lord
is dramatically portrayed through the erotic love-play between Krsna and his favourite gopi (cow-
herdess), Radha. Krsna is given the appellation Govinda, meaning the 'cow-finder', a name that
describes his occupation as a cowherd in Vrndavana. According to Feuerstein, the word 'go' means
not only 'cow' but also 'wisdom', so that Govinda means not only a finder of cows, but a finder of
wisdom."" Just as Krsna represents the masculine cosmic principle of the Divine, Radha represents the
Divine feminine. This increased emphasis on the feminine principle of the Divine is echoed in the
Sakta-Tantric pre-eminence of the divine Sakti, and signals a new trend in the Vaisnava devotionalism
of 12* century Bengal. In the Gitd Govinda, Krsna and Radha are said to be engaged in episodes of
erotic love-play, with the intense desfre and passion aroused between them vividly described.
Feuerstein translates several passages of the Gitd Govinda as follows:'"*

Secretly at night I went to his home in a concealing thicket where he remained in

hiding. Anxiously I glanced in all directions, while he was laughing with an abundant
longing for the delight (rati) [of sexual union]: O friend! Make the crasher of [the

"" Kjpananda, With My Master, p. 126.

"*' Joseph T. O'Connell, 'Bengali Religions', in Mircea Eliade (ed.). The Encyclopedia of Religion, Vol. 1 (New
York: MacmiUan PubHshing, 1987), pp. 100-109.
Sushil Kumar De, Early History of the Vaisriava Faith and Movement in Bengal (Calcutta: Firma K. L.
Mukhopadhyaya Publishers, 1961), pp. 1-2.
'""O'Connell, 'BengaH Religions', p. 101.
' ' Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 382.
Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 383.
373
 demon] Kesin love me passionately. I am enamoured, entertaining desires of love!
(2.11)
I was shy at our first union. He was kind toward me, [showing] hundreds of ingenious
flatteries. I spoke through sweet and gentie smiles, and he unfastened the garment
around my hips. (2.12)

He laid me down on a bed of shoots. For a long time, he rested on my breast, while I
caressed and kissed him. Embracing me, he drank from my lower lip. (2.13)

I closed my eyes from drowsiness. The hair on his cheeks bristied from my caresses.
My whole body was perspiring, and he was quite restless because of his great
intoxication with passion. (2.14)

The passages quoted above indicate a dramatic shift away from ascetic and body-denying forms of
spirituality to an earthy, embodied spirituality that does not seek to deny physical passion and mental
longing. Rather, the amorous love between Krsna and Radha underscores the idea of hamessing all of
one's desires, in particular sexual passion, toward realisation of union with the Divine. This
orientation is reminiscent of the radical and integral spirit of Tantra, where sexual imagery is
frequentiy employed to express the passionate and embodied nature of one's devotional longing for
God. As in Tantra, so also in Bengah Vaisnavism, human emotions that are normally regarded by the
more conventional Yogic strand of Indian spirituality to be negative or unwholesome are recast in a
positive light by the Vaisnavas, set within the context of ecstatic love for God. Thus, Vaisnava
spirituality can be seen as a method of physical and psychological sublimation, a way of cultivating
and refining the emotions in the service of a divine ideal.
Sarkar's approach to devotional praxis appears to be akin to this general Vaisnava practice of
hamessing, channelling, and sublimating coarse human emotions in the direction of union with the
beloved divine. Like Jayadeva in the Gitd Govinda, Sarkar does not discourage the cultivation of
spousal feelings for God, although he does advocate, perhaps more conventionally, the conversion of
kdma (sense desire) into prema (love for God) and of preya (attraction for mundane objects) into Sreya
(attraction for brahma), in the context of devotional practice. For Sarkar, a devotee can legitimately
experience a variety of attitudinal feelings towards brahma or krstia, reflecting the nature of the
relationship between the bhakta (devotee) and bhagavdn (the Lord). These relationships are those of
parent and child, master and servant, teacher and disciple, friend and friend, and husband and wife (an
erotic love relationship). A spousal or lovers' relationship is one in which the emotions of sexual
desfre, physical and psychological attraction, and longing for intimacy are consciously channelled
towards realisation of brahma. In this sense, Sarkar comes very close to the notion of erotic longing
for God idealised in the Gitd Govinda. However, at the final stage of spiritual realisation, all
emotions, however sublime, are relinquished in the ineffable silence of nirguria brahma, where
nothing short of total sunender is called for.

374
 Caitanya was bom a brahmin by the name of Vi^vambhara Misra. The earliest available
biography of Caitanya appears to be the Sanskrit Sfi-Krsriacaitanya-Caritdmrta, attributed to Murari-
Gupta."" The more popular biography is the Bengali work by Krgnadasa Kaviraja knovsm as the
Caitanya-Caritdmrta. Long before Caitanya, the Paddvatis of Jayadeva in Sanskrit and the songs of
Candidasa in Bengali had afready popularised the cult of KTsna-Radha.'"* Caitanya contributed to this
devotional cult by advocating private meditation on Krsna and public chanting (sarrikirtana) of God's
names. He was regarded by his early followers (the Gosvamins of Vrindavan) as an incamation of
Krsna and Radha combined, but in later Bengali Vaisnavism became a powerful exemplification of
bhakti beliefs and doctrines, and not as divinity per se."" According to De, Caitanya atfracted others
by his charisma and the powerful appeal of his devotional sentiment, rather than by his organisational
abUities as founder of a movement."" Caitanya left behind eight verses of devotion and instmction to
his disciples in a composition known as the Siksa Astaka, and was an ecstatic promulgator of the idea
that God can be found in this world through pure devotion and love.'"
The doctrines and beliefs of Bengali Vaisnavism, as exemplified by Caitanya and his
followers, are cenfred on the divinity of Krsna. For the early Gosvamins, Caitanya appears to have
been identified with Krsna himself and was thus their focus of worship and devotion. For later
Bengali Vaisnavas, however, Krsna emerges as the highest and exclusive divinity, who is
simultaneously brahman, paramdtman, and bhagavat, the three-in-one divinity. The essential form
(svarupa) of Krsna is said to have three aspects: (1) svayam rupa or 'self existent nature'; (2)
tadekdtma rupa or 'hypostatic manifestation', which is identical in essence and existence with svayam
rdpa but different in appearance or attributes; and (3) dveSa or 'possessed forms' of inspired men and
prophets appearing in the world."' These inspfred personages are partial manifestations (avatdras) of
the supreme being - real and not illusory, supematural (divya), and etemally existent (nitya) forms of
the deity whose purpose is to do good in the world. Avatdras descend into the world and appear to the
faithful as expressions of Krsiia's grace (prasdda), brought about by the inherent Sakti of Krsna. They
serve as saviours rather than as role models or ideals for humanity's spiritual evolution; thefr existence
is thus unique and liberative, and does not exemplify a common human developmental goal.'"

'"''De, Early History, p. 53.

'"* De, Early History, pp. 1-2.
"" De, Early History, p. 225.
"" See De, Early History, pp. 67-110, for biographical details regarding Caitanya's life.
See also Klaus K. Klostermaier, 'Gaudiya Vaigijavism: The Education of Human Emotion', Journal of Asian
and African Studies, 34.1 (1999): pp. 127-135. (http://web7.infotiac.galegroup.coni/itw/i...). On Caitanya's
religious vision, Klostermaier says: 'In a culture that identified religion uniquely with renunciation, and which
condemned all forms of enjoyment as entanglement in sarrisdra, Caitanya announced the message that God was
Love, God was joy, and God was Life. A world in which this God was present in bodily form could not be all
bad, illusion or entrapment. For him, it was more important to find God in the world than to leave the world in
order tofindliberation.' Sarkar's vision is remarkably similar to Caitanya's.
' " De, Early History, pp. 225-229.
' " De, Early History, pp. 250-251.
375
 Sarkar's AM has much in common with Bengali Vaisnavism,"" especiaUy in relation to the
doctrine of bhakti and the practice of samkirtana. Like Caitanya and his followers, Sarkar extols the
virtue and supremacy of bhakti as the means to salvation, privileging it over jfidna and karma. Sarkar
defmes krsria philosophically as the witnessing nucleus of the cosmos, regarding this cosmic nucleus
as a personal entity that showers love and affection on all entities. He also sees krsria atfracting all
entities towards himself by his cenfripetal force, which can be constmed as the cosmic love that leads
all beings to salvation through union with himself. Sarkar and Caitanya agree on devotional love as
the means to salvation, but differ as to the nature of this salvation. For Sarkar, salvation is non-dual
merger into nirguria brahma, whose nucleus is krsria, wherein no separation between devotee and the
object of devotion persists. For Caitanya and his followers, salvation is framed in the dualist
metaphysic of Madhva, wherein the devotee etemally enjoys the freedom and bliss of his or her Lord
Krsna while remaining existentially separate.
Sarkar's doctrine of tri-aspect brahma displays a certain similarity to the doctrine of the three-
in-one supreme being in later Bengali Vaisnavism. Sarkar's nirguria brahma, the etemally existing
and attributeless consciousness, invites comparison with the Vaisnava notion of brahman or svayam
rdpa, the self existent entity. Similarly, Sarkar's saguria brahma, the manifested and qualified
consciousness that remains one in essence with but different in form from pure consciousness, is
analogous to the Vaisnava paramdtman or tadekdtma rupa, the hypostatised manifestation of
brahman. Finally, Sarkar's tdraka brahma, the liberator who is paradoxically in both saguria
(qualified, with atfributes) and nirguria (unqualified, without attributes) realms at the same time, is
analogous to the Vaisnava bhagavat or dveSa, the personified embodiment of the supreme being that
brings good to the world. For Sarkar, tdraka brahma is also bhagavdn, the Lord who is the complete
manifestation (purridvatdra) of supreme consciousness and who possesses the capacity to bring
salvation to individuals and upliftment of human society. This is unlike the Vaisnava bhagavat, who
is regarded as a partial rather than complete manifestation of the divine. Like the Vaisnava bhagavat,
however, Sarkar's tdraka brahma is regarded not as a developmental goal of spiritual practice but as a
soteriological and devotional character that is unique in function and occunence (although tdraka
brahma can appear from age to age depending on prevailing need). In a sense, the Vaisnava bhagavat
is echoed in Sarkar's conception of partial but still powerful manifestations of consciousness (e.g.
kaldvatdra; see Chapter 5) that are capable of helping the world.

Sarkar's religious vision and praxis resonate, at least partially, with those of the prominent Bengali author,
poet, and thinker Rabindranath Tagore. Tagore 'made no distinction between his aesthetic vision and his
spiritual realisation ... [he] sings of an infinite supreme Being underlying the whole cosmic process of finite
creation. The world process is an eternal process of self-realisation through self-manifestation of that supreme
Being ... This conception of religion propagated by Tagore ... [is] fundamentally based on the teachings of the
Upanisads,... [and on] the Upanisadic canvas the Vaigrjava love poets and the mystic Bauls of Bengal and other
mystic poets of upper and northern India, vis., Kabir, Dadu, Rajjab and others, have supplied colour and tone of
different shades.' Shashibusan Das Gupta, Obscure Religious Cults (Calcutta: Firma K. L. Mukhopadhyay,
1969), pp. xlviii-xlix.
376
 In light of the above discussion, it is evident that Sarkar's AM contains key elements that
strongly resonate with the existing Vaisnava tradhion of Bengal. Such elements shared by AM and
Bengali Vai?navism suggest that Sarkar's ideology is in many ways a product of the cultural milieu
and religious context of his ethnic homeland. This commonality also adds weight to the argument that
Sarkar, while outside the orthodoxy of disciplic lineage and fradition, is nevertheless an authentic
bdian exponent of Tantra, albeit an innovative and idiosyncratic one, caught in the wave of Hindu
post-colonial revivalism and indusfrial modemisation.

8.2.2 Bengali Tantrism

Several strains of Tantrism are popular in Bengal, namely those of the Sakta and the Sahajiya
varieties. Sakta Tantrism is especially common in West Bengal, as evidenced by the prominence of
goddesses in the region. Many of these goddesses, including Durga, Kah, Candi, Parvafl, Sarasvafl,
and Radha, are worshipped by the Bengalis, with public religious festivals dedicated to some of these
goddesses a common occunence in Bengal. While prominent at the popular level among the masses,
Saktism, as a complex system of religious beliefs and rituals, does not appear to be a likely infiuence
on Sarkar's thinking and praxis.
However, Saktism, existing in hybridisation with the Buddhist, Nath, Saiva, and Vaisnava
traditions, in the simplified variant of Tantrism known as the Sahaja or Sahajiya ('natural, bom
together'), may well have been an influence on Sarkar. This observation is conoborated by the fact
that Sahajiya Tantrism is 'an indigenous kind of Yogic discipline specialising in symbolic
interpretation and transformation of bodily substances.'"' Also, Sahajiya Tantrism is said to
selectively adapt from other religious systems ' ... elements of imagery, doctrine, and practice so as to
forge hybrid systems of spiritual discipline (sddhand).'"^ Sarkar's AM is, in many ways, a product of
hybridisation comprising elements from (1) the earliest Vedic corpus, (2) the classical philosophy-
praxis of Samkhya, Yoga, and Vedanta, (3) early Buddhism, (4) Saivism, (5) Saktism, and (6)
Vaisnavism. This synthetic spirit underlying Sarkar's AM may well reflect a Sahajiya outiook on
spirituality, an outiook that endorses and advocates a creative blending of ideas and practices into a
specific sddhand; AM can be seen as an example of such a type of sddhand. Sil (1988) supports this
view by arguing that the thinking behind Sarkar's AM is very much in keeping, at least in part, with
that of the Bengali Sahajiya movement:

Sarkar's preachings in this respect sfrongly resemble those of the Sahajiya (Naturalist)
Tantrics of Bengal who believe that 'the tmth ... can never be known by the scholars, -
for what comes within the scope of our mind, can never be the absolute trath.'

'"O'Connell, 'BengaH Rehgions',p. 101.

'"Ibid
'" Narasingha P. Sil, 'Anatomy of the Ananda Marga: Hindu Anabaptists.' Asian Culture Quarterly, vol. 16
issue 2 (1988), p. 4.
377
 Sarkar combines the two principal divisions of tantrism - Vaisnava and Saiva or Sakta
- the former in its typical BengaU Vaisnava-Sahajiya variety with its peculiar erotic
mysticism and the latter with its esoteric spiritual exercises with a generous dose of the
Tantric metaphysical concept of a cosmic entity .. ."*

We will now examine briefly the basic ideas and practices of Sahajiya Tanfrism, which
contains Sakta, Saiva, Vaisnava and other elements, and compare them with those of AM in order to
highlight specific similarities and differences. Through such comparison, I hope to fiuther test the
claim that Sarkar reflects the Sahajiya philosophical and practical outlook in his synthetic ideology of
AM.
The term sahaja ('together bom') denotes the following: 'natural', 'innate', 'spontaneous', or
'inbom'; it points to the traism that the 'Self is not other than the individual who is seeking i t . . . ', but
' ... is natural, innate, not extemal but part of one's inner nature.'"' According to Feuerstein, the term
sahaja refers to the 'essential identity between the finite and the infinite, the phenomenal and the
noumenal reaUty.'"" He points out two textual references to the notion of sahaja, the first in a
Vaisnava Sahajiya text, the Ratnasdra, and the second in a Kaula text (belonging to the Saiva Tantric
tradition), the Akulavira Tantra. In the first case, beings are said to be 'bom out of sahaja, live in
sahaja, and again vanish into sahaja.''^' In the second case, sahaja is said to be a 'state of being
characterised by omniscience, onmipresence, and goodness',"' wherein the mind is totally silenced
and all duality and suffering completely terminated.
The Sahajiya movement, which straddled both Buddhism and Hinduism from around the
eighth century C E . onwards, and which flourished in Bengal in the form of the Vaisnava Sahajiya
tradition from the sixteenth century to the nineteenth, is based essentially on this central notion of
sahaja.'^^ The inclusive and integral perspective of the Sahajiyas is expressed in literary compositions
of rich metaphorical, poetic, and inspirational content. The Vaisnava Sahajiya, in particular, is
effusive in its embrace of the emotional and erotic dimensions of spiritual life, in contradistinction to
the stoic ideal of renunciation found in other soteriological paths (e.g. Yoga). To this day, there are
small, marginal groups of wandering singers and musicians (e.g. Bauls, Sains, Kartabhajas) who
continue the Sahajiya tradition of spontaneous devotional expression. They wander the countryside,
sing initiatory songs, and gather periodically with members of the same group for religious-musical
festivals (we/a)."" The Vaisnava Sahajiyas, in common with the general Sahajiya movement in north-
eastem India, exhibit several salient characteristics: (1) a spirit of protest against and criticism of

"* Sil, 'Anatomy of the Ananda Marga', p. 10.

John Grimes, A Concise Dictionary of Indian Philosophy: Sanskrit Terms Defined in English (Albany: State
University of New York, 1996), p. 265.
"° Feuerstein, Tantra: The Path of Ecstasy, p. 45.
' " Ibid
' " Feuerstein, Tantra, p. 46.
" ' For an illuminating account of the history, beliefs, and practices of the Vaignava Sahajiya cult, see
Shashibhusan Das Gupta, Obscure Religious Cults (Calcutta: Firma K. L. Mukhopadhyay, 1969), pp. 113-146.
"" See Feuerstein, Yoga Tradition, p. 510; and O'Connell, 'Bengali Religions', p. 101.
378
world-renouncing attitudes and ascetic practices of traditional religion; (2) devaluation of scholarship
and intellecmal abstraction; (3) scathing criticism of religious formalities, rituals, and the caste
system.'" Unlike the Buddhist Sahajiyas, who conceive the highest state of sahaja as a state of
mahdsukha or great bliss, the Vaisnava Sahajiyas conceive this state as one of supreme love, a love
that is also the primordial substance underlying the entire world-process."*
The emotional effusiveness of the Vaisnava Sahajiyas can be seen in the ritual enactment of
divine union through maithuna (sexual intercourse), wherein the male Sahajiyas identify themselves
with Krsna while the females see themselves as Radha. They regard the practice of sacred sexual
union as a way of retuming to the state of spontaneity (sahaja) through enjoyment (sambhoga).'^^
Similarly, ecstatic, prolonged dancing and chanting of divine names of Krsna (kirtana), and ritual
playacting by devotees (with Kr^na as lover courted by a shepherdess or with Radha as the beloved
courted by a cowherd), are regarded as means to sahaja, here conceived as the essence of devotion."*
Another means to sahaja is the production of a subtie essential fluid or rasa through the technique of
'Tanfric reversal' during sexual intercourse. This reversal consists in preventing the ejaculation of
semen and in 'channelling' the seminal energy upwards (drdhvaretas) so as to transmute it into rasa.
The careful preservation of rasa is said to result in immortality in the form of the trae or innate person
(sahaja mdnusa) in the heart.'" In other words, attaining the fullness of the alchemical fluid, rasa,
results in the attainment of the cosmic substance (vastu) that forms the divine body. It appears that
some kind of 'embodied' or 'physical' enlightenment is refened to here.
An important difference exists between the conception of devotional love in the Vaisnava
Sahajiyas and in the Bauls, a fringe order of religious singers that flourished in the villages of Bengal
and is still extant. Das Gupta says:

The love of the Vaisnava Sahajiyas exists between individual beings as Radha and
Krgna, but not between the individual and the Absolute; it is love between Radha and
Krsna that ultimately leads to the realisation of the Absolute. The love of the Bauls is,
on the contrary, the love dfrectly between the Sahaja as the ultimate reaUty on the one
hand and the individual on the other. To conform to the emotional approach of the
Bauls the Sahaja has gradually fransformed itself into a Personal God, or the Supreme
Being with whom it may be possible to have personal relations.

" ' Das Gupta, Obscure, pp. 51-61.

1^/1
Das Gupta, Obscure, p. 121.
' " Feuerstein, Tantra, p. 234.
Feuerstein, Tantra, pp. 234-236. On the Vaigijava Sahajiyas' method of maithuna, Goudriaan says: ' ... its
most important characteristic [is] the theory, and sometimes the ritual practice, of divine love exemplified in its
most pure form in the feelings towards another's wife (parakiyd); for their particular method of sexual yoga they
were indebted to the early medieval Siddhas of the Buddhist Sahajayana, which in some respects differ from the
ordinary Tanfric method' (see Goudriaan, 'Infroduction, History and Philosophy', p. 27).
' Feuerstein, Tantra, p. 237.
"" Das Gupta, Obscure, p. 175.
379
Like the Vaisnava Sahajiyas, however, the Bauls conceive of divine love as the ultimate source and
ground of the cosmos. The Bauls account for creation by invoking the image of the Absolute who, out
of loneliness and need for expression, commences the process of creation:

... it is said that the Absolute was alone in the beginning; but it could not realise the
infinite potency of love that was in it without a dual; in love therefore it created a dual
out of its own self, ... The whole universe thus proceeds from the Love of God. Love
is the underlying principle of the cosmic process as a whole.

Sarkar's devotional emphasis and his biopsychological approach to spfritual practice refiect a
typical Sahajiya outlook, an outiook characterised by intense devotional sentiment and a concem for
physiological transmutation. Furthermore, Sarkar's conception of divine love as the primordial
driving force and essence of all things - an idea encapsulated in his mahdmantra 'Bdbd Ndm Kevalam'
- echoes the Vaisnava Sahajiya and Baul notion of supreme love as both the cosmic substratum and
the reason for creation. More importantiy, Sarkar's concept of the personal tdraka brahma and the
intimate love and salvific devotion possible between the AM practitioner and his or her beloved
brahma, are clearly identical to the Baul conception of love and the divine. This convergence of ideas
and attitudes between Sarkar and the Bauls is interesting, underscoring Sarkar's intellectual debt to
earlier cunents of Indian, and in particular Bengali, thought.
Sarkar's usage of the term sahaja in naming his set of six meditative lessons also reminds of
the Sahajiya focus on the goal of sahaja. Sarkar equates the supreme state of attainment with the
spontaneous state of sahajdvasthd,'^^ sfrongly suggesting that he sees the goal of sddhand as a retum
to one's original and innate state of being, which is parama purusa. While he does not advocate the
practice of Tantric reversal during sexual intercourse, he does encourage sexual moderation (for family
practitioners) and celibacy (for monastics). In line with the Sahajiya emphasis on physiological
transmutation, he advocates a graduated sublimation of physical energy into psychic energy, psychic
energy into spfritual energy, and finally spfritual energy into pure consciousness through a system of
practice called the Sixteen Points. Dietary injunctions, fasting, Yogic postures, and special breathing
exercises are examples of practices aimed at transmutation of energy into subtler forms and finally into
consciousness. Finally, Sarkar stresses the central role of kirtana in the process of spfritual practice,
using it as the primary means of devotional praxis and an enactment of total self-sunender. Like the
Sahajiyas, Sarkar does not advocate emotional, poetic, or aesthetic suppression, promoting instead an
open acceptance and outward expression of all kinds of devotional feelings with respect to parama

"' Das Gupta, Obscure, pp. 177-178. Of the unique creed of the Bauls, Das Gupta observes: 'The fact seems to
be that the popular composite religious consciousness which was formed by an unconscious admixture of
Upanisadic mysticism and the devotional fervour of the Vaijnavas was further modified by the kindred thoughts
of Sufism where the spirit of the Upanigads and that of later Vaisnavism are found combined together.' (pp. 176-
177). It would seem that Sarkar's religious vision, especially with regard to the notion of 'love is all there is',
contains an element of Sufi devotionalism, a research topic that falls outside the scope of this study.
'"/?OrVol.2,p. 81.
380
purusa. The AM mahdmantra 'Bdbd Ndm Kevalam' expresses just such an outpouring of love and
devotion for parama purusa, the beloved friend, spouse, master, father, child, or guru of the devotee in
the personalised aspect of tdraka brahma (= krsria = purusottama). For AM devotees, mass singing of
the mahdmantra is often an occasion for profound collective inspiration and spontaneous outbursts of
devotional fervour, quite in keeping with the style and mood of the Sahajiyas. However, unlike the
Sahajiyas, Sarkar teaches neither the practice of maithuna nor the ritual playacting of Krsna and Radha
in the quest for realisation of sahaja. It appears that he adopts the essential Sahajiya spirit of
devotional spontaneity and practical synthesis but adapts its methods in a way that is more in keeping
with the traditional Yogic approach. Sarkar also departs from the Vaisnava Sahajiya conception of
liberative devotion, one that is obtained between devotees as Radha and Krsna; rather he follows the
Bauls in emphasising the love relationship between devotees and the divine absolute as paramount and
ultimately liberative.
The critical and comparative discussion of Sarkar's AM in juxtaposition with ancient and
classical Indian systems is now completed. It appears that Sarkar's AM contains practical and
theoretical elements from the Sakta, Saiva, Vaisnava, and Sahajiya (in particular the Baul) Tantric
systems, fulfilling Mishra's twofold criteria for authenticity mentioned in section 8.1 of this chapter.
Sil supports the view that Sarkar's AM is a synthetic mixture of Sakta Tantrism and Vaisnavism,
commenting that the confusion generated in the Bengali consciousness stemming from this blending
of two traditionally separate spfritual pathways is one reason for AM's failure to enlist the support of
the middle and upper classes in West Bengal.'" While this confusion might be tme for West Bengal
and India in general, the synthesis of pathways probably had little detrimental effect on AM's
reception in countries outside India, especially in the West where exposure to these systems is likely to
be minimal or absent. Sil, while admitting that Sarkar teaches an innovative and socially conscious
form of Tantra, nevertheless criticises Sarkar's AM as 'neither authentic nor easily comprehensible'.""
He speculates that Sarkar's devaluation of the status of the Goddess in favour of male Gods such as
Siva and Krsna is prompted by his ambition to propagate his new religion of AM. He further argues

" ' Sil, 'Anatomy of the Ananda Marga', p. 11: '... even though the basic spiritual tenets of Tantiism and
Vaisnavism have long coalesced with each other in Bengal since the sixteenth century, the amalgamation of
Sakta dcdra and Vaijiiava dcdra prove confusing for the average Bengali who hasfraditionallyheld a clear
distinction between the two modes of spirituality.' From the results of the present study, I would add Saiva and
Sahajiya (as well as indirectiy. Yoga, Sanjkhya, and Vedanta) elements into Sarkar's consfructive synthesis of
AM. Sil observes the social context of AM's emergence thus: 'In [the] Indian context, especially, the objective
of Sarkar's sect is quite in keeping with thefraditionof Hindu revivalism of the late nineteenth century. Hindu
revivalists such as Swami Vivekananda, Balgangadhar Tilak, Aurobindo Ghosh, Bipin Chandra Pal, or
Swaminarayan (Sahanjananda Swami) had attempted "to blend religious with socio-economic values to foster a
revived sense of community and ultimately to espouse nationalism" ' (p. 2). I agree with Sil on AM's alignment
with the spirit of revivalism but disagree on its supposed espousal of nationalism. In all of Sarkar's writings,
especially those on socio-economic theory, the consistent message is one of universalism, not nationalism.
Sil, p. 11. In the same paragraph, he says: 'His innovative Tanfrism without due reference and deference to
Sakti and his liberal concern for elevating the status of women in society at once reveal his essentially Tanfric
emphasis on the equality of the sexes and his anxiety to dissociate his new spirituality fromfraditionalTantric
affiliation.'
381
that Sarkar, by doing so, distances himself from the traditional Tanfric 'awe for the female as the seat
of reproduction, the source of all life'"' and is thus incongraous with authentic Tantrism.
In the final chapter, I will synthesise all the findings of this study and argue, in disagreement
with Sil, that Sarkar's AM is not beyond the scope of authentic Tanfrism. I will argue the thesis that
Prabhat Raiijan Sarkar, in spite of his non-allegiance to any existing Tantric lineage and his lack of
total conformity to fraditional formulations, nonetheless echoes deeply the Tantric vision and its
docfrines in his AM ideology. This is especially so since Tanfra, as we have seen from this study, is
far more than the cult of Sakti alone and includes the Saiva and Vaisnava elements as well.

Sil, 'Anatomy of the Ananda Marga', p. 11.

382
 Chapter 9
P. R. Sarkar: A Tantric Guru

Sarkar claims to have drawn his ideology from the ancient Indian episteme of Tantra, modifying and
adapting it to the needs of the modem age. We began our investigation into Sarkar's ideology (in
Chapter 3) from the perspective of his cosmology, namely the brahmacakra theory. Embedded within
this theory is Sarkar's understanding of the cenfral concept of brahma, a tri-aspect ontological and
theological entity that is composed of purusa or Siva (consciousness), and prakrti or Sakti (energy).
Through the spontaneous will and desire of brahma, the universe is created via a progressive
transformation of pure consciousness, first into universal mind, and later into the five fundamental
elements that comprise all matter. In his brahmacakra theory, Sarkar attempts to reconcile the
theories of creation and evolution by positing that matter emerges from mind (in this case, the cosmic
mind) and subsequently develops in complexity to such an extent that it becomes possible for mind (in
this case, the unit mind) to in tum emerge from matter. This unit mind then undergoes further
evolution, finally enabling consciousness, the subtlest witnessing capacity (or reflexivity) of mind, to
arise. Through spiritual practices, each unit consciousness is able to gradually develop and expand its
boundary to the point where it finally dissolves into the infinite consciousness from which it had
come. For Sarkar, the cosmogonic (sancara) and evolutionary (pratisancara) processes of
brahmacakra are facilitated by minute emanations of consciousness that he calls microvita, of which
there are a total of fourteen types (Chapters 3 and 6 presented separate discussions on Sarkar's
microvita theory).
As mentioned in Chapter 8, Tantra draws its material historically from a wide variety of
sources. One such source is Sarnkhya philosophy, whose terminology permeates the treatises of a
branch of medieval Tanfra known as Kashmir Saivism. Upon examining Sarkar's texts, the
prevalence of Sarnkhyan terminology is evident. Sarnkhya is an ancient Indian philosophical system
that teaches the existence of multiple purusas and a singular prakrti as the basic original substances of
the universe. The AM redefinition of purusa and prakrti as twin aspects of one singular reality
indicates a critical re-appropriation of Indian tradition on Sarkar* s part. Such re-appropriation may
qualify Sarkar as a neo-Sarnkhyan thinker in so far as his basic cosmology is based on a renewed
definition of Samkhya's core concepts.'
Sarkar's 'neo-Sainkhya' philosophy, while ontologicaUy monistic, is at the same time clearly
theistic, a conceptual innovation made possible by the infroduction of a tri-aspect brahma, the supreme
consciousness. By adopting the definition of brahma as having nirguria (unqualified, non-
attributional, transcendent) and saguria (qualified, attributional, immanent) aspects, Sarkar creates the
possibility for and necessity of a link that bridges the gap between the manifest and the unmanifest.
He cleverly uses the metaphor of the tangent to describe the locus and function of tdraka brahma, the

383
personalised, liberative aspect of brahma linking the 'nfrgunic' and 'sagunic' realms. These three
ontological aspects of the same reality point to three distinct but integrated styles of soteriological
praxis that lead to them (which we will discuss later).
No contemporary exposition of Tanfra would be complete without a theory of mind and subtle
physiology, the hallmark of classical Tanfric speculations. In Chapter 4, we explored Sarkar's multi-
modelled theory of mind, which intricately links psychology to human anatomy and physiology -
glands (granthi), nerves (nddi), and plexuses (cakra). He calls this part-modem, part-classical theory
the 'new science' of biopsychology. In keeping with the Tantric emphasis on the body as a divinised
receptacle of the spfrit, a receptacle that is essentiaUy and substantially one with divine reality, Sarkar
pays great attention to the cultivation of the body by such means as Yogic postures (dsana), sentient
diet (sdttvika dhdrd), systematic half-bath (vyapaka sauca), periodic fasting (upavdsa), and
moderation in sex (for family practitioners). These biopsychological practices are included under
Sarkar's Sixteen Points, a set of strict guidelines for total development of the individual AM
practitioner. (The Sixteen Points have been discussed in Chapter 5.)
Admittedly, such practices are more Yogic than Tanfric, and appear to advocate a denial of the
gross body in favour of the sublime spfrit by thwarting ordinary biological drives. Sarkar, however,
promotes these practices as means of subtilising and transmuting the body by hamessing its innate
energy, without unhealthily repressing natural drives. He appears to be trying to steer a course
between extreme self-indulgence and extreme self-mortification, advocating a style of spirituality that
includes, rather than excludes, the body as a pathway to divinity. For Sarkar, a sort of 'bodily
enlightenment' is an important pre-requisite for 'spiritual enlightenment', based on the notion that the
powerful surge of the kuridalirii requires a strong and pure body as a base. Sarkar's reading of Tantric
practice points to a discarding of a purely physical interpretation of Tantric 'enjoyment' (bhoga),
eschewing public or private rituals of sacralized sex. Instead, he appears to have read bhoga as
sublimated bliss experienced by the mind and body through ascribing divinity to all phenomena
(madhuvidyd), an attitude of devotional love (bhakti and prema), and a system of Yogic-meditative
practices (astdriga yoga and sahaja yoga). Thus, Sarkar's AM praxis embraces both enjoyment
(bhoga) and salvation (moksa), both the 'pleasant' (preya) and the 'good' (Sreya), and both spfritual
knowing (pardvidyd) and mundane knowing (apardvidyd) in a dialectical process of transformation
into that which is beyond all duality, all mental fabrication. It is in this sense that we can speak of
Sarkarian Tantra as displaying the quality of integrating seemingly diametrically opposed values that
is so characteristic of classical Tantra.
As mentioned earlier, Sarkar teaches three integrated styles of practice conesponding loosely
to realisation of the three integral aspects of brahma - saguria, nirguria, and tdraka. The path of
Sdktdcdra, involving fearless, vigorous, and selfless action (karma yoga), is one of constant straggle
against inner and outer obstacles, leading ultimately to the bliss of merger with saguria brahma. This

' I am indebted to Shaman Hatiey for use of the term 'neo-Saipkhya'

384
state of merger is termed savikalpa samddhi and is effected mainly by the practice of isvara
prariidhdna, the ffrst meditative lesson of sahaja yoga. The path of vaisriavdcdra, involving sweet
sunender and devotional love (bhakti yoga), is one of blissfully letting go of one's entfre being to the
personal liberator, tdraka brahma, in the form of the sadguru. This moment-to-moment sunender of
self-will to the cosmic wUl allows the practitioner to cross the 'bridge' linking saguria and nirguria
brahma, resulting in the final stage of Saivdcdra - the path of pristine knowledge and non-dual
wisdom (jfidna yoga). This culminating phase of Saivdcdra is none other than the realisation of
nirvikalpa samddhi, union with the unconditioned nirguria brahma. This final union is best effected
by the sixth meditative lesson, guru dhydna, since the guru is the human embodiment of tdraka
brahma; only he has the capacity to lead the disciple from 'sagunic' to 'nirgunic' reality. In this way,
Sarkar's ontology, theology, and soteriology are inseparably and integrally linked, demonsfrating an
overall coherence and comprehensiveness characteristic of Tanfra.
Much like the Kashmir Saiva schools of Tantra, Sarkar appropriates the astdriga yoga
framework of Patafijali in constracting a spiritual praxis for his followers (see Chapter 5). He
redefines some aspects of astdriga yoga and adds the practice of Sodhana (purification) to it,
incorporating Sodhana as the fifth lesson in his meditative system of sahaja yoga. He also
operationalises the practice of astdriga yoga in his meditative system and links the effects of such
practice with the arousal and elevation of the kuridalirii through the susumrid nddi of the AM
practitioner. In other words, the processes of astdriga yoga (such as pratydhdra, dhdrarid, and
dhydna) are operationalised using the Tantric tools of mantra, cakra and nddi visualisation, and guru
contemplation. Through such Tantric meditation, the AM practitioner arouses kuridalirii without
deliberately manipulating it, and raises it naturally from the mulddhdra cakra to the sahasrdra cakra.
In this way, Sarkar ties a traditionally Yogic praxis to a Tantric metaphysic and soteriology (see
Chapter 6). This highlights the finding that Sarkar's AM praxis is pragmatically Yogic but essentially
and cosmologically Tantric, especially Saiva Tantric.
As part of his constructive synthesis, Sarkar blends in the Buddhist framework of the noble
eightfold path (arydstanga mdrga), a move that seems out of keeping with his generally Yogic and
Tantric approach (see Chapter 5). This anomaly is resolved somewhat by Sarkar's renumbering and
reintepretation of the steps of the eightfold path in terms of his cosmotheistic worldview and
soteriology. He does not, hovvever, place the eightfold path in the centre of his AM praxis, but merely
highlights it as a set of worthwhile and useful pointers for anyone walking the AM path. By
mentioning the eightfold path, Sarkar appears to be legitimising his own praxis by means of another
spiritual path, a path that is perhaps better known and respected amongst spiritual practitioners. Be
that as it may, early Buddhism and AM may share common Yogic, ascetic elements in their
soteriologies, especially in relation to purported meditative stages and realisations. This commonality
may well point to an inner dynamic within early Buddhism and Classical Yoga, a dynamic that would
later give rise to Buddhist and Hindu Tantra. Sarkar's Tantra may represent one of the latest and most

385
contemporary expressions of the dynamic inherent within Indian spirituality in general - the
imperative to periodicaUy revitaUse and rebalance itself when infrovertive, repressive, and socially-
isolating tendencies become unacceptably excessive.
In keeping with the Tantric fradition's emphasis on the soteriological cenfrality of the guru,
Sarkar porfrays himself as the medium through which intuitional practices forftra/ima-realisationare
transmitted to his disciples. As a self-proclaimed Tantric guru, Sarkar taught his initiated disciples a
number of esoteric meditative practices, the most fundamental of which is a set of six meditative
lessons known as sahaja yoga (see Chapter 6). Designed to lead the disciple to the twin goals of mukti
and moksa, the six lesscMis embody the traditional Yogic approaches of jfidna yoga, karma yoga, and
bhakti yoga, and utilise the form and content of Tanfric methods such as puraScdraria (mantra-
empowerment by the guru), mantra ghdt (awakening the mantra), mantra dipani (illuminating the
mantra), and mantra caitanya (immersing in consciousness of the mantra). (Subsection 6.1.5
presented detailed discussion on these methods.) Meditation is supplemented by the important
devotional practice of kirtana. Although he does not claim to be tdraka brahma, the personal liberator
of suffering humanity, Sarkar does act and function as such. He proclaims the disciple's absolute
reliance on the guru's krpd (grace), bestowed by the guru through positive microvita, in the reahsation
of moksa, the ultimate spfritual attainment. This moA:5a-realisation normally occurs through a
progression of six levels of spiritual attainment, beginning with sdlokya and ending with kaivalya
(identical to moksa). The terms used to describe these levels of realisation are common to Samkhya
(e.g. the term 'kaivalya') and Vaisnavism (e.g. the terms 'sdlokya' and 'sdyujya'). In short, Sarkar
appears to have used elements derived from Yoga and Tantra (in its Saiva, Sakta, and Vaisnava forms)
in constmcting his AM practice and stages of attainment (see Chapters 7 and 8).
Insofar as he claims to be teaching Tanti-a, albeit stripped of all ritualistic and superstitious
elements, it is of interest to examine to what extent Sarkar is an authentic Tantric guru. Through
philosophical and practical comparisons of Sarkar's AM with other Indian traditions (Chapters 7 and
8), we observe that AM's core practices - e.g. mantra meditation, guru devotion, kuridalini
awakening, and kirtana - and AM's key concepts - e.g. siva-Sakti integrality, dynamism of citisakti,
non-dual realism (i.e. the world as a real, not illusory, expression of pure consciousness), and the
mystical power of Sabda (sound) - indicate a heavy debt on Sarkar's part to the Tantric legacy, hi
other words, Sarkar appears to have met both of Mishra's criteria:' (1) the practices that Sarkar taught
are consistent with the Tantric philosophy of integralism and mysticism, and (2) the key terms and
concepts he used are mostiy identical to older ideas found in classical Tantric texts. At the same time,
certain antinomian practices such as sacralised sex rituals, commonly practised in the 'left-handed
path' (vdmamdrga) of medieval Tanfra, are absent from Sarkar's AM. Also, the emotionally effusive
and erotic approach of Bengali Vaisnava Sahajiya (a syncretic tradition of Vaisnava Tantra), involving
dramatic, sexual role-playing of Krsna and Radha, is abandoned in favour of an inner and service-

See text reference to Mishra's criteria in section 8.1.

386
oriented devotion to parama purusa. The devotee mentally directs such devotional sentiment to
supreme consciousness (in the form of the guru or otherwise), and expresses that devotion in outward
service to all creatures.
All this indicates that what Sarkar presents as Tantra can be considered a sanitised form of an
older, more flamboyant tradition of Tantra, one that outwardly challenges the orthodoxy and
orthopraxy of mainstream Vedic religion. However, insofar as he upsets the Vedic and Indian status
quo through (1) his blatant disavowal of caste, female dowry, and religious exhibitionism, and (2) his
socio-political challenge to capitalism and communism via PROUT, Sarkar can be seen as a modem
Tantric master, one who is not afraid to challenge what he perceives as the hypocrisy of mainstream
religion and polity. In this regard, and also in terms of his deep, ideological harmony with the
essential spfrit, philosophy, and practices of Tantra, Sarkar can thus be regarded as an authentic
Tantric guru. He can be said to offer a modemised yet spiritually legitimate form of Tantra that has
contemporary appeal.
This thesis began with three major questions:
1. What is the nature and content of the spiritual philosophy that Sarkar propounded?
2. What are the spiritual practices Sarkar initiated his followers into, and how do the theory and'
practice of AM spfrituality relate to each other?
3. How has Sarkar re-invented the Indian spfritual tradition of Tantra, a claim that he obliquely
makes?
To the ffrst question, we can now answer that Sarkar propounds an essentially Sahajiya style
(of the Baul variant) of Tantric philosophy, one that synthesises elements from a wide variety of
classical Indian systems, in particular: Sarnkhya metaphysics. Yoga praxis, Vedanta theology, Saiva
ontology and cosmology, Vaisnava emotional culture, and Sakta psycho-physiology and cosmo-
linguistics.
To the second question, we can answer that Sarkar initiated his followers into a complex set of
Yogic-Tanfric practices based upon aframeworkderived from Pataiijali, but modified and expanded
to include elements such as mantra initiation and contemplation from the Saiva-Sakta fradition, and
devotional practices from the Vaisnava tradition. The underlying spfrit of AM praxis is one of
integration of the mundane and the spiritual, and a blending of the personal and the communal. AM
praxis espouses a universalism that embraces socio-cultural diversity, non-separation within
humanity and between humanity, the material world, and ecology, and a teleology of individual
liberation and salvation. Sarkar specifically designs a collection of spiritual practices known as the
Sixteen Points, for the expressed purpose of leading AM practitioners towards the soteriological
goals of mukti and moksa.
The third question has been answered, at least partially, in the discussion on Tantra in the
previous chapter. Suffice to mention here that Sarkar has re-invented Tantra by:
(1) removing from it sexual and ritualistic elements characteristic offraditionalTantric praxis;

387
 (2) recasting the antinomian spirit of Tantra in terms of challenge to the exploitative and oppressive
stractures of religion, politics, and society;
(3) redesigning Tanfric meditative practices to focus exclusively on the reahsation of supreme
consciousness through physical, emotional, intellectual, intuitive and mystical culture;
(4) introducing a quasi-scientific explanation of Tantric concepts of mind, cakra, nddi, and prdna in
his theory of biopsychology;
(5) formulating an idealistic and monistic cosmological theory (brahmacakra) built upon a
Samkhyan-Saiva worldview, one that integrates the mundane and the franscendent without
negating one for the other; a worldview that encourages a socially-conscious, socially-
responsible approach to spirituality.
Other questions of academic importance remain unexplored. This study does not examine in
any great detail how each of the Indian systems discussed compares with AM. Only brief
comparative overviews have been attempted here. Many lines of investigation in comparative
soteriology, phenomenology, ontology, epistemology and ethics remain to be pursued with greater
historical rigour and depth. A closer and deeper phenomenological comparison of AM and Buddhist
accounts of meditative experience, with reference to theories of comparative mysticism, is one such
promising area of investigation.' A more careful sociological or historical study of Sarkar as a
religious leader and of AM as a New Religious Movement (NRM) is another. It is my hope that this
study marks the beginning of a continuing process of research into Sarkar's intellectual and
pragmatic legacy, a process that may positively contribute to humanity's perennial quest for
meaning, self-definition, and social and global reconstraction in an age of pluralistic uncertainty,
fragmentation, and ethical bewilderment.

Cf Frank Whaling, 'Comparative Approaches', in Frank Whaling (ed.). Contemporary Approaches to the
Study of Religion, Volume 1: Humanities (Berlin: Mouton PubHshers, 1983), pp. 165-295. On tiie potential
benefit of comparative studies in mysticism. Whaling writes: 'This area of study abounds in general theories that
can only be substantiated or otherwise by reference to particular studies. Such studies, as they emerge, create a
dialectic between theories of mysticism and practical instances of mysticism' (p. 277).
388
 Appendix 1

List of Standard versus Ananda IMarga Transcriptions of

Classical Sanskrit

Vowels:

Standard AM Standard AM

a a / Ir
d a ./ Irr
I 1 e e
I 11 ai ae
u u o o
u u au ao
r r am am
f rr ah ah

Consonants:

Standard AM Standard AM

ka ka pa pa
kha kha pha pha
ga ga ba ba
gha gha bha bha
na ur}a ma ma

ca ca ya ya
cha cha ra ra
ja ja la la
jha jha va va
na ir}a

ta ta Sa sha
tha tha sa sa
da da sa sa
dha iha
ria ria

ta ta ha ha
tha tha ksa kSa
da da
dha dha
na na

389
 Appendix 2

IMeaning of Acoustic Roots in Ananda Marga*

the acoustic root of creation, or of the idea to create the universe that arises in the mind

of parama purusa. It is also the controller of the seven notes offrido-Aryanmusic (the

surasaptaka or 'seven notes') but mainly the fu-st note, sadaja (sya or khya).

the acoustic root and direct controller of the second musical note, rsabha (re or r), as

well as indfrect controUer of the third to seventh notes.

the acoustic root and direct confroUer of the thfrd note, gdndhdra (gd), and indirect

controller of the fourth to seventh notes.

the acoustic root and direct controller of the fourth note, madhyama (md), and indfrect

controller of the fifth to seventh notes.

the acoustic root and direct controller of the fifth note, pancama (pa), and indirect

controller of the sixth and seventh notes. It is also the acoustic root of preservation, or

of the desfre to maintain the created universe that arises in the mind of parama purusa.

the acoustic root and direct controller of the sixth note, dhaivata (dhd), and indirect

confroUer of the seventh note.

the acoustic root of the seventh note, nisdda (ni).

the super-acoustic root of om, which is itself a combination of all sounds and the

acoustic root of the created universe.

the super-acoustic root of hurri, which is itself the acoustic root of the straggle of the

kuridalini to wake and rise up to the topmost cakra. Sarkar says that spfritual

practitioners sometimes utter the sound 'hdni' spontaneously when they achieve

progress and bliss as a result of elevation of their kuridalirii.

the super-acoustic root of phat, which is itself the acoustic root of the action of putting

theory into practice; / is also the acoustic root of the sudden arousal of energy with

consequent removal of lethargy.

390
e- the super-acoustic root of vausat, which is itself the acoustic root of mundane

knowledge and the thought of mundane welfare.

ai the super-acoustic root of vasat, which is itself the acoustic root of the thought and

materialization of subtle or supramundane welfare; ai pronounced as aim is also the

acoustic root of the six stages of vocalization or linguistic expression, as well as the

acoustic root of the guru (also termed vdgbhava bija) through which the guru is

invoked.

0 the super-acoustic root of svdhd, which is itself the acoustic root of the completion of an

action, often associated with a noble or divine purpose, for example, desire for universal

welfare.

au the super-acoustic root of namah, which is itself the acoustic root of 'sunender to the

greatness of another person or entity', and in the process acqufring greatness for oneself.

am - the acoustic root of a bitter and repulsive mentality that utters hurtful words.

ah - the acoustic root of a sweet and pleasant mentality that utters endearing words.

ka the acoustic root of dsd vrtti, the propensity of hope. It is also the acoustic root of kdrya

brahma, or the 'expressed consciousness', synonymous with saguria brahma.

kha the acoustic root of cintd vrtti, the propensity of worry.

ga the acoustic root of cestd vrtti, the propensity of arousing one's dormant potential

through effort.

gha the acoustic root of mamatd vrtti, the propensity of love of and attachment to human and

non-human beings, but in a limited and conditional way.

ria the acoustic root of dambha vrtti, the propensity of vanity.

ca the acoustic root of viveka, the propensity for discriminative conscience.

cha the acoustic root of vikalatdh vrtti, the propensity for nervous breakdown.

ja - the acoustic root of aharnkdra vrtti, the propensity of egoism.

jha the acoustic root of lobha and lolatd vrttis, the propensities of greed and avarice

respectively.

' SummarisedfromDOr Vol. 1, pp. 82-124.

391
fia - the acoustic root of kapatatd vrtti, the propensity of hypocrisy.

ta the acoustic root of vitarka vrtti, the propensity of bad temper combined with

garralousness.

tha - the acoustic root of anutdpa vrtti, the propensity of repentance, as well as of night time,

of the moon, of bhdvarloka ('crade mental world'), and of the kdmamaya koSa (the

mind's 'layer of desire').

da the acoustic root of lajjd vrtti, the propensity of shyness.

dha - the acoustic root of piSunatd vrtti, the propensity for senseless sadistic killing.

ria the acoustic root of irsd vrtti, the propensity of envy.

ta the acoustic root of suSupti vrtti, the propensity of staticity, intellectual dullness, and

spiritual inertness.

tha - the acoustic root of visdda vrtti, the propensity of melancholia.

da - the acoustic root of kasdya vrtti, the propensity of peevishness.

dha the acoustic root of trsrid vrtti, the propensity of thirst for acquisition.

na - the acoustic root of moha vrtti, the propensity of blind attachment or infatuation.

pa the acoustic root of ghnid vrtti, the propensity of hatred or revulsion.

pha - the acoustic root of bhaya vrtti, the propensity of fear.

ba - the acoustic root of avajnd vrtti, the propensity of indifference.

bha the acoustic root of murcchd vrtti, the propensity of lack of common sense.

ma - the acoustic root of praridsa vrtti, the propensity for destraction, as well as of praSraya

vrtti, the propensity of treating others with indulgence.

ya - the acoustic root of aviSvdsa vrtti, the propensity of lack of self-confidence.

ra - the acoustic root of prdriaSakti or vitality. Paradoxically, it is also the acoustic root of

sarvandsa vrtti, the propensity of self-defeatism or thought of nihilism.

la the acoustic root of kruratd vrtti, or propensity of craelty.

va - the acoustic root of dharma vrtti or 'psycho-spiritual longing' for morality and

spirituality. It is also the acoustic root of jalatattva or the 'liquid factor'.

392
sd the acoustic root of rajoguria ('mutative principle'), as well as of artha vrtti or "psychic

longing' (usually for wealth or fame).

sa ' the acoustic root of tamogutia ('static principle'), as weU as of kdma vrtti or 'physical

longing' (usuaUy for sensual pleasure).

sa - the acoustic root of sattvaguria ('sentient principle'), as weU as of moksa vrtti or

"spfritual longing' (for salvation or unqualified liberation).

ha - the acoustic root of pardvidyd vrtti or propensity for spiritual knowledge, as well as of

the ethereal factor, of daytime, of the sun, and of svarloka ('subtie mental world').

ksa - the acoustic root of apardvidyd vrtti or propensity for mundane knowledge, as well as

of material science.

393
 Appendix 3

Photograph of l^rl Prabhat Raiijan Sarkar

394
 Appendix 4

Diagram of Ananda Marga Prafika

'The pratika represents in a visual way the essence of Ananda Marga ideology. The six-pointed
star is composed of two equilateral triangles. The triangle pointing upward represents action, or
the outward flow of energy through selfless service to humanity. The triangle pointing
downward represents knowledge, the inward search for spfritual realisation through meditation.
The sun in the cenfre represents advancement, all-round progress. The goal of the aspirant's
march through life is symbolised by the svdstika, which means spiritual victory.''

' Taken from frontispiece of i4y Part 33.

395
 Bibliography

Primary Sources

1. Editions, Commentaries, and Translations of Ananda Marga Texts

Anandamifra. The Spiritual Philosophy ofShrii Shrii Anandamurti: Commentary on Ananda Sutram
(First Edition). Denver: Ananda Marga Publications, 1981.

Anandamitra. The Spiritual Philosophy of Shrii Shrii Anandamurti: Commentary on Ananda Sutram
(Second Edition). Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Saingha, 1998.

Anandamurti. Bdbd in Taiwan. Taipei: Ananda Marga Publications, 1980.

Anandamurti. Namdmi KrSria Sundaram. Translated by Vijayananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga

Pracaraka Sarngha, 1981.

Anandamurti. The Thoughts of P. R.. Sarkar. 2^ printing. Edited by Anandamifra. Calcutta: Ananda
Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1985.

Anandamurti. Light Comes. Edited by Anandamifra and Vijayananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga
Pracaraka Sarngha, 1986.

Anandamurti. Ananda Vacandmrtam. Parts 1-3. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1986.

Anandamiirti. Ananda Vacandmrtam. Part 4. Translated byVijayananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga

Pracaraka Sarngha, 1986.

Anandamurti. Ananda Vacandmrtam. Parts 5-8. Translated by Vijayananda and Vishvarupananda.

Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1987.

Anandamurti. Ananda Mdrga Carydcarya. Part 2. 4* ed. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Saiiigha,
1987.

396
Anandamurti. The Liberation of Intellect: Neo-Humanism. 3"* ed. Translated by Anandamitra and
Vijayananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1987.

Anandamurti. Neo-Humanism in a Nutshell. Parts 1-2. Translated by Vijayananda and Jayanta Kumar.
Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1987.

Anandamiirti. Ananda Mdrga Philosophy in a Nutshell. Parts 1-4. 1'' ed. Translated by Vijayananda and
Vishvarupananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1988.

Anandamiirti. Ananda Mdrga Ideology and Way of Life. Parts 1-11. l"ed. Translated by Vijayananda
and Vishvarupananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Saingha, 1988.

Anandamiirti. Bdbd's Grace. Edited and translated by Ananda Mitra. Manila: Ananda Marga
Publications, 1989.

Anandamurti. Ananda Mdrga Social and Spiritual Practices. l"ed. Edited by Tarak. Calcutta: Ananda
Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1990.

Anandamurti. A Guide to Human Conduct. Manila: Ananda Marga Publications, 1991.

Anandamurti. Discourses on Mahdbhdrata. 2"'' ed. Translated by Vijayananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga
Pracaraka Sarngha, 1991.

Anandamurti. Ananda Mdrga Elementary Philosophy. 2""* ed. Translated by Vijayananda. Calcutta:
Ananda Marga Pracaraka Saingha, 1992.

Anandamurti. Ananda Mdrga Carydcarya. Part 3. 4* ed. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha,
1992.

Anandamurti. SubhdSita Sanigratia. Parts 1 and 3. 3'^ ed. Translated by Vijayananda. Calcutta: Ananda
Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1992.

Anandamurti. SubhdSita Sarngraha. Part 2. 2"^ ed. Translated by Vijayananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga
Pracaraka Sarngha, 1992.

397
Anandamurti. Subhdsita Samgraha. Parts 11, 12, 18, 19. 3'''ed. Translated by Vijayananda. Calcutta:
Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 1992.

Anandamurti. Idea and Ideology. 7* ed. Edited by Vijayananda, Acyutananda, and Jayanta Kumar.
Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1993 (l" edition 1959).

Anandamurti. Discourses on Tantra. Vol. 1. Edited by Vijayananda and Acyutananda. Calcutta: Ananda
Marga Publications, 1993.

Anandamurti. Discourses on Tantra. Vol. 2. Edited by Vijayananda and Acyutananda. Calcutta:

Ananda Marga Publications, 1994.

Anandamurti. Subhdsita Sarrigraha. Part 2\. Edited by Vijayananda and Acyutananda. Calcutta: Ananda
Marga Publications, 1994.

Anandamurti. Ananda Vacandmrtam. Part 23. Edited by Vijayananda and Acyutananda. Calcutta:
Ananda Marga Publications, 1994.

Anandamurti. Yoga Psychology. 2°^ ed. Edited by Vijayananda, Pranavananda, Mantreshvarananda, and
Jayanta Kumar. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1994.

Anandamurti. Ananda Mdrga Carydcarya. Parti. 6*ed. Translated by Shambhushivananda and

Acyutananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga PubUcations, 1995.

Anandamurti. Namah Shivdya Shdntdya. 3^^ ed. Translated by Vijayananda, Ananda Rucira, and
Acyutananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1995.

Anandamurti. Ananda Sutram. 2°^ ed. Edited by Vijayananda, Ananda Rucira, Acyutananda, and Jayanta
Kumar. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1996.

Anandamurti. Ananda Vacandmrtam. Part 30. Edited by Vijayananda and Acyutananda . Calcutta:
Ananda Marga Publications, 1996.

Anandamurti. Shabda Cayanikd. Translated by Devashiisa and Vijayananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga
Publications, 1996.

398
Anandamurti. SubhdSita Sarngraha. Part 24. Edited by Vijayananda, Acyutananda, and Ananda Rucfra.
Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1997.

Anandamurti. Ananda Vacandmrtam. Part 3\. Edited by Vijayananda and Acyutananda. Calcutta:
Ananda Marga Publications, 1997.

Anandamurti. Discourses on KrSria arui The Giitd. Translated by Ami Baneijee, Vijayananda, and
Acyutananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga PubUcations, 2000.

Anandamurti. The Electronic Edition of the Works of P. R. Sarkar. Version 6.0. Compiled by Giri Dhara
and Acyutananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 2001.

Sarkar, Prabhat Ranjan. Microvitum in a Nutshell. 3"* ed. Translated and compiled by Vijayananda and
Jayanta Kumar. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1991.

Sarkar, Prabhat Raiijan. Human Society. 2°^ ed. Translated by Vijayananda. Calcutta: Ananda Marga
Publications, 1999.

2. Other Primary Source Material

Avalon, Arthur, trans. The Serpent Power: The Secrets of Tantric and ShakticYoga. New York: Dover
Publications, 1974.

Buddharakkhita, trans. Dhammapada: A Practical Guide to Right Living. Bangalore: Buddha Vacana
Trast, 1986.

Buddhaghosa. The Path of Purification. Vol. 2. Translated by Bhikkhu Nanamoli. Berkeley and
London: Shambhala Publications, 1976.

Feuerstein, Georg. The Yoga-Sutra of Patafijali: A New Translation and Commentary. Rochester,
Vermont: Inner Traditions Intemational, repr. 1989.

Griffith, Ralph T.H., trans. The Hymns of the Rgveda, rev. ed., Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1973; T' publ.,
1889.

399
Hariharananda Aranya, Swami. Yoga Philosophy of Patafijali Albany: State University of New York,
1983.

Hume, Robert Emest. The Thirteen Principal Upanishads. London: Oxford University Press, 1931.

Nanamoli, Bhikkhu, and Bodhi, Bhikkhu, trans. The Middle Length Discourses of the Buddha: A New
Translation of the Majjhima Nikdya. Kandy: Buddhist Publication Society, 1995.

Olivelle, Patrick. Upanisads. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1996.

Prakash, Prem. The Yoga of Spiritual Devotion: A Modem Translation of the Narada Bhakti Sutras.
Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions Intemational, 1998.

Rabjam, Longchen. The Practice of Dzogchen. 2°^ ed. Translated by Tulku Thondup and edited by
Harold Talbott. New York: Snow Lion Publications, 1996.

Radhakrishnan, S. The Bhagavad-Gitd. Delhi: hidus, 1993; l"publ., 1948.

Radhakrishnan, S. The Principal Upanisads. London: George Allen and Unwin, 1974.

Santideva. Entering the Path of Enlightenment (Bodhicarydvatdra). Translated by Marion L. Matics.

London: AUen and Unwin, 1971.

Singh, Jaideva. Siva Sutras: The Yoga of Supreme Identity. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1979.

Singh, Jaideva. Vijfidnabhairava or Divine Consciousness: A Treasury of 112 Types of Yoga. Delhi:
Motilal Banarsidass, 1979.

Singh, Jaideva. The Yoga of Vibration and Divine Pulsation. A Translation of the Spanda Kdrikds with
Ksemaraja's Commentary, the Spanda Nirriaya. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1992.

Singh, Jaideva. Pratyabhijfidhrdayam: The Secret of Self-Recognition. Fourth Revised Edition. Delhi:
Motilal Banarsidass, 1982.

Singh, Jaideva. PardtriSikd-Vivararia: The Secret of Tantric Mysticism. Edited by Bettina Baumer.
Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1988.
400
Sinha, Nandalal, ti-ans. 'The Sainkhya Philosophy." The Sacred Books of the Hiruius. Volume 11. New
York: AMS Press, 1974.

Walshe, Maurice. Thus Have I Heard: The Long Discourses of the Buddha. London: Wisdom
Publications, 1987.

Secondary Sources

Acosta, Devashish Donald. When the Time Comes: Conversations with Acarya Chandranath Kumar. San
German: Inner World Publications, 1998.

Alister, Paul Narada. Bombs, Bliss, and Baba: The Spiritual Autobiography Behind the Hilton Bombing.
Maleny: Better Worid Books, 1997.

Alper, Harvey P- "The Cosmos as Siva's Language Game: 'Mantra' According to Ksemaraja's
SivasutravimarSirii." Mantra. Ffrst Indian Edition. Edited by Harvey P. Alper. Delhi: Sri
Satguru Publications, 1997.

An, Angela. "Ananda Marga Yoga Society." Soc 257: New Religious Movements. University of
Vfrginia, Spring Term 2000: n.pag. http://religiousmovements.lib.virginia.edu/ (26 Jan. 2002).

Ananda Marga Publications. Yoga: The Way of Tantra. 4* ed. Manila: Ananda Marga Publications,
1991.

Ananda Marga Publications. A Glimpse of Ananda Mdrga. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Publications, 1992.

Anandamitra. Beyond the Superconscious Mind. 5* ed. ManUa: Ananda Marga Publications, 1991.

Anandamitra. Yoga for Health: Ananda Mdrga Yoga Exercises for Men arui Women. Manila: Ananda
Marga Publications, 1997.

Bartley, C. J. The Theology of Rdmdnuja: Realism and Religion. London: RoutiedgeCurzon, 2002.

401
BhaktiVira. "P. R. Sarkar's Theory of Microvita." The Microvita Revolution: Towards the New Science
of Matter, Life and Mind. Edited by Microvitum Sub-Committee. Calcutta: Ananda Marga
Pracaraka Sarngha, undated.

Bharati, Agehananda. The Tantric Tradition. London: Rider and Company, 1965.

Bhattacharyya, Kalidas. "Vedanta as Philosophy of Spiritual Life." Hindu Spirituality: Vedas through
Vedanta. Edited by K. Sivaraman. New York: Crossroad Publishing, 1989.

Bhattacharyya, Narendra Nath. History of the Tantric Religion: A Historical.Ritualistic and Philosophical
Study. New Delhi: Manohar Publications, 1982.

Bromley, David G. "New Religious Movements." Encyclopaedia of Religion and Society. Edited by
WUliamH. Swatos. Califomia: AltaMfra Press, 1998.

Bucknell, Rod. "Conditioned Arising Evolves: Variation and Change in Textual Accounts of the Paticca-
samuppdda Doctrine." Journal of the Intemational Association of Buddhist Studies 2212 (1999):
311-342.

Bumett, Fred W. "Postmodem Biblical Exegesis: The Eve of Historical Criticism." Semeia, 51 (1990):
51-80.

Bussey, Marcus. 'Tantra as Episteme: A Pedagogy for the Future." Futures 30.7 (1998): 705-716.

Chalier-Visuvalingam, Elizabeth. "Union and Unity in Hindu Tantrism." Between Jerusalem and
Benares: Comparative Studies in Judaism and Hinduism. Edited by Hananya Goodman. Albany:
State University of New York Press, 1994.

Chappie, Christopher. 'The Unseen Seer and the Field: Consciousness in Sarnkhya and Yoga." The
Problem of Pure Consciousness. Edited by Robert K. Forman. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1990.

Chappie, Christopher. "Living Liberation in Sainkhya and Yoga." Living Liberation in Hindu Thought.
Edited by Andrew O. Fort and Patricia Y. Mumme. Albany: State University of New York Press,
1996.

402
Chaudhuri, Haridas. "Yoga Psychology." Transpersonal Psychologies. Edited by Charles T. Tart. USA:
Harper and Row Publishers, 1975.

Chidganananda. Ananda Mdrga Meditation: Raja Dhiraja Yoga (The Most Sublime and Kingly Tantra
Yoga). Unpublished manuscript, undated.

Clines, David J. A. "Holistic Interpretation." A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation. Edited by R. J.

Coggins and J. L. Houlden. London: SCM Press, 1990.

Connolly, Peter. "Phenomenological Exegesis and Patafijali's Yoga Sutras." Aspects of Religion: Essays
in Honour of Ninian Smart. Toronto Studies in Religion 8. Edited by Peter Masefield and Donald
Wiebe. New York: Peter Lang Publications, 1994.

Corby, James C ; Roth, T.Walton; Zarcone, Vincent P. Jr; and Kopell, Bert S. "Psychophysiological
Conelates of the Practice of Tantric Yoga Meditation." Archives of General Psychiatry 35
(1978): 571-577.

Courtis, Mary M. Self Transformation and Gendered Experience Among Rajneesh Sannyasins arui
Ananda Margis. University of Oregon: Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, 1991.

Crangle, Edward Fitzpatrick. The Origin and Development of Early Indian Contemplative Practices.
Studies in Oriental Religion. Volume 29. Edited by Walther Heissig and Hans-Joachim Klimkeit.
Wiesbaden: Hanassowitz Verlag, 1994.

Das Gupta, Shashibhusan. Obscure Religious Cults. Calcutta: Ffrma K. L. Mukhopadhyay, 1969.

Davey, Nicholas. "Habermas's Contribution to Hermeneutic Theory." Journal of the British Society for
Phenomenology 16.2 May (1985): 109-131.

Davies, Margaret. "Literary Criticism." A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation. Edited by R. J. Coggins

and J. L. Houlden. London: SCM Press, 1990.

Davies, Margaret. "Reader-Response Criticism." A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation. Edited by R. J.

Coggins and J. L. Houlden. London: SCM Press, 1990.

Dayal, Har. The Bodhisattva Doctrine in Sanskrit Literature. London: Kegan Paul, 1932.

403
De, Sushil Kumar. Early History of the Vaisnava Faith and Movement in Bengal. Calcutta: Firma K.L.
Mukhopadhyay PubUshers, 1961.

Dharmavedananda. Who's Afraid of the Tantric Guru? The Mystical Adventures ofAcharya
Dharmavedananda Avadhuta. Taipei: Ananda Marga Publications, 1995.

Downing, F, Gerald. "Historical-Critical Method." A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation. Edited by R.

J. Coggins and J. L. Houlden. London: SCM Press, 1990.

Dyczkowski, Mark S. G. The Doctrine of Vibration: An Analysis of the Doctrines and Practices of
Kashmir Shaivism. Albany: State University of New York, 1987.

Egenes, Thomas Arthur. The Place of the Veda in the Thought of Maharishi Mahesh Yogi: A Historical
and Textual Analysis (Transcendental Meditation). University of Virginia: Unpublished Ph.D.
dissertation, 1985.

Eliade, Mircea. Yoga: Immortality and Freedom. Translated by Willard R. Trask. New York: Pantheon
Books, 1958.

Eliade, Mircea. The Quest: History and Meaning in Religion. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
1969.

Elson, Barry D.; Hauri, Peter; and Cunis, David. "Physiological Changes in Yoga Medhation."
Psychophysiology 14.1 (1977): 52-57.

Feuerstein, Georg. The Essence of Yoga. London: Rider, 1976.

Feuerstein, Georg. The Philosophy of Classical Yoga. Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions
Intemational, 1996.

Feuerstein, Georg. Tantra: The Path of Ecstasy. Massachusetts: Shambhala Publications, 1998.

Feuerstein, Georg. The Yoga Tradition: Its History, Literature, Philosophy, and Practice. Prescott:
Hohm Press, 1998.

404
Fish, Stanley. Is There a Text in This Class? The Authority of Interpretive Communities. Cambridge:
Harvard University Press, 1980.

Fitzgerald, Jenny. "Reclaiming the Whole: Self, Spfrit, and Society." Disability and Rehabilitation 19.10
(1997): 407-413.

Flood, Gavin D. "Techniques of Body and Desire in Kashmfr Saivism." Religion 22 (1992): 47-62.

Flood, Gavin D. Body and Cosmology in Kashmir Saivism . San Francisco: Mellen Research University
Press, 1993.

Fost, Frederic F. "Playful Ulusion: The Making of Worlds in Advaita Vedanta." Philosophy East and
Wear 48.3 (July 1998): 387-405.

Frawley, David. Gods, Sages and Kings: Vedic Secrets of Ancient Civilization. Salt Lake City: Passage
Press, 1991.

Gadamer, Hans-Georg. Philosophical Hermeneutics. Translated and edited by David E. Linge.

Berkeley: University of Califomia Press, 1976.

Gadamer, Hans-Georg. Tmth and Method. London: Sheed and Ward, 1979.

Gaum, Albert Eion. Moksha and the Transcendental Meditation of Maharishi Mahesh Yogi: A Science of
Religion Research. University of South Africa: Unpublished D.Th. dissertation, 1988.

Gonda, Jan. "Medieval Religious Literature in Sanskrit." A History of Indian Literature. Vol. 2fasc. 1.
Edited by Jan Gonda. Wiesbaden: Otto Hanassowitz, 1977.

Goudriaan, Teun. "Introduction, History and Philosophy." Hindu Tantrism. Edited by Sanjukta Gupta;
Dirk Jan Hoens; and Teun Goudriaan. Leiden/Koln: E. J. BriU, 1979.

Goudriaan, Teun, and Gupta, Sanjukta. "Hindu Tantric and Sakta Literature." A History of Indian
Literature. Vol.2 fasc. 2. Edited by Jan Gonda. Wiesbaden: Otto Hanassowitz, 1981.

Grimes, John. A Concise Dictionary oflruiian Philosophy: Sanskrit Terms Defined in English. Albany:
State University of New York, 1996.

405
Gupta, Sanjukta. "Modes of Worship and Meditation." Hindu Tantrism. Edited by Sanjukta Gupta; Dirk
Jan Hoens; and Teun Goudriaan. Leiden/Koln: E. J. BriU, 1979.

Gupta, Sanjukta. "Paiicaratra Attitude to Mantra." Mantra. Ffrst Indian Edition. Edited by Harvey P.
Alper. Delhi: Sri Satgum Publications, 1997.

Gyatso, Tenzin. The World of Tibetan Buddhism: An Overview of its Philosophy and Practice.
Translated and edited by Geshe Thubten Jinpa. Massachusetts Wisdom Publications, 1995.

Hamill, Timothy Jay. The Social Philosophy of Sri Sri Anandamurti Califomia Institute of Integral
Studies: Unpublished M.A. dissertation, 1974.

Hamrahi. Namdmi Kalydna Sundaram. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sarngha, 2(X)1.

Harvey, Peter. The Selfless Mind: Personality, Consciousness and Nirvdria in Early Buddhism.
Richmond, Suney: Curzon Press, 1995.

Hatley, Shaman, and InayatuUah, SohaU. "Karma Samnyasa: Sarkar's Reconceptualisation of Indian
Asceticism." Journal of Asian and African Studies 34.1 February 1999: n.pag.
http://www.gumkul.edu/asceticism.htm (11 July 2002).

Hatley, Shaman. The Dialectics of Bliss: Interpretations of the Ananda Sutram. Unpublished manuscript,
2000.

Hoens, Dfrk Jan. "Transmission and Fundamental Constituents of the Practice." Hindu Tantrism. Edited
by Sanjukta Gupta; Dirk Jan Hoens; and Teun Goudriaan. Leiden/Koln: E.J.Brill, 1979.

Hummel, Reinhart. "Weltverbesserung und Idealgesellschaft: Zum Verstandnis indischer

Meditationsbewegungen im Westen." Zeitschrift fur Religions- und Geistesgeschichte 30.2
(1978): 129-152.

Husserl, Edmund. "Phenomenology." The Continental Philosophy Reader. Edited by Richard Kearney
and Mara Rainwater. London: Routiedge, 1996.

Inayatullah, Sohail. "Sarkar's Spfritual Dialectics: An Unconventional View of the Future." Futures
20.2 (1988): 54-65.

406
Inayatullah, Sohail. "Deconstmcting and Reconstmcting the Future: Predictive, Cultural and Critical
Epistemologies." Futures 22.2(1990): 115-141.

Inayatullah, Sohail. Understanding Prabhat Ranjan Sarkar: Epistemic Boundaries, Critical

Commentaries and Comparative Analyses. University of Hawaii: Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation,
1990.

hiayatuUah, Sohail. "Future Generations Thinking." Futures 29.8 (1997): 701-706.

Inayatullah, Sohail. "Macrohistorians Compared: Toward a Theory of Macrohistory." Macrohistory and

Macrohistorians: Perspectives on Individual, Social, and Civilizational Change. Edited by Johan
Galtung and Sohail Inayatullah. New York: Praeger I*ublications, 1997.

Inayatullah, Sohail. "Prabhat Ranjan Sarkar: Agency, Stmcture, and Transcendence." Macrohistory and
Macrohistorians: Perspectives on Individual, Social, and Civilizational Change. Edited by Johan
Galtung and Sohail Inayatullah. Westport: Praeger Publishers, 1997.

Inayatullah, SohaU. "Civilization, Leadership and Inclusive Democracy." Journal of Future Studies 2.2
(1998): 1-28.

Inayatullah, Sohail. Situating Sarkar: Tantra, Macrohistory and Altemative Futures. Maleny: Gurakula
Press, 1999.

Inayatullah, Sohail, and Fitzgerald, Jenny. Transcending Boundaries: Prabhat Rainjan Sarkar's Theories
of Individual and Social Transformation. Maleny: Gurakula Press, 1999.

Jacobsen, Knut A. 'The Female Pole of the Godhead in Tantrism and the Prakrti of Sarnkhya." Numen
43 (1996): 56-81.

Jeanround, Werner G. "Hermeneutics." A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation. Edited by R. J. Coggins

and J. L. Houlden. London: SCM Press, 1990.

Kesarcodi-Watson, Ian. "Sankara, Ramanuja and Bhakti." Bhakti Studies. Edited by G. M. Bailey and I.
Kesarcodi-Watson. New Delhi: Sterling Publications, 1992.

407
Khema, Ayya. Who Is My Self? A Guide to Buddhist Meditation. Massachusetts: Wisdom Publications,
1997.

King, Ursula. "Historical and Phenomenological Approaches to the Study of Religion." Contemporary
Approaches to the Study of Religion Vol. 1: Humanities. Edited by Frank Whaling. Berlin:
Mouton Publishers, 1983.

King, Winston L. Theravada Meditation: The Buddhist Transformation of Yoga. Delhi: Motilal
Banarsidass, 1992.

Klostermaier, Klaus K. A Survey of Hinduism. Second Edition. Albany: State University of New York
Press, 1994.

Klostermaier, Klaus K. "Gaudiya Vaisnavism: The Education of Human Emotions." Journal of Asian
and African Studies 34.1 February 1999: n.pag.
http://web7.infotrac.galegroup.eom/itw/i... 1_EIM_0_A54171890&dyn=5 !ar_fmt?sw_aep=uq
(24 May 2000).

Krpananda. With My Master. Manila: Proutist Universal, 1990.

Kuner, Wolfgang. "New Religious Movements and Mental Health." Of Gods and Men: New Religious
Movements in the West. Proceedings of the 1981 Annual Conference of the British Sociological
Association Sociology of Religion Study Group. Edited by Eileen Barker. USA: Mercer
University Press, 1983.

Larson, Gerald J. Classical Sdrrikhya. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1979.

Lawrence, David. "Siva's Self-Recognition and the Problem of Interpretation." Philosophy East and
West 48.2 (April 1998): 197-231.

Lele, Jayant. 'The Bhakti Movement in India: A Critical Introduction." Journal of Asian and African
Studies 15.\-2(\9%Q): 1-15.

Loy, David. "Enlightenment in Buddhism and Advaita Vedanta: Are Nirvana and Moksha the Same?"
International Philosophical Quarterly, 22.1 (1982): 65-74.

408
Malkovsky, Bradley. 'The Personhood of Sanikara's Para Brahman." The Joumal of Religion 77.4
(1997): 541-562.

Marcaurelle, Roger. 'The Basic Types of Renunciation in Hinduism: With Special Reference to
Sankara's G&ta-Bhasya." Hermeneutical Paths to the Sacred Worlds oflrulia. Essays in Honour
of Robert W. Stevenson. Edited by Katherine K. Young. Atianta, Georgia: Scholars Press, 1994.

Masefield, Peter. 'The Nibbana-Parinibbana Controversy." Religion 9/2 (1919): 215-230.

McDonald, J. I. H. "Hermeneutical Cfrcle." A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation. Edited by R. J.

Coggins and J. L. Houlden. London: SCM Press, 1990.

Miller, J. The Vedas: Harmony, Meditation and Fulfilment. London: Rider, 1974.

Muddiman, John. "Form Criticism." A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation. Edited by R. J. Coggins

and J. L. Houlden. London: SCM Press, 1990.

Muller-Ortega, Paul E. 'Tantric Meditation: Vocalic Beginnings." Ritual and Speculation in Early
Tantrism: Studies in Honour of Andre Padoux. Edited by Teun Goudriaan. Delhi: Sri Satgura
Publications, 1993.

Muller-Ortega, Paul E. "Aspects of Jivanmukti in the Tantric Saivism of Kashmir." Living Liberation in
Hindu Thought. Edited by Andrew O. Fort and Patricia Y. Mumme. Albany: State University of
New York Press, 1996.

Muller-Ortega, Paul E. The Triadic Heart of Siva: Kaula Tantricism of Abhinavagupta in the Non-Dual
Shaivism of Kashmir. First Indian Edition. Delhi: Sri Satgura Publications, 1997.

Murphy, Paul E. Triadic Mysticism: The Mystical Theology of the Saivism of Kashmir. Delhi: Motilal
Banarsidass, 1986.

Myers, Michael W. "Sarikaracarya and Ananda." Philosophy East and West 48.4 (1998): 553-567.

Narada Muni. Bhagavan Anandamurti: Ananda Katha. Katoomba: AMPS Suva Sectorial Publications,
1990.

409
Nelson, Lance E. "Living Liberation in Sarikara and Classical Advaita: Sharing the Holy Waiting of
God." Living Liberation in Hindu Thought. Edited by Andrew O. Fort and Patricia Y. Mumme.
Albany: State University of New York Press, 1996.

Manavendrananda. Ananda Marga: A Brief Summary of History, Philosophy and Activities. Sydney:
Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sanpigha, 1992.

O'ConneU, Joseph T. "BengaU Religions." The Encyclopedia of Religion. Vol.1. Edited by Mircea
Eliade. New York: MacmiUan Publishing, 1987.

O'Haire, Trala D., and Marcia, James E. "Some Personality Characteristics Associated with Ananda
Marga Meditators: A Pilot Study." Perceptual and Motor Skills, 51 (1980): 447-452.

On, Leslie C. 'The Concept of Time in Sarikara's Brahmasutra-Bhasya." Hermeneutical Paths to the
Sacred Worlds of India. Essays in Honour of Robert W. Stevenson. Edited by Katherine K.
Young. Atlanta, Georgia: Scholars Press, 1994.

Padoux, Andr6. "Conclusion: Mantras - What Are They? " Mantra. Ffrst Indian Edition. Edited by
Harvey P. Alper. Delhi: Sri Satgura Publications, 1997.

Phillips, Gary A. "Exegesis as Critical Praxis: Reclaiming History and Text From a Postmodem
Perspective." Semeia, 51 (1990): 9-49.

Phillips, Stephen Hall. Aurobindo's Philosophy of Brahman. Harvard University: Unpublished Ph.D.
dissertation, 1982.

Prakash, Buddha. 'The Hindu Philosophy of History." Joumal of the History of Ideas, 16 (1958): 494-
505.

Prasidananda. Baba's Love for South America: Mystical Experiences with a Spiritual Master. Volume 1.
Sao Paulo: Ananda Marga Publications, 1996.

Raghavachar, S.S. 'The Spiritual Vision of Ramanuja." Hindu Spirituality: Vedas through Vedanta.
Edited by K. Sivaraman. New York: Crossroad Publishing, 1989.

Raju, P.T. The Philosophical Traditions of India. London: Allen and Unwin, 1971.

410
Ranasinghe, C. P. The Buddha's Explanation of the Universe. Ceylon: Lanka Bauddha Mandalaya Fund,
1957.

Rastogi, Navjivan. 'The Yogic Disciplines in the Monistic Saiva Tantric Traditions of Kashmfr:
Threefold, Fourfold, and Six-Limbed." Ritual arui Speculation in Early Tantrism: Stttdies in
Honour of Andre Padoux. Edited by Teun Goudriaan. Delhi: Sri Satgura Publications, 1993.

Reat, N. Ross. Origins of Indian Psychology. Califomia: Asian Humanities Press, 1990.

Ringma, Charles R. Gadamer's Dialogical Hermeneutic: The Hermeneutics ofBultmann, of the New
Testament Sociologists and of the Social Theologians in Dialogue with Gadamer's Hermeneutic.
The University of Queensland: Ph.D. dissertation, 1991.

Ringma, Charles R. Gadamer's Dialogical Hermeneutic: The Hermeneutics ofBultmann, of the New
Testament Sociologists and of the Social Theologians in Dialogue with Gadamer's Hermeneutic.
Heidelberg: Universitatsverlag C. Winter, 1999.

Sangharakshita. A Survey of Buddhism: Its Doctrines and Methods Through the Ages. 7* ed. Glasgow:
Windhorse Publications, 1993.

Shantatmananda. Moving With Cosmic Will: A Story of Spiritual Stmggle and Experiences. Davao:
Ananda Marga, 1996.

Sheridan, Daniel P. "Direct Knowledge of God and Living Liberation in the Religious Thought of
Madhva." Living Liberation in Hindu Thought. Edited by Andrew O. Fort and Patricia Y.
Mumme. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1996.

Sil, Narasingha P. "Anatomy of the Ananda Marga: Hindu Anabaptists." Asian Culture Quarterly 16.2
(1988): 1-18.

Silbum, Lilian. Kuridalini: Energy of the Depths. Translated by Jacques Gontier. Albany: State
University of New York Press, 1988.

Singh, Jitendra. Biopsychology: A New Science of Body, Mind and Soul. Puralia: Gurakula Publications,
1998.

411
Singh, Jitendra and Bhaskarananda. Biopsychology of Spiritual Practices: Science behind the Sixteen
Points of Ananda Marga Practices. Puralia: Gurukula Publications, 2000.

Singh, N. K. "Anand Marg". Seminar Vol. 151 (March 1972): 21-25.

Skoog, Kim. "Is the Jivanmukti State Possible? Ramanuja's Perspective." Living Liberation in Hindu
Thought. Edited by Andrew O. Fort and Patricia Y. Mumme. Albany: State University of New
York Press, 1996.

Smart, Ninian. Reasons and Faiths. London: Routiedge and Kegan-Paul, 1958.

Smart, Ninian. "Scientific Phenomenology and Wilfred Cantwell Smith's Misgivings." The World's
Religious Traditions. Edited by Frank Whaling. USA: T. and T. Clark, 1984.

Smart, Ninian. The World's Religions: Old Traditions and Modem Transformations. London:
Cambridge University Press, 1989.

Smart, Ninian. Dimensions of the Sacred: An Anatomy of the World's Beliefs. London: Harper Collins
Publishers, 1996.

Sugatananda. Sambhavami. Ydrefors: Prashiksana Matha, 1992.

Tannehill, Robert C. "Nanative Criticism." A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation. Edited by R. J.

Coggins and J. L. Houlden. London: SCM Press, 1990.

Tiwari, P. N. "Kabfr's Devotionalism." Bhakti Studies. Edited by G. M. Bailey and I. Kesarcodi-Watson.

New Delhi: Steriing Publications, 1992.

Tuckett, C. M. "Redaction Criticism." A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation. Edited by R. J. Coggins

and J. L. Houlden. London: SCM Press, 1990.

Tuckett, C. M. "Source Criticism." A Dictionary of Biblical Interpretation. Edited by R. J. Coggins and

J. L. Houlden. London: SCM Press, 1990.

Valiaveetil, Chacko, S. J. "Living Liberation in Saiva Siddhanta." Living Liberation in Hindu Thought.
Edited by Andrew O. Fort and Patricia Y. Mumme. Albany: State University of New York 1996.

412
Vedaprajnananda. The Wisdom of Yoga: An Introduction to Ananda Mdrga Philosophy. 3' ed. Manila:
Ananda Marga Publications, 1990.

Vijayananda. Anandamurtijii as I Knew Him. Calcutta: Ananda Marga Pracaraka Sanigha, 1994.

Vijayananda. The Life and Teachings of Shrii Shrii Anandamurti. Volume 1. Calcutta: Ananda Marga
Pracaraka Sarngha, 1994.

Ward, R., and Humphreys, R. Religious Bodies in Australia: A Comprehensive Guide. 3' ed. Victoria:
New Melboume Press, 1995.

Whaling, Frank. "Comparative Approaches." Contemporary Approaches to the Study of Religion Vol. 1:
Humanities. Edited by Frank Whaling. Berlin: Mouton Publishers, 1983.

Whicher, Ian. "Yoga and Freedom: A Reconsideration of Patafijali's Classical Yoga." Philosophy East
and West, 48.2 (1998): 272-322.

Whicher, Ian. The Integrity of the Yoga DarSana: A Reconsideration of Classical Yoga. Albany: State
University of New York, 1998.

Williams, Ramana. "Beyond the Dominant Paradigm: Embracing the Indigenous and the
Transcendental." Futures 30.2/3 (1998): 223-233.

Woods, Julian. "Karma in the Bhagavad-Gita According to Sarikara and Ramanuja." Hermeneutical
Paths to the Sacred Worlds of India. Essays in Honour of Robert W. Stevenson. Edited by
Katherine K. Young. Atlanta, Georgia: Scholars Press, 1994.

413